Relion 670 series

Bay control REC670 2.0 IEC

Technical Manual
 Document ID: 1MRK 511 311-UEN
Issued: May 2014
Revision: -
Product version: 2.0

Copyright 2014 ABB. All rights reserved

Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written
permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third
party, nor used for any unauthorized purpose.

The software and hardware described in this document is furnished under a license
and may be used or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.

This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the
OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)

This product includes cryptographic software written/developed by: Eric Young

(eay@cryptsoft.com) and Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or
product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.

Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept
or product description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed
properties. All persons responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this
manual must satisfy themselves that each intended application is suitable and
acceptable, including that any applicable safety or other operational requirements
are complied with. In particular, any risks in applications where a system failure and/
or product failure would create a risk for harm to property or persons (including but
not limited to personal injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the
person or entity applying the equipment, and those so responsible are hereby
requested to ensure that all measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks.

This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be
completely ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested
to notify the manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in
no event shall ABB be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from
the use of this manual or the application of the equipment.
Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European
Communities on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning
electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive
2006/95/EC). This conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in
accordance with the product standard EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive, and
with the product standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage
directive. The product is designed in accordance with the international standards of
the IEC 60255 series.
 Table of contents

Table of contents

Section 1 Introduction.....................................................................35
This manual......................................................................................35
Intended audience............................................................................35
Product documentation.....................................................................36
Product documentation set..........................................................36
Document revision history...........................................................37
Related documents......................................................................38
Document symbols and conventions................................................38
Symbols.......................................................................................38
Document conventions................................................................39
IEC61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping.......................................40

Section 2 Available functions.........................................................47

Main protection functions..................................................................47
Back-up protection functions............................................................47
Control and monitoring functions......................................................49
Communication.................................................................................53
Basic IED functions..........................................................................56

Section 3 Analog inputs..................................................................59

Introduction.......................................................................................59
Function block..................................................................................59
Signals..............................................................................................60
Settings.............................................................................................62
Monitored data..................................................................................69
Operation principle...........................................................................70

Section 4 Binary input and output modules....................................73

Binary input.......................................................................................73
Binary input debounce filter.........................................................73
Oscillation filter............................................................................73
Settings........................................................................................73
Setting parameters for binary input modules..........................73
Setting parameters for binary input/output module................74

Section 5 Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI ..........................75

Local HMI screen behaviour.............................................................75
Identification................................................................................75
Settings........................................................................................75
Local HMI signals.............................................................................75

1
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Identification................................................................................75
Function block.............................................................................75
Signals.........................................................................................76
Basic part for LED indication module...............................................76
Identification................................................................................76
Function block.............................................................................76
Signals.........................................................................................77
Settings........................................................................................78
Monitored data.............................................................................78
Identification................................................................................78
Function block.............................................................................79
Signals.........................................................................................79
Settings........................................................................................79
Operation principle...........................................................................80
Local HMI....................................................................................80
Display....................................................................................80
LEDs.......................................................................................83
Keypad...................................................................................84
LED..............................................................................................86
Functionality ..........................................................................86
Status LEDs...........................................................................86
Indication LEDs......................................................................86
Function keys..............................................................................94
Functionality ..........................................................................94
Operation principle.................................................................94

Section 6 Differential protection.....................................................97

1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF .......................97
Identification................................................................................97
Functionality................................................................................97
Function block.............................................................................97
Signals.........................................................................................98
Settings........................................................................................98
Monitored data.............................................................................98
Operation principle......................................................................98
Logic diagram.......................................................................100
Technical data...........................................................................101

Section 7 Current protection.........................................................103

Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output
PHPIOC .........................................................................................103
Identification..............................................................................103
Functionality..............................................................................103
Function block...........................................................................103

2
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Signals.......................................................................................103
Settings......................................................................................104
Monitored data...........................................................................104
Operation principle....................................................................104
Technical data...........................................................................105
Four step phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output
OC4PTOC .....................................................................................105
Identification..............................................................................106
Functionality..............................................................................106
Function block...........................................................................107
Signals.......................................................................................107
Settings......................................................................................109
Monitored data...........................................................................114
Operation principle....................................................................115
Second harmonic blocking element...........................................119
Technical data...........................................................................120
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC ................121
Identification..............................................................................121
Functionality..............................................................................121
Function block...........................................................................121
Signals.......................................................................................121
Settings......................................................................................122
Monitored data...........................................................................122
Operation principle....................................................................122
Technical data...........................................................................123
Four step residual overcurrent protection, (Zero sequence or
negative sequence directionality) EF4PTOC .................................123
Identification..............................................................................123
Functionality..............................................................................124
Function block...........................................................................124
Signals.......................................................................................124
Settings......................................................................................126
Monitored data...........................................................................131
Operation principle....................................................................132
Operating quantity within the function..................................132
Internal polarizing.................................................................133
External polarizing for earth-fault function............................134
Directional detection for earth fault function.........................134
Base quantities within the protection....................................135
Internal earth-fault protection structure................................135
Four residual overcurrent steps............................................135
Directional supervision element with integrated
directional comparison function............................................136
Second harmonic blocking element.....................................139

3
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Switch on to fault feature......................................................140

Technical data...........................................................................142
Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent
protection NS4PTOC .....................................................................143
Identification..............................................................................143
Functionality..............................................................................143
Function block...........................................................................144
Signals.......................................................................................144
Settings......................................................................................145
Monitored data...........................................................................150
Operation principle....................................................................150
Operating quantity within the function..................................150
Internal polarizing facility of the function..............................151
External polarizing for negative sequence function..............152
Internal negative sequence protection structure..................152
Four negative sequence overcurrent stages........................152
Directional supervision element with integrated
directional comparison function............................................153
Technical data...........................................................................156
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection
SDEPSDE .....................................................................................156
Identification..............................................................................157
Functionality..............................................................................157
Function block...........................................................................159
Signals.......................................................................................159
Settings......................................................................................160
Monitored data...........................................................................162
Operation principle....................................................................162
Function inputs.....................................................................162
Technical data...........................................................................168
Thermal overload protection, one time constant, Celsius/
Fahrenheit LCPTTR/LFPTTR.........................................................169
Identification..............................................................................170
Functionality..............................................................................170
Function block...........................................................................171
Signals.......................................................................................171
Settings......................................................................................172
Monitored data...........................................................................173
Operation principle....................................................................174
Technical data...........................................................................178
Thermal overload protection, two time constants TRPTTR ...........178
Identification..............................................................................178
Functionality..............................................................................178
Function block...........................................................................179

4
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Signals.......................................................................................179
Settings......................................................................................180
Monitored data...........................................................................181
Operation principle....................................................................181
Technical data...........................................................................185
Breaker failure protection 3-phase activation and output
CCRBRF ........................................................................................185
Identification..............................................................................185
Functionality..............................................................................185
Function block...........................................................................186
Signals.......................................................................................186
Settings......................................................................................187
Monitored data...........................................................................188
Operation principle....................................................................188
Technical data...........................................................................191
Stub protection STBPTOC ............................................................191
Identification..............................................................................191
Functionality..............................................................................192
Function block...........................................................................192
Signals.......................................................................................192
Settings......................................................................................192
Monitored data...........................................................................193
Operation principle....................................................................193
Technical data...........................................................................194
Pole discordance protection CCPDSC...........................................194
Identification..............................................................................195
Functionality..............................................................................195
Function block...........................................................................195
Signals.......................................................................................196
Settings......................................................................................196
Monitored data...........................................................................197
Operation principle....................................................................197
Pole discordance signaling from circuit breaker...................200
Unsymmetrical current detection..........................................200
Technical data...........................................................................200
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP...............................200
Identification..............................................................................201
Functionality..............................................................................201
Function block...........................................................................202
Signals.......................................................................................202
Settings......................................................................................203
Monitored data...........................................................................204
Operation principle....................................................................204

5
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Low pass filtering..................................................................206

Calibration of analog inputs..................................................207
Technical data...........................................................................208
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP ................................209
Identification..............................................................................209
Functionality..............................................................................209
Function block...........................................................................210
Signals.......................................................................................210
Settings......................................................................................211
Monitored data...........................................................................213
Operation principle....................................................................213
Low pass filtering..................................................................215
Calibration of analog inputs..................................................215
Technical data...........................................................................217
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC .............................................217
Identification..............................................................................217
Functionality..............................................................................217
Function block...........................................................................218
Signals.......................................................................................218
Settings......................................................................................218
Monitored data...........................................................................219
Operation principle....................................................................219
Technical data...........................................................................220
Capacitor bank protection CBPGAPC............................................220
Identification..............................................................................221
Functionality..............................................................................221
Function block...........................................................................221
Signals.......................................................................................221
Settings......................................................................................223
Monitored data...........................................................................224
Operation principle....................................................................224
Measured quantities.............................................................224
Reconnection inhibit feature.................................................227
Overcurrent feature..............................................................228
Undercurrent feature............................................................229
Capacitor harmonic overload feature...................................229
Capacitor reactive power overload feature...........................231
Technical data...........................................................................232
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC..............233
Identification..............................................................................233
Functionality..............................................................................233
Function block...........................................................................234
Signals.......................................................................................234

6
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Settings......................................................................................235
Monitored data...........................................................................236
Operation principle....................................................................236
Measured quantities.............................................................236
Base quantities.....................................................................236
Overcurrent protection..........................................................236
Logic diagram.......................................................................238
Undervoltage protection.......................................................238
Technical data...........................................................................239

Section 8 Voltage protection........................................................241

Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV ................................241
Identification..............................................................................241
Functionality..............................................................................241
Function block...........................................................................242
Signals.......................................................................................242
Settings......................................................................................243
Monitored data...........................................................................245
Operation principle....................................................................245
Measurement principle.........................................................246
Time delay............................................................................246
Blocking................................................................................252
Design..................................................................................253
Technical data...........................................................................255
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV ..................................255
Identification..............................................................................255
Functionality..............................................................................256
Function block...........................................................................256
Signals.......................................................................................256
Settings......................................................................................257
Monitored data...........................................................................259
Operation principle....................................................................259
Measurement principle.........................................................260
Time delay............................................................................260
Blocking................................................................................266
Design..................................................................................266
Technical data...........................................................................268
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV .................269
Identification..............................................................................269
Functionality..............................................................................269
Function block...........................................................................269
Signals.......................................................................................269
Settings......................................................................................270
Monitored data...........................................................................272

7
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Operation principle....................................................................272
Measurement principle.........................................................272
Time delay............................................................................272
Blocking................................................................................278
Design..................................................................................278
Technical data...........................................................................279
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV ......................................280
Identification..............................................................................280
Functionality..............................................................................280
Function block...........................................................................281
Signals.......................................................................................281
Settings......................................................................................281
Monitored data...........................................................................282
Operation principle....................................................................282
Technical data...........................................................................284
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV ..................................................285
Identification..............................................................................285
Functionality..............................................................................285
Function block...........................................................................285
Signals.......................................................................................285
Settings......................................................................................286
Operation principle....................................................................286
Technical data...........................................................................288

Section 9 Frequency protection....................................................289

Underfrequency protection SAPTUF .............................................289
Identification..............................................................................289
Functionality..............................................................................289
Function block...........................................................................289
Signals.......................................................................................290
Settings......................................................................................290
Monitored data...........................................................................291
Operation principle....................................................................291
Measurement principle.........................................................291
Time delay............................................................................291
Voltage dependent time delay..............................................292
Blocking................................................................................293
Design..................................................................................293
Technical data...........................................................................294
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF ...............................................295
Identification..............................................................................295
Functionality..............................................................................295
Function block...........................................................................296
Signals.......................................................................................296

8
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Settings......................................................................................296
Monitored data...........................................................................297
Operation principle....................................................................297
Measurement principle.........................................................297
Time delay............................................................................297
Blocking................................................................................298
Design..................................................................................298
Technical data...........................................................................299
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC .............................299
Identification..............................................................................299
Functionality..............................................................................299
Function block...........................................................................300
Signals.......................................................................................300
Settings......................................................................................300
Monitored data...........................................................................301
Operation principle....................................................................301
Measurement principle.........................................................301
Time delay............................................................................301
Blocking................................................................................302
Design..................................................................................302
Technical data...........................................................................303
Frequency time accumulation protection function FTAQFVR........304
Identification..............................................................................304
Functionality .............................................................................304
Function block ..........................................................................304
Signals.......................................................................................305
Settings......................................................................................305
Monitored data...........................................................................306
Operation principle....................................................................306

Section 10 Multipurpose protection................................................311

General current and voltage protection CVGAPC..........................311
Identification..............................................................................311
Functionality..............................................................................311
Function block...........................................................................312
Signals.......................................................................................312
Settings......................................................................................314
Monitored data...........................................................................321
Operation principle....................................................................321
Measured quantities within CVGAPC...................................321
Base quantities for CVGAPC function..................................324
Built-in overcurrent protection steps.....................................324
Built-in undercurrent protection steps...................................329
Built-in overvoltage protection steps....................................330

9
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Built-in undervoltage protection steps..................................330

Logic diagram.......................................................................330
Technical data...........................................................................335

Section 11 System protection and control......................................339

Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC.......................................................339
Identification..............................................................................339
Functionality..............................................................................339
Function block...........................................................................339
Signals.......................................................................................339
Settings......................................................................................340
Operation principle....................................................................340
Filter calculation example..........................................................344

Section 12 Secondary system supervision.....................................347

Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC............................................347
Identification..............................................................................347
Functionality..............................................................................347
Function block...........................................................................347
Signals.......................................................................................348
Settings......................................................................................348
Operation principle....................................................................348
Technical data...........................................................................350
Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC................................................350
Identification..............................................................................350
Functionality..............................................................................351
Function block...........................................................................351
Signals.......................................................................................352
Settings......................................................................................353
Monitored data...........................................................................354
Operation principle....................................................................354
Zero and negative sequence detection................................354
Delta current and delta voltage detection.............................356
Dead line detection...............................................................359
Main logic.............................................................................360
Technical data...........................................................................363
Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC..................................................363
Identification..............................................................................363
Functionality..............................................................................363
Function block...........................................................................364
Signals.......................................................................................364
Settings......................................................................................365
Monitored data...........................................................................365
Operation principle....................................................................366

10
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Technical data...........................................................................367

Section 13 Control..........................................................................369
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing
SESRSYN......................................................................................369
Identification..............................................................................369
Functionality..............................................................................369
Function block...........................................................................370
Signals.......................................................................................370
Settings......................................................................................372
Monitored data...........................................................................375
Operation principle....................................................................375
Basic functionality.................................................................375
Logic diagrams.....................................................................376
Technical data...........................................................................387
Autorecloser for 1 phase, 2 phase and/or 3 phase operation
SMBRREC .....................................................................................388
Identification..............................................................................388
Functionality..............................................................................388
Function block...........................................................................389
Signals.......................................................................................389
Settings......................................................................................391
Operation principle....................................................................392
Logic Diagrams....................................................................392
Auto-reclosing operation Off and On....................................393
Auto-reclosing mode selection.............................................393
Start auto-reclosing and conditions for start of a
reclosing cycle......................................................................393
Control of the auto-reclosing open time for shot 1...............394
Long trip signal.....................................................................395
Time sequence diagrams.....................................................401
Technical data...........................................................................404
Interlocking ....................................................................................405
Functionality..............................................................................405
Operation principle....................................................................405
Logical node for interlocking SCILO .........................................408
Identification.........................................................................408
Functionality.........................................................................408
Function block......................................................................409
Signals..................................................................................409
Logic diagram.......................................................................409
Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES .........................410
Identification.........................................................................410
Functionality.........................................................................410

11
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Function block......................................................................410
Logic diagram.......................................................................411
Signals..................................................................................411
Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS..........................411
Identification.........................................................................411
Functionality.........................................................................411
Function block......................................................................412
Logic diagram.......................................................................413
Signals..................................................................................414
Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC ................415
Identification.........................................................................416
Functionality.........................................................................416
Function block......................................................................416
Logic diagram.......................................................................417
Signals..................................................................................417
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC ................................418
Identification.........................................................................418
Functionality.........................................................................419
Function block......................................................................420
Logic diagram.......................................................................421
Signals..................................................................................423
Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB BH .....................................................426
Identification.........................................................................426
Functionality.........................................................................426
Function blocks....................................................................427
Logic diagrams.....................................................................429
Signals..................................................................................434
Interlocking for double CB bay DB ...........................................438
Identification.........................................................................438
Functionality.........................................................................438
Logic diagrams.....................................................................440
Function block......................................................................443
Signals..................................................................................444
Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE ..........................................448
Identification.........................................................................448
Functionality.........................................................................448
Function block......................................................................449
Logic diagram.......................................................................450
Signals..................................................................................455
Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO ............................457
Identification.........................................................................458
Functionality.........................................................................458
Function block......................................................................459

12
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Logic diagram.......................................................................460
Signals..................................................................................461
Position evaluation POS_EVAL.................................................463
Identification.........................................................................463
Functionality.........................................................................463
Function block......................................................................463
Logic diagram.......................................................................464
Signals..................................................................................464
Apparatus control APC...................................................................464
Functionality..............................................................................464
Operation principle....................................................................465
Error handling............................................................................466
Bay control QCBAY...................................................................469
Functionality.........................................................................469
Function block......................................................................469
Signals..................................................................................469
Settings................................................................................470
Operation principle...............................................................470
Local/Remote switch.................................................................472
Function block......................................................................472
Signals..................................................................................473
Settings................................................................................474
Operation principle...............................................................474
Switch controller SCSWI...........................................................475
Functionality ........................................................................476
Function block......................................................................476
Signals..................................................................................476
Settings................................................................................478
Operation principle...............................................................478
Circuit breaker SXCBR..............................................................483
Functionality ........................................................................483
Function block......................................................................483
Signals..................................................................................484
Settings................................................................................485
Operation principle...............................................................485
Circuit switch SXSWI.................................................................489
Functionality ........................................................................489
Function block......................................................................489
Signals..................................................................................490
Settings................................................................................491
Operation principle...............................................................491
Bay reserve QCRSV..................................................................495
Functionality.........................................................................495

13
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Function block......................................................................495
Signals..................................................................................496
Settings................................................................................497
Operation principle...............................................................497
Reservation input RESIN...........................................................499
Functionality.........................................................................499
Function block......................................................................499
Signals..................................................................................500
Settings................................................................................501
Operation principle...............................................................501
Voltage control................................................................................503
Identification..............................................................................503
Functionality..............................................................................504
Automatic voltage control for tap changer TR1ATCC and
TR8ATCC .................................................................................504
Operation principle...............................................................504
Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs
TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC ........................................................516
Operation principle...............................................................516
Connection between TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC and
TCMYLTCor TCLYLTC.............................................................520
Function block...........................................................................524
Signals.......................................................................................527
Settings......................................................................................534
Monitored data...........................................................................542
Operation principle....................................................................543
Technical data...........................................................................544
Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI
presentation SLGAPC....................................................................545
Identification..............................................................................545
Functionality..............................................................................546
Function block...........................................................................546
Signals.......................................................................................546
Settings......................................................................................548
Monitored data...........................................................................548
Operation principle....................................................................548
Graphical display..................................................................549
Selector mini switch VSGAPC........................................................550
Identification..............................................................................550
Functionality..............................................................................551
Function block...........................................................................551
Signals.......................................................................................551
Settings......................................................................................552
Operation principle....................................................................552

14
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Generic communication function for Double Point indication

DPGAPC........................................................................................553
Identification..............................................................................553
Functionality..............................................................................553
Function block...........................................................................553
Signals.......................................................................................553
Settings......................................................................................554
Operation principle....................................................................554
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC........................554
Identification..............................................................................554
Functionality..............................................................................554
Function block...........................................................................555
Signals.......................................................................................555
Settings......................................................................................555
Operation principle....................................................................556
AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0 AUTOBITS..........556
Identification..............................................................................556
Functionality..............................................................................557
Function block...........................................................................557
Signals.......................................................................................557
Settings......................................................................................558
Operation principle....................................................................573
Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD....................................573
Identification..............................................................................573
Functionality..............................................................................573
Function block...........................................................................574
Signals.......................................................................................574
Settings......................................................................................575
Operation principle....................................................................575

Section 14 Scheme communication...............................................577

Scheme communication logic for distance or overcurrent
protection ZCPSCH........................................................................577
Identification..............................................................................577
Functionality..............................................................................577
Function block...........................................................................577
Signals.......................................................................................578
Settings......................................................................................578
Operation principle....................................................................579
Blocking scheme..................................................................579
Permissive underreaching scheme......................................580
Permissive overreaching scheme........................................580
Unblocking scheme..............................................................580
Intertrip scheme....................................................................581

15
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Simplified logic diagram.......................................................582

Technical data...........................................................................583
Current reversal and Weak-end infeed logic for distance
protection 3-phase ZCRWPSCH ...................................................583
Identification..............................................................................583
Functionality..............................................................................583
Function block...........................................................................584
Signals.......................................................................................584
Settings......................................................................................585
Operation principle....................................................................585
Current reversal logic...........................................................585
Weak-end infeed logic..........................................................586
Technical data...........................................................................588
Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH..............................................588
Identification..............................................................................588
Functionality..............................................................................588
Function block...........................................................................588
Signals.......................................................................................589
Settings......................................................................................589
Operation principle....................................................................590
Zone extension.....................................................................590
Loss-of-Load acceleration....................................................590
Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent
protection ECPSCH .......................................................................591
Identification..............................................................................591
Functionality..............................................................................591
Function block...........................................................................592
Signals.......................................................................................592
Settings......................................................................................593
Operation principle....................................................................593
Blocking scheme..................................................................594
Permissive under/overreaching scheme..............................595
Unblocking scheme..............................................................596
Technical data...........................................................................597
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual
overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH...............................................597
Identification..............................................................................597
Functionality..............................................................................598
Function block...........................................................................598
Signals.......................................................................................599
Settings......................................................................................599
Operation principle....................................................................600
Directional comparison logic function...................................600
Fault current reversal logic...................................................600

16
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Weak-end infeed logic..........................................................601

Technical data...........................................................................602

Section 15 Logic.............................................................................603
Tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC .......................603
Identification..............................................................................603
Functionality..............................................................................603
Function block...........................................................................603
Signals.......................................................................................604
Settings......................................................................................605
Operation principle....................................................................605
Logic diagram.......................................................................607
Technical data...........................................................................610
Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC...........................................................610
Identification..............................................................................610
Functionality..............................................................................611
Function block...........................................................................611
Signals.......................................................................................611
Settings......................................................................................613
Operation principle....................................................................613
Logic for group alarm ALMCALH....................................................614
Identification..............................................................................614
Functionality..............................................................................614
Function block...........................................................................615
Signals.......................................................................................615
Settings......................................................................................616
Operation principle....................................................................616
Identification...................................................................................616
Functionality..............................................................................616
Function block...........................................................................617
Operation principle....................................................................617
Signals.......................................................................................617
Settings......................................................................................618
Identification...................................................................................618
Functionality..............................................................................618
Function block...........................................................................619
Operation principle....................................................................619
Signals.......................................................................................619
Settings......................................................................................620
Configurable logic blocks................................................................620
Functionality..............................................................................620
Inverter function block INV........................................................622
Function block......................................................................622
Signals..................................................................................623

17
Technical Manual
Table of contents

OR function block OR................................................................623

Function block......................................................................623
Signals..................................................................................623
AND function block AND...........................................................624
Function block......................................................................624
Signals..................................................................................624
Timer function block TIMER......................................................624
Function block......................................................................624
Signals..................................................................................625
Settings................................................................................625
Pulse timer function block PULSETIMER..................................625
Function block......................................................................625
Signals..................................................................................625
Settings................................................................................626
Exclusive OR function block XOR.............................................626
Function block......................................................................626
Signals..................................................................................626
Loop delay function block LOOPDELAY...................................626
Function block......................................................................627
Signals..................................................................................627
Set-reset with memory function block SRMEMORY.................627
Function block......................................................................627
Signals..................................................................................628
Settings................................................................................628
Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY.................628
Function block......................................................................629
Signals..................................................................................629
Settings................................................................................629
Controllable gate function block GATE......................................629
Function block......................................................................629
Signals..................................................................................630
Settings................................................................................630
Settable timer function block TIMERSET..................................630
Function block......................................................................630
Signals..................................................................................630
Settings................................................................................631
Configurable logic Q/T....................................................................631
Functionality..............................................................................631
ANDQT function block...............................................................631
Function block......................................................................631
Signals..................................................................................631
ORQT function block.................................................................632
Function block......................................................................632

18
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Signals..................................................................................632
Inverter function block INVERTERQT.......................................632
Function block......................................................................633
Signals..................................................................................633
Exclusive OR function block XORQT........................................633
Function block......................................................................633
Signals..................................................................................633
Set/Reset function block SRMEMORYQT.................................634
Function block......................................................................634
Signals..................................................................................634
Settings................................................................................635
Reset/Set function block RSMEMORYQT.................................635
Function block......................................................................635
Signals..................................................................................635
Settings................................................................................636
Settable timer function block TIMERSETQT.............................636
Signals..................................................................................636
Settings................................................................................637
Pulse timer function block PULSETIMERQT.............................637
Signals..................................................................................637
Settings................................................................................637
InvalidLogic INVALIDQT............................................................637
Function block......................................................................638
Signals..................................................................................638
Single indication signal combining function block
INDCOMBSPQT........................................................................639
Signals..................................................................................639
Function block...........................................................................640
Signals..................................................................................640
Technical data................................................................................641
Fixed signals FXDSIGN..................................................................643
Identification..............................................................................643
Functionality..............................................................................643
Function block...........................................................................643
Signals.......................................................................................643
Settings......................................................................................644
Operation principle....................................................................644
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I..........................................644
Identification..............................................................................644
Function block...........................................................................645
Signals.......................................................................................645
Monitored data...........................................................................646
Settings......................................................................................646

19
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Operation principle....................................................................646
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node
representation BTIGAPC................................................................647
Identification..............................................................................647
Functionality..............................................................................647
Function block...........................................................................647
Signals.......................................................................................648
Settings......................................................................................648
Monitored data...........................................................................648
Operation principle....................................................................648
Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16A........................................650
Identification..............................................................................650
Functionality..............................................................................650
Function block...........................................................................650
Signals.......................................................................................650
Setting parameters....................................................................651
Operation principle....................................................................651
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node
representation ITBGAPC................................................................652
Identification..............................................................................652
Functionality..............................................................................653
Function block...........................................................................653
Signals.......................................................................................653
Settings......................................................................................654
Operation principle....................................................................654
Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow
supervision TEIGAPC.....................................................................655
Identification..............................................................................655
Functionality..............................................................................656
Function block...........................................................................656
Signals.......................................................................................657
Settings......................................................................................657
Operation principle....................................................................657
Operation Accuracy..............................................................659
Memory storage...................................................................659
Technical data...........................................................................659

Section 16 Monitoring.....................................................................661
Measurements................................................................................661
Identification..............................................................................661
Functionality..............................................................................661
Function block...........................................................................663
Signals.......................................................................................665
Settings......................................................................................668

20
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Monitored data...........................................................................679
Operation principle....................................................................683
Measurement supervision....................................................683
Measurements CVMMXN.....................................................687
Phase current measurement CMMXU.................................692
Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements
VMMXU, VNMMXU..............................................................693
Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI,
CMSQI..................................................................................693
Technical data...........................................................................693
Analog inputs..................................................................................695
Introduction................................................................................695
Function block...........................................................................696
Signals.......................................................................................696
Settings......................................................................................698
Monitored data...........................................................................705
Operation principle....................................................................706
Gas medium supervision SSIMG...................................................707
Identification..............................................................................707
Functionality..............................................................................707
Function block...........................................................................708
Signals.......................................................................................708
Settings......................................................................................709
Operation principle....................................................................709
Technical data...........................................................................710
Liquid medium supervision SSIML.................................................710
Identification..............................................................................710
Functionality..............................................................................711
Function block...........................................................................711
Signals.......................................................................................711
Settings......................................................................................712
Operation principle....................................................................712
Technical data...........................................................................713
Breaker monitoring SSCBR............................................................713
Identification..............................................................................713
Functionality..............................................................................714
Function block...........................................................................714
Signals.......................................................................................714
Settings......................................................................................715
Monitored data...........................................................................717
Operation principle....................................................................717
Circuit breaker contact travel time........................................719
Circuit breaker status...........................................................720
Remaining life of circuit breaker...........................................721

21
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Accumulated energy.............................................................722
Circuit breaker operation cycles...........................................723
Circuit breaker operation monitoring....................................724
Circuit breaker spring charge monitoring.............................725
Circuit breaker gas pressure indication................................726
Technical data...........................................................................726
Event function EVENT....................................................................726
Identification..............................................................................727
Functionality..............................................................................727
Function block...........................................................................727
Signals.......................................................................................727
Settings......................................................................................728
Operation principle....................................................................730
Disturbance report DRPRDRE.......................................................731
Identification..............................................................................732
Functionality..............................................................................732
Function block...........................................................................733
Signals.......................................................................................734
Settings......................................................................................739
Monitored data...........................................................................778
Operation principle....................................................................782
Technical data...........................................................................789
Logical signal status report BINSTATREP.....................................790
Identification..............................................................................790
Functionality..............................................................................790
Function block...........................................................................791
Signals.......................................................................................791
Settings......................................................................................792
Operation principle....................................................................792
Measured value expander block RANGE_XP................................793
Identification..............................................................................793
Functionality..............................................................................793
Function block...........................................................................793
Signals.......................................................................................794
Operation principle....................................................................794
Fault locator LMBRFLO..................................................................794
Identification..............................................................................794
Functionality..............................................................................795
Function block...........................................................................795
Signals.......................................................................................795
Settings......................................................................................796
Monitored data...........................................................................797
Operation principle....................................................................797

22
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Measuring Principle..............................................................798
Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault.....798
The non-compensated impedance model............................802
IEC 60870-5-103..................................................................803
Technical data...........................................................................803
Limit counter L4UFCNT..................................................................803
Identification..............................................................................803
Identification.........................................................................803
Functionality..............................................................................803
Operation principle....................................................................804
Design..................................................................................804
Reporting..............................................................................805
Function block...........................................................................805
Signals.......................................................................................806
Settings......................................................................................806
Monitored data...........................................................................807
Technical data...........................................................................807

Section 17 Metering.......................................................................809
Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT.........................................................809
Identification..............................................................................809
Functionality..............................................................................809
Function block...........................................................................809
Signals.......................................................................................810
Settings......................................................................................810
Monitored data...........................................................................811
Operation principle....................................................................811
Technical data...........................................................................813
Function for energy calculation and demand handling
ETPMMTR......................................................................................813
Identification..............................................................................813
Functionality..............................................................................813
Function block...........................................................................814
Signals.......................................................................................814
Settings......................................................................................815
Monitored data...........................................................................816
Operation principle....................................................................817
Technical data...........................................................................820
Technical data......................................................................820

Section 18 Station communication.................................................821

670 series protocols.......................................................................821
DNP3 protocol................................................................................821
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol.........................................821

23
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Functionality..............................................................................821
Communication interfaces and protocols..................................822
Settings......................................................................................822
Technical data...........................................................................823
Generic communication function for Single Point indication
SPGAPC, SP16GAPC...............................................................823
Functionality.........................................................................823
Function block......................................................................823
Signals..................................................................................824
Settings................................................................................824
Monitored data.....................................................................824
Operation principle...............................................................825
Generic communication function for Measured Value
MVGAPC...................................................................................825
Functionality.........................................................................826
Function block......................................................................826
Signals..................................................................................826
Settings................................................................................826
Monitored data.....................................................................827
Operation principle...............................................................827
IEC 61850-8-1 redundant station bus communication..............827
Functionality.........................................................................828
Function block......................................................................828
Signals..................................................................................828
Settings................................................................................828
Monitored data.....................................................................829
Principle of operation............................................................829
IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol.....................................831
Introduction................................................................................831
Function block...........................................................................831
Signals.......................................................................................831
Output signals......................................................................831
Settings......................................................................................834
Monitored data...........................................................................837
Operation principle....................................................................838
Technical data...........................................................................841
LON communication protocol.........................................................841
Functionality..............................................................................841
Settings......................................................................................842
Operation principle....................................................................842
Technical data...........................................................................860
SPA communication protocol.........................................................860
Functionality..............................................................................860
Design.......................................................................................860

24
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Settings......................................................................................861
Operation principle....................................................................861
Communication ports...........................................................869
Technical data...........................................................................869
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol.....................................869
Introduction................................................................................869
Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS...........................869
Functionality.........................................................................869
Identification.........................................................................870
Function block......................................................................870
Signals..................................................................................870
Settings................................................................................871
Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103
I103MEASUSR..........................................................................871
Functionality.........................................................................871
Identification.........................................................................872
Function block......................................................................872
Signals..................................................................................872
Settings................................................................................873
Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 I103AR......873
Functionality.........................................................................873
Identification.........................................................................873
Function block......................................................................874
Signals..................................................................................874
Settings................................................................................874
Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF...........874
Functionality.........................................................................874
Identification.........................................................................874
Function block......................................................................875
Signals..................................................................................875
Settings................................................................................875
Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103
I103FLTPROT...........................................................................875
Functionality.........................................................................875
Identification.........................................................................875
Function block......................................................................876
Signals..................................................................................876
Settings................................................................................877
IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED..................................877
Functionality.........................................................................877
Identification.........................................................................878
Function block......................................................................878
Signals..................................................................................878
Settings................................................................................878

25
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV..............879

Functionality.........................................................................879
Identification.........................................................................879
Function block......................................................................879
Signals..................................................................................879
Settings................................................................................880
Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103
I103USRDEF.............................................................................880
Functionality.........................................................................880
Identification.........................................................................880
Function block......................................................................881
Signals..................................................................................881
Settings................................................................................881
Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD................882
Functionality.........................................................................882
Identification.........................................................................882
Function block......................................................................882
Signals..................................................................................882
Settings................................................................................883
IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD..................883
Functionality.........................................................................883
Identification.........................................................................883
Function block......................................................................883
Signals..................................................................................883
Settings................................................................................884
Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103
I103USRCMD............................................................................884
Functionality.........................................................................884
Identification.........................................................................884
Function block......................................................................884
Signals..................................................................................884
Settings................................................................................885
Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103
I103GENCMD............................................................................885
Functionality.........................................................................885
Identification.........................................................................886
Function block......................................................................886
Signals..................................................................................886
Settings................................................................................886
IED commands with position and select for IEC
60870-5-103 I103POSCMD......................................................887
Functionality.........................................................................887
Identification.........................................................................887
Function block......................................................................887

26
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Signals..................................................................................887
Settings................................................................................888
Operation principle ...................................................................888
General.................................................................................888
Communication ports...........................................................898
Technical data...........................................................................899
Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking
GOOSEINTLKRCV.........................................................................899
Functionality..............................................................................899
Function block...........................................................................900
Signals.......................................................................................900
Settings......................................................................................902
Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV..........................................903
Function block...........................................................................903
Signals.......................................................................................903
Settings......................................................................................904
GOOSE function block to receive a double point value
GOOSEDPRCV..............................................................................905
Identification..............................................................................905
Functionality..............................................................................905
Function block...........................................................................905
Signals.......................................................................................905
Settings......................................................................................906
Operation principle ...................................................................906
GOOSE function block to receive an integer value
GOOSEINTRCV.............................................................................906
Identification..............................................................................906
Functionality..............................................................................906
Function block...........................................................................907
Signals.......................................................................................907
Settings......................................................................................907
Operation principle ...................................................................907
GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value
GOOSEMVRCV.............................................................................908
Identification..............................................................................908
Functionality..............................................................................908
Function block...........................................................................908
Signals.......................................................................................908
Settings......................................................................................909
Operation principle ...................................................................909
GOOSE function block to receive a single point value
GOOSESPRCV..............................................................................909
Identification..............................................................................909
Functionality..............................................................................910

27
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Function block...........................................................................910
Signals.......................................................................................910
Settings......................................................................................910
Operation principle ...................................................................910
GOOSE VCTR configuration for send and receive
GOOSEVCTRCONF......................................................................911
Identification..............................................................................911
Functionality..............................................................................911
Settings......................................................................................912
GOOSE voltage control receiving block GOOSEVCTRRCV..........912
Identification..............................................................................912
Functionality..............................................................................912
Function block...........................................................................912
Signals.......................................................................................913
MULTICMDRCV and MULTICMDSND..........................................913
Functionality..............................................................................913
Design.......................................................................................913
General.................................................................................913
Function block...........................................................................914
Signals.......................................................................................914
Settings......................................................................................916
Operation principle....................................................................916
Security events on protocols SECALARM......................................917
Security alarm SECALARM.......................................................917
Signals..................................................................................917
Settings................................................................................917
Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG.........................................917
Activity logging ACTIVLOG.......................................................917
Settings......................................................................................917

Section 19 Remote communication................................................919

Binary signal transfer......................................................................919
Identification..............................................................................919
Functionality..............................................................................919
Function block...........................................................................920
Signals.......................................................................................920
Settings......................................................................................922
Monitored data...........................................................................925
Operation principle....................................................................927
Transmission of analog data from LDCM LDCMTransmit..............928
Function block...........................................................................928
Signals.......................................................................................929

Section 20 Basic IED functions......................................................931

28
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Authority check ATHCHCK.............................................................931

Identification..............................................................................931
Functionality..............................................................................931
Settings......................................................................................932
Operation principle ...................................................................932
Authorization handling in the IED.........................................934
Authority management AUTHMAN.................................................934
Identification..............................................................................934
AUTHMAN.................................................................................935
Settings......................................................................................935
FTP access with password FTPACCS...........................................935
Identification..............................................................................935
FTP access with SSL, FTPACCS..............................................935
Settings......................................................................................936
Authority status ATHSTAT.............................................................936
Identification..............................................................................936
Functionality..............................................................................936
Function block...........................................................................936
Signals.......................................................................................936
Settings......................................................................................937
Operation principle ...................................................................937
Self supervision with internal event list...........................................937
Functionality..............................................................................937
Function block...........................................................................937
Signals.......................................................................................938
Settings......................................................................................938
Operation principle....................................................................938
Internal signals.....................................................................940
Supervision of analog inputs................................................941
Technical data...........................................................................942
Time synchronization......................................................................942
Functionality..............................................................................942
Function block...........................................................................943
Signals.......................................................................................943
Settings......................................................................................943
Operation principle ...................................................................948
General concepts.................................................................948
Real-time clock (RTC) operation..........................................950
Synchronization alternatives................................................951
Process bus IEC 61850-9-2LE synchronization...................955
Technical data...........................................................................955
Parameter setting groups...............................................................955
Functionality..............................................................................955

29
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Function block...........................................................................956
Signals.......................................................................................956
Settings......................................................................................957
Operation principle....................................................................957
ChangeLock function CHNGLCK...................................................958
Functionality..............................................................................958
Function block...........................................................................959
Signals.......................................................................................959
Settings......................................................................................959
Operation principle ...................................................................959
Test mode functionality TEST........................................................960
Functionality..............................................................................960
Function block...........................................................................960
Signals.......................................................................................960
Settings......................................................................................961
Operation principle ...................................................................961
IED identifiers.................................................................................963
Functionality..............................................................................963
Settings .....................................................................................964
Product information........................................................................964
Functionality..............................................................................964
Settings .....................................................................................964
Factory defined settings............................................................965
Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI..............................................965
Functionality..............................................................................965
Function block...........................................................................966
Signals.......................................................................................966
Operation principle....................................................................967
Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO .........................................967
Functionality..............................................................................967
Function block...........................................................................967
Signals.......................................................................................967
Operation principle....................................................................968
Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI..................................................968
Functionality..............................................................................968
Function block...........................................................................968
Signals.......................................................................................969
Operation principle....................................................................969
Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI.............................................969
Functionality..............................................................................969
Frequency values......................................................................970
Function block...........................................................................971
Signals.......................................................................................971

30
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Settings......................................................................................972
Operation principle ...................................................................974
Global base values GBASVAL.......................................................975
Identification..............................................................................975
Functionality..............................................................................975
Settings......................................................................................975
Primary system values PRIMVAL...................................................975
Identification..............................................................................975
Functionality..............................................................................976
Settings......................................................................................976
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM..............................................976
Functionality..............................................................................976
Function block...........................................................................976
Signals.......................................................................................976
Settings......................................................................................977
Operation principle ...................................................................977
Denial of service DOS....................................................................978
Functionality .............................................................................978
Function blocks..........................................................................978
Signals.......................................................................................978
Settings......................................................................................979
Monitored data...........................................................................979
Operation principle....................................................................981

Section 21 IED hardware...............................................................983

Overview.........................................................................................983
Variants of case size with local HMI display..............................983
Case from the rear side.............................................................985
Hardware modules.........................................................................990
Overview....................................................................................990
Numeric processing module (NUM)..........................................991
Introduction...........................................................................991
Functionality.........................................................................991
Block diagram.......................................................................992
Power supply module (PSM).....................................................992
Introduction...........................................................................992
Design..................................................................................992
Technical data......................................................................993
Local human-machine interface (Local HMI).............................993
Transformer input module (TRM)..............................................993
Introduction...........................................................................993
Design..................................................................................993
Technical data......................................................................995

31
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Analog digital conversion module, with time

synchronization (ADM) .............................................................996
Introduction...........................................................................996
Design..................................................................................996
Binary input module (BIM).........................................................998
Introduction...........................................................................998
Design..................................................................................998
Signals................................................................................1001
Settings..............................................................................1002
Monitored data...................................................................1002
Technical data....................................................................1002
Binary output modules (BOM).................................................1003
Introduction.........................................................................1003
Design................................................................................1003
Signals................................................................................1005
Settings..............................................................................1005
Monitored data...................................................................1006
Technical data....................................................................1009
Static binary output module (SOM).........................................1010
Introduction.........................................................................1010
Design................................................................................1010
Signals................................................................................1011
Settings..............................................................................1012
Monitored data...................................................................1012
Technical data....................................................................1014
Binary input/output module (IOM)............................................1015
Introduction.........................................................................1015
Design................................................................................1015
Signals................................................................................1018
Settings..............................................................................1019
Monitored data...................................................................1019
Technical data....................................................................1021
mA input module (MIM)...........................................................1023
Introduction.........................................................................1023
Design................................................................................1023
Signals................................................................................1024
Settings..............................................................................1025
Monitored data...................................................................1026
Technical data....................................................................1027
Serial and LON communication module (SLM) ......................1027
Introduction.........................................................................1027
Design................................................................................1027
Technical data....................................................................1028

32
Technical Manual
 Table of contents

Galvanic RS485 communication module.................................1029

Introduction.........................................................................1029
Design................................................................................1029
Technical data....................................................................1030
Optical ethernet module (OEM)...............................................1031
Introduction.........................................................................1031
Functionality.......................................................................1031
Design................................................................................1031
Technical data....................................................................1032
Line data communication module (LDCM)..............................1032
Introduction.........................................................................1032
Design................................................................................1032
Technical data....................................................................1033
Galvanic X.21 line data communication (X.21-LDCM)............1034
Introduction.........................................................................1034
Design................................................................................1035
Functionality.......................................................................1037
Technical data....................................................................1037
GPS time synchronization module (GTM)...............................1037
Introduction.........................................................................1037
Design................................................................................1038
Monitored data...................................................................1038
Technical data....................................................................1038
GPS antenna...........................................................................1038
Introduction.........................................................................1038
Design................................................................................1038
Technical data....................................................................1040
IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B...........................1040
Introduction.........................................................................1040
Design................................................................................1040
Settings..............................................................................1041
Technical data....................................................................1041
Dimensions...................................................................................1042
Case without rear cover...........................................................1042
Case with rear cover................................................................1044
Flush mounting dimensions.....................................................1046
Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions.................................1047
Wall mounting dimensions.......................................................1048
External resistor unit for high impedance differential
protection.................................................................................1048
Mounting alternatives...................................................................1050
Flush mounting........................................................................1050
Overview............................................................................1050

33
Technical Manual
Table of contents

Mounting procedure for flush mounting..............................1051

19 panel rack mounting..........................................................1052
Overview............................................................................1052
Mounting procedure for 19 panel rack mounting...............1053
Wall mounting..........................................................................1053
Overview............................................................................1053
Mounting procedure for wall mounting...............................1054
How to reach the rear side of the IED................................1055
Side-by-side 19 rack mounting...............................................1055
Overview............................................................................1055
Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting..........1056
IED in the 670 series mounted with a RHGS6 case...........1056
Side-by-side flush mounting....................................................1057
Overview............................................................................1057
Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting.........1058
Technical data..............................................................................1058
Enclosure.................................................................................1058
Connection system..................................................................1059
Influencing factors...................................................................1059
Type tests according to standard............................................1060

Section 22 Labels.........................................................................1063
Labels on IED...............................................................................1063

Section 23 Connection diagrams.................................................1067

Section 24 IED and functionality tests..........................................1069

Section 25 Inverse time characteristics........................................1071

Application....................................................................................1071
Principle of operation....................................................................1074
Mode of operation....................................................................1074
Inverse characteristics..................................................................1079

Section 26 Glossary.....................................................................1109
Glossary.......................................................................................1109

34
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 1
Introduction

Section 1 Introduction

1.1 This manual

The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists
function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and
technical data, sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference
during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during
normal service.

1.2 Intended audience

This manual addresses system engineers and installation and commissioning

personnel, who use technical data during engineering, installation and
commissioning, and in normal service.

The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems,

protection equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logic in
the IEDs. The installation and commissioning personnel must have a basic
knowledge in handling electronic equipment.

35
Technical Manual
Section 1 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Introduction

1.3 Product documentation

1.3.1 Product documentation set

Deinstalling & disposal

Planning & purchase

Decommissioning
Commissioning

Maintenance
Engineering

Operation
Installing
Engineering manual
Installation manual

Commissioning manual
Operation manual

Application manual

Technical manual

Communication
protocol manual
Cyber security
deployment guideline
IEC07000220-4-en.vsd

IEC07000220 V4 EN

Figure 1: The intended use of manuals throughout the product lifecycle

The engineering manual contains instructions on how to engineer the IEDs using
the various tools available within the PCM600 software. The manual provides
instructions on how to set up a PCM600 project and insert IEDs to the project
structure. The manual also recommends a sequence for the engineering of
protection and control functions, LHMI functions as well as communication
engineering for IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850 and DNP3.

The installation manual contains instructions on how to install the IED. The
manual provides procedures for mechanical and electrical installation. The chapters
are organized in the chronological order in which the IED should be installed.

The commissioning manual contains instructions on how to commission the IED.

The manual can also be used by system engineers and maintenance personnel for
assistance during the testing phase. The manual provides procedures for the
checking of external circuitry and energizing the IED, parameter setting and

36
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 1
Introduction

configuration as well as verifying settings by secondary injection. The manual

describes the process of testing an IED in a substation which is not in service. The
chapters are organized in the chronological order in which the IED should be
commissioned. The relevant procedures may be followed also during the service
and maintenance activities.

The operation manual contains instructions on how to operate the IED once it has
been commissioned. The manual provides instructions for the monitoring,
controlling and setting of the IED. The manual also describes how to identify
disturbances and how to view calculated and measured power grid data to
determine the cause of a fault.

The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelines

sorted per function. The manual can be used to find out when and for what purpose
a typical protection function can be used. The manual can also provide assistance
for calculating settings.

The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists
function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and
technical data, sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference
during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during
normal service.

The communication protocol manual describes the communication protocols

supported by the IED. The manual concentrates on the vendor-specific
implementations.

The point list manual describes the outlook and properties of the data points
specific to the IED. The manual should be used in conjunction with the
corresponding communication protocol manual.

The cyber security deployment guideline describes the process for handling cyber
security when communicating with the IED. Certification, Authorization with role
based access control, and product engineering for cyber security related events are
described and sorted by function. The guideline can be used as a technical
reference during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and
during normal service.

1.3.2 Document revision history

Document revision/date History
-/May 2014 First release

37
Technical Manual
Section 1 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Introduction

1.3.3 Related documents

Documents related to REC670 Identify number
Application manual 1MRK 511 310-UEN
Commissioning manual 1MRK 511 312-UEN
Product guide 1MRK 511 313-BEN
Technical manual 1MRK 511 311-UEN
Type test certificate 1MRK 511 313-TEN

670 series manuals Identify number

Operation manual 1MRK 500 118-UEN
Engineering manual 1MRK 511 308-UEN
Installation manual 1MRK 514 019-UEN
Communication protocol manual, IEC 1MRK 511 304-UEN
60870-5-103
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 1MRK 511 302-UEN
Edition 1
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 1MRK 511 303-UEN
Edition 2
Communication protocol manual, LON 1MRK 511 305-UEN
Communication protocol manual, SPA 1MRK 511 306-UEN
Accessories guide 1MRK 514 012-BEN
Cyber security deployment guideline 1MRK 511 309-UEN
Connection and Installation components 1MRK 513 003-BEN
Test system, COMBITEST 1MRK 512 001-BEN

1.4 Document symbols and conventions

1.4.1 Symbols

The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard

which could result in electrical shock.

The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could

result in personal injury.

The caution hot surface icon indicates important information or

warning about the temperature of product surfaces.

38
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 1
Introduction

The caution icon indicates important information or warning related

to the concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence
of a hazard which could result in corruption of software or damage
to equipment or property.

The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and

conditions.

The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your
project or how to use a certain function.

Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to

understand that under certain operational conditions, operation of damaged
equipment may result in degraded process performance leading to personal injury
or death. It is important that the user fully complies with all warning and
cautionary notices.

1.4.2 Document conventions

Abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are spelled out in the glossary. The
glossary also contains definitions of important terms.
Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the
push button icons.
For example, to navigate between the options, use and .
HMI menu paths are presented in bold.
For example, select Main menu/Settings.
LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.
For example, to save the changes in non-volatile memory, select Yes and
press .
Parameter names are shown in italics.
For example, the function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
Each function block symbol shows the available input/output signal.
the character ^ in front of an input/output signal name indicates that the
signal name may be customized using the PCM600 software.
the character * after an input/output signal name indicates that the signal
must be connected to another function block in the application
configuration to achieve a valid application configuration.
Logic diagrams describe the signal logic inside the function block and are
bordered by dashed lines.

39
Technical Manual
Section 1 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Introduction

Signals in frames with a shaded area on their right hand side represent
setting parameter signals that are only settable via the PST or LHMI.
If an internal signal path cannot be drawn with a continuous line, the
suffix -int is added to the signal name to indicate where the signal starts
and continues.
Signal paths that extend beyond the logic diagram and continue in
another diagram have the suffix -cont.

1.4.3 IEC61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping

Table 1: IEC61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping
Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes
AEGPVOC AEGGAPC AEGPVOC
AGSAL SECLLN0 AGSAL
AGSAL
ALMCALH ALMCALH
ALTIM ALTIM
ALTMS ALTMS
ALTRK ALTRK
BCZSPDIF BCZSPDIF BCZSPDIF
BCZTPDIF BCZTPDIF BCZTPDIF
BDCGAPC SWSGGIO BDCGAPC
BRCPTOC BRCPTOC BRCPTOC
BTIGAPC B16IFCVI BTIGAPC
BUSPTRC_B1 BBSPLLN0 LLN0
BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B2 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B3 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B4 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B5 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B6 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B7 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B8 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B9 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B10 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B11 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B12 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B13 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B14 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B15 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B16 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B17 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
Table continues on next page

40
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

BUSPTRC_B18 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B19 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B20 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B21 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B22 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B23 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B24 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUTPTRC_B1 BBTPLLN0 LLN0
BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B2 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B3 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B4 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B5 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B6 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B7 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B8 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BZNSPDIF_A BZNSPDIF BZNSGAPC
BZNSPDIF
BZNSPDIF_B BZNSPDIF BZNSGAPC
BZNSPDIF
BZNTPDIF_A BZNTPDIF BZNTGAPC
BZNTPDIF
BZNTPDIF_B BZNTPDIF BZNTGAPC
BZNTPDIF
CBPGAPC CBPLLN0 LLN0
CBPMMXU CBPPTRC
CBPPTRC HOLPTOV
HOLPTOV HPH1PTOV
HPH1PTOV PH3PTOC
PH3PTOC PH3PTUC
PH3PTUC RP3PDOP
RP3PDOP
CCPDSC CCRPLD CCPDSC
CCRBRF CCRBRF CCRBRF
CCSRBRF CCSRBRF CCSRBRF
CCSSPVC CCSRDIF CCSSPVC
CMMXU CMMXU CMMXU
CMSQI CMSQI CMSQI
COUVGAPC COUVLLN0 LLN0
COUVPTOV COUVPTOV
COUVPTUV COUVPTUV
Table continues on next page

41
Technical Manual
Section 1 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

CVGAPC GF2LLN0 LLN0
GF2MMXN GF2MMXN
GF2PHAR GF2PHAR
GF2PTOV GF2PTOV
GF2PTUC GF2PTUC
GF2PTUV GF2PTUV
GF2PVOC GF2PVOC
PH1PTRC PH1PTRC
CVMMXN CVMMXN CVMMXN
DPGAPC DPGGIO DPGAPC
DRPRDRE DRPRDRE DRPRDRE
ECPSCH ECPSCH ECPSCH
ECRWPSCH ECRWPSCH ECRWPSCH
EF4PTOC EF4LLN0 LLN0
EF4PTRC EF4PTRC
EF4RDIR EF4RDIR
GEN4PHAR GEN4PHAR
PH1PTOC PH1PTOC
EFPIOC EFPIOC EFPIOC
ETPMMTR ETPMMTR ETPMMTR
FDPSPDIS FDPSPDIS FDPSPDIS
FMPSPDIS FMPSPDIS FMPSPDIS
FRPSPDIS FPSRPDIS FPSRPDIS
FTAQFVR FTAQFVR FTAQFVR
FUFSPVC SDDRFUF FUFSPVC
GENPDIF GENPDIF LLN0
GENGAPC
GENPDIF
GENPHAR
GENPTRC
GOPPDOP GOPPDOP LLN0
GOPPDOP
PH1PTRC
GRPTTR GRPTTR LLN0
GRPTTR
GRPTUC
GSPTTR GSPTTR GSPTTR
GUPPDUP GUPPDUP LLN0
GUPPDUP
PH1PTRC
HZPDIF HZPDIF HZPDIF
INDCALCH INDCALH
ITBGAPC IB16FCVB ITBGAPC
L3CPDIF L3CPDIF LLN0
L3CGAPC
L3CPDIF
L3CPHAR
L3CPTRC
L4UFCNT L4UFCNT L4UFCNT
Table continues on next page

42
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

L6CPDIF L6CPDIF LLN0
L6CGAPC
L6CPDIF
L6CPHAR
L6CPTRC
LAPPGAPC LAPPLLN0 LLN0
LAPPPDUP LAPPPDUP
LAPPPUPF LAPPPUPF
LCCRPTRC LCCRPTRC LCCRPTRC
LCNSPTOC LCNSPTOC LCNSPTOC
LCNSPTOV LCNSPTOV LCNSPTOV
LCP3PTOC LCP3PTOC LCP3PTOC
LCP3PTUC LCP3PTUC LCP3PTUC
LCPTTR LCPTTR LCPTTR
LCZSPTOC LCZSPTOC LCZSPTOC
LCZSPTOV LCZSPTOV LCZSPTOV
LD0LLN0 LLN0 LLN0
LDLPSCH LDLPDIF LDLPSCH
LDRGFC STSGGIO LDRGFC
LEXPDIS LEXPDIS LLN0
LEXPDIS
LEXPTRC
LFPTTR LFPTTR LFPTTR
LMBRFLO LMBRFLO LMBRFLO
LOVPTUV LOVPTUV LOVPTUV
LPHD LPHD LPHD
LT3CPDIF LT3CPDIF LLN0
LT3CGAPC
LT3CPDIF
LT3CPHAR
LT3CPTRC
LT6CPDIF LT6CPDIF LLN0
LT6CGAPC
LT6CPDIF
LT6CPHAR
LT6CPTRC
MVGAPC MVGGIO MVGAPC
NS2PTOC NS2LLN0 LLN0
NS2PTOC NS2PTOC
NS2PTRC NS2PTRC
NS4PTOC EF4LLN0 LLN0
EF4PTRC EF4PTRC
EF4RDIR EF4RDIR
GEN4PHAR PH1PTOC
PH1PTOC
OC4PTOC OC4LLN0 LLN0
GEN4PHAR GEN4PHAR
PH3PTOC PH3PTOC
PH3PTRC PH3PTRC
Table continues on next page

43
Technical Manual
Section 1 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

OEXPVPH OEXPVPH OEXPVPH
OOSPPAM OOSPPAM LLN0
OOSPPAM
OOSPTRC
OV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 LLN0
OV2PTOV OV2PTOV
PH1PTRC PH1PTRC
PAPGAPC PAPGAPC PAPGAPC
PCFCNT PCGGIO PCFCNT
PH4SPTOC OCNDLLN0 LLN0
GEN4PHAR GEN4PHAR
PH1BPTOC PH1BPTOC
PH1PTRC PH1PTRC
PHPIOC PHPIOC PHPIOC
PRPSTATUS RCHLCCH RCHLCCH
SCHLCCH
PSLPSCH ZMRPSL PSLPSCH
PSPPPAM PSPPPAM LLN0
PSPPPAM
PSPPTRC
QCBAY QCBAY LLN0
QCRSV QCRSV QCRSV
REFPDIF REFPDIF REFPDIF
ROTIPHIZ ROTIPHIZ LLN0
ROTIPHIZ
ROTIPTRC
ROV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 LLN0
PH1PTRC PH1PTRC
ROV2PTOV ROV2PTOV
SAPFRC SAPFRC SAPFRC
SAPTOF SAPTOF SAPTOF
SAPTUF SAPTUF SAPTUF
SCCVPTOC SCCVPTOC SCCVPTOC
SCILO SCILO SCILO
SCSWI SCSWI SCSWI
SDEPSDE SDEPSDE LLN0
SDEPSDE
SDEPTOC
SDEPTOV
SDEPTRC
SESRSYN RSY1LLN0 LLN0
AUT1RSYN AUT1RSYN
MAN1RSYN MAN1RSYN
SYNRSYN SYNRSYN
SINGLELCCH SCHLCCH
SLGAPC SLGGIO SLGAPC
SMBRREC SMBRREC SMBRREC
SMPPTRC SMPPTRC SMPPTRC
Table continues on next page

44
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

SP16GAPC SP16GGIO SP16GAPC
SPC8GAPC SPC8GGIO SPC8GAPC
SPGAPC SPGGIO SPGAPC
SSCBR SSCBR SSCBR
SSIMG SSIMG SSIMG
SSIML SSIML SSIML
STBPTOC STBPTOC STBPTOC
STEFPHIZ STEFPHIZ STEFPHIZ
STTIPHIZ STTIPHIZ STTIPHIZ
SXCBR SXCBR SXCBR
SXSWI SXSWI SXSWI
T2WPDIF T2WPDIF LLN0
T2WGAPC
T2WPDIF
T2WPHAR
T2WPTRC
T3WPDIF T3WPDIF LLN0
T3WGAPC
T3WPDIF
T3WPHAR
T3WPTRC
TCLYLTC TCLYLTC TCLYLTC
TCMYLTC TCMYLTC TCMYLTC
TEIGAPC TEIGGIO TEIGAPC
TMAGAPC TMAGGIO TMAGAPC
TR1ATCC TR1ATCC TR1ATCC
TR8ATCC TR8ATCC TR8ATCC
TRPTTR TRPTTR TRPTTR
UV2PTUV GEN2LLN0 LLN0
PH1PTRC PH1PTRC
UV2PTUV UV2PTUV
VDCPTOV VDCPTOV VDCPTOV
VDSPVC VDRFUF VDSPVC
VMMXU VMMXU VMMXU
VMSQI VMSQI VMSQI
VNMMXU VNMMXU VNMMXU
VRPVOC VRLLN0 LLN0
PH1PTRC PH1PTRC
PH1PTUV PH1PTUV
VRPVOC VRPVOC
VSGAPC VSGGIO VSGAPC
WRNCALH WRNCALH
ZC1PPSCH ZPCPSCH ZPCPSCH
ZC1WPSCH ZPCWPSCH ZPCWPSCH
Table continues on next page

45
Technical Manual
Section 1 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

ZCLCPSCH ZCLCPLAL LLN0
ZCLCPSCH
ZCPSCH ZCPSCH ZCPSCH
ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH
ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF
ZGVPDIS ZGVLLN0 LLN0
PH1PTRC PH1PTRC
ZGVPDIS ZGVPDIS
ZGVPTUV ZGVPTUV
ZMCAPDIS ZMCAPDIS ZMCAPDIS
ZMCPDIS ZMCPDIS ZMCPDIS
ZMFCPDIS ZMFCLLN0 LLN0
PSFPDIS PSFPDIS
ZMFPDIS ZMFPDIS
ZMFPDIS ZMFLLN0 LLN0
PSFPDIS PSFPDIS
ZMFPDIS ZMFPDIS
ZMHPDIS ZMHPDIS ZMHPDIS
ZMMAPDIS ZMMAPDIS ZMMAPDIS
ZMMPDIS ZMMPDIS ZMMPDIS
ZMQAPDIS ZMQAPDIS ZMQAPDIS
ZMQPDIS ZMQPDIS ZMQPDIS
ZMRAPDIS ZMRAPDIS ZMRAPDIS
ZMRPDIS ZMRPDIS ZMRPDIS
ZMRPSB ZMRPSB ZMRPSB
ZSMGAPC ZSMGAPC ZSMGAPC

46
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 2
Available functions

Section 2 Available functions

2.1 Main protection functions

2 = number of basic instances

0-3 = option quantities
3- = optional function included in packages A03 (refer to ordering details)
A03

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Bay control

REC670 (C30)
REC670 (A30)

REC670 (A31)

REC670 (B30)
REC670

Differential protection
HZPDIF 87 1Ph high impedance 0-6 3-A02 3-A02 3-A02 6-A07
differential protection

2.2 Back-up protection functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Bay control

REC670 (C30)
REC670 (A30)

REC670 (A31)

REC670 (B30)

REC670

Current protection
PHPIOC 50 Instantaneous phase 0-6 1-C51 1-C51 2-C52 2-C53
overcurrent protection
OC4PTOC 51_671) Four step phase 0-6 1-C51 1-C51 2-C52 2-C53
overcurrent protection
EFPIOC 50N Instantaneous residual 0-6 1-C51 1-C51 2-C52 2-C53
overcurrent protection
EF4PTOC 51N Four step residual 0-6 1-C51 1-C51 2-C52 2-C53
67N2) overcurrent protection

NS4PTOC 46I2 Four step directional 0-6 1-C51 1-C51 2-C52 2-C53
negative phase
sequence overcurrent
protection
SDEPSDE 67N Sensitive directional 0-6 1-C16 1C16 1-C16 1-C16
residual overcurrent
and power protection
Table continues on next page

47
Technical Manual
Section 2 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Available functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Bay control

REC670 (C30)
REC670 (A30)

REC670 (A31)

REC670 (B30)
REC670

LCPTTR 26 Thermal overload 06 1-C51 1-C51 1-C52 1-C53

protection, one time
constant, Celsius
LFPTTR 26 Thermal overload 06 1-C51 1-C51 1-C52 1-C53
protection, one time
constant, Fahrenheit
TRPTTR 49 Thermal overload 0-6 1-C51 1-C51 1-C52 1-C53
protection, two time
constant
CCRBRF 50BF Breaker failure 0-6 1-C51 1-C51 1-C52 1-C53
protection
STBPTOC 50STB Stub protection 0-3
CCPDSC 52PD Pole discordance 0-6 1 1 2 3
protection
GUPPDUP 37 Directional underpower 0-2 1-C17 1-C17 1-C17 1-C17
protection
GOPPDOP 32 Directional overpower 0-2 1-C17 1-C17 1-C17 1-C17
protection
BRCPTOC 46 Broken conductor check 0-1 1 1 1 1
CBPGAPC Capacitor bank 0-3
protection
VRPVOC 51V Voltage restrained 0-3
overcurrent protection

Voltage protection
UV2PTUV 27 Two step undervoltage 0-2 2-D02 2-D02 2-D02 2-D02
protection
OV2PTOV 59 Two step overvoltage 0-2 2-D02 2-D02 2-D02 2-D02
protection
ROV2PTOV 59N Two step residual 0-2 2-D02 2-D02 2-D02 2-D02
overvoltage protection
VDCPTOV 60 Voltage differential 0-6 2 2 2 2
protection
LOVPTUV 27 Loss of voltage check 0-2 1 1 1 2

Frequency protection
SAPTUF 81 Underfrequency 0-6 6-E01 6-E01 6-E01 6-E01
protection
SAPTOF 81 Overfrequency 0-6 6-E01 6-E01 6-E01 6-E01
protection
SAPFRC 81 Rate-of-change 0-6 6-E01 6-E01 6-E01 6-E01
frequency protection
FTAQFVR 81A Frequency time 0-12
accumulation protection
Table continues on next page

48
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 2
Available functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Bay control

REC670 (C30)
REC670 (A30)

REC670 (A31)

REC670 (B30)
REC670

Multipurpose protection
CVGAPC General current and 0-9 4-F01 4-F01 4-F01 4-F01
voltage protection

General calculation
SMAIHPAC Multipurpose filter 0-6

1) 67 requires voltage
2) 67N requires voltage

2.3 Control and monitoring functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Bay control

REC670 (C30)
REC670 (A30)

REC670 (A31)

REC670 (B30)
REC670

Control
SESRSYN 25 Synchrocheck, energizing check 0-6, 0-2 1 1 2 3
and synchronizing
SMBRREC 79 Autorecloser 0-6, 0-4 1-H04 1-H04 2-H05 3-H06
APC8 3 Apparatus control for single bay, 1 1 1
max 8 apparatuses (1CB) incl.
interlocking
APC15 3 Apparatus control for single bay, 1 1
max 15 apparatuses (2CBs) incl.
interlocking
APC30 3 Apparatus control for up to 6 bays, 1 1
max 30 apparatuses (6CBs) incl.
interlocking
QCBAY Apparatus control 1+5/APC30 1 1 1 1+5/
APC3
0
LOCREM Handling of LRswitch positions 1+5/APC30 1 1 1 1+5/
APC3
0
LOCREMCTRL LHMI control of PSTO 1+5/APC30 1 1 1 1+5/
APC3
0
TR1ATCC 90 Automatic voltage control for tap 0-4 1-H11 1-H11 1-H11 2-H16
changer, single control
TR8ATCC 90 Automatic voltage control for tap 0-4 1-H15 1-H15 1-H15 2-H18
changer, parallel control
Table continues on next page

49
Technical Manual
Section 2 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Available functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Bay control

REC670 (C30)
REC670 (A30)

REC670 (A31)

REC670 (B30)
REC670

TCMYLTC 84 Tap changer control and 0-4 4 4 4 4

supervision, 6 binary inputs
TCLYLTC 84 Tap changer control and 0-4 4 4 4 4
supervision, 32 binary inputs
SLGAPC Logic rotating switch for function 15 15 15 15 15
selection and LHMI presentation
VSGAPC Selector mini switch 20 20 20 20 20
DPGAPC Generic communication function for 16 16 16 16 16
Double Point indication
SPC8GAPC Single point generic control 8 signals 5 5 5 5 5
AUTOBITS AutomationBits, command function 3 3 3 3 3
for DNP3.0
SINGLECMD Single command, 16 signals 4 4 4 4 4
VCTRSEND Horizontal communication via 1 1 1 1 1
GOOSE for VCTR
GOOSEVCTRR Horizontal communication via 7 7 7 7 7
CV GOOSE for VCTR
I103CMD Function commands for IEC 1 1 1 1 1
60870-5-103
I103GENCMD Function commands generic for IEC 50 50 50 50 50
60870-5-103
I103POSCMD IED commands with position and 50 50 50 50 50
select for IEC 60870-5-103
I103IEDCMD IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1 1 1 1
I103USRCMD Function commands user defined 1 1 1 1 1
for IEC 60870-5-103
Secondary system supervision
CCSSPVC 87 Current circuit supervision 0-5 1 1 2 3
FUFSPVC Fuse failure supervision 0-4 3 3 3 3
VDSPVC 60 Fuse failure supervision based on 0-4 1-G03 1-G03 1-G03 1-G03
voltage difference
Logic
SMPPTRC 94 Tripping logic 1-6 6 6 6 6
TMAGAPC Trip matrix logic 12 12 12 12 12
ALMCALH Logic for group alarm 5 5 5 5 5
WRNCALH Logic for group warning 5 5 5 5 5
INDCALH Logic for group indication 5 5 5 5 5
Table continues on next page

50
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 2
Available functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Bay control

REC670 (C30)
REC670 (A30)

REC670 (A31)

REC670 (B30)
REC670

AND, OR, INV, Configurable logic blocks 40-280 40-28 40-28 40-28 40-28
PULSETIMER, 0 0 0 0
GATE,
TIMERSET,
XOR, LLD,
SRMEMORY,
RSMEMORY
ANDQT, ORQT, Configurable logic blocks Q/T 0-1
INVERTERQT,
XORQT,
SRMEMORYQ
T,
RSMEMORYQ
T,
TIMERSETQT,
PULSETIMERQ
T, INVALIDQT,
INDCOMBSPQ
T,
INDEXTSPQT
SLGAPC, Extension logic package 0-1
VSGAPC, AND,
OR,
PULSETIMER,
GATE,
TIMERSET,
XOR, LLD,
SRMEMORY,
INV
FXDSIGN Fixed signal function block 1 1 1 1 1
B16I Boolean 16 to Integer conversion 18 18 18 18 18
BTIGAPC Boolean 16 to Integer conversion 16 16 16 16 16
with Logic Node representation
IB16 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion 18 18 18 18 18
ITBGAPC Integer to Boolean 16 conversion 16 16 16 16 16
with Logic Node representation
TEIGAPC Elapsed time integrator with limit 12 12 12 12 12
transgression and overflow
supervision
Monitoring
CVMMXN, Measurements 6 6 6 6 6
CMMXU,
VMMXU,
CMSQI,
VMSQI,
VNMMXU
AISVBAS Function block for service value 1 1 1 1 1
presentation of secondary analog
inputs
EVENT Event function 20 20 20 20 20
Table continues on next page

51
Technical Manual
Section 2 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Available functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Bay control

REC670 (C30)
REC670 (A30)

REC670 (A31)

REC670 (B30)
REC670

DRPRDRE, Disturbance report 1 1 1 1 1

A1RADR,
A2RADR,
A3RADR,
A4RADR,
B1RBDR,
B2RBDR,
B3RBDR,
B4RBDR,
B5RBDR,
B6RBDR
SPGAPC Generic communication function for 64 64 64 64 64
Single Point indication
SP16GAPC Generic communication function for 16 16 16 16 16
Single Point indication 16 inputs
MVGAPC Generic communication function for 24 24 24 24 24
Measured Value
BINSTATREP Logical signal status report 3 3 3 3 3
RANGE_XP Measured value expander block 66 66 66 66 66
SSIMG 63 Gas medium supervision 21 21 21 21 21
SSIML 71 Liquid medium supervision 3 3 3 3 3
SSCBR Circuit breaker monitoring 0-18 3-M13 3-M13 6-M15 9-M17
LMBRFLO Fault locator 0-1 1-M01 1-M01 1-M01 1-M01
I103MEAS Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1 1 1 1
I103MEASUSR Measurands user defined signals 3 3 3 3 3
for IEC 60870-5-103
I103AR Function status auto-recloser for 1 1 1 1 1
IEC 60870-5-103
I103EF Function status earth-fault for IEC 1 1 1 1 1
60870-5-103
I103FLTPROT Function status fault protection for 1 1 1 1 1
IEC 60870-5-103
I103IED IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 1 1 1 1 1
I103SUPERV Supervison status for IEC 1 1 1 1 1
60870-5-103
I103USRDEF Status for user defiend signals for 20 20 20 20 20
IEC 60870-5-103
L4UFCNT Event counter with limit supervision 30 30 30 30 30
Metering
PCFCNT Pulse-counter logic 16 16 16 16 16
ETPMMTR Function for energy calculation and 6 6 6 6 6
demand handling

52
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 2
Available functions

2.4 Communication

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Bay control

REC670 (C30)
REC670 (A30)

REC670 (B30)
REC670 (A31
REC670

Station communication
LONSPA, SPA SPA communication 1 1 1 1 1
protocol
ADE LON communication 1 1 1 1 1
protocol
HORZCOMM Network variables via 1 1 1 1 1
LON
PROTOCOL Operation selection 1 1 1 1 1
between SPA and IEC
60870-5-103 for SLM
RS485PROT Operation selection for 1 1 1 1 1
RS485
RS485GEN RS485 1 1 1 1 1
DNPGEN DNP3.0 communication 1 1 1 1 1
general protocol
DNPGENTCP DNP3.0 communication 1 1 1 1 1
general TCP protocol
CHSERRS48 DNP3.0 for EIA-485 1 1 1 1 1
5 communication protocol
CH1TCP, DNP3.0 for TCP/IP 1 1 1 1 1
CH2TCP, communication protocol
CH3TCP,
CH4TCP
CHSEROPT DNP3.0 for TCP/IP and 1 1 1 1 1
EIA-485 communication
protocol
MST1TCP, DNP3.0 for serial 1 1 1 1 1
MST2TCP, communication protocol
MST3TCP,
MST4TCP
DNPFREC DNP3.0 fault records for 1 1 1 1 1
TCP/IP and EIA-485
communication protocol
IEC61850-8-1 Parameter setting 1 1 1 1 1
function for IEC 61850
GOOSEINTLK Horizontal 59 59 59 59 59
RCV communication via
GOOSE for interlocking
GOOSEBINR Goose binary receive 16 16 16 16 16
CV
GOOSEDPRC GOOSE function block to 64 64 64 64 64
V receive a double point
value
Table continues on next page

53
Technical Manual
Section 2 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Available functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Bay control

REC670 (C30)
REC670 (A30)

REC670 (B30)
REC670 (A31
REC670

GOOSEINTR GOOSE function block to 32 32 32 32 32

CV receive an integer value
GOOSEMVR GOOSE function block to 60 60 60 60 60
CV receive a measurand
value
GOOSESPRC GOOSE function block to 64 64 64 64 64
V receive a single point
value
GOOSEVCTR GOOSE VCTR 1 1 1 1 1
CONF configuration for send
and receive
VCTRSEND Horizontal 1 1 1 1 1
communication via
GOOSE for VCTR
GOOSEVCTR Horizontal 7 7 7 7 7
RCV communication via
GOOSE for VCTR
MULTICMDR Multiple command and 60/10 60/10 60/10 60/10 60/10
CV, transmit
MULTICMDS
ND
FRONT, Ethernet configuration of 1 1 1 1 1
LANABI, links
LANAB,
LANCDI,
LANCD
GATEWAY Ethernet configuration of 1 1 1 1 1
link one
OPTICAL103 IEC 60870-5-103 Optical 1 1 1 1 1
serial communication
RS485103 IEC 60870-5-103 serial 1 1 1 1 1
communication for RS485
AGSAL Generic security 1 1 1 1 1
application component
LD0LLN0 IEC 61850 LD0 LLN0 1 1 1 1 1
SYSLLN0 IEC 61850 SYS LLN0 1 1 1 1 1
LPHD Physical device 1 1 1 1 1
information
PCMACCS IED Configuration 1 1 1 1 1
Protocol
SECALARM Component for mapping 1 1 1 1 1
security events on
protocols such as DNP3
and IEC103
FSTACCS Field service tool access 1 1 1 1 1
via SPA protocol over
ethernet communication
Table continues on next page

54
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 2
Available functions

IEC 61850 ANSI Function description Bay control

REC670 (C30)
REC670 (A30)

REC670 (B30)
REC670 (A31
REC670

ACTIVLOG Activity logging 1 1 1 1 1

parameters
ALTRK Service Tracking 1 1 1 1 1
SINGLELCCH Single ethernet port link 1 1 1 1 1
status
PRPSTATUS Dual ethernet port link 1 1 1 1 1
status
Process bus
communication IEC
61850-9-2 1)
PRP IEC 62439-3 parallel 0-1 1-P03 1-P03 1-P03 1-P03
redundancy protocol
Remote communication
Binary signal transfer 6/36 6/36 6/36 6/36 6/36
receive/transmit
Transmission of analog 1 1 1 1 1
data from LDCM
Receive binary status 6/3/3 6/3/3 6/3/3 6/3/3 6/3/3
from remote LDCM
Scheme communication
ZCPSCH 85 Scheme communication 0-1 1-K01 1-K01 1-K01 1-K01
logic for distance or
overcurrent protection
ZCRWPSCH 85 Current reversal and 0-1 1-K01 1-K01 1-K01 1-K01
weak-end infeed logic for
distance protection
ZCLCPSCH Local acceleration logic 0-1 1-K01 1-K01 1-K01 1-K01
ECPSCH 85 Scheme communication 0-1 1-C51 1-C51 1-C52 1-C53
logic for residual
overcurrent protection
ECRWPSCH 85 Current reversal and 0-1 1-C51 1-C51 1-C52 1-C53
weak-end infeed logic for
residual overcurrent
protection

1) Only included for 9-2LE products

55
Technical Manual
Section 2 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Available functions

2.5 Basic IED functions

Table 2: Basic IED functions

IEC 61850 or function Description
name
INTERRSIG Self supervision with internal event list
SELFSUPEVLST Self supervision with internal event list
TIMESYNCHGEN Time synchronization module
SYNCHBIN, Time synchronization
SYNCHCAN,
SYNCHCMPPS,
SYNCHLON,
SYNCHPPH,
SYNCHPPS,
SYNCHSNTP,
SYNCHSPA,
SYNCHCMPPS
TIMEZONE Time synchronization
DSTBEGIN, GPS time synchronization module
DSTENABLE, DSTEND
IRIG-B Time synchronization
SETGRPS Number of setting groups
ACTVGRP Parameter setting groups
TESTMODE Test mode functionality
CHNGLCK Change lock function
SMBI Signal matrix for binary inputs
SMBO Signal matrix for binary outputs
SMMI Signal matrix for mA inputs
SMAI1 - SMAI20 Signal matrix for analog inputs
3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase
ATHSTAT Authority status
ATHCHCK Authority check
AUTHMAN Authority management
FTPACCS FTP access with password
SPACOMMMAP SPA communication mapping
SPATD Date and time via SPA protocol
DOSFRNT Denial of service, frame rate control for front port
DOSLANAB Denial of service, frame rate control for OEM port AB
DOSLANCD Denial of service, frame rate control for OEM port CD
DOSSCKT Denial of service, socket flow control
GBASVAL Global base values for settings
PRIMVAL Primary system values
ALTMS Time master supervision
ALTIM Time management
Table continues on next page

56
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 2
Available functions

IEC 61850 or function Description

name
ALTRK Service tracking
ACTIVLOG Activity logging parameters
FSTACCS Field service tool access via SPA protocol over ethernet communication
PCMACCS IED Configuration Protocol
SECALARM Component for mapping security events on protocols such as DNP3 and IEC103
DNPGEN DNP3.0 communication general protocol
DNPGENTCP DNP3.0 communication general TCP protocol
CHSEROPT DNP3.0 for TCP/IP and EIA-485 communication protocol
MSTSER DNP3.0 for serial communication protocol
OPTICAL103 IEC 60870-5-103 Optical serial communication
RS485103 IEC 60870-5-103 serial communication for RS485
IEC61850-8-1 Parameter setting function for IEC 61850
HORZCOMM Network variables via LON
LONSPA SPA communication protocol
LEDGEN General LED indication part for LHMI

57
Technical Manual
58
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 3
Analog inputs

Section 3 Analog inputs

3.1 Introduction

Analog input channels must be configured and set properly in order to get correct
measurement results and correct protection operations. For power measuring and
all directional and differential functions the directions of the input currents must be
defined in order to reflect the way the current transformers are installed/connected
in the field ( primary and secondary connections ). Measuring and protection
algorithms in the IED use primary system quantities. Setting values are in primary
quantities as well and it is important to set the data about the connected current and
voltage transformers properly.

A reference PhaseAngleRef can be defined to facilitate service values reading. This

analog channels phase angle will always be fixed to zero degrees and all other
angle information will be shown in relation to this analog input. During testing and
commissioning of the IED the reference channel can be changed to facilitate testing
and service values reading.

The IED has the ability to receive analog values from primary
equipment, that are sampled by Merging units (MU) connected to a
process bus, via the IEC 61850-9-2 LE protocol.

The availability of VT inputs depends on the ordered transformer

input module (TRM) type.

3.2 Function block

The function blocks are not represented in the configuration tool.

The signals appear only in the SMT tool when a TRM is included in
the configuration with the function selector tool. In the SMT tool
they can be mapped to the desired virtual input (SMAI) of the IED
and used internally in the configuration.

59
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Analog inputs

3.3 Signals

Table 3: TRM_12I Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6
CH7(I) STRING Analogue current input 7
CH8(I) STRING Analogue current input 8
CH9(I) STRING Analogue current input 9
CH10(I) STRING Analogue current input 10
CH11(I) STRING Analogue current input 11
CH12(I) STRING Analogue current input 12

Table 4: TRM_6I_6U Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6
CH7(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 7
CH8(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 8
CH9(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 9
CH10(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 10
CH11(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 11
CH12(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 12

Table 5: TRM_6I Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
Table continues on next page

60
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 3
Analog inputs

Name Type Description

CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6

Table 6: TRM_7I_5U Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6
CH7(I) STRING Analogue current input 7
CH8(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 8
CH9(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 9
CH10(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 10
CH11(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 11
CH12(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 12

Table 7: TRM_9I_3U Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6
CH7(I) STRING Analogue current input 7
CH8(I) STRING Analogue current input 8
CH9(I) STRING Analogue current input 9
CH10(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 10
CH11(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 11
CH12(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 12

61
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Analog inputs

3.4 Settings

Dependent on ordered IED type.

62
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 3
Analog inputs

Table 8: AISVBAS Non group settings (basic)

63
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Analog inputs

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

PhaseAngleRef TRM40-Ch1 - - TRM40-Ch1 Reference channel for phase angle
TRM40-Ch2 presentation
TRM40-Ch3
TRM40-Ch4
TRM40-Ch5
TRM40-Ch6
TRM40-Ch7
TRM40-Ch8
TRM40-Ch9
TRM40-Ch10
TRM40-Ch11
TRM40-Ch12
TRM41-Ch1
TRM41-Ch2
TRM41-Ch3
TRM41-Ch4
TRM41-Ch5
TRM41-Ch6
TRM41-Ch7
TRM41-Ch8
TRM41-Ch9
TRM41-Ch10
TRM41-Ch11
TRM41-Ch12
MU1-L1I
MU1-L2I
MU1-L3I
MU1-L4I
MU1-L1U
MU1-L2U
MU1-L3U
MU1-L4U
MU2-L1I
MU2-L2I
MU2-L3I
MU2-L4I
MU2-L1U
MU2-L2U
MU2-L3U
MU2-L4U
MU3-L1I
MU3-L2I
MU3-L3I
MU3-L4I
MU3-L1U
MU3-L2U
MU3-L3U
MU3-L4U
MU4-L1I
MU4-L2I
MU4-L3I
MU4-L4I
MU4-L1U
MU4-L2U
MU4-L3U
MU4-L4U
MU5-L1I
MU5-L2I
MU5-L3I
MU5-L4I
MU5-L1U
MU5-L2U
MU5-L3U
MU5-L4U
MU6-L1I
MU6-L2I
MU6-L3I
MU6-L4I
64 MU6-L1U
MU6-L2U Technical Manual
MU6-L3U
MU6-L4U
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 3
Analog inputs

Table 9: TRM_12I Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint7 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec7 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim7 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint8 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec8 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim8 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint9 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec9 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim9 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint10 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec10 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim10 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint11 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec11 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
Table continues on next page

65
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Analog inputs

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CTprim11 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint12 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec12 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim12 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current

Table 10: TRM_6I_6U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec7 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim7 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec8 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim8 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec9 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim9 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec11 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
Table continues on next page

66
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 3
Analog inputs

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

VTprim11 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec12 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim12 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage

Table 11: TRM_6I Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current

Table 12: TRM_7I_5U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
Table continues on next page

67
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Analog inputs

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint7 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec7 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim7 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec8 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim8 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec9 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim9 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec11 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim11 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec12 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim12 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage

Table 13: TRM_9I_3U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
Table continues on next page

68
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 3
Analog inputs

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint7 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec7 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim7 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint8 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec8 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim8 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint9 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec9 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim9 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec11 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim11 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec12 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim12 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage

3.5 Monitored data

Table 14: AISVBAS Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
Status INTEGER 0=Ok - Service value status
1=Error
2=AngRefLow
3=Uncorrelated

69
Technical Manual
Section 3 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Analog inputs

Table 15: TRM_12I Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module
1=Error status

Table 16: TRM_6I_6U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module
1=Error status

Table 17: TRM_6I Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module
1=Error status

Table 18: TRM_7I_5U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module
1=Error status

Table 19: TRM_9I_3U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module
1=Error status

3.6 Operation principle

The direction of a current depends on the connection of the CT. The main CTs are
typically star connected and can be connected with the star point towards the object
or away from the object. This information must be set in the IED.

The convention of the directionality is defined as follows:

Positive value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction
into the object.
Negative value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction
out from the object.

For directional functions the directional conventions are defined as follows (see
figure 2)

70
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 3
Analog inputs

Forward means the direction is into the object.

Reverse means the direction is out from the object.

Definition of direction Definition of direction

for directional functions for directional functions
Reverse Forward Forward Reverse
Protected Object
Line, transformer, etc
e.g. P, Q, I e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is Measured quantity is
positive when flowing positive when flowing
towards the object towards the object

Set parameter Set parameter

CTStarPoint CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is Correct Setting is
"ToObject" "FromObject"

en05000456.vsd
IEC05000456 V1 EN

Figure 2: Internal convention of the directionality in the IED

If the settings of the primary CT is correct, that is CTStarPoint set as FromObject

or ToObject according to the plant condition, then a positive quantity always flows
towards the protected object, and a Forward direction always looks towards the
protected object.

The settings of the IED is performed in primary values. The ratios of the main CTs
and VTs are therefore basic data for the IED. The user has to set the rated
secondary and primary currents and voltages of the CTs and VTs to provide the
IED with their rated ratios.

The CT and VT ratio and the name on respective channel is done under Main
menu/Hardware/Analog modules in the Parameter Settings tool or on the HMI.

71
Technical Manual
72
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 4
Binary input and output modules

Section 4 Binary input and output modules

4.1 Binary input

4.1.1 Binary input debounce filter

The debounce filter eliminates bounces and short disturbances on a binary input.

A time counter is used for filtering. The time counter is increased once in a
millisecond when a binary input is high, or decreased when a binary input is low. A
new debounced binary input signal is forwarded when the time counter reaches the
set DebounceTime value and the debounced input value is high or when the time
counter reaches 0 and the debounced input value is low. The default setting of
DebounceTime is 1 ms.

The binary input ON-event gets the time stamp of the first rising edge, after which
the counter does not reach 0 again. The same happens when the signal goes down
to 0 again.

4.1.2 Oscillation filter

Binary input wiring can be very long in substations and there are electromagnetic
fields from for example nearby breakers. An oscillation filter is used to reduce the
disturbance from the system when a binary input starts oscillating.

An oscillation counter counts the debounced signal state changes during 1 s. If the
counter value is greater than the set value OscBlock, the input signal is blocked.
The input signal is ignored until the oscillation counter value during 1 s is below
the set value OscRelease.

4.1.3 Settings

4.1.3.1 Setting parameters for binary input modules

Table 20: BIM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
DebounceTime 0.001 - 0.020 s 0.001 0.001 Debounce time for binary inputs
OscBlock 1 - 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit
OscRelease 1 - 30 Hz 1 30 Oscillation release limit

73
Technical Manual
Section 4 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Binary input and output modules

4.1.3.2 Setting parameters for binary input/output module

Table 21: IOMIN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Binary input/output module in operation
On (On) or not (Off)
DebounceTime 0.001 - 0.020 s 0.001 0.001 Debounce time for binary inputs
OscBlock 1 - 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit
OscRelease 1 - 30 Hz 1 30 Oscillation release limit

74
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Section 5 Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.1 Local HMI screen behaviour

5.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Local HMI screen behaviour SCREEN - -

5.1.2 Settings
Table 22: SCREEN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
DisplayTimeout 1 - 120 Min 1 10 Local HMI display timeout
ContrastLevel -100 - 100 % 10 0 Contrast level for display
DefaultScreen - 0 Default screen
EvListSrtOrder Latest on top - - Latest on top Sort order of event list
Oldest on top
AutoIndicationDRP Off - - Off Automatic indication of disturbance report
On
SubstIndSLD No - - No Substitute indication on single line
Yes diagram
InterlockIndSLD No - - No Interlock indication on single line diagram
Yes
BypassCommands No - - No Enable bypass of commands
Yes

5.2 Local HMI signals

5.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Local HMI signals LHMICTRL - -

5.2.2 Function block

75
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

LHMICTRL
CLRLEDS HMI-ON
RED-S
YELLOW-S
YELLOW-F
CLRPULSE
LEDSCLRD

IEC09000320-1-en.vsd
IEC09000320 V1 EN

Figure 3: LHMICTRL function block

5.2.3 Signals
Table 23: LHMICTRL Input signals
Name Type Default Description
CLRLEDS BOOLEAN 0 Input to clear the LCD-HMI LEDs

Table 24: LHMICTRL Output signals

Name Type Description
HMI-ON BOOLEAN Backlight of the LCD display is active
RED-S BOOLEAN Red LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-S BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-F BOOLEAN Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is flashing
CLRPULSE BOOLEAN A pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCD-
HMI are cleared
LEDSCLRD BOOLEAN Active when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are not
active

5.3 Basic part for LED indication module

5.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Basic part for LED indication module LEDGEN - -
Basic part for LED indication module GRP1_LED1 - - -
GRP1_LED15
GRP2_LED1 -
GRP2_LED15
GRP3_LED1 -
GRP3_LED15

5.3.2 Function block

76
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

LEDGEN
BLOCK NEWIND
RESET ACK

IEC09000321-1-en.vsd
IEC09000321 V1 EN

Figure 4: LEDGEN function block

GRP1_LED1
^HM1L01R
^HM1L01Y
^HM1L01G
IEC09000322 V1 EN

Figure 5: GRP1_LED1 function block

The GRP1_LED1 function block is an example, all 15 LED in each of group 1 - 3

has a similar function block.

5.3.3 Signals
Table 25: LEDGEN Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Input to block the operation of the LEDs
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input to acknowledge/reset the indication LEDs

Table 26: LEDGEN Output signals

Name Type Description
NEWIND BOOLEAN New indication signal if any LED indication input
is set
ACK BOOLEAN A pulse is provided when the LEDs are
acknowledged

Table 27: GRP1_LED1 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
HM1L01R BOOLEAN 0 Red indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
HM1L01Y BOOLEAN 0 Yellow indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
HM1L01G BOOLEAN 0 Green indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1

77
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.3.4 Settings
Table 28: LEDGEN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
tRestart 0.0 - 100.0 s 0.1 0.0 Defines the disturbance length
tMax 0.1 - 100.0 s 0.1 1.0 Maximum time for the definition of a
disturbance

Table 29: GRP1_LED1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SequenceType Follow-S - - Follow-S Sequence type for LED 1, local HMI
Follow-F alarm group 1
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
LabelOff 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_OFF Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is off
LabelRed 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_RED Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is red
LabelYellow 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_YELLOW Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is yellow
LabelGreen 0 - 18 - 1 G1L01_GREEN Label string shown when LED 1, alarm
group 1 is green

5.3.5 Monitored data

Table 30: GRP1_LED1 Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
LEDStatus INTEGER 1=Red flash - Status of LED 1, local
2=Red steady HMI alarm group 1
3=Yellow flash
4=Yellow steady
5=Green flash
6=Green steady
0=Off

5.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
LCD part for HMI Function Keys FNKEYMD1 - - -
Control module FNKEYMD5

78
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.4.2 Function block

FNKEYMD1
^LEDCTL1 ^FKEYOUT1
IEC09000327 V1 EN

Figure 6: FNKEYMD1 function block

Only the function block for the first button is shown above. There is a similar block
for every function button.

5.4.3 Signals
Table 31: FNKEYMD1 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
LEDCTL1 BOOLEAN 0 LED control input for function key

Table 32: FNKEYMD1 Output signals

Name Type Description
FKEYOUT1 BOOLEAN Output controlled by function key

5.4.4 Settings
Table 33: FNKEYMD1 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Mode Off - - Off Output operation mode
Toggle
Pulsed
PulseTime 0.001 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Pulse time for output controlled by
LCDFn1
LabelOn 0 - 18 - 1 LCD_FN1_ON Label for LED on state
LabelOff 0 - 18 - 1 LCD_FN1_OFF Label for LED off state

Table 34: FNKEYTY1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Type Off - - Off Function key type
Menu shortcut
Control
MenuShortcut Menu shortcut for
function key

79
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.4 Operation principle

5.4.1 Local HMI

IEC13000239-1-en.vsd
IEC13000239 V1 EN

Figure 7: Local human-machine interface

The LHMI of the IED contains the following elements:

Display (LCD)
Buttons
LED indicators
Communication port for PCM600

The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling.

5.4.1.1 Display

The LHMI includes a graphical monochrome display with a resolution of 320 x

240 pixels. The character size can vary. The amount of characters and rows fitting
the view depends on the character size and the view that is shown.

80
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

The display view is divided into four basic areas.

1 2

3 IEC13000063-2-en.vsd
4
IEC13000063 V2 EN

Figure 8: Display layout

1 Path
2 Content
3 Status
4 Scroll bar (appears when needed)

The path shows the current location in the menu structure. If the path is too
long to be shown, it is truncated from the beginning, and the truncation is
indicated with three dots.
The content area shows the menu content.
The status area shows the current IED time, the user that is currently logged in
and the object identification string which is settable via the LHMI or with
PCM600.
If text, pictures or other items do not fit in the display, a vertical scroll bar
appears on the right. The text in content area is truncated from the beginning if
it does not fit in the display horizontally. Truncation is indicated with three dots.

81
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

IEC13000045-2-en.vsd
IEC13000045 V2 EN

Figure 9: Truncated path

The number after the function instance, for example ETHFRNT:1, indicates the
instance number.

The function button panel shows on request what actions are possible with the
function buttons. Each function button has a LED indication that can be used as a
feedback signal for the function button control action. The LED is connected to the
required signal with PCM600.

IEC13000281-1-en.vsd
GUID-C98D972D-D1D8-4734-B419-161DBC0DC97B V1 EN

Figure 10: Function button panel

The alarm LED panel shows on request the alarm text labels for the alarm LEDs.
Three alarm LED pages are available.

82
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

IEC13000240-1-en.vsd
GUID-5157100F-E8C0-4FAB-B979-FD4A971475E3 V1 EN

Figure 11: Alarm LED panel

The function button and alarm LED panels are not visible at the same time. Each
panel is shown by pressing one of the function buttons or the Multipage button.
Pressing the ESC button clears the panel from the display. Both the panels have
dynamic width that depends on the label string length that the panel contains.

5.4.1.2 LEDs

The LHMI includes three protection status LEDs above the display: Ready, Start
and Trip.

There are 15 programmable alarm LEDs on the front of the LHMI. Each LED can
indicate three states with the colors: green, yellow and red. The alarm texts related
to each three-color LED are divided into three pages.

There are 3 separate pages of LEDs available. The 15 physical three-color LEDs in
one LED group can indicate 45 different signals. Altogether, 135 signals can be
indicated since there are three LED groups. The LEDs are lit according to priority,
with red being the highest and green the lowest priority. For example, if on one
page there is an indication that requires the green LED to be lit, and on another
page there is an indication that requires the red LED to be lit, the red LED takes
priority and is lit. The LEDs can be configured with PCM600 and the operation
mode can be selected with the LHMI or PCM600.

Information pages for the alarm LEDs are shown by pressing the Multipage button.
Pressing that button cycles through the three pages. A lit or un-acknowledged LED
is indicated with a highlight. Such lines can be selected by using the Up / Down
arrow buttons. Pressing the Enter key shows details about the selected LED.
Pressing the ESC button exits from information pop-ups as well as from the LED
panel as such.

The Multipage button has a LED. This LED is lit whenever any LED on any page
is lit. If there are un-acknowledged alarm LEDs, then the Multipage LED blinks.

83
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

To acknowledge LEDs, press the Clear button to enter the Reset menu (refer to
description of this menu for details).

There are two additional LEDs which are next to the control buttons and
. They represent the status of the circuit breaker.

5.4.1.3 Keypad

The LHMI keypad contains push-buttons which are used to navigate in different
views or menus. The push-buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, reset
indications, provide help and switch between local and remote control mode.

The keypad also contains programmable push-buttons that can be configured either
as menu shortcut or control buttons.

IEC13000239-1-en.vsd
GUID-0C172139-80E0-45B1-8A3F-1EAE9557A52D V2 EN

Figure 12: LHMI keypad

84
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

24

1
23
2
18

3
19

6 20

21

7 22

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

IEC13000249-1-en.vsd
GUID-77E71883-0B80-4647-8205-EE56723511D2 V2 EN

Figure 13: LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command push-
buttons and RJ-45 communication port

1...5 Function button

6 Close
7 Open
8 Escape
9 Left
10 Down
11 Up
12 Right
13 Key
14 Enter
15 Remote/Local
16 Uplink LED
17 Not in use
18 Multipage
19 Menu
20 Clear
21 Help
22 Communication port

85
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

23 Programmable alarm LEDs

24 Protection status LEDs

5.4.2 LED

5.4.2.1 Functionality

The function blocks HMI_LED and HMI_LEDS controls and supplies information
about the status of the indication LEDs. The input and output signals of the
function blocks are configured with PCM600. The input signal for each LED is
selected individually using SMT or ACT. Each LED is controlled by a HMI_LEDS
function block, that controls the color and the operating mode.

Each indication LED on local HMI can be set individually to operate in 6 different
sequences; two as follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching sequence
types are intended to be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting
or restarting mode, with reset functionality. The other two are intended to be used
as signalling system in collecting mode with acknowledgment functionality.

5.4.2.2 Status LEDs

There are three status LEDs above the LCD in the front of the IED, green, yellow
and red.

The green LED has a fixed function that present the healthy status of the IED. The
yellow and red LEDs are user configured. The yellow LED can be used to indicate
that a disturbance report is triggered (steady) or that the IED is in test mode
(flashing). The red LED can be used to indicate a trip command.

5.4.2.3 Indication LEDs

Operating modes
Collecting mode

LEDs, which are used in collecting mode of operation, are accumulated

continuously until the unit is acknowledged manually. This mode is suitable
when the LEDs are used as a simplified alarm system.

Re-starting mode

In the re-starting mode of operation each new start resets all previous active
LEDs and activates only those, which appear during one disturbance. Only
LEDs defined for re-starting mode with the latched sequence type 6
(LatchedReset-S) will initiate a reset and a restart at a new disturbance. A

86
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

disturbance is defined to end a settable time after the reset of the activated
input signals or when the maximum time limit has elapsed.

Acknowledgment/reset
From local HMI
The active indications can be acknowledged/reset manually. Manual
acknowledgment and manual reset have the same meaning and is a
common signal for all the operating sequences and LEDs. The function
is positive edge triggered, not level triggered. The acknowledgment/reset
is performed via the button and menus on the LHMI.

From function input

The active indications can also be acknowledged/reset from an input,
ACK_RST, to the function. This input can for example be configured to
a binary input operated from an external push button. The function is
positive edge triggered, not level triggered. This means that even if the
button is continuously pressed, the acknowledgment/reset only affects
indications active at the moment when the button is first pressed.

Automatic reset
The automatic reset can only be performed for indications defined for re-
starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). When
the automatic reset of the LEDs has been performed, still persisting
indications will be indicated with a steady light.

Operating sequence
The sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type the LED
follow the input signal completely. For the Latched type each LED latches to the
corresponding input signal until it is reset.

The figures below show the function of available sequences selectable for each
LED separately. For sequence 1 and 2 Follow type, the acknowledgment/reset
function is not applicable. Sequence 3 and 4 Latched type with acknowledgement
are only working in collecting mode. Sequence 5 is working according to Latched
type and collecting mode while Sequence 6 is working according to Latched type
and re-starting mode. The letters S and F in the sequence names have the meaning
S = Steady and F = Flash.

At the activation of the input signal, the indication obtains corresponding color
corresponding to the activated input and operates according to the selected
sequence diagrams below.

In the sequence diagrams the LEDs have the following characteristics:

87
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

= No indication = Steady light = Flash

G= Green Y= Yellow R= Red

IEC09000311.vsd
IEC09000311 V1 EN

Figure 14: Symbols used in the sequence diagrams

Sequence 1 (Follow-S)
This sequence follows all the time, with a steady light, the corresponding input
signals. It does not react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of
the other LEDs in its operation.

Activating
signal

LED

IEC01000228_2_en.vsd
IEC01000228 V2 EN

Figure 15: Operating Sequence 1 (Follow-S)

If inputs for two or more colors are active at the same time to one LED the priority
is as described above. An example of the operation when two colors are activated
in parallel is shown in Figure 16.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal RED

LED G G R G

IEC09000312_1_en.vsd
IEC09000312 V1 EN

Figure 16: Operating sequence 1, two colors

Sequence 2 (Follow-F)
This sequence is the same as Sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing
instead of showing steady light.

Sequence 3 LatchedAck-F-S
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is
independent of the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal,
the indication starts flashing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if

88
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

the signal is not present any more. If the signal is still present after
acknowledgment it gets a steady light.

Activating
signal

LED

Acknow.
en01000231.vsd
IEC01000231 V1 EN

Figure 17: Operating Sequence 3 LatchedAck-F-S

When an acknowledgment is performed, all indications that appear before the

indication with higher priority has been reset, will be acknowledged, independent
of if the low priority indication appeared before or after acknowledgment. In
Figure 18 it is shown the sequence when a signal of lower priority becomes
activated after acknowledgment has been performed on a higher priority signal.
The low priority signal will be shown as acknowledged when the high priority
signal resets.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal RED

R R G
LED

Acknow
IEC09000313_1_en.vsd
IEC09000313 V1 EN

Figure 18: Operating Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S), 2 colors involved

If all three signals are activated the order of priority is still maintained.
Acknowledgment of indications with higher priority will acknowledge also low
priority indications, which are not visible according to Figure 19.

89
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED

LED G Y R R Y

Acknow.
IEC09000314-1-en.vsd
IEC09000314 V1 EN

Figure 19: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 1

If an indication with higher priority appears after acknowledgment of a lower

priority indication the high priority indication will be shown as not acknowledged
according to Figure 20.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED

LED G G R R Y

Acknow.
IEC09000315-1-en.vsd
IEC09000315 V1 EN

Figure 20: Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 2

Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F)
This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing
light have been alternated.

Sequence 5 LatchedColl-S
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the
activation of the input signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The
difference to sequence 3 and 4 is that indications that are still activated will not be
affected by the reset that is, immediately after the positive edge of the reset has
been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is performed. Every LED
is independent of the other LEDs in its operation.

90
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Activating
signal

LED

Reset

IEC01000235_2_en.vsd
IEC01000235 V2 EN

Figure 21: Operating Sequence 5 LatchedColl-S

That means if an indication with higher priority has reset while an indication with
lower priority still is active at the time of reset, the LED will change color
according to Figure 22.

Activating
signal GREEN

Activating
signal RED

R G
LED

Reset
IEC09000316_1_en.vsd
IEC09000316 V1 EN

Figure 22: Operating sequence 5, two colors

Sequence 6 LatchedReset-S
In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are
automatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other
LEDs set to Sequence 6 LatchedReset-S. Also in this case indications that are still
activated will not be affected by manual reset, that is, immediately after the
positive edge of that the manual reset has been executed a new reading and storing
of active signals is performed. LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely independent
in its operation of LEDs set for other sequences.

Timing diagram for sequence 6

Figure 23 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.

91
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Disturbance
tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000239_2-en.vsd
IEC01000239 V2 EN

Figure 23: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within

same disturbance

Figure 24 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has
elapsed.

Disturbance Disturbance

tRestart tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000240_2_en.vsd
IEC01000240 V2 EN

Figure 24: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two different disturbances

92
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Figure 25 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first
one has reset but before tRestart has elapsed.

Disturbance

tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000241_2_en.vsd
IEC01000241 V2 EN

Figure 25: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within

same disturbance but with reset of activating signal between

Figure 26 shows the timing diagram for manual reset.

Disturbance

tRestart

Activating
signal 1

Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2

Automatic
reset

Manual
reset
IEC01000242_2_en.vsd
IEC01000242 V2 EN

Figure 26: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), manual reset

93
Technical Manual
Section 5 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

5.4.3 Function keys

5.4.3.1 Functionality

Local Human-Machine-Interface (LHMI) has five function buttons, directly to the

left of the LCD, that can be configured either as menu shortcut or control buttons.
Each button has an indication LED that can be configured in the application
configuration.

When used as a menu shortcut, a function button provides a fast way to navigate
between default nodes in the menu tree. When used as a control, the button can
control a binary signal.

5.4.3.2 Operation principle

Each output on the FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function blocks can be controlled

from the LHMI function keys. By pressing a function button on the LHMI, the
output status of the actual function block will change. These binary outputs can in
turn be used to control other function blocks, for example, switch control blocks,
binary I/O outputs etc.

FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function block also has a number of settings and

parameters that control the behavior of the function block. These settings and
parameters are normally set using the PST.

Operating sequence
The operation mode is set individually for each output, either OFF, TOGGLE or
PULSED.

Setting OFF

This mode always gives the output the value..

Input value

Output value

IEC09000330-1-en.vsd
IEC09000330 V1 EN

Figure 27: Sequence diagram for setting OFF

Setting TOGGLE

In this mode the output toggles each time the function block detects that the input
has been written. Note that the input attribute is reset each time the function block
executes. The function block execution is marked with a dotted line below.

94
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI

Input value

Output value

IEC09000331_1_en.vsd
IEC09000331 V1 EN

Figure 28: Sequence diagram for setting TOGGLE

Setting PULSED

In this mode the output will be high for as long as the setting pulse time. After this
time the output will go back to 0. The input attribute is reset when the function
block detects it being high and there is no output pulse.

Note that the third positive edge on the input attribute does not cause a pulse, since
the edge was applied during pulse output. A new pulse can only begin when the
output is zero; else the trigger edge is lost.

Input value

Output value
tpulse tpulse
IEC09000332_1_en.vsd
IEC09000332 V1 EN

Figure 29: Sequence diagram for setting PULSED

Input function
All inputs work the same way: When the LHMI is configured so that a certain
function button is of type CONTROL, then the corresponding input on this
function block becomes active, and will light the yellow function button LED when
high. This functionality is active even if the function block operation setting is set
to off.

95
Technical Manual
96
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

Section 6 Differential protection

6.1 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF

6.1.1 Identification
IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
Function description
identification identification device number

1Ph High impedance differential Id

HZPDIF 87
protection

SYMBOL-CC V2 EN

6.1.2 Functionality
The 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF functions can be used
when the involved CT cores have the same turns ratio and similar magnetizing
characteristics. It utilizes an external CT secondary current summation by wiring.
Actually all CT secondary circuits which are involved in the differential scheme
are connected in parallel. External series resistor, and a voltage dependent resistor
which are both mounted externally to the IED, are also required.

The external resistor unit shall be ordered under IED accessories in the Product Guide.

HZPDIF can be used to protect tee-feeders or busbars, reactors, motors, auto-

transformers, capacitor banks and so on. One such function block is used for a high-
impedance restricted earth fault protection. Three such function blocks are used to
form three-phase, phase-segregated differential protection. Several function block
instances (for example, six) can be available in a single IED.

6.1.3 Function block

HZPDIF
ISI* TRIP
BLOCK ALARM
BLKTR MEASVOLT

IEC05000363-2-en.vsd
IEC05000363 V2 EN

Figure 30: HZPDIF function block

97
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Differential protection

6.1.4 Signals
Table 35: HZPDIF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
ISI GROUP - Single phase current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip

Table 36: HZPDIF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal
MEASVOLT REAL Measured RMS voltage on CT secondary side

6.1.5 Settings
Table 37: HZPDIF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
U>Alarm 5 - 500 V 1 10 Alarm voltage level in volts on CT
secondary side
tAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay to activate alarm
U>Trip 10 - 900 V 1 100 Operate voltage level in volts on CT
secondary side
SeriesResistor 50 - 20000 Ohm 1 250 Value of series resistor in Ohms

6.1.6 Monitored data

Table 38: HZPDIF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MEASVOLT REAL - kV Measured RMS voltage
on CT secondary side

6.1.7 Operation principle

High impedance protection system is a simple technique which requires that all
CTs, used in the protection scheme, have relatively high knee point voltage, similar
magnetizing characteristic and the same ratio. These CTs are installed in all ends of
the protected object. In order to make a scheme all CT secondary circuits belonging
to one phase are connected in parallel. From the CT junction points a measuring

98
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

branch is connected. The measuring branch is a series connection of one variable

setting resistor (or series resistor) RS with high ohmic value and an over-current
element. Thus, the high impedance differential protection responds to the current
flowing through the measuring branch. However, this current is result of a
differential voltage caused by this parallel CT connection across the measuring
branch. Non-linear resistor (that is, metrosil) is used in order to protect entire
scheme from high peak voltages which may appear during internal faults. Typical
high impedance differential scheme is shown in Figure 31. Note that only one
phase is shown in this figure.

RS

3 U
I
1
I> (50) 5

2
GUID-5CEAF088-D92B-45E5-B98F-3083894A694C V1 EN

Figure 31: HZPDIF scheme

Where in the Figure:

1. shows one main CT secondary winding connected in parallel with all other
CTs, from the same phase, connected to this scheme.
2. shows the scheme earthing point.

It is of utmost importance to insure that only one earthing point

exists in such protection scheme.

3. shows the setting (stabilizing) resistor RS.

4. shows the over-current measuring element.

The series connection of stabilizing resistor and over-current

element is designated as measuring branch.

5. shows the non-linear resistor (that is, metrosil).

6. U is the voltage across the CT paralleling point (for example, across the
measuring branch).
7. I is the current flowing through the measuring branch.

99
Technical Manual
Section 6 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Differential protection

U and I are interrelated in accordance with the following

formula U=RS I.

Due to the parallel CT connections the high impedance differential relay can only
measure one current and that is the relay operating quantity. That means that there
is no any stabilizing quantity (that is, bias) in high-impedance differential
protection schemes. Therefore in order to guaranty the stability of the differential
relay during external faults the operating quantity must not exceed the set pickup
value. Thus, for external faults, even with severe saturation of some of the current
transformers, the voltage across the measuring branch shall not rise above the relay
set pickup value. To achieve that a suitable value for setting resistor RS is selected
in such a way that the saturated CT secondary winding provides a much lower
impedance path for the false differential current than the measuring branch. In case
of an external fault causing current transformer saturation, the non-saturated
current transformers drive most of the spill differential current through the
secondary winding of the saturated current transformer and not through the
measuring brunch of the relay. The voltage drop across the saturated current
transformer secondary winding appears also across the measuring brunch, however
it will typically be relatively small. Therefore, the pick-up value of the relay has to
be set above this false operating voltage.

See the application manual for operating voltage and sensitivity calculation.

6.1.7.1 Logic diagram

The logic diagram shows the operation principles for the 1Ph High impedance
differential protection function HZPDIF, see Figure 32.

The function utilizes the raw samples from the single phase current input connected
to it. Thus the twenty samples per fundamental power system cycle are available to
the HZPDIF function. These current samples are first multiplied with the set value
for the used stabilizing resistor in order to get voltage waveform across the
measuring branch. The voltage waveform is then filtered in order to get its RMS
value. Note that used filtering is designed in such a way that it ensures complete
removal of the DC current component which may be present in the primary fault
current. The voltage RMS value is then compared with set Alarm and Trip
thresholds. Note that the TRIP signal is intentionally delayed on drop off for 30 ms
within the function. The measured RMS voltage is available as a service value
from the function. The function has block and trip block inputs available as well.

100
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 6
Differential protection

IEC05000301 V1 EN

Figure 32: Logic diagram for 1Ph High impedance differential protection
HZPDIF

6.1.8 Technical data

Table 39: HZPDIF technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage (10-900) V 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
I=U/R 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio >95% at (30-900) V -

Maximum U>Trip2/SeriesResistor 200 W -
continuous power
Operate time at 0 Min = 5 ms
to 10 x Ud Max = 15 ms

Reset time at 10 Min = 75 ms

to 0 x Ud Max = 95 ms

Critical impulse 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Ud -

time
Operate time at 0 Min = 25 ms
to 2 x Ud Max = 35 ms

Reset time at 2 Min = 50 ms

to 0 x Ud Max = 70 ms

Critical impulse 15 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Ud -

time

101
Technical Manual
102
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

Section 7 Current protection

7.1 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-

phase output PHPIOC

7.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Instantaneous phase overcurrent PHPIOC 50
protection 3-phase output
3I>>

SYMBOL-Z V1 EN

7.1.2 Functionality
The instantaneous three phase overcurrent function has a low transient overreach
and short tripping time to allow use as a high set short-circuit protection function.

7.1.3 Function block

PHPIOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK TRL1
ENMULT TRL2
TRL3

IEC04000391-2-en.vsd
IEC04000391 V2 EN

Figure 33: PHPIOC function block

7.1.4 Signals

Table 40: PHPIOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase current
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable current start value multiplier

103
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

Table 41: PHPIOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal from any phase
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3

7.1.5 Settings

Table 42: PHPIOC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OpMode 2 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Select operation mode 2-out of 3 / 1-out
1 out of 3 of 3
IP>> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 200 Operate phase current level in % of IBase

Table 43: PHPIOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
StValMult 0.5 - 5.0 - 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for operate current level

Table 44: PHPIOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

7.1.6 Monitored data

Table 45: PHPIOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IL1 REAL - A Current in phase L1
IL2 REAL - A Current in phase L2
IL3 REAL - A Current in phase L3

7.1.7 Operation principle

The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter
(DFT) block. The RMS value of each phase current is derived from the
fundamental frequency components, as well as sampled values of each phase
current. These phase current values are fed to the instantaneous phase overcurrent

104
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

protection 3-phase output function PHPIOC. In a comparator the RMS values are
compared to the set operation current value of the function (IP>>). If a phase
current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator for this
phase is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal TRLn
(n=1,2,3) for this phase and the TRIP signal that is common for all three phases.

There is an operation mode (OpMode) setting: 1 out of 3 or 2 out of 3. If the

parameter is set to 1 out of 3 any phase trip signal will be activated. If the
parameter is set to 2 out of 3 at least two phase signals must be activated for trip.

There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current
(StValMult) via a binary input (ENMULT). In some applications the operation
value needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents.

PHPIOC can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK.

7.1.8 Technical data

Table 46: PHPIOC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (502500)% of -

IBase
Operate time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Reset time at 2 to 0 x Iset Min. = 15ms -
Max. = 25ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Operate time at 0 to 10 x Iset Min. = 5ms -

Max. = 15 ms
Reset time at 10 to 0 x Iset Min. = 25ms -
Max. = 40 ms
Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset -

Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms -

7.2 Four step phase overcurrent protection 3-phase

output OC4PTOC

105
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

7.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC 51/67
3I>
3-phase output
4
alt
4
TOC-REVA V1 EN

7.2.2 Functionality
The four step three-phase overcurrent protection function OC4PTOC has an
inverse or definite time delay independent for step 1 to 4 separately.

All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are available together with an
optional user defined time characteristic.

The directional function needs voltage as it is voltage polarized with memory. The
function can be set to be directional or non-directional independently for each of
the steps.

Second harmonic blocking level can be set for the function and can be used to
block each step individually

106
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

7.2.3 Function block

OC4PTOC
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TR1
BLOCK TR2
BLKTR TR3
BLKST1 TR4
BLKST2 TRL1
BLKST3 TRL2
BLKST4 TRL3
ENMULT1 TR1L1
ENMULT2 TR1L2
ENMULT3 TR1L3
ENMULT4 TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
TR3L1
TR3L2
TR3L3
TR4L1
TR4L2
TR4L3
START
ST1
ST2
ST3
ST4
STL1
STL2
STL3
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3
ST3L1
ST3L2
ST3L3
ST4L1
ST4L2
ST4L3
2NDHARM
DIRL1
DIRL2
DIRL3

IEC06000187-2-en.vsd
IEC06000187 V2 EN

Figure 34: OC4PTOC function block

7.2.4 Signals
Table 47: OC4PTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step1
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step2
Table continues on next page

107
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

Name Type Default Description

BLKST3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step3
BLKST4 BOOLEAN 0 Block of Step4
ENMULT1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step1
ENMULT2 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step2
ENMULT3 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step3
ENMULT4 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step4

Table 48: OC4PTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TR1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1
TR2 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step2
TR3 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step3
TR4 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step4
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
TR1L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L1
TR1L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L2
TR1L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L3
TR2L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L1
TR2L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L2
TR2L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L3
TR3L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step3 phase L1
TR3L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step3 phase L2
TR3L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step3 phase L3
TR4L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step4 phase L1
TR4L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step4 phase L2
TR4L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step4 phase L3
START BOOLEAN General start signal
ST1 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step1
ST2 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step2
ST3 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step3
ST4 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step4
STL1 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L2
Table continues on next page

108
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

Name Type Description

STL3 BOOLEAN Start signal from phase L3
ST1L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L1
ST1L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L2
ST1L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L3
ST2L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L1
ST2L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L2
ST2L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L3
ST3L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step3 phase L1
ST3L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step3 phase L2
ST3L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step3 phase L3
ST4L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step4 phase L1
ST4L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step4 phase L2
ST4L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step4 phase L3
ST2NDHRM BOOLEAN Second harmonic detected
DIRL1 INTEGER Direction for phase1
DIRL2 INTEGER Direction for phase2
DIRL3 INTEGER Direction for phase3

7.2.5 Settings
Table 49: OC4PTOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
AngleRCA 40 - 65 Deg 1 55 Relay characteristic angle (RCA)
AngleROA 40 - 89 Deg 1 80 Relay operation angle (ROA)
StartPhSel 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of
2 out of 3 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3)
3 out of 3
DirMode1 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Table continues on next page

109
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for
ANSI Very inv. step 1
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I1> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 1000 Operating phase current level for step 1
in % of IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Independent (definite) time delay of step
1
k1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 1
IMin1 1 - 10000 %IB 1 100 Minimum operate current for step1 in %
of IBase
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 1
I1Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for
step 1
DirMode2 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 2 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist2 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for
ANSI Very inv. step 2
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I2> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 500 Operating phase current level for step 2
in % of IBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Independent (definite) time delay of step
2
Table continues on next page

110
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

k2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 2
IMin2 1 - 10000 %IB 1 50 Minimum operate current for step2 in %
of IBase
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 2
I2Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for
step 2
DirMode3 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 3 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist3 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for
ANSI Very inv. step 3
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I3> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 250 Operating phase current level for step 3
in % of IBase
t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Independent (definite) time delay of step
3
k3 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 3
IMin3 1 - 10000 %IB 1 33 Minimum operate current for step3 in %
of IBase
t3Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 3
I3Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for
step 3
DirMode4 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 4 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Table continues on next page

111
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist4 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for
ANSI Very inv. step 4
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I4> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 175 Operating phase current level for step 4
in % of IBase
t4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Independent (definite) time delay of step
4
k4 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 4
IMin4 1 - 10000 %IB 1 17 Minimum operate current for step4 in %
of IBase
t4Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 4
I4Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for current operate level for
step 4

Table 50: OC4PTOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IMinOpPhSel 1 - 100 %IB 1 7 Minimum current for phase selection in
% of IBase
2ndHarmStab 5 - 100 %IB 1 20 Operate level of 2nd harmonic curr in %
of fundamental curr
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 1
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Constant reset time for step 1
tPCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 1
tACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 1
tBCrv1 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 1
tCCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 1
tPRCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
programmable curve for step 1
Table continues on next page

112
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tTRCrv1 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
programmable curve for step 1
tCRCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
programmable curve for step 1
HarmBlock1 Off - - Off Enable block of step 1 from harmonic
On restrain
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 2
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Constant reset time for step 2
tPCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 2
tACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 2
tBCrv2 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 2
tCCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 2
tPRCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
programmable curve for step 2
tTRCrv2 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
programmable curve for step 2
tCRCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
programmable curve for step 2
HarmBlock2 Off - - Off Enable block of step 2 from harmonic
On restrain
ResetTypeCrv3 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 3
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tReset3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Constant reset time for step 3
tPCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 3
tACrv3 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 3
tBCrv3 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 3
tCCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 3
tPRCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
programmable curve for step 3
tTRCrv3 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
programmable curve for step 3
tCRCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
programmable curve for step 3
HarmBlock3 Off - - Off Enable block of step 3 from harmonic
On restrain
ResetTypeCrv4 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for step 4
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Table continues on next page

113
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tReset4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Constant reset time for step 4
tPCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 4
tACrv4 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 4
tBCrv4 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 4
tCCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 4
tPRCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
programmable curve for step 4
tTRCrv4 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
programmable curve for step 4
tCRCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
programmable curve for step 4
HarmBlock4 Off - - Off Enable block of step 4 from harmonic
On restrain

Table 51: OC4PTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MeasType DFT - - DFT Selection between DFT and RMS
RMS measurement
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

7.2.6 Monitored data

Table 52: OC4PTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
DIRL1 INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction for phase1
2=Reverse
0=No direction
DIRL2 INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction for phase2
2=Reverse
0=No direction
DIRL3 INTEGER 1=Forward - Direction for phase3
2=Reverse
0=No direction
IL1 REAL - A Current in phase L1
IL2 REAL - A Current in phase L2
IL3 REAL - A Current in phase L3

114
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

7.2.7 Operation principle

The Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC is divided into four
different sub-functions, one for each step. For each step x , where x is step 1, 2, 3
and 4, an operation mode is set by DirModex: Off/Non-directional/Forward/
Reverse.

The protection design can be divided in four parts:

The direction element

The harmonic Restraint Blocking function
The four step over current function
The mode selection

If VT inputs are not available or not connected, setting parameter

DirModex shall be left to default value, Non-directional.

4 step over current

Direction dirPh1Flt element faultState
faultState
Element One element for each
dirPh2Flt step
I3P dirPh3Flt START

U3P

TRIP

Harmonic harmRestrBlock
Restraint
Element

enableDir
Mode Selection
enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4

en05000740-2-en.vsd

IEC05000740 V2 EN

Figure 35: Functional overview of OC4PTOC

115
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

A common setting for all steps, StartPhSel, is used to specify the number of phase
currents to be high to enable operation. The settings can be chosen: 1 out of 3, 2 out
of 3 or 3 out of 3.

The sampled analogue phase currents are processed in a pre-processing function

block. Using a parameter setting MeasType within the general settings for the four
step phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output function OC4PTOC, it is possible
to select the type of the measurement used for all overcurrent stages. It is possible
to select either discrete Fourier filter (DFT) or true RMS filter (RMS).

If DFT option is selected then only the RMS value of the fundamental frequency
components of each phase current is derived. Influence of DC current component
and higher harmonic current components are almost completely suppressed. If
RMS option is selected then the true RMS values is used. The true RMS value in
addition to the fundamental frequency component includes the contribution from
the current DC component as well as from higher current harmonic. The selected
current values are fed to OC4PTOC.

In a comparator, for each phase current, the DFT or RMS values are compared to
the set operation current value of the function (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>). If a phase
current is larger than the set operation current, outputs START, STx, STL1, STL2
and STL3 are, without delay, activated. Output signals STL1, STL2 and STL3 are
common for all steps. This means that the lowest set step will initiate the
activation. The START signal is common for all three phases and all steps. It shall
be noted that the selection of measured value (DFT or RMS) do not influence the
operation of directional part of OC4PTOC.

Service value for individually measured phase currents are also available on the
local HMI for OC4PTOC function, which simplifies testing, commissioning and in
service operational checking of the function.

A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current in
relation to the fundamental current is used. The 2nd harmonic current is taken from
the pre-processing of the phase currents and the relation is compared to a set
restrain current level.

The function can be directional. The direction of the fault current is given as
current angle in relation to the voltage angle. The fault current and fault voltage for
the directional function is dependent of the fault type. To enable directional
measurement at close in faults, causing low measured voltage, the polarization
voltage is a combination of the apparent voltage (85%) and a memory voltage
(15%). The following combinations are used.

Phase-phase short circuit:

U refL1L 2 = U L1 - U L 2 I dirL1L 2 = I L1 - I L 2
EQUATION1449 V1 EN (Equation 1)

U refL 2 L 3 = U L 2 - U L 3 I dirL 2 L 3 = I L 2 - I L 3
EQUATION1450 V1 EN (Equation 2)
Table continues on next page

116
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

U refL 3 L1 = U L 3 - U L1 I dirL 3 L1 = I L 3 - I L1
EQUATION1451 V1 EN (Equation 3)

Phase-earth short circuit:

U refL1 = U L1 I dirL1 = I L1
EQUATION1452 V1 EN (Equation 4)

U refL 2 = U L 2 I dirL 2 = I L 2
EQUATION1453 V1 EN (Equation 5)

U refL 3 = U L 3 I dirL 3 = I L 3
EQUATION1454 V1 EN (Equation 6)

The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage

exceeds 4% of the set base voltage UBase. So the directional element can use it for
all unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.

For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same
positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.

The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored.

After 100 ms, the following occurs:

If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current
(between 10 and 30% of the set terminal rated current IBase), the condition
seals in.
If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.
If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element
in the reverse direction remains in operation.
If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory
resets until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

The directional setting is given as a characteristic angle AngleRCA for the function
and an angle window AngleROA.

117
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

Reverse

Uref

RCA
ROA

ROA Forward

Idir

en05000745.vsd
IEC05000745 V1 EN

Figure 36: Directional characteristic of the phase overcurrent protection

The default value of AngleRCA is 65. The parameters AngleROA gives the angle
sector from AngleRCA for directional borders.

A minimum current for directional phase start current signal can be set:
IminOpPhSel.

If no blockings are given the start signals will start the timers of the step. The time
characteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or inverse time
characteristic. A wide range of standardized inverse time characteristics is
available. It is also possible to create a tailor made time characteristic. The
possibilities for inverse time characteristics are described in section "Inverse
characteristics".

All four steps in OC4PTOC can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The
binary input BLKSTx (x=1, 2, 3 or 4) blocks the operation of respective step.

118
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

Characteristx=DefTime
|IOP| AND
tx TRx
a OR
a>b
Ix> b

AND
STx

txmin
BLKSTx AND
BLOCK
Inverse

Characteristx=Inverse

DirModex=Off OR STAGEx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModex=Reverse

AND
REVERSE_Int

IEC12000008-1-en.vsd
IEC12000008-1-en.vsd

IEC12000008 V1 EN

Figure 37: Simplified logic diagram for OC4PTOC

Different types of reset time can be selected as described in section "Inverse

characteristics".

There is also a possibility to activate a preset change (IxMult x= 1, 2, 3 or 4) of the

set operation current via a binary input (enable multiplier). In some applications the
operation value needs to be changed, for example due to changed network
switching state. The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The
start signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKST. The
trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.

7.2.8 Second harmonic blocking element

A harmonic restrain of the Four step overcurrent protection function OC4PTOC
can be chosen. If the ratio of the 2nd harmonic component in relation to the
fundamental frequency component in the residual current exceeds the preset level
defined by parameter 2ndHarmStab setting, any of the four overcurrent stages can
be selectively blocked by parameter HarmRestrainx setting. When 2nd harmonic
restraint feature is active, the OC4PTOC function output signal 2NDHARMD will
be set to logical value one.

119
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

BLOCK

a
a>b
0.07*IBase b

a
a>b
b
Extract second 2NDHARMD
IOP AND
harmonic current a
a>b
component b

2ndH_BLOCK_Int
Extract
fundamental
current component
X
2ndHarmStab

IEC13000014-1-en.vsd
IEC13000014 V1 EN

Figure 38: Second harmonic blocking

7.2.9 Technical data

Table 53: OC4PTOC technical data
Function Setting range Accuracy
Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (502500)% -

of lBase
Min. operating current (1-10000)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Relay characteristic angle (RCA) (40.065.0) degrees 2.0 degrees

Relay operating angle (ROA) (40.089.0) degrees 2.0 degrees
2nd harmonic blocking (5100)% of 2.0% of Ir
fundamental
Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x (0.000-60.000) s 0.2 % or 35 ms whichever is
Iset greater

Minimum operate time (0.000-60.000) s 2.0 % or 40 ms whichever is

greater
Inverse characteristics, see 16 curve types See table 896, table 897 and table
table 896, table 897 and table 898 898
Operate time, start non-directional Min. = 15 ms
at 0 to 2 x Iset
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start non-directional Min. = 15 ms
at 2 to 0 x Iset
Max. = 30 ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 -
x Iset

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

120
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

7.3 Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection

EFPIOC

7.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Instantaneous residual overcurrent EFPIOC 50N
protection
IN>>

IEF V1 EN

7.3.2 Functionality
The Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC has a low transient
overreach and short tripping times to allow the use for instantaneous earth-fault
protection, with the reach limited to less than the typical eighty percent of the line
at minimum source impedance. EFPIOC is configured to measure the residual
current from the three-phase current inputs and can be configured to measure the
current from a separate current input.

7.3.3 Function block

EFPIOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK
BLKAR
MULTEN

IEC06000269-2-en.vsd
IEC06000269 V2 EN

Figure 39: EFPIOC function block

7.3.4 Signals

Table 54: EFPIOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase currents
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKAR BOOLEAN 0 Block input for auto reclose
ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable current multiplier

121
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

Table 55: EFPIOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal

7.3.5 Settings

Table 56: EFPIOC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
IN>> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 200 Operate residual current level in % of
IBase

Table 57: EFPIOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
StValMult 0.5 - 5.0 - 0.1 1.0 Multiplier for operate current level

Table 58: EFPIOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

7.3.6 Monitored data

Table 59: EFPIOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IN REAL - A Residual current

7.3.7 Operation principle

The sampled analog residual currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter
(DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of the residual current,
as well as from the sample values the equivalent RMS value is derived. This
current value is fed to the Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (EFPIOC).
In a comparator the RMS value is compared to the set operation current value of
the function (IN>>). If the residual current is larger than the set operation current a
signal from the comparator is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate
the output signal TRIP.

122
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current
via a binary input (enable multiplier MULTEN). In some applications the operation
value needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents.

EFPIOC function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The trip signals
from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKAR, that can be
activated during single pole trip and autoreclosing sequences.

7.3.8 Technical data

Table 60: EFPIOC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (502500)% of -

lBase
Operate time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Reset time at 2 to 0 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 25 ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 -
x Iset

Operate time at 0 to 10 x Iset Min. = 5 ms -

Max. = 15 ms
Reset time at 10 to 0 x Iset Min. = 25 ms -
Max. = 35 ms
Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 -
x Iset

Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms -

7.4 Four step residual overcurrent protection, (Zero

sequence or negative sequence directionality)
EF4PTOC

7.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Four step residual overcurrent EF4PTOC IN 51N/67N
protection
4
alt
4
TEF-REVA V1 EN

123
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

7.4.2 Functionality
The four step residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC has an inverse or definite
time delay independent for each step.

All IEC and ANSI time-delayed characteristics are available together with an
optional user defined characteristic.

EF4PTOC can be set directional or non-directional independently for each of the

steps.

IDir, UPol and IPol can be independently selected to be either zero sequence or
negative sequence.

Second harmonic blocking can be set individually for each step.

EF4PTOC can be used as main protection for phase-to-earth faults.

EF4PTOC can also be used to provide a system back-up for example, in the case of
the primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage
transformer circuit failure.

Directional operation can be combined together with corresponding

communication logic in permissive or blocking teleprotection scheme. Current
reversal and weak-end infeed functionality are available as well.

Residual current can be calculated by summing the three phase currents or taking
the input from neutral CT

7.4.3 Function block

EF4PTOC
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRIN1
I3PPOL* TRIN2
I3PDIR* TRIN3
BLOCK TRIN4
BLKTR TRSOTF
BLKST1 START
BLKST2 STIN1
BLKST3 STIN2
BLKST4 STIN3
ENMULT1 STIN4
ENMULT2 STSOTF
ENMULT3 STFW
ENMULT4 STRV
CBPOS 2NDHARMD
CLOSECB
OPENCB

IEC06000424-2-en.vsd
IEC06000424 V3 EN

Figure 40: EF4PTOC function block

7.4.4 Signals

124
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

Table 61: EF4PTOC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group connection for operate current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group connection for polarizing voltage
SIGNAL
I3PPOL GROUP - Group connection for polarizing current
SIGNAL
I3PDIR GROUP - Group connection for directional current
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 General block
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1 (Start and trip)
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2 (Start and trip)
BLKST3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 3 (Start and trip)
BLKST4 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 4 (Start and trip)
ENMULT1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step1
ENMULT2 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step2
ENMULT3 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step3
ENMULT4 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step4
CBPOS BOOLEAN 0 Breaker position
CLOSECB BOOLEAN 0 Breaker close command
OPENCB BOOLEAN 0 Breaker open command

Table 62: EF4PTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TRIN1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
TRIN2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2
TRIN3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 3
TRIN4 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 4
TRSOTF BOOLEAN Trip signal from earth fault switch onto fault function
START BOOLEAN General start signal
STIN1 BOOLEAN Start signal step 1
STIN2 BOOLEAN Start signal step 2
STIN3 BOOLEAN Start signal step 3
STIN4 BOOLEAN Start signal step 4
STSOTF BOOLEAN Start signal from earth fault switch onto fault
function
Table continues on next page

125
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

Name Type Description

STFW BOOLEAN Start signal forward direction
STRV BOOLEAN Start signal reverse direction
2NDHARMD BOOLEAN 2nd harmonic block signal

7.4.5 Settings

Table 63: EF4PTOC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
EnDir Disable - - Enable Enabling the Directional calculation
Enable
AngleRCA -180 - 180 Deg 1 65 Relay Characteristic Angle (RCA)
polMethod Voltage - - Voltage Type of polarization
Current
Dual
UPolMin 1 - 100 %UB 1 1 Minimum voltage level for polarization in
% of UBase
IPolMin 2 - 100 %IB 1 5 Minimum current level for polarization in
% of IBase
RNPol 0.50 - 1000.00 Ohm 0.01 5.00 Real part of source impedance used for
current polarisation
XNPol 0.50 - 3000.00 Ohm 0.01 40.00 Imaginary part of source imp. used for
current polarisation
IN>Dir 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Residual current level in % of IBase for
Direction release
2ndHarmStab 5 - 100 % 1 20 Operate level of 2nd harmonic curr in %
of fundamental curr
BlkParTransf Off - - Off Enable blocking at energizing of parallel
On transformers
UseStartValue IN1> - - IN4> Current level blk at parallel transf (step1,
IN2> 2, 3 or 4)
IN3>
IN4>
SOTF Off - - Off SOTF operation mode (Off/SOTF/
SOTF Undertime/SOTF&Undertime)
UnderTime
SOTF&UnderTime
ActivationSOTF Open - - Open Select signal to activate SOTF: CB-
Closed Open/ -Closed/ -Close cmd
CloseCommand
StepForSOTF Step 2 - - Step 2 Select start from step 2 or 3 to start SOTF
Step 3
HarmBlkSOTF Off - - Off Enable harmonic restrain function in
On SOTF
tSOTF 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay for SOTF
t4U 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Switch-onto-fault active time
Table continues on next page

126
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ActUnderTime CB position - - CB position Select signal to activate under time (CB
CB command Pos / CB Command)
tUnderTime 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Time delay for under time
DirMode1 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (Off, Non-dir,
Non-directional Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 1
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
IN1> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 100 Residual current operate level for step 1
in % of IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of step 1 when definite time
char. is selected
k1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 1 selected
time characteristic
IMin1 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 100.00 Minimum operate residual current for
step 1 in % of IBase
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 1
IN1Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for the residual current setting
value for step 1
HarmBlock1 Off - - On Enable block of step 1 from harmonic
On restrain
DirMode2 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 2 (Off, Non-dir,
Non-directional Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Table continues on next page

127
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist2 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 2
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
IN2> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 50 Residual current operate level for step 2
in % of IBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Time delay of step 2 when definite time
char. is selected
k2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 2 selected
time characteristic
IMin2 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 50 Minimum operate residual current for
step 2 in % of IBase
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 2
IN2Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for the residual current setting
value for step 2
HarmBlock2 Off - - On Enable block of step 2 from harmonic
On restrain
DirMode3 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 3 (Off, Non-dir,
Non-directional Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist3 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 3
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
IN3> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 33 Residual current operate level for step 3
in % of IBase
Table continues on next page

128
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Time delay of step 3 when definite time
char. is selected
k3 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 3 selected
time characteristic
IMin3 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 33 Minimum operate residual current for
step 3 in % of IBase
t3Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 3
IN3Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for the residual current setting
value for step 3
HarmBlock3 Off - - On Enable block of step 3 from harmonic
On restrain
DirMode4 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 4 (Off, Non-dir,
Non-directional Forward, Reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist4 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 4
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
IN4> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 17 Residual current operate level for step 4
in % of IBase
t4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.200 Time delay of step 4 when definite time
char. is selected
k4 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 4 selected
time characteristic
IMin4 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 17 Minimum operate residual current for
step 4 in % of IBase
t4Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 4
IN4Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for the residual current setting
value for step 4
HarmBlock4 Off - - On Enable block of step 4 from harmonic
On restrain

129
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

Table 64: EF4PTOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step1
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 1
tPCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tBCrv1 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tCCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tPRCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 1
tTRCrv1 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 1
tCRCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 1
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step2
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 2
tPCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 2
tACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 2
tBCrv2 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 2
tCCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 2
tPRCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 2
tTRCrv2 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 2
tCRCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 2
ResetTypeCrv3 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step3
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 3
tPCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 3
tACrv3 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 3
tBCrv3 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 3
tCCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 3
Table continues on next page

130
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tPRCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 3
tTRCrv3 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 3
tCRCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 3
ResetTypeCrv4 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step4
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 4
tPCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 4
tACrv4 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 4
tBCrv4 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 4
tCCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 4
tPRCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 4
tTRCrv4 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 4
tCRCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 4

Table 65: EF4PTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
SeqTypeIDir Zero seq - - Zero seq Choice of measurand for directional
Neg seq current
SeqTypeIPol Zero seq - - Zero seq Choice of measurand for polarizing
Neg seq current
SeqTypeUPol Zero seq - - Zero seq Choice of measurand for polarizing
Neg seq voltage

7.4.6 Monitored data

Table 66: EF4PTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IOp REAL - A Operating current level
UPol REAL - kV Polarizing voltage level
IPol REAL - A Polarizing current level
UPOLIANG REAL - deg Polarizing angle
between voltage and
current
IPOLIANG REAL - deg Polarizing current angle

131
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

7.4.7 Operation principle

This function has the following three Analog Inputs on its function block in the
configuration tool:

1. I3P, input used for Operating Quantity. Supply the zero-sequence magnitude
measuring functionality.
2. U3P, input used for Voltage Polarizing Quantity. Supply either zero or
negative sequence voltage to the directional functionality
3. I3PPOL, input used for Current Polarizing Quantity. Provide polarizing
current to the directional functionality. This current is normally taken from the
grounding of a power transformer.
4. I3PDIR, input used for Directional detection. Supply either zero or negative
sequence current to the directional functionality.

These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks
in the Configuration Tool within PCM600.

7.4.7.1 Operating quantity within the function

The function always uses Residual Current (3I0) for its operating quantity. The
residual current can be:

1. directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in

PCM600 to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to
EF4PTOC function input I3P). This dedicated IED CT input can be for
example, connected to:
parallel connection of current instrument transformers in all three phases
(Holm-Green connection).
one single core balance, current instrument transformer (cable CT).
one single current instrument transformer located between power system
star point and earth (that is, current transformer located in the star point
of a star connected transformer winding).
one single current instrument transformer located between two parts of a
protected object (that is, current transformer located between two star
points of double star shunt capacitor bank).
2. calculated from three-phase current input within the IED (when the fourth
analog input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC function
Analog Input I3P is not connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in
PCM600). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3I0 from the
first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula
(will take I2 from SMAI AI3P connected to I3PDIR input which was
connected to I3P input also):

If zero sequence current is selected,

Iop = 3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3

EQUATION1874 V2 EN (Equation 7)

132
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.

The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of
the fundamental frequency component of the residual current is derived. The
phasor magnitude is used within the EF4PTOC protection to compare it with the
set operation current value of the four steps (IN1>, IN2>, IN3> or IN4>). If the
residual current is larger than the set operation current and the step is used in non-
directional mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This
signal will, without delay, activate the output signal STINx (x=step 1-4) for this
step and a common START signal.

7.4.7.2 Internal polarizing

A polarizing quantity is used within the protection in order to determine the

direction to the earth fault (Forward/Reverse).

The function can be set to use voltage polarizing, current polarizing or dual polarizing.

Current polarizing
When current polarizing is selected the function will use an external residual
current (3I0) as polarizing quantity IPol. This current can be:

1. directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in

PCM600 to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to
EF4PTOC function input I3PPOL). This dedicated IED CT input is then
typically connected to one single current transformer located between power
system star point and earth (current transformer located in the star point of a
star connected transformer winding).
For some special line protection applications this dedicated IED CT
input can be connected to parallel connection of current transformers in
all three phases (Holm-Green connection).
2. calculated from three phase current input within the IED (when the fourth
analog input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC function
analog input I3PPOL is NOT connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in
PCM600). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3I0 from the
first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:

IPol = 3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3

EQUATION2018 V2 EN (Equation 9)

where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.

133
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus the phasor of
the fundamental frequency component of the polarizing current is derived. This
phasor is then multiplied with pre-set equivalent zero-sequence source Impedance
in order to calculate equivalent polarizing voltage UIPol in accordance with the
following formula:

UIPol = Z 0s IPol = (RNPol + j XNPol) IPol

EQUATION1877 V2 EN (Equation 10)

which will be then used, together with the phasor of the operating current, in order
to determine the direction to the earth fault (Forward/Reverse).

In order to enable current polarizing the magnitude of polarizing current shall be

bigger than a minimum level defined by setting parameter IPolMin.

Dual polarizing
When dual polarizing is selected the function will use the vectorial sum of the
voltage based and current based polarizing in accordance with the following formula:

UTotPol=UUPol + UIPol=UPol + Z 0s IPol = UPol + ( RNPol + jXNPol ) Ipol

IECEQUATION2408 V1 EN (Equation 11)

UPol and IPol can be either zero sequence component or negative sequence
component depending upon the user selection.

Then the phasor of the total polarizing voltage UTotPol will be used, together with
the phasor of the operating current, to determine the direction of the earth fault
(Forward/Reverse).

7.4.7.3 External polarizing for earth-fault function

The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this
setting is selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKSTx to provide
external directional control (that is, torque control) by for example using one of the
following functions if available in the IED:

1. Distance protection directional function.

2. Negative sequence polarized General current and voltage multi purpose
protection function.

7.4.7.4 Directional detection for earth fault function

Zero sequence components will be used for detecting directionality for earth fault
function. In some cases zero sequence quantities might detect directionality wrong.
Negative sequence quantities will be used in such scenario. The user can select
either zero sequence components or negative sequence components for detecting
directionality with the parameter SeqTypeIPol. I3PDIR input always connected to
the same source as I3P input.

134
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

7.4.7.5 Base quantities within the protection

The base quantities are entered as global settings for all functions in the IED. Base
current (IBase) shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in
primary amperes. Base voltage (UBase) shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase
voltage of the protected object in primary kV.

7.4.7.6 Internal earth-fault protection structure

The protection is internally divided into the following parts:

1. Four residual overcurrent steps.

2. Directional supervision element for residual overcurrent steps with integrated
directional comparison step for communication based earth-fault protection
schemes (permissive or blocking).
3. Second harmonic blocking element with additional feature for sealed-in
blocking during switching of parallel transformers.
4. Switch on to fault feature with integrated Under-Time logic for detection of
breaker problems during breaker opening or closing sequence.

Each part is described separately in the following sections.

7.4.7.7 Four residual overcurrent steps

Each overcurrent step uses operating quantity Iop (residual current) as measuring
quantity. Each of the four residual overcurrent steps has the following built-in
facilities:

Directional mode can be set to Off/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse. By this

parameter setting the directional mode of the step is selected. It shall be noted
that the directional decision (Forward/Reverse) is not made within the residual
overcurrent step itself. The direction of the fault is determined in common
directional supervision element.
Residual current start value.
Type of operating characteristic (inverse or definite time). By this parameter
setting it is possible to select inverse or definite time delay for the earth-fault
protection. Most of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics are
available. For the complete list of available inverse curves please refer to
section "Inverse characteristics".
Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset / ANSI Reset). By this
parameter setting it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the step. For
the complete list of available reset curves please refer to section "".

135
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like
definite time delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time
delay and parameters to define user programmable inverse curve are defined.
Supervision by second harmonic blocking feature (On/Off). By this parameter
setting it is possible to prevent operation of the step if the second harmonic
content in the residual current exceeds the preset level.
Multiplier for scaling of the set residual current pickup value by external
binary signal. By this parameter setting it is possible to increase residual
current pickup value when function binary input ENMULTx has logical value
1.

Simplified logic diagram for one residual overcurrent step is shown in figure 41.

BLKTR
EMULTX

IMinx Characteristx=DefTime
X T b
a>b
F a
tx TRINx
AND AND
|IOP|
a OR t
a>b
b

STINx
INxMult AND
X T
INx> F
AND Inverse
BLKSTx
AND
BLOCK Characteristx=Inverse
txmin
2ndHarm_BLOCK_Int t
OR
HarmRestrainx=Off

DirModex=Off OR STEPx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
AND OR
DirModex=Reverse FORWARD_Int

AND
REVERSE_Int

IEC10000008-4-en.vsd

IEC10000008 V4 EN

Figure 41: Simplified logic diagram for residual overcurrent step x, where x =
step 1, 2, 3 or 4

The protection can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. Output
signals for respective step, and STINx and TRINx, can be blocked from the binary
input BLKSTx. The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary
input BLKTR.

7.4.7.8 Directional supervision element with integrated directional

comparison function

It shall be noted that at least one of the four residual overcurrent

steps shall be set as directional in order to enable execution of the
directional supervision element and the integrated directional
comparison function.

136
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

The protection has integrated directional feature. As the operating quantity current
lop is always used. The polarizing method is determined by the parameter setting
polMethod. The polarizing quantity will be selected by the function in one of the
following three ways:

1. When polMethod = Voltage, UPol will be used as polarizing quantity.

2. When polMethod = Current, IPol will be used as polarizing quantity.
3. WhenpolMethod = Dual, UPol + IPol ZNPol will be used as polarizing quantity.

The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element,
as shown in figure 42, in order to determine the direction of the earth fault.

Operating area

STRV
0.6 * IN>DIR
Characteristic for reverse
release of measuring steps
-RCA -85 deg
Characteristic
for STRV 40% of
IN>DIR RCA +85 deg

RCA
65 Upol = -3U 0

-RCA +85 deg

RCA -85 deg

Characteristic for forward
release of measuring steps
IN>DIR

STFW

I op = 3I0

Operating area
Characteristic
for STFW IEC11000243-1-en.ai
IEC11000243 V1 EN

Figure 42: Operating characteristic for earth-fault directional element using

the zero sequence components

Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are:

Directional element will be internally enabled to operate as soon as Iop is

bigger than 40% of I>Dir and directional condition is fulfilled in set direction.
Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA, which defines the position of forward
and reverse areas in the operating characteristic.

137
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

Directional comparison step, built-in within directional supervision element, will

set EF4PTOC function output binary signals:

1. STFW=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos( - AngleRCA) is

bigger than setting parameter I>Dir and directional supervision element
detects fault in forward direction.
2. STRV=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos( - AngleRCA) is
bigger than 60% of setting parameter I>Dir and directional supervision
element detects fault in reverse direction.

These signals shall be used for communication based earth-fault teleprotection

communication schemes (permissive or blocking).

Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated

directional comparison step is shown in figure 43:

| IopDir |
a
a>b STRV
b AND
REVERSE_Int
0.6
X
a
a>b
AND STFW
I>Dir b
FORWARD_Int

X
0.4

FWD
AND FORWARD_Int
AngleRCA
polMethod=Voltage
OR
UPolMin
Characteristic
Directional

polMethod=Dual UPol IPolMin

T
I3PDIR
polMethod=Current 0.0 F
OR
UTotPol
IPol AND REVERSE_Int
T RVS
0.0 F

UIPol STAGE1_DIR_Int
RNPol Complex X T STAGE2_DIR_Int
XNPol Number 0.0 F STAGE3_DIR_Int OR
STAGE4_DIR_Int
BLOCK AND

IEC07000067-5-en.vsd

IEC07000067 V5 EN

Figure 43: Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison step

138
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

7.4.7.9 Second harmonic blocking element

A harmonic restrain of four step residual overcurrent protection function EF4PTOC

can be chosen for each step by a parameter setting HarmRestrainx. If the ratio of
the 2nd harmonic component in relation to the fundamental frequency component
in the residual current exceeds the preset level (defined by parameter
2ndHarmStab) then 2NDHARMD function output signal is set to logical value one
and harmonic restraining feature to the function block will be applicable.

Blocking from 2nd harmonic element activates if all three criteria are satisfied:

1. Current fundamental frequency component > IMinOpHarmBlk

2. Current second harmonic component > IMinOpHarmBlk
3. Ratio of the 2nd harmoinc component in relation to the fundamental frequency
component in the residual current exceeds the preset level defined parameter
2ndHarmStab setting

If all the above three conditions are fulfilled then 2NDHARMD function output
signal is set to logical value one and harmonic restraining feature to the function
block is applicable.

In addition to the basic functionality explained above the 2nd harmonic blocking
can be set in such way to seal-in until residual current disappears. This feature
might be required to stabilize EF4PTOC during switching of parallel transformers
in the station. In case of parallel transformers there is a risk of sympathetic inrush
current. If one of the transformers is in operation, and the parallel transformer is
switched in, the asymmetric inrush current of the switched in transformer will
cause partial saturation of the transformer already in service. This is called
transferred saturation. The 2nd harmonic of the inrush currents of the two
transformers is in phase opposition. The summation of the two currents thus gives a
small 2nd harmonic current. The residual fundamental current is however
significant. The inrush current of the transformer in service before the parallel
transformer energizing, is a little delayed compared to the first transformer.
Therefore we have high 2nd harmonic current component initially. After a short
period this current is however small and the normal 2nd harmonic blocking resets.
If the BlkParTransf function is activated the 2nd harmonic restrain signal is latched
as long as the residual current measured by the relay is larger than a selected step
current level by using setting UseStartValue.

This feature has been called Block for Parallel Transformers. This 2nd harmonic seal-
in feature is activated when all of the following three conditions are simultaneously
fulfilled:

1. Feature is enabled by entering setting parameter BlkParTransf = On.

2. Basic 2nd harmonic restraint feature has been active for at least 70ms.
3. Residual current magnitude is higher than the set start value for one of the four
residual overcurrent stages. By a parameter setting UseStartValue it is possible
to select which one of the four start values that will be used (IN1> or IN2> or
IN3> or IN4>).

139
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

Once Block for Parallel Transformers is activated the basic 2nd harmonic blocking
signal is sealed-in until the residual current magnitude falls below a value defined
by parameter setting UseStartValue (see condition 3 above).

Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature is shown in figure 44.

BLOCK

a
a>b
0.07*IBase b

a
a>b
b
Extract second 2NDHARMD
IOP AND
harmonic current a
a>b
component b

Extract
fundamental
current component
X
2ndHarmStab

q-1

t=70ms OR
t AND OR 2ndH_BLOCK_Int

BlkParTransf=On
|IOP|
a
a>b
b
UseStartValue
IN1>
IN2>
IN3>
IN4>

q-1 = unit delay

IEC13000015-2-en.vsd

IEC13000015 V2 EN

Figure 44: Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature and Block for Parallel Transformers
feature

7.4.7.10 Switch on to fault feature

Integrated in the four step residual overcurrent protection are Switch on to fault
logic (SOTF) and Under-Time logic. The setting parameter SOTF is set to activate
either SOTF or Under-Time logic or both. When the circuit breaker is closing there
is a risk to close it onto a permanent fault, for example during an autoreclosing
sequence. The SOTF logic will enable fast fault clearance during such situations.
The time during which SOTF and Under-Time logics will be active after activation
is defined by the setting parameter t4U.

140
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

The SOTF logic uses the start signal from step 2 or step 3 for its operation, selected
by setting parameter StepForSOTF. The SOTF logic can be activated either from
change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker close command pulse.
The setting parameter ActivationSOTF can be set for activation of CB position
open change, CB position closed change or CB close command. In case of a
residual current start from step 2 or 3 (dependent on setting) the function will give
a trip after a set delay tSOTF. This delay is normally set to a short time (default 200
ms).

The Under-Time logic always uses the start signal from the step 4. The Under-
Time logic will normally be set to operate for a lower current level than the SOTF
function. The Under-Time logic can also be blocked by the 2nd harmonic restraint
feature. This enables high sensitivity even if power transformer inrush currents can
occur at breaker closing. This logic is typically used to detect asymmetry of CB
poles immediately after switching of the circuit breaker. The Under-Time logic is
activated either from change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker
close and open command pulses. This selection is done by setting parameter
ActUnderTime. In case of a start from step 4 this logic will give a trip after a set
delay tUnderTime. This delay is normally set to a relatively short time (default 300
ms). Practically the Under-Time logic acts as circuit breaker pole-discordance
protection, but it is only active immediately after breaker switching. The Under-
Time logic can only be used in solidly or low impedance grounded systems.

SOTF

Open
t4U
Closed
ActivationSOTF
Close command
tSOTF
AND
AND t
STIN2

StepForSOTF
STIN3

OperationMode
BLOCK
OFF
SOTF
UNDERTIME TRIP
UnderTime

tUnderTime
SOTF or
2nd Harmonic AND
HarmResSOFT t UnderTime

OR

Open
Close OR

t4U

Close command
ActUnderTime
AND

STIN4

IEC06000643-3-en.vsd

IEC06000643 V3 EN

Figure 45: Simplified logic diagram for SOTF and Under-Time features

141
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

EF4PTOC Logic Diagram Simplified logic diagram for the complete EF4PTOC
function is shown in figure 46:

signal to
communication
scheme
Directional Check
Element

4 step over current

INPol Direction
operatingCurrent element TRIP
Element
3U0 One element for each
earthFaultDirection step
3I0
angleValid
I3PDIR
DirMode
enableDir

harmRestrBlock
3I0 Harmonic
Restraint 1
Element

start step 2, 3 and 4

Blocking at parallel
transformers
SwitchOnToFault
TRIP

CB
DirMode pos
or cmd
enableDir
Mode
Selection enableStep1-4

DirectionalMode1-4

IEC06000376-2-en.vsd
IEC06000376 V2 EN

Figure 46: Functional overview of EF4PTOC

7.4.8 Technical data

Table 67: EF4PTOC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (1-2500)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (10-2500)% of lBase -

Relay characteristic angle (-180 to 180) degrees 2.0 degrees
Operate current for directional (1100)% of lBase For RCA 60 degrees:
comparison 2.5% of Ir at I Ir
2.5% of I at I > Ir

Independent time delay for step (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is

1, 2, 3, and 4 at 0 to 2 x Iset greater

Inverse characteristics, see 16 curve types See table 896, table 897 and
table 896, table 897 and table 898 table 898
Second harmonic restrain (5100)% of fundamental 2.0% of Ir
operation
Table continues on next page

142
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Minimum polarizing voltage (1100)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Minimum polarizing current (2-100)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir

Real part of source Z used for (0.50-1000.00) W/phase -

current polarization
Imaginary part of source Z used (0.503000.00) W/phase -
for current polarization
Operate time, start function at 0 Min = 15 ms -
to 2 x Iset Max = 30 ms

Reset time, start function at 2 to Min = 15 ms -

0 x Iset Max = 30 ms

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

7.5 Four step directional negative phase sequence

overcurrent protection NS4PTOC

7.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification device number
Four step negative sequence NS4PTOC 46I2
I2
overcurrent protection
4
alt
4

IEC10000053 V1 EN

7.5.2 Functionality
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection (NS4PTOC) has an inverse or
definite time delay independent for each step separately.

All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an
optional user defined characteristic.

The directional function is voltage polarized.

NS4PTOC can be set directional or non-directional independently for each of the

steps.

NS4PTOC can be used as main protection for unsymmetrical fault; phase-phase

short circuits, phase-phase-earth short circuits and single phase earth faults.

143
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

NS4PTOC can also be used to provide a system backup for example, in the case of
the primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage
transformer circuit failure.

Directional operation can be combined together with corresponding

communication logic in permissive or blocking teleprotection scheme. The same
logic as for directional zero sequence current can be used. Current reversal and weak-
end infeed functionality are available.

7.5.3 Function block

NS4PTOC
I3P* TRIP
I3PDIR* TR1
U3P* TR2
BLOCK TR3
BLKTR TR4
BLKST1 START
BLKST2 ST1
BLKST3 ST2
BLKST4 ST3
ENMULT1 ST4
ENMULT2 STFW
ENMULT3 STRV
ENMULT4

IEC10000054-2-en.vsd
IEC10000054 V2 EN

Figure 47: NS4PTOC function block

7.5.4 Signals
Table 68: NS4PTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group connection for operate current
SIGNAL
I3PDIR GROUP - Group connection for directional current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group connection for polarizing voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 General block
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1 (Start and trip)
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2 (Start and trip)
BLKST3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 3 (Start and trip)
BLKST4 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 4 (Start and trip)
ENMULT1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step1
Table continues on next page

144
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

Name Type Default Description

ENMULT2 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step2
ENMULT3 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step3
ENMULT4 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
step4

Table 69: NS4PTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TR1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 1
TR2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 2
TR3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 3
TR4 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step 4
START BOOLEAN General start signal
ST1 BOOLEAN Start signal step 1
ST2 BOOLEAN Start signal step 2
ST3 BOOLEAN Start signal step 3
ST4 BOOLEAN Start signal step 4
STFW BOOLEAN Forward directional start signal
STRV BOOLEAN Reverse directional start signal

7.5.5 Settings
Table 70: NS4PTOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
EnDir Disable - - Enable Enabling the Directional calculation
Enable
AngleRCA -180 - 180 Deg 1 65 Relay characteristic angle (RCA)
UPolMin 1 - 100 %UB 1 5 Minimum voltage level for polarization in
% of UBase
I2>Dir 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Residual current level in % of IBase for
Direction release
DirMode1 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 1 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Table continues on next page

145
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 1
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I2-1> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 100 Negative sequence current op level for
step 1 in % of IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of step 1 when definite time
char. is selected
k1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 1 selected
time characteristic
IMin1 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 100.00 Minimum current for step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 1
I1Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting
value for step 1
DirMode2 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 2 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist2 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 2
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I2-2> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 50 Negative sequence current op level for
step 2 in % of IBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Time delay of step 2 when definite time
char. is selected
Table continues on next page

146
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

k2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 2 selected
time characteristic
IMin2 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 50 Minimum current for step 2
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 2
I2Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting
value for step 2
DirMode3 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 3 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Characterist3 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 3
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I2-3> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 33 Negative sequence current op level for
step 3 in % of IBase
t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.800 Time delay of step 3 when definite time
char. is selected
k3 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 3 selected
time characteristic
IMin3 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 33 Minimum current for step 3
t3Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 3
I3Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting
value for step 3
DirMode4 Off - - Non-directional Directional mode of step 4 (off, nodir,
Non-directional forward, reverse)
Forward
Reverse
Table continues on next page

147
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist4 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Time delay characteristic for step 4
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
I2-4> 1 - 2500 %IB 1 17 Negative sequence current op level for
step 4 in % of IBase
t4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.200 Time delay of step 4 when definite time
char. is selected
k4 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the step 4 selected
time characteristic
IMin4 1.00 - 10000.00 %IB 1.00 17 Minimum current for step 4
t4Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum operate time for inverse time
characteristic step 4
I4Mult 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting
value for step 4

Table 71: NS4PTOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step1
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 1
tPCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tBCrv1 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tCCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 1
tPRCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 1
tTRCrv1 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step
tCRCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 1
Table continues on next page

148
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step2
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 2
tPCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 2
tACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 2
tBCrv2 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 2
tCCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 2
tPRCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 2
tTRCrv2 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 2
tCRCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 2
ResetTypeCrv3 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step3
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 3
tPCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 3
tACrv3 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 3
tBCrv3 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 3
tCCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 3
tPRCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 3
tTRCrv3 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 3
tCRCrv3 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 3
ResetTypeCrv4 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Reset curve type for step4
IEC Reset (Instantaneous / IEC / ANSI)
ANSI reset
tReset4 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Reset time delay for step 4
tPCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Param P for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 4
tACrv4 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param A for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 4
tBCrv4 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Param B for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 4
tCCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param C for customized inverse trip time
curve for step 4
Table continues on next page

149
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tPRCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Param PR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 4
tTRCrv4 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Param TR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 4
tCRCrv4 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Param CR for customized inverse reset
time curve for step 4

Table 72: NS4PTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

7.5.6 Monitored data

Table 73: NS4PTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IOp REAL - A Operating current level
UPol REAL - kV Polarizing voltage level
UPOLIANG REAL - deg Polarizing angle
between voltage and
current

7.5.7 Operation principle

Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function has the
following three Analog Inputs on its function block in the configuration tool:

1. I3P, input used for Operating Quantity.

2. U3P, input used for Polarizing Quantity.
3. I3PDIR, input used for "Directional finding"

These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks
in the Configuration Tool within PCM600.

7.5.7.1 Operating quantity within the function

Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function always

uses negative sequence current (I2) for its operating quantity. The negative
sequence current is calculated from three-phase current input within the IED. The
pre-processing block calculates I2 from the first three inputs into the pre-
processing block by using the following formula:

150
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

1
I2 = (
IL1 + a IL 2 + a IL 3
2
)
3
EQUATION2266 V2 EN (Equation 12)

where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
a is so called operator which gives a phase shift of 120 deg, that is, a = 1120 deg

a2 similarly gives a phase shift of 240 deg, that is, a2 = 1240 deg

The phasor magnitude is used within the NS4PTOC protection to compare it with
the set operation current value of the four steps (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>). If the
negative sequence current is larger than the set operation current and the step is
used in non-directional mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to
true. This signal, without delay, activates the output signal STx (x=1 - 4) for this
step and a common START signal.

7.5.7.2 Internal polarizing facility of the function

A polarizing quantity is used within the protection to determine the direction to the
fault (Forward/Reverse).

Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC function uses the
voltage polarizing method.

NS4PTOC uses the negative sequence voltage -U2 as polarizing quantity U3P.
This voltage is calculated from three phase voltage input within the IED. The pre-
processing block calculates -U2 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing
block by using the following formula:

1
UPol = -U 2 = - (UL1 + a 2 UL 2 + a UL3 )
3
EQUATION2267 V2 EN

where:
UL1, UL2 and UL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages.

To use this all three phase-to-earth voltages must be connected to three IED VT inputs.

This phasor is used together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to
determine the direction to the fault (Forward/Reverse).To enable voltage polarizing

151
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

the magnitude of polarizing voltage must be bigger than a minimum level defined
by setting UpolMin.

Note that U2 is used to determine the location of the fault. This ensures the
required inversion of the polarizing voltage within the function.

7.5.7.3 External polarizing for negative sequence function

The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this
setting is selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKSTx (where x
indicates the relevant step within the protection) to provide external directional
control (that is, torque control) by for example using one of the following functions
if available in the IED:

Distance protection directional function

Negative sequence polarized general current and voltage multi purpose
protection function

7.5.7.4 Internal negative sequence protection structure

The protection is internally divided into the following parts:

Four negative sequence overcurrent steps

Directional supervision element for negative sequence overcurrent steps with
integrated directional comparison step for communication based negative
sequence protection schemes (permissive or blocking)

Each part is described separately in the following sections.

7.5.7.5 Four negative sequence overcurrent stages

Each overcurrent stage uses Operating Quantity I2 (negative sequence current) as

measuring quantity. Every of the four overcurrent stage has the following built-in
facilities:

Operating mode (Off/ Non-directional /Forward / Reverse). By this parameter

setting the operating mode of the stage is selected. Note that the directional
decision (Forward/Reverse) is not made within the overcurrent stage itself.
The direction of the fault is determined in common Directional Supervision
Element described in the next paragraph.
Negative sequence current pickup value.
Type of operating characteristic (Inverse or Definite Time). By this parameter
setting it is possible to select Inverse or definite time delay for negative
sequence overcurrent function. Most of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse
characteristics are available. For the complete list of available inverse curves,
refer to Chapter ""

152
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset /ANSI reset).By this

parameter setting it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the stage. For
the complete list of available reset curves, refer to Chapter ""
Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like
definite time delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time
delay and parameters to define user programmable inverse curve are defined.
Multiplier for scaling of the set negative sequence current pickup value by
external binary signal. By this parameter setting it is possible to increase
negative sequence current pickup value when function binary input
ENMULTx has logical value 1.

Simplified logic diagram for one negative sequence overcurrent stage is shown in
the following figure:

BLKTR

Characteristx=DefTime TRx
|IOP| AND AND
a OR tx
a>b
ENMULTx b

STx
IxMult AND
X T
Ix> F
txmin
BLKSTx AND
BLOCK
Inverse

Characteristx=Inverse

DirModex=Off OR STAGEx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModex=Reverse

AND
REVERSE_Int

IEC09000683-3-en.vsd
IEC09000683 V2 EN

Figure 48: Simplified logic diagram for negative sequence overcurrent stage x , where x=1, 2, 3 or 4

NS4PTOC can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The start
signals from NS4PTOC for each stage can be blocked from the binary input
BLKSTx. The trip signals from NS4PTOC can be blocked from the binary input
BLKTR.

7.5.7.6 Directional supervision element with integrated directional

comparison function

At least one of the four negative sequence overcurrent steps must

be set as directional in order to enable execution of the directional

153
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

supervision element and the integrated directional comparison

function.

The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element,
as shown in figure 42, to determine the direction of the fault.

Reverse
Area

AngleRCA Upol=-U2

Forward
Area
Iop = I2

IEC10000031-1-en.vsd
IEC10000031 V1 EN

Figure 49: Operating characteristic for fault directional element

Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are:

Directional element is internally enable to operate as soon as Iop is bigger than

40% of I>Dir and the directional condition is fulfilled in set direction.
Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA which defines the position of forward
and reverse areas in the operating characteristic.

Directional comparison step, built-in within directional supervision element, set

NS4PTOC output binary signals:

154
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

1. STFW=1 when tip of I2 phasor (operating quantity magnitude) is in forward

area, see fig 42 (Operating quantity magnitude is bigger than setting I>Dir)
2. STRV=1 when tip of I2 phasor (operating quantity magnitude) is in the reverse
area, see fig 42. (Operating quantity magnitude is bigger than 60% of setting
I>Dir)

These signals must be used for communication based fault teleprotection

communication schemes (permissive or blocking).

Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated

directional comparison step is shown in figure 43:

|Iop|
a a>
STRV
b b AND
REVERSE_Int
0.6
X
a a>
STFW
I>Dir b b FORWARD_Int
AND

X
0.4

FWD
AND FORWARD_Int
AngleRCA
C h a r a c e ri s ti c
D i r e c ti o n a l

UPolMin

IPolMin
t

Iop

UPol
AND REVERSE_Int
RVS

STAGE1_DIR_Int
STAGE2_DIR_Int
STAGE3_DIR_Int OR
STAGE4_DIR_Int
BLOCK AND

IEC07000067-4.vsd

IEC07000067-4 V2 EN

Figure 50: Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison step

155
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

7.5.8 Technical data

Table 74: NS4PTOC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, negative (1-2500)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
sequence current, step 1-4 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (10-2500)% of IBase -

Independent time delay for (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
step 1, 2, 3, and 4 at 0 to 2 x greater
Iset

Inverse characteristics, see
table 896, table 897 and table
898
Minimum operate current for
steps 1 - 4
16 curve types See table 896, table 897 and
table 898
(1.00 - 10000.00)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Relay characteristic angle (-180 to 180) degrees 2.0 degrees

Operate value, negative (1100)% of IBase For RCA 60 degrees:
current for directional release 2.5% of Ir at I Ir
2.5% of I at I > Ir

Minimum polarizing voltage (1100)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Minimum polarizing current (2-100)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir

Real part of negative (0.50-1000.00) W/phase -

sequence source impedance
used for current polarization
Imaginary part of negative (0.503000.00) W/phase -
sequence source impedance
used for current polarization
Operate time, start function at Min = 15 ms -
0 to 2 x Iset Max = 30 ms

Reset time, start function at 2 Min = 15 ms -

to 0 x Iset Max = 30 ms

Critical impulse time, start 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

function
Impulse margin time, start 15 ms typically -
function
Transient overreach <10% at = 100 ms -

7.6 Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power

protection SDEPSDE

156
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

7.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Sensitive directional residual over SDEPSDE - 67N
current and power protection

7.6.2 Functionality
In networks with high impedance earthing, the phase-to-earth fault current is
significantly smaller than the short circuit currents. Another difficulty for earth
fault protection is that the magnitude of the phase-to-earth fault current is almost
independent of the fault location in the network.

Directional residual current can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase-to-
earth faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the residual
current component 3I0 cos , where is the angle between the residual current
and the residual voltage (-3U0), compensated with a characteristic angle.
Alternatively, the function can be set to strict 3I0 level with a check of angle .

Directional residual power can also be used to detect and give selective trip of phase-
to-earth faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the
residual power component 3I0 3U0 cos , where is the angle between the
residual current and the reference residual voltage, compensated with a
characteristic angle.

A normal non-directional residual current function can also be used with definite or
inverse time delay.

A backup neutral point voltage function is also available for non-directional

residual overvoltage protection.

In an isolated network, that is, the network is only coupled to earth via the
capacitances between the phase conductors and earth, the residual current always
has -90 phase shift compared to the residual voltage ( 3U0). The characteristic
angle is chosen to -90 in such a network.

In resistance earthed networks or in Petersen coil earthed, with a parallel resistor,

the active residual current component (in phase with the residual voltage) should be
used for the earth fault detection. In such networks, the characteristic angle is
chosen to 0.

As the amplitude of the residual current is independent of the fault location, the
selectivity of the earth fault protection is achieved by time selectivity.

When should the sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection be used and
when should the sensitive directional residual power protection be used? Consider
the following:

157
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection gives possibility for better

sensitivity. The setting possibilities of this function are down to 0.25 % of
IBase, 1 A or 5 A. This sensitivity is in most cases sufficient in high
impedance network applications, if the measuring CT ratio is not too high.
Sensitive directional residual power protection gives possibility to use inverse
time characteristics. This is applicable in large high impedance earthed
networks, with large capacitive earth fault currents. In such networks, the
active fault current would be small and by using sensitive directional residual
power protection, the operating quantity is elevated. Therefore, better
possibility to detect earth faults. In addition, in low impedance earthed
networks, the inverse time characteristic gives better time-selectivity in case of
high zero-resistive fault currents.

Phase
currents
IN

Phase-
ground
voltages
UN

IEC13000013-1-en.vsd
IEC13000013 V1 EN

Figure 51: Connection of SDEPSDE to analog preprocessing function block

Overcurrent functionality uses true 3I0, i.e. sum of GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and
GRPxL3. For 3I0 to be calculated, connection is needed to all three phase inputs.

Directional and power functionality uses IN and UN. If a connection is made to

GRPxN this signal is used, else if connection is made to all inputs GRPxL1,
GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 the internally calculated sum of these inputs (3I0 and 3U0)
will be used.

158
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

7.6.3 Function block

SDEPSDE
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRDIRIN
BLOCK TRNDIN
BLKTR TRUN
BLKTRDIR START
BLKNDN STDIRIN
BLKUN STNDIN
STUN
STFW
STRV
STDIR
UNREL

IEC07000032-2-en.vsd
IEC07000032 V2 EN

Figure 52: SDEPSDE function block

7.6.4 Signals
Table 75: SDEPSDE Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks all the outputs of the function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the trip outputs of the function
BLKTRDIR BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the directional operate outputs of the
function
BLKNDN BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the Non directional current residual outputs
BLKUN BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the Non directional voltage residual outputs

Table 76: SDEPSDE Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip of the function
TRDIRIN BOOLEAN Trip of the directional residual over current function
TRNDIN BOOLEAN Trip of non directional residual over current
TRUN BOOLEAN Trip of non directional residual over voltage
START BOOLEAN General start of the function
STDIRIN BOOLEAN Start of the directional residual over current
function
STNDIN BOOLEAN Start of non directional residual over current
STUN BOOLEAN Start of non directional residual over voltage
STFW BOOLEAN Start of directional function for a fault in forward
direction
Table continues on next page

159
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

Name Type Description

STRV BOOLEAN Start of directional function for a fault in reverse
direction
STDIR INTEGER Direction of fault. A general signal common to all
three mode of residual over current protection
UNREL BOOLEAN Residual voltage release of operation of all
directional modes

7.6.5 Settings
Table 77: SDEPSDE Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OpMode 3I0Cosfi - - 3I0Cosfi Selection of operation mode for protection
3I03U0Cosfi
3I0 and fi
DirMode Forward - - Forward Direction of operation forward or reverse
Reverse
RCADir -179 - 180 Deg 1 -90 Relay characteristic angle RCA, in deg
RCAComp -10.0 - 10.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Relay characteristic angle compensation
ROADir 0 - 90 Deg 1 90 Relay open angle ROA used as release
in phase mode, in deg
INCosPhi> 0.25 - 200.00 %IB 0.01 1.00 Set level for 3I0cosFi, directional res
over current in % of IBase
SN> 0.25 - 200.00 %SB 0.01 10.00 Set level for 3I03U0cosFi, starting inv
time count in % of SBase
INDir> 0.25 - 200.00 %IB 0.01 5.00 Set level for directional residual over
current prot in % of IBase
tDef 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Definite time delay directional residual
overcurrent, in sec
SRef 0.03 - 200.00 %SB 0.01 10.00 Reference value of res power for inverse
time count in % of SBase
kSN 0.00 - 2.00 - 0.01 0.10 Time multiplier setting for directional
residual power mode
OpINNonDir> Off - - Off Operation of non-directional residual
On overcurrent protection
INNonDir> 1.00 - 400.00 %IB 0.01 10.00 Set level for non directional residual over
current in % of IBase
tINNonDir 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time delay for non-directional residual
over current, in sec
Table continues on next page

160
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TimeChar ANSI Ext. inv. - - IEC Norm. inv. Operation curve selection for IDMT
ANSI Very inv. operation
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
tMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.040 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT
curves, in sec
kIN 0.05 - 2.00 - 0.01 1.00 IDMT time mult for non-dir res over
current protection
OpUN> Off - - Off Operation of non-directional residual
On overvoltage protection
UN> 1.00 - 200.00 %UB 0.01 20.00 Set level for non-directional residual over
voltage in % of UBase
tUN 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for non-directional residual
over voltage, in sec
INRel> 0.25 - 200.00 %IB 0.01 1.00 Residual release current for all
directional modes in % of IBase
UNRel> 1.00 - 300.00 %UB 0.01 3.00 Residual release voltage for all direction
modes in % of UBase

Table 78: SDEPSDE Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.040 Time delay used for reset of definite
timers, in sec
tPCrv 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Setting P for customer programmable
curve
tACrv 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 13.500 Setting A for customer programmable
curve
tBCrv 0.00 - 20.00 - 0.01 0.00 Setting B for customer programmable
curve
tCCrv 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Setting C for customer programmable
curve
ResetTypeCrv Immediate - - IEC Reset Reset mode when current drops off.
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Table continues on next page

161
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tPRCrv 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Setting PR for customer programmable
curve
tTRCrv 0.005 - 100.000 - 0.001 13.500 Setting TR for customer programmable
curve
tCRCrv 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Setting CR for customer programmable
curve

Table 79: SDEPSDE Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Global base selection for function groups

Table 80: SDEPSDE Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
RotResU 0 deg - - 180 deg Setting for rotating polarizing quantity if
180 deg necessary

7.6.6 Monitored data

Table 81: SDEPSDE Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
INCOSPHI REAL - A Magnitude of residual
current along the
polarizing quantity
3I0cos(Fi-RCA)
IN REAL - A Measured magnitude of
the residual current 3I0
UN REAL - kV Measured magnitude of
the residual voltage 3U0
SN REAL - MVA Measured magnitude of
residual power
3I03U0cos(Fi-RCA)
ANG FI-RCA REAL - deg Angle between 3U0 and
3I0 minus RCA (Fi-RCA)

7.6.7 Operation principle

7.6.7.1 Function inputs

The function is using phasors of the residual current and voltage. Group signals I3P
and U3P containing phasors of residual current and voltage are taken from pre-
processor blocks.

The sensitive directional earth fault protection has the following sub-functions
included:

162
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0cos

is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage (|
=ang(3I0)-ang(Uref)|). The reference voltage (Uref) is the polarizing quantity
which is used for directionality and is defined as Uref = -3U0 ejRCADir, that is
-3U0 inversely rotated by the set characteristic angle RCADir. RCADir is normally
set equal to 0 in a high impedance earthed network with a neutral point resistor as
the active current component is appearing out on the faulted feeder only. RCADir is
set equal to -90 in an isolated network as all currents are mainly capacitive. The
function operates when 3I0cos gets larger than the set value.

RCADir = 0o,ROADir = 90o

3I0

j = ang(3I0 ) - ang(3Uref )
-3U0 = Uref
3I0 cosj

IEC06000648-4-en.vsd
IEC06000648 V4 EN

Figure 53: RCADir set to 0

Uref
RCADir = 90 , ROADir = 90

3I0

3I0 cos

= ang (3I0 ) ang (Uref )

3U0

IEC06000649_3_en.vsd
IEC06000649 V3 EN

Figure 54: RCADir set to -90

163
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

For trip, the operating quantity 3I0 cos , the residual current 3I0, and the residual
voltage 3U0 must be larger than the set levels : INCosPhi>, INRel> and UNRel>.
Refer to the simplified logical diagram in Figure 58.

Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.

When the function picks up, binary output signals START and STDIRIN are
activated. If the output signals START and STDIRIN remain active for the set
delay tDef the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN get activated. The trip
from this sub-function has definite time delay.

ROADir is Relay Operating Angle. ROADir is identifying a window around the

reference direction in order to detect directionality. Figure 55 shows the restrictions
made by the ROADir.

RCADir = 0o

3I0
Operate area

j
-3U0 = Uref
3I0 cos j

ROADir

IEC06000650_2_en.vsd
IEC06000650 V2 EN

Figure 55: Characteristic with ROADir restriction

The function indicates forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is

defined as 3I0cos ( + 180) the set value.

It is also possible to tilt the characteristic to compensate for current transformer

angle error with a setting RCAComp as shown in the Figure 56:

164
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

RCADir = 0

Operate area

-3U0 =Uref

Instrument
transformer a
RCAcomp
angle error
Characteristic after
angle compensation

3I0 (to prot)

3I0 (prim)

en06000651.vsd
IEC06000651 V2 EN

Figure 56: Explanation of RCAComp

Directional residual power protection measuring 3I0 3U0 cos

is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage
(Uref = -3U0 e-jRCA) compensated with the set characteristic angle RCADir (|
=ang(3I0)ang(Uref)|). The function operates when 3I0 3U0 cos gets larger
than the set value SN>. Refer to the simplified logical diagram in Figure 58.

For trip, the residual power 3I0 3U0 cos , the residual current 3I0 and the
release voltage 3U0, shall be larger than the set levels (SN>, INRel> and UNRel>).

Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.

When the function picks up, binary output signals START and STDIRIN are
activated. If the output signals START and STDIRIN remain active for the set
delay tDef or after the inverse time delay (setting kSN) the binary output signals
TRIP and TRDIRIN get activated.

The function shall indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction
is defined as 3I0 3U0cos ( + 180) the set value.

165
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse
time delay.

The inverse time delay is defined as:

kSN (3I0 3U 0 cos j(reference))

t inv =
3I0 3U 0 cos j(measured)
EQUATION1942 V2 EN (Equation 13)

Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0 and

The function will operate if the residual current is larger than the set value and the
angle | = ang(3I0)-ang(Uref)| is within the sector RCADir ROADir

RCADir = 0

ROADir = 80

Operate area

3I0

-3U0

IEC06000652-3-en.vsd
IEC06000652 V3 EN

Figure 57: Example of characteristic

For trip, Residual current 3I0 shall be larger than both INRel> and INDir>, and
residual voltage 3U0 shall be larger than the UNRel>. In addition, the angle shall
be in the set area defined by ROADir and RCADir. Refer to the simplified logical
diagram in Figure 58.

Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.

When the function picks up, binary output signals START and STDIRIN are
activated. If the output signals START and STDIRIN remain active for the set
delay tDef the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN get activated.

The function indicates forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is

defined as is within the angle sector: RCADir + 180 ROADir

166
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

This variant has definite time delay.

Directional functions
For all the directional functions there are directional start signals STFW: fault in
the forward direction, and STRV: fault in the reverse direction. Even if the
directional function is set to operate for faults in the forward direction, a fault in the
reverse direction will give the start signal STRV. Also if the directional function is
set to operate for faults in the reverse direction, a fault in the forward direction will
give the start signal STFW.

Non-directional earth fault current protection

This function will measure the residual current without checking the phase angle.
The function will be used to detect cross-country faults. This function can serve as
alternative or backup to distance protection with phase preference logic. To assure
selectivity the distance protection can block the non-directional earth fault current
function via the input BLKNDN.

The non-directional function is using the calculated residual current, derived as

sum of the phase currents. This will give a better ability to detect cross-country
faults with high residual current, also when dedicated core balance CT for the
sensitive earth fault protection will saturate.

This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse
time delay (TimeChar parameter). The inverse time delay shall be according to IEC
60255-3.

For trip, the residual current 3I0 shall be larger than the set level (INNonDir>).

Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKNDN.

When the function picks up, binary output signal STNDIN is activated. If the
output signal STNDIN remains active for the set delay tINNonDir or after the
inverse time delay the binary output signals TRIP and TRNDIN get activated.

Residual overvoltage release and protection

All the directional functions shall be released when the residual voltage gets higher
than a set level UNRel>.

In addition, there is also a separate non-directional residual over voltage protection,

with its own definite time delay tUN and set level UN>.

For trip, the residual voltage 3U0 shall be larger than the set level (UN>).

Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKUN.

When the function picks up, binary output signal STUN is activated. If the output
signal STUN is active for the set delay tUNNonDir, the binary output signals TRIP
and TRUN get activated. A simplified logical diagram of the total function is
shown in Figure 58.

167
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

OpINNonDir> = On
STNDIN
&
INNonDir>
t
TRNDIN
TimeChar IN
OpUN> = On
STUN
&
UN>
tUN TRUN
t

OpMode = 3I0Cosfi
INRel>

UNRel>
& &
tDef
INCosPhi> t

OpMode = 3I0 and fi

& STDIRIN
INDir> &
1

tDef TRDIRIN
t 1
OpMode = 3I03U0Cosfi
& &
SN>
t
S
1 N
STFW
RCADir Direction &
Detection
RCAComp Logic STRV
&
ROADir

DirMode = Forward

DirMode = Reverse
IEC06000653.vsd

IEC06000653 V4 EN

Figure 58: Simplified logical diagram of the sensitive earth fault current protection

7.6.8 Technical data

Table 82: SDEPSDE technical data
Function
Operate level for 3I0cosj
directional residual
overcurrent
Operate level for 3I03U0
cosj directional residual
power
Operate level for 3I0 and j
residual overcurrent
Range or value Accuracy
(0.25-200.00)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
(0.25-200.00)% of SBase 1.0% of Sr at S Sr
1.0% of S at S > Sr
(0.25-200.00)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Table continues on next page

168
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate level for non- (1.00-400.00)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
directional overcurrent 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Operate level for non- (1.00-200.00)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur at U Ur

directional residual 0.5% of U at U > Ur
overvoltage
Residual release current for (0.25-200.00)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
all directional modes 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Residual release voltage for (1.00-300.00)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur at U Ur

all directional modes 0.5% of U at U > Ur

Operate time for non- Min = 40 ms

directional residual
overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset Max = 65 ms

Reset time for non-directional Min = 40 ms

residual overcurrent at 2 to 0
x Iset Max = 65 ms

Operate time for directional Min = 115 ms

residual overcurrent at 0 to 2
x Iset Max = 165 ms

Reset time for directional Min = 25 ms

residual overcurrent at 2 to 0
x Iset Max = 65 ms

Independent time delay for (0.000 60.000) sec 0.2% or 80 ms whichever is

non-directional residual greater
overvoltage at 0.8 to 1.2 x
Uset
Independent time delay for (0.000 60.000) sec 0.2% or 80 ms whichever is
non-directional residual greater
overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset
Independent time delay for (0.000 60.000) sec 0.2% or 180 ms whichever is
directional residual greater
overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset
Inverse characteristics 16 curve types See table 896, table 897 and table
898
Relay characteristic angle (-179 to 180) degrees 2.0 degrees
RCA
Relay Open angle ROA (0 to 90) degrees 2.0 degrees

7.7 Thermal overload protection, one time constant,

Celsius/Fahrenheit LCPTTR/LFPTTR

169
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

7.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Thermal overload protection, one time LCPTTR 26
constant, Celsius

Thermal overload protection, one time LFPTTR 26

constant, Fahrenheit

7.7.2 Functionality
The increasing utilization of the power system closer to the thermal limits has
generated a need of a thermal overload protection for power lines.

A thermal overload will often not be detected by other protection functions and the
introduction of the thermal overload protection can allow the protected circuit to
operate closer to the thermal limits.

The three-phase current measuring protection has an I2t characteristic with settable
time constant and a thermal memory. The temperature is displayed in either Celsius
or Fahrenheit, depending on whether the function used is LCPTTR (Celsius) or
LFPTTR (Fahrenheit).

An alarm level gives early warning to allow operators to take action well before the
line is tripped.

Estimated time to trip before operation, and estimated time to reclose after
operation are presented.

170
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

7.7.3 Function block

LCPTTR
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR ALARM
ENMULT LOCKOUT
AMBTEMP
SENSFLT
RESET

IEC13000199-1-en.vsd
IEC13000199 V1 EN

LFPTTR
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR ALARM
ENMULT LOCKOUT
AMBTEMP
SENSFLT
RESET

IEC13000301-1-en.vsd
IEC13000301 V1 EN

Figure 59: LCPTTR/LFPTTR function bloc

7.7.4 Signals
Table 83: LCPTTR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Current multiplyer used when THOL is for two or
more lines
AMBTEMP REAL 0 Ambient temperature from external temperature
sensor
SENSFLT BOOLEAN 0 Validity status of ambient temperature sensor
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of internal thermal load counter

Table 84: LFPTTR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Current multiplyer used when THOL is for two or
more lines
AMBTEMP REAL 0 Ambient temperature from external temperature
sensor
SENSFLT BOOLEAN 0 Validity status of ambient temperature sensor
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of internal thermal load counter

171
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

Table 85: LCPTTR Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
START BOOLEAN Start Signal
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal
LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Lockout signal

Table 86: LFPTTR Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
START BOOLEAN Start Signal
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal
LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Lockout signal

7.7.5 Settings
Table 87: LCPTTR Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
TRef 0 - 300 Deg C 1 90 End temperature rise above ambient of
the line when loaded with IRef
IRef 0 - 400 %IB 1 100 The load current (in % of IBase) leading
to TRef temperature
IMult 1-5 - 1 1 Current multiplier when function is used
for two or more lines
Tau 1 - 1000 Min 1 45 Time constant of the line in minutes.
AlarmTemp 0 - 200 Deg C 1 80 Temperature level for start (alarm)
TripTemp 0 - 300 Deg C 1 90 Temperature level for trip
ReclTemp 0 - 300 Deg C 1 75 Temperature for reset of lockout after trip
tPulse 0.05 - 0.30 s 0.01 0.10 Operate pulse length. Minimum one
execution cycle
AmbiSens Off - - Off External temperature sensor available
On
DefaultAmbTemp -50 - 100 Deg C 1 20 Ambient temperature used when
AmbiSens is set to Off.
DefaultTemp -50 - 300 Deg C 1 50 Temperature raise above ambient
temperature at startup

Table 88: LCPTTR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

172
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

Table 89: LFPTTR Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
TRef 0 - 600 Deg F 1 160 End temperature rise above ambient of
the line when loaded with IRef
IRef 0 - 400 %IB 1 100 The load current (in % of IBase) leading
to TRef temperature
IMult 1-5 - 1 1 Current multiplier when function is used
for two or more lines
Tau 1 - 1000 Min 1 45 Time constant of the line in minutes.
AlarmTemp 0 - 400 Deg F 1 175 Temperature level for start (alarm)
TripTemp 0 - 600 Deg F 1 195 Temperature level for trip
ReclTemp 0 - 600 Deg F 1 170 Temperature for reset of lockout after trip
tPulse 0.05 - 0.30 s 0.01 0.10 Operate pulse length. Minimum one
execution cycle
AmbiSens Off - - Off External temperature sensor available
On
DefaultAmbTemp -50 - 250 Deg F 1 60 Ambient temperature used when
AmbiSens is set to Off.
DefaultTemp -50 - 600 Deg F 1 100 Temperature raise above ambient
temperature at startup

Table 90: LFPTTR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

7.7.6 Monitored data

Table 91: LCPTTR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TTRIP INTEGER - - Estimated time to trip (in
min)
TENRECL REAL - - Estimated time to reset
of lockout (in min)
TEMP REAL - deg Calculated temperature
of the device
TEMPAMB REAL - deg Ambient temperature
used in the calculations
TERMLOAD REAL - - Temperature relative to
operate temperature

173
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

Table 92: LFPTTR Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TTRIP INTEGER - - Estimated time to trip (in
min)
TENRECL REAL - - Estimated time to reset
of lockout (in min)
TEMP REAL - Temperature Calculated temperature
Fahrenheit of the device
TEMPAMB REAL - Temperature Ambient temperature
Fahrenheit used in the calculations
TERMLOAD REAL - - Temperature relative to
operate temperature

7.7.7 Operation principle

The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed and for each phase current
the RMS value is derived. These phase current values are fed to the thermal
overload protection, one time constant LCPTTR/LFPTTR function. The
temperature is displayed either in Celsius or Fahrenheit, depending on whether
LCPTTR/LFPTTR function is selected.

From the largest of the three-phase currents a final temperature is calculated

according to the expression:

2
I
Q final = Tref
I ref

EQUATION1167 V1 EN (Equation 14)

where:
I is the largest phase current,
Iref is a given reference current and

Tref is steady state temperature rise corresponding to Iref

The ambient temperature is added to the calculated final temperature. If this

temperature is larger than the set operate temperature level, TripTemp, a START
output signal is activated.

The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:

174
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

Dt

Qn = Qn -1 + ( Q final - Q n-1 ) 1 - e t
-

EQUATION1168 V1 EN (Equation 15)

where:
Qn is the calculated present temperature,

Qn-1 is the calculated temperature at the previous time step,

Qfinal is the calculated final temperature with the actual current,

Dt is the time step between calculation of the actual temperature and

t is the set thermal time constant for the protected device (line or cable)

The actual temperature of the protected component (line or cable) is calculated by

adding the ambient temperature to the calculated temperature, as shown above. The
ambient temperature can be taken from a separate sensor or can be given a constant
value. The calculated component temperature is available as a real figure signal,
TEMP.

When the component temperature reaches the set alarm level AlarmTemp the
output signal ALARM is set. When the component temperature reaches the set trip
level TripTemp the output signal TRIP is set.

There is also a calculation of the present time to operate with the present current.
This calculation is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above
the operation temperature:

Q - Qoperate
toperate = -t ln final
Q final - Q n

EQUATION1169 V1 EN (Equation 16)

The calculated time to trip is available as a real figure signal, TTRIP.

After a trip, caused by the thermal overload protection, there can be a lockout to
reconnect the tripped circuit. The output lockout signal LOCKOUT is activated
when the device temperature is above the set lockout release temperature setting
ReclTemp.

The time to lockout release is calculated by the following cooling time calculation.
The thermal content of the function can be reset with input RESET.

Q - Qlockout _ release
tlockout _ release = -t ln final
Q - Q
final n
EQUATION1170 V1 EN (Equation 17)

175
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

In the above equation, the final temperature is equal to the set or measured ambient
temperature. The calculated time to reset of lockout is available as a real figure
signal, TENRECL. This signal is enabled when the LOCKOUT output is activated.

In some applications the measured current can involve a number of parallel lines.
This is often used where one bay connects several parallel cables. By setting the
parameter IMult to the number of parallel lines (cables) the actual current on one
line is used in the protection algorithm by dividing the measured current by the
total number of cables. To activate this option the input ENMULT must be activated.

The protection has a reset input: RESET. By activating this input the calculated
temperature is reset to its default initial value. This is useful during testing when
secondary injected current has given a calculated false temperature level.

176
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

START
Final Temp > Trip Temp

TEMP
Calculation of actual
temperature

AMBTEMP ALARM
Actual Temp > Alarm Temp

I3P

Calculation of final
temperature
ENMULT TRIP

Actual Temp > Trip Temp

SENSFLT

LOCKOUT
Lockout logic

Actual Temp < Recl Temp

BLOCK

TTRIP
Calculation of time to trip
BLKTR

TENRECL
Calculation of time to reset
of lockout

IEC09000637-2-en.vsd
IEC09000637 V2 EN

Figure 60: Functional overview of LCPTTR/LFPTTR

177
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

7.7.8 Technical data

Table 93: LCPTTR/LFPTTR technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Reference current (2-400)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir

Reference temperature (0-300)C, (0 - 600)F 1.0C, 2.0F

Operate time: Time constant t = (11000) IEC 60255-8,
minutes 5.0% or 200
ms whichever is
greater
I - Ip
2 2
t = t ln
2 2 TTrip - TAmb 2
I - Ip - T I ref

ref
EQUATION13000039 V2 EN (Equation 18)

TTrip= set operate temperature

TAmb = ambient temperature
Tref = temperature rise above ambient at Iref
Iref = reference load current
I = actual measured current
Ip = load current before overload occurs

Alarm temperature (0-200)C, (0-400)F 2.0C, 4.0F

Operate temperature (0-300)C, (0-600)F 2.0C, 4.0F
Reset level temperature (0-300)C, (0-600)F 2.0C, 4.0F

7.8 Thermal overload protection, two time constants

TRPTTR

7.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Thermal overload protection, two time TRPTTR 49
constants

SYMBOL-A V1 EN

7.8.2 Functionality
If a power transformer reaches very high temperatures the equipment might be
damaged. The insulation within the transformer will experience forced ageing. As a
consequence of this the risk of internal phase-to-phase or phase-to-earth faults will
increase.

178
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

The thermal overload protection estimates the internal heat content of the
transformer (temperature) continuously. This estimation is made by using a thermal
model of the transformer with two time constants, which is based on current
measurement.

Two warning levels are available. This enables actions in the power system to be
done before dangerous temperatures are reached. If the temperature continues to
increase to the trip value, the protection initiates a trip of the protected transformer.

The estimated time to trip before operation is presented.

7.8.3 Function block

TRPTTR
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
COOLING ALARM1
ENMULT ALARM2
RESET LOCKOUT
WARNING

IEC06000272_2_en.vsd
IEC06000272 V2 EN

Figure 61: TRPTTR function block

7.8.4 Signals
Table 94: TRPTTR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
COOLING BOOLEAN 0 Cooling input Off / On. Changes Ib setting and
time constant
ENMULT BOOLEAN 0 Enable Multiplier for currentReference setting
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of function

Table 95: TRPTTR Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip Signal
START BOOLEAN Start signal
ALARM1 BOOLEAN First level alarm signal
ALARM2 BOOLEAN Second level alarm signal
LOCKOUT BOOLEAN Lockout signal
WARNING BOOLEAN Warning signal: Trip within set warning time

179
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

7.8.5 Settings
Table 96: TRPTTR Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
IRef 10.0 - 1000.0 %IB 1.0 100.0 Reference current in % of IBase
IRefMult 0.01 - 10.00 - 0.01 1.00 Multiplication Factor for reference current
IBase1 30.0 - 250.0 %IB 1.0 100.0 Base current,IBase1 without Cooling
input in % of IBase
IBase2 30.0 - 250.0 %IB 1.0 100.0 Base Current,IBase2, with Cooling input
ON in % of IBase
Tau1 1.0 - 500.0 Min 1.0 60.0 Time constant without cooling input in
min, with IBase1
Tau2 1.0 - 500.0 Min 1.0 60.0 Time constant with cooling input in min,
with IBase2
IHighTau1 30.0 - 250.0 %IB1 1.0 100.0 Current Sett, in % of IBase1 for rescaling
TC1 by TC1-IHIGH
Tau1High 5 - 2000 %tC1 1 100 Multiplier in % to TC1 when current is >
IHIGH-TC1
ILowTau1 30.0 - 250.0 %IB1 1.0 100.0 Current Set, in % of IBase1 for rescaling
TC1 by TC1-ILOW
Tau1Low 5 - 2000 %tC1 1 100 Multiplier in % to TC1 when current is <
ILOW-TC1
IHighTau2 30.0 - 250.0 %IB2 1.0 100.0 Current Set, in % of IBase2 for rescaling
TC2 by TC2-IHIGH
Tau2High 5 - 2000 %tC2 1 100 Multiplier in % to TC2 when current is
>IHIGH-TC2
ILowTau2 30.0 - 250.0 %IB2 1.0 100.0 Current Set, in % of IBase2 for rescaling
TC2 by TC2-ILOW
Tau2Low 5 - 2000 %tC2 1 100 Multiplier in % to TC2 when current is <
ILOW-TC2
ITrip 50.0 - 250.0 %IBx 1.0 110.0 Steady state operate current level in %
of IBasex
Alarm1 50.0 - 99.0 %Itr 1.0 80.0 First alarm level in % of heat content trip
value
Alarm2 50.0 - 99.0 %Itr 1.0 90.0 Second alarm level in % of heat content
trip value
ResLo 10.0 - 95.0 %Itr 1.0 60.0 Lockout reset level in % of heat content
trip value
ThetaInit 0.0 - 95.0 % 1.0 50.0 Initial Heat content, in % of heat content
trip value
Warning 1.0 - 500.0 Min 0.1 30.0 Time setting, below which warning would
be set (in min)
tPulse 0.01 - 0.30 s 0.01 0.10 Length of the pulse for trip signal (in sec).

180
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

Table 97: TRPTTR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

7.8.6 Monitored data

Table 98: TRPTTR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
HEATCONT REAL - % Percentage of the heat
content of the
transformer
I-MEASUR REAL - % Current measured by the
function in % of the rated
current
TTRIP INTEGER - - Estimated time to trip (in
min)
TRESLO INTEGER - - Estimated time to reset
of the function (in min)
TTRIPCAL INTEGER 0=Not Active - Calculated time status to
1=Long Time trip: not active/long time/
2=Active active
TRESCAL INTEGER 0=Not Active - Calculated time status to
1=Long Time reset: not active/long
2=Active time/active

7.8.7 Operation principle

The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed and for each phase current
the true RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values
are fed to the protection function.

From the largest of the three phase currents a relative final temperature (heat
content) is calculated according to the expression:

2
I
Q final =
I ref

EQUATION1171 V1 EN (Equation 19)

where:
I is the largest phase current
Iref is a given reference current

181
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

If this calculated relative temperature is larger than the relative temperature level
corresponding to the set operate (trip) current, then the start output signal START
will be activated.

The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:

If Q final > Q n
EQUATION1172 V1 EN (Equation 20)

Dt

Qn = Qn -1 + ( Q final - Q n-1 ) 1 - e t
-

EQUATION1173 V1 EN (Equation 21)

If Q final < Qn
EQUATION1174 V1 EN (Equation 22)

Dt
Qn = Q final - ( Q final - Q n -1 ) e
-
t

EQUATION1175 V1 EN (Equation 23)

where:
Qn is the calculated present temperature

Qn-1 is the calculated temperature at the previous time step

Qfinal is the calculated final (steady state) temperature with the actual current

Dt is the time step between calculation of the actual and final temperature
t is the set thermal time constant Tau1 or Tau2 for the protected transformer

The calculated transformer relative temperature can be monitored and it is exported

from the function as a real figure HEATCONT.

When the transformer temperature reaches any of the set alarm levels Alarm1 or
Alarm2 the corresponding output signal ALARM1 or ALARM2 is activated. When
the temperature of the object reaches the set trip level which corresponds to
continuous current equal to ITrip the output signal TRIP is activated.

There is also a calculation of the time to operation with the present current. This
calculation is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above the
operation temperature:

Q - Qoperate
toperate = -t ln final
Q final - Q n

EQUATION1176 V1 EN (Equation 24)

182
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

The calculated time to trip can be monitored and it is exported from the function as
an integer output TTRIP.

After a trip there can be a lockout to inhibit reconnecting the tripped circuit. The
output lockout signal LOCKOUT is activated when the temperature of the object is
above the set lockout release temperature setting ResLo.

The time to lockout release is calculated by the following cooling time calculation.

Q - Qlockout _ release
tlockout _ release = -t ln final
Q final - Q n

EQUATION1177 V1 EN (Equation 25)

In the above equation, the final temperature is calculated according to equation 19.
The calculated component temperature can be monitored as it is exported from the
function as a real figure, TRESLO.

When the current is so high that it has given a start signal START, the estimated
time to trip is continuously calculated and given as analogue output TTRIP. If this
calculated time get less than the setting time Warning, set in minutes, the output
WARNING is activated.

In case of trip a pulse with a set duration tPulse is activated.

183
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

Final Temp START

> TripTemp

RESET HEATCONT
Calculation
of heat
content

I3P
Calculation
ENMULT of final
temperature
ALARM1
Actual Temp >
Alarm1,Alarm2
ALARM2
Temp

Current base used

TRIP
Actual Temp
> TripTemp

S LOCKOUT
Management of R
COOLING setting
parameters: Tau,
Actual Temp
IBase Tau used
< Recl
Temp

TTRIP
Calculation
of time to
WARNING
trip

Calculation
of time to TRESCAL
reset of
lockout

IEC05000833-2-en.vsd

IEC05000833 V2 EN

Figure 62: Functional overview of TRPTTR

184
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

7.8.8 Technical data

Table 99: TRPTTR technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Base current 1 and 2 (30250)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir

Operate time: Ip = load current before overload 5.0% or 200 ms whichever

occurs is greater
I 2 - I p2 Time constant = (1500)
t = t ln minutes
I 2 - I ref 2

EQUATION1356 V2 EN (Equation 26)

I = actual measured current

Ip = load current before overload
occurs
Iref = reference load current
Alarm level 1 and 2 (5099)% of heat content 2.0% of heat content trip
operate value
Operate current (50250)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir

Reset level temperature (1095)% of heat content trip 2.0% of heat content trip

7.9 Breaker failure protection 3-phase activation and

output CCRBRF

7.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Breaker failure protection, 3-phase CCRBRF 50BF
activation and output
3I>BF

SYMBOL-U V1 EN

7.9.2 Functionality
Breaker failure protection (CCRBRF) ensures a fast backup tripping of surrounding
breakers in case the own breaker fails to open. CCRBRF can be current-based,
contact-based or an adaptive combination of these two conditions.

Current check with extremely short reset time is used as check criterion to achieve
high security against inadvertent operation.

Contact check criteria can be used where the fault current through the breaker is small.

185
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

CCRBRF can be single- or three-phase initiated to allow use with single phase
tripping applications. For the three-phase version of CCRBRF the current criteria
can be set to operate only if two out of four for example, two phases or one phase
plus the residual current start. This gives a higher security to the back-up trip
command.

CCRBRF function can be programmed to give a single- or three-phase re-trip of

the own breaker to avoid unnecessary tripping of surrounding breakers at an
incorrect initiation due to mistakes during testing.

7.9.3 Function block

CCRBRF
I3P* TRBU
BLOCK TRBU2
START TRRET
STL1 TRRETL1
STL2 TRRETL2
STL3 TRRETL3
CBCLDL1 CBALARM
CBCLDL2
CBCLDL3
CBFLT

IEC06000188-2-en.vsd
IEC06000188 V2 EN

Figure 63: CCRBRF function block

7.9.4 Signals
Table 100: CCRBRF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
START BOOLEAN 0 Three phase start of breaker failure protection
function
STL1 BOOLEAN 0 Start signal of phase L1
STL2 BOOLEAN 0 Start signal of phase L2
STL3 BOOLEAN 0 Start signal of phase L3
CBCLDL1 BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker closed in phase L1
CBCLDL2 BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker closed in phase L2
CBCLDL3 BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker closed in phase L3
CBFLT BOOLEAN 0 CB faulty, unable to trip. Back-up trip
instantaneously

186
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

Table 101: CCRBRF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRBU BOOLEAN Back-up trip by breaker failure protection function
TRBU2 BOOLEAN Second back-up trip by breaker failure protection
function
TRRET BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function
TRRETL1 BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function
phase L1
TRRETL2 BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function
phase L2
TRRETL3 BOOLEAN Retrip by breaker failure protection function
phase L3
CBALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for faulty circuit breaker

7.9.5 Settings
Table 102: CCRBRF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
FunctionMode Current - - Current Detection for trip based on Current/
Contact Contact/Current&Contact
Current/Contact
BuTripMode 2 out of 4 - - 1 out of 3 Back-up trip modes: 2 out of 4 or 1 out of
1 out of 3 3 or 1 out of 4
1 out of 4
RetripMode Retrip Off - - Retrip Off Oper mode of re-trip logic: OFF/CB Pos
CB Pos Check Check/No CB Pos Check
No CBPos Check
IP> 5 - 200 %IB 1 10 Operate phase current level in % of IBase
IN> 2 - 200 %IB 1 10 Operate residual current level in % of
IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of re-trip
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Time delay of back-up trip
t2MPh 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Time delay of back-up trip at multi-phase
start
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Trip pulse duration

Table 103: CCRBRF Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
I>BlkCont 5 - 200 %IB 1 20 I> in % of IBase block operation using
Function Mode Contact
t3 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.030 Additional time delay to t2 for a second
back-up trip
tCBAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay for alarm when faulty circuit
breaker indicated

187
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

Table 104: CCRBRF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

7.9.6 Monitored data

Table 105: CCRBRF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IL1 REAL - A Measured current in
phase L1
IL2 REAL - A Measured current in
phase L2
IL3 REAL - A Measured current in
phase L3
IN REAL - A Measured residual
current

7.9.7 Operation principle

Breaker failure protection CCRBRF is initiated from protection trip command,
either from protection functions within the IED or from external protection devices.

The start signal can be phase selective or general (for all three phases). Phase
selective start signals enable single pole re-trip function. This means that a second
attempt to open the breaker is done. The re-trip attempt can be made after a set
time delay. For transmission lines single pole trip and autoreclosing is often used.
The re-trip function can be phase selective if it is initiated from phase selective line
protection. The re-trip function can be done with or without current check. With
the current check the re-trip is only performed if the current through the circuit
breaker is larger than the operate current level.

The start signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. This signal will
start the back-up trip timer. If the opening of the breaker is successful this is
detected by the function, by detection of either low current through RMS
evaluation and a special adapted current algorithm or by open contact indication.
The special algorithm enables a very fast detection of successful breaker opening,
that is, fast resetting of the current measurement. If the current and/or contact
detection has not detected breaker opening before the back-up timer has run its
time a back-up trip is initiated.

Further the following possibilities are available:

The minimum length of the re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-
up trip pulse 2 are settable. The re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-

188
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

up trip pulse 2 will however sustain as long as there is an indication of closed

breaker.
In the current detection it is possible to use three different options: 1 out of 3
where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole, 1 out
of 4 where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole or
high residual current and 2 out of 4 where at least two current (phase current and/
or residual current) shall be high for breaker failure detection.
The current detection level for the residual current can be set different from the
setting of phase current detection.
It is possible to have different back-up time delays for single-phase faults and
for multi-phase faults.
The back-up trip can be made without current check. It is possible to have this
option activated for small load currents only.
It is possible to have instantaneous back-up trip function if a signal is high if
the circuit breaker is insufficient to clear faults, for example at low gas pressure.

START 30 ms

STL1 OR BFP Started L1

150 ms
AND S
SR Q t
Time out L1
R AND
BLOCK
OR
Reset L1
Retrip Time Out L1
BackupTrip L1 OR

IEC09000976-1-en.vsd
IEC09000976 V1 EN

Figure 64: Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF starting logic

IP>
a
a>b
b
FunctionMode Current
OR AND Reset L1
OR
Contact
1 Time out L1
Current and Contact OR
AND
Current High L1

IL1 CB Closed L1
AND
OR
BFP Started L1

a AND AND
a>b OR AND
I>BlkCont b

CBCLDL1 Contact Closed L1

AND

IEC09000977-1-en.vsd

IEC09000977 V1 EN

Figure 65: Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF, CB position evaluation

189
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

t1 TRRETL3
BFP Started L1 From other
t Retrip Time Out L1 TRRETL2 TRRET
phases OR

tPulse
RetripMode No CBPos Check AND
OR TRRETL1
OR

1
OR AND

CB Pos Check
AND
CB Closed L1
CBFLT

IEC09000978-3-en.vsd
IEC09000978 V3 EN

Figure 66: Simplified logic scheme of the retrip logic function

BFP Started L1
BFP Started L2 AND

BFP Started L3

AND
IN
a
a>b
IN> b

BUTripMode Contact Closed L1

2 out of 4
1 out of 4 OR
1
1 out of 3 OR
Current High L2
From other
Current High L3
phases
Current High L1 AND

CBFLT
AND

t2
BFP Started L1 Backup Trip L1
t AND
OR
t2MPh

AND t

AND
OR OR
tPulse
From other Backup Trip L2 OR TRBU
OR
phases Backup Trip L3
From other BFP Started L2 2 of 3
phases BFP Started L3 tPulse
t3
OR
TRBU2
S Q t
R SR
AND

IEC09000979-3-en.vsd
IEC09000979 V3 EN

Figure 67: Simplified logic scheme of the back-up trip logic function

Internal logical signals Current High L1, Current High L2, Current High L3 have
logical value 1 when current in respective phase has magnitude larger than setting
parameter IP>.

190
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

7.9.8 Technical data

Table 106: CCRBRF technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate phase (5-200)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
current 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, phase > 95% -

current
Operate residual (2-200)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
current 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, residual > 95% -

current
Phase current level (5-200)% of lBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
for blocking of 1.0% of I at I > Ir
contact function
Reset ratio > 95% -
Operate time for 10 ms typically -
current detection
Reset time for 15 ms maximum -
current detection
Time delay for re-trip (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms whichever is
at 0 to 2 x Iset greater

Time delay for back- (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms whichever is

up trip at 0 to 2 x Iset greater

Time delay for back- (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 20 ms whichever is

up trip at multi-phase greater
start at 0 to 2 x Iset

Additional time delay (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 20 ms whichever is

for a second back-up greater
trip at 0 to 2 x Iset

Time delay for alarm (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms whichever is

for faulty circuit greater
breaker

7.10 Stub protection STBPTOC

7.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Stub protection STBPTOC 50STB

3I>STUB

SYMBOL-T V1 EN

191
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

7.10.2 Functionality
When a power line is taken out of service for maintenance and the line
disconnector is opened in multi-breaker arrangements the voltage transformers will
mostly be outside on the disconnected part. The primary line distance protection
will thus not be able to operate and must be blocked.

The stub protection STBPTOC covers the zone between the current transformers
and the open disconnector. The three-phase instantaneous overcurrent function is
released from a normally open, NO (b) auxiliary contact on the line disconnector.

7.10.3 Function block

STBPTOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR
RELEASE

IEC05000678-2-en.vsd
IEC05000678 V2 EN

Figure 68: STBPTOC function block

7.10.4 Signals
Table 107: STBPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase currents
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip
RELEASE BOOLEAN 0 Release of stub protection

Table 108: STBPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip
START BOOLEAN General start

7.10.5 Settings
Table 109: STBPTOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
ReleaseMode Release - - Release Release of stub protection
Continuous
I> 5 - 2500 %IB 1 200 Operate current level in % of IBase

192
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

Table 110: STBPTOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay

Table 111: STBPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

7.10.6 Monitored data

Table 112: STBPTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IL1 REAL - A Current in phase L1
IL2 REAL - A Current in phase L2
IL3 REAL - A Current in phase L3

7.10.7 Operation principle

The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter
(DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current
the RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed
to a comparator in the stub protection function STBPTOC. In a comparator the
RMS values are compared to the set operating current value of the function I>.

If a phase current is larger than the set operating current the signal from the
comparator for this phase is activated. This signal will, in combination with the
release signal from line disconnection (RELEASE input), activate the timer for the
TRIP signal. If the fault current remains during the timer delay t, the TRIP output
signal is activated. The function can be blocked by activation of the BLOCK input.

193
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

STUB PROTECTION FUNCTION

BLOCK

TRIP
STIL1 AND

STIL2 OR

STIL3

RELEASE

en05000731.vsd
IEC05000731 V1 EN

Figure 69: Simplified logic diagram for Stub protection

7.10.8 Technical data

Table 113: STBPTOC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating current (5-2500)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (50-2500)% of IBase -

Independent time (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 30 ms whichever
delay at 0 to 2 x Iset is greater

Operate time, start at Min. = 10 ms -

0 to 2 x Iset Max. = 20 ms

Reset time, start at 2 Min. = 10 ms -

to 0 x Iset Max. = 20 ms

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

7.11 Pole discordance protection CCPDSC

194
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

7.11.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Pole discordance protection CCPDSC 52PD

PD

SYMBOL-S V1 EN

7.11.2 Functionality
An open phase can cause negative and zero sequence currents which cause thermal
stress on rotating machines and can cause unwanted operation of zero sequence or
negative sequence current functions.

Normally the own breaker is tripped to correct such a situation. If the situation
persists the surrounding breakers should be tripped to clear the unsymmetrical load
situation.

The Pole discordance protection function CCPDSC operates based on information

from auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker for the three phases with additional
criteria from unsymmetrical phase currents when required.

7.11.3 Function block

CCPDSC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKDBYAR
CLOSECMD
OPENCMD
EXTPDIND
POLE1OPN
POLE1CL
POLE2OPN
POLE2CL
POLE3OPN
POLE3CL

IEC13000305-1-en.vsd
IEC13000305 V1 EN

Figure 70: CCPDSC function block

195
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

7.11.4 Signals
Table 114: CCPDSC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase currents
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKDBYAR BOOLEAN 0 Block of function at CB single phase auto re-
closing cycle
CLOSECMD BOOLEAN 0 Close order to CB
OPENCMD BOOLEAN 0 Open order to CB
EXTPDIND BOOLEAN 0 Pole discordance signal from CB logic
POLE1OPN BOOLEAN 1 Pole one opened indication from CB
POLE1CL BOOLEAN 0 Pole one closed indication from CB
POLE2OPN BOOLEAN 1 Pole two opened indication from CB
POLE2CL BOOLEAN 0 Pole two closed indication from CB
POLE3OPN BOOLEAN 1 Pole three opened indication from CB
POLE3CL BOOLEAN 0 Pole three closed indication from CB

Table 115: CCPDSC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal to CB
START BOOLEAN Trip condition TRUE, waiting for time delay

7.11.5 Settings
Table 116: CCPDSC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Time delay between trip condition and
trip signal
ContSel Off - - Off Contact function selection
PD signal from CB
Pole pos aux cont.
CurrSel Off - - Off Current function selection
CB oper monitor
Continuous monitor
CurrUnsymLevel 0 - 100 % 1 80 Unsym magn of lowest phase current
compared to the highest.
CurrRelLevel 0 - 100 %IB 1 10 Current magnitude for release of the
function in % of IBase

196
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

Table 117: CCPDSC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

7.11.6 Monitored data

Table 118: CCPDSC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IMin REAL - A Lowest phase current
IMax REAL - A Highest phase current

7.11.7 Operation principle

The detection of pole discordance can be made in two different ways. If the contact
based function is used an external logic can be made by connecting the auxiliary
contacts of the circuit breaker so that a pole discordance is indicated, see figure 71.
circuit breaker

Pole discordance signal from circuit breaker

en05000287.vsd

IEC05000287 V2 EN

Figure 71: Pole discordance external detection logic

This binary signal is connected to a binary input of the IED. The appearance of this
signal will start a timer that will give a trip signal after the set time delay.

There is also a possibility to connect all phase selective auxiliary contacts (phase
contact open and phase contact closed) to binary inputs of the IED, see figure 72.

197
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

C.B.

poleOneClosed from C.B.

poleTwoClosed from C.B.

poleThreeClosed from C.B.

+
poleOneOpened from C.B.

poleTwoOpened from C.B.

poleThreeOpened from C.B.

en05000288.vsd
IEC05000288 V1 EN

Figure 72: Pole discordance signals for internal logic

In this case the logic is realized within the function. If the inputs are indicating pole
discordance the trip timer is started. This timer will give a trip signal after the set
delay.

Pole discordance can also be detected by means of phase selective current

measurement. The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete
Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each
phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. The smallest and the
largest phase current are derived. If the smallest phase current is lower than the
setting CurrUnsymLevel times the largest phase current the settable trip timer
(tTrip) is started. The tTrip timer gives a trip signal after the set delay. The TRIP
signal is a pulse 150 ms long. The current based pole discordance function can be
set to be active either continuously or only directly in connection to breaker open
or close command.

The function also has a binary input that can be configured from the autoreclosing
function, so that the pole discordance function can be blocked during sequences
with a single pole open if single pole autoreclosing is used.

The simplified block diagram of the current and contact based Pole discordance
protection function CCPDSC is shown in figure 73.

198
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

BLOCK
OR
BLKDBYAR

PolPosAuxCont

AND
POLE1OPN
POLE1CL
POLE2OPN
Discordance
POLE2CL
detection
POLE3OPN
POLE3CL t 150 ms
t TRIP
AND
OR

PD Signal from CB
AND
EXTPDIND

CLOSECMD t+200 ms
OR
OPENCMD

AND

Unsymmetry current
detection

en05000747.vsd
IEC05000747 V1 EN

Figure 73: Simplified block diagram of pole discordance function CCPDSC -

contact and current based

CCPDSC is blocked if:

The IED is in TEST mode and CCPDSC has been blocked from the local HMI
The input signal BLOCK is high
The input signal BLKDBYAR is high

The BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the pole discordance
protection. It can be connected to a binary input in the IED in order to receive a
block command from external devices or can be software connected to other
internal functions in the IED itself in order to receive a block command from
internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and
internal function outputs.

The BLKDBYAR signal blocks the pole discordance operation when a single
phase autoreclosing cycle is in progress. It can be connected to the output signal
1PT1 on SMBRRECfunction block. If the autoreclosing function is an external
device, then BLKDBYAR has to be connected to a binary input in the IED and this
binary input is connected to a signalization 1phase autoreclosing in progress
from the external autoreclosing device.

If the pole discordance protection is enabled, then two different criteria can
generate a trip signal TRIP:

Pole discordance signaling from the circuit breaker.

Unsymmetrical current detection.

199
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

7.11.7.1 Pole discordance signaling from circuit breaker

If one or two poles of the circuit breaker have failed to open or to close the pole
discordance status, then the function input EXTPDIND is activated from the pole
discordance signal derived from the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts (one NO
contact for each phase connected in parallel, and in series with one NC contact for
each phase connected in parallel) and, after a settable time interval tTrip (0-60 s), a
150 ms trip pulse command TRIP is generated by the Polediscordance function.

7.11.7.2 Unsymmetrical current detection

Unsymmetrical current indicated if:

any phase current is lower than CurrUnsymLevel of the highest current in the
three phases.
the highest phase current is greater than CurrRelLevel of IBase.

If these conditions are true, an unsymmetrical condition is detected and the internal
signal INPS is turned high. This detection is enabled to generate a trip after a set
time delay tTrip if the detection occurs in the next 200 ms after the circuit breaker
has received a command to open trip or close and if the unbalance persists. The 200
ms limitation is for avoiding unwanted operation during unsymmetrical load
conditions.

The pole discordance protection is informed that a trip or close command has been
given to the circuit breaker through the inputs CLOSECMD (for closing command
information) and OPENCMD (for opening command information). These inputs
can be connected to terminal binary inputs if the information are generated from
the field (that is from auxiliary contacts of the close and open push buttons) or may
be software connected to the outputs of other integrated functions (that is close
command from a control function or a general trip from integrated protections).

7.11.8 Technical data

Table 119: CCPDSC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (0100)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir

Independent time delay (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 25 ms whichever

between trip condition and trip is greater
signal

7.12 Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP

200
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

7.12.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP 37
P<
2
SYMBOL-LL V2 EN

7.12.2 Functionality
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available
as a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.

Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that
it does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous
generator becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the
rest of the power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous
machines operate as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator
under consideration is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may
be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the rest of the power system.

Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous
state. The task of the low forward power protection is to protect the turbine and not
to protect the generator itself.

Figure 74 illustrates the low forward power and reverse power protection with
underpower and overpower functions respectively. The underpower IED gives a
higher margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk
for unwanted operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One
should set the underpower IED to trip if the active power from the generator is less
than about 2%. One should set the overpower IED to trip if the power flow from
the network to the generator is higher than 1% depending on the type of turbine.

When IED with a metering class input CTs is used pickup can be set to more
sensitive value (e.g.0,5% or even to 0,2%).

201
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

Underpower IED Overpower IED

Operate
Q Q
Operate
Line Line

Margin Margin
P P

Operating point Operating point

without without
turbine torque turbine torque

IEC06000315-2-en.vsd
IEC06000315 V2 EN

Figure 74: Protection with underpower IED and overpower IED

7.12.3 Function block

GUPPDUP
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRIP1
BLOCK TRIP2
BLOCK1 START
BLOCK2 START1
START2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT

IEC07000027-2-en.vsd
IEC07000027 V2 EN

Figure 75: GUPPDUP function block

7.12.4 Signals
Table 120: GUPPDUP Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current group connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage group connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLOCK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 1
BLOCK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 2

202
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

Table 121: GUPPDUP Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRIP1 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 1
TRIP2 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 2
START BOOLEAN Common start
START1 BOOLEAN Start of stage 1
START2 BOOLEAN Start of stage 2
P REAL Active Power in MW
PPERCENT REAL Active power in % of SBase
Q REAL Reactive power in MVAr
QPERCENT REAL Reactive power in % of SBase

7.12.5 Settings
Table 122: GUPPDUP Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OpMode1 Off - - UnderPower Operation mode for stage 1 Off / On
UnderPower
Power1 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 1.0 Stage 1 underpower setting in Angle1
direction in % of SBase
Angle1 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for max power
senistivity stage 1
TripDelay1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Trip delay for stage 1
DropDelay1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.06 Drop-off delay for stage 1
OpMode2 Off - - UnderPower Operation mode for stage 2 Off / On
UnderPower
Power2 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 1.0 Power setting for stage 2 in % of SBase
Angle2 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for max power
senistivity stage 2
TripDelay2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Trip delay for stage 2
DropDelay2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.06 Drop-off delay for stage 2

Table 123: GUPPDUP Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
k 0.000 - 0.999 - 0.001 0.000 Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement, P and Q
Hysteresis1 0.2 - 5.0 %SB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in % SBase
Hysteresis2 0.2 - 5.0 %SB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in % SBase
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
current error at 5% of Ir
Table continues on next page

203
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
current error at 30% of Ir
IAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
current error at 100% of Ir
UAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
voltage error at 5% of Ur
UAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
voltage error at 30% of Ur
UAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
voltage error at 100% of Ur
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage
angles at 5% of Ir
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage
angles at 30% of Ir
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage
angles at 100% of Ir

Table 124: GUPPDUP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
Mode L1, L2, L3 - - Pos Seq Selection of measured current and
Arone voltage
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3

7.12.6 Monitored data

Table 125: GUPPDUP Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
P REAL - MW Active Power in MW
PPERCENT REAL - % Active power in % of
SBase
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive power in MVAr
QPERCENT REAL - % Reactive power in % of
SBase

7.12.7 Operation principle

A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is
shown in figure 76. The function has two stages with individual settings.

204
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

Chosen current
phasors P

Complex Derivation of S(angle)

S(angle) < t TRIP1
power S(composant)
Chosen voltage Power1
calculation in Char angle
phasors Q
START1

S(angle) < t TRIP2

Power2
START2

P = POWRE

Q = POWIM

IEC09000018-2-en.vsd
IEC09000018 V2 EN

Figure 76: Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function

The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing
blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as
shown in table 126.

Table 126: Complex power calculation

Set value: Mode Formula used for complex power calculation
L1, L2, L3
S = U L1 I L1* + U L 2 I L 2* + U L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1697 V1 EN (Equation 27)
Arone
S = U L1L 2 I L1* - U L 2 L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1698 V1 EN (Equation 28)
PosSeq
S = 3 U PosSeq I PosSeq *
EQUATION1699 V1 EN (Equation 29)
L1L2
S = U L1L 2 ( I L1* - I L 2* )
EQUATION1700 V1 EN (Equation 30)
L2L3
S = U L 2 L 3 ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
EQUATION1701 V1 EN (Equation 31)
L3L1
S = U L 3 L1 ( I L 3* - I L1* )
EQUATION1702 V1 EN (Equation 32)
Table continues on next page

205
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

Set value: Mode Formula used for complex power calculation

L1
S = 3 U L1 I L1*
EQUATION1703 V1 EN (Equation 33)
L2
S = 3 U L 2 I L 2*
EQUATION1704 V1 EN (Equation 34)
L3
S = 3 U L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1705 V1 EN (Equation 35)

The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for
monitoring and fault recording.

The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is

calculated. If this angle is 0 the active power component P is calculated. If this
angle is 90 the reactive power component Q is calculated.

The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting

Power1(2). For directional underpower protection, a start signal START1(2) is
activated if the calculated power component is smaller than the pick up value. For
directional overpower protection, a start signal START1(2) is activated if the
calculated power component is larger than the pick up value. After a set time delay
TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2) signal is activated if the start signal is still active. At
activation of any of the two stages a common signal START will be activated. At
trip from any of the two stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated.

To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The

absolute hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) + drop-
power1(2)). For generator low forward power protection the power setting is very
low, normally down to 0.02 p.u. of rated generator power. The hysteresis should
therefore be set to a smaller value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be
calculated with the Power1(2), Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) +
Hysteresis1(2)

For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the drop-
power1(2) would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5
Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal value.

If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value, the function will
reset after a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the start signal will drop
out and that the timer of the stage will reset.

7.12.7.1 Low pass filtering

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is

possible to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S
(P, Q). This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the

206
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following

recursive formula:

S = k SOld + (1 - k ) SCalculated
EQUATION1959 V1 EN (Equation 36)

Where
S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle

SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties
TD

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is without any additional delay).
When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for
k=0.92 in case of slow operating functions.

7.12.7.2 Calibration of analog inputs

Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get
class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle
compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation
below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure
77.

207
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

IEC05000652 V2 EN

Figure 77: Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference
and the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.

Analog outputs (Monitored data) from the function can be used for service values
or in the disturbance report. The active power is provided as MW value: P, or in
percent of base power: PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as Mvar value:
Q, or in percent of base power: QPERCENT.

7.12.8 Technical data

Table 127: GUPPDUP technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Power level (0.0500.0)% of SBase 1.0% of Sr at S Sr
for Step 1 and Step 2 1.0% of S at S > Sr
where
Characteristic angle (-180.0180.0) degrees 2.0 degrees
for Step 1 and Step 2
Independent time delay to operate for (0.01-6000.00) s 0.2% or 40 ms
Step 1 and Step 2 at 2 to 0.5 x Sr and whichever is greater
k=0.000

208
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

7.13 Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP

7.13.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP 32
P>
2
DOCUMENT172362-IMG158942
V2 EN

7.13.2 Functionality
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available
as a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.

Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that
it does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous
generator becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the
rest of the power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous
machines operate as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator
under consideration is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may
be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the rest of the power system.

Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous
state. The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to
protect the generator itself.

Figure 78 illustrates the low forward power and reverse power protection with
underpower and overpower functions respectively. The underpower IED gives a
higher margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk
for unwanted operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One
should set the underpower IED to trip if the active power from the generator is less
than about 2%. One should set the overpower IED to trip if the power flow from
the network to the generator is higher than 1%.

When IED with a metering class input CTs is used pickup can be set to more
sensitive value (e.g.0,5% or even to 0,2%).

209
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

Underpower IED Overpower IED

Operate
Q Q
Operate
Line Line

Margin Margin
P P

Operating point Operating point

without without
turbine torque turbine torque

IEC06000315-2-en.vsd
IEC06000315 V2 EN

Figure 78: Reverse power protection with underpower IED and overpower IED

7.13.3 Function block

GOPPDOP
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TRIP1
BLOCK TRIP2
BLOCK1 START
BLOCK2 START1
START2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT

IEC07000028-2-en.vsd
IEC07000028 V2 EN

Figure 79: GOPPDOP function block

7.13.4 Signals
Table 128: GOPPDOP Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current group connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage group connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLOCK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 1
BLOCK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of stage 2

210
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

Table 129: GOPPDOP Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Common trip signal
TRIP1 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 1
TRIP2 BOOLEAN Trip of stage 2
START BOOLEAN Common start
START1 BOOLEAN Start of stage 1
START2 BOOLEAN Start of stage 2
P REAL Active power P in MW
PPERCENT REAL Active power P in % of SBase
Q REAL Reactive power Q in MVAr
QPERCENT REAL Reactive power Q in % of SBase

7.13.5 Settings
Table 130: GOPPDOP Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OpMode1 Off - - OverPower Operation mode for stage 1 Off / On
OverPower
Power1 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 Stage 1 overpower setting in Angle1
direction in % of SBase
Angle1 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for max power
senistivity stage 1
TripDelay1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Trip delay for stage 1
DropDelay1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.06 Drop-off delay for stage 1
OpMode2 Off - - OverPower Operation mode for stage 2 Off / On
OverPower
Power2 0.0 - 500.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 Stage 2 overpower setting in Angle2
direction in % of SBase
Angle2 -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Characteristic angle for max power
senistivity stage 2
TripDelay2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Trip delay for stage 2
DropDelay2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.06 Drop-off delay for stage 2

211
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

Table 131: GOPPDOP Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
k 0.000 - 0.999 - 0.001 0.000 Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement, P and Q
Hysteresis1 0.2 - 5.0 %SB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in % of
SBase
Hysteresis2 0.2 - 5.0 %SB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in % of
SBase
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
current error at 5% of Ir
IAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
current error at 30% of Ir
IAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
current error at 100% of Ir
UAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
voltage error at 5% of Ur
UAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
voltage error at 30% of Ur
UAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude correction compensates
voltage error at 100% of Ur
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage
angles at 5% of Ir
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage
angles at 30% of Ir
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Corr of error betw current and voltage
angles at 100% of Ir

Table 132: GOPPDOP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
Mode L1, L2, L3 - - Pos Seq Selection of measured current and
Arone voltage
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3

212
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

7.13.6 Monitored data

Table 133: GOPPDOP Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
P REAL - MW Active power P in MW
PPERCENT REAL - % Active power P in % of
SBase
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive power Q in
MVAr
QPERCENT REAL - % Reactive power Q in %
of SBase

7.13.7 Operation principle

A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is
shown in figure 80. The function has two stages with individual settings.

Chosen current
phasors P

Complex Derivation of S(angle)

S(angle) > t TRIP1
power S(composant)
Chosen voltage Power1
calculation in Char angle
phasors Q
START1

S(angle) > t TRIP2

Power2
START2

P = POWRE

Q = POWIM

IEC06000567-2-en.vsd
IEC06000567 V2 EN

Figure 80: Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function

The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing
blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as
shown in table 134.

213
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

Table 134: Complex power calculation

Set value: Mode Formula used for complex power calculation
L1, L2, L3
S = U L1 I L1* + U L 2 I L 2* + U L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1697 V1 EN (Equation 37)
Arone
S = U L1L 2 I L1* - U L 2 L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1698 V1 EN (Equation 38)
PosSeq
S = 3 U PosSeq I PosSeq *
EQUATION1699 V1 EN (Equation 39)
L1L2
S = U L1L 2 ( I L1* - I L 2* )
EQUATION1700 V1 EN (Equation 40)
L2L3
S = U L 2 L 3 ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
EQUATION1701 V1 EN (Equation 41)
L3L1
S = U L 3 L1 ( I L 3* - I L1* )
EQUATION1702 V1 EN (Equation 42)
L1
S = 3 U L1 I L1*
EQUATION1703 V1 EN (Equation 43)
L2
S = 3 U L 2 I L 2*
EQUATION1704 V1 EN (Equation 44)
L3
S = 3 U L 3 I L 3*
EQUATION1705 V1 EN (Equation 45)

The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for
monitoring and fault recording.

The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is

calculated. If this angle is 0 the active power component P is calculated. If this
angle is 90 the reactive power component Q is calculated.

The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting

Power1(2). A start signal START1(2) is activated if the calculated power
component is larger than the pick up value. After a set time delay TripDelay1(2) a
trip TRIP1(2) signal is activated if the start signal is still active. At activation of
any of the two stages a common signal START will be activated. At trip from any
of the two stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated.

To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The

absolute hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) drop-
power1(2)). For generator reverse power protection the power setting is very low,
normally down to 0.02 p.u. of rated generator power. The hysteresis should
therefore be set to a smaller value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be

214
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

calculated with the Power1(2), Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2)

Hysteresis1(2)

For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the drop-
power1(2) would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5
Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal value.

If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value the function will reset
after a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the start signal will drop out
ant that the timer of the stage will reset.

7.13.7.1 Low pass filtering

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is

possible to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S
(P, Q). This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the
measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following
recursive formula:

S = k SOld + (1 - k ) SCalculated
EQUATION1959 V1 EN (Equation 46)

Where
S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle

SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay).
When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for k =
0.92 in case of slow operating functions.

7.13.7.2 Calibration of analog inputs

Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get
class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle
compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation
below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure
81.

215
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

IEC05000652 V2 EN

Figure 81: Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference
and the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.

Analog outputs from the function can be used for service values or in the
disturbance report. The active power is provided as MW value: P, or in percent of
base power: PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as Mvar value: Q, or in
percent of base power: QPERCENT.

216
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

7.13.8 Technical data

Table 135: GOPPDOP technical data
Function Range or value Accurac
y
Power level (0.0500.0)% of SBase
for Step 1 and Step 2 1.0%
of Sr
at S
Sr

1.0%
of S at
S > Sr

Characteristic angle (-180.0180.0) degrees 2.0

for Step 1 and Step 2 degree
s
Operate time, start at 0.5 to 2 x Sr and k=0.000 Min =10 ms
Max = 25 ms
Reset time, start at 2 to 0.5 x Sr and k=0.000 Min = 35 ms
Max = 55 ms
Independent time delay to operate for Step 1 and (0.01-6000.00) s
Step 2 at 0.5 to 2 x Sr and k=0.000 0.2%
or
40 ms
whiche
ver is
greate
r

7.14 Broken conductor check BRCPTOC

7.14.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC - 46

7.14.2 Functionality
Conventional protection functions cannot detect the broken conductor condition.
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC function, consisting of continuous phase
selective current unsymmetrical check on the line where the IED is connected,
gives an alarm or trip at detecting broken conductors.

217
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

7.14.3 Function block

BRCPTOC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTR

IEC07000034-2-en.vsd
IEC07000034 V2 EN

Figure 82: BRCPTOC function block

7.14.4 Signals
Table 136: BRCPTOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip

Table 137: BRCPTOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Operate signal of the protection logic
START BOOLEAN Start signal of the protection logic

7.14.5 Settings
Table 138: BRCPTOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
Iub> 50 - 90 %IM 1 50 Highest and lowest phase currents
difference in % of highest phase current
IP> 5 - 100 %IB 1 20 Minimum phase current for operation of
Iub> in % of IBase
tOper 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Operate time delay

Table 139: BRCPTOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tReset 0.010 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay in reset

218
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

Table 140: BRCPTOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

7.14.6 Monitored data

Table 141: BRCPTOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IUNBAL REAL - - Measured unbalance of
phase currents

7.14.7 Operation principle

Broken conductor check (BRCPTOC) detects a broken conductor condition by
detecting the asymmetry between currents in the three phases. The current-
measuring elements continuously measure the three-phase currents.

The current asymmetry signal output START is set on if:

The difference in currents between the phase with the lowest current and the
phase with the highest current is greater than set percentage Iub> of the
highest phase current
The highest phase current is greater than the minimum setting value IP>.
The lowest phase current is below 50% of the minimum setting value IP>

The third condition is included to avoid problems in systems involving parallel

lines. If a conductor breaks in one phase on one line, the parallel line will
experience an increase in current in the same phase. This might result in the first
two conditions being satisfied. If the unsymmetrical detection lasts for a period
longer than the set time tOper the TRIP output is activated.

The simplified logic diagram of the broken conductor check function is shown in
figure 83

BRCPTOC is disabled (blocked) if:

The IED is in TEST status and the function has been blocked from the local
HMI test menu (BlockBRC=Yes).
The input signal BLOCK is high.

The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive
a block command from external devices, or can be software connected to other
internal functions of the IED itself to receive a block command from internal
functions.

219
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

The output trip signal TRIP is a three-phase trip. It can be used to command a trip
to the circuit breaker or for alarm purpose only.

TEST

TEST-ACTIVE
and
Block BRCPTOC=Yes
START

Function Enable
BLOCK or
tOper
TRIP
and t
Unsymmetrical
Current Detection
STI

IL1<50%IP>

IL2<50%IP> or

IL3<50%IP>

IEC09000158-3-en.vsd
IEC09000158 V3 EN

Figure 83: Simplified logic diagram for Broken conductor check BRCPTOC

7.14.8 Technical data

Table 142: BRCPTOC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Minimum phase current for operation (5100)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir

Unbalance current operation (5090)% of maximum current 1.0% of Ir

Independent operate time delay (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 45 ms

whichever is greater
Independent reset time delay (0.010-60.000) s 0.2% or 30 ms
whichever is greater
Start time at current change from Ir to 0 Min = 25 ms -
Max = 35 ms
Reset time at current change from 0 to Ir Min = 5 ms -
Max = 20 ms

7.15 Capacitor bank protection CBPGAPC

220
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

7.15.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Capacitor bank protection CBPGAPC - -

7.15.2 Functionality
Shunt Capacitor Banks (SCB) are used in a power system to provide reactive
power compensation and power factor correction. They are as well used as integral
parts of Static Var Compensators (SVC) or Harmonic Filters installations.
Capacitor bank protection (CBPGAPC) function is specially designed to provide
protection and supervision features for SCBs.

7.15.3 Function block

CBPGAPC
I3P* TRIP
BLOCK TROC
BLKTR TRUC
BLKOC TRQOL
BLKUC TRHOL
BLKUCCUT START
BLKQOL STOC
BLKHOL STUC
STQOL
STHOL
STOCL1
STOCL2
STOCL3
STUCL1
STUCL2
STUCL3
STQOLL1
STQOLL2
STQOLL3
STHDTL1
STHDTL2
STHDTL3
STHIDML1
STHIDML2
STHIDML3
RECNINH

IEC14000046-1-en.vsd
IEC08000500 V2 EN

Figure 84: CBPGAPC function block

7.15.4 Signals
Table 143: CBPGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three Phase Current Input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block the complete function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Block all trip output signals
Table continues on next page

221
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

Name Type Default Description

BLKOC BOOLEAN 0 Block over current functionality
BLKUC BOOLEAN 0 Block under current functionality
BLKUCCUT BOOLEAN 0 Block UC function when the capacitor bank is
disconnected
BLKQOL BOOLEAN 0 Block reactive power over load functionality
BLKHOL BOOLEAN 0 Block harmonic over load functionality

Table 144: CBPGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TROC BOOLEAN Trip signal for over current
TRUC BOOLEAN Trip signal for under current
TRQOL BOOLEAN Trip signal for reactive power over load
TRHOL BOOLEAN Trip signal for harmonic over load
START BOOLEAN General start signal
STOC BOOLEAN Start signals for over current
STUC BOOLEAN Start signal for under current
STQOL BOOLEAN Start signal for reactive power over load
STHOL BOOLEAN Start signal for harmonic over load
STOCL1 BOOLEAN Start signal for over current of phase L1
STOCL2 BOOLEAN Start signal for over current of phase L2
STOCL3 BOOLEAN Start signal for over current of phase L3
STUCL1 BOOLEAN Start signal for under current of phase L1
STUCL2 BOOLEAN Start signal for under current of phase L2
STUCL3 BOOLEAN Start signal for under current of phase L3
STQOLL1 BOOLEAN Start signal for reactive power over load of phase
L1
STQOLL2 BOOLEAN Start signal for reactive power over load of phase
L2
STQOLL3 BOOLEAN Start signal for reactive power over load of phase
L3
STHDTL1 BOOLEAN Start signal harmonic over load Definite Time
stage phase L1
STHDTL2 BOOLEAN Start signal harmonic over load Definite Time
stage phase L2
STHDTL3 BOOLEAN Start signal harmonic over load Definite Time
stage phase L3
STHIDML1 BOOLEAN Start signal for harmonic over load IDMT stage of
phase L1
STHIDML2 BOOLEAN Start signal for harmonic over load IDMT stage of
phase L2
STHIDML3 BOOLEAN Start signal for harmonic over load IDMT stage of
phase L3
RECNINH BOOLEAN Capacitor bank reconnection inhibit signal

222
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

7.15.5 Settings
Table 145: CBPGAPC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
OperationRecIn Off - - On Inhibit reconnection for operation Off/On
On
IRecnInhibit< 4 - 1000 %IB 1 10 Current in % of IBase below which the
SCB is disconnected
tReconnInhibit 1.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 300.00 Time delay for Capacitor Bank voltage to
discharge to <5%
OperationOC Off - - On Operation over current Off/On
On
IOC> 10 - 900 %IB 1 135 Start level for over current operation, %
of IBase
tOC 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Time delay for over current operation
OperationUC Off - - Off Operation under current Off/On
On
IUC< 5 - 100 %IB 1 70 Start level for under current operation in
% of IBase
tUC 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Time delay for under current operation
OperationQOL Off - - On Operation reactive power over load Off/
On On
QOL> 10 - 900 % 1 130 Start level for reactive power over load in
%
tQOL 1.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 60.00 Time delay for reactive power overload
operation
OperationHOL Off - - On Operation harmonic over load Off/On
On
HOLDTU> 10 - 500 % 1 200 Start value of voltage in % for DT
harmonic voltage overload
tHOLDT 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 10.00 Time delay for operation of harmonic
voltage overload
HOLIDMTU> 80 - 200 % 1 110 Start value of voltage in % for IDMT
harm. voltage overload
kHOLIDMT 0.50 - 1.50 - 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier for harmonic voltage
overload IDMT curve
tMaxHOLIDMT 0.05 - 6000.00 s 0.01 2000.00 Maximum trip delay for harmonic voltage
overload
tMinHOLIDMT 0.05 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Minimum trip delay for harmonic voltage
overload

Table 146: CBPGAPC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

223
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

7.15.6 Monitored data

Table 147: CBPGAPC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CAPDISC BOOLEAN - - Capcitor bank
disconnected
IPEAKL1 REAL - A Equivalant RMS current
for phase L1
IPEAKL2 REAL - A Equivalant RMS current
for phase L2
IPEAKL3 REAL - A Equivalant RMS current
for phase L3
URMSL1 REAL - % Calculated voltage RMS
for phase L1
URMSL2 REAL - % Calculated voltage RMS
for phase L2
URMSL3 REAL - % Calculated voltage RMS
for phase L3
QL1 REAL - % Reactive power value for
phase L1
QL2 REAL - % Reactive power value for
phase L2
QL3 REAL - % Reactive power value for
phase L3

7.15.7 Operation principle

Capacitor bank protection (CBPGAPC) function measures the SCB three-phase
current. CBPGAPC has several built-in features:
Overcurrent stage
Undercurrent stage
Reconnection inhibit
Harmonic overload
Reactive power overload

7.15.7.1 Measured quantities

Three-phase input current from the SCB is connected via the preprocessing block
to CBPGAPC function. From this preprocessing block CBPGAPC function obtains
the following quantities for every phase:

Current sample values with sampling rate of 1 kHz in 50 Hz power system and
1.2 kHz in 60 Hz power system (that is, 20 samples in fundamental power
system cycle). These samples correspond to the instantaneous current

224
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

waveform of the protected SCB and in further text will be marked with symbol
i~
Equivalent RMS current value based on Peak Current measurement. This
value is obtained as maximum absolute current sample value over last power
system cycle divided by 2 and in further text will be marked with symbol
IpeakRMS
Equivalent true RMS current value based on the following formula:

i 2
~m

I TRMS = m =1

N
EQUATION2232 V1 EN (Equation 47)

where N is used number of samples in one power system cycle (that is, 20) and i~m
are last N samples of the current waveform. In further text this equivalent true rms
current quantity will be marked with symbol ITRMS.

Note that the measured IpeakRMS value is available as a service value in primary
amperes for every phase from the function.

From the measured SCB currents, voltage value across every SCB phase is
calculated. This is done by continuous integration of the measured current
waveform by using the following principal equation:

1
u (t ) = i ( t ) t

C
EQUATION2233 V1 EN (Equation 48)

Where:
u(t) is voltage waveform across capacitor
i(t) is capacitor current waveform
C is capacitance in Farads

By using this integration procedure and subsequent filtering the following

quantities for every phase are calculated within the function:

Voltage sample values with rate of 1 kHz in 50 Hz power system and 1.2 kHz
in 60 Hz power system (that is, 20 samples in fundamental power system
cycle). These samples correspond to the instantaneous voltage waveform
across the protected SCB and in further text will be marked with symbol u~
Equivalent rms voltage value based on Peak Voltage measurement. This value
is obtained as maximum absolute voltage sample value over last power system
cycle divided by 2 and in further text will be marked with symbol UpeakRMS
Equivalent true RMS voltage value based on the following formula:

225
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

u 2
~m

U TRMS = m =1

N
EQUATION2234 V1 EN (Equation 49)

Where:
N is used number of samples in one power system cycle (for example, 20)
u~m are last N samples of the voltage waveform

In further text this equivalent true RMS voltage quantity will be marked with
symbol UTRMS

Some additional filtering of the calculated voltage quantities is additionally

performed within the function in order to avoid equivalent RMS voltage values
overshooting during capacitor switching.

In order to avoid dependence of the current integration on exact value of the

protected capacitor bank capacitance the whole integration process is done in per
unit system. In order to convert measured current in primary amperes into per unit
value the base current for the protected capacitor bank shall be known. This value
is set as parameter IBase and it represents the rated SCB current in primary
amperes at fundamental frequency. This value is calculated for a three-phase SCB
as follows:

1000 Q [ MVAr ]
IBase =
3 U [ kV ]
EQUATION2235 V1 EN (Equation 50)

Where:
IBase is base current for the function in primary amperes
Q[MVAr] is shunt capacitor bank MVAr rating
U[kV] is shunt capacitor bank rated phase-to-phase voltage in kV

Once the base current is known the internal voltage calculations can be performed.
Note that the calculated UpeakRMS value is available as a service value in percent
for every phase from the function.

Generated reactive power (Q) by the capacitor bank is calculated within the
function for every phase as given by the following equation:

Q =U TRMS I TRMS

EQUATION2236 V1 EN (Equation 51)

226
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

Where:
Q is generated reactive power in per-unit
UTRMS is capacitor equivalent true RMS voltage in per-unit

ITRMS is capacitor equivalent true RMS current in per-unit

Additional filtering of the calculated Q quantity is performed within the function in

order to avoid overshooting during capacitor switching. Note that the calculated Q
value is available as a service value in percent for every phase from the function.

Simplified logic diagram about used analog quantities within one phase of the
capacitor bank protection function are shown in figure 85.

I3P I PeakRMS [A]

Overcurrent

Undercurrent

I TRMS[A]
Reconnection Inhibit

TRMS UTRMS[pu] Reactive Power Overload

FILTER
i~ [A]
IBase
u~ [pu] PEAK UPeakRMS[pu]
Harmonic Overload
FILTER

IEC09000746.vsd
IEC09000746 V1 EN

Figure 85: Simplified logic diagram about used analog quantities within one
phase

7.15.7.2 Reconnection inhibit feature

This feature determines that capacitor banks are disconnected from the power
system and is used to prevent reconnection of a charged capacitor bank to a live
network. The IRMS values of the three phase currents are compared with the
IRecnInhibit< parameter in order to determine when the capacitor bank is
energized or disconnected. The simplified logic diagram is shown in fig 86.

227
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

currentRMS a 0.02 s
CapBank Energised
a>b t
b
IRecnInhibit<

CAPDISC
Phx
NOT

IEC08000345-1-en.vsd
IEC08000345 V1 EN

Figure 86: Capacitor bank energization check for one phase. Similar for all
three phases

When SCB is disconnected in all three phases, the reconnection inhibit signal will
be given. This signal will be active until the preset time elapsed and is used to
inhibit the reconnection of charged capacitor bank to live network. The internal
logic diagram for the inhibit feature is shown in figure 87.

CAPDISC

CAPDISC
_ Ph1

CAPDISC Ph2 tReconnInhibit

AND
AND RECNINH
CAPDISC Ph3
-2 AND
Z

Z-2

en08000346.vsd
IEC08000346 V1 EN

Figure 87: Capacitor bank reconnection inhibit

7.15.7.3 Overcurrent feature

The overcurrent protection feature protects the capacitor bank from excessive
current conditions. The sub function takes the current peakRMS value from the
preprocessing block in the IED as input. The peakRMS value of the current is
compared with the setting of parameter IOC>. Whenever the peakRMS value of
the current crosses the set level the function sends a START signal as output. The
signal is passed through the definite timer for giving the TRIP signal. Each phase
will have its own START and TRIP signals for overcurrent. The internal logic for
the overcurrent feature is shown in fig 88.

228
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

IPeakRMS a
a>b tOC
IOC> b TROC
AND t AND

OperationOC=On
STOC

BLKTR

BLKOC

BLOCK OR

IEC08000350-1-en.vsd
IEC08000350 V1 EN

Figure 88: Capacitor bank overcurrent protection

7.15.7.4 Undercurrent feature

Undercurrent protection feature is used to disconnect the capacitor bank from the
rest of the power system when the voltage at the capacitor bank terminals is too
low for too long period of time. This sub function uses the current peakRMS value
from the preprocessing block in the IED as input. The peakRMS value of the
current is compared to the set value of the parameter IUC<. Whenever the
peakRMS value of the current falls below the set undercurrent level, the function
will send a START signal as output. The function can be blocked when the current
falls below the cut off level. The capacitor bank disconnected signals are used for
this blocking. This feature will help to prevent trip operation when the capacitor
bank is disconnected from the power system. The TRIP output signal is delayed by
a definite timer. Each phase will have its own START and TRIP signals for
undercurrent. The internal logic for the undercurrent feature is shown in fig 89.

IPeakRMS
a
b>a
IUC< b
tUC

AND t
AND TRUC
OperationUC=On

BLKUC
STUC
BLOCK
OR
CAPDISC

BLKTR

en08000351.vsd
IEC08000351 V1 EN

Figure 89: Capacitor bank undercurrent protection

7.15.7.5 Capacitor harmonic overload feature

Harmonic overload protection feature will protect the capacitor from over load
conditions caused by harmonics. The sub-function protects the capacitor in two

229
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

stages, first stage is Inverse time delay (IDMT) based and a second stage is based
on Definite Time (DT) delay.

IDMT curve has adjustable k factor and inverse time characteristic is shown in
figure 90, where k = 1. The IDMT curve starts only when the equivalent RMS
voltage value is higher than set value of parameter HOLIDMTU> and stays active
until the value falls below the reset value.

2.3
Voltage Peak RMS [pu]

2.1

1.9

1.7

1.5

1.3

1.1
0.1 1 10 100 1000 10000
Operate Time [s]
IEC08000352-1-en.vsd
IEC08000352 V1 EN

Figure 90: IDMT curve for harmonic overload (kHOLIDMT=1.0)

Main seven operating points for this IDMT curve are defined by IEC/ANSI
standards and they are shown in above figure and summarized in the following table:

Table 148: Main operating points for IDMT curve

UpeakRMS 1.15 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.7 2.0 2.2

[pu]
Time [s] 1800 300 60 15 1.0 0.3 0.12

Note the following regarding this IDMT curve:

1. When parameter kHOLIDMT has different value from 1.0 operating time is
proportionally changed (for example, when kHOLIDMT =0.9 operating times
will be 90% of the values shown in above figure 90 and table 148)
2. Between the seven main points in table 148, the operate time is calculate by
using linear interpolation in the logarithmic scale
3. Integration process is used to calculate the operate time for varying voltage
condition
4. By setting parameter tMinHOLIDMT =0.1s standard requirements for
minimum operating time of 100ms for harmonic overload IDMT curve can be
fluffed
5. By setting parameter tMaxHOLIDMT =2000s operation for small harmonics
overload condition when UpeakRMS is in-between 1.1pu and 1.2pu is assured

230
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

Harmonic overload definite time curve has settings facilities for independent
pickup and time delay. It can be used as separate tripping stage or as an alarm stage.

Both of these two harmonic overload stages are active during capacitor bank
energizing and are capable to properly measure and operate up to and including 9th
harmonic.

The internal logic for harmonic overload feature is shown in figure 91:

STHDTLx
UPeakRMS [pu]
a
a>b
HOLDTU> b

tHOLDT
t
OperationHOL=On AND
OR TRHOL
AND

BLKHOL

BLOCK
OR OR STHOL

BLKTR

OperationHOL=On AND
TR
UPeakRMS [pu]
a
a>b kHOLIDMT IDMT
HOLIDMTU> b
tMaxHOLIDMT
STHIDMLx
tMinHOLIDMT ST

UPeakRMS [pu]

IEC09000752-1-en.vsd
IEC09000752 V1 EN

Figure 91: Simplified logic diagram for harmonic overload

7.15.7.6 Capacitor reactive power overload feature

Reactive power overload protection feature will protect the capacitor bank from
reactive power overload conditions.

The sub-function will use the reactive power values as input. The reactive power
input values are calculated from the true RMS value of voltage and current. The
reactive power value is compared with the QOL> setting. When the reactive power
value exceeds the QOL> setting the STQOL signal will be activated. The start
signal is delayed by the definite timer before activating the TRQOL signal. The
internal logic diagram for this feature is shown in figure 92.

231
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

Q [pu]
a
a>b
QOL> b

tQOL
t
OperationQOL=On AND
TRQOL
AND
BLKTR

BLKQOL
STQOL
BLOCK
OR

en08000353.vsd
IEC08000353 V1 EN

Figure 92: Capacitor bank reactive power overload protection

7.15.8 Technical data

Table 149: CBPGAPC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, overcurrent (10-900)% of lBase 2.0% of Ir at I Ir
2.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, overcurrent >95% at (100-900)% of IBase -

Start time, overcurrent, at 0 Min = 5 ms -
to 2 x Iset Max = 20 ms
Reset time, overcurrent, at Min = 25 ms -
2 x Iset to 0 Max = 40 ms
Critical impulse time, 2 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -
overcurrent protection start 1 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset
Impulse margin time, 10 ms typically
overcurrent protection start
Operate value, (5-100)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir
undercurrent
Reset ratio, undercurrent <105% at (30-100)% of IBase -
Operate value, (4-1000)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir at I Ir
reconnection inhibit 1.0% of I at I > Ir
function
Operate value, reactive (10-900)% 1.0% of Sr at S Sr
power overload function 1.0% of S at S > Sr

Operate value, voltage (10-500)% 0.5% of Ur at U Ur

protection function for 0.5% of U at U > Ur
harmonic overload
(Definite time)
Operate value, voltage (80-200)% 0.5% of Ur at U Ur
protection function for 0.5% of U at U > Ur
harmonic overload (Inverse
time)
Inverse time characteristic According to IEC 60871-1 (2005) and 20% or 200 ms
IEEE/ANSI C37.99 (2000) whichever is greater
Table continues on next page

232
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Maximum trip delay,
harmonic overload IDMT
Minimum trip delay,
harmonic overload IDMT
Independent time delay,
overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset
Independent time delay,
undercurrent at 2 x Iset to 0
Independent time delay,
reactive power overload
function at 0 to 2 x QOL>
Independent time delay,
harmonic overload at 0 to 2
x HOL>
(0.05-6000.00) s 20% or 200 ms
whichever is greater
(0.05-60.00) s 20% or 200 ms
whichever is greater
(0.00-6000.00) s 0.2% or 30 ms
whichever is greater
(0.00-6000.00) s 0.2% or 60 ms
whichever is greater
(1.00-6000.00) s 0.2% or 60 ms
whichever is greater
(0.00-6000.00) s 0.2% or 35 ms
whichever is greater

7.16 Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection

VRPVOC

7.16.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent VRPVOC I>/U< 51V
protection

7.16.2 Functionality
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection (VRPVOC) function can be used as
generator backup protection against short-circuits.

The overcurrent protection feature has a settable current level that can be used
either with definite time or inverse time characteristic. Additionally, it can be
voltage controlled/restrained.

One undervoltage step with definite time characteristic is also available within the
function in order to provide functionality for overcurrent protection with
undervoltage seal-in.

233
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

7.16.3 Function block

VRPVOC
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TROC
BLOCK TRUV
BLKOC START
BLKUV STOC
STUV

IEC12000184-1-en.vsd
IEC12000184 V1 EN

Figure 93: VRPVOC function block

7.16.4 Signals
Table 150: VRPVOC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for current inputs
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function both stages
BLKOC BOOLEAN 0 Block of voltage restraint overcurrent stage (ANSI
51V)
BLKUV BOOLEAN 0 Block of under voltage function

Table 151: VRPVOC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TROC BOOLEAN Trip signal from voltage restrained overcurrent
stage
TRUV BOOLEAN Trip signal from undervoltage function
START BOOLEAN General start signal
STOC BOOLEAN Start signal from voltage restrained overcurrent
stage
STUV BOOLEAN Start signal from undervoltage function

234
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

7.16.5 Settings
Table 152: VRPVOC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
StartCurr 2.0 - 5000.0 %IB 1.0 120.0 Start current level in % of IBase
Characterist ANSI Ext. inv. - - IEC Norm. inv. Time delay curve type for 51V Voltage
ANSI Very inv. restrained overcurrent
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
tDef_OC 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Definite time delay for Over Current
k 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier for Inverse Definite
Minimum Time curves
tMin 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for Inverse
Definite Minimum Time curve
Operation_UV Off - - Off Operation of under-voltage stage (ANSI
On 27) Off / On
StartVolt 2.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Voltage for start of under-voltage stage
in % of UBase
tDef_UV 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Definite time time delay when used for
Under-Voltage
EnBlkLowV Off - - Off Enable internal low voltage level
On blocking for Under-Voltage
BlkLowVolt 0.0 - 5.0 %UB 0.1 3.0 Internal low voltage level for blocking of
UV in % of UBase

Table 153: VRPVOC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
VDepMode Step - - Slope Voltage dependent mode OC (step,
Slope slope)
VDepFact 5.0 - 100.0 % 0.1 25.0 Start current level in % of pickup when
U< 25% of UBase
UHighLimit 30.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 100.0 Voltage high limit setting in % of UBase

Table 154: VRPVOC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

235
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

7.16.6 Monitored data

Table 155: VRPVOC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IMAX REAL - A Maximum phase current
magnitude
UUMIN REAL - kV Minimum ph-to-ph
voltage magnitude

7.16.7 Operation principle

7.16.7.1 Measured quantities

The voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC function is always

connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration
tool (ACT), but it will always measure the maximum of the three-phase currents
and the minimum of the three phase-to-phase voltages. If frequency tracking mode
for preprocessing blocks is used, then the function operates properly in wide
frequency range (e.g. 10-90 Hz).

7.16.7.2 Base quantities

GlobalBaseSel defines the particular Global Base Values Group where the base
quantities of the function are set. In that Global Base Values Group:

IBase shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in primary
amperes.

UBase shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in

primary kV.

7.16.7.3 Overcurrent protection

The overcurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current
quantity with the set start level. The overcurrent step starts if the magnitude of the
measured current quantity is higher than the set level.

Voltage restraint/control feature

The overcurrent protection operation is made dependent of a measured voltage
quantity. This means that the start level of the overcurrent step is not constant but
decreases with the decrease in magnitude of the measured voltage quantity. This
feature affects the start current value of both definite time and inverse time IDMT
overcurrent protection; in particular the overcurrent with IDMT curve operates
faster during low voltage conditions. Two different types of dependencies are
available:

Voltage restrained overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode = Slope);

the start level of the overcurrent stage changes according to the Figure 94. The

236
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

voltage restrained characteristic is defined by the two points: (0.25*UBase ;

VDepFact *StartCurr/100*IBase) and (UHighLimit/100*UBase; StartCurr/
100*IBase). In the first point the factor 0.25 that multiply UBase cannot be
changed.

Start level of the current

StartCurr

VDepFact * StartCurr

0,25 UHighLimit
UBase
IEC10000123-2-en.vsd
IEC10000123 V2 EN

Figure 94: Example for start level of the current variation as function of
measured voltage magnitude in Slope mode of operation

Voltage controlled overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode = Step);

the start level of the overcurrent stage changes according to the Figure 95.

Start level of the current

StartCurr

VDepFact * StartCurr

UHighLimit UBase

IEC10000124-2-en.vsd
IEC10000124 V2 EN

Figure 95: Example for start level of the current variation as function of
measured voltage magnitude in Step mode of operation

237
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

7.16.7.4 Logic diagram

DEF time
selected
TROC
OR

MaxPhCurr
a STOC
a>b
b

StartCurr
X Inverse

Inverse
Voltage time
control or selected
restraint
feature

MinPh-PhVoltage

IEC10000214-1-en.vsd

IEC10000214 V1 EN

Figure 96: Simplified internal logic diagram for overcurrent function

DEF time
selected TRUV

MinPh-phVoltage a
b>a
b STUV
AND
StartVolt

Operation_UV=On

BLKUV

IEC10000213-1-en.vsd

IEC10000213 V1 EN

Figure 97: Simplified internal logic diagram for undervoltage function

7.16.7.5 Undervoltage protection

The undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage
quantity with the set start level. The undervoltage step starts if the magnitude of the
measured voltage quantity is lower than the set level.

238
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 7
Current protection

The start signal starts a definite time delay. If the value of the start signal is logical
TRUE for longer than the set time delay, the undervoltage step sets its trip signal to
logical TRUE.

This undervoltage functionality together with additional ACT logic can be used to
provide functionality for overcurrent protection with undervoltage seal-in.

7.16.8 Technical data

Table 156: VRPVOC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Start overcurrent (2.0 - 5000.0)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir at IIr
1.0% of I at I>Ir

Reset ratio, > 95%

overcurrent
Operate time, start Min = 15 ms
overcurrent at 0 to 2 x
Iset Max = 30 ms

Reset time, start Min = 15 ms

overcurrent at 0 to 2 x
Iset Max = 30 ms

Independent time (0.00 - 6000.00) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is

delay to operate at 0 greater
to 2 x Iset

Inverse time 13 curve types ANSI/IEEE C37.112

characteristics IEC 60255151
5.0% or 40 ms whichever is
greater
0.10 k 3.00
1.5 x Iset I 20 x Iset
See Table and Table
Minimum operate (0.00 - 60.00) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
time for inverse time greater
characteristics
High voltage limit, (30.0 - 100.0)% of UBase 1.0% of Ur
voltage dependent
operation
Start undervoltage (2.0 - 100.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Reset ratio, < 105%

undervoltage
Operate time start Min = 15 ms -
undervoltage at 2 to 0
x Uset Max = 30 ms

Reset time start Min = 15 ms -

undervoltage at 0 to 2
x Uset Max = 30 ms

Independent time (0.00 - 6000.00) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is

delay to operate, greater
undervoltage at 2 to 0
x Uset

Table continues on next page

239
Technical Manual
Section 7 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Current protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Internal low voltage (0.0 - 5.0)% of UBase 0.25% of Ur
blocking
Overcurrent: -
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically
Undervoltage: -
Critical impulse time 10ms typically at 2 to 0 x Uset
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically

240
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection

Section 8 Voltage protection

8.1 Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV

8.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV 27

3U<

SYMBOL-R-2U-GREATER-THAN
V2 EN

8.1.2 Functionality
Undervoltages can occur in the power system during faults or abnormal conditions.
Two step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV) function can be used to open circuit
breakers to prepare for system restoration at power outages or as long-time delayed
back-up to primary protection.

UV2PTUV has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.

UV2PTUV has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to system service voltage.

241
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection

8.1.3 Function block

UV2PTUV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKTR1 TR1L1
BLKST1 TR1L2
BLKTR2 TR1L3
BLKST2 TR2
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
START
ST1
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3

IEC06000276-2-en.vsd
IEC06000276 V2 EN

Figure 98: UV2PTUV function block

8.1.4 Signals
Table 157: UV2PTUV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase voltages
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 1
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLKTR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 2
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2

Table 158: UV2PTUV Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TR1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1
TR1L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L1
TR1L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L2
TR1L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L3
TR2 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step2
TR2L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L1
TR2L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L2
TR2L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L3
START BOOLEAN General start signal
Table continues on next page

242
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection

Name Type Description

ST1 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step1
ST1L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L1
ST1L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L2
ST1L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L3
ST2 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step2
ST2L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L1
ST2L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L2
ST2L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L3

8.1.5 Settings
Table 159: UV2PTUV Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationStep1 Off - - On Enable execution of step 1
On
Characterist1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A step 1
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
OpMode1 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of
2 out of 3 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1
3 out of 3
U1< 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 70.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in
% of UBase, step 1
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definitive time delay of step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 1
k1 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 1
IntBlkSel1 Off - - Off Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 1
Block of trip
Block all
IntBlkStVal1 1 - 50 %UB 1 20 Voltage setting for internal blocking in %
of UBase, step 1
tBlkUV1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of internal (low level)
blocking for step 1
HystAbs1 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1
OperationStep2 Off - - On Enable execution of step 2
On
Characterist2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A step 2
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
Table continues on next page

243
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OpMode2 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of
2 out of 3 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 2
3 out of 3
U2< 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in
% of UBase, step 2
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Definitive time delay of step 2
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 2
k2 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 2
IntBlkSel2 Off - - Off Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 2
Block of trip
Block all
IntBlkStVal2 1 - 50 %UB 1 20 Voltage setting for internal blocking in %
of UBase, step 2
tBlkUV2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of internal (low level)
blocking for step 2
HystAbs2 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 2

Table 160: UV2PTUV Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type
Frozen timer for step 1
Linearly decreased
tIReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1
ACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 1
BCrv1 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CCrv1 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 1
DCrv1 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for step 1
PCrv1 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CrvSat1 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. under voltage
IDMT curve, step 1
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve step 2
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type
Frozen timer for step 2
Linearly decreased
tIReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2
ACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 2
Table continues on next page

244
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

BCrv2 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 2
CCrv2 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 2
DCrv2 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for step 2
PCrv2 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 2
CrvSat2 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. under voltage
IDMT curve, step 2

Table 161: UV2PTUV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ConnType PhN DFT - - PhN DFT Group selector for connection type
PhPh RMS
PhN RMS
PhPh DFT
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

8.1.6 Monitored data

Table 162: UV2PTUV Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL1 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L1
UL2 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L2
UL3 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L3

8.1.7 Operation principle

Two-step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV) is used to detect low power system
voltage. UV2PTUV has two voltage measuring steps with separate time delays. If
one, two or three phase voltages decrease below the set value, a corresponding
START signal is generated. UV2PTUV can be set to START/TRIP based on 1 out
of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 of the measured voltages, being below the set point. If
the voltage remains below the set value for a time period corresponding to the
chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted
trip due to disconnection of the related high voltage equipment, a voltage
controlled blocking of the function is available, that is, if the voltage is lower than
the set blocking level the function is blocked and no START or TRIP signal is
generated.The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for each step and can
be either definite time delay or inverse time delay.

245
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection

UV2PTUV can be set to measure phase-to-earth fundamental value, phase-to-phase

fundamental value, phase-to-earth true RMS value or phase-to-phase true RMS
value. The choice of the measuring is done by the parameter ConnType. The
voltage related settings are made in percent of base voltage which is set in kV phase-
to-phase voltage. This means operation for phase-to-earth voltage under:

U < (%) UBase(kV )

3
EQUATION1429 V2 EN (Equation 52)

and operation for phase-to-phase voltage under:

U < (%) UBase(kV)

EQUATION1990 V1 EN (Equation 53)

When phase-to-earth voltage measurement is selected the function

automatically introduces division of the base value by the square
root of three.

8.1.7.1 Measurement principle

Depending on the set ConnType value, UV2PTUV measures phase-to-earth or phase-

to-phase voltages and compare against set values, U1< and U2<. The parameters
OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the START
outputs. Either 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3, or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be
lower than the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding START signal.

To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

8.1.7.2 Time delay

The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse
time delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay three different modes are available:
inverse curve A
inverse curve B
customer programmable inverse curve

The type A curve is described as:

k
t=
Un < -U

Un <
EQUATION1431 V2 EN (Equation 54)

246
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection

where:
Un< Set value for step 1 and step 2
U Measured voltage

The type B curve is described as:

k 480
t= 2.0
+ 0.055
Un < - U
32 - 0.5
Un <
EQUATION1432 V2 EN (Equation 55)

The customer programmable curve can be created as:

kA
t= p
+D
Un < - U
B -C
Un <
EQUATION1433 V2 EN (Equation 56)

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be
infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter
CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un<
down to Un< (1.0 CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Un< (1.0 CrvSatn/
100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn
B -C > 0
100
EQUATION1435 V1 EN (Equation 57)

The lowest voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration. The
details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section 25.3
"Inverse characteristics".

247
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection

Voltage

UL1
UL2
UL3

IDMT Voltage

Time

IEC12000186-1-en.vsd

IEC12000186 V1 EN

Figure 99: Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration

Trip signal issuing requires that the undervoltage condition continues for at least
the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite
time mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the
inverse time mode (IDMT). If the start condition, with respect to the measured
voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined
reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and
tIReset2pickup for the inverse time) the corresponding start output is reset. Here it
should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be
fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the
hysteresis area. Note that for the undervoltage function the IDMT reset time is
constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off
period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset
instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer
value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 100 and figure 101.

248
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection

tIReset1
tIReset1
Voltage Measured
START Voltage
HystAbs1
TRIP

U1<

Time

START t

TRIP

Time
Integrator Frozen Timer

Time
Linearly
Instantaneous
decreased IEC05000010-4-en.vsd

IEC05000010 V4 EN

Figure 100: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at
different reset types

249
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection

tIReset1
Voltage
tIReset1
START
START
HystAbs1 Measured Voltage
TRIP

U1<

Time

START t

TRIP

Time
Integrator Frozen Timer

Time
Instantaneous Linearly decreased
IEC05000011-en-3.vsd

IEC05000011 V3 EN

Figure 101: Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at
different reset types

Definite timer delay

When definite time delay is selected the function will operate as shown in figure
102. Detailed information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown
in figure 103 and figure 104 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s,
instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured.

250
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection

ST1

U t1
a tReset1
TR1
t
a<b t
U1< R
b
AND

IEC09000785-3-en.vsd
IEC09000785 V3 EN

Figure 102: Detailed logic diagram for step 1, DT operation

U1<

ST1

TR1

tReset1

t1

IEC10000039-3-en.vsd
IEC10000039 V3 EN

Figure 103: Example for Definite Time Delay stage1 reset

251
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection

U1<

ST1

TR1

tReset1

t1

IEC10000040-3-en.vsd
IEC10000040 V3 EN

Figure 104: Example for Definite Time Delay stage1 operation

8.1.7.3 Blocking

It is possible to block Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV partially or

completely, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTR1: blocks all trip outputs of step 1
BLKST1: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1
BLKTR2: blocks all trip outputs of step 2
BLKST2: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 2

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal1, either the
trip output of step 1, or both the trip and the START outputs of step 1, are blocked.
The characteristic of the blocking is set by the IntBlkSel1 parameter. This internal
blocking can also be set to Off resulting in no voltage based blocking.
Corresponding settings and functionality are valid also for step 2.

In case of disconnection of the high voltage component the measured voltage will
get very low. The event will START both the under voltage function and the
blocking function, as seen in figure 105. The delay of the blocking function must
be set less than the time delay of under voltage function.

252
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection

U Disconnection

Normal voltage

U1<

U2<

tBlkUV1 <
t1,t1Min
IntBlkStVal1
tBlkUV2 <
t2,t2Min
IntBlkStVal2

Time

Block step 1

Block step 2
en05000466.vsd

IEC05000466 V1 EN

Figure 105: Blocking function

8.1.7.4 Design

The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-neutral

voltages or the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive fourier filters or true RMS
filters of input voltage signals are used. The voltages are individually compared to
the set value, and the lowest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic
integration. A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 and 3
out of 3 criteria to fulfill the START condition. The design of Two step
undervoltage protection UV2PTUV is schematically shown in Figure 106.

253
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection

UL1 Comparator ST1L1

UL1 < U1< Voltage Phase Phase 1
Selector
OpMode1 ST1L2
UL2 Comparator Phase 2
1 out of 3
UL2 < U1< 2 out of 3 ST1L3
3 out of 3 Phase 3 Start t1
UL3 Comparator t1Reset
UL3 < U1< IntBlkStVal1 &
OR ST1
Trip
Output
START Logic TR1L1

Step 1 TR1L2
Time integrator TRIP
MinVoltSelector tIReset1
ResetTypeCrv1 TR1L3

TR1
OR

Comparator ST2L1
UL1 < U2< Voltage Phase Phase 1
Selector
OpMode2 ST2L2
Comparator Phase 2
UL2 < U2< 1 out of 3
2 out of 3 Start t2 ST2L3
3 out of 3 Phase 3 t2Reset
Comparator IntBlkStVal2 &
UL3 < U2< Trip ST2
Output OR
Logic
START TR2L1

Step 2
TR2L2
Time integrator TRIP
MinVoltSelector tIReset2
ResetTypeCrv2 TR2L3

TR2
OR
START
OR

TRIP
OR

IEC05000834-2-en.vsd
IEC05000834 V2 EN

Figure 106: Schematic design of Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV

254
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection

8.1.8 Technical data

Table 163: UV2PTUV technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, low (1.0100.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur
and high step
Absolute hysteresis (0.050.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Internal blocking (150)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

level, step 1 and
step 2
Inverse time - See table 908
characteristics for
step 1 and step 2,
see table 908
Definite time delay, (0.00-6000.00) s 0.2% or 40ms whichever is
step 1 at 1.2 to 0 x greater
Uset

Definite time delay, (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 40ms whichever is

step 2 at 1.2 to 0 x greater
Uset

Minimum operate (0.00060.000) s 0.2% or 40ms whichever is

time, inverse greater
characteristics
Operate time, start at Min= 15 ms -
2 to 0 x Uset Max= 30 ms

Reset time, start at 0 Min= 15 ms -

to 2 x Uset Max= 30 ms

Operate time, start at Min= 5 ms -

1.2 to 0 x Uset Max= 25 ms

Reset time, start at 0 Min= 15 ms -

to 1.2 x Uset Max= 35 ms

Critical impulse time 5 ms typically at 1.2 to 0 x Uset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

8.2 Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV

8.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV 59

3U>

SYMBOL-C-2U-SMALLER-THAN
V2 EN

255
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection

8.2.2 Functionality
Overvoltages may occur in the power system during abnormal conditions such as
sudden power loss, tap changer regulating failures, and open line ends on long lines.

OV2PTOV has two voltage steps, each of them with inverse or definite time delayed.

OV2PTOV has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to system service voltage.

8.2.3 Function block

OV2PTOV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKTR1 TR1L1
BLKST1 TR1L2
BLKTR2 TR1L3
BLKST2 TR2
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
START
ST1
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2
ST2L1
ST2L2
ST2L3

IEC06000277-2-en.vsd
IEC06000277 V2 EN

Figure 107: OV2PTOV function block

8.2.4 Signals
Table 164: OV2PTOV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Group signal for three phase voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 1
BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLKTR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 2
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2

Table 165: OV2PTOV Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TR1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1
TR1L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L1
Table continues on next page

256
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection

Name Type Description

TR1L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L2
TR1L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step1 phase L3
TR2 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step2
TR2L1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L1
TR2L2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L2
TR2L3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from step2 phase L3
START BOOLEAN General start signal
ST1 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step1
ST1L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L1
ST1L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L2
ST1L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step1 phase L3
ST2 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step2
ST2L1 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L1
ST2L2 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L2
ST2L3 BOOLEAN Start signal from step2 phase L3

8.2.5 Settings
Table 166: OV2PTOV Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationStep1 Off - - On Enable execution of step 1
On
Characterist1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A step 1
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
OpMode1 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of
2 out of 3 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 1
3 out of 3
U1> 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in
% of UBase, step 1
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definitive time delay of step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 1
k1 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 1
HystAbs1 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1
OperationStep2 Off - - On Enable execution of step 2
On
Table continues on next page

257
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Characterist2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A step 2
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
OpMode2 1 out of 3 - - 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for op (1 of
2 out of 3 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from step 2
3 out of 3
U2> 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT) in
% of UBase, step 2
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Definitive time delay of step 2
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 2
k2 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 2
HystAbs2 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 2

Table 167: OV2PTOV Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type
Frozen timer for step 1
Linearly decreased
tIReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1
ACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 1
BCrv1 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CCrv1 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 1
DCrv1 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for step 1
PCrv1 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CrvSat1 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. over voltage
IDMT curve, step 1
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve step 2
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type
Frozen timer for step 2
Linearly decreased
tIReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2
ACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 2
BCrv2 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 2
Table continues on next page

258
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CCrv2 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 2
DCrv2 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for step 2
PCrv2 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 2
CrvSat2 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. over voltage
IDMT curve, step 2

Table 168: OV2PTOV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ConnType PhN DFT - - PhN DFT Group selector for connection type
PhPh DFT
PhN RMS
PhPh RMS
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

8.2.6 Monitored data

Table 169: OV2PTOV Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL1 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L1
UL2 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L2
UL3 REAL - kV Voltage in phase L3

8.2.7 Operation principle

Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV is used to detect high power system
voltage. OV2PTOV has two steps with separate time delays. If one-, two- or three-
phase voltages increase above the set value, a corresponding START signal is
issued. OV2PTOV can be set to START/TRIP, based on 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3
out of 3 of the measured voltages, being above the set point. If the voltage remains
above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the
corresponding trip signal is issued.

The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be
either, definite time delay or inverse time delay.

The voltage related settings are made in percent of the global set base voltage
UBase, which is set in kV, phase-to-phase.

OV2PTOV can be set to measure phase-to-earth fundamental value, phase-to-phase

fundamental value, phase-to-earth RMS value or phase-to-phase RMS value. The
choice of measuring is done by the parameter ConnType.

259
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection

The setting of the analog inputs are given as primary phase-to-earth or phase-to-
phase voltage. OV2PTOV will operate if the voltage gets higher than the set
percentage of the set base voltage UBase. This means operation for phase-to-earth
voltage over:

U > (%) UBase( kV )

3
EQUATION1434 V1 EN (Equation 58)

and operation for phase-to-phase voltage over:

U > (%) UBase(kV)

EQUATION1993 V1 EN (Equation 59)

When phase-to-earth voltage measurement is selected the function

automatically introduces division of the base value by the square
root of three.

8.2.7.1 Measurement principle

All the three voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set
values, U1> for Step 1 and U2> for Step 2. The parameters OpMode1 and
OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the START outputs. Either 1 out
of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be higher than the
corresponding set point to issue the corresponding START signal.

To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis is included.

8.2.7.2 Time delay

The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse
time delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available:
inverse curve A
inverse curve B
inverse curve C
customer programmable inverse curve

The type A curve is described as:

k
t=
U - Un >

Un >
IECEQUATION2422 V1 EN (Equation 60)

260
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection

where:
Un> Set value for step 1 and step 2
U Measured voltage

The type B curve is described as:

k 480
t= 2.0
- 0.035
U - Un >
32 - 0.5
U n >
IECEQUATION2423 V1 EN (Equation 61)

The type C curve is described as:

k 480
t= 3.0
+ 0.035
U - Un >
32 - 0.5
Un >
IECEQUATION2425 V1 EN (Equation 62)

The customer programmable curve is defined by the below equation, where A, B,

C, D, k and p are settings:

kA
t= p
+D
U -Un >
B -C
Un >
EQUATION1439 V2 EN (Equation 63)

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be
infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore, a tuning parameter
CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un> up
to Un> (1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Un> (1.0 + CrvSatn/100).
If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn
B -C > 0
100
EQUATION1435 V1 EN (Equation 64)

The highest phase (or phase-to-phase) voltage is always used for the inverse time
delay integration, see figure 108. The details of the different inverse time
characteristics are shown in section "Inverse characteristics".

261
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection

Voltage
IDMT Voltage

UL1
UL2
UL3

Time

IEC05000016-2-en.vsd

IEC05000016 V2 EN

Figure 108: Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration

Operation of the trip signal requires that the overvoltage condition continues for at
least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for
definite time mode (DT) and by selected voltage level dependent time curves for
the inverse time mode (IDMT). If the START condition, with respect to the
measured voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a
user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and
tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding START output is reset, after that
the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the
hysteresis area, the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient
for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. The hysteresis value for
each step is settable HystAbsn (where n means either 1 or 2 respectively) to allow a
high and accurate reset of the function. For OV2PTOV the IDMT reset time is
constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off
period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer: either the timer is reset
instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer
value is linearly decreased during the reset time.

262
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection

tIReset1

tIReset1
Voltage
START
TRIP

U1>

HystAbs1 Measured
Voltage

Time

START t

TRIP

Time
Integrator Linearly decreased
Frozen Timer
t

Instantaneous Time
IEC09000055-2-en.vsd
IEC09000055 V2 EN

Figure 109: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at
different reset types

263
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection

tIReset1
Voltage tIReset1
START TRIP
START HystAbs1

U1>

Measured
Voltage

Time

START t

TRIP

Time
Integrator Frozen Timer

Time
Linearly
Instantaneous decreased IEC05000020-3-en.vsd

IEC05000020 V3 EN

Figure 110: Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at
different reset types

Definite time delay

When definite time delay is selected, the function will operate as shown in figure
111. Detailed information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown
in figure 103 and figure 104 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s
(where n means either 1 or 2 respectively), instantaneous reset of the definite time
delayed stage is ensured.

264
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection

ST1

U tReset1 t1
a
a>b t t
TR1
U1>
b AND
OFF ON
Delay Delay

IEC10000100-2-en.vsd
IEC10000100 V2 EN

Figure 111: Detailed logic diagram for step 1, definite time delay, DT operation

U1>

START

TRIP

tReset1

t1

IEC10000037-2-en.vsd
IEC10000037 V2 EN

Figure 112: Example for step 1, Definite Time Delay stage 1 reset

265
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection

U1>

START

TRIP

tReset1

t1

IEC10000038-2-en.vsd
IEC10000038 V2 EN

Figure 113: Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 operation

8.2.7.3 Blocking

It is possible to block Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV partially or

completely, by binary input signals where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTR1: blocks all trip outputs of step 1
BLKST1: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1
BLKTR2: blocks all trip outputs of step 2
BLKST2: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 2

8.2.7.4 Design

The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-earth

voltages or the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive Fourier filters or true RMS
filters of input voltage signals are used. The phase voltages are individually
compared to the set value, and the highest voltage is used for the inverse time
characteristic integration. A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out
of 3 or 3 out of 3 criteria to fulfill the START condition. The design of Two step
overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV) is schematically described in figure 114.

266
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection

UL1 Comparator ST1L1

UL1 > U1> Phase 1
Voltage Phase
Selector ST1L2
UL2 Comparator OpMode1 Phase 2
UL2 > U1> 1 out of 3
Start ST1L3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3 Phase 3 t1
UL3 Comparator t1Reset
UL3 > U1> & ST1
OR
Trip
START Output TR1L1
Logic

Time integrator Step 1 TR1L2

TRIP
MaxVoltSelect tIreset1
ResetTypeCrv1 TR1L3

OR TR1

Comparator ST2L1
UL1 > U2> Phase 1
Voltage Phase
Selector ST2L2
Comparator OpMode2 Phase 2
UL2 > U2> 1 out of 3
Start ST2L3
2 out of 3
Phase 3 t2
3 out of 3
Comparator t2Reset
UL3 > U2> & ST2
OR
Trip
START Output TR2L1
Logic

Time integrator Step 2 TR2L2

MaxVoltSelect tIreset2 TRIP
ResetTypeCrv2 TR2L3

TR2
OR

START
OR

TRIP
OR

IEC05000013-2-en.vsd

IEC05000013-WMF V2 EN

Figure 114: Schematic design of Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV

267
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection

8.2.8 Technical data

Table 170: OV2PTOV technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate (1.0-200.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur at U Ur
voltage, step 1 0.5% of U at U > Ur
and 2
Absolute (0.050.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur at U Ur
hysteresis 0.5% of U at U > Ur

Inverse time - See table 907

characteristics
for steps 1 and
2, see table 907
Definite time (0.00 - 6000.00) s 0.2% or 45 ms whichever is
delay, low step greater
(step 1) at 0 to
1.2 x Uset

Definite time (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 45 ms whichever is

delay, high step greater
(step 2) at 0 to
1.2 x Uset

Minimum (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 45 ms whichever is greater

operate time,
Inverse
characteristics
Operate time, Min. = 15 ms -
start at 0 to 2 x Max. = 30 ms
Uset

Reset time, Min. = 15 ms -

start at 2 to 0 x Max. = 30 ms
Uset

Operate time, Min. = 20 ms -

start at 0 to 1.2 Max. = 35 ms
x Uset

Reset time, Min. = 5 ms -

start at 1.2 to 0 Max. = 25 ms
x Uset

Critical impulse 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -

time
Impulse margin 15 ms typically -
time

268
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection

8.3 Two step residual overvoltage protection

ROV2PTOV

8.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Two step residual overvoltage ROV2PTOV 59N
protection
3U0
TRV V1 EN

8.3.2 Functionality
Residual voltages may occur in the power system during earth faults.

Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV function calculates the

residual voltage from the three-phase voltage input transformers or measures it
from a single voltage input transformer fed from an open delta or neutral point
voltage transformer.

ROV2PTOV has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.

Reset delay ensures operation for intermittent earth faults.

8.3.3 Function block

ROV2PTOV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKTR1 TR2
BLKST1 START
BLKTR2 ST1
BLKST2 ST2

IEC06000278-2-en.vsd
IEC06000278 V2 EN

Figure 115: ROV2PTOV function block

8.3.4 Signals
Table 171: ROV2PTOV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase voltages
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 1
Table continues on next page

269
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection

Name Type Default Description

BLKST1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 1
BLKTR2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of operate signal, step 2
BLKST2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of step 2

Table 172: ROV2PTOV Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip
TR1 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step1
TR2 BOOLEAN Common trip signal from step2
START BOOLEAN General start signal
ST1 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step1
ST2 BOOLEAN Common start signal from step2

8.3.5 Settings
Table 173: ROV2PTOV Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationStep1 Off - - On Enable execution of step 1
On
Characterist1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A step 1
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
U1> 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 30.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT),
step 1 in % of UBase
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Definitive time delay of step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 1
k1 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 1
HystAbs1 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 1
OperationStep2 Off - - On Enable execution of step 2
On
Characterist2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for
Inverse curve A step 2
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
U2> 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 45.0 Voltage setting/start val (DT & IDMT),
step 2 in % of UBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Definitive time delay of step 2
Table continues on next page

270
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Minimum operate time for inverse curves
for step 2
k2 0.05 - 1.10 - 0.01 0.05 Time multiplier for the inverse time delay
for step 2
HystAbs2 0.0 - 50.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Absolute hysteresis in % of UBase, step 2

Table 174: ROV2PTOV Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type
Frozen timer for step 1
Linearly decreased
tIReset1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 1
ACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 1
BCrv1 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CCrv1 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 1
DCrv1 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for step 1
PCrv1 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 1
CrvSat1 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. over voltage
IDMT curve, step 1
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in DT reset (s), step 2
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of used IDMT reset curve type
Frozen timer for step 2
Linearly decreased
tIReset2 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.025 Time delay in IDMT reset (s), step 2
ACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for step 2
BCrv2 0.50 - 100.00 - 0.01 1.00 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for step 2
CCrv2 0.0 - 1.0 - 0.1 0.0 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for step 2
DCrv2 0.000 - 60.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for step 2
PCrv2 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for step 2
CrvSat2 0 - 100 % 1 0 Tuning param for prog. over voltage
IDMT curve, step 2

271
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection

Table 175: ROV2PTOV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

8.3.6 Monitored data

Table 176: ROV2PTOV Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
ULevel REAL - kV Magnitude of measured
voltage

8.3.7 Operation principle

Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV is used to detect high single-
phase voltage, such as high residual voltage, also called 3U0. The residual voltage
can be measured directly from a voltage transformer in the neutral of a power
transformer or from a three-phase voltage transformer, where the secondary
windings are connected in an open delta. Another possibility is to measure the three-
phase voltages and internally in the IED calculate the corresponding residual
voltage and connect this calculated residual voltage to ROV2PTOV. ROV2PTOV
has two steps with separate time delays. If the single-phase (residual) voltage
remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time
delay, the corresponding TRIP signal is issued.

The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be
either, definite time delay or inverse time delay.

The voltage related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in
kV, phase-phase.

8.3.7.1 Measurement principle

The residual voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set values,
U1> and U2>.

To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

8.3.7.2 Time delay

The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse
time delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available:

272
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection

inverse curve A
inverse curve B
inverse curve C
customer programmable inverse curve

The type A curve is described as:

k
t=
U - Un >

Un >
IECEQUATION2422 V1 EN (Equation 65)

where:
Un> Set value for step 1 and step 2
U Measured voltage

The type B curve is described as:

k 480
t= 2.0
- 0.035
U - Un >
32 - 0.5
U n >
IECEQUATION2423 V1 EN (Equation 66)

The type C curve is described as:

k 480
t= 3.0
+ 0.035
U - Un >
32 - 0.5
U>
IECEQUATION2421 V1 EN (Equation 67)

The customer programmable curve can be created as:

kA
t= p
+D
U -Un >
B -C
Un >
EQUATION1439 V2 EN (Equation 68)

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be
infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter
CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un> up
to Un> (1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Un> (1.0 + CrvSatn/100).
If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn
B -C > 0
100
EQUATION1440 V1 EN (Equation 69)

273
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection

The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section
"Inverse characteristics".

TRIP signal issuing requires that the residual overvoltage condition continues for at
least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for
definite time mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves
for the inverse time mode (IDMT).

If the START condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the
delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and
tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the
corresponding START output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed.

Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the START condition
must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to
the hysteresis area. Also notice that for the overvoltage function IDMT reset time is
constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off
period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset
instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer
value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 109 and figure 110.

274
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection

tIReset1

tIReset1
Voltage
START
TRIP

U1>

HystAbs1 Measured
Voltage

Time

START t

TRIP

Time
Integrator Linearly decreased
Frozen Timer
t

Instantaneous Time
IEC09000055-2-en.vsd

IEC09000055 V2 EN

Figure 116: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay

275
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection

tIReset1
Voltage tIReset1
START TRIP
START HystAbs1

U1>

Measured
Voltage

Time

START t

TRIP

Time
Integrator Frozen Timer

Time
Linearly
Instantaneous decreased IEC05000020-3-en.vsd

IEC05000020 V3 EN

Figure 117: Voltage profile causing a reset of the START signal for step 1, and inverse time delay

Definite timer delay

When definite time delay is selected, the function will operate as shown in figure
118. Detailed information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown
in figure 103 and figure 104 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s,
instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured.

276
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection

ST1

U tReset1 t1
a
a>b t t
TR1
U1>
b AND
OFF ON
Delay Delay

IEC10000100-2-en.vsd
IEC10000100 V2 EN

Figure 118: Detailed logic diagram for step 1, Definite time delay, DT operation

U1<

ST1

TR1

tReset1

t1

IEC10000039-3-en.vsd
IEC10000039 V3 EN

Figure 119: Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 reset

277
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection

U1<

ST1

TR1

tReset1

t1

IEC10000040-3-en.vsd
IEC10000040 V3 EN

Figure 120: Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 operation

8.3.7.3 Blocking

It is possible to block Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV

partially or completely, by binary input signals where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTR1: blocks all trip outputs of step 1
BLKST1: blocks all start and trip outputs related to step 1
BLKTR2: blocks all trip outputs of step 2
BLKST2: blocks all START and trip inputs related to step 2

8.3.7.4 Design

The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the residual voltage.

Recursive Fourier filters filter the input voltage signal. The single input voltage is
compared to the set value, and is also used for the inverse time characteristic
integration. The design of Two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV)
is schematically described in figure 121.

278
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection

UN Comparator Phase 1 ST1

UN > U1>
Start TR1
START t1
tReset1
&
Trip
Time integrator Output
tIReset1 TRIP
Logic
ResetTypeCrv1
Step 1

ST2
Comparator Phase 1
UN > U2> TR2
Start
t2
START tReset2
& START
Trip OR
Time integrator Output
TRIP Logic
tIReset2
ResetTypeCrv2 TRIP
Step 2 OR

IEC05000748_2_en.vsd
IEC05000748 V2 EN

Figure 121: Schematic design of Two step residual overvoltage protection

ROV2PTOV

8.3.8 Technical data

Table 177: ROV2PTOV technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, (1.0-200.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur at U Ur
step 1 and step 2 0.5% of U at U > Ur

Absolute (0.050.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur at U Ur

hysteresis 0.5% of U at U > Ur

Inverse time - See table 909

characteristics for
low and high step,
see table 909
Definite time (0.006000.00) s 0.2% or 45 ms whichever is
delay low step greater
(step 1) at 0 to 1.2
x Uset

Table continues on next page

279
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Definite time (0.00060.000) s 0.2% or 45 ms whichever is
delay high step greater
(step 2) at 0 to 1.2
x Uset

Minimum operate (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 45 ms whichever is

time greater
Operate time, Min. = 15 ms -
start at 0 to 2 x Uset Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, start Min. = 15 ms -

at 2 to 0 x Uset Max. = 30 ms

Operate time, Min. = 20 ms -

start at 0 to 1.2 x Max. = 35 ms
Uset

Reset time, start Min. = 5 ms -

at 1.2 to 0 x Uset Max. = 25 ms

Critical impulse 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -

time
Impulse margin 15 ms typically -
time

8.4 Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV

8.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV - 60

8.4.2 Functionality
A voltage differential monitoring function is available. It compares the voltages
from two three phase sets of voltage transformers and has one sensitive alarm step
and one trip step. Alternatively, it can be used as voltage differential protection
(VDCPTOV) for shunt capacitor banks.

280
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection

8.4.3 Function block

VDCPTOV
U3P1* TRIP
U3P2* START
BLOCK ALARM
U1LOW
U2LOW
UL1DIFF
UL2DIFF
UL3DIFF

IEC06000528-2-en.vsd
IEC06000528 V2 EN

Figure 122: VDCPTOV function block

8.4.4 Signals
Table 178: VDCPTOV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P1 GROUP - Bus voltage
SIGNAL
U3P2 GROUP - Capacitor voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 179: VDCPTOV Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Voltage differential protection operated
START BOOLEAN Start of voltage differential protection
ALARM BOOLEAN Voltage differential protection alarm
U1LOW BOOLEAN Loss of U1 voltage
U2LOW BOOLEAN Loss of U2 voltage
UL1DIFF REAL Differential Voltage phase L1
UL2DIFF REAL Differential Voltage phase L2
UL3DIFF REAL Differential Voltage phase L3

8.4.5 Settings
Table 180: VDCPTOV Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
BlkDiffAtULow No - - Yes Block operation at low voltage
Yes
UDTrip 2.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 5.0 Operate level, in % of UBase
Table continues on next page

281
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Time delay for voltage differential
operate, in seconds
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for voltage differential reset,
in seconds
UDAlarm 2.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 2.0 Alarm level, in % of UBase
tAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Time delay for voltage differential alarm,
in seconds
U1Low 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 70.0 Input 1 undervoltage level, in % of UBase
U2Low 1.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 70.0 Input 2 undervoltage level, in % of UBase
tBlock 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time for undervoltage block

Table 181: VDCPTOV Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
RFL1 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Ratio compensation factor phase L1
U2L1*RFL1=U1L1
RFL2 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Ratio compensation factor phase L2
U2L2*RFL2=U1L2
RFL3 0.000 - 3.000 - 0.001 1.000 Ratio compensation factor phase L3
U2L3*RFL3=U1L3

Table 182: VDCPTOV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

8.4.6 Monitored data

Table 183: VDCPTOV Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL1DIFF REAL - kV Differential Voltage
phase L1
UL2DIFF REAL - kV Differential Voltage
phase L2
UL3DIFF REAL - kV Differential Voltage
phase L3

8.4.7 Operation principle

The Voltage differential protection function VDCPTOV (60) is based on
comparison of the amplitudes of the two voltages connected in each phase.
Possible differences between the ratios of the two Voltage/Capacitive voltage
transformers can be compensated for with a ratio correction factors RFLx. The

282
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection

voltage difference is evaluated and if it exceeds the alarm level UDAlarm or trip
level UDATrip signals for alarm (ALARM output) or trip (TRIP output) is given
after definite time delay tAlarm respectively tTrip. The two three phase voltage
supplies are also supervised with undervoltage settings U1Low and U2Low. The
outputs for loss of voltage U1LOW resp U2LOW will be activated. The U1 voltage
is supervised for loss of individual phases whereas the U2 voltage is supervised for
loss of all three phases.

Loss of all U1or all U2 voltages will block the differential measurement. This
blocking can be switched off with setting BlkDiffAtULow = No.

VDCPTOV function can be blocked from an external condition with the binary
BLOCK input. It can for example, be activated from Fuse failure supervision
function SDDRFUF.

To allow easy commissioning the measured differential voltage is available as

service value. This allows simple setting of the ratio correction factor to achieve
full balance in normal service.

The principle logic diagram is shown in figure 123.

283
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection

UDTripL1>
AND

UDTripL2> O tReset tTrip

AND
R t t
AND TRIP

UDTripL3>
AND
AND START

UDAlarmL1>
AND

UDAlarmL2> O tAlarm
AND
R t AND ALARM

UDAlarmL3>
AND

U1<L1
tAlarm
U1<L2 AND t U1LOW
AND

U1<L3 AND

OR
BlkDiffAtULow

U2<L1
t1
U2<L2 AND t U2LOW
AND

U2<L3

BLOCK

en06000382-2.vsd

IEC06000382 V3 EN

Figure 123: Principle logic for Voltage differential function VDCPTOV

8.4.8 Technical data

Table 184: VDCPTOV technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Voltage difference for alarm and (2.0100.0) % of UBase 0.5% of Ur
trip
Under voltage level (1.0100.0) % of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Independent time delay for (0.00060.000)s 0.2% or 40 ms whichever

voltage differential alarm at 0.8 is greater
to 1.2 x UDAlarm
Independent time delay for (0.00060.000)s 0.2% or 40 ms whichever
voltage differential trip at 0.8 to is greater
1.2 x UDTrip
Independent time delay for (0.00060.000)s 0.2% or 40 ms whichever
voltage differential reset at 1.2 to is greater
0.8 x UDTrip

284
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection

8.5 Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV

8.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV - 27

8.5.2 Functionality
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV is suitable for use in networks with an automatic
system restoration function. LOVPTUV issues a three-pole trip command to the
circuit breaker, if all three phase voltages fall below the set value for a time longer
than the set time and the circuit breaker remains closed.

The operation of LOVPTUV is supervised by the fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC.

8.5.3 Function block

LOVPTUV
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
CBOPEN
VTSU

IEC07000039-2-en.vsd
IEC07000039 V2 EN

Figure 124: LOVPTUV function block

8.5.4 Signals
Table 185: LOVPTUV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Voltage connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block the all outputs
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker open
VTSU BOOLEAN 0 Block from voltage circuit supervision

Table 186: LOVPTUV Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal
START BOOLEAN Start signal

285
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection

8.5.5 Settings
Table 187: LOVPTUV Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
UPE 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Operate voltage in % of base voltage
UBase
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 7.000 Operate time delay

Table 188: LOVPTUV Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tPulse 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Duration of TRIP pulse
tBlock 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Time delay to block when all 3ph
voltages are not low
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Time delay for enable the function after
restoration

Table 189: LOVPTUV Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

8.5.6 Operation principle

The operation of Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV is based on line voltage
measurement. LOVPTUV is provided with a logic, which automatically recognizes
if the line was restored for at least tRestore before starting the tTrip timer. All three
phases are required to be low before the output TRIP is activated. The START
output signal indicates start.

Additionally, LOVPTUV is automatically blocked if only one or two phase

voltages have been detected low for more than tBlock.

LOVPTUV operates again only if the line has been restored to full voltage for at
least tRestore. Operation of the function is also inhibited by fuse failure and open
circuit breaker information signals, by their connection to dedicated inputs of the
function block.

Due to undervoltage conditions being continuous the trip pulse is limited to a

length set by setting tPulse.

The operation of LOVPTUV is supervised by the fuse-failure function (BLKU

input) and the information about the open position (CBOPEN) of the associated
circuit breaker.

286
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 8
Voltage protection

The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive
a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other
internal functions of the IED itself in order to receive a block command from
internal functions. LOVPTUV is also blocked when the IED is in TEST status and
the function has been blocked from the HMI test menu. (Blocked=Yes).

TEST

TEST-ACTIVE
&
Blocked = Yes

START
BLOCK >1
Function Enable tTrip tPulse TRIP
STUL1N & t

STUL2N &
only 1 or 2 phases are low for
Latched at least 10 s (not three)
STUL3N Enable
&

tBlock
>1 t

CBOPEN Reset Enable

>1
&
VTSU
tRestore
>1 Set Enable
t
>1
Line restored for
at least 3 s

IEC07000089_2_en.vsd

IEC07000089 V2 EN

Figure 125: Simplified diagram of Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV

287
Technical Manual
Section 8 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Voltage protection

8.5.7 Technical data

Table 190: LOVPTUV technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage (1100)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Pulse timer when disconnecting (0.05060.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms whichever

all three phases is greater
Time delay for enabling the (0.00060.000) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever
functions after restoration is greater
Operate time delay when (0.00060.000) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever
disconnecting all three phases is greater
Time delay to block when all (0.00060.000) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever
three phase voltages are not low is greater

288
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 9
Frequency protection

Section 9 Frequency protection

9.1 Underfrequency protection SAPTUF

9.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF 81

f<

SYMBOL-P V1 EN

9.1.2 Functionality
Underfrequency occurs as a result of a lack of generation in the network.

Underfrequency protection SAPTUF measures frequency with high accuracy, and

is used for load shedding systems, remedial action schemes, gas turbine startup and
so on. Separate definite time delays are provided for operate and restore.

SAPTUF is provided with undervoltage blocking.

The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two
phase-phase or three phase-neutral voltages to be connected. For information about
how to connect analog inputs, refer to Application manual/IED application/
Analog inputs/Setting guidelines

9.1.3 Function block

SAPTUF
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTRIP RESTORE
BLKREST BLKDMAGN
FREQ

IEC06000279_2_en.vsd
IEC06000279 V2 EN

Figure 126: SAPTUF function block

289
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Frequency protection

9.1.4 Signals
Table 191: SAPTUF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocking operate output
BLKREST BOOLEAN 0 Blocking restore output

Table 192: SAPTUF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
START BOOLEAN General start signal
RESTORE BOOLEAN Restore signal for load restoring purposes
BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Measurement blocked due to low voltage
amplitude
FREQ REAL Measured frequency

9.1.5 Settings
Table 193: SAPTUF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
StartFrequency 35.00 - 75.00 Hz 0.01 48.80 Frequency set value
tDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate time delay
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for reset
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Restore time delay
RestoreFreq 45.00 - 65.00 Hz 0.01 50.10 Restore frequency value
TimerMode Definite timer - - Definite timer Setting for choosing timer mode
Volt based timer
UNom 50.0 - 150.0 %UB 1.0 100.0 Nominal voltage for voltage based timer
in % of UBase
UMin 50.0 - 150.0 %UB 1.0 90.0 Lower operation limit for voltage based
timer in % of UBase
Exponent 0.0 - 5.0 - 0.1 1.0 For calculation of the curve form for
voltage based timer
tMax 0.010 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Maximum time operation limit for voltage
based timer
tMin 0.010 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Minimum time operation limit for voltage
based timer

290
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 9
Frequency protection

Table 194: SAPTUF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

9.1.6 Monitored data

Table 195: SAPTUF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
ULevel REAL - kV Level of measured
voltage
FREQ REAL - Hz Measured frequency

9.1.7 Operation principle

Underfrequency protection SAPTUF is used to detect low power system frequency.
SAPTUF can either have a definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent
time delay. If the voltage magnitude dependent time delay is applied, the time
delay will be longer if the voltage is higher, and the delay will be shorter if the
voltage is lower. If the frequency remains below the set value for a time period
corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To
avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage
magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, that is, if the
voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage IntBlockLevel the function is blocked
and no START or TRIP signal is issued.

9.1.7.1 Measurement principle

The fundamental frequency of the measured input voltage is measured

continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFrequency. The frequency
function is dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases
the setting IntBlockLevel, SAPTUF gets blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is
issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the setting UBase, which should
be set as a phase-phase voltage in kV.

To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

9.1.7.2 Time delay

The time delay for underfrequency protection SAPTUF can be either a settable
definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent time delay, where the time
delay depends on the voltage level; a high voltage level gives a longer time delay
and a low voltage level causes a short time delay. For the definite time delay, the
setting TimeDlyOperate sets the time delay.

291
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Frequency protection

For the voltage dependent time delay the measured voltage level and the settings
UNom, UMin, Exponent, tMax and tMin set the time delay according to figure 127
and equation 70. The setting TimerOperation is used to decide what type of time
delay to apply.

Trip signal issuing requires that the underfrequency condition continues for at least
the user set time delay TimeDlyOperate. If the START condition, with respect to
the measured frequency ceases during this user set delay time, and is not fulfilled
again within a user defined reset time, TimeDlyReset, the START output is reset,
after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after
leaving the hysteresis area, the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is
not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area.

On the output of SAPTUF a 100ms pulse is issued, after a time delay

corresponding to the setting of TimeDlyRestore, when the measured frequency
returns to the level corresponding to the setting RestoreFreq.

9.1.7.3 Voltage dependent time delay

Since the fundamental frequency in a power system is the same all over the system,
except some deviations during power oscillations, another criterion is needed to
decide, where to take actions, based on low frequency. In many applications the
voltage level is very suitable, and in most cases is load shedding preferable in areas
with low voltage. Therefore, a voltage dependent time delay has been introduced,
to make sure that load shedding, or other actions, take place at the right location. At
constant voltage, U, the voltage dependent time delay is calculated according to
equation 70. At non-constant voltage, the actual time delay is integrated in a
similar way as for the inverse time characteristic for the undervoltage and
overvoltage functions.
Exponent
U - UMin
t= ( tMax - tMin ) + tMin
UNom - UMin

EQUATION1182 V1 EN (Equation 70)

where:
t is the voltage dependent time delay (at constant voltage),
U is the measured voltage
Exponent is a setting,
UMin, UNom are voltage settings corresponding to
tMax, tMin are time settings.

The inverse time characteristics are shown in figure 127, for:

292
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 9
Frequency protection

UMin = 90%
UNom = 100%
tMax = 1.0 s
tMin = 0.0 s
Exponent = 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4

1
0
1
Exponenent
TimeDlyOperate [s]

2
3
0.5 4

0
90 95 100

U [% of UBase]
en05000075.vsd
IEC05000075 V1 EN

Figure 127: Voltage dependent inverse time characteristics for underfrequency

protection SAPTUF. The time delay to operate is plotted as a
function of the measured voltage, for the Exponent = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4
respectively.

9.1.7.4 Blocking

It is possible to block underfrequency protection SAPTUF partially or completely,

by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTRIP: blocks the TRIP output
BLKREST: blocks the RESTORE output

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel, both the
START and the TRIP outputs, are blocked.

9.1.7.5 Design

The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the

positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting StartFrequency. The
frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults. The
time integrator can operate either due to a definite delay time or to the special
voltage dependent delay time. When the frequency has returned back to the setting

293
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Frequency protection

of RestoreFreq, the RESTORE output is issued after the time delay

TimeDlyRestore. The design of underfrequency protection SAPTUF is
schematically described in figure 128.

Block

BLOCK BLKDMAGN
OR
Comparator
U < IntBlockLevel

Voltage Time integrator

Start
TimerOperation Mode & START
Selector START
Frequency Comparator Trip
f < StartFrequency Output
TimeDlyOperate TRIP Logic

TimeDlyReset TRIP

100 ms

Comparator RESTORE
TimeDlyRestore
f > RestoreFreq

en05000726.vsd

IEC05000726 V1 EN

Figure 128: Simplified logic diagram for SAPTUF

9.1.8 Technical data

Table 196: SAPTUF technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, start function, at symmetrical three (35.00-75.00) Hz 2.0 mHz
phase voltage
Operate time, start at fset + 0.02 Hz to fset - 0.02 Hz Min. = 80 ms
fn = 50 Hz
Max. = 95 ms
-
Min. = 65 ms
fn = 60 Hz
Max. = 80 ms
Reset time, start at fset - 0.02 Hz to fset + 0.02 Hz Min. = 15 ms
-
Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, definite time function at fset + 0.02 Hz (0.000-60.000)s 0.2% or
to fset - 0.02 Hz 100 ms
whichever
is greater
Table continues on next page

294
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 9
Frequency protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Reset time, definite time function at fset - 0.02 Hz to (0.000-60.000)s 0.2% or
fset + 0.02 Hz 120 ms
whichever
is greater
Voltage dependent time delay Settings: 1.0% or
UNom=(50-150)% of Ubase 120 ms
UMin=(50-150)% of Ubase whichever
Exponent=0.0-5.0 is greater
tMax=(0.01060.000)s
tMin=(0.01060.000)s
Exponent
U - UMin
t= ( tMax - tMin ) + tMin
UNom - UMin
EQUATION1182 V1 EN (Equation 71)

U=Umeasured

9.2 Overfrequency protection SAPTOF

9.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF 81

f>

SYMBOL-O V1 EN

9.2.2 Functionality
Overfrequency protection function SAPTOF is applicable in all situations, where
reliable detection of high fundamental power system frequency is needed.

Overfrequency occurs because of sudden load drops or shunt faults in the power
network. Close to the generating plant, generator governor problems can also cause
over frequency.

SAPTOF measures frequency with high accuracy, and is used mainly for
generation shedding and remedial action schemes. It is also used as a frequency
stage initiating load restoring. A definite time delay is provided for operate.

SAPTOF is provided with an undervoltage blocking.

The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two
phase-phase or three phase-neutral voltages to be connected. For information about
how to connect analog inputs, refer to Application manual/IED application/
Analog inputs/Setting guidelines

295
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Frequency protection

9.2.3 Function block

SAPTOF
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTRIP BLKDMAGN
FREQ

IEC06000280_2_en.vsd
IEC06000280 V2 EN

Figure 129: SAPTOF function block

9.2.4 Signals
Table 197: SAPTOF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocking operate output

Table 198: SAPTOF Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
START BOOLEAN General start signal
BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Measurement blocked due to low amplitude
FREQ REAL Measured frequency

9.2.5 Settings
Table 199: SAPTOF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
StartFrequency 35.00 - 90.00 Hz 0.01 51.20 Frequency set value
tDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Operate time delay
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for reset

Table 200: SAPTOF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

296
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 9
Frequency protection

9.2.6 Monitored data

Table 201: SAPTOF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
ULevel REAL - kV Level of measured
voltage
FREQ REAL - Hz Measured frequency

9.2.7 Operation principle

Overfrequency protection SAPTOF is used to detect high power system frequency.
SAPTOF has a settable definite time delay. If the frequency remains above the set
value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding
TRIP signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted TRIP due to uncertain frequency
measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the
function is available from the preprocessing function, that is, if the voltage is lower
than the set blocking voltage in the preprocessing function, the function is blocked
and no START or TRIP signal is issued.

9.2.7.1 Measurement principle

The fundamental frequency of the positive sequence voltage is measured

continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFrequency. Overfrequency
protection SAPTOF is dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage
magnitude decreases below the setting IntBlockLevel, SAPTOF is blocked, and the
output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the
UBase, which should be set as a phase-phase voltage in kV. To avoid oscillations
of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

9.2.7.2 Time delay

The time delay for Overfrequency protection SAPTOF is a settable definite time
delay, specified by the setting TimeDlyOperate.

TRIP signal issuing requires that the overfrequency condition continues for at least
the user set time delay, TimeDlyReset. If the START condition, with respect to the
measured frequency ceases during this user set delay time, and is not fulfilled again
within a user defined reset time, TimeDlyReset, the START output is reset, after
that the defined reset time has elapsed. It is to be noted that after leaving the
hysteresis area, the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient
for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area.

The total time delay consists of the set value for time delay plus
minimum operate time of the start function (80 - 90 ms).

297
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Frequency protection

9.2.7.3 Blocking

It is possible to block overfrequency protection SAPTOF partially or completely,

by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTRIP: blocks the TRIP output

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel, both the
START and the TRIP outputs, are blocked.

9.2.7.4 Design

The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the

positive sequence voltage and compares it to the setting StartFrequency. The
frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults in the
power system. The time integrator operates due to a definite delay time. The design
of overfrequency protection SAPTOF is schematically described in figure 130.

BLOCK
BLKTRIP BLOCK
OR BLKDMAGN
Comparator
U < IntBlockLevel

Start
&
Trip
Voltage Time integrator Output
Logic
Definite Time Delay START START
Frequency Comparator
f > StartFrequency TimeDlyOperate
TRIP
TimeDlyReset
TRIP

en05000735.vsd

IEC05000735 V1 EN

Figure 130: Schematic design of overfrequency protection SAPTOF

298
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 9
Frequency protection

9.2.8 Technical data

Table 202: SAPTOF technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, start function (35.00-90.00) Hz 2.0 mHz
at symmetrical three-phase
voltage
Operate time, start at fset - Min. = 80 ms -
fn = 50Hz
0.02 Hz to fset + 0.02 Hz Max. = 95 ms
Min. = 65 ms
fn = 60 Hz
Max. = 80 ms
Reset time, start at fset + Min. = 15 ms -
0.02 Hz to fset - 0.02 Hz Max. = 30 ms

Operate time, definite time (0.000-60.000)s 0.2% 100 ms

function at fset -0.02 Hz to fset whichever is greater
+ 0.02 Hz
Reset time, definite time (0.000-60.000)s 0.2% 120 ms,
function at fset + 0.02 Hz to whichever is greater
fset - 0.02 Hz

9.3 Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC

9.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC 81

df/dt >
<

SYMBOL-N V1 EN

9.3.2 Functionality
The rate-of-change frequency protection function SAPFRC gives an early
indication of a main disturbance in the system. SAPFRC measures frequency with
high accuracy, and can be used for generation shedding, load shedding and
remedial action schemes. SAPFRC can discriminate between a positive or negative
change of frequency. A definite time delay is provided for operate.

SAPFRC is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation is based on

positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two phase-phase or three phase-
neutral voltages to be connected. For information about how to connect analog
inputs, refer to Application manual/IED application/Analog inputs/Setting
guidelines.

299
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Frequency protection

9.3.3 Function block

SAPFRC
U3P* TRIP
BLOCK START
BLKTRIP RESTORE
BLKREST BLKDMAGN

IEC06000281-2-en.vsd
IEC06000281 V2 EN

Figure 131: SAPFRC function block

9.3.4 Signals
Table 203: SAPFRC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocking operate output
BLKREST BOOLEAN 0 Blocking restore output

Table 204: SAPFRC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Operate/trip signal for frequency gradient
START BOOLEAN Start/pick-up signal for frequency gradient
RESTORE BOOLEAN Restore signal for load restoring purposes
BLKDMAGN BOOLEAN Blocking indication due to low amplitude

9.3.5 Settings
Table 205: SAPFRC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
StartFreqGrad -10.00 - 10.00 Hz/s 0.01 0.50 Frequency gradient start value, the sign
defines direction
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate time delay in positive / negative
frequency gradient mode
RestoreFreq 45.00 - 65.00 Hz 0.01 49.90 Restore frequency value
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Restore time delay
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for reset

300
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 9
Frequency protection

9.3.6 Monitored data

Table 206: SAPFRC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STARTDUR REAL - % Start duration in
percents of the total
operation time

9.3.7 Operation principle

Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC is used to detect fast power system
frequency changes, increase as well as, decrease at an early stage. SAPFRC has a
settable definite time delay. If the rate-of-change of frequency remains below the
set value, for negative rate-of-change, for a time period equal to the chosen time
delay, the TRIP signal is issued. If the rate-of-change of frequency remains above
the set value, for positive rate-of-change, for a time period equal to the chosen time
delay, the TRIP signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted TRIP due to uncertain
frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of
the function is available, that is if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage
IntBlockLevel, the function is blocked and no START or TRIP signal is issued. If
the frequency recovers, after a frequency decrease, a restore signal is issued.

9.3.7.1 Measurement principle

The rate-of-change of the fundamental frequency of the selected voltage is

measured continuously, and compared with the set value, StartFreqGrad. Rate-of-
change frequency protection SAPFRC is also dependent on the voltage magnitude.
If the voltage magnitude decreases below the setting IntBlockLevel, SAPFRC is
blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. The sign of the setting
StartFreqGrad, controls if SAPFRC reacts on a positive or on a negative change in
frequency. If SAPFRC is used for decreasing frequency that is, the setting
StartFreqGrad has been given a negative value, and a trip signal has been issued,
then a 100 ms pulse is issued on the RESTORE output, when the frequency
recovers to a value higher than the setting RestoreFreq. A positive setting of
StartFreqGrad, sets SAPFRC to START and TRIP for frequency increases.

To avoid oscillations of the output START signal, a hysteresis has been included.

9.3.7.2 Time delay

Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC has a settable definite time delay,

tTrip. .

Trip signal issuing requires that the rate-of-change of frequency condition

continues for at least the user set time delay, tTrip. If the START condition, with
respect to the measured frequency ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled
again within a user defined reset time, tReset, the START output is reset, after that

301
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Frequency protection

the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the
hysteresis area, the START condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient
for the signal to only return back into the hysteresis area.

The RESTORE output of SAPFRC is set, after a time delay equal to the setting of
tRestore, when the measured frequency has returned to the level corresponding to
RestoreFreq, after an issue of the TRIP output signal. If tRestore is set to 0.000 s
the restore functionality is disabled, and no output will be given. The restore
functionality is only active for lowering frequency conditions and the restore
sequence is disabled if a new negative frequency gradient is detected during the
restore period, defined by the settings RestoreFreq and tRestore.

9.3.7.3 Blocking

Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC) can be partially or totally blocked,

by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:

BLOCK: blocks all outputs

BLKTRIP: blocks the TRIP output
BLKREST: blocks the RESTORE output

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel, both the
START and the TRIP outputs, are blocked.

9.3.7.4 Design

Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC) measuring element continuously

measures the frequency of the selected voltage and compares it to the setting
StartFreqGrad. The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to power
system switchings and faults. The time integrator operates with a definite delay
time. When the frequency has returned back to the setting of RestoreFreq, the
RESTORE output is issued after the time delay tRestore, if the TRIP signal has
earlier been issued. The sign of the setting StartFreqGrad is essential, and controls
if the function is used for raising or lowering frequency conditions. The design of
SAPFRC is schematically described in figure 132.

302
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 9
Frequency protection

BLOCK
BLKTRIP

BLKRESET BLOCK
OR

Voltage Comparator BLKDMAGN

U < IntBlockLevel

Start
Rate-of-Change Time integrator &
Comparator
of Frequency Trip
If
Definite Time Delay Output
[StartFreqGrad<0 START START
Logic
AND
TimeDlyOperate
df/dt < StartFreqGrad]
OR
TimeDlyReset
[StartFreqGrad>0
AND
TRIP
df/dt > StartFreqGrad]
Then
START
100 ms

Frequency Comparator RESTORE

TimeDlyRestore
f > RestoreFreq

en05000835.vsd

IEC05000835 V1 EN

Figure 132: Schematic design of Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC

9.3.8 Technical data

Table 207: SAPFRC Technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, start function (-10.00-10.00) Hz/s 10.0 mHz/s
Operate value, restore (45.00-65.00) Hz 2.0 mHz
enable frequency
Definite restore time delay (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 100 ms whichever is
greater
Definite time delay for (0.200-60.000) s 0.2% or 120 ms whichever is
frequency gradient trip greater
Definite reset time delay (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250 ms whichever is
greater

303
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Frequency protection

9.4 Frequency time accumulation protection function

FTAQFVR

9.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/
identification identification IEEEidentification
Frequency time accumulation protection FTAQFVR f<> 81A

9.4.2 Functionality
Frequency time accumulation protection FTAQFVR is based on measured system
frequency and time counters. FTAQFVR for generator protection provides the
START output for a particular settable frequency limit, when the system frequency
falls in that settable frequency band limit and positive sequence voltage within
settable voltage band limit. The START signal triggers the individual event timer,
which is the continuous time spent within the given frequency band, and the
accumulation timer, which is the cumulative time spent within the given frequency
band. Once the timers reach their limit, an alarm or trip signal is activated to
protect the turbine against the abnormal frequency operation. This function is
blocked during generator start-up or shut down conditions by monitoring the circuit
breaker position and current threshold value. The function is also blocked when the
system positive sequence voltage magnitude deviates from the given voltage band
limit which can be enabled by EnaVoltCheck setting.

It is possible to create functionality with more than one frequency band limit by
using multiple instances of the function. This can be achieved by a proper
configuration based on the turbine manufacturer specification.

9.4.3 Function block

GUID-E27E0BC3-CB61-4E9E-9117-6AB8906F8362 V1 EN

Figure 133: FTAQFVR function block

304
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 9
Frequency protection

9.4.4 Signals
Table 208: FTAQFVR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for three phase current
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for three phase voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
CBCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker closed status input
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Circuit breaker open status input
LOADINIT BOOLEAN 0 Loads the initial accumulation time to the function
HOLDACC BOOLEAN 0 Holds the time accumulation when input is
activated
RESETACC BOOLEAN 0 Resetting the accumulated time of the function
block

Table 209: FTAQFVR Output signals

Name Type Description
ERROR BOOLEAN Error output for incorrect settings
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal of the function
TRIPACC BOOLEAN Trip signal when accumulation time is exceeded
the set limit
TRIPCONT BOOLEAN Trip signal when continuous time is exceeded the
set limit
START BOOLEAN Start signal of the function
ACCALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal for reaching the frequency time
accumulation value
STRORHLD BOOLEAN Activated when function starts or HOLDACC input
is active
FREQOK BOOLEAN Indicates the system frequency within the
frequency band limits
VOLTOK BOOLEAN Indicates the system voltage within the voltage
band limits

9.4.5 Settings
Table 210: FTAQFVR Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode Off / On
On
tContinuous 0.0 - 6000.0 s 0.1 20.0 Continuous time limit for frequency band
limits
tAccLimit 10.0 - 90000.0 s 0.1 600.0 Accumulation time limit for frequency
band limits
Table continues on next page

305
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Frequency protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

FreqHighLimit 35.00 - 90.00 Hz 0.01 47.50 Frequency High limit value
FreqLowLimit 30.00 - 85.00 Hz 0.01 47.00 Frequency Low limit value
CBCheck Disable - - Enable Enabling the generator start or stop
Enable detection logic
CurrStartLevel 5.0 - 100.0 %IB 0.1 10.0 Threshold current value of generator in
percentage of base current
EnaVoltCheck Disable - - Enable Enabling the voltage band limit check
Enable
UHighLimit 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 1.0 200.0 Voltage high limit for voltage band limit
check
ULowLimit 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 1.0 0.0 Voltage low limit for voltage band limit
check

Table 211: FTAQFVR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
initTimeAcc 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.0 Initial accumulated time when LOADINIT
command is executed

9.4.6 Monitored data

Table 212: FTAQFVR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
FREQ REAL - Hz Measured frequency
value
ACCTIME REAL - s Accumulated time for
frequency band limits
LASTEVTD REAL - - Accumulation time for
last event of frequency
within band

9.4.7 Operation principle

Frequency time accumulation protection function FTAQFVR is used to protect the

turbine against an abnormal frequency operation. During the startup and shutdown
of the turbine-generator set, FTAQFVR is blocked to avoid unnecessary
accumulation of time or tripping of generator. FTAQFVR is also blocked when the
system positive-sequence voltage magnitude deviates from the given voltage band
limit, which can be enabled with the EnaVoltCheck setting. The overall logic of
FTAQFVR is explained in Figure 134.

The frequency of the measured input voltage is monitored continuously and

compared to the set frequency band limits FreqHighLimit and FreqLowLimit.

306
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 9
Frequency protection

When the measured system frequency is above the FreqLowLimit setting and
below the FreqHighLimit setting, the FREQOK and START signals are activated. The
START signal is controlled by the measured current and voltage input magnitude
and the status of the circuit breaker position.

FTAQFVR function will block START signal activation and Accumulation of time
under two following conditions even if the system frequency falls within set band
limits.
When the generator is not synchronized as indicated by the CBOPEN signal
input: Generator currents are considered to detect whether the generator is
supplying its unit auxiliary supply transformers or not. FTAQFVR function
will be blocked when the measured current magnitude drops below the setting
CurrStartLevel and CBOPEN input is high. FTAQFVR remains blocked until
the generator returns to the operation condition. It can be verified by using the
CBCLOSE signal. Generator's start and stop detection logics for the START
output can be ignored by disabling the CBCheck setting.
When the positive-sequence voltage of the measured input voltage is outside
the band limit.
The START output will be blocked if the EnaVoltCheck setting is enabled and
the system positive sequence voltage is not within the voltage band limits.
Voltage band limit check will be ignored for the START output if the
EnaVoltCheck setting is disabled. The voltage band limits are set with the
settings UHighLimit and ULowLimit.
The output VOLTOK is activated only if the system positive-sequence voltage
falls within the voltage band limits and the EnaVoltCheck setting is enabled.

To avoid oscillations of the START output signal, a hysteresis has been added with
current input comparison and voltage input comparison. It is also possible to block
FTAQFVR completely by activating the binary input BLOCK and its function is to
reset all the binary outputs of FTAQFVR and freeze the accumulation time.

Time counters
FTAQFVR uses two time counters.
1. Individual event time: The individual event time counter registers the time
passing if the system frequency falls within the frequency band limits each
time. It resets when the frequency comes out of the frequency band limits and
also when the BLOCK binary input is activated and start from zero when a new
start is activated.
2. Accumulation time: The accumulation time counter registers the time passing
whenever the START output is activated. It holds the registered time value
even when the START signal is deactivated and continues from the registered
value when the START signal is reactivated.

The registration of accumulation time is frozen at its present value when the input
HOLDACC or BLOCK is activated. The accumulation time can be set to the

307
Technical Manual
Section 9 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Frequency protection

initTimeAcc parameter value by activating the LOADINT input with the LHMI and
it can be reset to zero by activating the RESETACC input. The RESETACC input
can be activated by a binary input. The accumulated time ACCTIME is provided as
a service output.

The last completed individual event time is updated in the LASTEVTD output. This
output holds the last completed individual event time until the next event to complete.

Trip logic
The individual event and accumulation timer values are compared to the tCont and
tAcclLimit settings respectively. If these counter values exceed their limit values,
TRIPCONT and ACCALARM outputs will be activated. The TRIPACC output is
activated if both the ACCALARM and START signals are activated. A common
TRIP signal is generated when either TRIPCONT or TRIPACC is activated.
Comparator
If
FreqHighLimit <= ERROR
FreqLowLimit
Then
ERROR

FREQ FREQ

Comparator
If
FREQOK FREQOK
f <= FreqHighLimit
AND
f > FreqLowLimit
VOLTOK VOLTOK
Then
U3P
START
START

Accumulation time
Comparator
counter
U01 <= UHighLimit TRIPACC
START
AND
Signal Routing Continuous time
U01 >= ULowLimit
Based on counter TRIPCONT
Generator
START
Start or Stop AND
I3P Comparator
Detection Logic TRIP
I < CurrStartLevel
and Start & Trip
Voltage Band Limit
CBOPEN Output Logic
Check Logic
ACCALARM
CBCLOSE

LOADINIT STRORHLD

RESETACC
ACCTIME
HOLDTIME

BLOCK LASTEVTD

IEC12000609-2-en.vsd

IEC12000609 V2 EN

Figure 134: Logical diagram

To achieve a proper operation, the set frequency high limit should be more than the
set frequency low limit. To avoid malfunction, a check is performed that
FreqHighLimit is greater than FreqLowLimit. If not, the ERROR signal is activated.

FTAQFVR can be instantiated with one or more frequency ranges according to the
turbine manufacturer's specification. When the frequency falls in to the common
zone when two frequency ranges overlap it is necessary to block one instance and
keep only one instance of FTAQFVR active. The STRORHLD output is activated
when either the START output is active or when the HOLDACC input signal is on.

308
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 9
Frequency protection

The STRORHLD output is connected to the input HOLDACC of the other instance of
FTAQFVR.

Table 213: FTAQFVR technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, frequency high (35.00 90.00) Hz 2.0 mHz
limit level at symmetrical three
phase voltage
Operatevalue, frequency low (30.00 85.00) Hz 2.0 mHz
limit level at symmetrical three
phase voltage
Operate value, voltage high (0.0 200.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur at U Ur
and low limit for voltage band 0.5% of U at U > Ur
limit check
Operate value, current start (5.0 100.0)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir
level
Independent time delay for the (0.0 6000.0) s 0.2% or 200 ms whichever
continuous time limit at fset is greater
+0.02 Hz to fset-0.02 Hz

Independent time delay for the (10.0 90000.0) s 0.2% or 200 ms whichever
accumulation time limit at fset is greater
+0.02 Hz to fset-0.02 Hz

309
Technical Manual
310
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 10
Multipurpose protection

Section 10 Multipurpose protection

10.1 General current and voltage protection CVGAPC

10.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
General current and voltage protection CVGAPC 2(I>/U<) -

10.1.2 Functionality
The General current and voltage protection (CVGAPC) can be utilized as a
negative sequence current protection detecting unsymmetrical conditions such as
open phase or unsymmetrical faults.

CVGAPC can also be used to improve phase selection for high resistive earth
faults, outside the distance protection reach, for the transmission line. Three
functions are used, which measures the neutral current and each of the three phase
voltages. This will give an independence from load currents and this phase
selection will be used in conjunction with the detection of the earth fault from the
directional earth fault protection function.

311
Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Multipurpose protection

10.1.3 Function block

CVGAPC
I3P* TRIP
U3P* TROC1
BLOCK TROC2
BLKOC1 TRUC1
BLKOC1TR TRUC2
ENMLTOC1 TROV1
BLKOC2 TROV2
BLKOC2TR TRUV1
ENMLTOC2 TRUV2
BLKUC1 START
BLKUC1TR STOC1
BLKUC2 STOC2
BLKUC2TR STUC1
BLKOV1 STUC2
BLKOV1TR STOV1
BLKOV2 STOV2
BLKOV2TR STUV1
BLKUV1 STUV2
BLKUV1TR BLK2ND
BLKUV2 DIROC1
BLKUV2TR DIROC2
UDIRLOW
CURRENT
ICOSFI
VOLTAGE
UIANGLE

IEC05000372-2-en.vsd
IEC05000372 V2 EN

Figure 135: CVGAPC function block

10.1.4 Signals
Table 214: CVGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKOC1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over current function OC1
BLKOC1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over current function OC1
ENMLTOC1 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
OC1
BLKOC2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over current function OC2
BLKOC2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over current function OC2
ENMLTOC2 BOOLEAN 0 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for
OC2
BLKUC1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under current function UC1
BLKUC1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under current function UC1
BLKUC2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under current function UC2
BLKUC2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under current function UC2
BLKOV1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over voltage function OV1
Table continues on next page

312
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 10
Multipurpose protection

Name Type Default Description

BLKOV1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over voltage function OV1
BLKOV2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of over voltage function OV2
BLKOV2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for over voltage function OV2
BLKUV1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under voltage function UV1
BLKUV1TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under voltage function UV1
BLKUV2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of under voltage function UV2
BLKUV2TR BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip for under voltage function UV2

Table 215: CVGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip signal
TROC1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overcurrent function OC1
TROC2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overcurrent function OC2
TRUC1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undercurrent function UC1
TRUC2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undercurrent function UC2
TROV1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overvoltage function OV1
TROV2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from overvoltage function OV2
TRUV1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undervoltage function UV1
TRUV2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from undervoltage function UV2
START BOOLEAN General start signal
STOC1 BOOLEAN Start signal from overcurrent function OC1
STOC2 BOOLEAN Start signal from overcurrent function OC2
STUC1 BOOLEAN Start signal from undercurrent function UC1
STUC2 BOOLEAN Start signal from undercurrent function UC2
STOV1 BOOLEAN Start signal from overvoltage function OV1
STOV2 BOOLEAN Start signal from overvoltage function OV2
STUV1 BOOLEAN Start signal from undervoltage function UV1
STUV2 BOOLEAN Start signal from undervoltage function UV2
BLK2ND BOOLEAN Block from second harmonic detection
DIROC1 INTEGER Directional mode of OC1 (nondir, forward,reverse)
DIROC2 INTEGER Directional mode of OC2 (nondir, forward,reverse)
UDIRLOW BOOLEAN Low voltage for directional polarization
CURRENT REAL Measured current value
ICOSFI REAL Measured current multiplied with cos (Phi)
VOLTAGE REAL Measured voltage value
UIANGLE REAL Angle between voltage and current

313
Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Multipurpose protection

10.1.5 Settings
Table 216: CVGAPC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
CurrentInput phase1 - - MaxPh Select current signal which will be
phase2 measured inside function
phase3
PosSeq
NegSeq
3*ZeroSeq
MaxPh
MinPh
UnbalancePh
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
MaxPh-Ph
MinPh-Ph
UnbalancePh-Ph
VoltageInput phase1 - - MaxPh Select voltage signal which will be
phase2 measured inside function
phase3
PosSeq
-NegSeq
-3*ZeroSeq
MaxPh
MinPh
UnbalancePh
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
MaxPh-Ph
MinPh-Ph
UnbalancePh-Ph
OperHarmRestr Off - - Off Operation of 2nd harmonic restrain Off /
On On
l_2nd/l_fund 10.0 - 50.0 % 1.0 20.0 Ratio of second to fundamental current
harmonic in %
EnRestrainCurr Off - - Off Enable current restrain function On / Off
On
RestrCurrInput PosSeq - - PosSeq Select current signal which will be used
NegSeq for curr restrain
3*ZeroSeq
Max
RestrCurrCoeff 0.00 - 5.00 - 0.01 0.00 Restraining current coefficient
RCADir -180 - 180 Deg 1 -75 Relay Characteristic Angle
ROADir 1 - 90 Deg 1 75 Relay Operate Angle
LowVolt_VM 0.0 - 5.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Below this level in % of UBase setting
ActLowVolt takes over
Operation_OC1 Off - - Off Operation OC1 Off / On
On
StartCurr_OC1 2.0 - 5000.0 %IB 1.0 120.0 Operate current level for OC1 in % of
IBase
Table continues on next page

314
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 10
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CurveType_OC1 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for OC1
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
tDef_OC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definite) time delay of OC1
k_OC1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time
delay for OC1
IMin1 1 - 10000 %IB 1 100 Minimum operate current for step1 in %
of IBase
tMin_OC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT
curves for OC1
VCntrlMode_OC1 Voltage control - - Off Control mode for voltage controlled OC1
Off function
VDepMode_OC1 Step - - Step Voltage dependent mode OC1 (step,
Slope slope)
VDepFact_OC1 0.02 - 5.00 - 0.01 1.00 Multiplying factor for I pickup when OC1
is U dependent
ULowLimit_OC1 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Voltage low limit setting OC1 in % of
UBase
UHighLimit_OC1 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 100.0 Voltage high limit setting OC1 in % of
UBase
HarmRestr_OC1 Off - - Off Enable block of OC1 by 2nd harmonic
On restrain
DirMode_OC1 Non-directional - - Non-directional Directional mode of OC1 (nondir,
Forward forward, reverse)
Reverse
DirPrinc_OC1 I&U - - I&U Measuring on IandU or IcosPhiandU for
IcosPhi&U OC1
ActLowVolt1_VM Non-directional - - Non-directional Low voltage level action for Dir_OC1
Block (Nodir, Blk, Mem)
Memory
Operation_OC2 Off - - Off Operation OC2 Off / On
On
StartCurr_OC2 2.0 - 5000.0 %IB 1.0 120.0 Operate current level for OC2 in % of
IBase
Table continues on next page

315
Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CurveType_OC2 ANSI Ext. inv. - - ANSI Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type for OC2
ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
tDef_OC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definite) time delay of OC2
k_OC2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time
delay for OC2
IMin2 1 - 10000 %IB 1 50 Minimum operate current for step2 in %
of IBase
tMin_OC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT
curves for OC2
VCntrlMode_OC2 Voltage control - - Off Control mode for voltage controlled OC2
Off function
VDepMode_OC2 Step - - Step Voltage dependent mode OC2 (step,
Slope slope)
VDepFact_OC2 0.02 - 5.00 - 0.01 1.00 Multiplying factor for I pickup when OC2
is U dependent
ULowLimit_OC2 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Voltage low limit setting OC2 in % of
UBase
UHighLimit_OC2 1.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 100.0 Voltage high limit setting OC2 in % of
UBase
HarmRestr_OC2 Off - - Off Enable block of OC2 by 2nd harmonic
On restrain
DirMode_OC2 Non-directional - - Non-directional Directional mode of OC2 (nondir,
Forward forward, reverse)
Reverse
DirPrinc_OC2 I&U - - I&U Measuring on IandU or IcosPhiandU for
IcosPhi&U OC2
ActLowVolt2_VM Non-directional - - Non-directional Low voltage level action for Dir_OC2
Block (Nodir, Blk, Mem)
Memory
Operation_UC1 Off - - Off Operation UC1 Off / On
On
EnBlkLowI_UC1 Off - - Off Enable internal low current level blocking
On for UC1
BlkLowCurr_UC1 0 - 150 %IB 1 20 Internal low current blocking level for
UC1 in % of IBase
StartCurr_UC1 2.0 - 150.0 %IB 1.0 70.0 Operate undercurrent level for UC1 in %
of IBase
Table continues on next page

316
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 10
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tDef_UC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definite) time delay of UC1
tResetDef_UC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve UC1
HarmRestr_UC1 Off - - Off Enable block of UC1 by 2nd harmonic
On restrain
Operation_UC2 Off - - Off Operation UC2 Off / On
On
EnBlkLowI_UC2 Off - - Off Enable internal low current level blocking
On for UC2
BlkLowCurr_UC2 0 - 150 %IB 1 20 Internal low current blocking level for
UC2 in % of IBase
StartCurr_UC2 2.0 - 150.0 %IB 1.0 70.0 Operate undercurrent level for UC2 in %
of IBase
tDef_UC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.50 Independent (definite) time delay of UC2
HarmRestr_UC2 Off - - Off Enable block of UC2 by 2nd harmonic
On restrain
Operation_OV1 Off - - Off Operation OV1 Off / On
On
StartVolt_OV1 2.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 Operate voltage level for OV1 in % of
UBase
CurveType_OV1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for OV1
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
tDef_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Operate time delay in sec for definite
time use of OV1
tMin_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
for OV1
k_OV1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time
delay for OV1
Operation_OV2 Off - - Off Operation OV2 Off / On
On
StartVolt_OV2 2.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 Operate voltage level for OV2 in % of
UBase
CurveType_OV2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for OV2
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
tDef_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Operate time delay in sec for definite
time use of OV2
tMin_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
for OV2
k_OV2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time
delay for OV2
Operation_UV1 Off - - Off Operation UV1 Off / On
On
StartVolt_UV1 2.0 - 150.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Operate undervoltage level for UV1 in %
of UBase
Table continues on next page

317
Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CurveType_UV1 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for UV1
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
tDef_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Operate time delay in sec for definite
time use of UV1
tMin_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
for UV1
k_UV1 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time
delay for UV1
EnBlkLowV_UV1 Off - - On Enable internal low voltage level
On blocking for UV1
BlkLowVolt_UV1 0.0 - 5.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Internal low voltage blocking level for
UV1 in % of UBase
Operation_UV2 Off - - Off Operation UV2 Off / On
On
StartVolt_UV2 2.0 - 150.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Operate undervoltage level for UV2 in %
of UBase
CurveType_UV2 Definite time - - Definite time Selection of time delay curve type for UV2
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
tDef_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 1.00 Operate time delay in sec for definite
time use of UV2
tMin_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves
for UV2
k_UV2 0.05 - 999.00 - 0.01 0.30 Time multiplier for the dependent time
delay for UV2
EnBlkLowV_UV2 Off - - On Enable internal low voltage level
On blocking for UV2
BlkLowVolt_UV2 0.0 - 5.0 %UB 0.1 0.5 Internal low voltage blocking level for
UV2 in % of UBase

Table 217: CVGAPC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CurrMult_OC1 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting
value for OC1
ResCrvType_OC1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OC1
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tResetDef_OC1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve OC1
P_OC1 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for OC1
A_OC1 0.000 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for OC1
B_OC1 0.000 - 99.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for OC1
Table continues on next page

318
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 10
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

C_OC1 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for OC1
PR_OC1 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
programmable curve for OC1
TR_OC1 0.005 - 600.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
programmable curve for OC1
CR_OC1 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
programmable curve for OC1
CurrMult_OC2 1.0 - 10.0 - 0.1 2.0 Multiplier for scaling the current setting
value for OC2
ResCrvType_OC2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OC2
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
tResetDef_OC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve OC2
P_OC2 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for OC2
A_OC2 0.000 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for OC2
B_OC2 0.000 - 99.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for OC2
C_OC2 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for OC2
PR_OC2 0.005 - 3.000 - 0.001 0.500 Parameter PR for customer
programmable curve for OC2
TR_OC2 0.005 - 600.000 - 0.001 13.500 Parameter TR for customer
programmable curve for OC2
CR_OC2 0.1 - 10.0 - 0.1 1.0 Parameter CR for customer
programmable curve for OC2
tResetDef_UC2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay used in IEC Definite
Time curve UC2
ResCrvType_OV1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OV1
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
tResetDef_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for definite time
use of OV1
tResetIDMT_OV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves
for OV1
A_OV1 0.005 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for OV1
B_OV1 0.500 - 99.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for OV1
C_OV1 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for OV1
D_OV1 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for OV1
P_OV1 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for OV1
Table continues on next page

319
Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ResCrvType_OV2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for OV2
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
tResetDef_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for definite time
use of OV2
tResetIDMT_OV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves
for OV2
A_OV2 0.005 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for OV2
B_OV2 0.500 - 99.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for OV2
C_OV2 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for OV2
D_OV2 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for OV2
P_OV2 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for OV2
ResCrvType_UV1 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for UV1
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
tResetDef_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for definite time
use of UV1
tResetIDMT_UV1 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves
for UV1
A_UV1 0.005 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for UV1
B_UV1 0.500 - 99.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for UV1
C_UV1 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for UV1
D_UV1 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for UV1
P_UV1 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for UV1
ResCrvType_UV2 Instantaneous - - Instantaneous Selection of reset curve type for UV2
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
tResetDef_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for definite time
use of UV2
tResetIDMT_UV2 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.00 Reset time delay in sec for IDMT curves
for UV2
A_UV2 0.005 - 999.000 - 0.001 0.140 Parameter A for customer programmable
curve for UV2
B_UV2 0.500 - 99.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter B for customer programmable
curve for UV2
Table continues on next page

320
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 10
Multipurpose protection

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

C_UV2 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Parameter C for customer
programmable curve for UV2
D_UV2 0.000 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.000 Parameter D for customer
programmable curve for UV2
P_UV2 0.001 - 10.000 - 0.001 0.020 Parameter P for customer programmable
curve for UV2

Table 218: CVGAPC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

10.1.6 Monitored data

Table 219: CVGAPC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
DIROC1 INTEGER 1=Forward - Directional mode of OC1
0=Non- (nondir, forward,reverse)
directional
2=Reverse
DIROC2 INTEGER 1=Forward - Directional mode of OC2
0=Non- (nondir, forward,reverse)
directional
2=Reverse
CURRENT REAL - A Measured current value
ICOSFI REAL - A Measured current
multiplied with cos (Phi)
VOLTAGE REAL - kV Measured voltage value
UIANGLE REAL - deg Angle between voltage
and current

10.1.7 Operation principle

10.1.7.1 Measured quantities within CVGAPC

General current and voltage protection (CVGAPC) function is always connected to

three-phase current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool, but it
will always measure only one current and one voltage quantity selected by the end
user in the setting tool.

The user can select to measure one of the current quantities shown in table 220.

321
Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Multipurpose protection

Table 220: Current selection for CVGAPC function

Set value for the
parameter Comment
CurrentInput
1 Phase1 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L1 current phasor
2 Phase2 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L2 current phasor
3 Phase3 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L3 current phasor
4 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence
current phasor
5 NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative
sequence current phasor
6 3ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence
current phasor multiplied by factor 3
7 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with
maximum magnitude
8 MinPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with
minimum magnitude
9 UnbalancePh CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which
is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between
the current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and current
phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set
to 0 all the time
10 Phase1-Phase2 CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated
as the vector difference between the phase L1 current phasor and
phase L2 current phasor (IL1-IL2)

11 Phase2-Phase3 CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated
as the vector difference between the phase L2 current phasor and
phase L3 current phasor (IL2-IL3)

12 Phase3-Phase1 CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated
as the vector difference between the phase L3 current phasor and
phase L1 current phasor ( IL3-IL1)

13 MaxPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the
maximum magnitude
14 MinPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the
minimum magnitude
15 UnbalancePh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which
is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between
the ph-ph current phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph current
phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the
time

The user can select to measure one of the voltage quantities shown in table 221:

Table 221: Voltage selection for CVGAPC function

Set value for the
parameter Comment
VoltageInput
1 Phase1 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L1 voltage phasor
2 Phase2 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L2 voltage phasor
3 Phase3 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L3 voltage phasor
Table continues on next page

322
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 10
Multipurpose protection

Set value for the

parameter Comment
VoltageInput
4 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence
voltage phasor
5 -NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative
sequence voltage phasor. This voltage phasor will be intentionally
rotated for 180 in order to enable easier settings for the directional
feature when used.
6 -3ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence
voltage phasor multiplied by factor 3. This voltage phasor will be
intentionally rotated for 180 in order to enable easier settings for the
directional feature when used.
7 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with
maximum magnitude
8 MinPh CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with
minimum magnitude
9 UnbalancePh CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage,
which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference
between the voltage phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude
and voltage phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase
angle will be set to 0 all the time
10 Phase1-Phase2 CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally
calculated as the vector difference between the phase L1 voltage
phasor and phase L2 voltage phasor (UL1-UL2)

11 Phase2-Phase3 CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally

calculated as the vector difference between the phase L2 voltage
phasor and phase L3 voltage phasor (UL2-UL3)

12 Phase3-Phase1 CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally

calculated as the vector difference between the phase L3 voltage
phasor and phase L1 voltage phasor ( UL3-UL1)

13 MaxPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the
maximum magnitude
14 MinPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the
minimum magnitude
15 UnbalancePh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage,
which is internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference
between the ph-ph voltage phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-
ph voltage phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to
0 all the time

It is important to notice that the voltage selection from table 221 is always
applicable regardless the actual external VT connections. The three-phase VT
inputs can be connected to IED as either three phase-to-ground voltages UL1, UL2
& UL3 or three phase-to-phase voltages UL1L2, UL2L3 & UL3L1). This information
about actual VT connection is entered as a setting parameter for the pre-processing
block, which will then take automatic care about it.

The user can select one of the current quantities shown in table 222 for built-in
current restraint feature:

323
Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Multipurpose protection

Table 222: Restraint current selection for CVGAPC function

Set value for the
parameter RestrCurr Comment
1 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence
current phasor
2 NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative
sequence current phasor
3 3ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence
current phasor multiplied by factor 3
4 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with
maximum magnitude

10.1.7.2 Base quantities for CVGAPC function

The parameter settings for the base quantities, which represent the base (100%) for
pickup levels of all measuring stages, shall be entered as setting parameters for
every CVGAPC function.

Base current shall be entered as:

1. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes, when the
measured Current Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 220.
2. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes multiplied by
3 (1.732*Iphase), when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 10 to
15, as shown in table 220.

Base voltage shall be entered as:

1. rated phase-to-earth voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 221.
2. rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 221.

10.1.7.3 Built-in overcurrent protection steps

Two overcurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here.

Overcurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity
(see table 220) with the set pickup level. Non-directional overcurrent step will
pickup if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is bigger than this set
level. However depending on other enabled built-in features this overcurrent
pickup might not cause the overcurrent step start signal. Start signal will only come
if all of the enabled built-in features in the overcurrent step are fulfilled at the same
time.

324
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 10
Multipurpose protection

Second harmonic feature

The overcurrent protection step can be restrained by a second harmonic component
in the measured current quantity (see table 220). However it shall be noted that this
feature is not applicable when one of the following measured currents is selected:

PosSeq (positive sequence current)

NegSeq (negative sequence current)
UnbalancePh (unbalance phase current)
UnbalancePh-Ph (unbalance ph-ph current)

This feature will simple prevent overcurrent step start if the second-to-first
harmonic ratio in the measured current exceeds the set level.

Directional feature
The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent on the relevant
phase angle between measured current phasor (see table 220) and measured voltage
phasor (see table 221). In protection terminology it means that the General currrent
and voltage protection (CVGAPC) function can be made directional by enabling
this built-in feature. In that case overcurrent protection step will only operate if the
current flow is in accordance with the set direction (Forward, which means
towards the protected object, or Reverse, which means from the protected object).
For this feature it is of the outmost importance to understand that the measured
voltage phasor (see table 221) and measured current phasor (see table 220) will be
used for directional decision. Therefore it is the sole responsibility of the end user
to select the appropriate current and voltage signals in order to get a proper
directional decision. CVGAPC function will NOT do this automatically. It will
simply use the current and voltage phasors selected by the end user to check for the
directional criteria.

Table 223 gives an overview of the typical choices (but not the only possible ones)
for these two quantities from traditional directional relays.

Table 223: Typical current and voltage choices for directional feature
Set value for the Set value for the
parameter parameter Comment
CurrentInput VoltageInput
PosSeq PosSeq Directional positive sequence overcurrent function is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45 to
-90 depending on the power system voltage level (X/
R ratio)
NegSeq -NegSeq Directional negative sequence overcurrent function is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45 to
-90 depending on the power system voltage level (X/
R ratio)
3ZeroSeq -3ZeroSeq Directional zero sequence overcurrent function is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from 0 to
-90 depending on the power system earthing (that
is, solidly earthed, earthed via resistor)
Table continues on next page

325
Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Multipurpose protection

Set value for the Set value for the

parameter parameter Comment
CurrentInput VoltageInput
Phase1 Phase2-Phase3 Directional overcurrent function for the first phase is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45
Phase2 Phase3-Phase1 Directional overcurrent function for the second phase
is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45
Phase3 Phase1-Phase2 Directional overcurrent function for the third phase is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45

Unbalance current or voltage measurement shall not be used when the directional
feature is enabled.

Two types of directional measurement principles are available, I & U and

IcosPhi&U. The first principle, referred to as "I & U" in the parameter setting tool,
checks that:

the magnitude of the measured current is bigger than the set pick-up level
the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by
the relay operate angle, ROADir parameter setting; see figure 136).

U=-3U0
RCADir

Ipickup ROADir I=3Io

Operate region
mta line

en05000252.vsd
IEC05000252 V1 EN

Figure 136: I & U directional operating principle for CVGAPC function

where:
RCADir is -75
ROADir is 50

The second principle, referred to as "IcosPhi&U" in the parameter setting tool,

checks that:

326
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 10
Multipurpose protection

that the product Icos() is bigger than the set pick-up level, where is angle
between the current phasor and the mta line
that the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined
by the Icos() straight line and the relay operate angle, ROADir parameter
setting; see figure 136).

U=-3U0
RCADir

Ipickup ROADir F I=3Io

Operate region
mta line

en05000253.vsd
IEC05000253 V1 EN

Figure 137: CVGAPC, IcosPhi&U directional operating principle

where:
RCADir is -75
ROADir is 50

Note that it is possible to decide by a parameter setting how the directional feature
shall behave when the magnitude of the measured voltage phasor falls below the pre-
set value. User can select one of the following three options:

Non-directional (operation allowed for low magnitude of the reference voltage)

Block (operation prevented for low magnitude of the reference voltage)
Memory (memory voltage shall be used to determine direction of the current)

It shall also be noted that the memory duration is limited in the algorithm to 100
ms. After that time the current direction will be locked to the one determined
during memory time and it will re-set only if the current fails below set pickup
level or voltage goes above set voltage memory limit.

Voltage restraint/control feature

The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent of a measured
voltage quantity (see table 221). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent
step is not constant but instead decreases with the decrease in the magnitude of the
measured voltage quantity. Two different types of dependencies are available:

Voltage restraint overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode_OC1=Slope)

327
Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Multipurpose protection

OC1 Stage Pickup Level

StartCurr_OC1

VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1

ULowLimit_OC1 UHighLimit_OC1
Selected Voltage
Magnitude
en05000324.vsd
IEC05000324 V1 EN

Figure 138: Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of
measured voltage magnitude in Slope mode of operation

Voltage controlled overcurrent (when setting parameter

VDepMode_OC1=Step)

OC1 Stage Pickup Level

StartCurr_OC1

VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1

UHighLimit_OC1 Selected Voltage Magnitude

en05000323.vsd
IEC05000323 V1 EN

Figure 139: Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of
measured voltage magnitude in Step mode of operation

This feature will simply change the set overcurrent pickup level in accordance with
magnitude variations of the measured voltage. It shall be noted that this feature will
as well affect the pickup current value for calculation of operate times for IDMT

328
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 10
Multipurpose protection

curves (overcurrent with IDMT curve will operate faster during low voltage
conditions).

Current restraint feature

The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent of a restraining
current quantity (see table 222). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent
step is not constant but instead increases with the increase in the magnitude of the
restraining current.

IMeasured
ea ain
ar tr
te es
ra ff *I r
pe e
O Co
es tr
I>R
IsetHigh

IsetLow

atan(RestrCoeff)

Restraint
en05000255.vsd
IEC05000255 V1 EN

Figure 140: Current pickup variation with restraint current magnitude

This feature will simply prevent overcurrent step to start if the magnitude of the
measured current quantity is smaller than the set percentage of the restrain current
magnitude. However this feature will not affect the pickup current value for
calculation of operate times for IDMT curves. This means that the IDMT curve
operate time will not be influenced by the restrain current magnitude.

When set, the start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time
delay in accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for
longer time than the set time delay, the overcurrent step will set its trip signal to
one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in
accordance with the end user setting.

10.1.7.4 Built-in undercurrent protection steps

Two undercurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here. Undercurrent step simply compares the
magnitude of the measured current quantity (see table 220) with the set pickup
level. The undercurrent step will pickup and set its start signal to one if the
magnitude of the measured current quantity is smaller than this set level. The start
signal will start definite time delay with set time delay. If the start signal has value
one for longer time than the set time delay the undercurrent step will set its trip

329
Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Multipurpose protection

signal to one. Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in
accordance with the setting.

10.1.7.5 Built-in overvoltage protection steps

Two overvoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here.

Overvoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity
(see table 221) with the set pickup level. The overvoltage step will pickup if the
magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is bigger than this set level.

The start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in
accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer
time than the set time delay, the overvoltage step will set its trip signal to one.
Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance
with the end user setting.

10.1.7.6 Built-in undervoltage protection steps

Two undervoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here.

Undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage

quantity (see table 221) with the set pickup level. The undervoltage step will
pickup if the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is smaller than this set level.

The start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in
accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer
time than the set time delay, the undervoltage step will set its trip signal to one.
Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance
with the end user setting.

10.1.7.7 Logic diagram

The simplified internal logics, for CVGAPC function are shown in the following
figures.

330
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 10
Multipurpose protection

IED
ADM CVGAPC function

Current and voltage selection

settings

Phasor calculation of
scaling with CT ratio

individual currents
A/D conversion
Selection of which current Selected current
and voltage shall be given to

Phasors &
samples
the built-in protection Selected voltage
elements

Restraint current selection

Selected restraint current

A/D conversion scaling

Selection of restraint current

Phasor calculation of
individual voltages
with CT ratio

Phasors &
samples

IEC05000169_2_en.vsd

IEC05000169 V2 EN

Figure 141: Treatment of measured currents and voltages within IED for CVGAPC function

Figure 141 shows how internal treatment of measured currents is done for
multipurpose protection function

The following currents and voltages are inputs to the multipurpose protection
function. They must all be expressed in true power system (primary) Amperes and
kilovolts.

1. Instantaneous values (samples) of currents & voltages from one three-phase

current and one three-phase voltage input.
2. Fundamental frequency phasors from one three-phase current and one three-
phase voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules.
3. Sequence currents & voltages from one three-phase current and one three-
phase voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules.

The multipurpose protection function:

1. Selects one current from the three-phase input system (see table 220) for
internally measured current.
2. Selects one voltage from the three-phase input system (see table 221) for
internally measured voltage.
3. Selects one current from the three-phase input system (see table 222) for
internally measured restraint current.

331
Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Multipurpose protection

CURRENT

UC1
nd TRUC1
2 Harmonic
Selected current restraint
STUC2
UC2
TRUC2
2nd Harmonic
restraint

STOC1
OC1 TROC1

2nd Harmonic BLK2ND

restraint 1
Selected restraint current
Current restraint
DIROC1
Directionality
Voltage control /
restraint

STOC2
OC2 TROC2

2nd Harmonic
restraint
Current restraint 1
UDIRLOW

Directionality DIROC2

Voltage control /
restraint

STOV1
OV1 TROV1

STOV2
OV2 TROV2

STUV1
Selected voltage
UV1 TRUV1

STUV2
UV2 TRUV2

VOLTAGE

en05000170.vsd
IEC05000170 V1 EN

Figure 142: CVGAPC function main logic diagram for built-in protection elements

332
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 10
Multipurpose protection

Logic in figure 142 can be summarized as follows:

1. The selected currents and voltage are given to built-in protection elements.
Each protection element and step makes independent decision about status of
its START and TRIP output signals.
2. More detailed internal logic for every protection element is given in the
following four figures
3. Common START and TRIP signals from all built-in protection elements &
steps (internal OR logic) are available from multipurpose function as well.

Enable
second
harmonic Second
harmonic check
1 DEF time BLKTROC
selected DEF 1 TROC1
AND
OR
Selected current a
a>b
b
OC1=On STOC1
AND
StartCurr_OC1 BLKOC1
X
Inverse

Voltage Directionality DIR_OK Inverse

control or time
check selected
restraint
feature

Selected voltage
Current
Restraint
Feature
Selected restrain current Imeasured > k Irestraint

en05000831.vsd

IEC05000831 V1 EN

Figure 143: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overcurrent step that is, OC1 (step OC2 has the
same internal logic)

333
Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Multipurpose protection

Bin input: BLKUC1TR

Selected current a TRUC1

b>a
DEF AND
b
StartCurr_UC1
AND

Operation_UC1=On
STUC1

Bin input: BLKUC1

en05000750.vsd

IEC05000750 V1 EN

Figure 144: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undercurrent step that is, UC1 (step UC2 has
the same internal logic)

DEF time BLKTROV1

selected DEF TROV1
AND
OR
Selected voltage a
a>b
b STOV1
StartVolt_OV1
AND

Inverse
Operation_OV1=On
Inverse time
BLKOV1 selected

en05000751.vsd

IEC05000751 V1 EN

Figure 145: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overvoltage step OV1 (step OV2 has the same
internal logic)

334
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 10
Multipurpose protection

DEF time BLKTRUV

selected DEF 1 TRUV1
AND
OR
Selected voltage a
b>a
b STUV1
AND
StartVolt_UV1

Inverse
Operation_UV1=On
Inverse time
BLKUV1 selected

en05000752.vsd

IEC05000752 V1 EN

Figure 146: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undervoltage step UV1 (step UV2 has the same
internal logic)

10.1.8 Technical data

Table 224: CVGAPC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Measuring current phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, - -
input NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh,
UnbalancePh, phase1-phase2, phase2-
phase3, phase3-phase1, MaxPh-Ph,
MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-Ph
Base current (1 - 99999) A -
Measuring voltage phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, - -
input NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh,
UnbalancePh, phase1-phase2, phase2-
phase3, phase3-phase1, MaxPh-Ph,
MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-Ph
Base voltage (0.05 - 2000.00) kV -
Start overcurrent, (2 - 5000)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir for IIr
step 1 and 2 1.0% of I for I>Ir

Start undercurrent, (2 - 150)% of IBase 1.0% of Ir for IIr

step 1 and 2 1.0% of I for I>Ir

Independent time (0.00 - 6000.00) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is

delay, overcurrent at greater
0 to 2 x Iset

Independent time (0.00 - 6000.00) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is

delay, undercurrent greater
at 2 to 0 x Iset

Overcurrent:
Start time at 0 to 2 x Min = 15 ms -
Iset Max = 30 ms

Table continues on next page

335
Technical Manual
Section 10 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Multipurpose protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Reset time at 2 to 0 x Min = 15 ms -
Iset Max = 30 ms

Undercurrent:
Start time at 2 to 0 x Min = 15 ms -
Iset Max = 30 ms

Reset time at 0 to 2 x Min = 15 ms -

Iset Max = 30 ms

See table 896 and Parameter ranges for customer defined See table 896 and table 897
table 897 characteristic no 17:
k: 0.05 - 999.00
A: 0.0000 - 999.0000
B: 0.0000 - 99.0000
C: 0.0000 - 1.0000
P: 0.0001 - 10.0000
PR: 0.005 - 3.000
TR: 0.005 - 600.000
CR: 0.1 - 10.0
Voltage level where (0.0 - 5.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur
voltage memory
takes over
Start overvoltage, (2.0 - 200.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur for U Ur
step 1 and 2 0.5% of U for U > Ur

Start undervoltage, (2.0 - 150.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur for U Ur

step 1 and 2 0.5% of U for U > Ur

Independent time (0.00 - 6000.00) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is

delay, overvoltage at greater
0.8 to 1.2 x Uset

Independent time (0.00 - 6000.00) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is

delay, undervoltage greater
at 1.2 to 0.8 x Uset

Overvoltage:
Start time at 0.8 to Min = 15 ms -
1.2 x Uset Max = 30 ms

Reset time at 1.2 to Min = 15 ms -

0.8 x Uset Max = 30 ms

Undervoltage:
Start time at 1.2 to Min = 15 ms -
0.8 x Uset Max = 30 ms

Reset time at 1.2 to Min = 15 ms -

0.8 x Uset Max = 30 ms

High and low voltage (1.0 - 200.0)% of UBase 1.0% of Ur for UUr
limit, voltage 1.0% of U for U>Ur
dependent operation
Directional function Settable: NonDir, forward and reverse -
Relay characteristic (-180 to +180) degrees 2.0 degrees
angle
Relay operate angle (1 to 90) degrees 2.0 degrees
Reset ratio, > 95% -
overcurrent
Table continues on next page

336
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 10
Multipurpose protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Reset ratio, < 105% -
undercurrent
Reset ratio, > 95% -
overvoltage
Reset ratio, < 105% -
undervoltage
Overcurrent:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Undercurrent:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Overvoltage:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0.8 to 1.2 x Uset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Undervoltage:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 1.2 to 0.8 x Uset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

337
Technical Manual
338
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 11
System protection and control

Section 11 System protection and control

11.1 Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC

11.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC - -

11.1.2 Functionality
The multi-purpose filter function block, SMAIHPAC, is arranged as a three-phase
filter. It has very much the same user interface (e.g. inputs and outputs) as the
standard pre-processing function block SMAI. However the main difference is that
it can be used to extract any frequency component from the input signal. Thus it
can, for example, be used to build sub-synchronous resonance protection for
synchronous generator.

11.1.3 Function block

SMAIHPAC
BLOCK AI3P
G3P* AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4

IEC13000180-1-en.vsd
IEC13000180 V1 EN

11.1.4 Signals

Table 225: SMAIHPAC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
G3P GROUP - Analog input group from SMAI
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

339
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
System protection and control

Table 226: SMAIHPAC Output signals

Name Type Description
AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Analog input 3-phase group
AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Analog input 1
AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Analog input 2
AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Analog input 3
AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Analog input 4

11.1.5 Settings

Table 227: SMAIHPAC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ConnectionType Ph - Ph - - Ph - N Analogue input connection type
Ph - N
SetFrequency 2.0 - 500.0 Hz 0.1 50.0 Desired frequency to be extracted by the
filter
FreqBandWidth 0.0 - 60.0 Hz 0.1 0.0 Extra added frequency band around the
set frequency
FilterLength 0.1 s - - 1.0 s Approximate length of the filtering
0.2 s window in seconds
0.5 s
1.0 s
2.0 s
4.0 s
OverLap 0 - 95 % 5 20 Filtering window overlap between two
calculations in percent

11.1.6 Operation principle

For all four analogue input signals into this filter (i.e. three phases and the residual
quantity) the input samples from the TRM module which are coming at rate of 20
samples per fundamental system cycle are first stored. When enough samples are
available in the internal memory, the phasor values at set frequency defined by the
setting parameter SetFrequency are calculated. The following values are internally
available for each of the calculated phasors:
Magnitude
Phase angle
Exact frequency of the extracted signal

Note that the special filtering algorithm is used to extract these phasors. This
algorithm is different from the standard one-cycle Digital Fourier Filter typically
used by the numerical IEDs. This filter provides extremely good accuracy of
measurement and excellent noise rejection, but at the same time it has much slower
response time. It is capable to extract phasor (i.e. magnitude, phase angle and

340
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 11
System protection and control

actual frequency) of any signal (e.g. 37,2Hz) present in the waveforms of the
connected CTs and/or VTs. The magnitude and the phase angle of this phasor are
calculated with very high precision. For example the magnitude and phase angle of
the phasor can be estimated even if it has magnitude of one per mille (i.e. 1 ) in
comparison to the dominating signal (e.g. the fundamental frequency component).
Several instances of this function block are provided. These instances are fully
synchronized between each-other in respect of phase angle calculation. Thus if two
multi-purpose filters are used for some application, one for current and the second
one for the voltage signals, the power values (i.e. P & Q) at the set frequency can
be calculated from them by the over-/under-power function or CVMMXN
measurement function block.

In addition to these phasors the following quantities are internally calculated as well:
Phasors for the individual phases as well as phase-to-phase phasors
True RMS value of the input signal over all samples available in the memory
Positive sequence phasor
Negative sequence phasor
Zero sequence phasor
etc.

In order to properly calculate phase-to-phase phasors from the individual phase

phasors or vice versa, the setting parameters ConnectionType is provided. It
defines what quantities (i.e. individual phases or phase-to-phase quantities) are
physically connected to the IED analogue inputs by wiring. Then the IED knows
which one of them are the measured quantities and the other one is then internally
calculated. This setting is only important for the VT inputs, because the CTs are
typically star connected all the time.

Thus when this filter is used in conjunction with multi-purpose protection function
or overcurrent function or over-voltage function or over-power function many
different protection applications can be arranged. For example the following
protection, monitoring or measurement features can be realized:
Sub-synchronous resonance protection for turbo generators
Sub-synchronous protection for wind turbines/wind farms
Detection of sub-synchronous oscillation between HVDC links and
synchronous generators
Super-synchronous protection
Detection of presence of the geo-magnetic induced currents
Overcurrent or overvoltage protection at specific frequency harmonic, sub-
harmonic, inter-harmonic etc.
Presence of special railway frequencies (e.g. 16.7Hz or 25Hz) in the three-
phase power system
Sensitive reverse power protection
Stator or rotor earth fault protection for special injection frequencies (e.g. 25Hz)
etc.

341
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
System protection and control

The filter output can also be connected to the measurement function blocks such as
CVMMXN (Measurements), CMMXU (Phase current measurement), VMMXU
(Phase-phase voltage measurement), etc.

The filter has as well additional capability to report the exact frequency of the
extracted signal. Thus the user can check the actual frequency of some
phenomenon in the power system (e.g. frequency of the sub-synchronous currents)
and compare it with expected value obtained previously by either calculation or
simulation. For the whole three-phase filter group the frequency of the signal
connected to the first input (i.e. phase L1) is reported. This value can be then used
either by over-/under-frequency protections or reported to the built-in HMI or any
other external client via the measurement blocks such is the CVMMXN.

How many samples in the memory are used for the phasor calculation depends on
the setting parameter FilterLength. Table 228 gives overview of the used number
of samples for phasor calculation by the filter. Note that the used number of
samples is always a power of number two.

Table 228: Length of the filtering window

Value for parameter Used No of samples for Corresponding length of Corresponding length of
FilterLength calculation (fixed, the input waveform in the input waveform in
independent from rated miliseconds for 50Hz miliseconds for 60Hz
frequency) power system power system
0.1 s 128 = 27 128 ms 107 ms

0.2 s 256 = 28 256 ms 213 ms

0.5 s 512 = 29 512 ms 427 ms

1.0 s 1024 = 210 1024 ms 853 ms

2.0 s 2048 = 211 2048 ms 1707 ms

4.0 s 4096 = 212 4096 ms 3413 ms

Note that the selected value for the parameter FilterLength automatically defines
certain filter properties as described below:

First in order to secure proper filter operation the selected length of the filter shall
always be longer than three complete periods of the signal which shall be extracted.
Actually the best results are obtained if at least five complete periods are available
within the filtering window. Thus, this filter feature will limit which filter lengths
can be used to extract low frequency signals. For example if 16,7 Hz signal shall be
extracted the minimum filter length in milliseconds shall be:

1000
3 = 180ms
16.7
EQUATION000028 V1 EN (Equation 72)

Thus based on the data from Table 228 the minimum acceptable value for this
parameter would be FilterLength = 0.2 s but more accurate results will be
obtained by using FilterLength = 0.5 s

342
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 11
System protection and control

Second feature which is determined by the selected value for parameter

FilterLength is the capability of the filter to separate the desired signal from the
other disturbing signals which may have similar frequency value. Note that the
filter output will be the phasor with the highest magnitude within certain pass
frequency band around the SetFrequency. Table 229 defines the natural size of
this pass frequency band for the filter, depending on the selected value for
parameter FilterLength.

Table 229: Pass frequency band due to FilterLength

Value for parameter FilterLength For 50Hz power system For 60Hz power system
0.1 s 22.5 Hz 27.0 Hz
0.2 s 11.5 Hz 14.0 Hz
0.5 s 6.0 Hz 7.2 Hz
1.0 s 3.0 Hz 3.6 Hz
2.0 s 1.5 Hz 1.8 Hz
4.0 s 0.8 Hz 1.0 Hz

Thus the longer length of the filter the better capability it has to reject the
disturbing signals close to the required frequency component and any other noise
present in the input signal waveform. For example if 46 Hz signal wants to be
extracted in 50Hz power system, then from Table 229 it can be concluded that
FilterLength=1,0 s shall be selected as a minimum value. However if frequency
deviation of the fundamental frequency signal in the power system are taken into
account it may be advisable to select FilterLength=2,0 s for such application.

Note that in case when no clear magnitude peak exist in the set pass frequency
band the filter will return zero values for the phasor magnitude and angle while the
signal frequency will have value minus one. Finally the set value for parameter
FilterLength also defines the response time of the filter after a step change of the
measured signal. The filter will correctly estimate the new signal magnitude once
75% of the filter length has been filed with the new signal value (i.e. after the change).

If for any reason this natural frequency band shall be extended (e.g. to get accurate
but wider filter) it is possible to increase the pass band by entering the value
different from zero for parameter FreqBandWidth. In such case the total filter pass
band can be defined as:

(value given in Table 229 + one-half of the set FreqBandWidth value)

Example if in 60Hz system the selected values are FilterLength =1.0 s and
FreqBandWidth = 5.0 the total filter pass band will be (3.6+5.0/2)= 6.1 Hz.

It shall be noted that the phasor calculation is relatively computation demanding

(required certain amount of the CPU processing time). In order to control the CPU
usage for this filter, the setting parameter OverLap is used. This setting parameter
defines how often the new phasor value is calculated during time period defined by
the set value for the parameter FilterLength (see Table 228). The following list

343
Technical Manual
Section 11 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
System protection and control

gives some examples how this parameter influence the calculation rate for the
extracted phasor:
when OverLap=0% the new phasor value is calculated only once per
FilterLength
when OverLap=50% the new phasor value is calculated two times per
FilterLength
when OverLap=75% the new phasor value is calculated four times per
FilterLength
when OverLap=90% the new phasor value is calculated ten times per
FilterLength

11.1.7 Filter calculation example

In the following Figure an example from an installation of this filter on a large, 50
Hz turbo generator with a rating in excess of 1000 MVA is presented. In this
installation filter is used to measure the stator sub-synchronous resonance currents.
For this particular installation the following settings were used for the filter:
SetFrequency= 31.0 Hz
FilterLength= 1.0 s
OverLap = 75%
FreqBandWidth= 0.0 Hz

IEC13000178-2-en.vsd
IEC13000178 V2 EN

Figure 147: Example of filter calculation

The data shown in the Figure comes from the comtrade file captured by the IED.
The following traces are presented in this Figure.

a) Waveforms of the stator three-phase currents given in primary kA.

344
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 11
System protection and control

b) RMS value of the sub-synchronous resonance current extracted by the filter in

primary amperes.

c) Frequency of the extracted sub-synchronous resonance current provided by the

filter in Hz.

Note the very narrow scale on the y-axle for b) and c). Such small scale as well
indicates with which precision and consistency the filter calculates the phasor
magnitude and frequency of the extracted stator sub-synchronous current component.

The following can be observed in the Figure:

The stator total RMS current value is around 33 kA primary.
The measured magnitude of the sub-synchronous current is around 173 A
primary (that is, 0.5% of the fundamental 50 Hz component).
The frequency of this sub-synchronous current component is 31.24 Hz.

With above given settings the sub-synchronous current magnitude and frequency
are calculated approximately four times per second (that is, correct value is four
times per 1024 ms).

345
Technical Manual
346
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 12
Secondary system supervision

Section 12 Secondary system supervision

12.1 Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC

12.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC - 87

12.1.2 Functionality
Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation of
many protection functions such as differential, earth-fault current and negative-
sequence current functions.

It must be remembered that a blocking of protection functions at an occurrence of

open CT circuit will mean that the situation will remain and extremely high
voltages will stress the secondary circuit.

Current circuit supervision (CCSSPVC) compares the residual current from a three
phase set of current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate
input taken from another set of cores on the current transformer.

A detection of a difference indicates a fault in the circuit and is used as alarm or to

block protection functions expected to give inadvertent tripping.

12.1.3 Function block

CCSSPVC
I3P* FAIL
IREF* ALARM
BLOCK
IEC13000304-1-en.vsd
IEC13000304 V1 EN

Figure 148: CCSSPVC function block

347
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Secondary system supervision

12.1.4 Signals
Table 230: CCSSPVC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for three phase current input
SIGNAL
IREF GROUP - Residual reference current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 231: CCSSPVC Output signals

Name Type Description
FAIL BOOLEAN Detection of current circuit failure
ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm for current circuit failure

12.1.5 Settings
Table 232: CCSSPVC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
IMinOp 10 - 200 %IB 1 20 Minimum operate current differential
level in % of IBase

Table 233: CCSSPVC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Ip>Block 20 - 500 %IB 1 150 Block of the function at high phase
current, in % of IBase

Table 234: CCSSPVC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

12.1.6 Operation principle

Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC compares the absolute value of the vectorial
sum of the three phase currents |Iphase| and the numerical value of the residual
current |Iref| from another current transformer set, see figure 149.

The FAIL output will be set to a logical one when the following criteria are fulfilled:

348
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 12
Secondary system supervision

The numerical value of the difference |Iphase| |Iref| is higher than 80% of
the numerical value of the sum |Iphase| + |Iref|.
The numerical value of the current |Iphase| |Iref| is equal to or higher than
the set operate value IMinOp.
No phase current has exceeded Ip>Block during the last 10 ms.
CCSSPVC is enabled by setting Operation = On.

The FAIL output remains activated 100 ms after the AND-gate resets when being
activated for more than 20 ms. If the FAIL lasts for more than 150 ms an ALARM
will be issued. In this case the FAIL and ALARM will remain activated 1 s after
the AND-gate resets. This prevents unwanted resetting of the blocking function
when phase current supervision element(s) operate, for example, during a fault.

I>Ip>Block
BLOCK
IL1 IL1 I>IMinOp
IL2 +
IL2
IL3 -
IL3
+ +
I ref Iref + x -
0,8
1,5 x Ir
AND OR FAIL
10 ms

20 ms 100 ms

150 ms 1s ALARM
OPERATION
BLOCK

en05000463.tif
IEC05000463 V2 EN

Figure 149: Simplified logic diagram for Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC

The operate characteristic is percentage restrained, see figure 150.

349
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Secondary system supervision

| I phase | - | I ref |

Slope = 1

Operation
Slope = 0.8
area
I MinOp

| I phase | + | I ref |
99000068.vsd

IEC99000068 V1 EN

Figure 150: Operate characteristics

Due to the formulas for the axis compared, |SIphase | - |I ref | and |S
I phase | + | I ref | respectively, the slope can not be above 2.

12.1.7 Technical data

Table 235: CCSSPVCtechnical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate current (10-200)% of IBase 10.0% of Ir at I Ir
10.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, Operate current >90%

Block current (20-500)% of IBase 5.0% of Ir at I Ir
5.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, Block current >90% at (50-500)% of IBase

12.2 Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC

12.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC - -

350
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 12
Secondary system supervision

12.2.2 Functionality
The aim of the fuse failure supervision function FUFSPVC is to block voltage
measuring functions at failures in the secondary circuits between the voltage
transformer and the IED in order to avoid inadvertent operations that otherwise
might occur.

The fuse failure supervision function basically has three different detection
methods, negative sequence and zero sequence based detection and an additional
delta voltage and delta current detection.

The negative sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in

isolated or high-impedance earthed networks. It is based on the negative-sequence
quantities.

The zero sequence detection is recommended for IEDs used in directly or low
impedance earthed networks. It is based on the zero sequence measuring quantities.

The selection of different operation modes is possible by a setting parameter in

order to take into account the particular earthing of the network.

A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to
the fuse failure supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure,
which in practice is more associated with voltage transformer switching during
station operations.

12.2.3 Function block

FUFSPVC
I3P* BLKZ
U3P* BLKU
BLOCK 3PH
CBCLOSED DLD1PH
MCBOP DLD3PH
DISCPOS STDI
BLKTRIP STDIL1
STDIL2
STDIL3
STDU
STDUL1
STDUL2
STDUL3

IEC14000065-1-en.vsd
IEC14000065 V1 EN

Figure 151: FUFSPVC function block

351
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Secondary system supervision

12.2.4 Signals
Table 236: FUFSPVC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
CBCLOSED BOOLEAN 0 Active when circuit breaker is closed
MCBOP BOOLEAN 0 Active when external MCB opens protected
voltage circuit
DISCPOS BOOLEAN 0 Active when line disconnector is open
BLKTRIP BOOLEAN 0 Blocks operation of function when active

Table 237: FUFSPVC Output signals

Name Type Description
BLKZ BOOLEAN Start of current and voltage controlled function
BLKU BOOLEAN General start of function
3PH BOOLEAN Three-phase start of function
DLD1PH BOOLEAN Dead line condition in at least one phase
DLD3PH BOOLEAN Dead line condition in all three phases
STDI BOOLEAN Common start signal of sudden change in current
STDIL1 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in current, phase L1
STDIL2 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in current, phase L2
STDIL3 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in current, phase L3
STDU BOOLEAN Common start signal of sudden change in voltage
STDUL1 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in voltage, phase L1
STDUL2 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in voltage, phase L2
STDUL3 BOOLEAN Start signal of sudden change in voltage, phase L3

352
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 12
Secondary system supervision

12.2.5 Settings
Table 238: FUFSPVC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OpMode Off - - UZsIZs Operating mode selection
UNsINs
UZsIZs
UZsIZs OR UNsINs
UZsIZs AND
UNsINs
OptimZsNs
3U0> 1 - 100 %UB 1 30 Operate level of residual overvoltage
element in % of UBase
3I0< 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Operate level of residual undercurrent
element in % of IBase
3U2> 1 - 100 %UB 1 30 Operate level of neg seq overvoltage
element in % of UBase
3I2< 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Operate level of neg seq undercurrent
element in % of IBase
OpDUDI Off - - Off Operation of change based function Off/
On On
DU> 1 - 100 %UB 1 60 Operate level of change in phase voltage
in % of UBase
DI< 1 - 100 %IB 1 15 Operate level of change in phase current
in % of IBase
UPh> 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Operate level of phase voltage in % of
UBase
IPh> 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Operate level of phase current in % of
IBase
SealIn Off - - On Seal in functionality Off/On
On
USealln< 1 - 100 %UB 1 70 Operate level of seal-in phase voltage in
% of UBase
IDLD< 1 - 100 %IB 1 5 Operate level for open phase current
detection in % of IBase
UDLD< 1 - 100 %UB 1 60 Operate level for open phase voltage
detection in % of UBase

Table 239: FUFSPVC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

353
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Secondary system supervision

12.2.6 Monitored data

Table 240: FUFSPVC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
3I0 REAL - A Magnitude of zero
sequence current
3I2 REAL - A Magnitude of negative
sequence current
3U0 REAL - kV Magnitude of zero
sequence voltage
3U2 REAL - kV Magnitude of negative
sequence voltage

12.2.7 Operation principle

12.2.7.1 Zero and negative sequence detection

The zero and negative sequence function continuously measures the currents and
voltages in all three phases and calculates, see figure 152:

the zero-sequence voltage 3U0

the zero-sequence current 3I0
the negative sequence current 3I2
the negative sequence voltage 3U2

The measured signals are compared with their respective set values 3U0> and
3I0<, 3U2> and 3I2<.

The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetZeroSeq if the measured zero-
sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3U0> and the measured zero-
sequence current is below the set value 3I0<.

The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetNegSeq if the measured

negative sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3U2> and the measured
negative sequence current is below the set value 3I2<.

A drop out delay of 100 ms for the measured zero-sequence and negative sequence
current will prevent a false fuse failure detection at un-equal breaker opening at the
two line ends.

354
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 12
Secondary system supervision

Sequence Detection
3I0< CurrZeroSeq
IL1
Zero 3I0
sequence
filter 100 ms CurrNegSeq
a
IL2 a>b t
b
Negative 3I2
sequence
IL3 filter FuseFailDetZeroSeq
AND
100 ms
a
a>b t
3I2< b
FuseFailDetNegSeq
AND
3U0>
VoltZeroSeq
UL1
Zero
sequence
a 3U0
a>b
b
filter
UL2 VoltNegSeq

Negative
sequence a 3U2
a>b
UL3 filter b

3U2>

IEC10000036-2-en.vsd
IEC10000036 V2 EN

Figure 152: Simplified logic diagram for sequence detection part

The calculated values 3U0, 3I0, 3I2 and 3U2 are available as service values on
local HMI and monitoring tool in PCM600.

Input and output signals

The output signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ as well as the signals DLD1PH and
DLD3PH from dead line detections are blocked if any of the following conditions
occur:

The input BLOCK is activated

The input BLKTRIP is activated and the internal signal FuseFailStarted is not
present
The operation mode selector OpMode is set to Off
The IED is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been
blocked from the HMI (BlockFUSE=Yes)

The input BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure
supervision function. It can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to
receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to
other internal functions of the IED itself in order to receive a block command from
internal functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and
internal function outputs.

The input BLKTRIP is intended to be connected to the trip output from any of the
protection functions included in the IED. When activated for more than 20 ms, the
operation of the fuse failure is blocked; a fixed drop-out timer prolongs the block
for 100 ms. The aim is to increase the security against unwanted operations during

355
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Secondary system supervision

the opening of the breaker, which might cause unbalance conditions for which the
fuse failure might operate.

The output signal BLKZ will also be blocked if the internal dead line detection is
activated. The dead line detection signal has a 200 ms drop-out time delay.

The input signal MCBOP is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input
to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT
secondary circuit. The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKU and BLKZ in
order to block all the voltage related functions when the MCB is open independent
of the setting of OpMode selector. The additional drop-out timer of 150 ms
prolongs the presence of MCBOP signal to prevent the unwanted operation of
voltage dependent function due to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts of
the miniature circuit breaker.

The input signal DISCPOS is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input
to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The DISCPOS signal sets the
output signal BLKU in order to block the voltage related functions when the line
disconnector is open. The impedance protection function is not affected by the
position of the line disconnector since there will be no line currents that can cause
malfunction of the distance protection. If DISCPOS=0 it signifies that the line is
connected to the system and when the DISCPOS=1 it signifies that the line is
disconnected from the system and the block signal BLKU is generated.

The output BLKU can be used for blocking the voltage related measuring functions
(undervoltage protection, energizing check and so on) except for the impedance
protection.

The function output BLKZ shall be used for blocking the impedance protection
function.

12.2.7.2 Delta current and delta voltage detection

A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 153. The calculation of
the changes of currents and voltages is based on a sample analysis algorithm. The
calculated delta quantities are compared with their respective set values DI< and
DU>. The algorithm detects a fuse failure if a sufficient change in voltage without
a sufficient change in current is detected in each phase separately. The following
quantities are calculated in all three phases:

The change in voltage DU

The change in current DI

The internal FuseFailDetDUDI signal is activated if the following conditions are

fulfilled for a phase:

The magnitude of the phase-ground voltage has been above UPh> for more
than 1.5 cycles (i.e. 30 ms in a 50 Hz system)
The magnitude of DU is higher than the corresponding setting DU>
The magnitude of DI is below the setting DI<

356
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 12
Secondary system supervision

In addition to the above conditions, at least one of the following conditions shall be
fulfilled in order to activate the internal FuseFailDetDUDI signal:

The magnitude of the phase current in the same phase is higher than the setting
IPh>
The circuit breaker is closed (CBCLOSED = True)

The first criterion means that detection of failure in at least one phase together with
high current for the same phase will set the output. The measured phase current is
used to reduce the risk of false fuse failure detection. If the current on the protected
line is low, a voltage drop in the system (not caused by fuse failure) may be
followed by current change lower than the setting DI<, and therefore a false fuse
failure might occur.

The second criterion requires that the delta condition shall be fulfilled for at least
one phase at the same time as circuit breaker is closed. If CBCLOSED input is
connected to FALSE , then only the first criterion can enable the delta function.If
the DUDI detection of one phase sets the internal signal FuseFailDetDUDI at the
level high, then the signal FuseFailDetDUDI will remain high as long as the
voltage of that phase is lower then the setting Uph>.

In addition to fuse failure detection, two internal signals DeltaU and DeltaI are also
generated by the delta current and delta voltage DUDI detection algorithm. The
internal signals DelatU and DeltaI are activated when a sudden change of voltage,
or respectively current, is detected. The detection of the sudden change is based on
a sample analysis algorithm. In particular DelatU is activated if at least three
consecutive voltage samples are higher then the setting DU>. In a similar way
DelatI is activated if at least three consecutive current samples are higher then the
setting DI<. When DeltaU or DeltaI are active, the output signals STDUL1,
STDUL2, STDUL3 and respectively STDIL1, STDIL2, STDIL3, based on a
sudden change of voltage or current detection, are activated with a 20 ms time off
delay. The common start output signals STDU or STDI are activated with a 60 ms
time off delay, if any sudden change of voltage or current is detected.

The delta function (except the sudden change of voltage and current
detection) is deactivated by setting the parameter OpDUDI to Off.

357
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Secondary system supervision

DUDI Detection
DUDI detection Phase 1
IL1

DI detection based on sample analysis

DI< DeltaIL1

UL1

DU detection based on sample analysis

AND
DU>
1.5 cycle 20 ms DeltaUL1
a
a>b t t
UPh> b

IL2 DeltaIL2
DUDI detection Phase 2
UL2 DeltaUL2

Same logic as for phase 1

IL3 DeltaIL3
DUDI detection Phase 3
UL3 DeltaUL3

Same logic as for phase 1

UL1
a
a<b
b

IL1
a
a>b
IPh> b AND

OR AND
CBCLOSED AND OR

UL2
a
a<b
b

IL2
a
a>b
b AND

OR AND
AND OR

UL3
a
a<b
b

IL3
a
a>b
b AND

OR AND
AND OR FuseFailDetDUDI
OR

IEC12000166-2-en.vsd

IEC12000166 V2 EN

Figure 153: Simplified logic diagram for the DU/DI detection part

358
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 12
Secondary system supervision

intBlock
STDI
AND

20 ms
DeltaIL1 STDIL1
t AND
OR
20 ms
DeltaIL2
t STDIL2
AND
20 ms
DeltaIL3
t
STDIL3
AND

STDU
AND

20 ms
DeltaUL1 STDUL1
t AND
OR
20 ms
DeltaUL2
t STDUL2
AND
20 ms
DeltaUL3
t
STDUL3
AND

IEC12000165-1-en.vsd
IEC12000165 V1 EN

Figure 154: Internal signals DeltaU or DeltaI and the corresponding output
signals

12.2.7.3 Dead line detection

A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 155. A dead phase
condition is indicated if both the voltage and the current in one phase is below their
respective setting values UDLD< and IDLD<. If at least one phase is considered to
be dead the output DLD1PH and the internal signal DeadLineDet1Ph is activated.
If all three phases are considered to be dead the output DLD3PH is activated

359
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Secondary system supervision

Dead Line Detection

IL1
a
a<b AllCurrLow
b
AND
IL2
a
a<b
b

IL3
a
a<b
b

IDLD<
DeadLineDet1Ph
UL1
a AND
a<b
b OR DLD1PH
AND
UL2
a AND
a<b
b
AND DLD3PH
UL3 AND
a AND
a<b
b

UDLD<

intBlock

IEC10000035-1-en.vsd
IEC10000035 V2 EN

Figure 155: Simplified logic diagram for Dead Line detection part

12.2.7.4 Main logic

A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 156. The fuse failure
supervision function (FUFSPVC) can be switched on or off by the setting
parameter Operation to On or Off.

For increased flexibility and adaptation to system requirements an operation mode

selector, OpMode, has been introduced to make it possible to select different
operating modes for the negative and zero sequence based algorithms. The
different operation modes are:

Off. The negative and zero sequence function is switched off.

UNsINs. Negative sequence is selected.
UZsIZs. Zero sequence is selected.
UZsIZs OR UNsINs. Both negative and zero sequence are activated and work
in parallel (OR-condition for operation).
UZsIZs AND UNsINs. Both negative and zero sequence are activated and work
in series (AND-condition for operation).
OptimZsNs. Optimum of negative and zero sequence current (the function that
has the highest magnitude of measured negative and zero sequence current will
be activated).

The delta function can be activated by setting the parameter OpDUDI to On. When
selected it operates in parallel with the sequence based algorithms.

360
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 12
Secondary system supervision

As soon as any fuse failure situation is detected, signals FuseFailDetZeroSeq,

FuseFailDetNegSeq or FuseFailDetDUDI, and the specific functionality is
released, the function will activate the output signal BLKU. The output signal
BLKZ will be activated as well if the internal dead phase detection,
DeadLineDet1Ph, is not activated at the same time. The output BLKU can be used
for blocking voltage related measuring functions (under voltage protection,
energizing check, and so on). The output BLKZ shall be used to block the
impedance protection functions.

If the fuse failure situation is present for more than 5 seconds and the setting
parameter SealIn is set to On it will be sealed in as long as at least one phase
voltages is below the set value USealIn<. This will keep the BLKU and BLKZ
signals activated as long as any phase voltage is below the set value USealIn<. If
all three phase voltages drop below the set value USealIn< and the setting
parameter SealIn is set to On the output signal 3PH will also be activated. The
signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ will now be active as long as any phase voltage is
below the set value USealIn<.

If SealIn is set to On the fuse failure condition lasting more then 5 seconds is stored
in the non-volatile memory in the IED. At start-up of the IED (due to auxiliary
power interruption or re-start due to configuration change) it uses the stored value
in its non-volatile memory and re-establishes the conditions that were present
before the shut down. All phase voltages must be restored above USealIn< before
fuse failure is de-activated and resets the signals BLKU, BLKZ and 3PH.

The output signal BLKU will also be active if all phase voltages have been above
the setting USealIn< for more than 60 seconds, the zero or negative sequence
voltage has been above the set value 3U0> and 3U2> for more than 5 seconds, all
phase currents are below the setting IDLD< (criteria for open phase detection) and
the circuit breaker is closed (input CBCLOSED is activated).

If a MCB is used then the input signal MCBOP is to be connected via a binary
input to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the
VT secondary circuit. The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKU and BLKZ
in order to block all the voltage related functions when the MCB is open
independent of the setting of OpMode or OpDUDI. An additional drop-out timer of
150 ms prolongs the presence of MCBOP signal to prevent the unwanted operation
of voltage dependent function due to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts
of the miniature circuit breaker.

The input signal DISCPOS is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input
to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The DISCPOS signal sets the
output signal BLKU in order to block the voltage related functions when the line
disconnector is open. The impedance protection function does not have to be
affected since there will be no line currents that can cause malfunction of the
distance protection.

361
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Secondary system supervision

Fuse failure detection

Main logic
TEST

TEST ACTIVE
AND
BlocFuse = Yes

BLOCK intBlock
OR
BLKTRIP 20 ms 100 ms
AND t t
FusefailStarted

All UL < USealIn<

OR
AND
3PH
AND
SealIn = On AND

AND
Any UL < UsealIn<

FuseFailDetDUDI
AND 5s
OpDUDI = On
OR t
FuseFailDetZeroSeq
AND

AND

FuseFailDetNegSeq
AND

UNsINs OR
UZsIZs OR
UZsIZs OR UNsINs
OpMode
UZsIZs AND UNsINs
OptimZsNs
OR
CurrZeroSeq
a AND
CurrNegSeq a>b
b

AND

DeadLineDet1Ph 200 ms
AND BLKZ
t OR AND
150 ms
MCBOP t

AND BLKU
60 s
t OR OR
All UL > UsealIn<
AND

VoltZeroSeq 5s
VoltNegSeq OR t

AllCurrLow
CBCLOSED

DISCPOS IEC10000033-2-en.vsd

IEC10000033 V2 EN

Figure 156: Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function, Main
logic

362
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 12
Secondary system supervision

12.2.8 Technical data

Table 241: FUFSPVCtechnical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, zero sequence (1-100)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Operate current, zero sequence (1100)% of IBase 0.5% of Ir

Operate voltage, negative sequence (1-100)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Operate current, negative sequence (1100)% of IBase 0.5% of Ir

Operate voltage change level (1-100)% of UBase 10.0% of Ur

Operate current change level (1100)% of IBase 10.0% of Ir

Operate phase voltage (1-100)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Operate phase current (1100)% of IBase 0.5% of Ir

Operate phase dead line voltage (1-100)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Operate phase dead line current (1100)% of IBase 0.5% of Ir

Operate time, start, 1 ph, at 1 to 0 x Ur Min. = 10 ms -

Max. = 25 ms
Reset time, start, 1 ph, at 0 to 1 x Ur Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms

12.3 Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC

12.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC VTS 60

12.3.2 Functionality
Different protection functions within the protection IED operates on the basis of
measured voltage at the relay point. Some example of protection functions are:

Distance protection function.

Undervoltage function.
Energisation function and voltage check for the weak infeed logic.

These functions can operate unintentionally, if a fault occurs in the secondary

circuits between voltage instrument transformers and the IED. These unintentional
operations can be prevented by VDSPVC.

363
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Secondary system supervision

VDSPVC is designed to detect fuse failures or faults in voltage measurement

circuit, based on phase wise comparison of voltages of main and pilot fused
circuits. VDSPVC blocking output can be configured to block functions that need
to be blocked in case of faults in the voltage circuit.

12.3.3 Function block

VDSPVC
U3P1* MAINFUF
U3P2* PILOTFUF
BLOCK U1L1FAIL
U1L2FAIL
U1L3FAIL
U2L1FAIL
U2L2FAIL
U2L3FAIL

IEC14000048-1-en.vsd
IEC12000142 V2 EN

Figure 157: VDSPVC function block

12.3.4 Signals
Table 242: VDRFUF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P1 GROUP - Main fuse voltage
SIGNAL
U3P2 GROUP - Pilot fuse voltage
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 243: VDRFUF Output signals

Name Type Description
MAINFUF BOOLEAN Block of main fuse failure
PILOTFUF BOOLEAN Alarm of pilot fuse failure
U1L1FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Main fuse group phase L1
U1L2FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Main fuse group phase L2
U1L3FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Main fuse group phase L3
U2L1FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Pilot fuse group phase L1
U2L2FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Pilot fuse group phase L2
U2L3FAIL BOOLEAN Fuse failure of Pilot fuse group phase L3

364
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 12
Secondary system supervision

12.3.5 Settings
Table 244: VDRFUF Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode Off / On
On
Ud>MainBlock 10.0 - 80.0 %UB 0.1 20.0 Blocking picked up voltage level in % of
UBase when main fuse fails
Ud>PilotAlarm 10.0 - 80.0 %UB 0.1 30.0 Alarm picked up voltage level in % of
UBase when pilot fuse fails
SealIn Off - - On Seal in functionality Off/On
On
USealIn 0.0 - 100.0 %UB 0.1 70.0 Operate level of seal-in voltage in % of
UBase

Table 245: VDRFUF Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Table 246: VDRFUF Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ConTypeMain Ph-N - - Ph-N Selection of connection type for main
Ph-Ph fuse group
ConTypePilot Ph-N - - Ph-N Selection of connection type for pilot
Ph-Ph fuse group

12.3.6 Monitored data

Table 247: VDRFUF Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL1DIF_A REAL - kV Differential voltage
phase L1 for alarm
functionality
UL2DIF_A REAL - kV Differential voltage
phase L2 for alarm
functionality
UL3DIF_A REAL - kV Differential voltage
phase L3 for alarm
functionality
Table continues on next page

365
Technical Manual
Section 12 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Secondary system supervision

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

UL1DIF_B REAL - kV Differential voltage
phase L1 for block
functionality
UL2DIF_B REAL - kV Differential voltage
phase L2 for block
functionality
UL3DIF_B REAL - kV Differential voltage
phase L3 for block
functionality

12.3.7 Operation principle

VDSPVC requires six voltage inputs, which are the three phase voltages on main
and pilot fuse groups. The initial voltage difference between the two groups is
theoretical zero in the healthy condition. Any subsequent voltage difference will be
due to a fuse failure.

If the main fuse voltage becomes smaller than the pilot fuse voltage (vMainL1 <
vPilotL1 or vMainL2 < vPilotL2 or vMainL3 < vPilotL3) and the voltage
difference exceeds the operation level (Ud>MainBlock), a blocking signal will be
initiated to indicate the main fuse failure and block the voltage-dependent
functions. In addition, the function also indicates the phase in which the voltage
reduction has occurred.

If the pilot fuse voltage becomes smaller than the main fuse voltage (vPilotL1 <
vMainL1 or vPilotL2 < vMainL2 or vPilotL3 < vMainL3) and the voltage
difference exceeds the operation level (Ud>PilotAlarm), an alarm signal will be
initiated to indicate the pilot fuse failure and also the faulty phase where the
voltage reduction occurred.

When SealIn is set to On and the fuse failure has last for more than 5 seconds, the
blocked protection functions will remain blocked until normal voltage conditions
are restored above the USealIn setting. Fuse failure outputs are deactivated when
normal voltage conditions are restored.

366
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 12
Secondary system supervision

5s
a
a<b AND OR t
USealIn b

SealIn=0

vPilotL1
+
vMainL1 -
MAX a U1L1FAIL
OR
a>b AND
Ud>MainBlock b MAINFAIL
OR
0

MIN ABS a
a>b AND U2L1FAIL
Ud> PilotAlarm b
BLOCK
OR PILOTFAIL

vPilotL2 U1L2FAIL
vMainL2 Phase L2, same as Phase L1 U2L2FAIL

vPilotL3 U1L3FAIL
vMainL3 Phase L3, same as Phase L1 U2L3FAIL

IEC12000144-1-en.vsd

IEC12000144 V1 EN

Figure 158: Simplified logic diagram VDSPVC

12.3.8 Technical data

Table 248: VDSPVC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate value, block of main (10.0-80.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur
fuse failure
Reset ratio <110%
Operate time, block of main fuse Min = 5 ms
failure at 1 to 0 x Ur
Max = 15 ms
Reset time, block of main fuse Min = 15 ms
failure at 0 to 1 x Ur
Max = 30 ms
Operate value, alarm for pilot (10.0-80.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur
fuse failure
Reset ratio <110%
Operate time, alarm for pilot Min = 5 ms
fuse failure at 1 to 0 x Ur
Max = 15 ms
Reset time, alarm for pilot fuse Min = 15 ms
failure at 0 to 1 x Ur
Max = 30 ms

367
Technical Manual
368
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Section 13 Control

13.1 Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing

SESRSYN

13.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and SESRSYN 25
synchronizing
sc/vc

SYMBOL-M V1 EN

13.1.2 Functionality
The Synchronizing function allows closing of asynchronous networks at the correct
moment including the breaker closing time, which improves the network stability.

Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing SESRSYN function checks

that the voltages on both sides of the circuit breaker are in synchronism, or with at
least one side dead to ensure that closing can be done safely.

SESRSYN function includes a built-in voltage selection scheme for double bus and
1 breaker or ring busbar arrangements.

Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be checked by the function and
can have different settings.

For systems, which are running asynchronous, a synchronizing function is

provided. The main purpose of the synchronizing function is to provide controlled
closing of circuit breakers when two asynchronous systems are going to be
connected. The synchronizing function evaluates voltage difference, phase angle
difference, slip frequency and frequency rate of change before issuing a controlled
closing of the circuit breaker. Breaker closing time is a parameter setting.

369
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

13.1.3 Function block

SESRSYN
U3PBB1* SYNOK
U3PBB2* AUTOSYOK
U3PLN1* AUTOENOK
U3PLN2* MANSYOK
BLOCK MANENOK
BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK
BLKSC TSTAUTSY
BLKENERG TSTMANSY
B1QOPEN TSTENOK
B1QCLD USELFAIL
B2QOPEN B1SEL
B2QCLD B2SEL
LN1QOPEN LN1SEL
LN1QCLD LN2SEL
LN2QOPEN SYNPROGR
LN2QCLD SYNFAIL
UB1OK UOKSYN
UB1FF UDIFFSYN
UB2OK FRDIFSYN
UB2FF FRDIFFOK
ULN1OK FRDERIVA
ULN1FF UOKSC
ULN2OK UDIFFSC
ULN2FF FRDIFFA
STARTSYN PHDIFFA
TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM
TSTSC PHDIFFM
TSTENERG INADVCLS
AENMODE UDIFFME
MENMODE FRDIFFME
PHDIFFME
UBUS
ULINE
MODEAEN
MODEMEN

IEC10000046-1-en.vsd
IEC10000046 V1 EN

Figure 159: SESRSYN function block

13.1.4 Signals
Table 249: SESRSYN Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3PBB1 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1,
SIGNAL busbar 1
U3PBB2 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1,
SIGNAL busbar 2
U3PLN1 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1,
SIGNAL line 1
U3PLN2 GROUP - Group signal for phase to earth voltage input L1,
SIGNAL line 2
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 General block
BLKSYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Block synchronizing
BLKSC BOOLEAN 0 Block synchro check
BLKENERG BOOLEAN 0 Block energizing check
B1QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to
bus1
Table continues on next page

370
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Name Type Default Description

B1QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to
bus1
B2QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to
bus2
B2QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to
bus2
LN1QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to
line1
LN1QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to
line1
LN2QOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open status for CB or disconnector connected to
line2
LN2QCLD BOOLEAN 0 Close status for CB or disconnector connected to
line2
UB1OK BOOLEAN 0 Bus1 voltage transformer OK
UB1FF BOOLEAN 0 Bus1 voltage transformer fuse failure
UB2OK BOOLEAN 0 Bus2 voltage transformer OK
UB2FF BOOLEAN 0 Bus2 voltage transformer fuse failure
ULN1OK BOOLEAN 0 Line1 voltage transformer OK
ULN1FF BOOLEAN 0 Line1 voltage transformer fuse failure
ULN2OK BOOLEAN 0 Line2 voltage transformer OK
ULN2FF BOOLEAN 0 Line2 voltage transformer fuse failure
STARTSYN BOOLEAN 0 Start synchronizing
TSTSYNCH BOOLEAN 0 Set synchronizing in test mode
TSTSC BOOLEAN 0 Set synchro check in test mode
TSTENERG BOOLEAN 0 Set energizing check in test mode
AENMODE INTEGER 0 Input for setting of automatic energizing mode
MENMODE INTEGER 0 Input for setting of manual energizing mode

Table 250: SESRSYN Output signals

Name Type Description
SYNOK BOOLEAN Synchronizing OK output
AUTOSYOK BOOLEAN Auto synchro check OK
AUTOENOK BOOLEAN Automatic energizing check OK
MANSYOK BOOLEAN Manual synchro check OK
MANENOK BOOLEAN Manual energizing check OK
TSTSYNOK BOOLEAN Synchronizing OK test output
TSTAUTSY BOOLEAN Auto synchro check OK test output
TSTMANSY BOOLEAN Manual synchro check OK test output
TSTENOK BOOLEAN Energizing check OK test output
USELFAIL BOOLEAN Selected voltage transformer fuse failed
B1SEL BOOLEAN Bus1 selected
Table continues on next page

371
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Name Type Description

B2SEL BOOLEAN Bus2 selected
LN1SEL BOOLEAN Line1 selected
LN2SEL BOOLEAN Line2 selected
SYNPROGR BOOLEAN Synchronizing in progress
SYNFAIL BOOLEAN Synchronizing failed
UOKSYN BOOLEAN Voltage amplitudes for synchronizing above set
limits
UDIFFSYN BOOLEAN Voltage difference out of limit for synchronizing
FRDIFSYN BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for synchronizing
FRDIFFOK BOOLEAN Frequency difference in band for synchronizing
FRDERIVA BOOLEAN Frequency derivative out of limit for synchronizing
UOKSC BOOLEAN Voltage amplitudes above set limits
UDIFFSC BOOLEAN Voltage difference out of limit
FRDIFFA BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for Auto operation
PHDIFFA BOOLEAN Phase angle difference out of limit for Auto
operation
FRDIFFM BOOLEAN Frequency difference out of limit for Manual
operation
PHDIFFM BOOLEAN Phase angle difference out of limit for Manual
Operation
INADVCLS BOOLEAN Inadvertent circuit breaker closing
UDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of voltage in p.u of set
voltage base value
FRDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of frequency
PHDIFFME REAL Calculated difference of phase angle
UBUS REAL Bus voltage
ULINE REAL Line voltage
MODEAEN INTEGER Selected mode for automatic energizing
MODEMEN INTEGER Selected mode for manual energizing

13.1.5 Settings
Table 251: SESRSYN Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
OperationSynch Off - - Off Operation for synchronizing function Off/
On On
UHighBusSynch 50.0 - 120.0 %UBB 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit bus for synchronizing
in % of UBaseBus
UHighLineSynch 50.0 - 120.0 %UBL 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit line for synchronizing
in % of UBaseLine
Table continues on next page

372
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

UDiffSynch 0.02 - 0.50 pu 0.01 0.10 Voltage difference limit for synchronizing
in p.u of set voltage base value
FreqDiffMin 0.003 - 0.250 Hz 0.001 0.010 Minimum frequency difference limit for
synchronizing
FreqDiffMax 0.050 - 0.500 Hz 0.001 0.200 Maximum frequency difference limit for
synchronizing
FreqRateChange 0.000 - 0.500 Hz/s 0.001 0.300 Maximum allowed frequency rate of
change
tBreaker 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.080 Closing time of the breaker
tClosePulse 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Breaker closing pulse duration
tMaxSynch 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 600.00 Resets synch if no close has been made
before set time
tMinSynch 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Minimum time to accept synchronizing
conditions
OperationSC Off - - On Operation for synchronism check
On function Off/On
UHighBusSC 50.0 - 120.0 %UBB 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit bus for synchrocheck
in % of UBaseBus
UHighLineSC 50.0 - 120.0 %UBL 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit line for synchrocheck
in % of UBaseLine
UDiffSC 0.02 - 0.50 pu 0.01 0.15 Voltage difference limit for synchrocheck
in p.u of set voltage base value
FreqDiffA 0.003 - 1.000 Hz 0.001 0.010 Frequency difference limit between bus
and line Auto
FreqDiffM 0.003 - 1.000 Hz 0.001 0.010 Frequency difference limit between bus
and line Manual
PhaseDiffA 5.0 - 90.0 Deg 1.0 25.0 Phase angle difference limit between
bus and line Auto
PhaseDiffM 5.0 - 90.0 Deg 1.0 25.0 Phase angle difference limit between
bus and line Manual
tSCA 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay output for synchrocheck Auto
tSCM 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay output for synchrocheck
Manual
AutoEnerg Off - - DLLB Automatic energizing check mode
DLLB
DBLL
Both
ManEnerg Off - - Both Manual energizing check mode
DLLB
DBLL
Both
ManEnergDBDL Off - - Off Manual dead bus, dead line energizing
On
UHighBusEnerg 50.0 - 120.0 %UBB 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit bus for energizing
check in % of UBaseBus
UHighLineEnerg 50.0 - 120.0 %UBL 1.0 80.0 Voltage high limit line for energizing
check in % of UBaseLine
ULowBusEnerg 10.0 - 80.0 %UBB 1.0 40.0 Voltage low limit bus for energizing
check in % of UBaseBus
Table continues on next page

373
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ULowLineEnerg 10.0 - 80.0 %UBL 1.0 40.0 Voltage low limit line for energizing
check in % of UBaseLine
UMaxEnerg 50.0 - 180.0 %UB 1.0 115.0 Maximum voltage for energizing in % of
UBase, Line and/or Bus
tAutoEnerg 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for automatic energizing
check
tManEnerg 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Time delay for manual energizing check

Table 252: SESRSYN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SelPhaseBus1 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for busbar1
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
GblBaseSelBus 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups, Bus
GblBaseSelLine 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups, Line
SelPhaseBus2 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for busbar2
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
SelPhaseLine1 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for line1
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
SelPhaseLine2 Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Select phase for line2
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
CBConfig No voltage sel. - - No voltage sel. Select CB configuration
Double bus
1 1/2 bus CB
1 1/2 bus alt. CB
Tie CB

Table 253: SESRSYN Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
PhaseShift -180 - 180 Deg 1 0 Additional phase angle for selected line
voltage

374
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

13.1.6 Monitored data

Table 254: SESRSYN Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UDIFFME REAL - - Calculated difference of
voltage in p.u of set
voltage base value
FRDIFFME REAL - Hz Calculated difference of
frequency
PHDIFFME REAL - deg Calculated difference of
phase angle
UBUS REAL - kV Bus voltage
ULINE REAL - kV Line voltage

13.1.7 Operation principle

13.1.7.1 Basic functionality

The synchrocheck function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and
compares them to set limits. The output is only given when all measured quantities
are simultaneously within their set limits.

The energizing check function measures the bus and line voltages and compares
them to both high and low threshold detectors. The output is given only when the
actual measured quantities match the set conditions.

The synchronizing function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker, and
also determines the angle change occurring during the closing delay of the circuit
breaker, from the measured slip frequency. The output is given only when all
measured conditions are simultaneously within their set limits. The issue of the
output is timed to give closure at the optimal time including the time for the circuit
breaker and the closing circuit.

For double bus single circuit breaker and 1 circuit breaker arrangements, the
SESRSYN function blocks have the capability to make the necessary voltage
selection. For double bus single circuit breaker arrangements, selection of the
correct voltage is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors. For 1
circuit breaker arrangements, correct voltage selection is made using auxiliary
contacts of the bus disconnectors as well as the circuit breakers.

The internal logic for each function block as well as, the input and outputs, and the
setting parameters with default setting and setting ranges is described in this
document. For application related information, please refer to the application manual.

375
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

13.1.7.2 Logic diagrams

Logic diagrams
The logic diagrams that follow illustrate the main principles of the SESRSYN
function components such as Synchrocheck, Synchronizing, Energizing check and
Voltage selection, and are intended to simplify the understanding of the function.

Synchrocheck
The voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference values are
measured in the IED centrally and are available for the synchrocheck function for
evaluation. By setting the phases used for SESRSYN, with the settings
SelPhaseBus1, SelPhaseBus2, SelPhaseLine1 and SelPhaseLine2, a compensation
is made automatically for the voltage amplitude difference and the phase angle
difference caused if different setting values are selected for both sides of the
breaker. If needed an additional phase angle adjustment can be done for selected
line voltage with the PhaseShift setting.

When the function is set to OperationSC = On, the measuring will start.

The function will compare the bus and line voltage values with the set values for
UHighBusSC and UHighLineSC.

If both sides are higher than the set values, the measured values are compared with
the set values for acceptable frequency, phase angle and voltage difference:
FreqDiffA, FreqDiffM, PhaseDiffA, PhaseDiffM and UDiffSC. If additional phase
angle adjustment is done with the PhaseShift setting, the adjustment factor is
deducted from the line voltage before the comparison of the phase angle values.

The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The
frequencies must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz. The
frequency difference between the bus frequency and the line frequency is measured
and may not exceed the set value FreqDiff.

Two sets of settings for frequency difference and phase angle difference are
available and used for the manual closing and autoreclose functions respectively, as
required.

The inputs BLOCK and BLKSC are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN function and selective block of the Synchrocheck function respectively.
Input TSTSC will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are
connected to a separate test output.

The outputs MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK are activated when the actual measured
conditions match the set conditions for the respective output. The output signal can
be delayed independently for MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK conditions.

A number of outputs are available as information about fulfilled checking

conditions. UOKSC shows that the voltages are high, UDIFFSC, FRDIFFA,
FRDIFFM, PHDIFFA, PHDIFFM shows when the voltage difference, frequency
difference and phase angle difference conditions are out of limits.

376
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Output INADVCLS, inadvertent circuit breaker closing, indicates that the circuit
breaker has been closed at wrong phase angle by mistake. The output is activated,
if the voltage conditions are fulfilled at the same time the phase angle difference
between bus and line is suddenly changed from being larger than 60 degrees to
smaller than 5 degrees.

Note! Similar logic for Manual Synchrocheck.

OperationSC = On
AND TSTAUTSY
AND

TSTSC

InvalidSelection AND
BLKSC
OR AUTOSYOK
BLOCK AND
BLOCK
0-60 s
AND t
tSCA

UDiffSC 50 ms
AND t
UHighBusSC
UOKSC
AND
UHighLineSC
UDIFFSC
1
FRDIFFA
FreqDiffA 1

PHDIFFA
PhaseDiffA 1

UDIFFME
voltageDifferenceValue
FRDIFFME
frequencyDifferenceValue
PHDIFFME
phaseAngleDifferenceValue

32 ms 100 ms
AND t INADVCLS
PhDiff > 60 AND

PhDiff < 5

IEC07000114-5-en.vsd
IEC07000114 V5 EN

Figure 160: Simplified logic diagram for the Auto Synchrocheck function

Synchronizing
When the function is set to OperationSynch = On the measuring will be performed.

The function will compare the values for the bus and line voltage with the set
values for UHighBusSynch and UHighLineSynch, which is a supervision that the
voltages are both live. Also the voltage difference is checked to be smaller than the
set value for UDiffSynch, which is a p.u value of set voltage base values. If both

377
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

sides are higher than the set values and the voltage difference between bus and line
is acceptable, the measured values are compared with the set values for acceptable
frequency FreqDiffMax and FreqDiffMin, rate of change of frequency
FreqRateChange and phase angle, which has to be smaller than the internally
preset value of 15 degrees.

Measured frequencies between the settings for the maximum and minimum
frequency will initiate the measuring and the evaluation of the angle change to
allow operation to be sent in the right moment including the set tBreaker time.
There is a phase angle release internally to block any incorrect closing pulses. At
operation the SYNOK output will be activated with a pulse tClosePulse and the
function resets. The function will also reset if the synchronizing conditions are not
fulfilled within the set tMaxSynch time. This prevents that the function is, by
mistake, maintained in operation for a long time, waiting for conditions to be fulfilled.

The inputs BLOCK and BLKSYNCH are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN function and block of the Synchronizing function respectively.
TSTSYNCH will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are
connected to a separate output.

OperationSynch=On

TSTSYNCH

STARTSYN

InvalidSelection
SYNPROGR
AND
Block AND
S
OR
R
BLKSYNCH

UDiffSynch
50 ms SYNOK
AND
UHighBusSynch AND t

UHighLineSynch OR

FreqDiffMax TSTSYNOK
AND
FreqDiffMin

tClose
FreqRateChange Pulse
AND

fBus&fLine 5Hz tMax

Phase Diff < 15 deg Synch
SYNFAIL
AND
PhaseDiff=closing angle

FreqDiff
Close pulse
in advance
tBreaker

IEC06000636-4-en.vsd
IEC06000636 V4 EN

Figure 161: Simplified logic diagram for the synchronizing function

378
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Energizing check
Voltage values are measured in the IED and are available for evaluation by the
Energizing check function.

The function measures voltages on the busbar and the line to verify whether they
are live or dead. This is done by comparing with the set values UHighBusEnerg
and ULowBusEnerg for bus energizing and UHighLineEnerg and ULowLineEnerg
for line energizing.

The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The
frequencies must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz.

The Energizing direction can be selected individually for the Manual and the
Automatic functions respectively. When the conditions are met the outputs
AUTOENOK and MANENOK respectively will be activated if the fuse
supervision conditions are fulfilled. The output signal can be delayed
independently for MANENOK and AUTOENOK conditions. The Energizing
direction can also be selected by an integer input AENMODE respective
MENMODE, which for example, can be connected to a Binary to Integer function
block (B16I). Integers supplied shall be 1=Off, 2=DLLB, 3=DBLL and 4= Both.
Not connected input will mean that the setting is done from Parameter Setting tool.
The active position can be read on outputs MODEAEN resp MODEMEN. The
modes are 0=OFF, 1=DLLB, 2=DBLL and 3=Both.

The inputs BLOCK and BLKENERG are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN function respective block of the Energizing check function.
TSTENERG will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are
connected to a separate test output.

379
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

manEnergOpenBays
MANENOK
OR

TSTENERG

BLKENERG
OR
BLOCK

selectedFuseOK

UHighBusEnerg
DLLB tManEnerg
AND
OR t
AND
OR
ULowLineEnerg AND

ManEnerg BOTH

ULowBusEnerg
DBLL
AND

UHighLineEnerg

TSTENOK
ManEnergDBDL AND AND

UMaxEnerg
fBus and fLine 5 Hz

IEC14000031-1-en.vsd
IEC14000031 V1 EN

Figure 162: Manual energizing

TSTENERG

BLKENERG
OR
BLOCK

selectedFuseOK

UHighBusEnerg
DLLB tAutoEnerg
AND
OR t
AND OR
AUTOENOK
ULowLineEnerg AND

AutoEnerg BOTH

ULowBusEnerg
DBLL
AND

UHighLineEnerg

TSTENOK
UMaxEnerg AND

fBus and fLine 5 Hz

IEC14000030-1-en.vsd
IEC14000030 V1 EN

Figure 163: Automatic energizing

380
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

BLKENERG
BLOCK OR manEnergOpenBays
AND

ManEnerg

1 bus CB
CBConfig AND

B1QOPEN
LN1QOPEN AND
OR
B1QCLD
B2QOPEN
AND

LN2QOPEN

1 bus alt. CB AND OR

AND
OR

B2QCLD
AND

Tie CB
AND
AND
OR

AND

IEC14000032-1-en.vsd
IEC14000032 V1 EN

Figure 164: Open bays

Fuse failure supervision

External fuse failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are
connected to binary inputs that are configured to the inputs of SESRSYN function
in the IED. Alternatively, the internal signals from fuse failure supervision can be
used when available. There are two alternative connection possibilities. Inputs
labelled OK must be connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage
circuit is healthy. Inputs labelled FF must be connected if the available contact
indicates that the voltage circuit is faulty.

The UB1OK/UB2OK and UB1FF/UB2FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage
and the ULN1OK/ULN2OK and ULN1FF/ULN2FF inputs are related to the line
voltage. Configure them to the binary input or function outputs that indicate the
status of the external fuse failure of the busbar and line voltages. In the event of a
fuse failure, the energizing check function is blocked. The synchronizing and the
synchrocheck function requires full voltage on both sides, thus no blocking at fuse
failure is needed.

Voltage selection
The voltage selection module including supervision of included voltage
transformers for the different arrangements is a basic part of the SESRSYN
function and determines the voltages fed to the Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and

381
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Energizing check functions. This includes the selection of the appropriate Line and
Bus voltages and MCB supervision.

The voltage selection type to be used is set with the parameter CBConfig.

If No voltage sel. is set the voltages used will be U-Line1 and U-Bus1. This setting
is also used in the case when external voltage selection is provided. Fuse failure
supervision for the used inputs must also be connected.

The voltage selection function, selected voltages, and fuse conditions are used for
the Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and Energizing check inputs.

For the disconnector positions it is advisable to use (NO) a and (NC) b type
contacts to supply Disconnector Open and Closed positions but, it is also possible
to use an inverter for one of the positions.

If breaker or disconnector positions not are available for deciding if energizing is

allowed, it is considered to be allowed to manually energize. This is only allowed
for manual energizing in 1 breaker and Tie breaker arrangements. Manual
energization of a completely open diameter in 1 1/2 CB switchgear is allowed by
internal logic.

Voltage selection for a single circuit breaker with double busbars

The setting CBConfig selected for Double Bus activates the voltage selection for
single CB and double busbars. This function uses the binary input from the
disconnectors auxiliary contacts B1QOPEN-B1QCLD for Bus 1, and B2QOPEN-
B2QCLD for Bus 2 to select between bus 1 and bus 2 voltages. If the disconnector
connected to bus 1 is closed and the disconnector connected to bus 2 is opened the
bus 1 voltage is used. All other combinations use the bus 2 voltage. The outputs
B1SEL and B2SEL respectively indicate the selected Bus voltage.

The function checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2 and line voltage
transformers. Inputs UB1OK-UB1FF supervise the MCB for Bus 1 and UB2OK-
UB2FF supervises the MCB for Bus 2. ULN1OK and ULN1FF supervises the
MCB for the Line voltage transformer. The inputs fail (FF) or healthy (OK) can
alternatively be used dependent on the available signal. If a VT failure is detected
in the selected voltage source an output signal USELFAIL is set. This output signal
is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a VT failure. This output as well as
the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK. The function logic
diagram is shown in figure 165.

382
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

B1QOPEN
B1SEL
B1QCLD AND

B2QOPEN B2SEL
AND
1
B2QCLD
invalidSelection
AND

bus1Voltage busVoltage

bus2Voltage

UB1OK AND
UB1FF OR
OR selectedFuseOK
AND
UB2OK AND
UB2FF OR USELFAIL
AND

ULN1OK
ULN1FF OR

BLOCK

en05000779-2.vsd
IEC05000779 V2 EN

Figure 165: Logic diagram for the voltage selection function of a single circuit breaker with double busbars

Voltage selection for a 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangement

Note that with 1 breaker schemes three Synchrocheck functions must be used for
the complete diameter. Below, the scheme for one Bus breaker and the Tie breaker
is described.

With the setting parameter CBConfig the selection of actual CB location in the 1
1/2 circuit breaker switchgear is done. The settings are: 1 1/2 Bus CB, 1 1/2 alt.
Bus CB or Tie CB.

This voltage selection function uses the binary inputs from the disconnectors and
circuit breakers auxiliary contacts to select the right voltage for the SESRSYN
function. For the bus circuit breaker one side of the circuit breaker is connected to
the busbar and the other side is connected either to line 1, line 2 or the other busbar
depending on the best selection of voltage circuit.

Inputs LN1QOPEN-LN1QCLD, B1QOPEN-B1QCLD, B2QOPEN-B2QCLD,

LN2QOPEN-LN2QCLD are inputs for the position of the Line disconnectors
respectively the Bus and Tie breakers. The outputs LN1SEL, LN2SEL and B2SEL

383
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

will give indication of the selected Line voltage as a reference to the fixed Bus 1
voltage, which indicates B1SEL.

The fuse supervision is connected to ULN1OK-ULN1FF, ULN2OK-ULN2FF and

with alternative Healthy or Failing fuse signals depending on what is available
from each fuse (MCB).

The tie circuit breaker is connected either to bus 1 or line 1 voltage on one side and
the other side is connected either to bus 2 or line 2 voltage. Four different output
combinations are possible, bus to bus, bus to line, line to bus and line to line.

The line 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is closed.

The bus 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is open and the bus 1
circuit breaker is closed.
The line 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is closed.
The bus 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is open and the bus 2
circuit breaker is closed.

The function also checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2, line 1 and line 2.
If a VT failure is detected in the selected voltage an output signal USELFAIL is
set. This output signal is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a MCB trip.
This output as well as the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK.
The function block diagram for the voltage selection of a bus circuit breaker is
shown in figure 166 and for the tie circuit breaker in figure 167.

384
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

LN1QOPEN
AND
LN1SEL
LN1QCLD

B1QOPEN
LN2SEL
B1QCLD AND AND

OR
B2SEL
LN2QOPEN
AND invalidSelection
LN2QCLD AND
AND
B2QOPEN
B2QCLD AND

line1Voltage lineVoltage

line2Voltage

bus2Voltage

UB1OK
UB1FF OR

OR selectedFuseOK
UB2OK AND
AND
UB2FF OR

USELFAIL
ULN1OK AND
AND
ULN1FF OR

ULN2OK
AND
ULN2FF OR

BLOCK

en05000780-2.vsd

IEC05000780 V2 EN

Figure 166: Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for a bus circuit breaker in a 1 1/2
breaker arrangement

385
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

LN1QOPEN
AND
LN1SEL
LN1QCLD
B1SEL
1

B1QOPEN AND
AND
B1QCLD AND

line1Voltage busVoltage

bus1Voltage
LN2QOPEN
LN2SEL
LN2QCLD AND
B2SEL
1
invalidSelection
OR
B2QOPEN AND
AND
B2QCLD AND

line2Voltage lineVoltage

bus2Voltage

UB1OK AND
UB1FF OR

OR selectedFuseOK
UB2OK AND
AND
UB2FF OR

USELFAIL
ULN1OK AND
AND
ULN1FF OR

ULN2OK
AND
ULN2FF OR

BLOCK

en05000781-2.vsd

IEC05000781 V2 EN

Figure 167: Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for the tie circuit breaker in 1 1/2
breaker arrangement.

386
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

13.1.8 Technical data

Table 255: SESRSYN technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Phase shift, jline - jbus (-180 to 180) degrees -

Voltage high limit for (50.0-120.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur at U Ur

synchronizing and 0.5% of U at U > Ur
synchrocheck
Reset ratio, synchrocheck > 95% -
Frequency difference limit (0.003-1.000) Hz 2.5 mHz
between bus and line for
synchrocheck
Phase angle difference limit (5.0-90.0) degrees 2.0 degrees
between bus and line for
synchrocheck
Voltage difference limit (0.02-0.5) p.u 0.5% of Ur
between bus and line for
synchronizing and
synchrocheck
Time delay output for (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
synchrocheck when angle greater
difference between bus and
line jumps from PhaseDiff +
2 degrees to PhaseDiff - 2
degrees
Frequency difference (0.003-0.250) Hz 2.5 mHz
minimum limit for
synchronizing
Frequency difference (0.050-0.500) Hz 2.5 mHz
maximum limit for
synchronizing
Maximum allowed frequency (0.000-0.500) Hz/s 10.0 mHz/s
rate of change
Breaker closing pulse (0.050-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms whichever is
duration greater
tMaxSynch, which resets (0.000-6000.00) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
synchronizing function if no greater
close has been made before
set time
Minimum time to accept (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 35 ms whichever is
synchronizing conditions greater
Voltage high limit for (50.0-120.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur at U Ur
energizing check 0.5% of U at U > Ur

Reset ratio, voltage high limit > 95% -

Voltage low limit for
energizing check
Reset ratio, voltage low limit
Maximum voltage for
energizing
(10.0-80.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur
< 105% -
(50.0-180.0)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur at U Ur
0.5% of U at U > Ur

Table continues on next page

387
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Function Range or value Accuracy

Time delay for energizing (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 100 ms whichever is
check when voltage jumps greater
from 0 to 90% of Urated
Operate time for Min = 15 ms
synchrocheck function when Max = 30 ms
angle difference between
bus and line jumps from
PhaseDiff + 2 degrees to
PhaseDiff - 2 degrees
Operate time for energizing Min = 70 ms
function when voltage jumps Max = 90 ms
from 0 to 90% of Urated

13.2 Autorecloser for 1 phase, 2 phase and/or 3 phase

operation SMBRREC

13.2.1 Identification
Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Autorecloser for 1 phase, 2 phase and/ SMBRREC 79
or 3 phase
O->I

SYMBOL-L V1 EN

13.2.2 Functionality
The autorecloser SMBRREC function provides high-speed and/or delayed auto-
reclosing for single or multi-breaker applications.

Up to five three-phase reclosing attempts can be included by parameter setting. The

first attempt can be single-, two and/or three phase for single phase or multi-phase
faults respectively.

Multiple autoreclosing functions are provided for multi-breaker arrangements. A

priority circuit allows one circuit breaker to close first and the second will only
close if the fault proved to be transient.

Each autoreclosing function is configured to co-operate with the synchrocheck

function.

388
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

13.2.3 Function block

SMBRREC
ON BLOCKED
OFF SETON
BLKON READY
BLKOFF ACTIVE
RESET SUCCL
INHIBIT UNSUCCL
START INPROGR
STARTHS 1PT1
TRSOTF 2PT1
SKIPHS 3PT1
ZONESTEP 3PT2
TR2P 3PT3
TR3P 3PT4
THOLHOLD 3PT5
CBREADY PERMIT1P
CBPOS PREP3P
PLCLOST CLOSECB
SYNC WFMASTER
WAIT COUNT1P
RSTCOUNT COUNT2P
MODEINT COUNT3P1
COUNT3P2
COUNT3P3
COUNT3P4
COUNT3P5
COUNTAR
MODE

IEC06000189-2-en.vsd
IEC06000189 V2 EN

Figure 168: SMBRREC function block

13.2.4 Signals
Table 256: SMBRREC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
ON BOOLEAN 0 Switches the AR On (at ExternalCtrl = On)
OFF BOOLEAN 0 Switches the AR Off (at ExternalCtrl = On)
BLKON BOOLEAN 0 Sets the AR in blocked state
BLKOFF BOOLEAN 0 Releases the AR from the blocked state
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Resets the AR to initial conditions
INHIBIT BOOLEAN 0 Interrupts and inhibits reclosing sequence
START BOOLEAN 0 Reclosing sequence starts by a protection trip
signal
STARTHS BOOLEAN 0 Start HS reclosing without SC: t13PhHS
TRSOTF BOOLEAN 0 Makes AR to continue to shots 2-5 at a trip from
SOTF
SKIPHS BOOLEAN 0 Will skip the high speed shot and continue on
delayed shots
ZONESTEP BOOLEAN 0 Coordination between local AR and down stream
devices
TR2P BOOLEAN 0 Signal to the AR that a two-phase tripping occurred
TR3P BOOLEAN 0 Signal to the AR that a three-phase tripping
occurred
Table continues on next page

389
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Name Type Default Description

THOLHOLD BOOLEAN 0 Hold the AR in wait state
CBREADY BOOLEAN 0 CB must be ready for CO/OCO operation to allow
start / close
CBPOS BOOLEAN 0 Status of the circuit breaker Closed/Open
PLCLOST BOOLEAN 0 Power line carrier or other form of permissive sig
nal lost
SYNC BOOLEAN 0 Synchronizing check fulfilled (for 3Ph attempts)
WAIT BOOLEAN 0 Wait for master (in Multi-breaker arrangements)
RSTCOUNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets all counters
MODEINT INTEGER 0 Integer input used to set the reclosingMode,
alternative to setting

Table 257: SMBRREC Output signals

Name Type Description
BLOCKED BOOLEAN The AR is in blocked state
SETON BOOLEAN The AR operation is switched on, operative
READY BOOLEAN Indicates that the AR function is ready for a new
sequence
ACTIVE BOOLEAN Reclosing sequence in progress
SUCCL BOOLEAN Activated if CB closes during the time tUnsucCl
UNSUCCL BOOLEAN Reclosing unsuccessful, signal resets after the
reclaim time
INPROGR BOOLEAN Reclosing shot in progress, activated during open
time
1PT1 BOOLEAN Single-phase reclosing is in progress, shot 1
2PT1 BOOLEAN Two-phase reclosing is in progress, shot 1
3PT1 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 1
3PT2 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 2
3PT3 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 3
3PT4 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 4
3PT5 BOOLEAN Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 5
PERMIT1P BOOLEAN Permit single-phase trip, inverse signal to PREP3P
PREP3P BOOLEAN Prepare three-phase trip, control of the next trip
operation
CLOSECB BOOLEAN Closing command for CB
WFMASTER BOOLEAN Signal to Slave issued by Master for sequential
reclosing
COUNT1P INTEGER Counting the number of single-phase reclosing
shots
COUNT2P INTEGER Counting the number of two-phase reclosing shots
COUNT3P1 INTEGER Counting the number of three-phase reclosing
shot 1
Table continues on next page

390
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Name Type Description

COUNT3P2 INTEGER Counting the number of three-phase reclosing
shot 2
COUNT3P3 INTEGER Counting the number of three-phase reclosing
shot 3
COUNT3P4 INTEGER Counting the number of three-phase reclosing
shot 4
COUNT3P5 INTEGER Counting the number of three-phase reclosing
shot 5
COUNTAR INTEGER Counting total number of reclosing shots
MODE INTEGER Integer output for reclosing mode

13.2.5 Settings
Table 258: SMBRREC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
ExternalCtrl Off - - Off To be set On if AR is to be used with
On external control; Off / On
ARMode 3 phase - - 1/2/3ph The AR mode selection e.g. 3ph, 1/3ph
1/2/3ph
1/2ph
1ph+1*2ph
1/2ph+1*3ph
1ph+1*2/3ph
t1 1Ph 0.000 - 120.000 s 0.001 1.000 Open time for shot 1, single-phase
t1 3Ph 0.000 - 120.000 s 0.001 6.000 Open time for shot 1, delayed reclosing
3ph
t1 3PhHS 0.000 - 120.000 s 0.001 0.400 Open time for shot 1, high speed
reclosing 3ph
tReclaim 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 60.00 Duration of the reclaim time
tSync 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximum wait time for synchrocheck OK
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Maximum trip pulse duration
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Duration of the circuit breaker closing
pulse
tCBClosedMin 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 5.00 Min time that CB must be closed before
new sequence allows
tUnsucCl 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Wait time for CB before indicating
Unsuccessful/Successful
Priority None - - None Priority selection between adjacent
Low terminals None/Low/High
High
tWaitForMaster 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 60.00 Maximum wait time for release from
Master

391
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Table 259: SMBRREC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
NoOfShots 1 - - 1 Max number of reclosing shots 1-5
2
3
4
5
StartByCBOpen Off - - Off To be set ON if AR is to be started by
On CB open position
CBAuxContType NormClosed - - NormOpen Select the CB aux contact type NC/NO
NormOpen for CBPOS input
CBReadyType CO - - CO Select type of circuit breaker ready
OCO signal CO/OCO
t1 2Ph 0.000 - 120.000 s 0.001 1.000 Open time for shot 1, two-phase
t2 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Open time for shot 2, three-phase
t3 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Open time for shot 3, three-phase
t4 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Open time for shot 4, three-phase
t5 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 s 0.01 30.00 Open time for shot 5, three-phase
Extended t1 Off - - Off Extended open time at loss of
On permissive channel Off/On
tExtended t1 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.500 3Ph Dead time is extended with this
value at loss of perm ch
tInhibit 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Inhibit reclosing reset time
CutPulse Off - - Off Shorten closing pulse at a new trip Off/On
On
Follow CB Off - - Off Advance to next shot if CB has been
On closed during dead time
AutoCont Off - - Off Continue with next reclosing-shot if
On breaker did not close
tAutoContWait 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Wait time after close command before
proceeding to next shot
UnsucClByCBChk NoCBCheck - - NoCBCheck Unsuccessful closing signal obtained by
CB check checking CB position
BlockByUnsucCl Off - - Off Block AR at unsuccessful reclosing
On
ZoneSeqCoord Off - - Off Coordination of down stream devices to
On local prot units AR

13.2.6 Operation principle

13.2.6.1 Logic Diagrams

The logic diagrams below illustrate the principles applicable in the understanding
of the functionality.

392
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

13.2.6.2 Auto-reclosing operation Off and On

Operation of the automatic reclosing can be set to Off or On via the setting
parameters and through external control. With the setting Operation = On, the
function is activated while with the setting Operation = Off the function is
deactivated. With the setting Operation = On and ExternalCtrl = On , the activation/
deactivation is made by input signal pulses to the inputs ON/OFF, for example,
from a control system.

When the function is set On and is operative the output SETON is activated (high).
If the input conditions CBPOS and CBREADY also are fulfilled, the automatic
recloser is prepared to start the reclosing cycle and the output signal READY on
the SMBRREC function block is activated (high).

13.2.6.3 Auto-reclosing mode selection

The Auto-reclosing mode is selected with setting ARMode = 3phase, 1/2/3ph,

1/2ph, 1ph+1*2ph, 1/2ph+1*3ph, 1ph+1*2/3ph.

As an alternative to setting the mode can be selected by connecting an integer, for

example from function block B16I to input MODEINT.

Following integers shall be used: 1=3phase, 2=1/2/3ph, 3=1/2ph, 4=1ph+1*2ph,

5=1/2ph+1*3ph or 6=1ph+1*2/3ph.

When a valid integer is connected to the input MODEINT the selected ARMode
setting will be invalid and the MODEINT input value will be used instead. The
selected mode is reported as an integer on the output MODE.

13.2.6.4 Start auto-reclosing and conditions for start of a reclosing cycle

The usual way to start a reclosing cycle, or sequence, is to start it when a selective
line protection tripping has occurred, by applying a signal to the START input.
Activation of the START input only will start the 3 phase open timer. It should be
necessary to adjust three-phase auto-reclosing open time, (dead time) for different
power system configurations or during tripping at different protection stages. The
input STARTHS (start high-speed reclosing) can also be used to start a 3 phase
dead time without synchro check condition..

To start a new auto-reclosing cycle, a number of conditions of input signals need to

be met. The inputs are:

CBREADY: CB ready for a reclosing cycle, for example, charged operating gear
CBPOS: to ensure that the CB was closed when the line fault occurred and
start was applied
No BLKON or INHIBIT signal shall be present.

After the start has been accepted, it is latched in and an internal signal Started is
set. It can be interrupted by a signal to the INHIBIT input.

393
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

To start auto-reclosing by CB position Open instead of from protection trip signals,

one has to configure the CB Open position signal to inputs CBPOS and START
and set a parameter StartByCBOpen = On and CBAuxContType = NormClosed
(normally closed). One also has to configure and connect signals from manual trip
commands to input INHIBIT.

The logic for switching the auto-recloser On/Off and the starting of the reclosing is
shown in figure 169. The following should be considered:

Setting Operation can be set to Off or On. ExternalCtrl offers the possibility of
switching by external signals to inputs ON and OFF.
SMBRREC is normally started by selective tripping. It is either a Zone 1 or
Communication aided trip, or a general trip. If the general trip is used the
function must be blocked from all back-up tripping connected to INHIBIT. In
both alternatives the breaker failure function must be connected to inhibit the
function. START makes a first attempt with synchrocheck, STARTHS makes
its first attempt without synchrocheck. TRSOTF starts shots 2-5.
Circuit breaker checks that the breaker was closed for a time before the
starting occurred and that the CB has sufficient stored energy to perform an auto-
reclosing sequence and is connected to inputs CBPOS and CBREADY.

Operation:On

AND
External Ctrl: On

OR
ON AND SETON
S
OR
OFF AND R

autoInitiate

initiate
OR
Additional conditions
TRSOTF AND
CBReady
start
120 ms
CBREADY AND
t AND
AND S
tCBClosedMin
CBPOS
t R
NC AND
CB Closed
CBAuxContType OR
Blocking conditions AND
NO AND READY
AND
OR
Inhibit conditions

count 0

IEC05000782-3-en.vsd

IEC05000782 V3 EN

Figure 169: Auto-reclosing Off/On and start

13.2.6.5 Control of the auto-reclosing open time for shot 1

It is possible to use up to four different time settings for the first shot, and one
extension time. There are separate settings for single- , two- and three-phase auto-
reclosing open times, t1 1Ph, t1 2Ph, t1 3Ph. If only the START input signal is

394
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

applied, and an auto-reclosing program with single-phase reclosing is selected, the

auto-reclosing open time t1 1Ph will be used. If one of the inputs TR2P or TR3P is
activated in connection with the input START, the auto-reclosing open time for two-
phase or three-phase reclosing is used. There is also a separate time setting facility
for three-phase high-speed auto-reclosing, t1 3PhHS available for use when
required. It is activated by input STARTHS.

An auto-reclosing open time extension delay, tExtended t1, can be added to the
normal shot 1 delay. It is intended to come into use if the communication channel
for permissive line protection is lost. In a case like this there can be a significant
time difference in fault clearance at the two line ends. A longer auto-reclosing open
time can then be useful. This extension time is controlled by setting parameter
Extended t1 = On and the input PLCLOST.

13.2.6.6 Long trip signal

In normal circumstances the trip command resets quickly due to fault clearing. The
user can set a maximum trip pulse duration tTrip. When trip signals are longer, the
auto-reclosing open time is extended by tExtended t1. If Extended t1 = Off, a long
trip signal interrupts the reclosing sequence in the same way as a signal to input
INHIBIT.

Extended t1: On

PLCLOST Extend t1
initiate AND OR AND
AND
tTrip
t
AND
start

long duration
AND
(inhibit SMBRREC)

IEC05000783.vsd

IEC05000783 V3 EN

Figure 170: Control of extended auto-reclosing open time and long trip pulse detection

Reclosing checks and the reclaim timer

When dead time has elapsed during the auto-reclosing procedure certain conditions
must be fulfilled before the CB closing command is issued. To achieve this, signals
are exchanged between program modules to check that these conditions are met. In

395
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

three-phase reclosing a synchronizing and/or energizing check can be used. It is

possible to use a synchrocheck function in the same physical device or an external
one. The release signal is configured by connecting to the auto-reclosing function
input SYNC. If reclosing without checking is preferred the SYNC input can be set
to TRUE (set high). At confirmation from the synchro-check, or if the reclosing is
of single-phase or two-phase type, the signal passes on. At three-phase high-speed
reclosing started by STARTHS, synchronization is not checked, and the state of the
SYNC input is disregarded.

By choosing CBReadyType = CO (CB ready for a Close-Open sequence) the

readiness of the circuit breaker is also checked before issuing the CB closing
command. If the CB has a readiness contact of type CBReadyType = OCO (CB
ready for an Open-Close-Open sequence) this condition may not be fulfilled during
the dead time and at the moment of reclosure. The Open-Close-Open condition was
however checked at the start of the reclosing cycle and it is then likely that the CB
is prepared for a Close-Open sequence.

The synchro-check or energizing check must be fulfilled within a set time interval,
tSync. If it is not, or if other conditions are not met, the reclosing is interrupted and
blocked.

The reclaim timer defines a time from the issue of the reclosing command, after
which the reclosing function resets. Should a new trip occur during this time, it is
treated as a continuation of the first fault. The reclaim timer is started when the CB
closing command is given.

A number of outputs for Autoreclosing state control keeps track of the actual state
in the reclosing sequence.

396
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

t1 1Ph
"SMBRREC Open time" timers
t
1P2PTO
From logic for t1 2Ph OR
reclosing t
programs
1P2PTO t1 3Ph HS
t
3PHSTO
3PHSTO
3PT1TO
t1 3Ph
3PT2TO t
3PT1TO
3PT3TO OR
AND
3PT4TO OR Pulse AR
3PT5TO AND

SYNC
initiate AND Blocking out
CBReady AND OR

SMRREC State
tSync Control
AND t COUNTER
0 Shot 0
CL Shot 1
1
2 Shot 2
3 Shot 3
Pulse (above) tReclaim
AND t R 4 Shot 4
OR Shot 5
5
TR2P LOGIC
TR3P reclosing Reclaim Timer On
1PT1
programs
start 2PT1
initiate 3PHS
INPROGR
Shot 0 3PT1 OR
Shot 1 3PT2
Shot 2
Shot 3 3PT3
Shot 4
Shot 5 3PT4
PERMIT1P
3PT5
PREP3P
1
Blocking out tInhibit
t
OR
Inhibit
Long duration OR
INHIBIT Reclaim Timer On
IEC05000784.vsd

IEC05000784 V3 EN

Figure 171: Reclosing Reclaim and Inhibit timers

Pulsing of the CB closing command

The CB closing command, CLOSECB is a pulse with a duration set by parameter
tPulse. For circuit-breakers without anti-pumping function, the close pulse cutting

397
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

described below can be used. This is done by selecting the parameter

CutPulse=On. In case of a new AR start pulse, the closing command pulse is cut
(interrupted). The minimum duration of the pulse is always 50 ms. See figure 172

When a reclosing command is issued, the appropriate reclosing operation counter is

incremented. There is a counter for each type of reclosing and one for the total
number of reclosing commands issued.

tTrip
pulse tPulse
**) AND CLOSECB
OR
initiate
50 ms CloseCB

1PT1 AND COUNT1P

counter

2PT1 AND
counter
COUNT2P

3PT1 AND COUNT3P1

counter

3PT2 AND COUNT3P2

counter

3PT3 AND COUNT3P3

counter

3PT4 AND COUNT3P4

counter

3PT5 AND COUNT3P5

counter

counter COUNTAR
RSTCOUNT

**) Only if "CutPulse" = On

IEC05000785.vsd

IEC05000785 V2 EN

Figure 172: Pulsing of closing command and driving the operation counters

Transient fault
After the reclosing command the reclaim timer tReclaim starts running for the set
time. If no tripping occurs within this time, the auto-reclosing will reset.

Permanent fault and reclosing unsuccessful signal

If a new trip occurs after the CB closing command, and number of set reclosing
shot have been done, a new input signal connected to START or TRSOTF appears,
the output UNSUCCL (unsuccessful closing) is set high. The timers for the first

398
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

shot can no longer be started. Depending on the setting for the number of reclosing
shots, further shots may be made or the reclosing sequence will be ended. After the
reclaim time has elapsed, the auto-reclosing function resets but the CB remains
open. The CB closed data at the CBPOS input will be missing. Because of this, the
reclosing function will not be ready for a new reclosing cycle.

Normally the signal UNSUCCL appears when a new trip and start is received after
the last reclosing shot has been made and the auto-reclosing function is blocked.
The signal resets once the reclaim time has elapsed. The unsuccessful signal can
also be made to depend on CB position input. The parameter UnsucClByCBChk
should then be set to CBCheck, and a timer tUnsucCl should also be set. If the CB
does not respond to the closing command and does not close, but remains open, the
output UNSUCCL is set high after time tUnsucCl.

initiate
block start AND
OR UNSUCCL
AND S

shot 0
R

UnsucClByCBchk = CBcheck

Pulse OR tUnsucCl
AND
AND t
CBclosed

IEC05000786_High.vsd

IEC05000786 V2 EN

Figure 173: Issue of signal UNSUCCL, unsuccessful reclosing

Automatic continuation of the reclosing sequence

The auto-reclosing function can be programmed to proceed to the following
reclosing shots (if selected) even if the start signals are not received from the
protection functions, but the breaker is still not closed. This is done by setting
parameter AutoCont = On and tAutoContWait to the required delay for the function
to proceed without a new start.

399
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

tAutoContWait
t

AND

CloseCB
AND
S Q

AND

CBClosed
OR

initiate

IEC05000787.vsd
IEC05000787 V2 EN

Figure 174: Automatic proceeding of shot 2 to 5

Start of reclosing from CB open information

If a user wants to apply starting of auto-reclosing from CB open position instead of
from protection trip signals, the function offers such a possibility. This starting
mode is selected by a setting parameter StartByCBOpen = On. One needs then to
block reclosing at all manual trip operations. Typically, one also set
CBAuxContType = NormClosed and connect a CB auxiliary contact of type NC
(normally closed) to inputs CBPOS and START. When the signal changes from
CB closed to CB open an auto-reclosing start pulse of limited length is generated
and latched in the function, subject to the usual checks. Then the reclosing
sequence continues as usual. One needs to connect signals from manual tripping
and other functions, which shall prevent reclosing, to the input INHIBIT.

400
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

StartByCBOpen = On
1

START AND

STARTHS AND
autoiniate
1
100 ms
AND

100 ms
AND

IEC05000788.vsd
IEC05000788 V2 EN

Figure 175: Pulsing of the start inputs

13.2.6.7 Time sequence diagrams

Some examples of the timing of internal and external signals at typical transient
and permanent faults are shown below in figures 176 to 179.

Fault
CB POS
Closed Open Closed
CB READY CO)

START (Trip)
SYNC
tReclaim
READY

INPROG

1PT1

ACTIVE

CLOSE CB t1 1Ph tPulse

PREP3P

SUCCL

Time

en04000196-3-en.vsd
IEC04000196 V3 EN

Figure 176: Transient single-phase fault. Single -phase reclosing

401
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Fault
CB POS Open
Closed Open C C
CB READY (CO)

START (Trip)

TR3P
SYNC

READY

INPROGR

3PT1 t1 3Ph

3PT2 t2 3Ph

ACTIVE tReclaim

CLOSE CB tPulse tPulse

PREP3P

UNSUCCL
Time

en04000197-
2.vsd
IEC04000197 V2 EN

Figure 177: Permanent fault. Three-phase trip. Two-shot reclosing

402
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Fault
CBCLOSED
CBREADY(CO)

START

TR3P
SYNC

READY
INPROGR

1PT1

3PT1

3PT2
CLOSE CB t1s

P3P

UNSUC CL tReclaim

en04000198-2.vsd
IEC04000198 V2 EN

Figure 178: Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1/2/3ph, single-phase

single-shot reclosing

403
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Fault
CBCLOSED
CBREADY(CO)

START

TR3P

SYNC

READY

INPROGR

1PT1

3PT1

3PT2
t2
CLOSE CB t1s

P3P

UNSUC CL tReclaim

en04000199-
2.vsd
IEC04000199 V2 EN

Figure 179: Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1ph + 3ph or 1/2ph + 3ph,
two-shot reclosing

13.2.7 Technical data

Table 260: SMBRREC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of autoreclosing shots 1-5 -
Autoreclosing open time:
shot 1 - t1 1Ph (0.000-120.000) s 0.2% or 35 ms
shot 1 - t1 2Ph whichever is greater
shot 1 - t1 3PhHS
shot 1 - t1 3Ph
shot 2 - t2 3Ph (0.00-6000.00) s 0.2% or 35 ms
shot 3 - t3 3Ph whichever is greater
shot 4 - t4 3Ph
shot 5 - t5 3Ph
Extended autorecloser open time (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 35 ms
whichever is greater
Minimum time CB must be closed before AR (0.00-6000.00) s 0.2% or 35 ms
becomes ready for autoreclosing cycle whichever is greater
Maximum operate pulse duration (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms
whichever is greater
Reclaim time (0.00-6000.00) s 0.2% or 15 ms
whichever is greater
Circuit breaker closing pulse length (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms
whichever is greater
Wait for master release (0.00-6000.00) s 0.2% or 15 ms
whichever is greater
Table continues on next page

404
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Function Range or value Accuracy

Inhibit reset time (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 45 ms
whichever is greater
Autorecloser maximum wait time for sync (0.00-6000.00) s 0.2% or 45 ms
whichever is greater
CB check time before unsuccessful (0.00-6000.00) s 0.2% or 45 ms
whichever is greater
Wait time after close command before (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 45 ms
proceeding to next shot whichever is greater

13.3 Interlocking

13.3.1 Functionality
The interlocking functionality blocks the possibility to operate high-voltage
switching devices, for instance when a disconnector is under load, in order to
prevent material damage and/or accidental human injury.

Each control IED has interlocking functions for different switchyard arrangements,
each handling the interlocking of one bay. The interlocking functionality in each
IED is not dependent on any central function. For the station-wide interlocking, the
IEDs communicate via the station bus or by using hard wired binary inputs/outputs.

The interlocking conditions depend on the circuit configuration and status of the
system at any given time.

13.3.2 Operation principle

The interlocking function consists of software modules located in each control
IED. The function is distributed and not dependent on any central function.
Communication between modules in different bays is performed via the station bus.

The reservation function (see section "Functionality") is used to ensure that HV

apparatuses that might affect the interlock are blocked during the time gap, which
arises between position updates. This can be done by means of the communication
system, reserving all HV apparatuses that might influence the interlocking
condition of the intended operation. The reservation is maintained until the
operation is performed.

After the selection and reservation of an apparatus, the function has complete data
on the status of all apparatuses in the switchyard that are affected by the selection.
Other operators cannot interfere with the reserved apparatus or the status of
switching devices that may affect it.

The open or closed positions of the HV apparatuses are inputs to software modules
distributed in the control IEDs. Each module contains the interlocking logic for a
bay. The interlocking logic in a module is different, depending on the bay function

405
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

and the switchyard arrangements, that is, double-breaker or 1 1/2 breaker bays have
different modules. Specific interlocking conditions and connections between
standard interlocking modules are performed with an engineering tool. Bay-level
interlocking signals can include the following kind of information:

Positions of HV apparatuses (sometimes per phase)

Valid positions (if evaluated in the control module)
External release (to add special conditions for release)
Line voltage (to block operation of line earthing switch)
Output signals to release the HV apparatus

The interlocking module is connected to the surrounding functions within a bay as

shown in figure 180.

Apparatus control
Interlocking
modules
modules in
SCILO SCSWI
other bays SXSWI

Apparatus control
modules
Interlocking SCILO SCSWI SXCBR
module

Apparatus control
modules
en04000526.vsd SCILO SCSWI SXSWI

IEC04000526 V1 EN

Figure 180: Interlocking module on bay level

Bays communicate via the station bus and can convey information regarding the
following:

Unearthed busbars
Busbars connected together
Other bays connected to a busbar
Received data from other bays is valid

Figure 181 illustrates the data exchange principle.

406
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Station bus

Bay 1 Bay n Bus coupler

Disc QB1 and QB2 closed Disc QB1 and QB2 closed WA1 unearthed
WA1 unearthed
WA1 and WA2 interconn

...
WA1 not earthed WA1 not earthed
WA2 not earthed WA2 not earthed WA1 and WA2 interconn
WA1 and WA2 interconn WA1 and WA2 interconn in other bay

..
WA1

WA2
QB1 QB2 QB1 QB2 QB1 QB2 QC1 QC2

QA1 QA1 QA1

QB9 QB9

en05000494.vsd
IEC05000494 V1 EN

Figure 181: Data exchange between interlocking modules

When invalid data such as intermediate position, loss of a control IED, or input
board error are used as conditions for the interlocking condition in a bay, a release
for execution of the function will not be given.

On the local HMI an override function exists, which can be used to bypass the
interlocking function in cases where not all the data required for the condition is valid.

For all interlocking modules these general rules apply:

The interlocking conditions for opening or closing of disconnectors and

earthing switches are always identical.
Earthing switches on the line feeder end, for example, rapid earthing switches,
are normally interlocked only with reference to the conditions in the bay where
they are located, not with reference to switches on the other side of the line. So
a line voltage indication may be included into line interlocking modules. If
there is no line voltage supervision within the bay, then the appropriate inputs
must be set to no voltage, and the operator must consider this when operating.
Earthing switches can only be operated on isolated sections for example,
without load/voltage. Circuit breaker contacts cannot be used to isolate a
section, that is, the status of the circuit breaker is irrelevant as far as the
earthing switch operation is concerned.
Disconnectors cannot break power current or connect different voltage
systems. Disconnectors in series with a circuit breaker can only be operated if
the circuit breaker is open, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel with other
closed connections. Other disconnectors can be operated if one side is
completely isolated, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel to other closed
connections, or if they are earthed on both sides.
Circuit breaker closing is only interlocked against running disconnectors in its
bay or additionally in a transformer bay against the disconnectors and earthing

407
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

switch on the other side of the transformer, if there is no disconnector between

CB and transformer.
Circuit breaker opening is only interlocked in a bus-coupler bay, if a bus bar
transfer is in progress.

To make the implementation of the interlocking function easier, a number of

standardized and tested software interlocking modules containing logic for the
interlocking conditions are available:

Line for double and transfer busbars, ABC_LINE

Bus for double and transfer busbars, ABC_BC
Transformer bay for double busbars, AB_TRAFO
Bus-section breaker for double busbars, A1A2_BS
Bus-section disconnector for double busbars, A1A2_DC
Busbar earthing switch, BB_ES
Double CB Bay, DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE, DB_BUS_B
1 1/2-CB diameter, BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN, BH_LINE_B

The interlocking conditions can be altered, to meet the customer specific

requirements, by adding configurable logic by means of the graphical configuration
tool PCM600. The inputs Qx_EXy on the interlocking modules are used to add
these specific conditions.

The input signals EXDU_xx shall be set to true if there is no transmission error at
the transfer of information from other bays. Required signals with designations
ending in TR are intended for transfer to other bays.

13.3.3 Logical node for interlocking SCILO

13.3.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Logical node for interlocking SCILO - 3

13.3.3.2 Functionality

The Logical node for interlocking SCILO function is used to enable a switching
operation if the interlocking conditions permit. SCILO function itself does not
provide any interlocking functionality. The interlocking conditions are generated in
separate function blocks containing the interlocking logic.

408
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

13.3.3.3 Function block

SCILO
POSOPEN EN_OPEN
POSCLOSE EN_CLOSE
OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN

IEC05000359-2-en.vsd
IEC05000359 V2 EN

Figure 182: SCILO function block

13.3.3.4 Signals
Table 261: SCILO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open position of switch device
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Closed position of switch device
OPEN_EN BOOLEAN 0 Open operation from interlocking logic is enabled
CLOSE_EN BOOLEAN 0 Close operation from interlocking logic is enabled

Table 262: SCILO Output signals

Name Type Description
EN_OPEN BOOLEAN Open operation at closed or interm. or bad pos. is
enabled
EN_CLOSE BOOLEAN Close operation at open or interm. or bad pos. is
enabled

13.3.3.5 Logic diagram

The function contains logic to enable the open and close commands respectively if
the interlocking conditions are fulfilled. That means also, if the switch has a
defined end position for example, open, then the appropriate enable signal (in this
case EN_OPEN) is false. The enable signals EN_OPEN and EN_CLOSE can be
true at the same time only in the intermediate and bad position state and if they are
enabled by the interlocking function. The position inputs come from the logical
nodes Circuit breaker/Circuit switch (SXCBR/SXSWI) and the enable signals
come from the interlocking logic. The outputs are connected to the logical node
Switch controller (SCSWI). One instance per switching device is needed.

409
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

POSOPEN SCILO
POSCLOSE =1 1
EN_OPEN
&
>1
&

OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN & EN_CLOSE
>1
&
en04000525.vsd

IEC04000525 V1 EN

Figure 183: SCILO function logic diagram

13.3.4 Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES

13.3.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES - 3

13.3.4.2 Functionality

The interlocking for busbar earthing switch (BB_ES) function is used for one
busbar earthing switch on any busbar parts according to figure 184.

QC

en04000504.vsd
IEC04000504 V1 EN

Figure 184: Switchyard layout BB_ES

13.3.4.3 Function block

BB_ES
QC_OP QCREL
QC_CL QCITL
BB_DC_OP BBESOPTR
VP_BB_DC BBESCLTR
EXDU_BB

IEC05000347-2-en.vsd
IEC05000347 V2 EN

Figure 185: BB_ES function block

410
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

13.3.4.4 Logic diagram

BB_ES
VP_BB_DC QCREL
BB_DC_OP QCITL
EXDU_BB & 1

QC_OP BBESOPTR
QC_CL BBESCLTR
en04000546.vsd

IEC04000546 V1 EN

13.3.4.5 Signals
Table 263: BB_ES Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QC_OP BOOLEAN 0 Busbar earthing switch QC is in open position
QC_CL BOOLEAN 0 Busbar earthing switch QC is in closed position
BB_DC_OP BOOLEAN 0 All disconnectors on this busbar part are open
VP_BB_DC BOOLEAN 0 Status for all disconnectors on this busbar part
are valid
EXDU_BB BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays with disc on this
busbar part

Table 264: BB_ES Output signals

Name Type Description
QCREL BOOLEAN Switching of QC is allowed
QCITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC is forbidden
BBESOPTR BOOLEAN QC on this busbar part is in open position
BBESCLTR BOOLEAN QC on this busbar part is in closed position

13.3.5 Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS

13.3.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS - 3

13.3.5.2 Functionality

The interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS) function is used for one bus-
section circuit breaker between section 1 and 2 according to figure 186. The
function can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section circuit
breaker.

411
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)

QC1 QB1 QB2 QC2

QA1

QC3 QC4

en04000516.vsd
A1A2_BS
IEC04000516 V1 EN

Figure 186: Switchyard layout A1A2_BS

13.3.5.3 Function block

A1A2_BS
QA1_OP QA1OPREL
QA1_CL QA1OPITL
QB1_OP QA1CLREL
QB1_CL QA1CLITL
QB2_OP QB1REL
QB2_CL QB1ITL
QC3_OP QB2REL
QC3_CL QB2ITL
QC4_OP QC3REL
QC4_CL QC3ITL
S1QC1_OP QC4REL
S1QC1_CL QC4ITL
S2QC2_OP S1S2OPTR
S2QC2_CL S1S2CLTR
BBTR_OP QB1OPTR
VP_BBTR QB1CLTR
EXDU_12 QB2OPTR
EXDU_ES QB2CLTR
QA1O_EX1 VPS1S2TR
QA1O_EX2 VPQB1TR
QA1O_EX3 VPQB2TR
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2

IEC05000348-2-en.vsd
IEC05000348 V2 EN

Figure 187: A1A2_BS function block

412
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

13.3.5.4 Logic diagram

A1A2_BS
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC4_OP
QC4_CL =1 VPQC4
S1QC1_OP
S1QC1_CL =1 VPS1QC1
S2QC2_OP
S2QC2_CL =1 VPS2QC2
VPQB1
QB1_OP QA1OPREL
& >1
QA1O_EX1 QA1OPITL
1
VPQB2
QB2_OP
&
QA1O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP
&
EXDU_12
QA1O_EX3

VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB2 & QA1CLITL
1
VPQA1
VPQC3 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC4 QB1ITL
1
VPS1QC1
QA1_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
S1QC1_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1

VPQC3
VPS1QC1
&
QC3_CL
S1QC1_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2

en04000542.vsd

IEC04000542 V1 EN

413
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

VPQA1
VPQC3 QB2REL
VPQC4 & >1
QB2ITL
VPS2QC2 1
QA1_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
S2QC2_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQC4
VPS2QC2
&
QC4_CL
S2QC2_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2

VPQB1 QC3REL
VPQB2 QC3ITL
QB1_OP & 1
QC4REL
QB2_OP
QC4ITL
1

QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR

QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
QB1_OP S1S2OPTR
QB2_OP >1 S1S2CLTR
QA1_OP 1
VPQB1
VPS1S2TR
VPQB2 &
VPQA1
en04000543.vsd

IEC04000543 V1 EN

13.3.5.5 Signals
Table 265: A1A2_BS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QC4_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in open position
QC4_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in closed position
S1QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on bus section 1 is in open position
S1QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on bus section 1 is in closed position
S2QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 on bus section 2 is in open position
S2QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 on bus section 2 is in closed position
BBTR_OP BOOLEAN 0 No busbar transfer is in progress
VP_BBTR BOOLEAN 0 Status are valid for app. involved in the busbar
transfer
Table continues on next page

414
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Name Type Default Description

EXDU_12 BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay connected to
busbar 1 and 2
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays containing earth. sw.
QC1 or QC2
QA1O_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QA1O_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QA1O_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2

Table 266: A1A2_BS Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1OPREL BOOLEAN Opening of QA1 is allowed
QA1OPITL BOOLEAN Opening of QA1 is forbidden
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QC3REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is allowed
QC3ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is forbidden
QC4REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC4 is allowed
QC4ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC4 is forbidden
S1S2OPTR BOOLEAN No bus section connection between bus section 1
and 2
S1S2CLTR BOOLEAN Bus coupler connection between bus section 1
and 2 exists
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
QB2OPTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in closed position
VPS1S2TR BOOLEAN Status of the app. between bus section 1 and 2
are valid
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)

13.3.6 Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC

415
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

13.3.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for bus-section A1A2_DC - 3
disconnector

13.3.6.2 Functionality

The interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC) function is used for one
bus-section disconnector between section 1 and 2 according to figure 188.
A1A2_DC function can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section
disconnector.

QB
WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)

QC1 QC2

A1A2_DC en04000492.vsd

IEC04000492 V1 EN

Figure 188: Switchyard layout A1A2_DC

13.3.6.3 Function block

A1A2_DC
QB_OP QBOPREL
QB_CL QBOPITL
S1QC1_OP QBCLREL
S1QC1_CL QBCLITL
S2QC2_OP DCOPTR
S2QC2_CL DCCLTR
S1DC_OP VPDCTR
S2DC_OP
VPS1_DC
VPS2_DC
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BB
QBCL_EX1
QBCL_EX2
QBOP_EX1
QBOP_EX2
QBOP_EX3

IEC05000349-2-en.vsd
IEC05000349 V2 EN

Figure 189: A1A2_DC function block

416
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

13.3.6.4 Logic diagram

A1A2_DC
QB_OP
VPQB VPDCTR
QB_CL =1
DCOPTR
DCCLTR
S1QC1_OP
VPS1QC1
S1QC1_CL =1
S2QC2_OP
VPS2QC2
S2QC2_CL =1
VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
VPS1_DC & >1 QBOPREL
S1QC1_OP QBOPITL
1
S2QC2_OP
S1DC_OP
EXDU_ES

EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX1

VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
VPS2_DC &
S1QC1_OP
S2QC2_OP
S2DC_OP
EXDU_ES

EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX2

VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
S1QC1_CL &
S2QC2_CL
EXDU_ES
QBOP_EX3

en04000544.vsd

IEC04000544 V1 EN

IEC04000545 V1 EN

13.3.6.5 Signals
Table 267: A1A2_DC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QB_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB is in open position
QB_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB is in closed position
S1QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on bus section 1 is in open position
S1QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 on bus section 1 is in closed position
Table continues on next page

417
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Name Type Default Description

S2QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 on bus section 2 is in open position
S2QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 on bus section 2 is in closed position
S1DC_OP BOOLEAN 0 All disconnectors on bus section 1 are in open
position
S2DC_OP BOOLEAN 0 All disconnectors on bus section 2 are in open
position
VPS1_DC BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 1
are valid
VPS2_DC BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 2
are valid
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays containing earth. sw.
QC1 or QC2
EXDU_BB BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bays with disc conn to
section 1 and 2
QBCL_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External close condition for section disconnector
QB
QBCL_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External close condition for section disconnector
QB
QBOP_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for section disconnector
QB
QBOP_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for section disconnector
QB
QBOP_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for section disconnector
QB

Table 268: A1A2_DC Output signals

Name Type Description
QBOPREL BOOLEAN Opening of QB is allowed
QBOPITL BOOLEAN Opening of QB is forbidden
QBCLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QB is allowed
QBCLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QB is forbidden
DCOPTR BOOLEAN The bus section disconnector is in open position
DCCLTR BOOLEAN The bus section disconnector is in closed position
VPDCTR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB is valid (open or closed)

13.3.7 Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC

13.3.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC - 3

418
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

13.3.7.2 Functionality

The interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) function is used for a bus-coupler
bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 190. The
function can also be used for a single busbar arrangement with transfer busbar or
double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
QB1 QB2 QB20 QB7
QC1

QA1

QC2

en04000514.vsd
IEC04000514 V1 EN

Figure 190: Switchyard layout ABC_BC

419
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

13.3.7.3 Function block

ABC_BC
QA1_OP QA1OPREL
QA1_CL QA1OPITL
QB1_OP QA1CLREL
QB1_CL QA1CLITL
QB2_OP QB1REL
QB2_CL QB1ITL
QB7_OP QB2REL
QB7_CL QB2ITL
QB20_OP QB7REL
QB20_CL QB7ITL
QC1_OP QB20REL
QC1_CL QB20ITL
QC2_OP QC1REL
QC2_CL QC1ITL
QC11_OP QC2REL
QC11_CL QC2ITL
QC21_OP QB1OPTR
QC21_CL QB1CLTR
QC71_OP QB220OTR
QC71_CL QB220CTR
BBTR_OP QB7OPTR
BC_12_CL QB7CLTR
VP_BBTR QB12OPTR
VP_BC_12 QB12CLTR
EXDU_ES BC12OPTR
EXDU_12 BC12CLTR
EXDU_BC BC17OPTR
QA1O_EX1 BC17CLTR
QA1O_EX2 BC27OPTR
QA1O_EX3 BC27CLTR
QB1_EX1 VPQB1TR
QB1_EX2 VQB220TR
QB1_EX3 VPQB7TR
QB2_EX1 VPQB12TR
QB2_EX2 VPBC12TR
QB2_EX3 VPBC17TR
QB20_EX1 VPBC27TR
QB20_EX2
QB7_EX1
QB7_EX2

IEC05000350-2-en.vsd
IEC05000350 V2 EN

Figure 191: ABC_BC function block

420
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

13.3.7.4 Logic diagram

ABC_BC
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB20_OP
QB20_CL =1 VPQB20
QB7_OP
QB7_CL =1 VPQB7
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
QC71_OP
QC71_CL =1 VPQC71
VPQB1
QB1_OP QA1OPREL
& >1 QA1OPITL
QA1O_EX1 1
VPQB20
QB20_OP &
QA1O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP &
EXDU_12
QA1O_EX3
VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB2 QA1CLITL
VPQB7 & 1
VPQB20
en04000533.vsd

IEC04000533 V1 EN

VPQA1
VPQB2 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB1ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQB2
VP_BC_12
&
QB2_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB1_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC11
&
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX3

en04000534.vsd

IEC04000534 V1 EN

421
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

VPQA1
VPQB1 QB2REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB2ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQB1
VP_BC_12
&
QB1_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB2_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC21
&
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX3

en04000535.vsd

IEC04000535 V1 EN

VPQA1
VPQB20 QB7REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB7ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC71
QA1_OP
QB20_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC71
&
QC2_CL
QC71_CL
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX2
VPQA1
VPQB7 QB20REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB20ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB7_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB20_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC21
&
QC2_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB20_EX2

en04000536.vsd

IEC04000536 V1 EN

422
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB20 QC1ITL
& 1
VPQB7
QC2REL
VPQB2
QB1_OP QC2ITL
1
QB20_OP
QB7_OP
QB2_OP
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB20_OP QB220OTR
QB2_OP & QB220CTR
VPQB20 1
VQB220TR
VPQB2 &
QB7_OP QB7OPTR
QB7_CL QB7CLTR
VPQB7 VPQB7TR
QB1_OP QB12OPTR
QB2_OP >1 QB12CLTR
VPQB1 1
VPQB12TR
VPQB2 &
QA1_OP BC12OPTR
QB1_OP >1 BC12CLTR
QB20_OP 1
VPQA1
VPBC12TR
VPQB1 &
VPQB20
QA1_OP BC17OPTR
QB1_OP >1 BC17CLTR
QB7_OP 1
VPQA1
VPBC17TR
VPQB1 &
VPQB7
QA1_OP BC27OPTR
QB2_OP >1 BC27CLTR
QB7_OP 1
VPQA1
VPBC27TR
VPQB2 &
VPQB7
en04000537.vsd

IEC04000537 V1 EN

13.3.7.5 Signals
Table 269: ABC_BC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QB7_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB7 is in open position
QB7_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB7 is in closed position
QB20_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB20 is in open position
QB20_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB20 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open
position
Table continues on next page

423
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Name Type Default Description

QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed
position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open
position
QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed
position
QC71_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in open
position
QC71_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in closed
position
BBTR_OP BOOLEAN 0 No busbar transfer is in progress
BC_12_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA1 and WA2
VP_BBTR BOOLEAN 0 Status are valid for app. involved in the busbar
transfer
VP_BC_12 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and
WA2 are valid
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay containing earthing
switches
EXDU_12 BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay connected to WA1/
WA2 busbars
EXDU_BC BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any other bus coupler
bay
QA1O_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QA1O_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QA1O_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB20_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB20
QB20_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB20
QB7_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7
QB7_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7

Table 270: ABC_BC Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1OPREL BOOLEAN Opening of QA1 is allowed
QA1OPITL BOOLEAN Opening of QA1 is forbidden
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
Table continues on next page

424
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Name Type Description

QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QB7REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB7 is allowed
QB7ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB7 is forbidden
QB20REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB20 is allowed
QB20ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB20 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
QB220OTR BOOLEAN QB2 and QB20 are in open position
QB220CTR BOOLEAN QB2 or QB20 or both are not in open position
QB7OPTR BOOLEAN QB7 is in open position
QB7CLTR BOOLEAN QB7 is in closed position
QB12OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position
QB12CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 and QB2 are not in open position
BC12OPTR BOOLEAN No connection via the own bus coupler between
WA1 and WA2
BC12CLTR BOOLEAN Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between
WA1 and WA2
BC17OPTR BOOLEAN No connection via the own bus coupler between
WA1 and WA7
BC17CLTR BOOLEAN Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between
WA1 and WA7
BC27OPTR BOOLEAN No connection via the own bus coupler between
WA2 and WA7
BC27CLTR BOOLEAN Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between
WA2 and WA7
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
VQB220TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 and QB20 are valid (open
or closed)
VPQB7TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB7 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB12TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or
closed)
VPBC12TR BOOLEAN Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and
WA2 are valid
VPBC17TR BOOLEAN Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and
WA7 are valid
VPBC27TR BOOLEAN Status of the bus coupler app. between WA2 and
WA7 are valid

425
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

13.3.8 Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB BH

13.3.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter BH_CONN - 3
Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter BH_LINE_A - 3
Interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter BH_LINE_B - 3

13.3.8.2 Functionality

The interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter (BH_CONN, BH_LINE_A,

BH_LINE_B) functions are used for lines connected to a 1 1/2 breaker diameter
according to figure 192.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1 QC1

QA1 QA1

QC2 QC2

QB6 QB6

QC3 QC3
BH_LINE_A BH_LINE_B

QB61 QA1 QB62

QB9 QB9
QC1 QC2
QC9 QC9

BH_CONN
en04000513.vsd

IEC04000513 V1 EN

Figure 192: Switchyard layout 1 1/2 breaker

Three types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined. BH_LINE_A and
BH_LINE_B are the connections from a line to a busbar. BH_CONN is the
connection between the two lines of the diameter in the 1 1/2 breaker switchyard
layout.

426
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

13.3.8.3 Function blocks

BH_LINE_A
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB6_OP QB6REL
QB6_CL QB6ITL
QB1_OP QB1REL
QB1_CL QB1ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC3_OP QC3REL
QC3_CL QC3ITL
QB9_OP QB9REL
QB9_CL QB9ITL
QC9_OP QC9REL
QC9_CL QC9ITL
CQA1_OP QB1OPTR
CQA1_CL QB1CLTR
CQB61_OP VPQB1TR
CQB61_CL
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL
QC11_OP
QC11_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_ES
QB6_EX1
QB6_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5
QB9_EX6
QB9_EX7

IEC05000352-2-en.vsd
IEC05000352 V2 EN

Figure 193: BH_LINE_A function block

427
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

BH_LINE_B
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB6_OP QB6REL
QB6_CL QB6ITL
QB2_OP QB2REL
QB2_CL QB2ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC3_OP QC3REL
QC3_CL QC3ITL
QB9_OP QB9REL
QB9_CL QB9ITL
QC9_OP QC9REL
QC9_CL QC9ITL
CQA1_OP QB2OPTR
CQA1_CL QB2CLTR
CQB62_OP VPQB2TR
CQB62_CL
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_ES
QB6_EX1
QB6_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5
QB9_EX6
QB9_EX7

IEC05000353-2-en.vsd
IEC05000353 V2 EN

Figure 194: BH_LINE_B function block

BH_CONN
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB61_OP QB61REL
QB61_CL QB61ITL
QB62_OP QB62REL
QB62_CL QB62ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
1QC3_OP
1QC3_CL
2QC3_OP
2QC3_CL
QB61_EX1
QB61_EX2
QB62_EX1
QB62_EX2

IEC05000351-2-en.vsd
IEC05000351 V2 EN

Figure 195: BH_CONN function block

428
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

13.3.8.4 Logic diagrams

BH_CONN
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB61_OP
QB61_CL =1 VPQB61
QB62_OP
QB62_CL =1 VPQB62
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
1QC3_OP
1QC3_CL =1 VP1QC3
2QC3_OP
2QC3_CL =1 VP2QC3
VPQB61 QA1CLREL
VPQB62 & QA1CLITL
1
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB61REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB61ITL
1
VP1QC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
1QC3_OP
QB61_EX1
VPQC1
VP1QC3
&
QC1_CL
1QC3_CL
QB61_EX2
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB62REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB62ITL
1
VP2QC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
2QC3_OP
QB62_EX1
VPQC2
VP2QC3
&
QC2_CL
2QC3_CL
QB62_EX2
VPQB61 QC1REL
VPQB62 QC1ITL
& 1
QB61_OP QC2REL
QB62_OP QC2ITL
1
en04000560.vsd

IEC04000560 V1 EN

429
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

BH_LINE_A
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB6_OP
QB6_CL =1 VPQB6
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
CQA1_OP
CQA1_CL =1 VPCQA1
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL =1 VPCQC1
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL =1 VPCQC2
CQB61_OP
CQB61_CL =1 VPCQB61
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB6 QA1CLITL
& 1
VPQB9
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB6REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB6ITL
1
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB6_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
&
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB6_EX2
en04000554.vsd

IEC04000554 V1 EN

430
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

VPQA1
VPQC1 QB1REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB1ITL
1
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1

VPQC1
VPQC11
&
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2

VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB6 QC1ITL
QB1_OP & 1
QC2REL
QB6_OP QC2ITL
VPQB6 1
VPQB9 QC3REL
VPCQB61 &
QC3ITL
1
QB6_OP
QB9_OP
CQB61_OP
VPQA1 QB9REL
VPQB6 QB9ITL
VPQC9 & >1 1

VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPCQA1
VPCQB61
VPCQC1
VPCQC2
QB9_EX1
QB6_OP
QB9_EX2
>1
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP &
QB9_EX3

en04000555.vsd

IEC04000555 V1 EN

CQB61_OP
QB9_EX4
>1 & >1
CQA1_OP
CQC1_OP
CQC2_OP &
QB9_EX5
QC9_OP
QC3_OP
QB9_EX6
VPQC9
VPQC3
&
QC9_CL
QC3_CL
QB9_EX7
VPQB9 QC9REL
VPVOLT QC9ITL
QB9_OP & 1

VOLT_OFF
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
en04000556.vsd

IEC04000556 V1 EN

431
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

BH_LINE_B
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QB6_OP
QB6_CL =1 VPQB6
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
CQA1_OP
CQA1_CL =1 VPCQA1
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL =1 VPCQC1
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL =1 VPCQC2
CQB62_OP
CQB62_CL =1 VPCQB62
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQB2 QA1CLREL
VPQB6 QA1CLITL
& 1
VPQB9
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB6REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB6ITL
1
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB6_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
&
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB6_EX2
en04000557.vsd

IEC04000557 V1 EN

432
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

VPQA1
VPQC1 QB2REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB2ITL
1
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1

VPQC1
VPQC21
&
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2

VPQB2 QC1REL
VPQB6 QC1ITL
QB2_OP & 1
QC2REL
QB6_OP QC2ITL
VPQB6 1
VPQB9 QC3REL
VPCQB62 &
QC3ITL
1
QB6_OP
QB9_OP
CQB62_OP
VPQA1 QB9REL
VPQB6 QB9ITL
VPQC9 & >1 1

VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPCQA1
VPCQB62
VPCQC1
VPCQC2
QB9_EX1
QB6_OP
QB9_EX2
>1
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP &
QB9_EX3

en04000558.vsd

IEC04000558 V1 EN

CQB62_OP
QB9_EX4
>1 & >1
CQA1_OP
CQC1_OP
CQC2_OP &
QB9_EX5
QC9_OP
QC3_OP
QB9_EX6
VPQC9
VPQC3
&
QC9_CL
QC3_CL
QB9_EX7
VPQB9 QC9REL
VPVOLT QC9ITL
QB9_OP & 1

VOLT_OFF
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
en04000559.vsd

IEC04000559 V1 EN

433
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

13.3.8.5 Signals
Table 271: BH_LINE_A Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB6_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB6 is in open position
QB6_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB6 is in close position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QB9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in open position
QB9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in closed position
QC9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in open position
QC9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in closed position
CQA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQB61_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB61 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQB61_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB61 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open
position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed
position
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse)
failure
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bay containing earthing
switch QC11
QB6_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB6
QB6_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB6
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB9_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
Table continues on next page

434
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Name Type Default Description

QB9_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX5 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX6 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX7 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9

Table 272: BH_LINE_A Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB6REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB6 is allowed
QB6ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB6 is forbidden
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QC3REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is allowed
QC3ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is forbidden
QB9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is allowed
QB9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is forbidden
QC9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is allowed
QC9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is forbidden
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)

Table 273: BH_LINE_B Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB6_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB6 is in open position
QB6_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB6 is in close position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
Table continues on next page

435
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Name Type Default Description

QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QB9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in open position
QB9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in closed position
QC9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in open position
QC9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in closed position
CQA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQB62_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB62 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQB62_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB62 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open
position
QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed
position
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse)
failure
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bay containing earthing
switch QC21
QB6_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB6
QB6_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB6
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB9_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX5 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX6 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX7 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9

436
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Table 274: BH_LINE_B Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB6REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB6 is allowed
QB6ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB6 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QC3REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is allowed
QC3ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is forbidden
QB9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is allowed
QB9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is forbidden
QC9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is allowed
QC9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is forbidden
QB2OPTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in closed position
VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)

Table 275: BH_CONN Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB61_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in open position
QB61_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in closed position
QB62_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in open position
QB62_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
1QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 on line 1 is in open position
1QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 on line 1 is in closed position
2QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 on line 2 is in open position
2QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 on line 2 is in closed position
QB61_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB61
Table continues on next page

437
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Name Type Default Description

QB61_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB61
QB62_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB62
QB62_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB62

Table 276: BH_CONN Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB61REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB61 is allowed
QB61ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB61 is forbidden
QB62REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB62 is allowed
QB62ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB62 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden

13.3.9 Interlocking for double CB bay DB

13.3.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for double CB bay DB_BUS_A - 3
Interlocking for double CB bay DB_BUS_B - 3
Interlocking for double CB bay DB_LINE - 3

13.3.9.2 Functionality

The interlocking for a double busbar double circuit breaker bay including
DB_BUS_A, DB_BUS_B and DB_LINE functions are used for a line connected to
a double busbar arrangement according to figure 196.

438
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1 QC4

QA1 QA2

DB_BUS_A DB_BUS_B
QC2 QC5

QB61 QB62

QC3

QB9
DB_LINE

QC9

en04000518.vsd
IEC04000518 V1 EN

Figure 196: Switchyard layout double circuit breaker

Three types of interlocking modules per double circuit breaker bay are defined.
DB_BUS_A handles the circuit breaker QA1 that is connected to busbar WA1 and
the disconnectors and earthing switches of this section. DB_BUS_B handles the
circuit breaker QA2 that is connected to busbar WA2 and the disconnectors and
earthing switches of this section.

439
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

13.3.9.3 Logic diagrams

DB_BUS_A
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB61_OP
QB61_CL =1 VPQB61
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
VPQB61 QA1CLREL
VPQB1 & QA1CLITL
1
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB61REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB61ITL
1
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB61_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
&
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB61_EX2
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB1ITL
1
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1

VPQC1
VPQC11
&
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2

en04000547.vsd

IEC04000547 V1 EN

VPQB61 QC1REL
VPQB1 QC1ITL
& 1
QB61_OP QC2REL
QB1_OP QC2ITL
1
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
en04000548.vsd

IEC04000548 V1 EN

440
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

DB_BUS_B
QA2_OP
QA2_CL =1 VPQA2
QB62_OP
QB62_CL =1 VPQB62
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC4_OP
QC4_CL =1 VPQC4
QC5_OP
QC5_CL =1 VPQC5
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
VPQB62 QA2CLREL
VPQB2 & QA2CLITL
1
VPQA2
VPQC4 QB62REL
& >1
VPQC5 QB62ITL
1
VPQC3
QA2_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC3_OP
QB62_EX1
VPQC5
VPQC3
&
QC5_CL
QC3_CL
QB62_EX2
VPQA2
VPQC4 QB2REL
& >1
VPQC5 QB2ITL
1
VPQC21
QA2_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1

VPQC4
VPQC21
&
QC4_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2

en04000552.vsd

IEC04000552 V1 EN

VPQB62 QC4REL
VPQB2 QC4ITL
& 1
QB62_OP QC5REL
QB2_OP QC5ITL
1
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
en04000553.vsd

IEC04000553 V1 EN

441
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

DB_LINE
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QA2_OP
QA2_CL =1 VPQA2
QB61_OP
QB61_CL =1 VPQB61
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QB62_OP
QB62_CL =1 VPQB62
QC4_OP
QC4_CL =1 VPQC4
QC5_OP
QC5_CL =1 VPQC5
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQA1
VPQA2 QB9REL
VPQC1 & >1
QB9ITL
1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPQC4
VPQC5
VPQC9
QA1_OP
QA2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX1

& en04000549.vsd

IEC04000549 V1 EN

VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2 & >1
VPQC3
VPQC9
VPQB62
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC9_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_EX2
VPQA2
VPQB61
&
VPQC3
VPQC4
VPQC5
VPQC9
QA2_OP
QB61_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX3
VPQC3
VPQC9
&
VPQB61
VPQB62
QC3_OP
QC9_OP
QB61_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_EX4
VPQC3
VPQC9
&
QC3_CL
QC9_CL
QB9_EX5
en04000550.vsd

IEC04000550 V1 EN

442
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

VPQB61
VPQB62 QC3REL
VPQB9 &
QC3ITL
1
QB61_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_OP
VPQB9
VPVOLT QC9REL
QB9_OP &
QC9ITL
1
VOLT_OFF
en04000551.vsd

IEC04000551 V1 EN

13.3.9.4 Function block

DB_BUS_A
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB1_OP QB61REL
QB1_CL QB61ITL
QB61_OP QB1REL
QB61_CL QB1ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC3_OP QB1OPTR
QC3_CL QB1CLTR
QC11_OP VPQB1TR
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB61_EX1
QB61_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2

IEC05000354-2-en.vsd
IEC05000354 V2 EN

Figure 197: DB_BUS_A function block

443
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

DB_LINE
QA1_OP QB9REL
QA1_CL QB9ITL
QA2_OP QC3REL
QA2_CL QC3ITL
QB61_OP QC9REL
QB61_CL QC9ITL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QB62_OP
QB62_CL
QC4_OP
QC4_CL
QC5_OP
QC5_CL
QB9_OP
QB9_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC9_OP
QC9_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5

IEC05000356-2-en.vsd
IEC05000356 V2 EN

Figure 198: DB_LINE function block

DB_BUS_B
QA2_OP QA2CLREL
QA2_CL QA2CLITL
QB2_OP QB62REL
QB2_CL QB62ITL
QB62_OP QB2REL
QB62_CL QB2ITL
QC4_OP QC4REL
QC4_CL QC4ITL
QC5_OP QC5REL
QC5_CL QC5ITL
QC3_OP QB2OPTR
QC3_CL QB2CLTR
QC21_OP VPQB2TR
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB62_EX1
QB62_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2

IEC05000355-2-en.vsd
IEC05000355 V2 EN

Figure 199: DB_BUS_B function block

13.3.9.5 Signals
Table 277: DB_BUS_A Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
Table continues on next page

444
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Name Type Default Description

QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QB61_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in open position
QB61_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open
position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed
position
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bay containing earthing
switch QC11
QB61_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB61
QB61_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB61
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1

Table 278: DB_BUS_A Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB61REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB61 is allowed
QB61ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB61 is forbidden
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)

445
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Table 279: DB_BUS_B Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA2 is in open position
QA2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA2 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QB62_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in open position
QB62_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in closed position
QC4_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in open position
QC4_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in closed position
QC5_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC5 is in open position
QC5_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC5 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open
position
QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed
position
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from bay containing earthing
switch QC21
QB62_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB62
QB62_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB62
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2

Table 280: DB_BUS_B Output signals

Name Type Description
QA2CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA2 is allowed
QA2CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA2 is forbidden
QB62REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB62 is allowed
QB62ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB62 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QC4REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC4 is allowed
QC4ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC4 is forbidden
QC5REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC5 is allowed
QC5ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC5 is forbidden
QB2OPTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in closed position
VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)

446
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Table 281: DB_LINE Input signals

Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QA2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA2 is in open position
QA2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA2 is in closed position
QB61_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in open position
QB61_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB61 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QB62_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in open position
QB62_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB62 is in closed position
QC4_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in open position
QC4_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC4 is in closed position
QC5_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC5 is in open position
QC5_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC5 is in closed position
QB9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in open position
QB9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QC9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in open position
QC9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in closed position
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse)
failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse)
failure
QB9_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX5 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9

Table 282: DB_LINE Output signals

Name Type Description
QB9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is allowed
QB9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is forbidden
QC3REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is allowed
QC3ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC3 is forbidden
QC9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is allowed
QC9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is forbidden

447
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

13.3.10 Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE

13.3.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE - 3

13.3.10.2 Functionality

The interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE) function is used for a line connected to
a double busbar arrangement with a transfer busbar according to figure 200. The
function can also be used for a double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar
or a single busbar arrangement with/without transfer busbar.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
QB1 QB2 QB7
QC1

QA1

QC2

QB9
QC9

en04000478.vsd
IEC04000478 V1 EN

Figure 200: Switchyard layout ABC_LINE

448
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

13.3.10.3 Function block

ABC_LINE
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB9_OP QB9REL
QB9_CL QB9ITL
QB1_OP QB1REL
QB1_CL QB1ITL
QB2_OP QB2REL
QB2_CL QB2ITL
QB7_OP QB7REL
QB7_CL QB7ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC9_OP QC9REL
QC9_CL QC9ITL
QC11_OP QB1OPTR
QC11_CL QB1CLTR
QC21_OP QB2OPTR
QC21_CL QB2CLTR
QC71_OP QB7OPTR
QC71_CL QB7CLTR
BB7_D_OP QB12OPTR
BC_12_CL QB12CLTR
BC_17_OP VPQB1TR
BC_17_CL VPQB2TR
BC_27_OP VPQB7TR
BC_27_CL VPQB12TR
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_12
VP_BC_17
VP_BC_27
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BPB
EXDU_BC
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB1_EX3
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB2_EX3
QB7_EX1
QB7_EX2
QB7_EX3
QB7_EX4

IEC05000357-2-en.vsd
IEC05000357 V2 EN

Figure 201: ABC_LINE function block

449
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

13.3.10.4 Logic diagram

ABC_LINE
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QA1CLREL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1 QA1CLITL
& 1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QB7_OP
QB7_CL =1 VPQB7
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
QC71_OP
QC71_CL =1 VPQC71
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB9REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB9ITL
1
VPQC9
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC9
&
QC2_CL
QC9_CL
QB9_EX2

en04000527.vsd

IEC04000527 V1 EN

450
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

VPQA1 QB1REL
& 1
VPQB2
VPQC1 1 QB1ITL
VPQC2
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES

QB1_EX1

VPQB2 &
VP_BC_12
QB2_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC

QB1_EX2

VPQC1 &
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES

QB1EX3

en04000528.vsd

IEC04000528 V1 EN

451
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

VPQA1 QB2REL
& 1
VPQB1
VPQC1 1 QB2ITL
VPQC2
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES

QB2_EX1

VPQB1 &
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC

QB2_EX2

VPQC1 &
VPQC21
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES

QB2_EX3

en04000529.vsd

IEC04000529 V1 EN

452
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

VPQC9 QB7REL
& >1
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D 1 QB7ITL
VP_BC_17
VP_BC_27
QC9_OP
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES

BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB

BC_17_OP
BC_27_OP
EXDU_BC
QB7_EX1

VPQA1
VPQB1
VPQC9
&
VPQB9
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_17
QA1_CL
QB1_CL
QC9_OP
QB9_CL
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES

BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_17_CL

EXDU_BC

QB7_EX2

IEC04000530 V1 EN

453
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

VPQA1
VPQB2
& >1
VPQC9
VPQB9
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_27
QA1_CL
QB2_CL
QC9_OP
QB9_CL
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES

BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_27_CL
EXDU_BC
QB7_EX3
VPQC9
VPQC71
&
QC9_CL
QC71_CL
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX4
VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB2 QC1ITL
VPQB9 & 1
QC2REL
QB1_OP
QB2_OP QC2ITL
1
QB9_OP
VPQB7
VPQB9 QC9REL
VPVOLT &
QC9ITL
QB7_OP 1
QB9_OP
VOLT_OFF
en04000531.vsd

IEC04000531 V1 EN

454
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
QB7_OP QB7OPTR
QB7_CL QB7CLTR
VPQB7 VPQB7TR
QB1_OP QB12OPTR
QB2_OP >1 QB12CLTR
VPQB1 1
VPQB12TR
VPQB2 &
en04000532.vsd

IEC04000532 V1 EN

13.3.10.5 Signals
Table 283: ABC_LINE Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in open position
QB9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB9 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QB7_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB7 is in open position
QB7_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB7 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QC9_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in open position
QC9_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC9 is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open
position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed
position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open
position
Table continues on next page

455
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Name Type Default Description

QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed
position
QC71_OP BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in open
position
QC71_CL BOOLEAN 0 Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in closed
position
BB7_D_OP BOOLEAN 0 Disconnectors on busbar WA7 except in the own
bay are open
BC_12_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA1 and WA2
BC_17_OP BOOLEAN 0 No bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA1 and WA7
BC_17_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA1 and WA7
BC_27_OP BOOLEAN 0 No bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA2 and WA7
BC_27_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA2 and WA7
VOLT_OFF BOOLEAN 0 There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse)
failure
VOLT_ON BOOLEAN 0 There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse)
failure
VP_BB7_D BOOLEAN 0 Switch status of the disconnectors on busbar
WA7 are valid
VP_BC_12 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and
WA2 are valid
VP_BC_17 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and
WA7 are valid
VP_BC_27 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA2 and
WA7 are valid
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay containing earthing
switches
EXDU_BPB BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay with disconnectors
on WA7
EXDU_BC BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bus coupler bay
QB9_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB7_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7
Table continues on next page

456
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Name Type Default Description

QB7_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7
QB7_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7
QB7_EX4 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB7

Table 284: ABC_LINE Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is allowed
QB9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB9 is forbidden
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QB7REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB7 is allowed
QB7ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB7 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QC9REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is allowed
QC9ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC9 is forbidden
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
QB2OPTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in closed position
QB7OPTR BOOLEAN QB7 is in open position
QB7CLTR BOOLEAN QB7 is in closed position
QB12OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position
QB12CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 and QB2 are not in open position
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB7TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB7 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB12TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or
closed)

13.3.11 Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO

457
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

13.3.11.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO - 3

13.3.11.2 Functionality

The interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO) function is used for a

transformer bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 202.
The function is used when there is no disconnector between circuit breaker and
transformer. Otherwise, the interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE) function can be
used. This function can also be used in single busbar arrangements.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1

QA1
AB_TRAFO
QC2

QC3

QA2
QA2 and QC4 are not
QC4 used in this interlocking

QB3 QB4

en04000515.vsd
IEC04000515 V1 EN

Figure 202: Switchyard layout AB_TRAFO

458
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

13.3.11.3 Function block

AB_TRAFO
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB1_OP QB1REL
QB1_CL QB1ITL
QB2_OP QB2REL
QB2_CL QB2ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QB3_OP QB1OPTR
QB3_CL QB1CLTR
QB4_OP QB2OPTR
QB4_CL QB2CLTR
QC3_OP QB12OPTR
QC3_CL QB12CLTR
QC11_OP VPQB1TR
QC11_CL VPQB2TR
QC21_OP VPQB12TR
QC21_CL
BC_12_CL
VP_BC_12
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BC
QA1_EX1
QA1_EX2
QA1_EX3
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB1_EX3
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB2_EX3

IEC05000358-2-en.vsd
IEC05000358 V2 EN

Figure 203: AB_TRAFO function block

459
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

13.3.11.4 Logic diagram

AB_TRAFO
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QB3_OP
QB3_CL =1 VPQB3
QB4_OP
QB4_CL =1 VPQB4
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB2 QA1CLITL
VPQC1 & 1

VPQC2
VPQB3
VPQB4
VPQC3
QA1_EX2
QC3_OP
QA1_EX3
QC1_CL >1
QC2_CL
QC3_CL &
QA1_EX1

en04000538.vsd

IEC04000538 V1 EN

VPQA1
VPQB2 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB1ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC3
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQB2
VPQC3
&
VP_BC_12
QB2_CL
QC3_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB1_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC2
&
VPQC3
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX3

en04000539.vsd

IEC04000539 V1 EN

460
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

VPQA1
VPQB1 QB2REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB2ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC3
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQB1
VPQC3
&
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
QC3_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB2_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC2
&
VPQC3
VPQC21
QC1_CL
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX3

en04000540.vsd

IEC04000540 V1 EN

VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB2 QC1ITL
& 1
VPQB3
QC2REL
VPQB4
QB1_OP QC2ITL
1
QB2_OP
QB3_OP
QB4_OP
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
QB1_OP QB12OPTR
QB2_OP >1 QB12CLTR
VPQB1 1
VPQB12TR
VPQB2 &
en04000541.vsd

IEC04000541 V1 EN

13.3.11.5 Signals
Table 285: AB_TRAFO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
QA1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB1 is in closed position
QB2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB2 is in closed position
QC1_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC1 is in closed position
Table continues on next page

461
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Name Type Default Description

QC2_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC2 is in closed position
QB3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB3 is in open position
QB3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB3 is in closed position
QB4_OP BOOLEAN 0 QB4 is in open position
QB4_CL BOOLEAN 0 QB4 is in closed position
QC3_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC3 is in closed position
QC11_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position
QC11_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position
QC21_OP BOOLEAN 0 QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position
QC21_CL BOOLEAN 0 QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position
BC_12_CL BOOLEAN 0 A bus coupler connection exists between busbar
WA1 and WA2
VP_BC_12 BOOLEAN 0 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and
WA2 are valid
EXDU_ES BOOLEAN 0 No transm error from any bay containing earthing
switches
EXDU_BC BOOLEAN 0 No transmission error from any bus coupler bay
QA1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QA1
QA1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QA1
QA1_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QA1
QB1_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB2_EX1 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX3 BOOLEAN 0 External condition for apparatus QB2

Table 286: AB_TRAFO Output signals

Name Type Description
QA1CLREL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL BOOLEAN Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QB2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QC1REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is allowed
Table continues on next page

462
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Name Type Description

QC2ITL BOOLEAN Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QB1OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 is in closed position
QB2OPTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR BOOLEAN QB2 is in closed position
QB12OPTR BOOLEAN QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position
QB12CLTR BOOLEAN QB1 and QB2 are not in open position
VPQB1TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB2TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB12TR BOOLEAN Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or
closed)

13.3.12 Position evaluation POS_EVAL

13.3.12.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Position evaluation POS_EVAL - -

13.3.12.2 Functionality

Position evaluation (POS_EVAL) function converts the input position data signal
POSITION, consisting of value, time and signal status, to binary signals
OPENPOS or CLOSEPOS.

The output signals are used by other functions in the interlocking scheme.

13.3.12.3 Function block

POS_EVAL
POSITION OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS

IEC09000079_1_en.vsd
IEC09000079 V1 EN

Figure 204: POS_EVAL function block

463
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

13.3.12.4 Logic diagram

POS_EVAL
Position including quality POSITION OPENPOS
Open/close position of
CLOSEPOS switch device

IEC08000469-1-en.vsd
IEC08000469-1-EN V1 EN

Only the value, open/close, and status is used in this function. Time information is
not used.
Input position (Value) Signal quality Output OPENPOS Output CLOSEPOS
0 (Breaker Good 0 0
intermediate)
1 (Breaker open) Good 1 0
2 (Breaker closed) Good 0 1
3 (Breaker faulty) Good 0 0
Any Invalid 0 0
Any Oscillatory 0 0

13.3.12.5 Signals
Table 287: POS_EVAL Input signals
Name Type Default Description
POSITION INTEGER 0 Position status including quality

Table 288: POS_EVAL Output signals

Name Type Description
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Close position

13.4 Apparatus control APC

13.4.1 Functionality
The apparatus control functions are used for control and supervision of circuit
breakers, disconnectors and earthing switches within a bay. Permission to operate
is given after evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking,
synchrocheck, operator place selection and external or internal blockings.

Apparatus control features:

464
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Select-Execute principle to give high reliability

Selection function to prevent simultaneous operation
Selection and supervision of operator place
Command supervision
Block/deblock of operation
Block/deblock of updating of position indications
Substitution of position and quality indications
Overriding of interlocking functions
Overriding of synchrocheck
Operation counter
Suppression of mid position

Two types of command models can be used:

Direct with normal security
SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security

Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting
position is not supervised. Enhanced security means that the command is evaluated
with an additional supervision of the status value of the control object. The
command sequence with enhanced security is always terminated by a
CommandTermination service primitive and an AddCause telling if the command
was successful or if something went wrong.

Control operation can be performed from the local HMI with authority control if so
defined.

13.4.2 Operation principle

A bay can handle, for example a power line, a transformer, a reactor, or a capacitor
bank. The different primary apparatuses within the bay can be controlled via the
apparatus control function directly by the operator or indirectly by automatic
sequences.

Because a primary apparatus can be allocated to many functions within a

Substation Automation system, the object-oriented approach with a function block
that handles the interaction and status of each process object ensures consistency in
the process information used by higher-level control functions.

Primary apparatuses such as breakers and disconnectors are controlled and

supervised by one function block (SCSWI) each. Because the number and type of
signals used for the control of a breaker respectively a disconnector are almost the
same, the same function block type is used to handle these two types of apparatuses.

The SCSWI function block is connected either to an SXCBR function block (for
circuit breakers) or to an SXSWI function block (for disconnectors and earthing
switches). The physical process in the switchyard is connected to these two
function blocks via binary inputs and outputs.

465
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Four types of function blocks are available to cover most of the control and
supervision within the bay. These function blocks are interconnected to form a
control function reflecting the switchyard configuration. The total number used
depends on the switchyard configuration. These four types are:

Bay control QCBAY

Switch controller SCSWI
Circuit breaker SXCBR
Circuit switch SXSWI

The functions Local Remote (LOCREM) and Local Remote Control

(LOCREMCTRL), to handle the local/remote switch, and the functions Bay
reserve (QCRSV) and Reservation input (RESIN), for the reservation function, also
belong to the apparatus control function. The principles of operation, function
blocks, input and output signals and setting parameters for all these functions are
described below.

13.4.3 Error handling

Depending on the error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal
will be set with a value. Table 289 describes the cause values given on local HMI.
The translation to AddCause values specified in IEC 61850-8-1 is shown in Table
290. For IEC 61850-8-1 edition 2 only addcauses defined in the standard are used,
for edition 1 also a number of vendor specific causes are used. The values are
available in the command response to commands from IEC61850-8-1 clients. An
output L_CAUSE on the function block for Switch controller (SCSWI), Circuit
breaker (SXCBR) and Circuit switch (SXSWI) indicates the latest value of the
cause during the latest command.

Table 289: Values for "cause" signal

Cause Name Description Supported
number
0 None Control action successfully executed X
1 Not-supported Given for Cancel request with Direct Control in Ready X
state
2 Blocked-by- Not successful since one of the downstream Loc X
switching-hierarchy switches like in CSWI has the value TRUE
3 Select-failed Cancelled due to an unsuccessful selection (select X
service)
4 Invalid-position Control action is aborted due to invalid switch position X
(Pos in XCBR or XSWI)
5 Position-reached Switch is already in the intended position (Pos in X
XCBR or XSWI)
6 Parameter-change- Control action is blocked due to running parameter X
in-execution change
7 Step-limit Control action is blocked, because tap changer has X
reached the limit (EndPosR or EndPosL in YLTC)
Table continues on next page

466
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Cause Name Description Supported

number
8 Blocked-by-Mode Control action is blocked, because the LN (CSWI or X
XCBR/XSWI)is in a mode (Mod) which doesnt allow
any switching
9 Blocked-by-process Control action is blocked due to some external event at X
process level that prevents a successful operation, for
example blocking indication (EEHealth in XCBR or
XSWI)
10 Blocked-by- Control action is blocked due to interlocking of X
interlocking switching devices (in CILO attribute
EnaOpn.stVal=FALSE or EnaCls.stVal=FALSE
11 Blocked-by- Control action with synchrocheck is aborted due to X
synchrocheck exceed of time limit and missing synchronism condition
12 Command-already- Control, select or cancel service is rejected, because X
in-execution control action is already running
13 Blocked-by-health Control action is blocked due to some internal event X
that prevents a successful operation (Health)
14 1-of-n-control Control action is blocked, because another control X
action in a domain (for example substation) is already
running (in any XCBR or XSWI of that domain, the
DPC.stSeld=TRUE)
15 Abortion-by-cancel Control action is aborted due to cancel service X
16 Time-limit-over Control action is terminated due to exceed of some X
time limit
17 Abortion-by-trip Control action is aborted due to a trip (PTRC with X
ACT.general=TRUE)
18 Object-not-selected Control action is rejected, because control object was X
not selected
19 Object-already- Select action is not executed, because the addressed X
selected object is already selected
20 No-access-authority Control action is blocked due to lack of access authority X
21 Ended-with- Control action executed but the end position has
overshoot overshoot
22 Abortion-due-to- Control action is aborted due to deviation between the
deviation command value and the measured value
23 Abortion-by- Control action is aborted due to the loss of connection
communication-loss with the client that issued the control
24 Blocked-by- Control action is blocked due to the data attribute X
command CmdBlk.stVal is TRUE
26 Inconsistent- The parameters between successive control services X
parameters are not consistent, for example the ctlNum of Select
and Operate service are different
27 Locked-by-other- Another client has already reserved the object X
client
-22 Wrong_CTL_Model Command from client uses wrong control model X
-24 Blocked_for_Open_ Blocked for Open command X
Cmd
-25 Blocked_For_Close Blocked for Close Command X
_Cmd
-30 longOperationTime Operation time too long X
Table continues on next page

467
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Cause Name Description Supported

number
-31 switchNotStartMovi Switch did not start moving X
ng
-32 persistantIntermedi Switch stopped in intermediate state X
ateState
-33 switchReturnedToIn Switch returned to the initial position X
itPos
-34 switchInBadState Switch is in a bad position state X
-35 notExpectedFinalPo Switch did not reach the expected final position X
sition

Table 290: Translation of cause values for IEC61850 edition 2 and edition 1
Internal Cause AddCause in IEC61850-8-1 Name
Number
Ed 2 Ed 1
0 25 0 None
1 1 1 Not-supported
2 2 2 Blocked-by-switching-hierarchy
3 3 3 Select-failed
4 4 4 Invalid-position
5 5 5 Position-reached
6 6 6 Parameter-change-in-execution
7 7 7 Step-limit
8 8 8 Blocked-by-Mode
9 9 9 Blocked-by-process
10 10 10 Blocked-by-interlocking
11 11 11 Blocked-by-synchrocheck
12 12 12 Command-already-in-execution
13 13 13 Blocked-by-health
14 14 14 1-of-n-control
15 15 1 Abortion-by-cancel
16 16 16 Time-limit-over
17 17 17 Abortion-by-trip
18 18 18 Object-not-selected
19 19 3 Object-already-selected
20 20 3 No-access-authority
21 21 - Ended-with-overshoot
22 22 - Abortion-due-to-deviation
23 23 - Abortion-by-communication-loss
24 24 -23 Blocked-by-command
26 26 6 Inconsistent-parameters
27 27 12 Locked-by-other-client
Table continues on next page

468
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Internal Cause AddCause in IEC61850-8-1 Name

Number
Ed 2 Ed 1
-22 0 -22 Wrong_CTL_Model
-24 24 -24 Blocked_for_Open_Cmd
-25 24 -25 Blocked_For_Close_Cmd
-30 24 -30 longOperationTime
-31 16 -31 switchNotStartMoving
-32 16 -32 persistantIntermediateState
-33 22 -33 switchReturnedToInitPos
-34 4 -34 switchInBadState
-35 22 -35 notExpectedFinalPosition

13.4.4 Bay control QCBAY

13.4.4.1 Functionality

The Bay control QCBAY function is used together with Local remote and local
remote control functions to handle the selection of the operator place per bay.
QCBAY also provides blocking functions that can be distributed to different
apparatuses within the bay.

13.4.4.2 Function block

QCBAY
LR_OFF PSTO
LR_LOC UPD_BLKD
LR_REM CMD_BLKD
LR_VALID LOC
BL_UPD STA
BL_CMD REM

IEC10000048-2-en.vsd
IEC10000048 V2 EN

Figure 205: QCBAY function block

13.4.4.3 Signals
Table 291: QCBAY Input signals
Name Type Default Description
LR_OFF BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Off position
LR_LOC BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Local position
LR_REM BOOLEAN 0 External Local/Remote switch is in Remote
position
Table continues on next page

469
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Name Type Default Description

LR_VALID BOOLEAN 0 Data representing the L/R switch position is valid
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal to block the position updates
BL_CMD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal to block the command

Table 292: QCBAY Output signals

Name Type Description
PSTO INTEGER Value for the operator place allocation
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position is blocked
CMD_BLKD BOOLEAN Function is blocked for commands
LOC BOOLEAN Local operation allowed
STA BOOLEAN Station operation allowed
REM BOOLEAN Remote operation allowed

13.4.4.4 Settings
Table 293: QCBAY Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
AllPSTOValid Priority - - Priority Override Priority of originators,
No priority commands from both local, station and
remote are allowed
RemoteIncStation No - - No Both Station and Remote control are
Yes allowed but not Local when local remote
switch is in remote

13.4.4.5 Operation principle

The function sends information about the Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO)
and blocking conditions to other functions within the bay for example, switch
control functions and voltage control functions. The functionality of the Bay
control (QCBAY) function is mainly described by the LLN0 node in the
IEC61850-8-1 edition 2 standard, applied to one bay. In IEC61850 edition 1 the
functionality is not described by the LLN0 node or any other node, therefore the
Bay control function is represented as a vendor specific node in edition 1.

Local panel switch

The local panel switch is a switch that defines the operator place selection. The
switch connected to this function can have three positions (remote/local/off). The
positions are here defined so that remote means that operation is allowed from
station and/or remote level and local means that operation is allowed from the IED
level. The local/remote switch is also on the control/protection IED itself, which
means that the position of the switch and its validity information are connected
internally, not via I/O boards. When the switch is mounted separately from the IED
the signals are connected to the function via I/O boards.

470
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

When the local panel switch (or LHMI selection, depending on the set source to
select this) is in Off position, all commands from remote and local level will be
ignored. If the position for the local/remote switch is not valid the PSTO output
will always be set to faulty state (3), which means no possibility to operate.

To adapt the signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch,
the function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL are needed and connected to
QCBAY.

Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO)

The actual state of the operator place is presented by the value of the Permitted
Source To Operate, PSTO signal. The PSTO value is evaluated from the local/
remote switch position according to Table 294. In addition, there are two
parameters that affect the value of the PSTO signal.

If the parameter AllPSTOValid is set and LR-switch position is in Local or Remote

state, the PSTO value is set to 5 (all), that is, it is permitted to operate from both
local and remote level without any priority. When the external panel switch is in
Off position the PSTO value shows the actual state of the switch that is, 0. In this
case it is not possible to control anything

If the parameter RemoteIncStation is set and the LR-switch position is in Remote

state, the PSTO value is set to 2 (Station or Remote), that is, it is permitted to
operate from both station and remote level without any priority.

Table 294: PSTO values for different Local panel switch positions
Local panel PSTO AllPSTOValid RemoteInc LocSta.CtlVal Possible
switch positions value (setting Station (command) locations that
parameter) (setting shall be able to
parameter) operate
0 = Off 0 - - - Not possible
to operate
1 = Local 1 Priority - - Local Panel
1 = Local 5 No priority - - Local or
Remote level
without any
priority
2 = Remote 6 Priority No TRUE Station level
2 = Remote 7 No priority No FALSE Remote level
2 = Remote 2 Priority Yes - Station or
Remote level
2 = Remote 5 No priority - - Local, Station
or Remote
level without
any priority
3 = Faulty 3 - - - Not possible
to operate

471
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Blockings
The blocking states for position indications and commands are intended to provide
the possibility for the user to make common blockings for the functions configured
within a complete bay.

The blocking facilities provided by the bay control function are the following:

Blocking of position indications, BL_UPD. This input will block all inputs
related to apparatus positions for all configured functions within the bay.
Blocking of commands, BL_CMD. This input will block all commands for all
configured functions within the bay.
Blocking of function, BLOCK. If the BLOCK signal is set, it means that the
function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control
commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.

The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires at least system operator level.
The password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have
been defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can
handle the control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined with the
IED Users tool in PCM600.

13.4.5 Local/Remote switch

The signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch are
connected via the function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL to the Bay
control QCBAY function block. The parameter ControlMode in function block
LOCREM is set to choose if the switch signals are coming from the local HMI or
from an external hardware switch connected via binary inputs.

13.4.5.1 Function block

LOCREM
CTRLOFF OFF
LOCCTRL LOCAL
REMCTRL REMOTE
LHMICTRL VALID

IEC05000360-2-en.vsd
IEC05000360 V2 EN

Figure 206: LOCREM function block

472
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

LOCREMCTRL
PSTO1 HMICTR1
PSTO2 HMICTR2
PSTO3 HMICTR3
PSTO4 HMICTR4
PSTO5 HMICTR5
PSTO6 HMICTR6
PSTO7 HMICTR7
PSTO8 HMICTR8
PSTO9 HMICTR9
PSTO10 HMICTR10
PSTO11 HMICTR11
PSTO12 HMICTR12

IEC05000361-2-en.vsd
IEC05000361 V2 EN

Figure 207: LOCREMCTRL function block

13.4.5.2 Signals
Table 295: LOCREM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
CTRLOFF BOOLEAN 0 Disable control
LOCCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Local in control
REMCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Remote in control
LHMICTRL INTEGER 0 LHMI control

Table 296: LOCREM Output signals

Name Type Description
OFF BOOLEAN Control is disabled
LOCAL BOOLEAN Local control is activated
REMOTE BOOLEAN Remote control is activated
VALID BOOLEAN Outputs are valid

Table 297: LOCREMCTRL Input signals

Name Type Default Description
PSTO1 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 1
PSTO2 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 2
PSTO3 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 3
PSTO4 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 4
PSTO5 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 5
PSTO6 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 6
PSTO7 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 7
PSTO8 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 8
PSTO9 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 9
Table continues on next page

473
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Name Type Default Description

PSTO10 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 10
PSTO11 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 11
PSTO12 INTEGER 0 PSTO input channel 12

Table 298: LOCREMCTRL Output signals

Name Type Description
HMICTR1 INTEGER Bitmask output 1 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR2 INTEGER Bitmask output 2 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR3 INTEGER Bitmask output 3 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR4 INTEGER Bitmask output 4 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR5 INTEGER Bitmask output 5 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR6 INTEGER Bitmask output 6 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR7 INTEGER Bitmask output 7 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR8 INTEGER Bitmask output 8 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR9 INTEGER Bitmask output 9 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR10 INTEGER Bitmask output 10 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR11 INTEGER Bitmask output 11 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR12 INTEGER Bitmask output 12 to local remote LHMI input

13.4.5.3 Settings
Table 299: LOCREM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ControlMode Internal LR-switch - - Internal LR-switch Control mode for internal/external LR-
External LR-switch switch

13.4.5.4 Operation principle

The function block Local remote (LOCREM) handles the signals coming from the
local/remote switch. The connections are seen in Figure 208, where the inputs on
function block LOCREM are connected to binary inputs if an external switch is
used. When the local HMI is used, the inputs are not used. The switching between
external and local HMI source is done through the parameter ControlMode. The
outputs from the LOCREM function block control the output PSTO (Permitted
Source To Operate) on Bay control (QCBAY).

474
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

LOCREM QCBAY
CTRLOFF OFF LR_ OFF PSTO
LOCCTRL LOCAL LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
REMCTRL REMOTE LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LHMICTRL VALID LR_ VALID LOC
BL_ UPD STA
BL_ CMD REM

LOCREM QCBAY
CTRLOFF OFF LR_ OFF PSTO
LOCCTRL LOCAL LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
REMCTRL REMOTE LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LHMICTRL VALID LR_ VALID LOC
BL_ UPD STA
BL_ CMD REM

LOCREMCTRL
PSTO1 HMICTR1
PSTO2 HMICTR2
PSTO3 HMICTR3
PSTO4 HMICTR4
PSTO5 HMICTR5
PSTO6 HMICTR6
PSTO7 HMICTR7
PSTO8 HMICTR8
PSTO9 HMICTR9
PSTO 10 HMICTR 10
PSTO 11 HMICTR 11
PSTO 12 HMICTR 12

IEC10000052-1-en.vsd
IEC10000052 V2 EN

Figure 208: Configuration for the local/remote handling for a local HMI with two
bays and two screen pages

If the IED contains control functions for several bays, the local/remote position can
be different for the included bays. When the local HMI is used the position of the
local/remote switch can be different depending on which single line diagram screen
page that is presented on the local HMI. The function block Local remote control
(LOCREMCTRL) controls the presentation of the LEDs for the local/remote
position to applicable bay and screen page.

The switching of the local/remote switch requires at least system operator level.
The password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have
been defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can
handle the control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined with the
IED Users tool in PCM600.

13.4.6 Switch controller SCSWI

475
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

13.4.6.1 Functionality

The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes and supervises all functions to properly
select and operate switching primary apparatuses. The Switch controller may
handle and operate on one three-phase device or up to three one-phase devices.

13.4.6.2 Function block

SCSWI
BLOCK EXE_OP
PSTO EXE_CL
L_SEL SEL_OP
L_OPEN SEL_CL
L_CLOSE SELECTED
AU_OPEN RES_RQ
AU_CLOSE START_SY
BL_CMD CANC_SY
RES_GRT POSITION
RES_EXT OPENPOS
SY_INPRO CLOSEPOS
SYNC_OK POLEDISC
EN_OPEN CMD_BLK
EN_CLOSE L_CAUSE
XPOS1 POS_INTR
XPOS2 XOUT
XPOS3

IEC05000337-3-en.vsd
IEC05000337 V3 EN

Figure 209: SCSWI function block

13.4.6.3 Signals
Table 300: SCSWI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 2 Operator place selection
L_SEL BOOLEAN 0 Select signal from local panel
L_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open signal from local panel
L_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close signal from local panel
AU_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Used for local automation function
AU_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Used for local automation function
BL_CMD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the command
RES_GRT BOOLEAN 0 Positive acknowledge that all reservations are
made
RES_EXT BOOLEAN 0 Reservation is made externally
SY_INPRO BOOLEAN 0 Synchronizing function in progress
SYNC_OK BOOLEAN 0 Closing is permitted at set to true by the
synchrocheck
EN_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Enables open operation
EN_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Enables close operation
Table continues on next page

476
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Name Type Default Description

XPOSL1 GROUP - Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase
SIGNAL
XPOSL2 GROUP - Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase
SIGNAL
XPOSL3 GROUP - Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase
SIGNAL

Table 301: SCSWI Output signals

Name Type Description
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Execute command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Execute command for close direction
SEL_OP BOOLEAN Selected for open command
SEL_CL BOOLEAN Selected for close command
SELECTED BOOLEAN Select conditions are fulfilled
RES_RQ BOOLEAN Request signal to the reservation function
START_SY BOOLEAN Starts the external synchronizing function
CANC_SY BOOLEAN Cancels the external synchronizing function,
started through START_SY
POSITION INTEGER Position indication
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Open position indication
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Closed position indication
POLEDISC BOOLEAN The positions for poles L1-L3 are not equal after
a set time
CMD_BLK BOOLEAN Commands are blocked
L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during command
POS_INTR BOOLEAN Stopped in intermediate position
XOUT BOOLEAN Execution information to XCBR/XSWI

AU_OPEN and AU_CLOSE are used to issue automated

commands as e.g. for load shedding for opening respectively
closing to the SCSWI function. They work without regard to how
the operator place selector, PSTO, is set. In order to have effect on
the outputs EXE_OP and EXE_CL, the corresponding enable input,
EN_OPEN respectively EN_CLOSE must be set, and that no
interlocking is active.

L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE are used for local command

sequence connected to binary inputs. In order to have effect, the
operator place selector, PSTO, must be set to local or to remote
with no priority. If the control model used is Select before operate,
Also the corresponding enable input must be set, and no

477
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

interlocking is active. The L_SEL input must be set before

L_OPEN or L_CLOSE is operated, if the control model is Select
before operate.

13.4.6.4 Settings
Table 302: SCSWI Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CtlModel Dir Norm - - SBO Enh Specifies control model type
SBO Enh
PosDependent Always permitted - - Always permitted Permission to operate depending on the
Not perm at 00/11 position
tSelect 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximum time between select and
execute signals
tResResponse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 5.000 Allowed time from reservation request to
reservation granted
tSynchrocheck 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 10.00 Allowed time for synchrocheck to fulfil
close conditions
tSynchronizing 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 0.00 Supervision time to get the signal
synchronizing in progress
tExecutionFB 0.00 - 600.00 s 0.01 30.00 Maximum time from command execution
to termination
tPoleDiscord 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Allowed time to have discrepancy
between the poles
SuppressMidPos Off - - On Mid-position is suppressed during the
On time tIntermediate
InterlockChk Sel & Op phase - - Sel & Op phase Selection if interlock check should be
Op phase done in select phase

13.4.6.5 Operation principle

The Switch controller (SCSWI) is provided with verification checks for the select -
execute sequence, that is, checks the conditions prior each step of the operation are
fulfilled. The involved functions for these condition verifications are interlocking,
reservation, blockings and synchrocheck.

Control handling
.
Two types of control models can be used. The two control models are "direct with
normal security" and "SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security". The
parameter CtlModel defines which one of the two control models is used. The
control model "direct with normal security" does not require a select whereas, the
"SBO with enhanced security" command model requires a select before execution.

Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting
position is not supervised. Enhanced security means that the command sequence is
supervised in three steps, the selection, command evaluation and the supervision of

478
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

position. Each step ends up with a pulsed signal to indicate that the respective step
in the command sequence is finished. If an error occurs in one of the steps in the
command sequence, the sequence is terminated. The last error (L_CAUSE) can be
read from the function block and used for example at commissioning.

There is no relation between the command direction and the actual

position. For example, if the switch is in close position it is possible
to execute a close command.

Before an execution command, an evaluation of the position is done. If the

parameter PosDependent is true and the position is in intermediate state or in bad
state no execution command is sent. If the parameter is false the execution
command is sent independent of the position value.

Evaluation of position
The position output from the switches (SXCBR or SXSWI) is connected to the
switch controller SCSWI. The XPOS1, XPOS2 and XPOS3 input signals receive
the position, time stamps and quality attributes of the position which is used for
further evaluation.

In the case when there are three one-phase switches connected to the switch control
function, the switch control will "merge" the position of the three switches to the
resulting three-phase position. In the case when the position differ between the one-
phase switches, following principles will be applied:

All switches in open position: switch control position = open

All switches in close position:
One switch =open, two switches= close (or
inversely):
Any switch in intermediate position:
Any switch in bad state:
switch control position = close
switch control position = intermediate
switch control position = intermediate
switch control position = bad state

The time stamp of the output three-phase position from switch control will have the
time stamp of the last changed phase when it reaches the end position. When it
goes to intermediate position or bad state, it will get the time stamp of the first
changed phase.

In addition, there is also the possibility that one of the one-phase switches will
change position at any time due to a trip. Such situation is here called pole
discordance and is supervised by this function. In case of a pole discordance
situation, that is, the positions of the one-phase switches are not equal positions for
a time longer than the setting tPoleDiscord, an error signal POLEDISC will be set.

In the supervision phase, the switch controller function evaluates the "cause"
values from the switch modules Circuit breaker (SXCBR)/ Circuit switch
(SXSWI). At error the "cause" value with highest priority is shown.

479
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Blocking principles
The blocking signals are normally coming from the bay control function (QCBAY)
and via the IEC 61850 communication from the operator place.

The different blocking possibilities are:

Block/deblock of command. It is used to block command for operation of

position.
Blocking of function, BLOCK. If the BLOCK signal is set, it means that the
function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control
commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.

The different block conditions will only affect the operation of this
function, that is, no blocking signals will be "forwarded" to other
functions. The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile
memory.

Dependence on Operator place

For commands from communication protocol, such as IEC61850-8-1 and DNP,
and through the inputs L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE, the operator place is
evaluated, and only commands from enabled operator places are accepted, see
Table 294. Commands through the inputs L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE are
always from the local operator place. For commands through the inputs AU_OPEN
and AU_CLOSE, the operator place is not evaluated, thus also accepted when the
operator place selector is set to Faulty or Off.

Interaction with synchrocheck and synchronizing functions

The Switch controller (SCSWI) works in conjunction with the synchrocheck and
the synchronizing function (SESRSYN). It is assumed that the synchrocheck
function is continuously in operation and gives the result to SCSWI. The result
from the synchrocheck function is evaluated during the close execution. If the
operator performs an override of the synchrocheck, the evaluation of the
synchrocheck state is omitted. When there is a positive confirmation from the
synchrocheck function, SCSWI will send the close signal EXE_CL to the switch
function Circuit breaker (SXCBR).

When there is no positive confirmation from the synchrocheck function, SCSWI

will send a start signal START_SY to the synchronizing function, which will send
the closing command to SXCBR when the synchronizing conditions are fulfilled,
see Figure 210. If no synchronizing function is included, the timer for supervision
of the "synchronizing in progress signal" is set to 0, which means no start of the
synchronizing function. SCSWI will then set the attribute "blocked-by-
synchrocheck" in the "cause" signal. See also the time diagram in Figure 214.

480
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

SCSWI SXCBR
EXE_CL
OR CLOSE

SYNC_OK
START_SY
CANC_SY
SY_INPRO
SESRSYN

CLOSECB
Synchro Synchronizing
check function

IEC09000209-2-en.vsd
IEC09000209 V2 EN

Figure 210: Example of interaction between SCSWI, SESRSYN (synchrocheck

and synchronizing function) and SXCBR function

Time diagrams
The Switch controller (SCSWI) function has timers for evaluating different time
supervision conditions. These timers are explained here.

The timer tSelect is used for supervising the time between the select and the
execute command signal, that is, the time the operator has to perform the command
execution after the selection of the object to operate.

select
execute command
tSelect
timer t1 t1>tSelect, then long-
operation-time in 'cause'
is set

en05000092.vsd
IEC05000092 V1 EN

Figure 211: tSelect

The parameter tResResponse is used to set the maximum allowed time to make the
reservation, that is, the time between reservation request and the feedback
reservation granted from all bays involved in the reservation function.

481
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

select

reservation request RES_RQ

reservation granted RES_GRT

command termination
tResResponse t1>tResResponse, then
timer 1-of-n-control in 'cause'
t1 is set
en05000093.vsd

IEC05000093 V1 EN

Figure 212: tResResponse

The timer tExecutionFB supervises the time between the execute command and the
command termination, see Figure 213.

execute command

position L1 open

close

position L2 open

close

position L3 open

close

cmd termination L1

cmd termination L2

cmd termination L3

cmd termination *

position open

close

t1>tExecutionFB, then
tExecutionFB timer long-operation-time in
t1 'cause' is set

* The cmd termination will be delayed one execution sample . APCtExecutionFB=IEC0

5000094=2=en=Original
.vsd
IEC05000094 V2 EN

Figure 213: tExecutionFB

The parameter tSynchrocheck is used to define the maximum allowed time between
the execute command and the input SYNC_OK to become true. If SYNC_OK=true
at the time the execute command signal is received, the timer "tSynchrocheck" will
not start. The start signal for the synchronizing is obtained if the synchrocheck
conditions are not fulfilled.

482
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

The parameter tSynchronizing is used to define the maximum allowed time

between the start signal for synchronizing and the confirmation that synchronizing
is in progress.

execute command

SYNC_OK

tSynchrocheck
t1
START_SY

SY_INPRO

tSynchronizing t2>tSynchronizing, then

t2 blocked-by-synchrocheck in
'cause' is set

en05000095.vsd

IEC05000095 V1 EN

Figure 214: tSynchroCheck and tSynchronizing

13.4.7 Circuit breaker SXCBR

13.4.7.1 Functionality

The purpose of Circuit breaker (SXCBR) is to provide the actual status of positions
and to perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to primary
apparatuses in the form of circuit breakers via binary output boards and to
supervise the switching operation and position.

13.4.7.2 Function block

SXCBR
BLOCK XPOS
LR_SWI EXE_OP
OPEN EXE_CL
CLOSE SUBSTED
BL_OPEN OP_BLKD
BL_CLOSE CL_BLKD
BL_UPD UPD_BLKD
POSOPEN POSITION
POSCLOSE OPENPOS
CBOPCAP CLOSEPOS
TR_OPEN TR_POS
TR_CLOSE CNT_VAL
RS_CNT L_CAUSE
EEH_WARN EEHEALTH
EEH_ALM CBOPCAP
XIN

IEC05000338-3-en.vsd
IEC05000338 V3 EN

Figure 215: SXCBR function block

483
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

13.4.7.3 Signals
Table 303: SXCBR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
LR_SWI BOOLEAN 0 Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
BL_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the position updating
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
CBOPCAP INTEGER 3 Breaker operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 =
CO, 4 = OCO, 5 = COCO, 6+ = More
TR_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of truck from I/O
TR_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of truck from I/O
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
EEH_WARN BOOLEAN 0 Warning from external equipment
EEH_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Alarm from external equipment
XIN BOOLEAN 0 Execution information from CSWI

Table 304: SXCBR Output signals

Name Type Description
XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to CSWI for CB
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Executes the command for close direction
OP_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for open
commands
CL_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for close
commands
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position indication is blocked
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position
TR_POS INTEGER Truck position indication
CNT_VAL INTEGER Operation counter value
L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during command
EEHEALTH INTEGER External equipment health. 1=No warning or
alarm, 2=Warning, 3=Alarm
CBOPCAP INTEGER Breaker operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 =
CO, 4 = OCO, 5 = COCO, 6+ = More

484
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

13.4.7.4 Settings
Table 305: SXCBR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tStartMove 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Supervision time for the apparatus to
move after a command
tIntermediate 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Allowed time for intermediate position
AdaptivePulse Not adaptive - - Not adaptive Output resets when a new correct end
Adaptive position is reached
tOpenPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for open command
tClosePulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for close command
InitialCount 0 - 20000 - 1 0 Initial number of operations (Initial count
value)

13.4.7.5 Operation principle

The Circuit breaker function (SXCBR) is used by other functions such as for
example, switch controller, protection functions, autorecloser function or an IEC
61850 client residing in another IED or the operator place. This switch function
executes commands, evaluates block conditions and evaluates different time
supervision conditions. Only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be
allowed, the function performs the execution command. In case of erroneous
conditions, the function indicates an appropriate "cause" value, see Table 289.

SXCBR has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter
value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from local
HMI, a binary input or remotely from the operator place by configuring a signal
from the Single Point Generic Control 8 signals (SPC8GAPC) for example. The
health of the external equipment, the switch, can be monitored according to
IEC61850-8-1. The operation counter functionality and the external equipment
health supervision are independent sub-functions of the circuit breaker function.

Local/Remote switch
One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXCBR to indicate the local/
remote switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is
set to TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard
level. If the signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher
level is permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of
position) are rejected, even trip commands from protection functions are rejected.
The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in Figure 216.

485
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Local= Operation at
UE switch yard level
TR

From I/O switchLR

FAL
SE
Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level

en05000096.vsd
IEC05000096 V1 EN

Figure 216: Local/Remote switch

Blocking principles
SXCBR includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking
signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients for example, switch
controller, protection functions and autoreclosure.

The blocking possibilities are:

Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open

command.
Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close
command.
Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position
values. Other signals related to the position will be reset.
Blocking of function, BLOCK. If BLOCK signal is set, it means that the
function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control
commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.

The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Substitution
The substitution part in SXCBR is used for manual set of the position and quality
of the switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual
value because that the real process value is erroneous for some reason. SXCBR
will then use the manually entered value instead of the value for positions
determined by the process.

It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the

position indication and the status information of the I/O board.
When substitution is enabled, the position values are blocked for
updating and other signals related to the position are reset. The
substituted values are stored in a non-volatile memory.

When the position of the SXCBR is substituted, its IEC61850-8-1

data object is marked as substituted and old data, but the position of
the connected SCSWI is only marked as old data.

486
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Time diagrams
There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and
tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the
execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for
intermediate position. Figure 217 explains these two timers during the execute phase.

EXE_CL AdaptivePulse = TRUE

Close pulse duration

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

if t1 > tStartMove then

tStartMove timer "switch-not-start-moving"
t1 attribute in 'cause' is set
tStartMove

if t2 > tIntermediate then

tIntermediate timer "persisting-intermediate-state"
t2 attribute in 'cause' is set
tIntermediate

en05000097.vsd

IEC05000097 V1 EN

Figure 217: The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate

The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses
to be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close
command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be
adaptive with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 218 shows the
principle of the execute output pulse. The AdaptivePulse parameter will have effect
on both execute output pulses.

487
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd
IEC05000098 V1 EN

Figure 218: Execute output pulse

If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed
tOpenPulse or tClosePulse.

The execute output pulses are reset when:

the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to true
the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, that is, tStartMove has
elapsed.

If the breaker reaches the final position before the execution pulse
time has elapsed, and AdaptivePulse is not true, the function waits
for the end of the execution pulse before telling the activating
function that the command is completed.

There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open
position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in closed
position and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional
condition that the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output
pulse is always activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the
configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains
active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed.

If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and

CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed the execute output
pulse resets only when timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed.

An example of when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is

shown in Figure 219 .

488
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=FALSE

tOpenPulse

EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=TRUE

tOpenPulse

tStartMove timer

en05000099.vsd
IEC05000099 V1 EN

Figure 219: Open command with open position indication

13.4.8 Circuit switch SXSWI

13.4.8.1 Functionality

The purpose of Circuit switch (SXSWI) function is to provide the actual status of
positions and to perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to
primary apparatuses in the form of disconnectors or earthing switches via binary
output boards and to supervise the switching operation and position.

13.4.8.2 Function block

SXSWI
BLOCK XPOS
LR_SWI EXE_OP
OPEN EXE_CL
CLOSE OP_BLKD
BL_OPEN CL_BLKD
BL_CLOSE UPD_BLKD
BL_UPD OPENPOS
POSOPEN CLOSEPOS
POSCLOSE CNT_VAL
SWOPCAP L_CAUSE
RS_CNT EEHEALTH
EEH_WARN SWOPCAP
EEH_ALM
XIN

IEC05000339-3-en.vsd
IEC05000339 V3 EN

Figure 220: SXSWI function block

489
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

13.4.8.3 Signals
Table 306: SXSWI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
LR_SWI BOOLEAN 0 Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
BL_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD BOOLEAN 0 Steady signal for block of the position updating
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
SWOPCAP INTEGER 4 Switch operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 =
C, 4 = O and C
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
EEH_WARN BOOLEAN 0 Warning from external equipment
EEH_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Alarm from external equipment
XIN BOOLEAN 0 Execution information from CSWI

Table 307: SXSWI Output signals

Name Type Description
XPOS GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to CSWI for DIS
EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL BOOLEAN Executes the command for close direction
OP_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for open
commands
CL_BLKD BOOLEAN Indication that the function is blocked for close
commands
UPD_BLKD BOOLEAN Update of position indication is blocked
OPENPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position
CNT_VAL INTEGER Operation counter value
L_CAUSE INTEGER Latest value of the error indication during command
EEHEALTH INTEGER External equipment health. 1=No warning or
alarm, 2=Warning, 3=Alarm
SWOPCAP INTEGER Switch operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 =
C, 4 = O and C

490
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

13.4.8.4 Settings
Table 308: SXSWI Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tStartMove 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 3.000 Supervision time for the apparatus to
move after a command
tIntermediate 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 15.000 Allowed time for intermediate position
AdaptivePulse Not adaptive - - Not adaptive Output resets when a new correct end
Adaptive position is reached
tOpenPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for open command
tClosePulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Output pulse length for close command
SwitchType Load Break - - Disconnector 1=LoadBreak,2=Disconnector,
Disconnector 3=EarthSw,4=HighSpeedEarthSw
Earthing Switch
HS Earthing Switch
InitialCount 0 - 20000 - 1 0 Initial number of operations (Initial count
value)

13.4.8.5 Operation principle

The users of the Circuit switch (SXSWI) are other functions such as for example,
switch controller, protection functions, autorecloser function, or a 61850 client
residing in another IED or the operator place. SXSWI executes commands,
evaluates block conditions and evaluates different time supervision conditions.
Only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be allowed, SXSWI performs
the execution command. In case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an
appropriate "cause" value, see Table 289.

SXSWI has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter
value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from a
binary input or remotely from the operator place by configuring a signal from the
Single Point Generic Control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO) for example.

Also, the health of the external equipment, the switch, can be monitored according
to IEC61850-8-1.

Local/Remote switch
One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXSWI to indicate the local/remote
switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to
TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If
the signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is
permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position)
from internal IED clients are rejected, even trip commands from protection
functions are rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in
Figure 221.

491
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Local= Operation at
UE switch yard level
TR

From I/O switchLR

FAL
SE
Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level

en05000096.vsd
IEC05000096 V1 EN

Figure 221: Local/Remote switch

Blocking principles
SXSWI includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking
signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients for example, switch
controller, protection functions and autorecloser.

The blocking possibilities are:

Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open

command.
Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close
command.
Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position
values. Other signals related to the position will be reset.
Blocking of function, BLOCK. If BLOCK signal is set, it means that the
function is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control
commands are rejected and functional and configuration data is visible.

The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Substitution
The substitution part in SXSWI is used for manual set of the position and quality of
the switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value
because the real process value is erroneous of some reason. SXSWI will then use
the manually entered value instead of the value for positions determined by the
process.

It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the

position indication and the status information of the I/O board.
When substitution is enabled, the position values are blocked for
updating and other signals related to the position are reset. The
substituted values are stored in a non-volatile memory.

When the position of the SXSWI is substituted, its IEC61850-8-1

data object is marked as substituted and old data, but the position
of the connected SCSWI is only marked as old data.

492
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Time diagrams
There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and
tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the
execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for
intermediate position. Figure 222 explains these two timers during the execute phase.

EXE_CL AdaptivePulse = TRUE

Close pulse duration

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

if t1 > tStartMove then

tStartMove timer "switch-not-start-moving"
t1 attribute in 'cause' is set
tStartMove

if t2 > tIntermediate then

tIntermediate timer "persisting-intermediate-state"
t2 attribute in 'cause' is set
tIntermediate

en05000097.vsd

IEC05000097 V1 EN

Figure 222: The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate

The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses
to be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close
command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be
adaptive with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 223 shows the
principle of the execute output pulse. The AdaptivePulse parameter will have effect
on both execute output pulses.

493
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd
IEC05000098 V1 EN

Figure 223: Execute output pulse

If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed
tOpenPulse or tClosePulse.

The execute output pulses are reset when:

the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to true
the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, that is, tStartMove has
elapsed.

If the controlled primary device reaches the final position before the
execution pulse time has elapsed, and AdaptivePulse is not true, the
function waits for the end of the execution pulse before telling the
activating function that the command is completed.

There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open
position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in close
position and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional
condition that the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output
pulse is always activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the
configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains
active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed.

If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and

CLOSEPOS =1) when a command is executed the execute output
pulse resets only when timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed.

An example when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is

shown in Figure 224.

494
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=FALSE

tOpenPulse

EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=TRUE

tOpenPulse

tStartMove timer

en05000099.vsd
IEC05000099 V1 EN

Figure 224: Open command with open position indication

13.4.9 Bay reserve QCRSV

13.4.9.1 Functionality

The purpose of the reservation function is primarily to transfer interlocking

information between IEDs in a safe way and to prevent double operation in a bay,
switchyard part, or complete substation.

13.4.9.2 Function block

QCRSV
EXCH_IN RES_GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2
RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3
RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6
RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7
RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS
BLK_RES ACK_TO_B
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_DATA EXCH_OUT

IEC05000340-2-en.vsd
IEC05000340 V2 EN

Figure 225: QCRSV function block

495
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

13.4.9.3 Signals
Table 309: QCRSV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
EXCH_IN INTEGER 0 Used for exchange signals between different
BayRes blocks
RES_RQ1 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 1 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ2 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 2 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ3 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 3 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ4 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 4 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ5 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 5 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ6 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 6 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ7 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 7 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ8 BOOLEAN 0 Signal for app. 8 that requests to do a reservation
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Reservation is not possible and the output signals
are reset
OVERRIDE BOOLEAN 0 Signal to override the reservation
RES_DATA INTEGER 0 Reservation data coming from function block ResIn

Table 310: QCRSV Output signals

Name Type Description
RES_GRT1 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app. 1 is allowed to
operate
RES_GRT2 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app. 2 is allowed to
operate
RES_GRT3 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app. 3 is allowed to
operate
RES_GRT4 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app. 4 is allowed to
operate
RES_GRT5 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app. 5 is allowed to
operate
RES_GRT6 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app. 6 is allowed to
operate
RES_GRT7 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app. 7 is allowed to
operate
RES_GRT8 BOOLEAN Reservation is made and the app. 8 is allowed to
operate
RES_BAYS BOOLEAN Request for reservation of other bays
ACK_TO_B BOOLEAN Acknowledge to other bays that this bay is reserved
RESERVED BOOLEAN Indicates that the bay is reserved
EXCH_OUT INTEGER Used for exchange signals between different
BayRes blocks

496
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

13.4.9.4 Settings
Table 311: QCRSV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tCancelRes 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 10.000 Supervision time for canceling the
reservation
ParamRequest1 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 1
ParamRequest2 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 2
ParamRequest3 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 3
ParamRequest4 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 4
ParamRequest5 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 5
ParamRequest6 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 6
ParamRequest7 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 7
ParamRequest8 Other bays res. - - Only own bay res. Reservation of the own bay only, at
Only own bay res. selection of apparatus 8

13.4.9.5 Operation principle

The Bay reserve (QCRSV) function handles the reservation. QCRSV function
starts to operate in two ways. It starts when there is a request for reservation of the
own bay or if there is a request for reservation from another bay. It is only possible
to reserve the function if it is not currently reserved. The signal that can reserve the
own bay is the input signal RES_RQx (x=1-8) coming from switch controller
(SCWI). The signals for request from another bay are the outputs RE_RQ_B and
V_RE_RQ from function block RESIN. These signals are included in signal
EXCH_OUT from RESIN and are connected to RES_DATA in QCRSV.

The parameters ParamRequestx (x=1-8) are chosen at reservation of the own bay
only (TRUE) or other bays (FALSE). To reserve the own bay only means that no
reservation request RES_BAYS is created.

Reservation request of own bay

If the reservation request comes from the own bay, the function QCRSV has to
know which apparatus the request comes from. This information is available with
the input signal RES_RQx and parameter ParamRequestx (where x=1-8 is the
number of the requesting apparatus). In order to decide if a reservation request of
the current bay can be permitted QCRSV has to know whether the own bay already
is reserved by itself or another bay. This information is available in the output
signal RESERVED.

497
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

If the RESERVED output is not set, the selection is made with the output
RES_GRTx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus), which is
connected to switch controller SCSWI. If the bay already is reserved the command
sequence will be reset and the SCSWI will set the attribute "1-of-n-control" in the
"cause" signal.

Reservation of other bays

When the function QCRSV receives a request from an apparatus in the own bay
that requires other bays to be reserved as well, it checks if it already is reserved. If
not, it will send a request to the other bays that are predefined (to be reserved) and
wait for their response (acknowledge). The request of reserving other bays is done
by activating the output RES_BAYS.

When it receives acknowledge from the bays via the input RES_DATA, it sets the
output RES_GRTx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus). If not
acknowledgement from all bays is received within a certain time defined in SCSWI
(tResResponse), the SCSWI will reset the reservation and set the attribute "1-of-n-
control" in the "cause" signal.

Reservation request from another bay

When another bay requests for reservation, the input BAY_RES in corresponding
function block RESIN is activated. The signal for reservation request is grouped
into the output signal EXCH_OUT in RESIN, which is connected to input
RES_DATA in QCRSV. If the bay is not reserved, the bay will be reserved and the
acknowledgment from output ACK_T_B is sent back to the requested bay. If the
bay already is reserved the reservation is kept and no acknowledgment is sent.

Blocking and overriding of reservation

If QCRSV function is blocked (input BLK_RES is set to true) the reservation is
blocked. That is, no reservation can be made from the own bay or any other bay.
This can be set, for example, via a binary input from an external device to prevent
operations from another operator place at the same time.

The reservation function can also be overridden in the own bay with the
OVERRIDE input signal, that is, reserving the own bay without waiting for the
external acknowledge.

Bay with more than eight apparatuses

If only one instance of QCRSV is used for a bay that is, use of up to eight
apparatuses, the input EXCH_IN must be set to FALSE.

If there are more than eight apparatuses in the bay there has to be one additional
QCRSV. The two QCRSV functions have to communicate and this is done through
the input EXCH_IN and EXCH_OUT according to Figure 226. If more than one
QCRSV are used, the execution order is very important. The execution order must
be in the way that the first QCRSV has a lower number than the next one.

498
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

QCRSV
EXCH_IN RES_GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2
RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3
RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6
RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7
RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS
BLK_RES ACK_TO_B
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_DATA EXCH_OUT

QCRSV
EXCH_IN RES_GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2
RES_BAYS
RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3 1
RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6 ACK_TO_B
RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7 1
RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS
BLK_RES ACK_TO_B RESERVED
1
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_DATA EXCH_OUT

IEC05000088_2_en.vsd
IEC05000088 V2 EN

Figure 226: Connection of two QCRSV function blocks

13.4.10 Reservation input RESIN

13.4.10.1 Functionality

The Reservation input (RESIN) function receives the reservation information from
other bays. The number of instances is the same as the number of involved bays
(up to 60 instances are available).

13.4.10.2 Function block

RESIN1
BAY_ACK ACK_F_B
BAY_VAL ANY_ACK
BAY_RES VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT

IEC05000341-2-en.vsd
IEC05000341 V2 EN

Figure 227: RESIN1 function block

499
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

RESIN2
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
IEC09000807_1_en.vsd
IEC09000807 V1 EN

Figure 228: RESIN2 function block

13.4.10.3 Signals
Table 312: RESIN1 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BAY_ACK BOOLEAN 0 Another bay has acknow. the reservation req.
from this bay
BAY_VAL BOOLEAN 0 The reserv. and acknow. signals from another
bay are valid
BAY_RES BOOLEAN 0 Request from other bay to reserve this bay

Table 313: RESIN1 Output signals

Name Type Description
ACK_F_B BOOLEAN All other bays have acknow. the reserv. req. from
this bay
ANY_ACK BOOLEAN Any other bay has acknow. the reserv. req. from
this bay
VALID_TX BOOLEAN The reserv. and acknow. signals from other bays
are valid
RE_RQ_B BOOLEAN Request from other bay to reserve this bay
V_RE_RQ BOOLEAN Check if the request of reserving this bay is valid
EXCH_OUT INTEGER Used for exchange signals between different
ResIn blocks

Table 314: RESIN2 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
EXCH_IN INTEGER 5 Used for exchange signals between different
ResIn blocks
BAY_ACK BOOLEAN 0 Another bay has acknow. the reservation req.
from this bay
BAY_VAL BOOLEAN 0 The reserv. and acknow. signals from another
bay are valid
BAY_RES BOOLEAN 0 Request from other bay to reserve this bay

500
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Table 315: RESIN2 Output signals

Name Type Description
ACK_F_B BOOLEAN All other bays have acknow. the reserv. req. from
this bay
ANY_ACK BOOLEAN Any other bay has acknow. the reserv. req. from
this bay
VALID_TX BOOLEAN The reserv. and acknow. signals from other bays
are valid
RE_RQ_B BOOLEAN Request from other bay to reserve this bay
V_RE_RQ BOOLEAN Check if the request of reserving this bay is valid
EXCH_OUT INTEGER Used for exchange signals between different
ResIn blocks

13.4.10.4 Settings
Table 316: RESIN1 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FutureUse Bay in use - - Bay in use The bay for this ResIn block is for future
Bay future use use

Table 317: RESIN2 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FutureUse Bay in use - - Bay in use The bay for this ResIn block is for future
Bay future use use

13.4.10.5 Operation principle

The reservation input (RESIN) function is based purely on Boolean logic

conditions. The logic diagram in Figure 229 shows how the output signals are
created. The inputs of the function block are connected to a receive function block
representing signals transferred over the station bus from another bay.

501
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

EXCH_IN INT

BIN

ACK_F_B
&
FutureUse
1

ANY_ACK
BAY_ACK 1

VALID_TX
&

BAY_VAL 1

RE_RQ_B
1

BAY_RES &
V _RE_RQ
1

BIN
EXCH_OUT
INT

en05000089.vsd
IEC05000089 V1 EN

Figure 229: Logic diagram for RESIN

Figure 230 describes the principle of the data exchange between all RESIN
modules in the current bay. There is one RESIN function block per "other bay"
used in the reservation mechanism. The output signal EXCH_OUT in the last
RESIN functions are connected to the module bay reserve (QCRSV) that handles
the reservation function in the own bay.

502
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

RESIN
BAY_ACK ACK_F_B
Bay 1 BAY_VAL ANY_ACK
BAY_RES VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT

RESIN
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
Bay 2 BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT

RESIN
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
Bay n BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B QCRSV
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT RES_DATA

en05000090.vsd
IEC05000090 V2 EN

Figure 230: Diagram of the chaining principle for RESIN

13.5 Voltage control

13.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Automatic voltage control for tap TR1ATCC 90
changer, single control
U

IEC10000165 V1 EN

Automatic voltage control for tap TR8ATCC 90

changer, parallel control
U

IEC10000166 V1 EN

Tap changer control and supervision, 6 TCMYLTC - 84

binary inputs
Tap changer control and supervision, TCLYLTC - 84
32 binary inputs

503
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

13.5.2 Functionality
The voltage control functions, Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single
control TR1ATCC, Automatic voltage control for tap changer, parallel control
TR8ATCC and Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC
as well as Tap changer control and supervision, 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC are
used for control of power transformers with a on-load tap changer. The functions
provide automatic regulation of the voltage on the secondary side of transformers
or alternatively on a load point further out in the network.

Control of a single transformer, as well as control of up to eight transformers in

parallel is possible. For parallel control of power transformers, three alternative
methods are available, the master-follower method, the circulating current method
and the reverse reactance method. The first two methods require exchange of
information between the parallel transformers and this is provided for within IEC
61850-8-1.

Voltage control includes many extra features such as possibility of to avoid

simultaneous tapping of parallel transformers, hot stand by regulation of a
transformer in a group which regulates it to a correct tap position even though the
LV CB is open, compensation for a possible capacitor bank on the LV side bay of a
transformer, extensive tap changer monitoring including contact wear and hunting
detection, monitoring of the power flow in the transformer so that for example, the
voltage control can be blocked if the power reverses etc.

13.5.3 Automatic voltage control for tap changer TR1ATCC and

TR8ATCC

The Automatic voltage control for tap changer TR1ATCC for single control and
TR8ATCC for parallel control function controls the voltage on the LV side of a
transformer either automatically or manually. The automatic control can be either
for a single transformer, or for a group of parallel transformers.

13.5.3.1 Operation principle

The LV-side of the transformer is used as the voltage measuring point. If

necessary, the LV side current is used as load current to calculate the line-voltage
drop to the regulation point. This current is also used when parallel control with the
circulating current method is used.

In addition, all three-phase currents from the HV-winding (usually the winding
where the tap changer is situated) are used by the Automatic voltage control for tap
changer TR1ATCC for single control and TR8ATCC for parallel control function
for over current blocking.

The setting MeasMode is a selection of single-phase, or phase-phase, or positive

sequence quantity. It is to be used for voltage and current measurement on the LV-

504
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

side. The involved phases are also selected. Thus, single-phases as well as phase-
phase or three-phase feeding on the LV-side is possible but it is commonly selected
for current and voltage.

The analog input signals are normally common for other functions in the IED for
example, protection functions.

The LV-busbar voltage is designated UB, load current IL and for

load point voltage UL will be used in the text to follow.

Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single control TR1ATCC

Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single control TR1ATCC measures the
magnitude of the busbar voltage UB. If no other additional features are enabled
(line voltage drop compensation), this voltage is further used for voltage regulation.

TR1ATCC then compares this voltage with the set voltage, USet and decides
which action should be taken. To avoid unnecessary switching around the setpoint,
a deadband (degree of insensitivity) is introduced. The deadband is symmetrical
around USet, see figure 231, and it is arranged in such a way that there is an outer
and an inner deadband. Measured voltages outside the outer deadband start the
timer to initiate tap commands, whilst the sequence resets when the measured
voltage is once again back inside the inner deadband. One half of the outer
deadband is denoted U. The setting of U, setting Udeadband should be set to a
value near to the power transformers tap changer voltage step (typically 75125%
of the tap changer step).

Security Range

*) *) *)
Raise Cmd DU DU Lower Cmd
DUin DUin

0 Ublock Umin U1 Uset U2 Umax Voltage Magnitude

*) Action in accordance with setting

IEC06000489_2_en.vsd
IEC06000489 V2 EN

Figure 231: Control actions on a voltage scale

During normal operating conditions the busbar voltage UB, stays within the outer
deadband (interval between U1 and U2 in figure 231). In that case no actions will
be taken by the TR1ATCC. However, if UB becomes smaller than U1, or greater
than U2, an appropriate lower or raise timer will start. The timer will run as long as
the measured voltage stays outside the inner deadband. If this condition persists
longer than the preset time delay, TR1ATCC will initiate that the appropriate
ULOWER or URAISE command will be sent from Tap changer control and
supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC, or 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC to the
transformer load tap changer. If necessary, the procedure will be repeated until the
magnitude of the busbar voltage again falls within the inner deadband. One half of

505
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

the inner deadband is denoted Uin. The inner deadband Uin, setting
UDeadbandInner should be set to a value smaller than U. It is recommended to
set the inner deadband to 25-70% of the U value.

This way of working is used by TR1ATCC while the busbar voltage is within the
security range defined by settings Umin and Umax

A situation where UB falls outside this range will be regarded as an abnormal

situation.

Instead of controlling the voltage at the LV busbar in the same substation as the
transformer itself, it is possible to control the voltage at a load point out in the
network, downstream from the transformer. The Line Voltage Drop Compensation
(LDC) can be selected by a setting parameter, and it works such that the voltage
drop from the transformer location to the load point is calculated based on the
measured load current and the known line impedance.

In order to prevent unnecessary load tap changer operations caused by temporary

voltage fluctuations and to coordinate load tap changer operations in radial
networks, a time delay is used for the tapping command to the load tap changer.
The time delay can be either definite time or inverse time and two time settings are
used, the first (t1) for the initial delay of a tap command, and the second (t2) for
consecutive tap commands.

Automatic control for tap changer, parallel control TR8ATCC

Parallel control of power transformers means control of two or more power
transformers connected to the same busbar on the LV side and in most cases also
on the HV side. Special measures must be taken in order to avoid a runaway
situation where the tap changers on the parallel transformers gradually diverge and
end up in opposite end positions.

Three alternative methods can be used for parallel control with Automatic control
for tap changer, parallel control TR8ATCC:
master-follower method
reverse reactance method
circulating current method.

Parallel control with the master-follower method

In the master-follower method, one of the transformers is selected to be master, and
will regulate the voltage in accordance with the principles Automatic voltage
control for a tap changer. Selection of the master is made by activating the binary
input FORCMAST in the TR8ATCC function block for one of the transformers in
the group.

The followers can act in one of two alternative ways selected by a setting parameter:

1. Raise and lower commands (URAISE and ULOWER) generated by the

master, initiates the corresponding command in all follower TR8ATCCs

506
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

simultaneously, and consequently they will blindly follow the master

commands irrespective of their individual tap positions.
2. The followers read the tap position of the master and adapt to the same tap
position or to a tap position with an offset relative to the master. In this mode,
the followers can also be time delayed relative to the master.

Parallel control with the reverse reactance method

In the reverse reactance method, the LDC (Line voltage drop compensation) is
used. The purpose of which is normally to control the voltage at a load point
further out in the network. The very same function can also be used here but with a
completely different objective. Whereas the LDC, when used to control the voltage
at a load point, gives a voltage drop along a line from the busbar voltage UB to a
load point voltage UL, the LDC, when used in the reverse reactance parallel control
of transformers, gives a voltage increase (actually, by adjusting the ratio XL/RL
with respect to the power factor, the length of the vector UL will be approximately
equal to the length of UB) from UB up towards the transformer itself.

When the voltage at a load point is controlled by using LDC, the line impedance
from the transformer to the load point is defined by the setting Xline. If a negative
reactance is entered instead of the normal positive line reactance, parallel
transformers will act in such a way that the transformer with a higher tap position
will be the first to tap down when the busbar voltage increases, and the transformer
with a lower tap position will be the first to tap up when the busbar voltage
decreases. The overall performance will then be that a runaway tap situation will be
avoided and that the circulating current will be minimized.

Parallel control with the circulating current method

This method requires extensive exchange of data between the TR8ATCC function
blocks (one TR8ATCC function for each transformer in the parallel group). The
TR8ATCC function block can either be located in the same IED, where they are
configured in PCM600 to co-operate, or in different IEDs. If the functions are
located in different IEDs they must communicate via GOOSE interbay
communication on the IEC 61850 communication protocol.

If the functions are located in different IEDs they must communicate via GOOSE
interbay communication on the IEC 61850 communication protocol. Complete
exchange of TR8ATCC data, analog as well as binary, via GOOSE is made
cyclically every 300 ms.

The main objectives of the circulating current method for parallel voltage control are:

1. Regulate the busbar or load voltage to the preset target value.

2. Minimize the circulating current in order to achieve optimal sharing of the
reactive load between parallel transformers.

The busbar voltage UB is measured individually for each transformer in the

parallel group by its associated TR8ATCC function. These measured values will
then be exchanged between the transformers, and in each TR8ATCC block, the

507
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

mean value of all UB values will be calculated. The resulting value UBmean will
then be used in each IED instead of UB for the voltage regulation, thus assuring
that the same value is used by all TR8ATCC functions, and thereby avoiding that
one erroneous measurement in one transformer could upset the voltage regulation.
At the same time, supervision of the VT mismatch is also performed.

Figure 232 shows an example with two transformers connected in parallel. If

transformer T1 has higher no load voltage it will drive a circulating current which
adds to the load current in T1 and subtracts from the load current in T2.

UT1 ICC...T2 UT2

ICC...T2
+ +
T1 T2 ZT1 IT1 IT2 ZT2
ICC...T1 ICC...T1

IT1 IT2
UB
IL IL

UL Load UL Load

IEC06000484_2_en.vsd
IEC06000484 V2 EN

Figure 232: Circulating current in a parallel group of two transformers

It can be shown that the magnitude of the circulating current in this case can be
approximately calculated with the formula:

UT1 - UT 2
I cc _ T 1 = I cc _ T 2 =
ZT 1 + ZT 2
EQUATION1866 V1 EN (Equation 73)

Because the transformer impedance is dominantly inductive, it is possible to use

just the transformer reactances in the above formula. At the same time this means
that T1 circulating current lags the busbar voltage by almost 90, while T2
circulating current leads the busbar voltage by almost 90.

See figure 233.

508
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

UT1 CT1*ICC_T1*ZT1

UB
CT2*ICC_T2*ZT2

UT2

IL

IT2 IT1

2*Udeadband

ICC_T2 ICC_T1
T2 Receives Cir_Curr T1 Produces Cir_Curr

IL = IT1+ IT2
Icc_T1 = Imag {IT1- (ZT2/(ZT1+ZT2)) * IL}
Icc_T2 = Imag {IT2- (ZT1/(ZT1+ZT2)) * IL}
en06000525.vsd
IEC06000525 V1 EN

Figure 233: Vector diagram for two power transformers working in parallel

Thus, by minimizing the circulating current flow through transformers, the total
reactive power flow is optimized as well. In the same time, at this optimum state
the apparent power flow is distributed among the transformers in the group in
proportion to their rated power.

In order to calculate the circulating current, measured current values for the
individual transformers must be communicated between the participating
TR8ATCC functions. It should be noted that the Fourier filters in different IEDs
run asynchronously, which means that current and voltage phasors cannot be
exchanged and used for calculation directly between the IEDs. In order to
synchronize measurements within all IEDs in the parallel group, a common
reference must be chosen. The most suitable reference quantity for all transformers,
belonging to the same parallel group, is the busbar voltage. This means that the
measured busbar voltage is used as a reference phasor in all IEDs, and the position
of the current phasors in a complex plane is calculated in respect to this reference.
This is a simple and effective solution, which eliminates any additional need for
synchronization between the IEDs regarding TR8ATCC function.

At each transformer bay, the real and imaginary parts of the current on the
secondary side of the transformer are calculated from measured values, and
distributed to the TR8ATCC functions belonging to the same parallel group.

As mentioned before, only the imaginary part (reactive current component) of the
individual transformer current is needed for the circulating current calculations.

509
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

The real part of the current will, however, be used to calculate the total through
load current and will be used for the line voltage drop compensation.

The total load current is defined as the sum of all individual transformer currents:

k
I L = Ii
i =1

EQUATION1867 V1 EN (Equation 74)

where the subscript i signifies the transformer bay number and k the number of
parallel transformers in the group (k 8). Next step is to extract the circulating
current Icc_i that flows in bay i. It is possible to identify a term in the bay current
which represents the circulating current. The magnitude of the circulating current
in bay i, Icc_i , can be calculated as:

I cc _ i = - Im( I i - K i I L )
EQUATION1868 V1 EN (Equation 75)

where Im signifies the imaginary part of the expression in brackets and Ki is a

constant which depends on the number of transformers in the parallel group and
their short-circuit reactances. The TR8ATCC function automatically calculates this
constant based on the transformer reactances which are setting parameters, and
shall be given in primary ohms calculated from each transformer rating plate. The
minus sign is added in the above equation in order to get a positive value of the
circulating current for the transformer that generates it.

In this way each TR8ATCC function calculates the circulating current of its own bay.

A plus sign means that the transformer produces circulating current while, a minus
sign means that the transformer receives circulating current.

As a next step, it is necessary to estimate the value of the no-load voltage in each
transformer. To do that the magnitude of the circulating current in each bay is first
converted to a voltage deviation, Udi, with the following formula:

U di = Ci I cc _ i X i
EQUATION1869 V1 EN (Equation 76)

where Xi is the short-circuit reactance for transformer i and Ci, is a setting

parameter named Comp which serves the purpose of alternatively increasing or
decreasing the impact of the circulating current in the TR8ATCC control
calculations. It should be noted that Udi will have positive values for transformers
that produce circulating current and negative values for transformers that receive
circulating current.

Now the magnitude of the no-load voltage for each transformer can be
approximated with:

510
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

U i = U Bmean + U di
EQUATION1870 V1 EN (Equation 77)

Generally speaking, this value for the no-load voltage can then be put into the
voltage control function in a similar way as for the single transformer described
previously. Ui would then be regarded similarly to the single transformer measured
busbar voltage, and further control actions taken.

For the transformer producing/receiving the circulating current, the calculated no-
load voltage will be greater/smaller than the measured voltage UBmean. The
calculated no-load voltage will thereafter be compared with the set voltage USet. A
steady deviation which is outside the outer deadband will result in ULOWER or
URAISE being initiated alternatively. In this way the overall control action will
always be correct since the position of a tap changer is directly related to the
transformer no-load voltage. The sequence resets when UBmean is inside the inner
deadband at the same time as the calculated no-load voltages for all transformers in
the parallel group are inside the outer deadband. The example in figure 234,is a
fabricated case and not very realistic, but it illustrates some details on how the
described regulation works.

T1 T2 T3 T4

UBmean
T1 No-load voltage

DB1

DB2
USet

DB2

DB1

IEC06000526_2_en.vsd
IEC06000526 V2 EN

Figure 234: Selection of transformer to tap

In the figure 234, voltage is considered as increasing above the line denoted USet,
and decreasing below that line.

In the TR8ATCC function for T1 and T4, the calculated no-load voltage for T1 and
T4 respectively, is above the upper limit of DB1 and thus outside the deadband.

511
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

In the TR8ATCC function for T2, the calculated no-load voltage for T2, viewed
from the upper DB1, is not outside (above) the deadband, but as viewed from the
lower DB1 it is outside (below) the deadband. However, there is a restriction in a
situation like this, when the measured busbar voltage, UBmean, is on the opposite
side of the USet line (in figure 234), then UBmean must be inside DB1 if the
calculated no-load voltage for that transformer shall qualify as a candidate for
tapping. Thus in the example above, the calculated no-load voltage for T2,
although below DB1, would not be considered for tapping in this case.

In the TR8ATCC function for T3, the calculated no-load voltage for T3, is above
the upper limit of DB1 and thus outside the deadband. However, viewed from the
upper limit DB1, transformers with negative voltage deviation, Udi, are disregarded
and similarly, viewed from the lower limit DB1, transformers with positive voltage
deviation, Udi, are disregarded. Thus in the example above, the calculated no-load
voltage for T3, although above DB1, would not be considered in this case. Thus in
the example above, the calculated no-load voltage for T3, although above DB1,
would not be considered for tapping in this case.

It is possible to avoid simultaneous tapping, and to distribute tapping actions

evenly among the parallel transformers in a busbar group. This is a selected by a
setting parameter, and the algorithm in the TR8ATCC function will then select the
transformer with the greatest voltage deviation Udi to tap first that is, after time
delay t1. Thereafter, the transformer with the then greatest value of Udi amongst the
remaining transformers in the group will tap after a further time delay t2, and so
on. This is made possible as the calculation of Icc is updated every time the
measured values are exchanged on the horizontal communication (every 300 ms).
If two transformers have equal magnitude of Udi, then there is a predetermined
order governing which one is going to tap first.

512
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Logic diagrams

AUTO

UL a
a<b
< &
U1 INNER DB b &

a
a>b
>
U2 INNER DB b &

a
a<b
>1 URAISE
<
U1 DB b

a
a>b
>1
> >1 ULOWER
U2 DB b

UB a
a>b
>
U MAX b &

FSD &

en06000509.vsd
IEC06000509 V1 EN

Figure 235: Simplified logic for automatic control in single mode operation

513
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

AUTO

PARALLEL START
&
OPERSIMTAP

UL a
a<b
< &
U1 INNER DB b &
&
a
a>b
>
U2 INNER DB b &
U CIRCCOMP
&
MIN a
a<b
>1 URAISE
<
U1 DB b >1
U CIRCCOMP
MAX a
a>b
>1
> >1 ULOWER
U2 DB b >1

UB a
a>b
>
U MAX b &

FSD &

en06000511.vsd
IEC06000511 V1 EN

Figure 236: Simplified logic for parallel control in the circulating current mode

514
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

UCCT4 a
a=b
b &
T4PG &
T4
UCCT3 a 1
a=b & 1
b & & &
T3PG T3 SIMLOWER
1
UCCT2 a
a=b
1 &
b & &
T2
T2PG

UCCT1 a &
a=b
1 &
& T1
b

MAX
T1PG

a
a=b
b &
&
T1
a 1
a=b & 1
b & & &
T2PG T2 SIMRAISE
1
a
a=b
1 &
b & &
T3
T3PG

a &
a=b
1 &
T4
b &
T4PG

MIN

ADAPT

a
1
a=b
ActualUser S b

1 1
1
Udeadband S a
a=b
b
LoadVoltage

HOMING

OperSimTap
1
en06000521.vsd
IEC06000521 V1 EN

Figure 237: Simplified logic for simultaneous tapping prevention

515
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

From the Master via

horizontal comm.

relativePosition a
a<b
<
raiseVoltageOut
b &
&
lowerVoltageOut
a
a>b
> =
b & URAISE
& 1
Follow Tap

&
& = ULOWER
1 1
YLTCOUT ATCCIN

tapPosition &
&
tapInHighVoltPos

tapInLowVoltPos

en06000510.vsd
IEC06000510 V1 EN

Figure 238: Simplified logic for parallel control in Master-Follower mode

13.5.4 Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs

TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC

The Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs (TCMYLTC) and 32
binary inputs TCLYLTC gives the tap commands to the tap changer, and
supervises that commands are carried through correctly. It has built-in extensive
possibilities for tap changer position measurement, as well as supervisory and
monitoring features. This is used in the voltage control and can also give
information about tap position to the transformer differential protection.

13.5.4.1 Operation principle

Reading of tap changer position

The tap changer position can be received to the tap changer control and
supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC or 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC function
block in the following ways:

1. Via binary input signals, one per tap position (max. 6 or 32 positions).
2. Via coded binary (Binary), binary coded decimal (BCD) signals, or Gray
coded binary signals.
3. Via a mA input signal.

516
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Via binary input signals, one per tap position

In this option, each tap position has a separate contact that is hard wired to a binary
input in the IED. Via the Signal Matrix tool in PCM600, the contacts on the binary
input card are then directly connected to the
inputs B1 B6 on TCMYLTC function
or inputs B1 B32 on TCLYLTC function.

Via coded binary (Binary), binary coded decimal (BCD) signals or Gray
coded binary signals
The Tap changer control and supervision, (TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC) decodes
binary data from up to six binary inputs to an integer value. The input pattern may
be decoded either as BIN, BCD or GRAY format depending on the setting of the
parameter CodeType.

It is also possible to use even parity check of the input binary signal. Whether the
parity check shall be used or not is set with the setting parameter UseParity.

The input BIERR on (TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC) can be used as supervisory input

for indication of any external error ( Binary Input Module) in the system for
reading of tap changer position. Likewise, the input OUTERR can be used as a
supervisory of the Binary Input Module.

The truth table (see table 318) shows the conversion for Binary, Binary Coded
Decimal, and Gray coded signals.

517
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Table 318: Binary, BCD and Gray conversion

IEC06000522 V1 EN

The Gray code conversion above is not complete and therefore the conversion from
decimal numbers to Gray code is given below.

518
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Table 319: Gray code conversion

IEC06000523 V1 EN

Via a mA input signal

Any of the six inputs on the mA card (MIM) can be used for the purpose of tap
changer position reading connected to the Tap changer control and supervision, 6
binary inputs TCMYLTC or 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC.

519
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

The measurement of the tap changer position via MIM module is based on the
principle that the specified mA input signal range (usually 4-20 mA) is divided into
N intervals corresponding to the number of positions available on the tap changer.
All mA values within one interval are then associated with one tap changer
position value.

The number of available tap changer positions N is defined by the setting

parameters LowVoltTap and HighVoltTap, which define the tap position for lowest
voltage and highest voltage respectively.

13.5.5 Connection between TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC and

TCMYLTCor TCLYLTC
The two function blocks Automatic voltage control for tap changer, single control
TR1ATCC and parallel control TR8ATCC and Tap changer control and
supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC and 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC are
connected to each other according to figure 239 below.

520
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

(Rmk. In case of
parallel control,
this signal shall
TR8ATCC TCLYLTC also be connected
I3P1 ATCCOUT YLTCIN URAISE to HORIZx input of
I3P2 MAN TCINPROG ULOWER the parallel
U3P2 AUTO INERR HIPOSAL transformer
BLOCK IBLK RESETERR LOPOSAL TR8ATCC function
MANCTRL PGTFWD OUTERR POSERRAL
block)
AUTOCTRL PLTREV RS_CLCNT CMDERRAL
PSTO QGTFWD RS_OPCNT TCERRAL
RAISEV QLTREV PARITY POSOUT
LOWERV REVACBLK BIERR CONVERR
EAUTOBLK UHIGH B1 NEWPOS
DEBLKAUT ULOW B2 HIDIFPOS
LVA1 UBLK B3 INVALPOS
LVA2 HOURHUNT B4 YLTCOUT
LVA3 DAYHUNT B5
LVA4 HUNTING B6
LVARESET SINGLE B7
RSTERR PARALLEL B8
DISC HOMING B9
Q1ON ADAPT B10
Q2ON TOTBLK B11
Q3ON AUTOBLK B12
SNGLMODE MASTER B13
T1INCLD FOLLOWER B14
T2INCLD MFERR B15
T3INCLD OUTOFPOS B16
T4INCLD COMMERR B17
T5INCLD ICIRC B18
T6INCLD TRFDISC B19
T7INCLD VTALARM B20
T8INCLD T1PG B21
FORCMAST T2PG B22
RSTMAST T3PG B23
ATCCIN T4PG B24
HORIZ1 T5PG B25
HORIZ2 T6PG B26
HORIZ3 T7PG B27
HORIZ4 T8PG B28
HORIZ5 B29
HORIZ6 B30
HORIZ7 B31
HORIZ8 B32
MA

IEC06000507_2_en.vsd

IEC06000507 V2 EN

Figure 239: Connection between TR8ATCC and TCLYLTC

The TR8ATCC and TR1ATCC function blocks have an output signal ATCCOUT,
which is connected to input YLTCIN on TCMYLTC. The data set sent from
ATCCOUT to YLTCIN contains 5 binary signals, one word containing 10 binary
signals and 1 analog signal. For TR8ATCC data is also sent from output
ATCCOUT to other TR8ATCC function input HORIZx, when the master-follower
or circulating current mode is used.

521
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Table 320: Binary signals: ATCCOUT / YLTCIN

Signal Description
raiseVolt Order to TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC to make a raise command
lowerVolt Order to TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC to make a lower command
automaticCtrl The regulation is in automatic control
extRaiseBlock Block raise commands
extLowerBlock Block lower commands

Table 321: Binary signals contained in word enableBlockSignals: ATCCOUT / YLTCIN

Signal Description
CircCurrBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of high circulating current
CmdErrBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of command error
OCBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of over current
MFPosDiffBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because the tap difference between a
follower and the master is greater than the set value
OVPartBl Alarm/Block raise commands because the busbar voltage is above Umax
RevActPartBl Alarm/Block raise commands because reverse action is activated
TapChgBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of tap changer error
TapPosBl Alarm/Block commands in one direction because the tap changer has
reached an end position, or Alarm/Block tap changer operation because of
tap changer error
UVBl Alarm/Block tap changer operation because the busbar voltage is below Ublock
UVPartBl Alarm/Block lower commands because the busbar voltage is between Umin
and Ublock

Table 322: Analog signal: ATCCOUT / YLTCIN

Signal Description
currAver Value of current in the phase with the highest current value

In case of parallel control of transformers, the data set sent from output signal
ATCCOUT to other TR8ATCC blocks input HORIZx contains one "word"
containing 10 binary signals and 6 analog signals:

Table 323: Binary signals contained in word status: ATCCOUT / HORIZx

Signal Description
TimerOn This signal is activated by the transformer that has started its timer and is
going to tap when the set time has expired.
automaticCTRL Activated when the transformer is set in automatic control
mutualBlock Activated when the automatic control is blocked
disc Activated when the transformer is disconnected from the busbar
receiveStat Signal used for the horizontal communication
Table continues on next page

522
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Signal Description
TermIsForcedMaster Activated when the transformer is selected Master in the master-follower
parallel control mode
TermIsMaster Activated for the transformer that is master in the master-follower parallel
control mode
termReadyForMSF Activated when the transformer is ready for master-follower parallel control
mode
raiseVoltageOut Order from the master to the followers to tap up
lowerVoltageOut Order from the master to the followers to tap down

Table 324: Analog signals: ATCCOUT / HORIZx

Signal Description
voltageBusbar Measured busbar voltage for this transformer
ownLoad Currim Measured load current imaginary part for this transformer
ownLoadCurrre Measured load current real part for this transformer
reacSec Transformer reactance in primary ohms referred to the LV side
relativePosition The transformer's actual tap position
voltage Setpoint The transformer's set voltage (USet) for automatic control

The TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC function blocks have an output YLTCOUT. As

shown in figure 239, this output shall be connected to the input ATCCIN and it
contains 10 binary signals and 4 integer signals:

Table 325: Binary signals: YLTCOUT / ATCCIN

Signal Description
tapInOperation Tap changer in operation, changing tap position
direction Direction, raise or lower, for the most recent tap changer operation
tapInHighVoltPos Tap changer in high end position
tapInLowVoltPos Tap changer in low end position
tapPositionError Error in reading of tap position ( tap position out of range, more than one
step change, BCD code error (unaccepted combination), parity fault, mA out
of range, hardware fault for example, BIM etc.)
tapChgError This is set high when the tap changer has not carried through a raise/lower
command within the expected max. time, or if the tap changer starts tapping
without a given command.
cmdError This is set high if a given raise/lower command is not followed by a tap
position change within the expected max. time
raiseVoltageFb Feedback to TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC that a raise command shall be executed
lowerVoltageFb Feedback to TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC that a lower command shall be executed
timeOutTC Setting value of tTCTimeout that tTCTimeout has timed out.

523
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Table 326: Integer signals: YLTCOUT / ATCCIN

Signal
tapPosition
numberOfOperations
tapPositionMaxVolt
tapPositionMinVolt
Description
Actual tap position as reported from the load tap changer
Accumulated number of tap changer operations
Tap position for highest voltage
Tap position for lowest voltage

13.5.6 Function block

TR1ATCC
I3P1* ATCCOUT
I3P2* MAN
U3P2* AUTO
BLOCK IBLK
MANCTRL PGTFWD
AUTOCTRL PLTREV
PSTO QGTFWD
RAISEV QLTREV
LOWERV REVACBLK
EAUTOBLK UHIGH
DEBLKAUT ULOW
LVA1 UBLK
LVA2 HOURHUNT
LVA3 DAYHUNT
LVA4 HUNTING
LVARESET TIMERON
RSTERR TOTBLK
ATCCIN AUTOBLK
UGTUPPDB
ULTLOWDB

IEC07000041_2_en.vsd
IEC07000041 V2 EN

Figure 240: TR1ATCC function block

524
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

TR8ATCC
I3P1* ATCCOUT
I3P2* MAN
U3P2* AUTO
BLOCK IBLK
MANCTRL PGTFWD
AUTOCTRL PLTREV
PSTO QGTFWD
RAISEV QLTREV
LOWERV REVACBLK
EAUTOBLK UHIGH
DEBLKAUT ULOW
LVA1 UBLK
LVA2 HOURHUNT
LVA3 DAYHUNT
LVA4 HUNTING
LVARESET SINGLE
RSTERR PARALLEL
DISC TIMERON
Q1ON HOMING
Q2ON ADAPT
Q3ON TOTBLK
SNGLMODE AUTOBLK
T1INCLD MASTER
T2INCLD FOLLOWER
T3INCLD MFERR
T4INCLD OUTOFPOS
T5INCLD UGTUPPDB
T6INCLD ULTLOWDB
T7INCLD COMMERR
T8INCLD ICIRC
FORCMAST TRFDISC
RSTMAST VTALARM
ATCCIN T1PG
HORIZ1 T2PG
HORIZ2 T3PG
HORIZ3 T4PG
HORIZ4 T5PG
HORIZ5 T6PG
HORIZ6 T7PG
HORIZ7 T8PG
HORIZ8

IEC07000040_2_en.vsd
IEC07000040 V2 EN

Figure 241: TR8ATCC function block

TCMYLTC
YLTCIN* URAISE
TCINPROG ULOWER
INERR HIPOSAL
RESETERR LOPOSAL
OUTERR POSERRAL
RS_CLCNT CMDERRAL
RS_OPCNT TCERRAL
PARITY POSOUT
BIERR CONVERR
B1 NEWPOS
B2 HIDIFPOS
B3 INVALPOS
B4 TCPOS
B5 YLTCOUT
B6
MA

IEC07000038_2_en.vsd
IEC07000038 V2 EN

Figure 242: TCMYLTC function block

525
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

TCLYLTC
YLTCIN* URAISE
TCINPROG ULOWER
INERR HIPOSAL
RESETERR LOPOSAL
OUTERR POSERRAL
RS_CLCNT CMDERRAL
RS_OPCNT TCERRAL
PARITY POSOUT
BIERR CONVERR
B1 NEWPOS
B2 HIDIFPOS
B3 INVALPOS
B4 TCPOS
B5 YLTCOUT
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
B32
MA

IEC07000037_2_en.vsd
IEC07000037 V2 EN

Figure 243: TCLYLTC function block

VCTRRCV
BLOCK VCTR_REC
COMVALID
DATVALID

IEC07000045-2-en.vsd
IEC07000045 V2 EN

Figure 244: VCTRRCV function block

526
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

13.5.7 Signals
Table 327: TR1ATCC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P1 GROUP - Input group for current on HV side
SIGNAL
I3P2 GROUP - Input group for current on LV side
SIGNAL
U3P2 GROUP - Input group for voltage on LV side
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
MANCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Binary "MAN" command
AUTOCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Binary "AUTO" command
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection
RAISEV BOOLEAN 0 Binary "UP" command
LOWERV BOOLEAN 0 Binary "DOWN" command
EAUTOBLK BOOLEAN 0 Block the voltage control in automatic control mode
DEBLKAUT BOOLEAN 0 Binary "Deblock Auto" command
LVA1 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 1
LVA2 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 2
LVA3 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 3
LVA4 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 4
LVARESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset LVA adjustment to 0
RSTERR BOOLEAN 0 Resets the automatic control commands raise
and lower
ATCCIN GROUP - Group connection from YLTCOUT
SIGNAL

Table 328: TR1ATCC Output signals

Name Type Description
ATCCOUT GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to horizontal communication
and YLTCIN
MAN BOOLEAN The control is in manual mode
AUTO BOOLEAN Automatic control mode is active
IBLK BOOLEAN One phase current is above the settable limit
PGTFWD BOOLEAN Active power above the settable limit
powerActiveForw
PLTREV BOOLEAN Active power below the settable limit
powerActiveRev
QGTFWD BOOLEAN Reactive power above the settable limit
powerReactiveForw
QLTREV BOOLEAN Reactive power below the settable limit
powerReactiveRev
REVACBLK BOOLEAN Block caused by reversed action
Table continues on next page

527
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Name Type Description

UHIGH BOOLEAN Busbar voltage above the settable limit
voltBusbMaxLimit
ULOW BOOLEAN Busbar voltage below the settable limit
voltBusbMinLimit
UBLK BOOLEAN Busbar voltage below the settable limit
voltBusbBlockLimit
HOURHUNT BOOLEAN Alarm for too many tap changer operations during
the last hour
DAYHUNT BOOLEAN Alarm for too many tap changer operations during
the last 24 hours
HUNTING BOOLEAN Alarm for too many contradictory tap changer
operations within the time sliding window
TIMERON BOOLEAN Raise or lower command to the tap activated
TOTBLK BOOLEAN Block of auto and manual commands
AUTOBLK BOOLEAN Block of auto commands
UGTUPPDB BOOLEAN Voltage greater than deadband-high, ULOWER
command to come
ULTLOWDB BOOLEAN Voltage lower than deadband-low, URAISE
command to come
RAISE BOOLEAN Raise voltage order to tapchanger
LOWER BOOLEAN Lower voltage order to tapchanger
USETOUT REAL Voltage setpoint used in single mode (service
value)
IPRIM REAL Max of 3 phase currents (service value)

Table 329: TR8ATCC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P1 GROUP - Input group for current on HV side
SIGNAL
I3P2 GROUP - Input group for current on LV side
SIGNAL
U3P2 GROUP - Input group for voltage on LV side
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
MANCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Binary "MAN" command
AUTOCTRL BOOLEAN 0 Binary "AUTO" command
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection
RAISEV BOOLEAN 0 Binary "UP" command
LOWERV BOOLEAN 0 Binary "DOWN" command
EAUTOBLK BOOLEAN 0 Block the voltage control in automatic control mode
DEBLKAUT BOOLEAN 0 Binary "Deblock Auto" command
LVA1 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 1
LVA2 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 2
LVA3 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 3
Table continues on next page

528
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Name Type Default Description

LVA4 BOOLEAN 0 Activation of load voltage adjust. factor 4
LVARESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset LVA adjustment to 0
RSTERR BOOLEAN 0 Resets the automatic control commands raise
and lower
DISC BOOLEAN 0 Disconnected transformer
Q1ON BOOLEAN 0 Capacitor or reactor bank 1 connected
Q2ON BOOLEAN 0 Capacitor or reactor bank 2 connected
Q3ON BOOLEAN 0 Capacitor or reactor bank 3 connected
SNGLMODE BOOLEAN 0 The voltage control in single control
T1INCLD BOOLEAN 0 Transformer1 included in parallel group
T2INCLD BOOLEAN 0 Transformer2 included in parallel group
T3INCLD BOOLEAN 0 Transformer3 included in parallel group
T4INCLD BOOLEAN 0 Transformer4 included in parallel group
T5INCLD BOOLEAN 0 Transformer5 included in parallel group
T6INCLD BOOLEAN 0 Transformer6 included in parallel group
T7INCLD BOOLEAN 0 Transformer7 included in parallel group
T8INCLD BOOLEAN 0 Transformer8 included in parallel group
FORCMAST BOOLEAN 0 Force transformer to master
RSTMAST BOOLEAN 0 Reset forced master transformer to default
ATCCIN GROUP - Group connection from YLTCOUT
SIGNAL
HORIZ1 GROUP - Group connection for horizontal communication
SIGNAL from T1
HORIZ2 GROUP - Group connection for horizontal communication
SIGNAL from T2
HORIZ3 GROUP - Group connection for horizontal communication
SIGNAL from T3
HORIZ4 GROUP - Group connection for horizontal communication
SIGNAL from T4
HORIZ5 GROUP - Group connection for horizontal communication
SIGNAL from T5
HORIZ6 GROUP - Group connection for horizontal communication
SIGNAL from T6
HORIZ7 GROUP - Group connection for horizontal communication
SIGNAL from T7
HORIZ8 GROUP - Group connection for horizontal communication
SIGNAL from T8

529
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Table 330: TR8ATCC Output signals

Name Type Description
ATCCOUT GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to horizontal communication
and YLTCIN
MAN BOOLEAN The control is in manual mode
AUTO BOOLEAN Automatic control mode is active
IBLK BOOLEAN One phase current is above the settable limit
PGTFWD BOOLEAN Active power above the settable limit
powerActiveForw
PLTREV BOOLEAN Active power below the settable limit
powerActiveRev
QGTFWD BOOLEAN Reactive power above the settable limit
powerReactiveForw
QLTREV BOOLEAN Reactive power below the settable limit
powerReactiveRev
REVACBLK BOOLEAN Block caused by reversed action
UHIGH BOOLEAN Busbar voltage above the settable limit
voltBusbMaxLimit
ULOW BOOLEAN Busbar voltage below the settable limit
voltBusbMinLimit
UBLK BOOLEAN Busbar voltage below the settable limit
voltBusbBlockLimit
HOURHUNT BOOLEAN Alarm for too many tap changer operations during
the last hour
DAYHUNT BOOLEAN Alarm for too many tap changer operations during
the last 24 hours
HUNTING BOOLEAN Alarm for too many contradictory tap changer
operations within the time sliding window
SINGLE BOOLEAN The transformer operates in single mode
PARALLEL BOOLEAN The transformer operates in parallel mode
TIMERON BOOLEAN Raise or lower command to the tap activated
HOMING BOOLEAN Transformer is in homing conditions
ADAPT BOOLEAN The transformer is adapting
TOTBLK BOOLEAN Block of auto and manual commands
AUTOBLK BOOLEAN Block of auto commands
MASTER BOOLEAN The transformer is master
FOLLOWER BOOLEAN This transformer is a follower
MFERR BOOLEAN The number of masters is different from one
OUTOFPOS BOOLEAN To high difference in tap positions
UGTUPPDB BOOLEAN Voltage greater than deadband-high, ULOWER
command to come
ULTLOWDB BOOLEAN Voltage lower than deadband-low, URAISE
command to come
COMMERR BOOLEAN Communication error
ICIRC BOOLEAN Block from high circulating current
Table continues on next page

530
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Name Type Description

TRFDISC BOOLEAN The transformer is disconnected
VTALARM BOOLEAN VT supervision alarm
T1PG BOOLEAN Transformer1 included in parallel group
T2PG BOOLEAN Transformer2 included in parallel group
T3PG BOOLEAN Transformer3 included in parallel group
T4PG BOOLEAN Transformer4 included in parallel group
T5PG BOOLEAN Transformer5 included in parallel group
T6PG BOOLEAN Transformer6 included in parallel group
T7PG BOOLEAN Transformer7 included in parallel group
T8PG BOOLEAN Transformer8 included in parallel group
RAISE BOOLEAN Raise voltage order to tapchanger
LOWER BOOLEAN Lower voltage order to tapchanger
USETOUT REAL Voltage setpoint used in single mode (service
value)
IPRIM REAL Max of 3 phase currents (service value)

Table 331: TCMYLTC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
YLTCIN GROUP - Input group connection for YLTC
SIGNAL
TCINPROG BOOLEAN 0 Indication that tap is moving
INERR BOOLEAN 0 Supervision signal of the input board
RESETERR BOOLEAN 0 Reset of command and tap error
OUTERR BOOLEAN 0 Supervision off the digital output board
RS_CLCNT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of the contact life counter
RS_OPCNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
PARITY BOOLEAN 0 Parity bit from tap changer for the tap position
BIERR BOOLEAN 0 Error bit from tap changer for the tap position
B1 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 1 from tap changer for the tap position
B2 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 2 from tap changer for the tap position
B3 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 3 from tap changer for the tap position
B4 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 4 from tap changer for the tap position
B5 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 5 from tap changer for the tap position
B6 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 6 from tap changer for the tap position
MA REAL 0 mA from tap changer for the tap position

531
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Table 332: TCMYLTC Output signals

Name Type Description
URAISE BOOLEAN Raise voltage command to tap changer
ULOWER BOOLEAN Lower voltage command to tap changer
HIPOSAL BOOLEAN Alarm for tap in highest volt position
LOPOSAL BOOLEAN Alarm for tap in lowest volt position
POSERRAL BOOLEAN Alarm that indicates a problem with the position
indication
CMDERRAL BOOLEAN Alarm for a command without an expected
position change
TCERRAL BOOLEAN Alarm for none or illegal tap position change
POSOUT BOOLEAN Tap position outside min and max position
CONVERR BOOLEAN General tap position conversion error
NEWPOS BOOLEAN A new tap position is reported, 1 sec pulse
HIDIFPOS BOOLEAN Tap position has changed more than one position
INVALPOS BOOLEAN Last position change was an invalid change
CNT_VAL INTEGER Number of operations on tap changer
TCPOS INTEGER Integer value corresponding to actual tap position
YLTCOUT GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to ATCCIN

Table 333: TCLYLTC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
YLTCIN GROUP - Input group connection for YLTC
SIGNAL
TCINPROG BOOLEAN 0 Indication that tap is moving
INERR BOOLEAN 0 Supervision signal of the input board
RESETERR BOOLEAN 0 Reset of command and tap error
OUTERR BOOLEAN 0 Supervision off the digital output board
RS_CLCNT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of the contact life counter
RS_OPCNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets the operation counter
PARITY BOOLEAN 0 Parity bit from tap changer for the tap position
BIERR BOOLEAN 0 Error bit from tap changer for the tap position
B1 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 1 from tap changer for the tap position
B2 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 2 from tap changer for the tap position
B3 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 3 from tap changer for the tap position
B4 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 4 from tap changer for the tap position
B5 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 5 from tap changer for the tap position
B6 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 6 from tap changer for the tap position
B7 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 7 from tap changer for the tap position
B8 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 8 from tap changer for the tap position
B9 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 9 from tap changer for the tap position
Table continues on next page

532
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Name Type Default Description

B10 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 10 from tap changer for the tap position
B11 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 11 from tap changer for the tap position
B12 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 12 from tap changer for the tap position
B13 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 13 from tap changer for the tap position
B14 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 14 from tap changer for the tap position
B15 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 15 from tap changer for the tap position
B16 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 16 from tap changer for the tap position
B17 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 17 from tap changer for the tap position
B18 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 18 from tap changer for the tap position
B19 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 19 from tap changer for the tap position
B20 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 20 from tap changer for the tap position
B21 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 21 from tap changer for the tap position
B22 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 22 from tap changer for the tap position
B23 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 23 from tap changer for the tap position
B24 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 24 from tap changer for the tap position
B25 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 25 from tap changer for the tap position
B26 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 26 from tap changer for the tap position
B27 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 27 from tap changer for the tap position
B28 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 28 from tap changer for the tap position
B29 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 29 from tap changer for the tap position
B30 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 30 from tap changer for the tap position
B31 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 31 from tap changer for the tap position
B32 BOOLEAN 0 Bit 32 from tap changer for the tap position
MA REAL 0 mA from tap changer for the tap position

Table 334: TCLYLTC Output signals

Name Type Description
URAISE BOOLEAN Raise voltage command to tap changer
ULOWER BOOLEAN Lower voltage command to tap changer
HIPOSAL BOOLEAN Alarm for tap in highest volt position
LOPOSAL BOOLEAN Alarm for tap in lowest volt position
POSERRAL BOOLEAN Alarm that indicates a problem with the position
indication
CMDERRAL BOOLEAN Alarm for a command without an expected
position change
TCERRAL BOOLEAN Alarm for none or illegal tap position change
POSOUT BOOLEAN Tap position outside min and max position
CONVERR BOOLEAN General tap position conversion error
NEWPOS BOOLEAN A new tap position is reported, 1 sec pulse
HIDIFPOS BOOLEAN Tap position has changed more than one position
Table continues on next page

533
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Name Type Description

INVALPOS BOOLEAN Last position change was an invalid change
CNT_VAL INTEGER Number of operations on tap changer
TCPOS INTEGER Integer value corresponding to actual tap position
YLTCOUT GROUP SIGNAL Group connection to ATCCIN

Table 335: VCTRRCV Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 336: VCTRRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
VCTR_REC GROUP SIGNAL Received data from horizontal communication
COMVALID BOOLEAN Communication is valid
DATVALID BOOLEAN Data valid

13.5.8 Settings
Table 337: TR1ATCC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
MeasMode L1 - - PosSeq Selection of measured voltage and
L2 current
L3
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
PosSeq
TotalBlock Off - - Off Total block of the voltage control function
On
AutoBlock Off - - Off Block of the automatic mode in voltage
On control function
FSDMode Off - - Off Fast step down function activation mode
Auto
AutoMan
tFSD 1.0 - 100.0 s 0.1 15.0 Time delay for lower command when
fast step down mode is activated
USet 85.0 - 120.0 %UB 0.1 100.0 Voltage control set voltage, % of rated
voltage
UDeadband 0.2 - 9.0 %UB 0.1 1.2 Outer voltage deadband, % of rated
voltage
UDeadbandInner 0.1 - 9.0 %UB 0.1 0.9 Inner voltage deadband, % of rated
voltage
Table continues on next page

534
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Umax 80 - 180 %UB 1 105 Upper lim of busbar voltage, % of rated
voltage
Umin 70 - 120 %UB 1 80 Lower lim of busbar voltage, % of rated
voltage
Ublock 50 - 120 %UB 1 80 Undervoltage block level, % of rated
voltage
t1Use Constant - - Constant Activation of long inverse time delay
Inverse
t1 3 - 1000 s 1 60 Time delay (long) for automatic control
commands
t2Use Constant - - Constant Activation of short inverse time delay
Inverse
t2 1 - 1000 s 1 15 Time delay (short) for automatic control
commands
tMin 3 - 120 s 1 5 Minimum operating time in inverse mode
OperationLDC Off - - Off Operation line voltage drop compensation
On
OperCapaLDC Off - - Off LDC compensation for capacitive load
On
Rline 0.00 - 150.00 Ohm 0.01 0.0 Line resistance, primary values, in ohm
Xline -150.00 - 150.00 Ohm 0.01 0.0 Line reactance, primary values, in ohm
LVAConst1 -20.0 - 20.0 %UB 0.1 0.0 Constant 1 for LVA, % of regulated
voltage
LVAConst2 -20.0 - 20.0 %UB 0.1 0.0 Constant 2 for LVA, % of regulated
voltage
LVAConst3 -20.0 - 20.0 %UB 0.1 0.0 Constant 3 for LVA, % of regulated
voltage
LVAConst4 -20.0 - 20.0 %UB 0.1 0.0 Constant 4 for LVA, % of regulated
voltage
VRAuto -20.0 - 20.0 %UB 0.1 0.0 Load voltage auto correction, % of rated
voltage
OperationRA Off - - Off Enable block from reverse action
On supervision
tRevAct 30 - 6000 s 1 60 Duration time for the reverse action
block signal
RevActLim 0 - 100 %IB1 1 95 Current limit for reverse action block in
% of I1Base
Iblock 5 - 250 %IB1 1 150 Overcurrent block level, % of rated current
HourHuntDetect 0 - 30 Op/H 1 30 Level for number of counted raise/lower
within one hour
DayHuntDetect 0 - 100 Op/D 1 100 Level for number of counted raise/lower
within 24 hour
tWindowHunt 1 - 120 Min 1 60 Time window for hunting alarm, minutes
NoOpWindow 3 - 30 Op/W 1 30 Hunting detection alarm, max operations/
window
P> -9999.99 - 9999.99 MW 0.01 1000 Alarm level of active power in forward
direction
Table continues on next page

535
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

P< -9999.99 - 9999.99 MW 0.01 -1000 Alarm level of active power in reverse
direction
Q> -9999.99 - 9999.99 MVAr 0.01 1000 Alarm level of reactive power in forward
direction
Q< -9999.99 - 9999.99 MVAr 0.01 -1000 Alarm level of reactive power in reverse
direction
tPower 1 - 6000 s 1 10 Time delay for alarms from power
supervision

Table 338: TR1ATCC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Xr2 0.1 - 200.0 Ohm 0.1 0.5 Transformer reactance in primary ohms
on ATCC side
CmdErrBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block command error
Auto&Man Block
OCBk Alarm - - Auto&Man Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block overcurrent
Auto&Man Block
OVPartBk Alarm - - Auto&Man Block Alarm or auto&man partial block for
Auto&Man Block overvoltage
RevActPartBk Alarm - - Alarm Alarm or auto partial block for reverse
Auto Block action
TapChgBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block tap changer error
Auto&Man Block
TapPosBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto or auto&man block for pos
Auto Block sup
Auto&Man Block
UVBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block undervoltage
Auto&Man Block
UVPartBk Alarm - - Alarm Alarm or auto&man partial block for
Auto&Man Block undervoltage
GlobalBaseSel1 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups, winding 1
GlobalBaseSel2 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups, winding 2

536
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Table 339: TR8ATCC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
MeasMode L1 - - PosSeq Selection of measured voltage and
L2 current
L3
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
PosSeq
Q1 -9999.99 - 9999.99 MVAr 0.01 0 Size of cap/reactor bank 1 in MVAr, >0
for C and <0 for L
Q2 -9999.99 - 9999.99 MVAr 0.01 0 Size of cap/reactor bank 2 in MVAr, >0
for C and <0 for L
Q3 -9999.99 - 9999.99 MVAr 0.01 0 Size of cap/reactor bank 3 in MVAr, >0
for C and <0 for L
TotalBlock Off - - Off Total block of the voltage control function
On
AutoBlock Off - - Off Block of the automatic mode in voltage
On control function
FSDMode Off - - Off Fast step down function activation mode
Auto
AutoMan
tFSD 1.0 - 100.0 s 0.1 15.0 Time delay for lower command when
fast step down mode is activated
USet 85.0 - 120.0 %UB 0.1 100.0 Voltage control set voltage, % of rated
voltage
UDeadband 0.2 - 9.0 %UB 0.1 1.2 Outer voltage deadband, % of rated
voltage
UDeadbandInner 0.1 - 9.0 %UB 0.1 0.9 Inner voltage deadband, % of rated
voltage
Umax 80 - 180 %UB 1 105 Upper lim of busbar voltage, % of rated
voltage
Umin 70 - 120 %UB 1 80 Lower lim of busbar voltage, % of rated
voltage
Ublock 50 - 120 %UB 1 80 Undervoltage block level, % of rated
voltage
t1Use Constant - - Constant Activation of long inverse time delay
Inverse
t1 3 - 1000 s 1 60 Time delay (long) for automatic control
commands
t2Use Constant - - Constant Activation of short inverse time delay
Inverse
t2 1 - 1000 s 1 15 Time delay (short) for automatic control
commands
tMin 3 - 120 s 1 5 Minimum operating time in inverse mode
OperationLDC Off - - Off Operation line voltage drop compensation
On
OperCapaLDC Off - - Off LDC compensation for capacitive load
On
Table continues on next page

537
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Rline 0.00 - 150.00 Ohm 0.01 0.0 Line resistance, primary values, in ohm
Xline -150.00 - 150.00 Ohm 0.01 0.0 Line reactance, primary values, in ohm
LVAConst1 -20.0 - 20.0 %UB 0.1 0.0 Constant 1 for LVA, % of regulated
voltage
LVAConst2 -20.0 - 20.0 %UB 0.1 0.0 Constant 2 for LVA, % of regulated
voltage
LVAConst3 -20.0 - 20.0 %UB 0.1 0.0 Constant 3 for LVA, % of regulated
voltage
LVAConst4 -20.0 - 20.0 %UB 0.1 0.0 Constant 4 for LVA, % of regulated
voltage
VRAuto -20.0 - 20.0 %UB 0.1 0.0 Load voltage auto correction, % of rated
voltage
OperationRA Off - - Off Enable block from reverse action
On supervision
tRevAct 30 - 6000 s 1 60 Duration time for the reverse action
block signal
RevActLim 0 - 100 %IB1 1 95 Current limit for reverse action block in
% of I1Base
Iblock 5 - 250 %IB1 1 150 Overcurrent block level, % of rated current
HourHuntDetect 0 - 30 Op/H 1 30 Level for number of counted raise/lower
within one hour
DayHuntDetect 0 - 100 Op/D 1 100 Level for number of counted raise/lower
within 24 hour
tWindowHunt 1 - 120 Min 1 60 Time window for hunting alarm, minutes
NoOpWindow 3 - 30 Op/W 1 30 Hunting detection alarm, max operations/
window
P> -9999.99 - 9999.99 MW 0.01 1000 Alarm level of active power in forward
direction
P< -9999.99 - 9999.99 MW 0.01 -1000 Alarm level of active power in reverse
direction
Q> -9999.99 - 9999.99 MVAr 0.01 1000 Alarm level of reactive power in forward
direction
Q< -9999.99 - 9999.99 MVAr 0.01 -1000 Alarm level of reactive power in reverse
direction
tPower 1 - 6000 s 1 10 Time delay for alarms from power
supervision
OperationPAR Off - - Off Parallel operation, Off/CirculatingCurrent/
CC MasterFollower
MF
OperCCBlock Off - - On Enable block from circulating current
On supervision
CircCurrLimit 0.0 - 20000.0 %IB2 0.1 100.0 Block level for circulating current
tCircCurr 0 - 1000 s 1 30 Time delay for block from circulating
current
Comp 0 - 2000 % 1 100 Compensation parameter in % for
Circulating Current
OperSimTap Off - - Off Simultaneous tapping prohibited
On
Table continues on next page

538
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OperUsetPar Off - - Off Use common voltage set point for
On parallel operation
OperHoming Off - - Off Activate homing function
On
VTmismatch 0.5 - 10.0 %UB 0.1 10.0 Alarm level for VT supervision, % of
rated voltage
tVTmismatch 1 - 600 s 1 10 Time delay for VT supervision alarm
T1RXOP Off - - Off Receive block operation from parallel
On transformer1
T2RXOP Off - - Off Receive block operation from parallel
On transformer2
T3RXOP Off - - Off Receive block operation from parallel
On transformer3
T4RXOP Off - - Off Receive block operation from parallel
On transformer4
T5RXOP Off - - Off Receive block operation from parallel
On transformer5
T6RXOP Off - - Off Receive block operation from parallel
On transformer6
T7RXOP Off - - Off Receive block operation from parallel
On transformer7
T8RXOP Off - - Off Receive block operation from parallel
On transformer8
TapPosOffs -5 - 5 - 1 0 Tap position offset in relation to the master
MFPosDiffLim 1 - 20 - 1 1 Limit for tap pos difference from master
tMFPosDiff 0 - 6000 s 1 60 Time for tap pos difference from master

Table 340: TR8ATCC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrfId T1 - - T1 Identity of transformer
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
Xr2 0.1 - 200.0 Ohm 0.1 0.5 Transformer reactance in primary ohms
on ATCC side
tAutoMSF 0 - 60 s 1 10 Time delay for command for auto follower
OperationAdapt Off - - Off Enable adapt mode
On
MFMode Follow Cmd - - Follow Cmd Select follow tap or follow command
Follow Tap
CircCurrBk Alarm - - Alarm Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block high circ current
Auto&Man Block
Table continues on next page

539
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CmdErrBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block command error
Auto&Man Block
OCBk Alarm - - Auto&Man Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block overcurrent
Auto&Man Block
MFPosDiffBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm or auto block for tap position
Auto Block difference in MF
OVPartBk Alarm - - Auto&Man Block Alarm or auto&man partial block for
Auto&Man Block overvoltage
RevActPartBk Alarm - - Alarm Alarm or auto partial block for reverse
Auto Block action
TapChgBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block tap changer error
Auto&Man Block
TapPosBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto or auto&man block for pos
Auto Block sup
Auto&Man Block
UVBk Alarm - - Auto Block Alarm, auto block or auto&man block for
Auto Block undervoltage
Auto&Man Block
UVPartBk Alarm - - Alarm Alarm or auto&man partial block for
Auto&Man Block undervoltage
GlobalBaseSel1 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups, winding 1
GlobalBaseSel2 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups, winding 2

Table 341: TCMYLTC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
tTCTimeout 1 - 120 s 1 5 Tap changer constant time-out
tPulseDur 0.5 - 10.0 s 0.1 1.5 Raise/lower command output pulse
duration

Table 342: TCMYLTC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
LowVoltTap 1 - 63 - 1 1 Tap position for lowest voltage
HighVoltTap 1 - 63 - 1 33 Tap position for highest voltage
mALow 0.000 - 25.000 mA 0.001 4.000 mA for lowest voltage tap position
mAHigh 0.000 - 25.000 mA 0.001 20.000 mA for highest voltage tap position
CodeType BIN - - BIN Type of code conversion
BCD
Gray
SINGLE
mA
Table continues on next page

540
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

UseParity Off - - Off Enable parity check
On
tStable 1 - 60 s 1 2 Time after position change before the
value is accepted
CLFactor 1.0 - 3.0 - 0.1 2.0 Adjustable factor for contact life function
InitCLCounter 0 - 9999999 s 1 250000 CL counter start value
EnabTapCmd Off - - On Enable commands to tap changer
On
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

Table 343: TCLYLTC Group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
tTCTimeout 1 - 120 s 1 5 Tap changer constant time-out
tPulseDur 0.5 - 10.0 s 0.1 1.5 Raise/lower command output pulse
duration

Table 344: TCLYLTC Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
LowVoltTap 1 - 63 - 1 1 Tap position for lowest voltage
HighVoltTap 1 - 63 - 1 33 Tap position for highest voltage
mALow 0.000 - 25.000 mA 0.001 4.000 mA for lowest voltage tap position
mAHigh 0.000 - 25.000 mA 0.001 20.000 mA for highest voltage tap position
CodeType BIN - - BIN Type of code conversion
BCD
Gray
SINGLE
mA
UseParity Off - - Off Enable parity check
On
tStable 1 - 60 s 1 2 Time after position change before the
value is accepted
CLFactor 1.0 - 3.0 - 0.1 2.0 Adjustable factor for contact life function
InitCLCounter 0 - 9999999 s 1 250000 CL counter start value
EnabTapCmd Off - - On Enable commands to tap changer
On
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

541
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

13.5.9 Monitored data

Table 345: TR1ATCC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
RAISE BOOLEAN - - Raise voltage order to
tapchanger
LOWER BOOLEAN - - Lower voltage order to
tapchanger
BUSVOLT REAL - kV The average of the
measured busbar
voltage (service value)
VOLTDEV REAL - % Voltage deviation
compared to dead band
(%)
TRLDCURR REAL - A Amplitude of own load
current
USETOUT REAL - kV Voltage setpoint used in
single mode (service
value)
ULOAD REAL - kV Calculated compensated
voltage (service value)
P REAL - MW Calculated active power
(service value)
Q REAL - MVAr Calculated reactive
power (service value)
IPRIM REAL - A Max of 3 phase currents
(service value)

Table 346: TR8ATCC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
RAISE BOOLEAN - - Raise voltage order to
tapchanger
LOWER BOOLEAN - - Lower voltage order to
tapchanger
BUSVOLT REAL - kV The average of the
measured busbar
voltage (service value)
VOLTDEV REAL - % Voltage deviation
compared to dead band
(%)
TRLDCURR REAL - A Amplitude of own load
current
USETOUT REAL - kV Voltage setpoint used in
single mode (service
value)
ULOAD REAL - kV Calculated compensated
voltage (service value)
P REAL - MW Calculated active power
(service value)
Table continues on next page

542
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

Q REAL - MVAr Calculated reactive
power (service value)
IPRIM REAL - A Max of 3 phase currents
(service value)
CCAVolt REAL - kV Circulating Current
Adjusted Voltage
USETPAR REAL - kV Average voltage setpoint
used in parallel mode
ICIRCUL REAL - A Circulating current

Table 347: TCMYLTC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CNT_VAL INTEGER - - Number of operations on
tap changer
CLCNT_VAL REAL - - Remaining number of
operations at rated load
TCPOS INTEGER - - Integer value
corresponding to actual
tap position

Table 348: TCLYLTC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CNT_VAL INTEGER - - Number of operations on
tap changer
CLCNT_VAL REAL - - Remaining number of
operations at rated load
TCPOS INTEGER - - Integer value
corresponding to actual
tap position

13.5.10 Operation principle

The voltage control function is built up by two function blocks. Both are logical
nodes in IEC 61850-8-1.

Automatic voltage control for tap changer

TR1ATCC for single control
TR8ATCC for parallel control
Tap changer control and supervision
TCMYLTC, 6 binary inputs
TCLYLTC, 32 binary inputs

TR1ATCCand TR8ATCC are designed to automatically maintain the voltage at the

LV-side side of a power transformer within given limits around a set target voltage.

543
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

A raise or lower command is generated whenever the measured voltage, for a given
period of time, deviates from the set target value by more than the preset deadband
value that is, degree of insensitivity. A time-delay (inverse or definite time) is set to
avoid unnecessary operation during shorter voltage deviations from the target
value, and in order to coordinate with other automatic voltage controllers in the
system.

TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC are an interface between TR1ATCC and TR8ATCC

and the transformer load tap changer. More specifically this means that it receives
information from TR1ATCC or TR8ATCC and based on this it gives command-
pulses to a power transformer motor driven on-load tap changer and also receives
information from the load tap changer regarding tap position, progress of given
commands, and so on.

TCMYLTC and TCLYLTC also serve the purpose of giving information about tap
position to the transformer differential protection T2WPDIF and T3WPDIF.

13.5.11 Technical data

Table 349: TR1ATCC and TR8ATCC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Transformer reactance (0.1200.0), primary -
Time delay for lower (1.0100.0) s -
command when fast step
down mode is activated
Voltage control set voltage (85.0120.0)% of UBase 0.25 % of Ur

Outer voltage deadband (0.29.0)% of UBase -

Inner voltage deadband (0.19.0)% of UBase -
Upper limit of busbar voltage (80180)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Lower limit of busbar voltage (70120)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Undervoltage block level (50120)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Time delay (long) for (31000) s 0.2% or 600 ms

automatic control commands whichever is greater
Time delay (short) for (11000) s 0.2% or 600 ms
automatic control commands whichever is greater
Minimum operating time in (3120) s 0.2% or 600 ms
inverse mode whichever is greater
Line resistance (0.00150.00), primary -
Line reactance (-150.00150.00), primary -
Load voltage adjustment (-20.020.0)% of UBase -
constants
Load voltage auto correction (-20.020.0)% of UBase -
Duration time for the reverse (306000) s 0.2% or 600 ms
action block signal whichever is greater
Current limit for reverse (0100)% of I1Base -
action block
Table continues on next page

544
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Function Range or value Accuracy

Overcurrent block level (5250)% of I1Base 1.0% of Ir at IIr
1.0% of I at I>Ir

Level for number of counted (030) operations/hour -

raise/lower within one hour
Level for number of counted (0100) operations/day -
raise/lower within 24 hours
Time window for hunting (1120) minutes -
alarm
Hunting detection alarm, (330) operations/window -
max operations/window
Alarm level of active power (-9999.999999.99) MW 1.0% of Sr
in forward and reverse
direction at (10-200)% of Sr
and (85-120)% of UBase
Alarm level of reactive (-9999.999999.99) MVAr 1.0% of Sr
power in forward and
reverse direction at
(10-200)% of Sr and
(85-120)% of UBase
Time delay for alarms from (16000) s 0.2% or 600 ms
power supervision whichever is greater
Tap position for lowest and (163) -
highest voltage
mA for lowest and highest (0.00025.000) mA -
voltage tap position
Type of code conversion BIN, BCD, GRAY, SINGLE, mA -
Time after position change (160) s 0.2% or 200 ms
before the value is accepted whichever is greater
Tap changer constant time- (1120) s 0.2% or 200 ms
out whichever is greater
Raise/lower command (0.510.0) s 0.2% or 200 ms
output pulse duration whichever is greater

13.6 Logic rotating switch for function selection and

LHMI presentation SLGAPC

13.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Logic rotating switch for function SLGAPC - -
selection and LHMI presentation

545
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

13.6.2 Functionality
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation SLGAPC
(or the selector switch function block) is used to get an enhanced selector switch
functionality compared to the one provided by a hardware selector switch.
Hardware selector switches are used extensively by utilities, in order to have
different functions operating on pre-set values. Hardware switches are however
sources for maintenance issues, lower system reliability and an extended purchase
portfolio. The selector switch function eliminates all these problems.

13.6.3 Function block

SLGAPC
BLOCK ^P01
PSTO ^P02
UP ^P03
DOWN ^P04
^P05
^P06
^P07
^P08
^P09
^P10
^P11
^P12
^P13
^P14
^P15
^P16
^P17
^P18
^P19
^P20
^P21
^P22
^P23
^P24
^P25
^P26
^P27
^P28
^P29
^P30
^P31
^P32
SWPOSN

IEC14000005-1-en.vsd
IEC14000005 V1 EN

Figure 245: SLGAPC function block

13.6.4 Signals
Table 350: SLGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection
UP BOOLEAN 0 Binary "UP" command
DOWN BOOLEAN 0 Binary "DOWN" command

546
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Table 351: SLGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
P01 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 1
P02 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 2
P03 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 3
P04 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 4
P05 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 5
P06 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 6
P07 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 7
P08 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 8
P09 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 9
P10 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 10
P11 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 11
P12 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 12
P13 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 13
P14 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 14
P15 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 15
P16 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 16
P17 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 17
P18 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 18
P19 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 19
P20 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 20
P21 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 21
P22 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 22
P23 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 23
P24 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 24
P25 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 25
P26 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 26
P27 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 27
P28 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 28
P29 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 29
P30 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 30
P31 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 31
P32 BOOLEAN Selector switch position 32
SWPOSN INTEGER Switch position (integer)

547
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

13.6.5 Settings
Table 352: SLGAPC Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
NrPos 2 - 32 - 1 32 Number of positions in the switch
OutType Pulsed - - Steady Output type, steady or pulse
Steady
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Operate pulse duration, in [s]
tDelay 0.000 - 60000.000 s 0.010 0.000 Time delay on the output, in [s]
StopAtExtremes Disabled - - Disabled Stop when min or max position is reached
Enabled

13.6.6 Monitored data

Table 353: SLGAPC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
SWPOSN INTEGER - - Switch position (integer)

13.6.7 Operation principle

The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGAPC)
function has two operating inputs UP and DOWN. When a signal is received on
the UP input, the function will activate the output next to the present activated
output, in ascending order (for example if the present activated output is P03 and
one activates the UP input then the output P04 will be activated). When a signal is
received on the DOWN input, the function will activate the output next to the
present activated output, in descending order (for example if the present activated
output is P03 and one activates the DOWN input then the output P02 will be
activated). Depending on the output settings the output signals can be steady or
pulsed. In case of steady signals, the output will be active till the time it receives
next operation of UP/DOWN inputs. Also, depending on the settings one can have
a time delay between the UP or DOWN activation signal positive front and the
output activation.

Besides the inputs visible in the application configuration in the Application

Configuration tool, there are other possibilities that will allow an user to set the
desired position directly (without activating the intermediate positions), either
locally or remotely, using a select before execute dialog. One can block the
function operation, by activating the BLOCK input. In this case, the present
position will be kept and further operation will be blocked. The operator place
(local or remote) is specified through the PSTO input. If any operation is allowed
the signal INTONE from the Fixed signal function block can be connected.
SLGAPC function block has also an integer value output, that generates the actual

548
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

position number. The positions and the block names are fully settable by the user.
These names will appear in the menu, so the user can see the position names
instead of a number.

13.6.7.1 Graphical display

There are two possibilities for SLGAPC

if it is used just for the monitoring, the switches will be listed with their actual
position names, as defined by the user (max. 13 characters).
if it is used for control, the switches will be listed with their actual positions,
but only the first three letters of the name will be used.

In both cases, the switch full name will be shown, but the user has to redefine it
when building the Graphical Display Editor, under the "Caption". If used for the
control, the following sequence of commands will ensure:

549
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

From the graphical display:

Control
Control Single Line Diagram
Measurements Commands
Events
Disturbance records
Settings
Diagnostics
Test
Change to the "Switches" page Reset
of the SLD by left-right arrows. Authorization
Select switch by up-down Language
arrows

../Control/SLD/Switch
O I ../Control/SLD/Switch
SMBRREC control SMBRREC control
WFM Select switch. Press the
WFM
I or O key. A dialog box
Pilot setup appears.
Pilot setup
OFF OFF
Damage control E P: Disc N: Disc Fe
DAL
The pos will not be modified
(outputs will not be activated) until OK Cancel
you press the E-button for O.K.

../Control/SLD/Switch

SMBRREC control
WFM

Pilot setup
OFF

Damage control
DFW

IEC06000421-2-en.vsd
IEC06000421 V2 EN

Figure 246: Example 2 on handling the switch from the local HMI.
From the single line diagram on local HMI.

13.7 Selector mini switch VSGAPC

13.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Selector mini switch VSGAPC - -

550
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

13.7.2 Functionality
The Selector mini switch VSGAPC function block is a multipurpose function used
for a variety of applications, as a general purpose switch.

VSGAPC can be controlled from the menu or from a symbol on the single line
diagram (SLD) on the local HMI.

13.7.3 Function block

VSGAPC
BLOCK BLOCKED
PSTO POSITION
IPOS1 POS1
IPOS2 POS2
CMDPOS12
CMDPOS21

IEC14000066-1-en.vsd
IEC14000066 V1 EN

Figure 247: VSGAPC function block

13.7.4 Signals
Table 354: VSGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection
IPOS1 BOOLEAN 0 Position 1 indicating input
IPOS2 BOOLEAN 0 Position 2 indicating input

Table 355: VSGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
BLOCKED BOOLEAN The function is active but the functionality is
blocked
POSITION INTEGER Position indication, integer
POS1 BOOLEAN Position 1 indication, logical signal
POS2 BOOLEAN Position 2 indication, logical signal
CMDPOS12 BOOLEAN Execute command from position 1 to position 2
CMDPOS21 BOOLEAN Execute command from position 2 to position 1

551
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

13.7.5 Settings
Table 356: VSGAPC Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
CtlModel Dir Norm - - Dir Norm Specifies the type for control model
SBO Enh according to IEC 61850
Mode Steady - - Pulsed Operation mode
Pulsed
tSelect 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 30.000 Max time between select and execute
signals
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Command pulse lenght

13.7.6 Operation principle

Selector mini switch (VSGAPC) function can be used for double purpose, in the
same way as switch controller (SCSWI) functions are used:

for indication on the single line diagram (SLD). Position is received through
the IPOS1 and IPOS2 inputs and distributed in the configuration through the
POS1 and POS2 outputs, or to IEC 61850 through reporting, or GOOSE.
for commands that are received via the local HMI or IEC 61850 and
distributed in the configuration through outputs CMDPOS12 and CMDPOS21.
The output CMDPOS12 is set when the function receives a CLOSE command
from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
The output CMDPOS21 is set when the function receives an OPEN command
from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.

It is important for indication in the SLD that the a symbol is

associated with a controllable object, otherwise the symbol won't be
displayed on the screen. A symbol is created and configured in
GDE tool in PCM600.

The PSTO input is connected to the Local remote switch to have a selection of
operators place, operation from local HMI (Local) or through IEC 61850 (Remote).
An INTONE connection from Fixed signal function block (FXDSIGN) will allow
operation from local HMI.

As it can be seen, both indications and commands are done in double-bit

representation, where a combination of signals on both inputs/outputs generate the
desired result.

The following table shows the relationship between IPOS1/IPOS2 inputs and the
name of the string that is shown on the SLD. The value of the strings are set in PST.

552
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

IPOS1 IPOS2 Name of displayed string Default string value

0 0 PosUndefined P00
1 0 Position1 P01
0 1 Position2 P10
1 1 PosBadState P11

13.8 Generic communication function for Double Point

indication DPGAPC

13.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Generic communication function for DPGAPC - -
Double Point indication

13.8.2 Functionality
Generic communication function for Double Point indication DPGAPC function
block is used to send double indications to other systems, equipment or functions in
the substation through IEC 61850-8-1 or other communication protocols. It is
especially used in the interlocking station-wide logics.

13.8.3 Function block

IEC13000081 V1 EN

Figure 248: DPGAPC function block

13.8.4 Signals
Table 357: DPGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
OPEN BOOLEAN 0 Open indication
CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Close indication
VALID BOOLEAN 0 Valid indication

553
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Table 358: DPGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
POSITION INTEGER Double point indication

13.8.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

13.8.6 Operation principle

When receiving the input signals, DPGAPC sends the signals over IEC 61850-8-1
to the systems, equipment or functions that requests and thus subscribes on these
signals. To be able to get the signals into other systems, equipment or functions,
one must use other tools, described in the Engineering manual and define which
function block in which systems, equipment or functions should receive this
information.

13.9 Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC

13.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC - -

13.9.2 Functionality
The Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC function block is a
collection of 8 single point commands, designed to bring in commands from
REMOTE (SCADA) to those parts of the logic configuration that do not need
extensive command receiving functionality (for example, SCSWI). In this way,
simple commands can be sent directly to the IED outputs, without confirmation.
Confirmation (status) of the result of the commands is supposed to be achieved by
other means, such as binary inputs and SPGAPC function blocks. The commands
can be pulsed or steady with a settable pulse time.

554
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

13.9.3 Function block

SPC8GAPC
BLOCK ^OUT1
PSTO ^OUT2
^OUT3
^OUT4
^OUT5
^OUT6
^OUT7
^OUT8

IEC07000143-3-en.vsd
IEC07000143 V3 EN

Figure 249: SPC8GAPC function block

13.9.4 Signals
Table 359: SPC8GAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Blocks the function operation
PSTO INTEGER 1 Operator place selection

Table 360: SPC8GAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Command output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Command output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Command output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Command output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Command output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Command output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Command output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Command output 8

13.9.5 Settings
Table 361: SPC8GAPC Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
PulseMode1 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 1
tPulse1 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 1
PulseMode2 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 2
tPulse2 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 2
Table continues on next page

555
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

PulseMode3 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 3
tPulse3 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 3
PulseMode4 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 4
tPulse4 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 4
PulseMode5 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 5
tPulse5 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 5
PulseMode6 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 6
tPulse6 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 6
PulseMode7 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 7
tPulse7 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 7
PulseMode8 Pulsed - - Pulsed Setting for pulsed/latched mode for
Latched output 8
tPulse8 0.01 - 6000.00 s 0.01 0.10 Pulse time output 8

13.9.6 Operation principle

The PSTO input selects the operator place (LOCAL, REMOTE or ALL). One of
the eight outputs is activated based on the command sent from the operator place
selected. The settings Latchedx and tPulsex (where x is the respective output) will
determine if the signal will be pulsed (and how long the pulse is) or latched
(steady). BLOCK will block the operation of the function in case a command is
sent, no output will be activated.

PSTO is the universal operator place selector for all control

functions. Although, PSTO can be configured to use LOCAL or
ALL operator places only, REMOTE operator place is used in
SPC8GAPC function.

13.10 AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0

AUTOBITS

13.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
AutomationBits, command function for
AUTOBITS - -
DNP3

556
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

13.10.2 Functionality
AutomationBits function for DNP3 (AUTOBITS) is used within PCM600 to get
into the configuration of the commands coming through the DNP3 protocol. The
AUTOBITS function plays the same role as functions GOOSEBINRCV (for IEC
61850) and MULTICMDRCV (for LON).

13.10.3 Function block

AUTOBITS
BLOCK ^CMDBIT1
PSTO ^CMDBIT2
^CMDBIT3
^CMDBIT4
^CMDBIT5
^CMDBIT6
^CMDBIT7
^CMDBIT8
^CMDBIT9
^CMDBIT10
^CMDBIT11
^CMDBIT12
^CMDBIT13
^CMDBIT14
^CMDBIT15
^CMDBIT16
^CMDBIT17
^CMDBIT18
^CMDBIT19
^CMDBIT20
^CMDBIT21
^CMDBIT22
^CMDBIT23
^CMDBIT24
^CMDBIT25
^CMDBIT26
^CMDBIT27
^CMDBIT28
^CMDBIT29
^CMDBIT30
^CMDBIT31
^CMDBIT32

IEC09000925-1-en.vsd
IEC09000925 V1 EN

Figure 250: AUTOBITS function block

13.10.4 Signals
Table 362: AUTOBITS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 0 Operator place selection

557
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Table 363: AUTOBITS Output signals

Name Type Description
CMDBIT1 BOOLEAN Command out bit 1
CMDBIT2 BOOLEAN Command out bit 2
CMDBIT3 BOOLEAN Command out bit 3
CMDBIT4 BOOLEAN Command out bit 4
CMDBIT5 BOOLEAN Command out bit 5
CMDBIT6 BOOLEAN Command out bit 6
CMDBIT7 BOOLEAN Command out bit 7
CMDBIT8 BOOLEAN Command out bit 8
CMDBIT9 BOOLEAN Command out bit 9
CMDBIT10 BOOLEAN Command out bit 10
CMDBIT11 BOOLEAN Command out bit 11
CMDBIT12 BOOLEAN Command out bit 12
CMDBIT13 BOOLEAN Command out bit 13
CMDBIT14 BOOLEAN Command out bit 14
CMDBIT15 BOOLEAN Command out bit 15
CMDBIT16 BOOLEAN Command out bit 16
CMDBIT17 BOOLEAN Command out bit 17
CMDBIT18 BOOLEAN Command out bit 18
CMDBIT19 BOOLEAN Command out bit 19
CMDBIT20 BOOLEAN Command out bit 20
CMDBIT21 BOOLEAN Command out bit 21
CMDBIT22 BOOLEAN Command out bit 22
CMDBIT23 BOOLEAN Command out bit 23
CMDBIT24 BOOLEAN Command out bit 24
CMDBIT25 BOOLEAN Command out bit 25
CMDBIT26 BOOLEAN Command out bit 26
CMDBIT27 BOOLEAN Command out bit 27
CMDBIT28 BOOLEAN Command out bit 28
CMDBIT29 BOOLEAN Command out bit 29
CMDBIT30 BOOLEAN Command out bit 30
CMDBIT31 BOOLEAN Command out bit 31
CMDBIT32 BOOLEAN Command out bit 32

13.10.5 Settings
Table 364: AUTOBITS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On

558
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Table 365: DNPGEN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation mode Off / On
On

Table 366: CHSERRS485 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
BaudRate 300 Bd - - 9600 Bd Baud-rate for serial port
600 Bd
1200 Bd
2400 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
38400 Bd
57600 Bd
115200 Bd

Table 367: CHSERRS485 Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
DLinkConfirm Never - - Never Data-link confirm
Sometimes
Always
tDLinkTimeout 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 2.000 Data-link confirm timeout in s
DLinkRetries 0 - 255 - 1 3 Data-link maximum retries
tRxToTxMinDel 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Rx to Tx minimum delay in s
ApLayMaxRxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Rx fragment
size
ApLayMaxTxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Tx fragment
size
StopBits 1-2 - 1 1 Stop bits
Parity No - - Even Parity
Even
Odd
tRTSWarmUp 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 RTS warm-up in s
tRTSWarmDown 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 RTS warm-down in s
tBackOffDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.050 RS485 back-off delay in s
tMaxRndDelBkOf 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 RS485 maximum back-off random delay
in s

559
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Table 368: CH1TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation mode
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
TCPIPLisPort 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from
master
UDPPortInitNUL 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 UDP portfor initial NULL response
UDPPortCliMast 0 - 65535 - 1 0 UDP port to remote client/master

Table 369: CH1TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ApLayMaxRxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Rx fragment
size
ApLayMaxTxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Tx fragment
size

Table 370: CH2TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation mode
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
TCPIPLisPort 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from
master
UDPPortInitNUL 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 UDP port for initial NULL response
UDPPortCliMast 0 - 65535 - 1 0 UDP port to remote client/master

Table 371: CH2TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ApLayMaxRxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Rx fragment
size
ApLayMaxTxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Tx fragment
size

560
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Table 372: CH3TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation mode
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
TCPIPLisPort 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from
master
UDPPortInitNUL 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 UDP port for initial NULL response
UDPPortCliMast 0 - 65535 - 1 0 UDP port to remote client/master

Table 373: CH3TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ApLayMaxRxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Rx fragment
size
ApLayMaxTxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Tx fragment
size

Table 374: CH4TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation mode
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
TCPIPLisPort 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from
master
UDPPortInitNUL 1 - 65535 - 1 20000 UDP port for initial NULL response
UDPPortCliMast 0 - 65535 - 1 0 UDP port to remote client/master

Table 375: CH4TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ApLayMaxRxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Rx fragment
size
ApLayMaxTxSize 20 - 2048 - 1 2048 Application layer maximum Tx fragment
size

Table 376: MSTSER Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
ChToAssociate RS485 - - RS485 Channel to associate to
Optical
SlaveAddress 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Slave address
Table continues on next page

561
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

MasterAddres 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Master address
Obj1DefVar 1:BISingleBit - - 1:BISingleBit Object 1, default variation
2:BIWithStatus
Obj2DefVar 1:BIChWithoutTim - - 3:BIChWithRelTim Object 2, default variation
e e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj3DefVar 1:DIWithoutFlag - - 1:DIWithoutFlag Object 3, default variation
2:DIWithFlag
Obj4DefVar 1:DIChWithoutTim - - 3:DIChWithRelTim Object 4, default variation
e e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar 1:BO - - 2:BOStatus Object 10, default variation
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar 1:BinCnt32 - - 5:BinCnt32WoutF Object 20, default variation
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
Obj22DefVar 1:BinCnt32EvWout - - 1:BinCnt32EvWou Object 22, default variation
T tT
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
Obj30DefVar 1:AI32Int - - 3:AI32IntWithoutF Object 30, default variation
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
Obj32DefVar 1:AI32IntEvWoutF - - 1:AI32IntEvWoutF Object 32, default variation
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT

Table 377: MSTSER Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ValMasterAddr No - - Yes Validate source (master) address
Yes
AddrQueryEnbl No - - Yes Address query enable
Yes
tApplConfTout 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 10.00 Application layer confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes No - - Yes Enable application for multiple fragment
Yes response
Table continues on next page

562
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ConfMultFrag No - - Yes Confirm each multiple fragment
Yes
UREnable No - - Yes Unsolicited response enabled
Yes
UREvClassMask Off - - Off Unsolicited response, event class mask
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
UROfflineRetry 0 - 10 - 1 5 Unsolicited response retries before off-
line retry mode
tURRetryDelay 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 30.00 Unsolicited response off-line retry delay
in s
UREvCntThold1 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 1 event
buffer timeout
UREvCntThold2 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 2 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout2 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 2 event
buffer timeout
UREvCntThold3 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 3 event
buffer timeout
DelOldBufFull No - - No Delete oldest event when buffer is full
Yes
ExtTimeFormat LocalTime - - UTC External time format
UTC
DNPToSetTime No - - Yes Allow DNP to set time in IED
Yes
tSynchTimeout 30 - 3600 s 1 1800 Time synch timeout before error status is
generated
TSyncReqAfTout No - - No Time synchronization request after
Yes timeout
Averag3TimeReq No - - No Use average of 3 time requests
Yes
PairedPoint No - - Yes Enable paired point
Yes
tSelectTimeout 1.0 - 60.0 s 0.1 30.0 Select timeout

563
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Table 378: MST1TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
SlaveAddress 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Slave address
MasterAddres 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Master address
ValMasterAddr No - - Yes Validate source (master) address
Yes
MasterIP-Addr 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Master IP-address
Address
MasterIPNetMsk 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.255 Master IP net mask
Address
Obj1DefVar 1:BISingleBit - - 1:BISingleBit Object 1, default variation
2:BIWithStatus
Obj2DefVar 1:BIChWithoutTim - - 3:BIChWithRelTim Object 2, default variation
e e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj3DefVar 1:DIWithoutFlag - - 1:DIWithoutFlag Object 3, default variation
2:DIWithFlag
Obj4DefVar 1:DIChWithoutTim - - 3:DIChWithRelTim Object 4, default variation
e e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar 1:BO - - 2:BOStatus Object 10, default variation
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar 1:BinCnt32 - - 5:BinCnt32WoutF Object 20, default variation
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
Obj22DefVar 1:BinCnt32EvWout - - 1:BinCnt32EvWou Object 22, default variation
T tT
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
Obj30DefVar 1:AI32Int - - 3:AI32IntWithoutF Object 30, default variation
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
Obj32DefVar 1:AI32IntEvWoutF - - 1:AI32IntEvWoutF Object 32, default variation
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT

564
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Table 379: MST1TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
AddrQueryEnbl No - - Yes Address query enable
Yes
tApplConfTout 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 10.00 Application layer confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes No - - Yes Enable application for multiple fragment
Yes response
ConfMultFrag No - - Yes Confirm each multiple fragment
Yes
UREnable No - - Yes Unsolicited response enabled
Yes
UREvClassMask Off - - Off Unsolicited response, event class mask
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
UROfflineRetry 0 - 10 - 1 5 Unsolicited response retries before off-
line retry mode
tURRetryDelay 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 30.00 Unsolicited response off-line retry delay
in s
UREvCntThold1 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 1 event
buffer timeout
UREvCntThold2 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 2 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout2 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 2 event
buffer timeout
UREvCntThold3 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 3 event
buffer timeout
DelOldBufFull No - - No Delete oldest event when buffer is full
Yes
ExtTimeFormat LocalTime - - UTC External time format
UTC
DNPToSetTime No - - No Allow DNP to set time in IED
Yes
tSynchTimeout 30 - 3600 s 1 1800 Time synch timeout before error status is
generated
TSyncReqAfTout No - - No Time synchronization request after
Yes timeout
Averag3TimeReq No - - No Use average of 3 time requests
Yes
PairedPoint No - - Yes Enable paired point
Yes
Table continues on next page

565
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tSelectTimeout 1.0 - 60.0 s 0.1 30.0 Select timeout
tBrokenConTout 0 - 3600 s 1 0 Broken connection timeout
tKeepAliveT 0 - 3600 s 1 10 Keep-Alive timer

Table 380: MST2TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
SlaveAddress 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Slave address
MasterAddres 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Master address
ValMasterAddr No - - Yes Validate source (master) address
Yes
MasterIP-Addr 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Master IP-address
Address
MasterIPNetMsk 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.255 Master IP net mask
Address
Obj1DefVar 1:BISingleBit - - 1:BISingleBit Object 1, default variation
2:BIWithStatus
Obj2DefVar 1:BIChWithoutTim - - 3:BIChWithRelTim Object 2, default variation
e e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj3DefVar 1:DIWithoutFlag - - 1:DIWithoutFlag Object 3, default variation
2:DIWithFlag
Obj4DefVar 1:DIChWithoutTim - - 3:DIChWithRelTim Object 4, default variation
e e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar 1:BO - - 2:BOStatus Object 10, default variation
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar 1:BinCnt32 - - 5:BinCnt32WoutF Object 20, default variation
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
Table continues on next page

566
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Obj22DefVar 1:BinCnt32EvWout - - 1:BinCnt32EvWou Object 22, default variation
T tT
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
Obj30DefVar 1:AI32Int - - 3:AI32IntWithoutF Object 30, default variation
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
Obj32DefVar 1:AI32IntEvWoutF - - 1:AI32IntEvWoutF Object 32, default variation
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT

Table 381: MST2TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
AddrQueryEnbl No - - Yes Address query enable
Yes
tApplConfTout 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 10.00 Application layer confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes No - - Yes Enable application for multiple fragment
Yes response
ConfMultFrag No - - Yes Confirm each multiple fragment
Yes
UREnable No - - Yes Unsolicited response enabled
Yes
UREvClassMask Off - - Off Unsolicited response, event class mask
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
UROfflineRetry 0 - 10 - 1 5 Unsolicited response retries before off-
line retry mode
tURRetryDelay 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 30.00 Unsolicited response off-line retry delay
in s
UREvCntThold1 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 1 event
buffer timeout
UREvCntThold2 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 2 event count
report treshold
Table continues on next page

567
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tUREvBufTout2 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 2 event
buffer timeout
UREvCntThold3 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 3 event
buffer timeout
DelOldBufFull No - - No Delete oldest event when buffer is full
Yes
ExtTimeFormat LocalTime - - UTC External time format
UTC
DNPToSetTime No - - No Allow DNP to set time in IED
Yes
tSynchTimeout 30 - 3600 s 1 1800 Time synch timeout before error status is
generated
TSyncReqAfTout No - - No Time synchronization request after
Yes timeout
Averag3TimeReq No - - No Use average of 3 time requests
Yes
PairedPoint No - - Yes Enable paired point
Yes
tSelectTimeout 1.0 - 60.0 s 0.1 30.0 Select timeout
tBrokenConTout 0 - 3600 s 1 0 Broken connection timeout
tKeepAliveT 0 - 3600 s 1 10 Keep-Alive timer

Table 382: MST3TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
SlaveAddress 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Slave address
MasterAddres 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Master address
ValMasterAddr No - - Yes Validate source (master) address
Yes
MasterIP-Addr 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Master IP-address
Address
MasterIPNetMsk 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.255 Master IP net mask
Address
Obj1DefVar 1:BISingleBit - - 1:BISingleBit Object 1, default variation
2:BIWithStatus
Obj2DefVar 1:BIChWithoutTim - - 3:BIChWithRelTim Object 2, default variation
e e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj3DefVar 1:DIWithoutFlag - - 1:DIWithoutFlag Object 3, default variation
2:DIWithFlag
Table continues on next page

568
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

Obj4DefVar 1:DIChWithoutTim - - 3:DIChWithRelTim Object 4, default variation
e e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar 1:BO - - 2:BOStatus Object 10, default variation
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar 1:BinCnt32 - - 5:BinCnt32WoutF Object 20, default variation
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
Obj22DefVar 1:BinCnt32EvWout - - 1:BinCnt32EvWou Object 22, default variation
T tT
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
Obj30DefVar 1:AI32Int - - 3:AI32IntWithoutF Object 30, default variation
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
Obj32DefVar 1:AI32IntEvWoutF - - 1:AI32IntEvWoutF Object 32, default variation
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT

Table 383: MST3TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
AddrQueryEnbl No - - Yes Address query enable
Yes
tApplConfTout 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 10.00 Application layer confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes No - - Yes Enable application for multiple fragment
Yes response
ConfMultFrag No - - Yes Confirm each multiple fragment
Yes
UREnable No - - Yes Unsolicited response enabled
Yes
UREvClassMask Off - - Off Unsolicited response, event class mask
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
Table continues on next page

569
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

UROfflineRetry 0 - 10 - 1 5 Unsolicited response retries before off-
line retry mode
tURRetryDelay 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 30.00 Unsolicited response off-line retry delay
in s
UREvCntThold1 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 1 event
buffer timeout
UREvCntThold2 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 2 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout2 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 2 event
buffer timeout
UREvCntThold3 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 3 event
buffer timeout
DelOldBufFull No - - No Delete oldest event when buffer is full
Yes
ExtTimeFormat LocalTime - - UTC External time format
UTC
DNPToSetTime No - - No Allow DNP to set time in IED
Yes
tSynchTimeout 30 - 3600 s 1 1800 Time synch timeout before error status is
generated
TSyncReqAfTout No - - No Time synchronization request after
Yes timeout
Averag3TimeReq No - - No Use average of 3 time requests
Yes
PairedPoint No - - Yes Enable paired point
Yes
tSelectTimeout 1.0 - 60.0 s 0.1 30.0 Select timeout
tBrokenConTout 0 - 3600 s 1 0 Broken connection timeout
tKeepAliveT 0 - 3600 s 1 10 Keep-Alive timer

Table 384: MST4TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
SlaveAddress 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Slave address
MasterAddres 0 - 65519 - 1 1 Master address
ValMasterAddr No - - Yes Validate source (master) address
Yes
MasterIP-Addr 0 - 18 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Master IP-address
Address
Table continues on next page

570
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

MasterIPNetMsk 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.255 Master IP net mask
Address
Obj1DefVar 1:BISingleBit - - 1:BISingleBit Object 1, default variation
2:BIWithStatus
Obj2DefVar 1:BIChWithoutTim - - 3:BIChWithRelTim Object 2, default variation
e e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj3DefVar 1:DIWithoutFlag - - 1:DIWithoutFlag Object 3, default variation
2:DIWithFlag
Obj4DefVar 1:DIChWithoutTim - - 3:DIChWithRelTim Object 4, default variation
e e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar 1:BO - - 2:BOStatus Object 10, default variation
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar 1:BinCnt32 - - 5:BinCnt32WoutF Object 20, default variation
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
Obj22DefVar 1:BinCnt32EvWout - - 1:BinCnt32EvWou Object 22, default variation
T tT
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
Obj30DefVar 1:AI32Int - - 3:AI32IntWithoutF Object 30, default variation
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
Obj32DefVar 1:AI32IntEvWoutF - - 1:AI32IntEvWoutF Object 32, default variation
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT

Table 385: MST4TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
AddrQueryEnbl No - - Yes Address query enable
Yes
tApplConfTout 0.00 - 300.00 s 0.01 10.00 Application layer confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes No - - Yes Enable application for multiple fragment
Yes response
Table continues on next page

571
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ConfMultFrag No - - Yes Confirm each multiple fragment
Yes
UREnable No - - Yes Unsolicited response enabled
Yes
UREvClassMask Off - - Off Unsolicited response, event class mask
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
UROfflineRetry 0 - 10 - 1 5 Unsolicited response retries before off-
line retry mode
tURRetryDelay 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 30.00 Unsolicited response off-line retry delay
in s
UREvCntThold1 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 1 event
buffer timeout
UREvCntThold2 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 2 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout2 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 2 event
buffer timeout
UREvCntThold3 1 - 100 - 1 5 Unsolicited response class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 5.00 Unsolicited response class 3 event
buffer timeout
DelOldBufFull No - - No Delete oldest event when buffer is full
Yes
ExtTimeFormat LocalTime - - UTC External time format
UTC
DNPToSetTime No - - No Allow DNP to set time in IED
Yes
tSynchTimeout 30 - 3600 s 1 1800 Time synch timeout before error status is
generated
TSyncReqAfTout No - - No Time synchronization request after
Yes timeout
Averag3TimeReq No - - No Use average of 3 time requests
Yes
PairedPoint No - - Yes Enable paired point
Yes
tSelectTimeout 1.0 - 60.0 s 0.1 30.0 Select timeout
tBrokenConTout 0 - 3600 s 1 0 Broken connection timeout
tKeepAliveT 0 - 3600 s 1 10 Keep-Alive timer

572
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

13.10.6 Operation principle

AutomationBits function (AUTOBITS) has 32 individual outputs which each can
be mapped as a Binary Output point in DNP3. The output is operated by a "Object
12" in DNP3. This object contains parameters for control-code, count, on-time and
off-time. To operate an AUTOBITS output point, send a control-code of latch-On,
latch-Off, pulse-On, pulse-Off, Trip or Close. The remaining parameters will be
regarded were appropriate. ex: pulse-On, on-time=100, off-time=300, count=5
would give 5 positive 100 ms pulses, 300 ms apart.

There is a BLOCK input signal, which will disable the operation of the function, in
the same way the setting Operation: On/Off does. That means that, upon activation
of the BLOCK input, all 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set to 0. The BLOCK acts
like an overriding, the function still receives data from the DNP3 master. Upon
deactivation of BLOCK, all the 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set by the DNP3
master again, momentarily. For AUTOBITS , the PSTO input determines the
operator place. The command can be written to the block while in Remote. If
PSTO is in Local then no change is applied to the outputs.

13.11 Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD

13.11.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD - -

13.11.2 Functionality
The IEDs can receive commands either from a substation automation system or
from the local HMI. The command function block has outputs that can be used, for
example, to control high voltage apparatuses or for other user defined functionality.

573
Technical Manual
Section 13 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Control

13.11.3 Function block

SINGLECMD
BLOCK ^OUT1
^OUT2
^OUT3
^OUT4
^OUT5
^OUT6
^OUT7
^OUT8
^OUT9
^OUT10
^OUT11
^OUT12
^OUT13
^OUT14
^OUT15
^OUT16

IEC05000698-2-en.vsd
IEC05000698 V3 EN

Figure 251: SINGLECMD function block

13.11.4 Signals
Table 386: SINGLECMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block single command function

Table 387: SINGLECMD Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Single command output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Single command output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Single command output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Single command output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Single command output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Single command output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Single command output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Single command output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Single command output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Single command output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Single command output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Single command output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Single command output 13
OUT14 BOOLEAN Single command output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Single command output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Single command output 16

574
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 13
Control

13.11.5 Settings
Table 388: SINGLECMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
Steady
Pulsed

13.11.6 Operation principle

Single command, 16 signals (SINGLECMD) function has 16 binary output signals.
The outputs can be individually controlled from a substation automation system or
from the local HMI. Each output signal can be given a name with a maximum of
13 characters in PCM600.

The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. This configuration
setting is done via the local HMI or PCM600 and is common for the whole
function block. The length of the output pulses are 100 ms. In steady mode,
SINGLECMD function has a memory to remember the output values at power
interruption of the IED. Also a BLOCK input is available used to block the
updating of the outputs.

The output signals, OUT1 to OUT16, are available for configuration to built-in
functions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the IED.

575
Technical Manual
576
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 14
Scheme communication

Section 14 Scheme communication

14.1 Scheme communication logic for distance or

overcurrent protection ZCPSCH

14.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Scheme communication logic for ZCPSCH - 85
distance or overcurrent protection

14.1.2 Functionality
To achieve instantaneous fault clearance for all line faults, scheme communication
logic is provided. All types of communication schemes for example, permissive
underreaching, permissive overreaching, blocking, unblocking, intertrip are
available.

The built-in communication module (LDCM) can be used for scheme

communication signaling when included.

14.1.3 Function block

ZCPSCH
BLOCK TRIP
BLKTR CS
BLKCS CRL
CSBLK LCG
CACC
CSOR
CSUR
CR
CRG

IEC06000286-2-en.vsd
IEC06000286 V2 EN

Figure 252: ZCPSCH function block

577
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Scheme communication

14.1.4 Signals
Table 389: ZCPSCH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Current group connection
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Voltage group connection
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Signal for block of trip output from communication
logic
BLKCS BOOLEAN 0 Block of carrier send in permissive OR and
blocking schemes
CSBLK BOOLEAN 0 Reverse directed distance protection zone signal
CACC BOOLEAN 0 Permissive distance protection zone signal
CSOR BOOLEAN 0 Overreaching distance protection zone signal
CSUR BOOLEAN 0 Underreaching distance protection zone signal
CR BOOLEAN 0 Carrier Signal Received
CRG BOOLEAN 0 Carrier guard signal received
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Indicates that the breaker is open

Table 390: ZCPSCH Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip output
CS BOOLEAN Carrier Send signal
CHSTOP BOOLEAN Stops the blocking signal to remote end
CRL BOOLEAN Carrier signal received or missing carrier guard
signal
LCG BOOLEAN Loss of carrier guard signal

14.1.5 Settings
Table 391: ZCPSCH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
SchemeType Intertrip - - Permissive UR Scheme type
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
DeltaBlocking
tCoord 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.035 Co-ordination time for blocking
communication scheme
tSendMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Minimum duration of a carrier send signal

578
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 14
Scheme communication

Table 392: ZCPSCH Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Unblock Off - - Off Operation mode of unblocking logic
NoRestart
Restart
DeltaI 0 - 200 %IB 1 10 Current change level in % of IBase for
fault inception detection
DeltaU 0 - 100 %UB 1 5 Voltage change level in % of UB for fault
inception detection
Delta3I0 0 - 200 %IB 1 10 Zero seq current change level in % of
IBase
Delta3U0 0 - 100 %UB 1 5 Zero seq voltage change level in % of
UBase
tSecurity 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.035 Security timer for loss of carrier guard
detection

Table 393: ZCPSCH Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSelector 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

14.1.6 Operation principle

Depending on whether a reverse or forward directed impedance zone is used to
issue the send signal, the communication schemes are divided into Blocking and
Permissive schemes, respectively.

A permissive scheme is inherently faster and has better security against false
tripping than a blocking scheme. On the other hand, a permissive scheme depends
on a received signal for a fast trip, so its dependability is lower than that of a
blocking scheme.

14.1.6.1 Blocking scheme

The principle of operation for a blocking scheme is that an overreaching zone is

allowed to trip instantaneously after the settable co-ordination time tCoord has
elapsed, when no signal is received from the remote IED.

The received signal, which shall be connected to CR, is used to not release the zone
to be accelerated to clear the fault instantaneously (after time tCoord). The forward
overreaching zone to be accelerated is connected to the input CACC, see figure 253.

In case of external faults, the blocking signal (CR) must be received before the
settable timer tCoord elapses, to prevent a false trip, see figure 253.

The function can be totally blocked by activating the input BLOCK, block of trip
by activating the input BLKTR, Block of signal send by activating the input BLKCS.

579
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Scheme communication

tCoord
CACC
t TRIP
CR AND

en05000512.vsd
IEC05000512 V1 EN

Figure 253: Basic logic for trip signal in blocking scheme

Channels for communication in each direction must be available.

14.1.6.2 Permissive underreaching scheme

In a permissive underreaching scheme, a forward directed underreach measuring

element (normally zone1) sends a permissive signal CS to the remote end if a fault
is detected.in forward direction. The received signal CR is used to allow an
overreaching zone to trip after the tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord in
permissive underreaching schemes is normally set to zero.

The logic for trip signal in permissive scheme is shown in figure 254.

tCoord
CACC
t TRIP
CR AND

en05000513.vsd
IEC05000513 V1 EN

Figure 254: Logic for trip signal in permissive scheme

The permissive underreaching scheme has the same blocking possibilities as

mentioned for blocking scheme.

14.1.6.3 Permissive overreaching scheme

In a permissive overreaching scheme, a forward directed overreach measuring

element (normally zone2) sends a permissive signal CS to the remote end if a fault
is detected in forward direction. The received signal CR is used to allow an
overreaching zone to trip after the settable tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord in
permissive overreaching schemes is normally set to zero.

The logic for trip signal is the same as for permissive underreaching, as in
figure 254.

The permissive overreaching scheme has the same blocking possibilities as

mentioned for blocking scheme.

14.1.6.4 Unblocking scheme

In unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome

by using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally

580
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 14
Scheme communication

create a receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less
reliable, power-line carrier (PLC) communication is used.

The unblocking function uses a guard signal CRG, which must always be present,
even when no CR signal is received. The absence of the CRG signal for a time
longer than the setting tSecurity time is used as a CR signal, see figure 255. This
also enables a permissive scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal
transmission.

The received signal created by the unblocking function is reset 150 ms after the
security timer has elapsed. When that occurs an output signal LCG is activated for
signalling purpose. The unblocking function is reset 200 ms after that the guard
signal is present again.

CR
tSecurity CRL
t >1
1
CRG
200 ms 150 ms
t OR t AND
AND
LCG

en05000746.vsd
IEC05000746 V1 EN

Figure 255: Guard signal logic with unblocking schemeGuard singal logic with
unblocking scheme and with setting Unblock = Restart

The unblocking function can be set in three operation modes (setting Unblock):

Off The unblocking function is out of operation

No restart Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored
If CRG disappears a CRL signal will be transferred to the trip logic
There will not be any information in case of communication failure (LCG)
Restart Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored
It sends a defined (150 ms) CRL after the disappearance of the CRG signal
The function will activate LCG output in case of communication failure
If the communication failure comes and goes (<200 ms) there will not be recurrent
signalling

14.1.6.5 Intertrip scheme

In the direct intertrip scheme, the send signal CS is sent from an underreaching
zone that is tripping the line.

The received signal CR is directly transferred to a TRIP for tripping without local
criteria. The signal is further processed in the tripping logic.

581
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Scheme communication

In case of single-pole tripping in multi-phase systems, a phase selection is performed.

14.1.6.6 Simplified logic diagram

The simplified logic diagram for the complete logic is shown in figure 256.

Unblock =Off

CR

Unblock =
OR CRL
NoRestart AND
CRL
Unblock =
tSecurit
Restart
y
CRG 1 t AND

200 ms 150 ms LCG

AND
t OR AND t

SchemeType =
Intertrip

CSUR
tSendMi
n AND
OR

BLOCK AND
CSBLK OR
CRL

Schemetype =
Permissive UR AND CS
OR

tCoord
AND 25 ms
OR
t TRIP
CACC t

Schemetype =
Permissive OR

CSOR OR AND

AND
tSendMin
OR
AND
SchemeType =
Blocking

BLKCS

AND

IEC05000515-2-en.vsd
IEC05000515 V2 EN

Figure 256: Scheme communication logic for distance or overcurrent

protection, simplified logic diagram

582
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 14
Scheme communication

14.1.7 Technical data

Table 394: ZCPSCH technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Scheme type Intertrip -
Permissive Underreach
Permissive Overreach
Blocking
Co-ordination time for blocking (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms
communication scheme whichever is greater
Minimum duration of a send signal (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms
whichever is greater
Security timer for loss of guard (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms
signal detection whichever is greater
Operation mode of unblocking logic Off -
NoRestart
Restart

14.2 Current reversal and Weak-end infeed logic for

distance protection 3-phase ZCRWPSCH

14.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Current reversal and weak-end infeed ZCRWPSCH - 85
logic for distance protection 3-phase

14.2.2 Functionality
The ZCRWPSCH function provides the current reversal and weak end infeed logic
functions that supplement the standard scheme communication logic. It is not
suitable for standalone use as it requires inputs from the distance protection
functions and the scheme communications function included within the terminal.

On detection of a current reversal, the current reversal logic provides an output to

block the sending of the teleprotection signal to the remote end, and to block the
permissive tripping at the local end. This blocking condition is maintained long
enough to ensure that no unwanted operation will occur as a result of the current
reversal.

On verification of a weak end infeed condition, the weak end infeed logic provides
an output for sending the received teleprotection signal back to the remote sending
end and other output(s) for local tripping. For terminals equipped for single-, two-,
and three-pole tripping, outputs for the faulted phase(s) are provided. Undervoltage
detectors are used to detect the faulted phase(s).

583
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Scheme communication

14.2.3 Function block

ZCRWPSCH
U3P* IRVL
BLOCK TRWEI
IRVBLK TRWEIL1
IRV TRWEIL2
WEIBLK1 TRWEIL3
WEIBLK2 ECHO
VTSZ
CBOPEN
CRL

IEC06000287-2-en.vsd
IEC06000287 V2 EN

Figure 257: ZCRWPSCH function block

14.2.4 Signals
Table 395: ZCRWPSCH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IRVBLK BOOLEAN 0 Block of current reversal function
IRV BOOLEAN 0 Activation of current reversal logic
WEIBLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic
WEIBLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic due to operation of other
protections
VTSZ BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic through fuse-failure
function
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker
CRL BOOLEAN 0 POR Carrier receive for WEI logic

Table 396: ZCRWPSCH Output signals

Name Type Description
IRVL BOOLEAN Operation of current reversal logic
TRWEI BOOLEAN Trip signal from weak end infeed logic
TRWEIL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from weak end infeed logic in phase L1
TRWEIL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from weak end infeed logic in phase L2
TRWEIL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from weak end infeed logic in phase L3
ECHO BOOLEAN Carrier send by WEI logic

584
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 14
Scheme communication

14.2.5 Settings
Table 397: ZCRWPSCH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CurrRev Off - - Off Operating mode of Current Reversal
On Logic
tPickUpRev 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Pickup time for current reversal logic
tDelayRev 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.060 Time Delay to prevent Carrier send and
local trip
WEI Off - - Off Operating mode of WEI logic
Echo
Echo & Trip
tPickUpWEI 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.010 Coordination time for the WEI logic
UPP< 10 - 90 %UB 1 70 Phase to Phase voltage for detection of
fault condition
UPN< 10 - 90 %UB 1 70 Phase to Neutral voltage for detection of
fault condition

Table 398: ZCRWPSCH Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

14.2.6 Operation principle

14.2.6.1 Current reversal logic

The current reversal logic can be enabled by setting the parameter CurrRev = On.
The current reversal logic uses a reverse zone connected to the input IRV to
recognize the fault on the parallel line in any of the phases. When the reverse zone
has been activated for a certain settable time tPickUpRev, it prevents sending of a
communication signal and activation of trip signal for a predefined time tDelayRev.
This makes it possible for the receive signal to reset before the carrier aided trip
signal is activated due to the current reversal by the forward directed zone. The
logic diagram for current reversal is shown in Figure 258.

585
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Scheme communication

BLOCK

IRVBLK
tDelayRev
tPickUpRev 10 ms tPickUpRev IRVL
IRV AND t
t t t

CurrRev = On

IEC05000122-4-en.vsd
IEC05000122 V4 EN

Figure 258: Simplified logic diagram for current reversal

The prevention of sending the send signal CS and activation of the TRIP in the
scheme communication block ZCPSCH is carried out by connecting the IRVL
signal to input BLOCK in the ZCPSCH function.

The function has an internal 10 ms drop-off timer which secure that the current
reversal logic will be activated for short input signals even if the pick-up timer is
set to zero.

14.2.6.2 Weak-end infeed logic

The weak-end infeed logic (WEI) function sends back (echoes) the received signal
under the condition that no fault has been detected on the weak-end by different
fault detection elements (distance protection in forward or reverse direction).

The WEI function returns the received signal, shown in Figure 259, when:

The setting parameter WEI is set to either Echo or Echo & Trip.
No active signal present on the input BLOCK.
The functional input CRL is active for a time longer than the tPickUpWei
setting. This input is usually connected to the CRL output on the scheme
communication logic ZCPSCH.
The WEI function is not blocked by the active signal connected to the
WEIBLK1 functional input or to the VTSZ functional input. The later is
usually configured to the VTSZ functional output of the fuse-failure function.
No active signal has been present for at least 200 ms on the WEIBLK2
functional input. An OR combination of all fault detection functions (not
undervoltage) as present within the IED is usually used for this purpose.
The weak-end infeed logic also echoes the received permissive signal when
local breaker opens, CBOPEN prior to faults appeared at the end of line.

586
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 14
Scheme communication

BLOCK
VTSZ
WEIBLK1 OR

tPickUpWEI
CRL AND 50 ms 200 ms
t AND
OR t t
ECHO
200 ms AND
WEIBLK2
t

AND

OR
1500 ms
CBOPEN
t

WEI = Echo

IEC05000123-3-en.vsd
IEC05000123 V3 EN

Figure 259: Simplified logic diagram for weak-end infeed logic Echo

When an echo function is used in both IEDs (should generally be avoided), a

spurious signal can be looped round by the echo logics. To avoid a continuous lock-
up of the system, the duration of the echoed signal is limited to 200 ms.

An undervoltage criteria is used as an additional tripping criteria, when the tripping

of the local breaker is selected, setting WEI = Echo&Trip. With this setting the
Echo and Trip are working in parallel as in logic shown in Figure 260.

BLOCK
VTSZ
WEIBLK1 OR
tPickUpWEI
CRL AND 50 ms 200 ms
t AND ECHO
OR t t AND
200 ms
WEIBLK2
t

AND

1500 ms
OR
CBOPEN
t
AND

U3P*
UL1<UPN<
UL2 < UPN<
UL3 < UPN<
UPN< 100 ms
OR
AND t
TRWEI
OR

15 ms
TRWEIL1
U3P*
AND t
UL1L2 <UPP< OR
UL2L3 < UPP<
UL3L1 < UPP<
15 ms
UPP< TRWEIL2
AND t
OR

15 ms
OR TRWEIL3
AND t

WEI = Echo & Trip

IEC00000551-TIFF.vsd
IEC00000551-TIFF V4 EN

Figure 260: Simplified logic diagram for weak-end infeed logic Echo&Trip

587
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Scheme communication

14.2.7 Technical data

Table 399: ZCRWPSCH technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Detection level phase-to-neutral (10-90)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur
voltage
Detection level phase-to-phase (10-90)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur
voltage
Operate time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms
logic whichever is greater
Delay time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms
whichever is greater
Coordination time for weak-end (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms
infeed logic whichever is greater

14.3 Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH

14.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH - -

14.3.2 Functionality
To achieve fast clearing of faults on the whole line, when no communication
channel is available, local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH can be used. This logic
enables fast fault clearing and re-closing during certain conditions, but naturally, it
can not fully replace a communication channel.

The logic can be controlled either by the autorecloser (zone extension) or by the loss-
of-load current (loss-of-load acceleration).

14.3.3 Function block

ZCLCPSCH
I3P* TRZE
BLOCK TRLL
ARREADY
NDST
EXACC
BC
LLACC

IEC13000307-1-en.vsd
IEC13000307 V1 EN

Figure 261: ZCLCPSCH function block

588
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 14
Scheme communication

14.3.4 Signals
Table 400: ZCLCPSCH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
ARREADY BOOLEAN 0 Autoreclosure ready, releases function used for
fast trip
NDST BOOLEAN 0 Non directional criteria used to prevent
instantaneous trip
EXACC BOOLEAN 0 Connected to function used for tripping at zone
extension
BC BOOLEAN 0 Breaker Close
LLACC BOOLEAN 0 Connected to function used for tripping at loss of
load

Table 401: ZCLCPSCH Output signals

Name Type Description
TRZE BOOLEAN Trip by zone extension
TRLL BOOLEAN Trip by loss of load

14.3.5 Settings
Table 402: ZCLCPSCH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
LoadCurr 1 - 100 %IB 1 10 Load current before disturbance in % of
IBase
LossOfLoad Off - - Off Enable/Disable operation of Loss of load.
On
ZoneExtension Off - - Off Enable/Disable operation of Zone
On extension
MinCurr 1 - 100 %IB 1 5 Lev taken as curr loss due to remote CB
trip in % of IBase
tLowCurr 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Time delay on pick-up for MINCURR
value
tLoadOn 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay on pick-up for load current
release
tLoadOff 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.300 Time delay on drop off for load current
release

589
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Scheme communication

Table 403: ZCLCPSCH Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

14.3.6 Operation principle

14.3.6.1 Zone extension

The overreaching zone is connected to the input EXACC. For this reason,
configure the ARREADY functional input to a READY functional output of a used
autoreclosing function or via the selected binary input to an external autoreclosing
device, see figure 262.

This will allow the overreaching zone to trip instantaneously.

IEC05000157 V1 EN

Figure 262: Simplified logic diagram for local acceleration logic

After the autorecloser initiates the close command and remains in the reclaim state,
there will be no ARREADY signal, and the protection will trip normally with step
distance time functions.

In case of a fault on the adjacent line within the overreaching zone range, an
unwanted autoreclosing cycle will occur. The step distance function at the
reclosing attempt will prevent an unwanted retrip when the breaker is reclosed.

On the other hand, at a persistent line fault on line section not covered by
instantaneous zone (normally zone 1) only the first trip will be "instantaneous".

The function will be blocked if the input BLOCK is activated (common with loss-of-
load acceleration).

14.3.6.2 Loss-of-Load acceleration

When the "acceleration" is controlled by a loss-of-load, the overreaching zone used

for "acceleration" connected to input LLACC is not allowed to trip

590
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 14
Scheme communication

"instantaneously" during normal non-fault system conditions. When all three-phase

currents have been above the set value MinCurr for more than setting tLowCurr, an
overreaching zone will be allowed to trip "instantaneously" during a fault condition
when one or two of the phase currents will become low due to a three-phase trip at
the opposite IED, see figure 263. The current measurement is performed internally
and the internal STILL signal becomes logical one under the described conditions.
The load current in a healthy phase is in this way used to indicate the tripping at the
opposite IED. Note that this function will not operate in case of three-phase faults,
because none of the phase currents will be low when the opposite IED is tripped.

IEC05000158 V1 EN

Figure 263: Loss-of-load acceleration - simplified logic diagram

Breaker closing signals can if decided be connected to block the function during
normal closing.

14.4 Scheme communication logic for residual

overcurrent protection ECPSCH

14.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Scheme communication logic for ECPSCH - 85
residual overcurrent protection

14.4.2 Functionality
To achieve fast fault clearance of earth faults on the part of the line not covered by
the instantaneous step of the residual overcurrent protection, the directional
residual overcurrent protection can be supported with a logic that uses
communication channels.

In the directional scheme, information of the fault current direction must be

transmitted to the other line end. With directional comparison, a short operate time

591
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Scheme communication

of the protection including a channel transmission time, can be achieved. This short
operate time enables rapid autoreclosing function after the fault clearance.

The communication logic module for directional residual current protection

enables blocking as well as permissive under/overreaching, and unblocking
schemes. The logic can also be supported by additional logic for weak-end infeed
and current reversal, included in Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for
residual overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH function.

14.4.3 Function block

ECPSCH
BLOCK TRIP
BLKTR CS
BLKCS CRL
CSBLK LCG
CACC
CSOR
CSUR
CR
CRG

IEC06000288-2-en.vsd
IEC06000288 V2 EN

Figure 264: ECPSCH function block

14.4.4 Signals
Table 404: ECPSCH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKTR BOOLEAN 0 Signal for blocking trip due to communication logic
BLKCS BOOLEAN 0 Signal for blocking CS in Overreach and Blocking
schemes
CSBLK BOOLEAN 0 Reverse residual overcurrent signal for Carrier
Send
CACC BOOLEAN 0 Signal to be used for tripping by Communication
Scheme
CSOR BOOLEAN 0 Overreaching residual overcurrent signal for
Carrier Send
CSUR BOOLEAN 0 Underreaching residual overcurrent signal for
Carrier Send
CR BOOLEAN 0 Carrier Receive for Communication Scheme Logic
CRG BOOLEAN 0 Carrier guard signal received

592
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 14
Scheme communication

Table 405: ECPSCH Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN Trip signal by communication scheme logic
CS BOOLEAN Carrier Send by Communication Scheme Logic
CRL BOOLEAN Carrier Receive from Communication Scheme
Logic
LCG BOOLEAN loss of carrier guard signal

14.4.5 Settings
Table 406: ECPSCH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
SchemeType Off - - Permissive UR Scheme type, Mode of Operation
Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
tCoord 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.035 Communication scheme coordination
time
tSendMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.100 Minimum duration of a carrier send signal

Table 407: ECPSCH Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Unblock Off - - Off Operation mode of unblocking logic
NoRestart
Restart
tSecurity 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.035 Security timer for loss of carrier guard
detection

14.4.6 Operation principle

The four step directional residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC is configured to
give input information, that is directional fault detection signals, to the ECPSCH
logic:

593
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Scheme communication

Input signal CACC is used for tripping of the communication scheme,

normally the start signal of a forward overreaching step of STFW.
Input signal CSBLK is used for sending block signal in the blocking
communication scheme, normally the start signal of a reverse overreaching
step of STRV.
Input signal CSUR is used for sending permissive signal in the underreaching
permissive communication scheme, normally the start signal of a forward
underreaching step of STINn, where n corresponds to the underreaching step.
Input signal CSOR is used for sending permissive signal in the overreaching
permissive communication scheme, normally the start signal of a forward
overreaching step of STINn, where n corresponds to the overreaching step.

In addition to this a signal from the autoreclosing function should be configured to

the BLKCS input for blocking of the function at a single phase reclosing cycle.

14.4.6.1 Blocking scheme

In the blocking scheme a signal is sent to the other line end if the directional
element detects an earth fault in the reverse direction. When the forward directional
element operates, it trips after a short time delay if no blocking signal is received
from the opposite line end. The time delay, normally 30 40 ms, depends on the
communication transmission time and a chosen safety margin.

One advantage of the blocking scheme is that only one channel (carrier frequency)
is needed if the ratio of source impedances at both end is approximately equal for
zero and positive sequence source impedances, the channel can be shared with the
impedance measuring system, if that system also works in the blocking mode. The
communication signal is transmitted on a healthy line and no signal attenuation will
occur due to the fault.

Blocking schemes are particular favorable for three-terminal applications if there is

no zero-sequence outfeed from the tapping. The blocking scheme is immune to
current reversals because the received signal is maintained long enough to avoid
unwanted operation due to current reversal. There is never any need for weak-end
infeed logic, because the strong end trips for an internal fault when no blocking
signal is received from the weak end. The fault clearing time is however generally
longer for a blocking scheme than for a permissive scheme.

If the fault is on the line, the forward direction measuring element operates. If no
blocking signal comes from the other line end via the CR binary input (received
signal) the TRIP output is activated after the tCoord set time delay.

594
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 14
Scheme communication

IEC05000448 V1 EN

Figure 265: Simplified logic diagram for blocking scheme

14.4.6.2 Permissive under/overreaching scheme

In the permissive scheme the forward directed earth-fault measuring element sends
a permissive signal to the other end, if an earth fault is detected in the forward
direction. The directional element at the other line end must wait for a permissive
signal before activating a trip signal. Independent channels must be available for
the communication in each direction.

An impedance measuring IED, which works in the same type of permissive mode,
with one channel in each direction, can share the channels with the communication
scheme for residual overcurrent protection. If the impedance measuring IED works
in the permissive overreaching mode, common channels can be used in single line
applications. In case of double lines connected to a common bus at both ends, use
common channels only if the ratio Z1S/Z0S (positive through zero-sequence source
impedance) is about equal at both ends. If the ratio is different, the impedance
measuring and the directional earth-fault current system of the healthy line may
detect a fault in different directions, which could result in unwanted tripping.

Common channels cannot be used when the weak-end infeed function is used in
the distance or earth-fault protection.

In case of an internal earth-fault, the forward directed measuring element operates

and sends a permissive signal to the remote end via the CS output (sent signal).
Local tripping is permitted when the forward direction measuring element operates
and a permissive signal is received via the CR binary input (received signal).

The permissive scheme can be of either underreaching or overreaching type. In the

underreaching alternative, an underreaching directional residual overcurrent
measurement element will be used as sending criterion of the permissive input
signal CSUR.

595
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Scheme communication

In the overreaching alternative, an overreaching directional residual overcurrent

measurement element will be used as sending criterion of the permissive input
signal CSOR. Also the underreaching input signal CSUR can initiate sending.

BLOCK
CRL
CR AND
25 ms

t TRIP
0 - 60 s

CACC AND AND t

50 ms
tCoord
t

AND

BLKCS OR CS
AND
Overreach
CSOR AND 50 ms

CSUR OR t

en05000280_3_en.vsd
IEC05000280 V3 EN

14.4.6.3 Unblocking scheme

In unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome

by using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally
create a receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less
reliable, power line carrier (PLC) communication is used.

The unblocking function uses a guard signal CRG, which must always be present,
even when no CR signal is received. The absence of the CRG signal for a time
longer than the setting tSecurity time is used as a CR signal, see figure 266. This
also enables a permissive scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal
transmission.

The received signal created by the unblocking function is reset 150 ms after the
security timer has elapsed. When that occurs an output signal LCG is activated for
signaling purpose. The unblocking function is reset 200 ms after that the guard
signal is present again.

596
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 14
Scheme communication

CR
tSecurity CRL
t >1
1
CRG
200 ms 150 ms
t OR t AND
AND
LCG

en05000746.vsd
IEC05000746 V1 EN

Figure 266: Guard signal logic with unblocking scheme

The unblocking function can be set in three operation modes (setting Unblock):

Off: The unblocking function is out of operation

No restart: Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored
If CRG disappears, a CRL signal will be transferred to the trip logic
There will not be any information in case of communication failure (LCG)
Restart Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored
It sends a defined (150 ms) CRL after the disappearance of the CRG signal
The function will activate LCG output in case of communication failure
If the communication failure comes and goes (<200 ms) there will not be recurrent
signaling

14.4.7 Technical data

Table 408: ECPSCH technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Scheme type Permissive Underreaching -
Permissive Overreaching
Blocking
Communication scheme (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 15 ms whichever
coordination time is greater

14.5 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for

residual overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH

14.5.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Current reversal and weak-end infeed ECRWPSCH - 85
logic for residual overcurrent protection

597
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Scheme communication

14.5.2 Functionality
The Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection
ECRWPSCH is a supplement to Scheme communication logic for residual
overcurrent protection ECPSCH.

To achieve fast fault clearing for all earth faults on the line, the directional earth
fault protection function can be supported with logic that uses tele protection
channels.

The 670 series IEDs have for this reason available additions to scheme
communication logic.

If parallel lines are connected to common busbars at both terminals, overreaching

permissive communication schemes can trip unselectively due to fault current
reversal. This unwanted tripping affects the healthy line when a fault is cleared on
the other line. This lack of security can result in a total loss of interconnection
between the two buses. To avoid this type of disturbance, a fault current reversal
logic (transient blocking logic) can be used.

Permissive communication schemes for residual overcurrent protection can

basically operate only when the protection in the remote IED can detect the fault.
The detection requires a sufficient minimum residual fault current, out from this
IED. The fault current can be too low due to an opened breaker or high-positive and/
or zero-sequence source impedance behind this IED. To overcome these
conditions, weak-end infeed (WEI) echo logic is used. The weak-end infeed echo is
limited to 200 ms to avoid channel lockup.

14.5.3 Function block

ECRWPSCH
U3P* IRVL
BLOCK TRWEI
IRVBLK ECHO
IRV
WEIBLK1
WEIBLK2
VTSZ
CBOPEN
CRL

IEC06000289-3-en.vsd
IEC06000289 V3 EN

Figure 267: ECRWPSCH function block

598
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 14
Scheme communication

14.5.4 Signals
Table 409: ECRWPSCH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IRVBLK BOOLEAN 0 Block of current reversal function
IRV BOOLEAN 0 Activation of current reversal logic
WEIBLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI Logic
WEIBLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of WEI logic due to operation of other
protections
VTSZ BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic through fuse-failure
function
CBOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker
CRL BOOLEAN 0 POR Carrier receive for WEI logic

Table 410: ECRWPSCH Output signals

Name Type Description
IRVL BOOLEAN Operation of current reversal logic
TRWEI BOOLEAN Trip signal from weak end infeed logic
ECHO BOOLEAN Permissive signal transmitted as echo signal or in
case of weak end infeed

14.5.5 Settings
Table 411: ECRWPSCH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CurrRev Off - - Off Operating mode of Current Reversal
On Logic
tPickUpRev 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.020 Pickup time for current reversal logic
tDelayRev 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.060 Time Delay to prevent Carrier send and
local trip
WEI Off - - Off Operating mode of WEI logic
Echo
Echo & Trip
tPickUpWEI 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Coordination time for the WEI logic
3U0> 5 - 70 %UB 1 25 Neutral voltage setting for fault
conditions measurement

Table 412: ECRWPSCH Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups

599
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Scheme communication

14.5.6 Operation principle

14.5.6.1 Directional comparison logic function

The directional comparison function contains logic for blocking overreaching and
permissive overreaching schemes.

The circuits for the permissive overreaching scheme contain logic for current
reversal and weak-end infeed functions. These functions are not required for the
blocking overreaching scheme.

Use the independent or inverse time functions in the directional earth fault
protection module to get backup tripping in case the communication equipment
malfunctions and prevents operation of the directional comparison logic.

Connect the necessary signal from the autorecloser for blocking of the directional
comparison scheme, during a single-phase autoreclosing cycle, to the BLOCK
input of the directional comparison module.

14.5.6.2 Fault current reversal logic

The fault current reversal logic uses a reverse directed element, connected to the
input signal IRV, which recognizes that the fault is in reverse direction. When the
reverse direction element is activated the output signal IRVL is activated which is
shown in Figure 268. The logic is now ready to handle a current reversal without
tripping. The output signal IRVL will be connected to the block input on the
permissive overreaching scheme.

When the fault current is reversed on the healthy line, IRV is deactivated and
IRVBLK is activated. The tDelayRev timer delays the reset of the output signal.
The signal blocks operation of the overreach permissive scheme for residual
current and thus prevents unwanted operation caused by fault current reversal.

BLOCK

IRVBLK
tDelayRev
tPickUpRev 10 ms tPickUpRev AND t
IRVL
IRV
t t t

CurrRev = On

IEC09000031-4-en.vsd

IEC09000031 V4 EN

Figure 268: Simplified logic diagram for current reversal

600
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 14
Scheme communication

14.5.6.3 Weak-end infeed logic

The weak-end infeed function can be set to send only an echo signal (WEI=Echo)
or an echo signal and a trip signal (WEI=Echo & Trip). The corresponding logic
diagrams are depicted in Figure 269 and Figure 270.

The weak-end infeed logic uses normally a reverse and a forward direction
element, connected to WEIBLK2 via an OR-gate. If neither the forward nor the
reverse directional measuring element is activated during the last 200 ms, the weak-
end infeed logic echoes back the received permissive signal as shown in Figure 269
and Figure 270. The weak-end infeed logic also echoes the received permissive
signal when CBOPEN is high (local breaker opens) prior to faults appeared at the
end of line.

If the forward or the reverse directional measuring element is activated during the
last 200 ms, the fault current is sufficient for the IED to detect the fault with the
earth fault function that is in operation.

CR
BLOCK AND

VTSZ
OR

tPickUpWEI
WEIBLK1
t AND 50 ms 200 ms
AND
OR t t ECHO
200 ms AND
CRL t

WEIBLK2

AND
1500 ms
CBOPEN OR
t

WEI = Echo

IEC09000032-5-en.vsd

IEC09000032 V5 EN

Figure 269: Simplified logic diagram for weak-end infeed logic - Echo

With the WEI= Echo & Trip setting, the logic sends an echo according to the
diagram above. Further, it activates the TRWEI signal to trip the breaker if the
echo conditions are fulfilled and the neutral point voltage is above the set operate
value for 3U0>.

The voltage signal that is used to calculate the zero sequence voltage is set in the
earth fault function which is in operation.

601
Technical Manual
Section 14 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Scheme communication

BLOCK

VTSZ
OR

tPickUpWEI
WEIBLK1 t AND 50 ms 200 ms
AND
OR t t ECHO
200 ms AND
t
CRL

AND
WEIBLK2 1500 ms
OR
t

CBOPEN

AND
ST3U0
15 ms TRWEI
a>b AND
3U0> t

WEI = Echo&Trip

IEC09000020-5-en.vsd

IEC09000020 V5 EN

Figure 270: Simplified logic diagram for weak-end infeed logic - Echo & Trip

The weak-end infeed echo sent to the strong line end has a maximum duration of
200 ms. When this time period has elapsed, the conditions that enable the echo
signal to be sent are set to zero for a time period of 50 ms. This avoids ringing
action if the weak-end echo is selected for both line ends.

14.5.7 Technical data

Table 413: ECRWPSCH technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate mode of WEI logic Off -
Echo
Echo & Trip
Operate voltage 3U0 for WEI trip (5-70)% of UBase 0.5% of Ur

Operate time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 30 ms whichever

logic is greater
Delay time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 30 ms whichever
is greater
Coordination time for weak-end (0.00060.000) s 0.2% or 30 ms whichever
infeed logic is greater

602
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic

Section 15 Logic

15.1 Tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC

15.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC 94

I->O

SYMBOL-K V1 EN

15.1.2 Functionality
A function block for protection tripping is provided for each circuit breaker
involved in the tripping of the fault. It provides a settable pulse prolongation to
ensure a trip pulse of sufficient length, as well as all functionality necessary for
correct co-operation with autoreclosing functions.

The trip function block also includes a settable latch functionality for evolving
faults and breaker lock-out.

15.1.3 Function block

SMPPTRC
BLOCK TRIP
BLKLKOUT TRL1
TRIN TRL2
TRINL1 TRL3
TRINL2 TR1P
TRINL3 TR2P
PSL1 TR3P
PSL2 CLLKOUT
PSL3
1PTRZ
1PTREF
P3PTR
SETLKOUT
RSTLKOUT

IEC05000707-2-en.vsd
IEC05000707 V2 EN

Figure 271: SMPPTRC function block

603
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic

15.1.4 Signals
Table 414: SMPPTRC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLKLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Blocks circuit breaker lockout output (CLLKOUT)
TRIN BOOLEAN 0 Trip all phases
TRINL1 BOOLEAN 0 Trip phase 1
TRINL2 BOOLEAN 0 Trip phase 2
TRINL3 BOOLEAN 0 Trip phase 3
PSL1 BOOLEAN 0 Functional input for phase selection in phase L1
PSL2 BOOLEAN 0 Functional input for phase selection in phase L2
PSL3 BOOLEAN 0 Functional input for phase selection in phase L3
1PTRZ BOOLEAN 0 Zone Trip with a separate phase selection
1PTREF BOOLEAN 0 Single phase DEF Trip for separate phase
selection
P3PTR BOOLEAN 0 Prepare all tripping to be three-phase
SETLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for setting the circuit breaker lockout function
RSTLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for resetting the circuit breaker lockout
function

Table 415: SMPPTRC Output signals

Name Type Description
TRIP BOOLEAN General trip output signal
TRL1 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 BOOLEAN Trip signal from phase L3
TR1P BOOLEAN Tripping single-pole
TR2P BOOLEAN Tripping two-pole
TR3P BOOLEAN Tripping three-pole
CLLKOUT BOOLEAN Circuit breaker lockout output (set until reset)

604
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic

15.1.5 Settings
Table 416: SMPPTRC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
Program 3 phase - - 1ph/3ph Three ph; single or three ph; single, two
1ph/3ph or three ph trip
1ph/2ph/3ph
tTripMin 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Minimum duration of trip output signal
tWaitForPHS 0.020 - 0.500 s 0.001 0.050 Secures 3-pole trip when phase
selection failed

Table 417: SMPPTRC Group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TripLockout Off - - Off On: activate output (CLLKOUT) and trip
On latch, Off: only outp
AutoLock Off - - Off On: lockout from input (SETLKOUT) and
On trip, Off: only inp

15.1.6 Operation principle

The duration of a trip output signal from tripping logic common 3-phase output
SMPPTRC is settable (tTripMin). The pulse length should be long enough to
secure the breaker opening.

For three-phase tripping logic common 3-phase output, SMPPTRC has a single
input (TRIN) through which all trip output signals from the protection functions
within the IED, or from external protection functions via one or more of the IEDs
binary inputs, are routed. It has a single trip output (TRIP) for connection to one or
more of the IEDs binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED
requiring this signal.

BLOCK
tTripMin TRIP
TRIN OR
AND t

Operation Mode = On

Program = 3Ph

en05000789.vsd
IEC05000789 V1 EN

Figure 272: Simplified logic diagram for three phase trip

605
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic

SMPPTRC function for single-phase and two-phase tripping has additional phase
segregated inputs for this, as well as inputs for faulted phase selection. The latter
inputs enable single- phase and two-phase tripping for those functions which do not
have their own phase selection capability, and therefore which have just a single
trip output and not phase segregated trip outputs for routing through the phase
segregated trip inputs of the expanded SMPPTRC function. Examples of such
protection functions are the residual overcurrent protections. The expanded
SMPPTRC function has two inputs for these functions, one for impedance tripping
(for example, carrier-aided tripping commands from the scheme communication
logic), and one for earth fault tripping (for example, tripping output from a residual
overcurrent protection).

Additional logic, including a timer tWaitForPHS, secures a three-phase trip

command for these protection functions in the absence of the required phase
selection signals.

The expanded SMPPTRC function has three trip outputs TRL1, TRL2, TRL3
(besides the trip output TRIP), one per phase, for connection to one or more of the
IEDs binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring these
signals. There are also separate output signals indicating single-phase, two-phase or
three-phase trip. These signals are important for cooperation with the autorecloser
SMBRREC function.

The expanded SMPPTRC function is equipped with logic which secures correct
operation for evolving faults as well as for reclosing on to persistent faults. A
special input is also provided which disables single- phase and two-phase tripping,
forcing all tripping to be three-phase.

In multi-breaker arrangements, one SMPPTRC function block is used for each

breaker. This can be the case if single pole tripping and autoreclosing is used.

The breaker close lockout function can be activated from an external trip signal
from another protection function via input (SETLKOUT) or internally at a three-
phase trip, if desired.

It is possible to lockout seal in the tripping output signals or use blocking of

closing only the choice is by setting TripLockout.

606
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic

15.1.6.1 Logic diagram

TRINL1

TRINL2
OR
TRINL3

1PTRZ OR
1PTREF
OR
TRIN RSTTRIP
AND
Program = 3ph

IEC05000517-2-en.vsd
IEC05000517 V2 EN

Figure 273: Three-phase front logic simplified logic diagram

TRIN

TRINL1

PSL1 L1TRIP
OR
AND

TRINL2

PSL2 L2TRIP
OR
AND

TRINL3

PSL3 L3TRIP
OR
AND

OR

OR OR

-loop
-loop
OR
AND AND AND

1PTREF AND tWaitForPHS

1PTRZ OR t

IEC10000056-2-en.vsd
IEC10000056 V2 EN

Figure 274: Phase segregated front logic

607
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic

150 ms
L1TRIP OR
t RTRIP
OR
2000 ms
t
OR
AND

150 ms
L2TRIP OR
t STRIP
OR
2000 ms
t
OR
AND

150 ms
L3TRIP OR
t OR
TTRIP

2000 ms
t
OR
AND
OR

OR AND
P3PTR
OR

-loop

IEC05000519-2-en.vsd
IEC05000519-WMF V2 EN

Figure 275: Additional logic for the 1ph/3ph operating mode

608
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic

150 ms
L1TRIP
t OR RTRIP
OR
2000 ms
t

AND

150 ms
L2TRIP
t OR STRIP
OR
2000 ms
t AND

AND

150 ms
L3TRIP
t OR TTRIP
OR
2000 ms
t

AND
OR

AND
P3PTR OR
OR

-loop

IEC05000520-2-en.vsd
IEC05000520-WMF V2 EN

Figure 276: Additional logic for the 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode

609
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic

BLOCK

RTRIP TRL1
AND
OR

STRIP TRL2
AND
OR

TTRIP TRL3
AND
OR
RSTTRIP
TRIP
OR

TR3P
AND AND
OR

-loop

AND 10 ms
TR1P
AND t

AND 5 ms
TR2P
AND t
OR
AND

-loop

IEC05000521-2-en.vsd
IEC05000521-WMF V2 EN

Figure 277: Final tripping circuits

15.1.7 Technical data

Table 418: SMPPTRC technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Trip action 3-ph, 1/3-ph, 1/2/3-ph -
Minimum trip pulse length (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 30 ms whichever
is greater
3-pole trip delay (0.020-0.500) s 0.2% or 10 ms whichever
is greater
Single phase delay, two phase (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 10 ms whichever
delay and evolving fault delay is greater

15.2 Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC

15.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC - -

610
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic

15.2.2 Functionality
Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC function is used to route trip signals and other
logical output signals to different output contacts on the IED.

The trip matrix logic function has 3 output signals and these outputs can be
connected to physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs
for settable pulse or steady output.

15.2.3 Function block

TMAGAPC
BLOCK OUTPUT1
BLK1 OUTPUT2
BLK2 OUTPUT3
BLK3
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32

IEC13000197-1-en.vsd
IEC13000197 V1 EN

Figure 278: TMAGAPC function block

15.2.4 Signals
Table 419: TMAGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK1 BOOLEAN 0 Block of output 1
BLK2 BOOLEAN 0 Block of output 2
BLK3 BOOLEAN 0 Block of output 3
Table continues on next page

611
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic

Name Type Default Description

INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 16
INPUT17 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 17
INPUT18 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 18
INPUT19 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 19
INPUT20 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 20
INPUT21 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 21
INPUT22 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 22
INPUT23 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 23
INPUT24 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 24
INPUT25 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 25
INPUT26 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 26
INPUT27 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 27
INPUT28 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 28
INPUT29 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 29
INPUT30 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 30
INPUT31 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 31
INPUT32 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 32

Table 420: TMAGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN OR function between inputs 17 to 32
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN OR function between inputs 1 to 32

612
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic

15.2.5 Settings
Table 421: TMAGAPC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
PulseTime 0.050 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.150 Output pulse time
OnDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Output on delay time
OffDelay 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Output off delay time
ModeOutput1 Steady - - Steady Mode for output ,1 steady or pulsed
Pulsed
ModeOutput2 Steady - - Steady Mode for output 2, steady or pulsed
Pulsed
ModeOutput3 Steady - - Steady Mode for output 3, steady or pulsed
Pulsed

15.2.6 Operation principle

The trip matrix logic (TMAGAPC) block is provided with 32 input signals and 3
output signals. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gates in order to
provide grouping of connected input signals to the three output signals from the
function block.

Internal built-in OR logic is made in accordance with the following three rules:

1. when any one of first 16 inputs signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical
value 1 the first output signal (OUTPUT1) will get logical value 1.
2. when any one of second 16 inputs signals (INPUT17 to INPUT32) has logical
value 1 the second output signal (OUTPUT2) will get logical value 1.
3. when any one of all 32 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT32) has logical value
1 the third output signal (OUTPUT3) will get logical value 1.

By use of the settings ModeOutput1, ModeOutput2, ModeOutput3, PulseTime,

OnDelay and OffDelay the behavior of each output can be customized. The
OnDelay is always active and will delay the input to output transition by the set
time. The ModeOutput for respective output decides whether the output shall be
steady with an drop-off delay as set by OffDelay or if it shall give a pulse with
duration set by PulseTime. Note that for pulsed operation and that the inputs are
connected in an OR-function, a new pulse will only be given on the output if all
related inputs are reset and then one is activated again. For steady operation the
OffDelay will start when all related inputs have reset. Detailed logical diagram is
shown in figure 279

613
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic

PulseTime

t
&
ModeOutput1=Pulsed
INPUT 1
OUTPUT 1
Ondelay Offdelay
&
1
1 t t
INPUT 16

PulseTime

t
&
ModeOutput2=Pulsed

INPUT 17
OUTPUT 2
Ondelay Offdelay
&
1
1 t t
INPUT 32

PulseTime
t
&

ModeOutput3=Pulsed

OUTPUT 3
Ondelay Offdelay
&
1
1 t t

IEC09000612-3-en.vsd
IEC09000612 V3 EN

Figure 279: Trip matrix internal logic

Output signals from TMAGAPC are typically connected to other logic blocks or
directly to output contacts in the IED. When used for direct tripping of the circuit
breaker(s) the pulse time shall be set to at least 0.150 seconds in order to obtain
satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip coils.

15.3 Logic for group alarm ALMCALH

15.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Logic for group alarm ALMCALH - -

15.3.2 Functionality
Group alarm logic function ALMCALH is used to route several alarm signals to a
common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.

614
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic

15.3.3 Function block

ALMCALH
BLOCK ALARM
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16

IEC13000181-1-en.vsd
IEC13000181 V1 EN

15.3.4 Signals
Table 422: ALMCALH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 16

Table 423: ALMCALH Output signals

Name Type Description
ALARM BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16

615
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic

15.3.5 Settings
Table 424: ALMCALH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On

15.3.6 Operation principle

The logic for group alarm ALMCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and
one ALARM output signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate
in order to provide grouping of connected input signals to the output ALARM
signal from the function block.

When any one of 16 inputs signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1 the
ALARM output signal will get logical value 1.

The function has an off-delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a
steady signal.

Input 1
200 ms
ALARM
1 t
Input 16

IEC13000191-1-en.vsd
IEC13000191 V1 EN

Figure 280: Group alarm logic

15.4 Identification

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Logic for group warning WRNCALH - -

15.4.1 Functionality
Group alarm logic function WRNCALH is used to route several warning signals to
a common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.

616
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic

15.4.2 Function block

WRNCALH
BLOCK WARNING
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16

IEC13000182-1-en.vsd
IEC13000182 V1 EN

15.4.3 Operation principle

The logic for group warning WRNCALH block is provided with 16 input signals
and 1 WARNING output signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR
gate in order to provide grouping of connected input signals to the output
WARNING signal from the function block.

When any one of 16 inputs signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1 the
WARNING output signal will get logical value 1.

The function has an off-delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a
steady signal.

INPUT1
200 ms
WARNING
1 t
INPUT16

IEC13000192-1-en.vsd
IEC13000192 V1 EN

15.4.4 Signals
Table 425: WRNCALH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4
Table continues on next page

617
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic

Name Type Default Description

INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 16

Table 426: WRNCALH Output signals

Name Type Description
WARNING BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16

15.4.5 Settings
Table 427: WRNCALH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On

15.5 Identification

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Logic for group indication INDCALH - -

15.5.1 Functionality
Group indication logic function INDCALH is used to route several indication
signals to a common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.

618
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic

15.5.2 Function block

INDCALH
BLOCK IND
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16

IEC13000183-1-en.vsd
IEC13000183 V1 EN

15.5.3 Operation principle

The logic for group indication INDCALH block is provided with 16 input signals
and 1 IND output signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate in
order to provide grouping of connected input signals to the output IND signal from
the function block.

When any one of 16 inputs signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1 the
IND output signal will get logical value 1.

The function has an off-delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a
steady signal.

INPUT1
200 ms
IND
1 t
INPUT16

IEC13000193-1-en.vsd
IEC13000193 V1 EN

15.5.4 Signals
Table 428: INDCALH Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 4
Table continues on next page

619
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic

Name Type Default Description

INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary input 16

Table 429: INDCALH Output signals

Name Type Description
IND BOOLEAN OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16

15.5.5 Settings
Table 430: INDCALH Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On

15.6 Configurable logic blocks

15.6.1 Functionality
A number of logic blocks and timers are available for the user to adapt the
configuration to the specific application needs.

OR function block. Each block has 6 inputs and two outputs where one is
inverted.

INVERTER function blocks that inverts the input signal.

PULSETIMER function block can be used, for example, for pulse extensions
or limiting of operation of outputs, settable pulse time.

620
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic

GATE function block is used for whether or not a signal should be able to
pass from the input to the output.

XOR function block. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted.

LOOPDELAY function block used to delay the output signal one execution
cycle.

TIMERSET function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the
input signal. The timer has a settable time delay.

AND function block. Each block has four inputs and two outputs where one is
inverted

SRMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output from
two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if the block's output should reset or return to the state
it was, after a power interruption. Set input has priority.

RSMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output from
two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if the block's output should reset or return to the state
it was, after a power interruption. RESET input has priority.

Configurable logic Q/T

A number of logic blocks and timers, with the capability to propagate timestamp
and quality of the input signals, are available. The function blocks assist the user to
adapt the IEDs configuration to the specific application needs.

ORQT OR function block that also propagates timestamp and quality of input
signals. Each block has six inputs and two outputs where one is inverted.

INVERTERQT function block that inverts the input signal and propagates
timestamp and quality of input signal.

PULSETIMERQT Pulse timer function block can be used, for example, for
pulse extensions or limiting of operation of outputs. The function also
propagates timestamp and quality of input signal.

XORQT XOR function block. The function also propagates timestamp and
quality of input signals. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted.

621
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic

TIMERSETQT function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to

the input signal. The timer has a settable time delay. The function also
propagates timestamp and quality of input signal.

ANDQT AND function block. The function also propagates timestamp and
quality of input signals. Each block has four inputs and two outputs where one
is inverted.

SRMEMORYQT function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output

from two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is
inverted. The memory setting controls if the block after a power interruption
should return to the state before the interruption, or be reset. The function also
propagates timestamp and quality of input signal.

RSMEMORYQT function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output

from two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is
inverted. The memory setting controls if the block after a power interruption
should return to the state before the interruption, or be reset. The function also
propagates timestamp and quality of input signal.

INVALIDQT function which sets quality invalid of outputs according to a

"valid" input. Inputs are copied to outputs. If input VALID is 0, or if its quality
invalid bit is set, all outputs invalid quality bit will be set to invalid. The
timestamp of an output will be set to the latest timestamp of INPUT and
VALID inputs.

INDCOMBSPQT combines single input signals to group signal. Single

position input is copied to value part of SP_OUT output. TIME input is copied
to time part of SP_OUT output. Quality input bits are copied to the
corresponding quality part of SP_OUT output.

INDEXTSPQT extracts individual signals from a group signal input. Value

part of single position input is copied to SI_OUT output. Time part of single
position input is copied to TIME output. Quality bits in common part and
indication part of inputs signal is copied to the corresponding quality output.

15.6.2 Inverter function block INV

15.6.2.1 Function block

INV
INPUT OUT

IEC04000404_2_en.vsd
IEC04000404 V2 EN

Figure 281: INV function block

622
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic

15.6.2.2 Signals
Table 431: INV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input

Table 432: INV Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output

15.6.3 OR function block OR

The OR function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. The OR function block has six inputs and two outputs. One of the
outputs is inverted.

15.6.3.1 Function block

OR
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6

IEC04000405_2_en.vsd
IEC04000405 V2 EN

Figure 282: OR function block

15.6.3.2 Signals
Table 433: OR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 to OR gate
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 to OR gate
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 to OR gate
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 to OR gate
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 to OR gate
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 to OR gate

Table 434: OR Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output from OR gate
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output from OR gate

623
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic

15.6.4 AND function block AND

The AND function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. The AND function block has four inputs and two outputs. One of the
outputs are inverted.

15.6.4.1 Function block

AND
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4

IEC14000071-1-en.vsd
IEC14000071 V1 EN

Figure 283: AND function block

15.6.4.2 Signals
Table 435: AND Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 4

Table 436: AND Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

15.6.5 Timer function block TIMER

The function block TIMER has drop-out and pick-up delayed outputs related to the
input signal. The timer has a settable time delay (T).

15.6.5.1 Function block

TIMER
INPUT ON
OFF

IEC04000378-3-en.vsd
IEC04000378 V2 EN

Figure 284: TIMER function block

624
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic

15.6.5.2 Signals
Table 437: TIMER Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to timer

Table 438: TIMER Output signals

Name Type Description
ON BOOLEAN Output from timer , pick-up delayed
OFF BOOLEAN Output from timer, drop-out delayed

15.6.5.3 Settings
Table 439: TIMER Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
T 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay of function

15.6.6 Pulse timer function block PULSETIMER

The pulse (PULSETIMER) function can be used, for example, for pulse extensions
or limiting of operation of outputs. The pulse timer TP has a settable length.

15.6.6.1 Function block

PULSETIMER
INPUT OUT

IEC04000407-3-en.vsd
IEC04000407 V3 EN

Figure 285: PULSETIMER function block

15.6.6.2 Signals
Table 440: PULSETIMER Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to pulse timer

Table 441: PULSETIMER Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output from pulse timer

625
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic

15.6.6.3 Settings
Table 442: PULSETIMER Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.010 Time delay of function

15.6.7 Exclusive OR function block XOR

The exclusive OR function (XOR) is used to generate combinatory expressions
with boolean variables. XOR has two inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is
inverted. The output signal is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are the
same.

15.6.7.1 Function block

XOR
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT

IEC04000409-2-en.vsd
IEC04000409 V2 EN

Figure 286: XOR function block

15.6.7.2 Signals
Table 443: XOR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 to XOR gate
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 to XOR gate

Table 444: XOR Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output from XOR gate
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output from XOR gate

15.6.8 Loop delay function block LOOPDELAY

The Logic loop delay function block (LOOPDELAY) function is used to delay the
output signal one execution cycle.

626
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic

15.6.8.1 Function block

LOOPDELAY
INPUT OUT

IEC09000296-1-en.vsd
IEC09000296 V1 EN

Figure 287: LOOPDELAY function block

15.6.8.2 Signals
Table 445: LLD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

Table 446: LLD Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal delayed one execution cycle

15.6.9 Set-reset with memory function block SRMEMORY

The Set-reset with memory function block (SRMEMORY) is a flip-flop with
memory that can set or reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each
SRMEMORY function block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory
setting controls if the flip-flop after a power interruption will return the state it had
before or if it will be reset.

Table 447: Truth table for SRMEMORY function block

SET RESET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted
value last value
0 1 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 1 1 0

15.6.9.1 Function block

SRMEMORY
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC04000408_2_en.vsd
IEC04000408 V2 EN

Figure 288: SRMEMORY function block

627
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic

15.6.9.2 Signals
Table 448: SRMEMORY Input signals
Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

Table 449: SRMEMORY Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

15.6.9.3 Settings
Table 450: SRMEMORY Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory function
On

15.6.10 Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY

The Reset-set with memory function block (RSMEMORY) is a flip-flop with

memory that can reset or set an output from two inputs respectively. Each
RSMEMORY function block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory
setting controls if the flip-flop after a power interruption will return the state it had
before or if it will be reset. For a Reset-Set flip-flop, RESET input has higher
priority over SET input.

Table 451: Truth table for RSMEMORY function block

RESET SET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted last
value value
0 1 1 0
1 0 0 1
1 1 0 1

628
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic

15.6.10.1 Function block

RSMEMORY
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC09000294-1-en.vsd
IEC09000294 V1 EN

Figure 289: RSMEMORY function block

15.6.10.2 Signals
Table 452: RSMEMORY Input signals
Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

Table 453: RSMEMORY Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

15.6.10.3 Settings
Table 454: RSMEMORY Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory function
On

15.6.11 Controllable gate function block GATE

The Controllable gate function block (GATE) is used for controlling if a signal
should be able to pass from the input to the output or not depending on a setting.

15.6.11.1 Function block

GATE
INPUT OUT

IEC04000410-2-en.vsd
IEC04000410 V2 EN

Figure 290: GATE function block

629
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic

15.6.11.2 Signals
Table 455: GATE Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to gate

Table 456: GATE Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output from gate

15.6.11.3 Settings
Table 457: GATE Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

15.6.12 Settable timer function block TIMERSET

The Settable timer function block (TIMERSET) timer has outputs for delayed input
signal at drop-out and at pick-up. The timer has a settable time delay. It also has an
Operation setting On/, Off/ that controls the operation of the timer.

15.6.12.1 Function block

TIMERSET
INPUT ON
OFF

IEC04000411-2-en.vsd
IEC04000411 V2 EN

Figure 291: TIMERSET function block

15.6.12.2 Signals
Table 458: TIMERSET Input signals
Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input to timer

Table 459: TIMERSET Output signals

Name Type Description
ON BOOLEAN Output from timer, pick-up delayed
OFF BOOLEAN Output from timer, drop-out delayed

630
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic

15.6.12.3 Settings
Table 460: TIMERSET Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.000 Delay for settable timer n

15.7 Configurable logic Q/T

15.7.1 Functionality
A number of logic blocks and timers with the capability to propagate timestamp
and quality of the input signals are available. The function blocks assist the user to
adapt the IEDs configuration to the specific application needs.

15.7.2 ANDQT function block

ANDQT function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. ANDQT function block has four inputs and two outputs.

15.7.2.1 Function block

ANDQT
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4

IEC09000297-1-en.vsd
IEC09000297 V1 EN

Figure 292: ANDQT function block

15.7.2.2 Signals

Table 461: ANDQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 4

631
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic

Table 462: ANDQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

15.7.3 ORQT function block

ORQT function block (ORQT) is used to form general combinatory expressions

with boolean variables. ORQT function block has six inputs and two outputs. One
of the outputs is inverted.

15.7.3.1 Function block

ORQT
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6

IEC09000298-1-en.vsd
IEC09000298 V1 EN

Figure 293: ORQT function block

15.7.3.2 Signals

Table 463: ORQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 6

Table 464: ORQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

15.7.4 Inverter function block INVERTERQT

632
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic

15.7.4.1 Function block

INVERTERQT
INPUT OUT

IEC09000299-1-en.vsd
IEC09000299 V1 EN

Figure 294: INVERTERQT function block

15.7.4.2 Signals

Table 465: INVERTERQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

Table 466: INVERTERQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal

15.7.5 Exclusive OR function block XORQT

The exclusive OR function (XORQT) function is used to generate combinatory

expressions with boolean variables. XORQT function has two inputs and two
outputs. One of the outputs is inverted. The output signal is 1 if the input signals
are different and 0 if they are equal.

15.7.5.1 Function block

XORQT
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT

IEC09000300-1-en.vsd
IEC09000300 V1 EN

Figure 295: XORQT function block

15.7.5.2 Signals

Table 467: XORQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2

633
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic

Table 468: XORQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

15.7.6 Set/Reset function block SRMEMORYQT

The Set-reset function (SRMEMORYQT) is a flip-flop with memory that can set or
reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each SRMEMORYQT function block
has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-flop
after a power interruption will return the state it had before or if it will be reset.

SRMEMORYQT propagates quality and time as well as value.

Table 469: Truth table for SRMEMORYQT function block

SET RESET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted
value last value
0 1 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 1 1 0

If Memory parameter is On, the output result is stored in semi-retained memory.

15.7.6.1 Function block

SRMEMORYQT
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC14000070-1-en.vsd
IEC14000070 V1 EN

Figure 296: SRMEMORYQT function block

15.7.6.2 Signals

Table 470: SRMEMORYQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

634
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic

Table 471: SRMEMORYQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

15.7.6.3 Settings
Table 472: SRMEMORYQT Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory function
On

15.7.7 Reset/Set function block RSMEMORYQT

The Reset-set function (RSMEMORYQT) is a flip-flop with memory that can reset
or set an output from two inputs respectively. Each RSMEMORYQT function
block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-
flop after a power interruption will return the state it had before or if it will be reset.

Table 473: Truth table for RSMEMORYQT function block

RESET SET OUT NOUT
0 0 Last Inverted last
value value
0 1 1 0
1 0 0 1
1 1 0 1

15.7.7.1 Function block

RSMEMORYQT
SET OUT
RESET NOUT

IEC14000069-1-en.vsd
IEC14000069 V1 EN

Figure 297: RSMEMORYQT function block

15.7.7.2 Signals

Table 474: RSMEMORYQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
SET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to set
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Input signal to reset

635
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic

Table 475: RSMEMORYQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal
NOUT BOOLEAN Inverted output signal

15.7.7.3 Settings
Table 476: RSMEMORYQT Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Memory Off - - On Operating mode of the memory function
On

15.7.8 Settable timer function block TIMERSETQT

The Settable timer function block (TIMERSETQT) has pick-up and drop-out
delayed outputs related to the input signal. The timer has a settable time delay (t).

When the output changes value the timestamp of the output signal is updated. The
supported quality state bits are propagated from the input each execution to the
output. A change of these bits will not lead to an updated timestamp on the output.
TIMERSETQT
INPUT ON
OFF

IEC14000068-1-en.vsd
IEC14000068 V1 EN

Figure 298: TIMERSETQT function

15.7.8.1 Signals

Table 477: TIMERSETQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

Table 478: TIMERSETQT Output signals

Name Type Description
ON BOOLEAN Output signal, pick-up delayed
OFF BOOLEAN Output signal, drop-out delayed

636
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic

15.7.8.2 Settings
Table 479: TIMERSETQT Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.000 Delay for settable timer n

15.7.9 Pulse timer function block PULSETIMERQT

Pulse timer function block (PULSETIMERQT) can be used, for example, for pulse
extensions or limiting of operation of outputs. The pulse timer has a settable length
and will also propagate quality and time.

When the input goes to 1 the output will be 1 for the time set by the time delay
parameter t. Then return to 0.

When the output changes value, the timestamp of the output signal is updated.

The supported quality state bits are propagated from the input each execution to
the output. A change of these bits will not lead to an updated timestamp on the output.

15.7.9.1 Signals

Table 480: PULSETIMERQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input signal

Table 481: PULSETIMERQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT BOOLEAN Output signal

15.7.9.2 Settings
Table 482: PULSETIMERQT Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
t 0.000 - 90000.000 s 0.001 0.010 Pulse time length

15.7.10 InvalidLogic INVALIDQT

Component which sets quality invalid of outputs according to a "valid" input.

637
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic

Inputs are copied to outputs. If InputValid input is 0 or if its quality invalid bit is
set, all outputs invalid quality bit will be set to invalid. The timestamp of output
will be set to the latest timestamp of input and InputValid input.

15.7.10.1 Function block

INVALIDQT
INPUT1 OUTPUT1
INPUT2 OUTPUT2
INPUT3 OUTPUT3
INPUT4 OUTPUT4
INPUT5 OUTPUT5
INPUT6 OUTPUT6
INPUT7 OUTPUT7
INPUT8 OUTPUT8
INPUT9 OUTPUT9
INPUT10 OUTPUT10
INPUT11 OUTPUT11
INPUT12 OUTPUT12
INPUT13 OUTPUT13
INPUT14 OUTPUT14
INPUT15 OUTPUT15
INPUT16 OUTPUT16
VALID

iec08000169.vsd
IEC08000169 V1 EN

Figure 299: INVALIDQT function block

15.7.10.2 Signals

Table 483: INVALIDQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 14
Table continues on next page

638
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic

Name Type Default Description

INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Indication input 16
VALID BOOLEAN 1 Inputs are valid or not

Table 484: INVALIDQT Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Indication output 1
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Indication output 2
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Indication output 3
OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Indication output 4
OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Indication output 5
OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Indication output 6
OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Indication output 7
OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Indication output 8
OUTPUT9 BOOLEAN Indication output 9
OUTPUT10 BOOLEAN Indication output 10
OUTPUT11 BOOLEAN Indication output 11
OUTPUT12 BOOLEAN Indication output 12
OUTPUT13 BOOLEAN Indication output 13
OUTPUT14 BOOLEAN Indication output 14
OUTPUT15 BOOLEAN Indication output 15
OUTPUT16 BOOLEAN Indication output 16

15.7.11 Single indication signal combining function block

INDCOMBSPQT

Single position input is copied to value part of SP_OUT output. TIME input is
copied to time part of SP_OUT output. State input bits are copied to the
corresponding state part of SP_OUT output. If the state or value on the SP_OUT
output changes, the Event bit in the state part is toggled.

15.7.11.1 Signals

639
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic

Table 485: INDCOMBSPQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
SP_IN BOOLEAN 0 Single point indication
TIME GROUP 0 Timestamp
SIGNAL
BLOCKED BOOLEAN 0 Blocked for update
SUBST BOOLEAN 0 Substitued
INVALID BOOLEAN 0 Invalid value
TEST BOOLEAN 0 Testmode

Table 486: INDCOMBSPQT Output signals

Name Type Description
SP_OUT BOOLEAN Single point indication

15.7.12 Function block

INDEXTSPQT
SI_IN* SI_OUT
TIME
BLOCKED
SUBST
INVALID
TEST

IEC14000067-1-en.vsd
IEC14000067 V1 EN

Figure 300: INDEXTSPQT function block

Value part of single position input is copied to SI_OUT output.

Time part of single position input is copied to TIME output.

State bits in common part and indication part of inputs signal is copied to the
corresponding state output.

15.7.12.1 Signals

Table 487: INDEXTSPQT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
SI_IN BOOLEAN 0 Single indication

640
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic

Table 488: INDEXTSPQT Output signals

Name Type Description
SI_OUT BOOLEAN Single indication
TIME GROUP SIGNAL Timestamp of input
BLOCKED BOOLEAN Blocked for update
SUBST BOOLEAN Substituted
INVALID BOOLEAN Invalid value
TEST BOOLEAN Testmode

15.8 Technical data

Table 489: Configurable logic blocks

Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Accuracy
fast medium normal value
LogicAND 60 60 160 - -
LogicOR 60 60 160 - -
LogicXOR 10 10 20 - -
LogicInverter 30 30 80 - -
LogicSRMemory 10 10 20 - -
LogicRSMemory 10 10 20 - -
LogicGate 10 10 20 - -
LogicTimer 10 10 20 (0.000 0.5% 10 ms
90000.000) s
LogicPulseTimer 10 10 20 (0.000 0.5% 10 ms
90000.000) s
LogicTimerSet 10 10 20 (0.000 0.5% 10 ms
90000.000) s
LogicLoopDelay 10 10 20 (0.000 0.5% 10 ms
90000.000) s
Trip Matrix Logic 6 6 - - -
Boolean 16 to Integer 4 4 8 - -
Boolean 16 to 4 4 8 - -
integer with Logic
Node
Integer to Boolean 16 4 4 8 - -
Integer to Boolean 4 4 8 - -
16 with Logic Node

641
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic

Table 490: Configurable logic blocks Q/T

Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or value Accuracy
medium normal
ANDQT 20 100 - -
ORQT 20 100 - -
INVERTERQT 20 100 - -
XORQT 10 30 - -
SRMEMORYQT 10 30 - -
RSMEMORYQT 10 30 - -
TIMERSETQT 10 30 (0.000-90000.0 0.5% 10 ms
00) s
PULSETIMERQT 10 30 (0.000-90000.0 0.5% 10 ms
00) s
INVALIDQT 6 6 - -
INDCOMBSPQT 10 10 - -
INDEXTSPQT 10 10 - -

Table 491: Extension logic package

Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Accuracy
fast medium normal value
LogicAND 40 40 100 - -
LogicXOR - - 49 - -
LogicSRMemory - - 110 - -
LogicTimer 5 5 49 (0.000 0.5% 10 ms
90000.00
0) s
LogicPulseTimer 5 5 49 (0.000 0.5% 10 ms
90000.00
0) s
Trip matrix logic - - 18 - -
SLGAPC 10 10 54 - -
VSGAPC 10 10 10 - -
LogicOR 40 40 100 - -
LogicGate - - 49 - -
LogicTimerSet - - 49 - -
LogicLoopDelay - - 49 - -

642
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic

15.9 Fixed signals FXDSIGN

15.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Fixed signals FXDSIGN - -

15.9.2 Functionality
The Fixed signals function FXDSIGN generates nine pre-set (fixed) signals that
can be used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in
other function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating certain logic. Boolean,
integer, floating point, string types of signals are available.

15.9.3 Function block

FXDSIGN
OFF
ON
INTZERO
INTONE
INTALONE
REALZERO
STRNULL
ZEROSMPL
GRP_OFF

IEC05000445-3-en.vsd
IEC05000445 V3 EN

Figure 301: FXDSIGN function block

15.9.4 Signals
Table 492: FXDSIGN Output signals
Name Type Description
OFF BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed off
ON BOOLEAN Boolean signal fixed on
INTZERO INTEGER Integer signal fixed zero
INTONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed one
INTALONE INTEGER Integer signal fixed all ones
REALZERO REAL Real signal fixed zero
STRNULL STRING String signal with no characters
ZEROSMPL GROUP SIGNAL Channel id for zero sample
GRP_OFF GROUP SIGNAL Group signal fixed off

643
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic

15.9.5 Settings
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).

15.9.6 Operation principle

There are eight outputs from FXDSIGN function block:
OFF is a boolean signal, fixed to OFF (boolean 0) value
ON is a boolean signal, fixed to ON (boolean 1) value
INTZERO is an integer number, fixed to integer value 0
INTONE is an integer number, fixed to integer value 1
INTALONE is an integer value FFFF (hex)
REALZERO is a floating point real number, fixed to 0.0 value
STRNULL is a string, fixed to an empty string (null) value
ZEROSMPL is a channel index, fixed to 0 value
GRP_OFF is a group signal, fixed to 0 value

15.10 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I

15.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I - -

Boolean 16 to integer conversion function B16I is used to transform a set of 16

binary (logical) signals into an integer.

644
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic

15.10.2 Function block

B16I
BLOCK OUT
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16

IEC07000128-2-en.vsd
IEC07000128 V2 EN

Figure 302: B16I function block

15.10.3 Signals
Table 493: B16I Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16

Table 494: B16I Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT INTEGER Output value

645
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic

15.10.4 Monitored data

Table 495: B16I Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUT INTEGER - - Output value

15.10.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

15.10.6 Operation principle

The Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) will transfer a combination
of up to 16 binary inputs INx where 1x16 to an integer. Each INx represents a
value according to the table below from 0 to 32768. This follows the general
formula: INx = 2x-1 where 1x16. The sum of all the values on the activated INx
will be available on the output OUT as a sum of the values of all the inputs INx
that are activated. OUT is an integer. When all INx where 1x16 are activated
that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds to that integer 65535 is available on the output
OUT. B16I function is designed for receiving up to 16 booleans input locally. If the
BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the output at the last value.

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block B16I for 1x16.

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the
output OUT on the function block B16I
Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 2 0
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 4 0
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 8 0
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 16 0
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 32 0
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 64 0
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 128 0
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 256 0
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 512 0
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 1024 0
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 2048 0
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 4096 0
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 8192 0
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 16384 0
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 32768 0

646
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic

The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all INx (where
1x16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can
be converted to an integer by the B16I function block.

15.11 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node

representation BTIGAPC

15.11.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with BTIGAPC - -
logic node representation

15.11.2 Functionality
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function
BTIGAPC is used to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer.
The block input will freeze the output at the last value.

BTIGAPC can receive remote values via IEC 61850 depending on the operator
position input (PSTO).

15.11.3 Function block

BTIGAPC
BLOCK OUT
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16

IEC13000303-1-en.vsd
IEC13000303 V1 EN

Figure 303: BTIGAPC function block

647
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic

15.11.4 Signals
Table 496: BTIGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16

Table 497: BTIGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT INTEGER Output value

15.11.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

15.11.6 Monitored data

Table 498: BTIGAPC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUT INTEGER - - Output value

15.11.7 Operation principle

The Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function
(BTIGAPC) will transfer a combination of up to 16 binary inputs INx where

648
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic

1x16 to an integer. Each INx represents a value according to the table below
from 0 to 32768. This follows the general formula: INx = 2x-1 where 1x16. The
sum of all the values on the activated INx will be available on the output OUT as a
sum of the values of all the inputs INx that are activated. OUT is an integer. When
all INx where 1x16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds to that
integer 65535 is available on the output OUT. The BTIGAPC function is designed
for receiving the integer input from a station computer - for example, over IEC
61850. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the logical outputs at the last
value.

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block BTIGAPC for 1x16.

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the
output OUT on the function block BTIGAPC.
Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 2 0
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 4 0
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 8 0
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 16 0
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 32 0
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 64 0
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 128 0
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 256 0
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 512 0
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 1024 0
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 2048 0
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 4096 0
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 8192 0
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 16384 0
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all INx (where
1x16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can
be converted to an integer by the BTIGAPC function block.

649
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic

15.12 Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16A

15.12.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16 - -

15.12.2 Functionality
Integer to boolean 16 conversion function IB16 is used to transform an integer into
a set of 16 binary (logical) signals.

15.12.3 Function block

IB16
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16

IEC06000501-2-en.vsd
IEC06000501 V2 EN

Figure 304: IB16 function block

15.12.4 Signals
Table 499: IB16 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INP INTEGER 0 Integer Input

Table 500: IB16 Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3
Table continues on next page

650
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic

Name Type Description

OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16

15.12.5 Setting parameters

The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection
and Control IED Manager (PCM600)

15.12.6 Operation principle

With integer 15 on the input INP the OUT1 = OUT2 = OUT3= OUT4 =1 and the
remaining OUTx = 0 for (5x16).

OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in
accordance with the table IB16_1. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.

In the above example when integer 15 is on the input INP the OUT1 has a value
=1, OUT2 has a value =2, OUT3 has a value =4 and OUT4 has a value =8. The
sum of these OUTx is equal to 1 + 2 + 4 + 8 = 15.

This follows the general formulae: The sum of the values of all OUTx = 2x-1 where
1x16 will be equal to the integer value on the input INP.

The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion function (IB16) will transfer an integer with
a value between 0 to 65535 connected to the input INP to a combination of
activated outputs OUTx where 1x16. The sum of the values of all OUTx will
then be equal to the integer on input INP. The values of the different OUTx are
according to the table below. When an OUTx is not activated, its value is 0.

When all OUTx where 1x16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds to
that integer 65535 is connected to input INP. The IB16 function is designed for
receiving the integer input locally. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze
the logical outputs at the last value.

651
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block IB16 for 1x16.

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the
output OUT on the function block IB16.
Name of OUTx Type Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 1 0
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 2 0
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3 4 0
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4 8 0
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5 16 0
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6 32 0
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7 64 0
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8 128 0
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9 256 0
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10 512 0
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11 1024 0
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12 2048 0
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13 4096 0
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14 8192 0
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15 16384 0
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all OUTx (where
x = 1 to 16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest integer that can be
converted by the IB16 function block.

15.13 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node

representation ITBGAPC

15.13.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Integer to boolean 16 conversion with ITBGAPC - -
logic node representation

652
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic

15.13.2 Functionality
Integer to boolean conversion with logic node representation function ITBGAPC is
used to transform an integer which is transmitted over IEC 61850 and received by
the function to 16 binary coded (logic) output signals.

ITBGAPC function can only receive remote values over IEC 61850 when the R/L
(Remote/Local) push button on the front HMI, indicates that the control mode for
the operator is in position R (Remote i.e. the LED adjacent to R is lit ), and the
corresponding signal is connected to the input PSTO ITBGAPC function block.
The input BLOCK will freeze the output at the last received value and blocks new
integer values to be received and converted to binary coded outputs.

15.13.3 Function block

ITBGAPC
BLOCK OUT1
PSTO OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16

IEC14000012-1-en.vsd
IEC14000012 V1 EN

Figure 305: ITBGAPC function block

15.13.4 Signals
Table 501: ITBGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
PSTO INTEGER 1 Operator place selection

Table 502: ITBGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5
Table continues on next page

653
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic

Name Type Description

OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16

15.13.5 Settings
This function does not have any setting parameters.

15.13.6 Operation principle

An example is used to explain the principle of operation: With integer 15 sent to
and received by the ITBGAPC function on the IEC61850 the OUTx changes from
0 to 1 on each of the OUT1; OUT2 OUT3 and OUT4. All other OUTx (5x16)
remains 0. The boolean interpretation of this is represented by the assigned values
of each of the outputs OUT1 = 1; and OUT2 = 2; and OUT3= 4; and OUT4 = 8.
The sum of these OUTx (1x4) is equal to the integer 15 received via the
IEC61850 network. The remaining OUTx = 0 for (5x16).

OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in
accordance with the Table 503. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.

The value of each OUTx for 1x16 (1x16) follows the general formulae:
OUTx = 2x-1 The sum of the values of all activated OUTx = 2x-1 where 1x16
will be equal to the integer value received over IEC61850 to the ITBGAPC_1
function block.

The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation function

(ITBGAPC) will transfer an integer with a value between 0 to 65535
communicated via IEC61850 and connected to the ITBGAPC function block to a
combination of activated outputs OUTx where 1x16. The values represented by
the different OUTx are according to Table 503. When an OUTx is not activated, its
value is 0.

The ITBGAPC function is designed for receiving the integer input from a station
computer - for example, over IEC 61850. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will
freeze the logical outputs at the last value.

654
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic

Table 503: Outputs and their values when activated

Name of OUTx Type Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 1 0
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 2 0
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3 4 0
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4 8 0
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5 16 0
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6 32 0
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7 64 0
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8 128 0
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9 256 0
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10 512 0
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11 1024 0
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12 2048 0
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13 4096 0
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14 8192 0
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15 16384 0
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all OUTx
(1x16) are active equals 65535. This is the highest integer that can be converted
to boolean by the ITBGAPC function block.

The operator position input (PSTO) determines the operator place. The integer
number that is communicated to the ITBGAPC can only be written to the block
while the PSTO is in position Remote. If PSTO is in position Off or Local,
then no changes are applied to the outputs.

15.14 Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and

overflow supervision TEIGAPC

15.14.1 Identification
Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device
identification identification number
Elapsed time integrator TEIGAPC - -

655
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic

15.14.2 Functionality
Elapsed Time Integrator (TEIGAPC) function is a function that accumulates the
elapsed time when a given binary signal has been high, see also Figure 306.
BLOCK
RESET
IN Time Integration ACCTIME
with Retain

q-1

OVERFLOW
a
&
a=b
999 999 s b

WARNING
a
&
a=b
tWarning b

ALARM
a
&
a=b
tAlarm b

q-1 = unit delay IEC13000290-1-en.vsd

IEC13000290 V1 EN

Figure 306: TEIGAPC logics

The main features of TEIGAPC

Applicable to long time integration up to 999 999.9 seconds

Supervision of overflow
Possibility to define a warning and an alarm with the resolution of 10
milliseconds
Retain the integration value
Possibilities for blocking and reset of the total integrated time
Report of the integrated time

15.14.3 Function block

TEIGAPC
BLOCK WARNING
IN ALARM
RESET OVERFLOW
ACCTIME

IEC14000014-1-en.vsd
IEC14000014 V1 EN

Figure 307: TEIGAPC function block

656
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic

15.14.4 Signals
Table 504: TEIGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Freeze the integration and block the other outputs
IN BOOLEAN 0 The input signal that is used to measure the
elapsed time, when its value is high
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset the integration time

Table 505: TEIGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
WARNING BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the
warning limit
ALARM BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the
alarm limit
OVERFLOW BOOLEAN Indicator of the integrated time has reached the
overflow limit
ACCTIME REAL Integrated elapsed time in seconds

15.14.5 Settings
Table 506: TEIGAPC Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
tWarning 1.00 - 999999.99 s 0.01 600.00 Time limit for warning supervision
tAlarm 1.00 - 999999.99 s 0.01 1200.00 Time limit for alarm supervision

15.14.6 Operation principle

The elapsed time integrator (TEIGAPC) provides

time integration, accumulating the elapsed time when a given binary signal has
been high
blocking and reset of the total integrated time
supervision of limit transgression and overflow, the overflow limit is fixed to
999999.9 seconds
retaining of the integrated value

Figure 308 describes the simplified logic of the function where the block Time
Integration covers the logics for the first two items listed above while the block
Transgression Supervision Plus Retain contains the logics for the last two.

657
Technical Manual
Section 15 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Logic

Loop Delay

tWarning
OVERFLOW
tAlarm
Transgression Supervision WARNING
Plus Retain
ALARM

BLOCK
RESET ACCTIME
Time Integration
IN

Loop Delay

IEC12000195-3-en.vsd
IEC12000195 V3 EN

Figure 308: TEIGAPC Simplified logic

TEIGAPC main functionalities

integration of the elapsed time when IN has been high
applicable to long time integration (999 999.9 seconds)
output ACCTIME presents integrated value in seconds
integrated value is retained in nonvolatile memory
any retained value with a warning/alarm/overflow is used as initiation
value for the integration following by a restart
RESET: Reset of the integration value. Consequently all other outputs are also
reset
unconditionally on the input IN value
reset the value of the nonvolatile memory to zero
BLOCK: Freeze the integration and block/reset the other outputs
unconditionally on the signal value
BLOCK request overrides RESET request
Monitor and report the conditions of limit transgression
overflow if output ACCTIME >999999.9 seconds
alarm if ACCTIME > tAlarm
warning if ACCTIME > tWarning

The ACCTIME output represents the integrated time in seconds while tOverflow,
tAlarm and tWarning are the time limit parameters in seconds.

tAlarm and tWarning are user settable limits. They are also independent, that is,
there is no check if tAlarm > tWarning.

658
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 15
Logic

tAlarm and tWarning are possible to be defined with a resolution of 10 ms,

depending on the level of the defined values for the parameters.

The limit for the overflow supervision is fixed at 999999.9 seconds. The outputs
freeze if an overflow occurs.

15.14.6.1 Operation Accuracy

The accuracy of TEIGAPC depends on essentially three factors

function cycle time
the pulse length
the number of pulses, that is, the number of rising and falling flank pairs

In principle, a shorter function cycle time, longer integrated time length or more
pulses may lead to reduced accuracy.

15.14.6.2 Memory storage

The value of the integrated elapsed time is retained in a non-volatile memory.

15.14.7 Technical data

Table 507: TEIGAPC Technical data
Function Cycle time (ms) Range or value Accuracy
Elapsed time 3 0 ~ 999999.9 s 0.2% or 20 ms
integration whichever is greater
8 0 ~ 999999.9 s 0.2% or 100 ms
whichever is greater
100 0 ~ 999999.9 s 0.2% or 250 ms
whichever is greater

659
Technical Manual
660
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Section 16 Monitoring

16.1 Measurements

16.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Measurements CVMMXN -
P, Q, S, I, U, f

SYMBOL-RR V1 EN

Phase current measurement CMMXU -

I

SYMBOL-SS V1 EN

Phase-phase voltage measurement VMMXU -

U

SYMBOL-UU V1 EN

Current sequence component CMSQI -

measurement
I1, I2, I0

SYMBOL-VV V1 EN

Voltage sequence component VMSQI -

measurement
U1, U2, U0

SYMBOL-TT V1 EN

Phase-neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU -

U

SYMBOL-UU V1 EN

16.1.2 Functionality
Measurement functions is used for power system measurement, supervision and
reporting to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM600 or to station level for
example, via IEC 61850. The possibility to continuously monitor measured values
of active power, reactive power, currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is

661
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

vital for efficient production, transmission and distribution of electrical energy. It

provides to the system operator fast and easy overview of the present status of the
power system. Additionally, it can be used during testing and commissioning of
protection and control IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of
instrument transformers (CTs and VTs). During normal service by periodic
comparison of the measured value from the IED with other independent meters the
proper operation of the IED analog measurement chain can be verified. Finally, it
can be used to verify proper direction orientation for distance or directional
overcurrent protection function.

The available measured values of an IED are depending on the

actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits that is, low-low
limit, low limit, high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also
supported, that is, the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which
reduces the impact of noise in the inputs.

Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level
when change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all
changes since the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure
value can also be based on periodic reporting.

Main menu/Measurement/Monitoring/Service values/CVMMXN

The measurement function, CVMMXN, provides the following power system

quantities:

P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power

PF: power factor
U: phase-to-phase voltage amplitude
I: phase current amplitude
F: power system frequency

,
The measuring functions CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU provide physical
quantities:

I: phase currents (amplitude and angle) (CMMXU)

U: voltages (phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase voltage, amplitude and angle)
(VMMXU, VNMMXU)

The CVMMXN function calculates three-phase power quantities by using

fundamental frequency phasors (DFT values) of the measured current respectively
voltage signals. The measured power quantities are available either, as
instantaneously calculated quantities or, averaged values over a period of time (low
pass filtered) depending on the selected settings.

662
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5
presentation. This is accomplished by angle and amplitude compensation at 5, 30
and 100% of rated current and at 100% of rated voltage.

The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual

hardware, (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

The measuring functions CMSQI and VMSQI provide sequence component

quantities:

I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, amplitude and angle)

U: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, amplitude and
angle).

16.1.3 Function block

The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware
(TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

CVMMXN
I3P* S
U3P* S_RANGE
P_INST
P
P_RANGE
Q_INST
Q
Q_RANGE
PF
PF_RANGE
ILAG
ILEAD
U
U_RANGE
I
I_RANGE
F
F_RANGE

IEC10000016-1-en.vsd
IEC10000016 V1 EN

Figure 309: CVMMXN function block

CMMXU
I3P* IL1
IL1RANG
IL1ANGL
IL2
IL2RANG
IL2ANGL
IL3
IL3RANG
IL3ANGL

IEC05000699-2-en.vsd
IEC05000699 V2 EN

Figure 310: CMMXU function block

663
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

VMMXU
U3P* UL12
UL12RANG
UL12ANGL
UL23
UL23RANG
UL23ANGL
UL31
UL31RANG
UL31ANGL

IEC05000701-2-en.vsd
IEC05000701 V2 EN

Figure 311: VMMXU function block

CMSQI
I3P* 3I0
3I0RANG
3I0ANGL
I1
I1RANG
I1ANGL
I2
I2RANG
I2ANGL

IEC05000703-2-en.vsd
IEC05000703 V2 EN

Figure 312: CMSQI function block

VMSQI
U3P* 3U0
3U0RANG
3U0ANGL
U1
U1RANG
U1ANGL
U2
U2RANG
U2ANGL

IEC05000704-2-en.vsd
IEC05000704 V2 EN

Figure 313: VMSQI function block

VNMMXU
U3P* UL1
UL1RANG
UL1ANGL
UL2
UL2RANG
UL2ANGL
UL3
UL3RANG
UL3ANGL

IEC09000850-1-en.vsd
IEC09000850 V1 EN

Figure 314: VNMMXU function block

664
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

16.1.4 Signals
Table 508: CVMMXN Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL

Table 509: CVMMXN Output signals

Name Type Description
S REAL Apparent Power magnitude of deadband value
S_RANGE INTEGER Apparent Power range
P_INST REAL Active Power
P REAL Active Power magnitude of deadband value
P_RANGE INTEGER Active Power range
Q_INST REAL Reactive Power
Q REAL Reactive Power magnitude of deadband value
Q_RANGE INTEGER Reactive Power range
PF REAL Power Factor magnitude of deadband value
PF_RANGE INTEGER Power Factor range
ILAG BOOLEAN Current is lagging voltage
ILEAD BOOLEAN Current is leading voltage
U REAL Calculated voltage magnitude of deadband value
U_RANGE INTEGER Calculated voltage range
I REAL Calculated current magnitude of deadband value
I_RANGE INTEGER Calculated current range
F REAL System frequency magnitude of deadband value
F_RANGE INTEGER System frequency range

Table 510: CMMXU Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL

Table 511: CMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
IL1 REAL IL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
IL1RANG INTEGER IL1 Amplitude range
IL1ANGL REAL IL1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
Table continues on next page

665
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Type Description

IL2 REAL IL2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
IL2RANG INTEGER IL2 Amplitude range
IL2ANGL REAL IL2 Angle, magnitude of reported value
IL3 REAL IL3 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
IL3RANG INTEGER IL3 Amplitude range
IL3ANGL REAL IL3 Angle, magnitude of reported value

Table 512: VMMXU Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Group connection abstract block 2
SIGNAL

Table 513: VMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
UL12 REAL UL12 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL12RANG INTEGER UL12 Amplitude range
UL12ANGL REAL UL12 Angle, magnitude of reported value
UL23 REAL UL23 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL23RANG INTEGER UL23 Amplitude range
UL23ANGL REAL UL23 Angle, magnitude of reported value
UL31 REAL UL31 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL31RANG INTEGER UL31 Amplitude range
UL31ANGL REAL UL31 Angle, magnitude of reported value

Table 514: CMSQI Input signals

Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group connection abstract block 3
SIGNAL

Table 515: CMSQI Output signals

Name Type Description
3I0 REAL 3I0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
3I0RANG INTEGER 3I0 Amplitude range
3I0ANGL REAL 3I0 Angle, magnitude of reported value
I1 REAL I1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
I1RANG INTEGER I1 Amplitude range
I1ANGL REAL I1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
Table continues on next page

666
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Name Type Description

I2 REAL I2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
I2RANG INTEGER I2 Amplitude range
I2ANGL REAL I2 Angle, magnitude of reported value

Table 516: VMSQI Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Group connection abstract block 4
SIGNAL

Table 517: VMSQI Output signals

Name Type Description
3U0 REAL 3U0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
3U0RANG INTEGER 3U0 Amplitude range
3U0ANGL REAL 3U0 Angle, magnitude of reported value
U1 REAL U1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
U1RANG INTEGER U1 Amplitude range
U1ANGL REAL U1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
U2 REAL U2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
U2RANG INTEGER U2 Amplitude range
U2ANGL REAL U2 Angle, magnitude of reported value

Table 518: VNMMXU Input signals

Name Type Default Description
U3P GROUP - Group signal for voltage input
SIGNAL

Table 519: VNMMXU Output signals

Name Type Description
UL1 REAL UL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL1RANG INTEGER UL1 Amplitude range
UL1ANGL REAL UL1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
UL2 REAL UL2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL2RANG INTEGER UL2 Amplitude range
UL2ANGL REAL UL2 Angle, magnitude of reported value
UL3 REAL UL3 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL3RANG INTEGER UL3 Amplitude range
UL3ANGL REAL UL3 Angle, magnitude of reported value

667
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

16.1.5 Settings
The available setting parameters of the measurement function (MMXU, MSQI) are
depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in
PCM600.

These six functions are not handled as a group, so parameter settings are only
available in the first setting group.

The following terms are used in the Unit and Description columns:

UBase: Base voltage in primary kV. This voltage is used as reference for
voltage setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary
voltage supervised object.
IBase: Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current
setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of
the supervised object.
SBase: Base setting for power values in MVA.

Table 520: CVMMXN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SLowLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of SBase
SLowLowLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
SMin 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
SMax 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
SRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
PMin -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -200.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
PMax -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
PRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
QMin -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -200.0 Minimum value in % of SBase
QMax -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of SBase
QRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
PFMin -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -1.000 Minimum value
PFMax -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 Maximum value
PFRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UMin 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
UMax 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
Table continues on next page

668
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

URepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
IMin 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 5.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
IMax 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
IRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
FrMin 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 0.000 Minimum value
FrMax 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 70.000 Maximum value
FrRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
Mode L1, L2, L3 - - L1, L2, L3 Selection of measured current and
Arone voltage
Pos Seq
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3
PowAmpFact 0.000 - 6.000 - 0.001 1.000 Amplitude factor to scale power
calculations
PowAngComp -180.0 - 180.0 Deg 0.1 0.0 Angle compensation for phase shift
between measured I & U
k 0.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 0.000 Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement, U and I

Table 521: CVMMXN Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
SZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
SHiHiLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
SHiLim 0.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
SLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
PDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
PZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
PHiHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
PHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
Table continues on next page

669
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

PLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -120.0 Low limit in % of SBase
PLowLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -150.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
PLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
QDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
QZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
QHiHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of SBase
QHiLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of SBase
QLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -120.0 Low limit in % of SBase
QLowLowLim -2000.0 - 2000.0 %SB 0.1 -150.0 Low Low limit in % of SBase
QLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
PFDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
PFZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
PFHiHiLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 1.000 High High limit (physical value)
PFHiLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 0.800 High limit (physical value)
PFLowLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -0.800 Low limit (physical value)
PFLowLowLim -1.000 - 1.000 - 0.001 -1.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
PFLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
UDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
UHiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
ULowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
ULowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
ULimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
IDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
IZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
IHiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
ILowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
ILowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
ILimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
FrDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
FrZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
Table continues on next page

670
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

FrHiHiLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 65.000 High High limit (physical value)
FrHiLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 63.000 High limit (physical value)
FrLowLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 47.000 Low limit (physical value)
FrLowLowLim 0.000 - 100.000 Hz 0.001 45.000 Low Low limit (physical value)
FrLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)
UGenZeroDb 1 - 100 %UB 1 5 Zero point clamping in % of UBase
IGenZeroDb 1 - 100 %IB 1 5 Zero point clamping in % of IBase
UAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at
5% of Ur
UAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at
30% of Ur
UAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at
100% of Ur
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at
5% of Ir
IAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at
30% of Ir
IAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at
100% of Ir
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 30% of Ir
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 100% of Ir

Table 522: CMMXU Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IL1DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode On / Off
On
IL1Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
IL1RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
IL1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
IL2DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
IL2Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
IL2RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
Table continues on next page

671
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IL2AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
IL3DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
IL3Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
IL3RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
IL3AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s

Table 523: CMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IL1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
IL1HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IL1HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at
5% of Ir
IAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at
30% of Ir
IL1LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
IL1LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
IAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate current at
100% of Ir
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 5% of Ir
IL1Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 30% of Ir
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 Deg 0.001 0.000 Angle calibration for current at 100% of Ir
IL1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
IL2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
IL2HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IL2HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
IL2LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
IL2LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
IL2Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
IL2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
IL3ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
IL3HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
IL3HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
IL3LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
Table continues on next page

672
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IL3LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
IL3Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
IL3LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits

Table 524: VMMXU Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
UL12DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode On / Off
On
UL12ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
UL12Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
UL12RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
UL12AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UL23DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UL2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
UL23Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
UL23RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UL23AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UL31DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UL3ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
UL31Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
UL31RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UL31AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s

Table 525: VMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
UL12HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UL12HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
UL12LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
Table continues on next page

673
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

UL12LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
UAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at
100% of Ur
UL12Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in in % of UBase
UL12LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
UL23HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UL23HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
UL23LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
UL23LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
UL23Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
UL23LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
UL31HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UL31HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
UL31LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
UL31LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
UL31Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
UL31LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits

Table 526: CMSQI Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
3I0DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
3I0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
3I0Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
3I0Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
3I0RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
3I0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
3I0AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode On / Off
On
3I0AngMin -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
3I0AngMax -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
3I0AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
Table continues on next page

674
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

I1DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
I1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
I1Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
I1Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
I1RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
I1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
I1AngMax -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
I1AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
I2DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
I2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
I2Min 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of IBase
I2Max 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of IBase
I2RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
I2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
I2AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
I2AngMin -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
I2AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband

Table 527: CMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
3I0HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
3I0HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
3I0LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
3I0LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
3I0AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
I1HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
I1HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
I1LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
I1LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
I1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
Table continues on next page

675
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

I1AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
I1AngMin -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
I2HiHiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of IBase
I2HiLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of IBase
I2LowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of IBase
I2LowLowLim 0.0 - 500.0 %IB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of IBase
I2AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
I2AngMax -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value

Table 528: VMSQI Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
3U0DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
3U0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
3U0Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
3U0Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
3U0RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
3U0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
3U0AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode On / Off
On
3U0AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
3U0AngMin -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
3U0AngMax -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
3U0AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
U1DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
U1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
U1Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
U1Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
U1RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
U1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
Table continues on next page

676
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

U1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
U2DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
U2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
U2Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
U2Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
U2RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
U2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
U2AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
U2AngMin -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
U2AngMax -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
U2AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UAmpPreComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate voltage
at 5% of Ur
UAmpPreComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate voltage
at 30% of Ur
UAmpPreComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate voltage
at 100% of Ur

Table 529: VMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
3U0HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
3U0HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
3U0LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
3U0LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
U1HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
U1HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
U1LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
U1LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
U1AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
U1AngMin -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 -180.000 Minimum value
U1AngMax -180.000 - 180.000 Deg 0.001 180.000 Maximum value
U1AngRepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
U2HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
U2HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
Table continues on next page

677
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

U2LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
U2LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
U2AngZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 0 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range

Table 530: VNMMXU Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
UL1DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
Operation Off - - Off Operation Mode On / Off
On
UL1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
UL1Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
UL1RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
UL1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
UL1AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UL2DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UL2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
UL2Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
UL2RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UL2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
UL2AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UL3DbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
UL3ZeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 1 Zero point clamping
UL3Max 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 200.0 Maximum value in % of UBase
UL3RepTyp Cyclic - - Cyclic Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UL3LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range and is
common for all limits
UL3AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s

678
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Table 531: VNMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
UL1HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UL1HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
UL1LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
UL1LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
UAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 % 0.001 0.000 Amplitude factor to calibrate voltage at
100% of Ur
UL1Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
UL2HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UL2HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
UL2LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
UL2LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
UL2Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase
UL3HiHiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 150.0 High High limit in % of UBase
UL3HiLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 120.0 High limit in % of UBase
UL3LowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 80.0 Low limit in % of UBase
UL3LowLowLim 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 60.0 Low Low limit in % of UBase
UL3Min 0.0 - 200.0 %UB 0.1 50.0 Minimum value in % of UBase

16.1.6 Monitored data

Table 532: CVMMXN Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
S_IMAG REAL - - Apparent Power
magnitude of
instantaneous value
S REAL - MVA Apparent Power
magnitude of deadband
value
P_IMAG REAL - - Active Power magnitude
of instantaneous value
P REAL - MW Active Power magnitude
of deadband value
Q_IMAG REAL - - Reactive Power
magnitude of
instantaneous value
Q REAL - MVAr Reactive Power
magnitude of deadband
value
PF_IMAG REAL - - Power Factor magnitude
of instantaneous value
PF REAL - - Power Factor magnitude
of deadband value
Table continues on next page

679
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

U_IMAG REAL - - Calcuated voltage
magnitude of
instantaneous value
U REAL - kV Calculated voltage
magnitude of deadband
value
I_IMAG REAL - - Caculated current
magnitude of
instantaneous value
I REAL - A Calculated current
magnitude of deadband
value
F_IMAG REAL - - System frequency
magnitude of
instantaneous value
F REAL - Hz System frequency
magnitude of deadband
value

Table 533: CMMXU Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
IL1IMAG REAL - - IL1 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
IL1 REAL - A IL1 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
IL1ANGIM REAL - - IL1 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
IL1ANGL REAL - deg IL1 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
IL2IMAG REAL - - IL2 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
IL2 REAL - A IL2 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
IL2ANGIM REAL - - IL2 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
IL2ANGL REAL - deg IL2 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
IL3IMAG REAL - - IL3 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
IL3 REAL - A IL3 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
IL3ANGIM REAL - - IL3 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
IL3ANGL REAL - deg IL3 Angle, magnitude of
reported value

680
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Table 534: VMMXU Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL12IMAG REAL - - UL12 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
UL12 REAL - kV UL12 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
UL12ANGIM REAL - - UL12 Angle, magnitude
of instantaneous value
UL12ANGL REAL - deg UL12 Angle, magnitude
of reported value
UL23IMAG REAL - - UL23 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
UL23 REAL - kV UL23 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
UL23ANGIM REAL - - UL23 Angle, magnitude
of instantaneous value
UL23ANGL REAL - deg UL23 Angle, magnitude
of reported value
UL31IMAG REAL - - UL31 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
UL31 REAL - kV UL31 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
UL31ANGIM REAL - - UL31 Angle, magnitude
of instantaneous value
UL31ANGL REAL - deg UL31 Angle, magnitude
of reported value

Table 535: CMSQI Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
3I0IMAG REAL - - 3I0 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
3I0 REAL - A 3I0 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
3I0ANGIM REAL - - 3I0 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
3I0ANGL REAL - deg 3I0 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
I1IMAG REAL - - I1 Amplitude, magnitude
of instantaneous value
I1 REAL - A I1 Amplitude, magnitude
of reported value
Table continues on next page

681
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

I1ANGIM REAL - - I1 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
I1ANGL REAL - deg I1 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
I2IMAG REAL - - I2 Amplitude, magnitude
of instantaneous value
I2 REAL - A I2 Amplitude, magnitude
of reported value
I2ANGIM REAL - - I2 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
I2ANGL REAL - deg I2 Angle, magnitude of
reported value

Table 536: VMSQI Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
3U0IMAG REAL - - 3U0 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
3U0 REAL - kV 3U0 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
3U0ANGIM REAL - - 3U0 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
3U0ANGL REAL - deg 3U0 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
U1IMAG REAL - - U1 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
U1 REAL - kV U1 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
U1ANGIM REAL - - U1 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
U1ANGL REAL - deg U1 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
U2IMAG REAL - - U2 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
U2 REAL - kV U2 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
U2ANGIM REAL - - U2 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
U2ANGL REAL - deg U2 Angle, magnitude of
reported value

682
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Table 537: VNMMXU Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
UL1IMAG REAL - - UL1 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
UL1 REAL - kV UL1 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
UL1ANGIM REAL - - UL1 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
UL1ANGL REAL - deg UL1 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
UL2IMAG REAL - - UL2 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
UL2 REAL - kV UL2 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
UL2ANGIM REAL - - UL2 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
UL2ANGL REAL - deg UL2 Angle, magnitude of
reported value
UL3IMAG REAL - - UL3 Amplitude,
magnitude of
instantaneous value
UL3 REAL - kV UL3 Amplitude,
magnitude of reported
value
UL3ANGIM REAL - - UL3 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
UL3ANGL REAL - deg UL3 Angle, magnitude of
reported value

16.1.7 Operation principle

16.1.7.1 Measurement supervision

The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and
further process information for currents and voltages obtained from the pre-
processing blocks. The number of processed alternate measuring quantities
depends on the type of IED and built-in options.

The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations:

Locally by means of the local HMI

Remotely using the monitoring tool within PCM600 or over the station bus
Internally by connecting the analogue output signals to the Disturbance Report
function

683
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Phase angle reference

All phase angles are presented in relation to a defined reference channel. The
General setting parameter PhaseAngleRef defines the reference, see section
"Analog inputs".

Zero point clamping

Measured value below zero point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows the
noise in the input signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a general
setting (XZeroDb where X equals S, P, Q, PF, U, I, F, IL1-3, UL1-3, UL12-31, I1,
I2, 3I0, U1, U2 or 3U0). Observe that this measurement supervision zero point
clamping might be overridden by the zero point clamping used for the
measurement values within CVMMXU.

Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity

Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in each function
block by means of four defined operating thresholds, see figure 315. The
monitoring has two different modes of operating:

Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or
High-high limit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values
Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low limit
(XLowLim) or Low-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.

X_RANGE is illustrated in figure 315.

X_RANGE = 3
High-high limit

X_RANGE= 1 Hysteresis
High limit

X_RANGE=0

X_RANGE=0 t

Low limit

X_RANGE=2

Low-low limit
X_RANGE=4

en05000657.vsd
IEC05000657 V1 EN

Figure 315: Presentation of operating limits

Each analogue output has one corresponding supervision level output

(X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1:
High limit exceeded, 3: High-high limit exceeded, 2: below Low limit and 4: below
Low-low limit). The output may be connected to a measurement expander block
(XP (RANGE_XP)) to get measurement supervision as binary signals.

684
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 315.

The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference
between the operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for
each measuring channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating
values within one channel.

Actual value of the measured quantity

The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The
measurement is continuous for each measured quantity separately, but the reporting
of the value to the higher levels depends on the selected reporting mode. The
following basic reporting modes are available:

Cyclic reporting (Cyclic)

Amplitude dead-band supervision (Dead band)
Integral dead-band supervision (Int deadband)

Cyclic reporting
The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting
(XRepTyp). The measuring channel reports the value independent of amplitude or
integral dead-band reporting.

In addition to the normal cyclic reporting the IED also report spontaneously when
measured value passes any of the defined threshold limits.

Y
Value Reported Value Reported
Value Reported Value Reported
(1st)

Y3 Value Reported
Y2 Y4

Y1 Y5

t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)

t
Value 1

Value 2

Value 3

Value 4

Value 5

en05000500.vsd
(*)Set value for t: XDbRepInt

IEC05000500 V1 EN

Figure 316: Periodic reporting

685
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Amplitude dead-band supervision

If a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the
change is larger than the Y pre-defined limits that are set by user (UDbRepIn),
then the measuring channel reports the new value to a higher level. This limits the
information flow to a minimum necessary. Figure 317 shows an example with the
amplitude dead-band supervision. The picture is simplified: the process is not
continuous but the values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle
from each other.

Value Reported
Y

Value Reported Value Reported

Value Reported
(1st)
Y3 DY
DY
Y2 DY
DY
DY
DY
Y1

99000529.vsd

IEC99000529 V1 EN

Figure 317: Amplitude dead-band supervision reporting

After the new value is reported, the Y limits for dead-band are automatically set
around it. The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more
than defined by the Y set limits.

Integral dead-band reporting

The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-
set limit (XDbRepInt), figure 318, where an example of reporting with integral dead-
band supervision is shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous
but the values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each
other.

The last value reported, Y1 in figure 318 serves as a basic value for further
measurement. A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly
measured value and is multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The
absolute values of these integral values are added until the pre-set value is
exceeded. This occurs with the value Y2 that is reported and set as a new base for
the following measurements (as well as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5).

686
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals

with small variations that can last for relatively long periods.

Y A1 >=
A >= pre-set value
A2 >=
pre-set value pre-set value
Y3 A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=
pre-set value
Y2 A1 A2
A4 A6
Value Reported Y4 A3 A5 A7
(1st) Value
Value Reported Y5
A Reported Value
Reported Value
Y1 Reported

t
99000530.vsd

IEC99000530 V1 EN

Figure 318: Reporting with integral dead-band supervision

16.1.7.2 Measurements CVMMXN

Mode of operation
The measurement function must be connected to three-phase current and three-
phase voltage input in the configuration tool (group signals), but it is capable to
measure and calculate above mentioned quantities in nine different ways depending
on the available VT inputs connected to the IED. The end user can freely select by
a parameter setting, which one of the nine available measuring modes shall be used
within the function. Available options are summarized in the following table:

687
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Set value for Formula used for complex, three- Formula used for voltage and Comment
parameter phase power calculation current magnitude calculation
Mode
1 L1, L2, L3 Used when
* *
S = U L1 I L1 + U L 2 I L 2 + U L 3 I L 3
*
U = ( U L1 + U L 2 + U L 3 ) / 3
three phase-
EQUATION1385 V1 EN
to-earth
I = ( I L1 + I L 2 + I L 3 ) / 3
voltages are
EQUATION1386 V1 EN available
2 Arone Used when
S = U L1 L 2 I L1 - U L 2 L 3 I L 3
* *
U = ( U L1 L 2 + U L 2 L 3 ) / 2 three two
phase-to-
(Equation 78)
I = ( I L1 + I L 3 ) / 2 phase
EQUATION1387 V1 EN

voltages are
EQUATION1388 V1 EN (Equation 79) available
3 PosSeq Used when
S = 3 U PosSeq I PosSeq
*
U = 3 U PosSeq only
symmetrical
(Equation 80) three phase
EQUATION1389 V1 EN
I = I PosSeq
power shall
EQUATION1390 V1 EN (Equation 81) be measured

4 L1L2 Used when

S = U L1 L 2 ( I L*1 - I L* 2 ) U = U L1 L 2 only UL1L2
phase-to-
(Equation 82)
I = ( I L1 + I L 2 ) / 2
EQUATION1391 V1 EN
phase
voltage is
EQUATION1392 V1 EN (Equation 83) available
5 L2L3 Used when
S = U L 2 L3 ( I L 2 - I L3 )
* *
U = U L2 L3 only UL2L3
phase-to-
(Equation 84)
I = ( I L2 + I L3 ) / 2
EQUATION1393 V1 EN
phase
voltage is
EQUATION1394 V1 EN (Equation 85) available
6 L3L1 Used when
S = U L 3 L1 ( I L 3 - I L1 )
* *
U = U L 3 L1 only UL3L1
phase-to-
(Equation 86)
I = ( I L 3 + I L1 ) / 2
EQUATION1395 V1 EN
phase
voltage is
EQUATION1396 V1 EN (Equation 87) available
7 L1 Used when
S = 3 U L1 I L1
*
U = 3 U L1 only UL1
phase-to-
(Equation 88) earth voltage
I = I L1
EQUATION1397 V1 EN

is available
EQUATION1398 V1 EN (Equation 89)
8 L2 Used when
S = 3 U L2 I L2
*
U = 3 U L2 only UL2
phase-to-
(Equation 90) earth voltage
I = IL2
EQUATION1399 V1 EN

is available
EQUATION1400 V1 EN (Equation 91)
9 L3 Used when
S = 3 U L3 I L3
*
U = 3 U L3 only UL3
phase-to-
(Equation 92)
I = I L3 earth voltage
EQUATION1401 V1 EN

is available
EQUATION1402 V1 EN (Equation 93)
* means complex conjugated value

688
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

It shall be noted that only in the first two operating modes that is, 1 & 2 the
measurement function calculates exact three-phase power. In other operating
modes that is, from 3 to 9 it calculates the three-phase power under assumption that
the power system is fully symmetrical. Once the complex apparent power is
calculated then the P, Q, S, & PF are calculated in accordance with the following
formulas:

P = Re( S )
EQUATION1403 V1 EN (Equation 94)

Q = Im( S )
EQUATION1404 V1 EN (Equation 95)

S = S = P +Q
2 2

EQUATION1405 V1 EN (Equation 96)

PF = cosj = P
S
EQUATION1406 V1 EN (Equation 97)

Additionally to the power factor value the two binary output signals from the
function are provided which indicates the angular relationship between current and
voltage phasors. Binary output signal ILAG is set to one when current phasor is
lagging behind voltage phasor. Binary output signal ILEAD is set to one when
current phasor is leading the voltage phasor.

Each analogue output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE).

The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement
supervision".

Calibration of analog inputs

Measured currents and voltages used in the CVMMXN function can be calibrated
to get class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle
compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation
below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in
figure 319.

689
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

IEC05000652 V2 EN

Figure 319: Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference
and the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.

Low pass filtering

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is
possible to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for P,
Q, S, U, I and power factor. This will make slower measurement response to the
step changes in the measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with
the following recursive formula:

X = k X Old + (1 - k ) X Calculated
EQUATION1407 V1 EN (Equation 98)

where:
X is a new measured value (that is P, Q, S, U, I or PF) to be given out from the function
XOld is the measured value given from the measurement function in previous execution cycle

XCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

690
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay).
When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. Appropriate value of k
shall be determined separately for every application. Some typical value for k =0.14.

Zero point clamping

In order to avoid erroneous measurements when either current or voltage signal is
not present, it is possible for the end user to set the amplitudeIGenZeroDb level for
current and voltage measurement UGenZeroDb is forced to zero. When either
current or voltage measurement is forced to zero automatically the measured values
for power (P, Q and S) and power factor are forced to zero as well. Since the
measurement supervision functionality, included in CVMMXN, is using these
values the zero clamping will influence the subsequent supervision (observe the
possibility to do zero point clamping within measurement supervision, see section
"Measurement supervision").

Compensation facility
In order to compensate for small amplitude and angular errors in the complete
measurement chain (CT error, VT error, IED input transformer errors and so on.) it
is possible to perform on site calibration of the power measurement. This is
achieved by setting the complex constant which is then internally used within the
function to multiply the calculated complex apparent power S. This constant is set
as amplitude (setting parameter PowAmpFact, default value 1.000) and angle
(setting parameter PowAngComp, default value 0.0 degrees). Default values for
these two parameters are done in such way that they do not influence internally
calculated value (complex constant has default value 1). In this way calibration, for
specific operating range (for example, around rated power) can be done at site.
However, to perform this calibration it is necessary to have an external power
meter with high accuracy class available.

Directionality
If CT earthing parameter is set as described in section "Analog inputs", active and
reactive power will be measured always towards the protected object. This is
shown in the following figure 320.

691
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Busbar

IED

P Q

Protected
Object
IEC09000038-1-en.vsd
IEC09000038-1-EN V1 EN

Figure 320: Internal IED directionality convention for P & Q measurements

Practically, it means that active and reactive power will have positive values when
they flow from the busbar towards the protected object and they will have negative
values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.

In some application, for example, when power is measured on the secondary side
of the power transformer it might be desirable, from the end client point of view, to
have actually opposite directional convention for active and reactive power
measurements. This can be easily achieved by setting parameter PowAngComp to
value of 180.0 degrees. With such setting the active and reactive power will have
positive values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.

Frequency
Frequency is actually not calculated within measurement block. It is simply
obtained from the pre-processing block and then just given out from the
measurement block as an output.

16.1.7.3 Phase current measurement CMMXU

The Phase current measurement (CMMXU) function must be connected to three-

phase current input in the configuration tool to be operable. Currents handled in the
function can be calibrated to get better then class 0.5 measuring accuracy for
internal use, on the outputs and IEC 61850. This is achieved by amplitude and

692
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current. The compensation below

5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see figure 319.

Phase currents (amplitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each
amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output (ILx_RANG). The
supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section
"Measurement supervision".

16.1.7.4 Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements VMMXU,

VNMMXU

The voltage function must be connected to three-phase voltage input in the

configuration tool to be operable. Voltages are handled in the same way as currents
when it comes to class 0.5 calibrations, see above.

The voltages (phase or phase-phase voltage, amplitude and angle) are available on
the outputs and each amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output
(ULxy_RANG). The supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see
section "Measurement supervision".

16.1.7.5 Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI, CMSQI

The measurement functions must be connected to three-phase current (CMSQI) or

voltage (VMSQI) input in the configuration tool to be operable. No outputs, other
than X_RANG, are calculated within the measuring blocks and it is not possible to
calibrate the signals. Input signals are obtained from the pre-processing block and
transferred to corresponding output.

Positive, negative and three times zero sequence quantities are available on the
outputs (voltage and current, amplitude and angle). Each amplitude output has a
corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an
integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

16.1.8 Technical data

Table 538: CVMMXN technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Frequency (0.95-1.05) fr 2.0 mHz

Voltage (0.1-1.5) Ur 0.5% of Ur at UUr

0.5% of U at U > Ur

Connected current (0.2-4.0) Ir 0.5% of Ir at I Ir

0.5% of I at I > Ir

Table continues on next page

693
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Function Range or value Accuracy

Active power, P
Reactive power, Q
Apparent power, S
0.1 x Ur< U < 1.5 x Ur 1.0% of Sr at S Sr
0.2 x Ir < I < 4.0 x Ir 1.0% of S at S > Sr
Conditions:
0.1 x Ur< U < 1.5 x Ur 0.8 x Ur < U < 1.2 Ur
0.2 x Ir < I < 4.0 x Ir 0.2 x Ir < I < 1.2 Ir
0.1 x Ur < U < 1.5 x Ur
0.2 x Ir< I < 4.0 x Ir

Power factor, cos () 0.1 x Ur < U < 1.5 x Ur 0.02

0.2 x Ir< I < 4.0 x Ir

Table 539: CMMXU technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Current at symmetrical load (0.1-4.0) Ir 0.3% of Ir at I 0.5 Ir
0.3% of I at I > 0.5 Ir

Phase angle at symmetrical load (0.1-4.0) Ir 1.0 at 0.1 Ir < I 0.5 Ir

0.5 at 0.5 Ir < I 4.0 Ir

Table 540: VMMXU technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Voltage (10 to 300) V 0.5% of U at U 50 V
0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Phase angle (10 to 300) V 0.5 at U 50 V
0.2 at U > 50 V

Table 541: CMSQI technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Current positive sequence, I1 (0.14.0) Ir 0.3% of Ir at I 0.5 Ir
Three phase settings 0.3% of I at I > 0.5 Ir

Current zero sequence, 3I0 (0.11.0) Ir 0.3% of Ir at I 0.5 Ir

Three phase settings 0.3% of I at I > 0.5 Ir

Current negative sequence, I2 (0.11.0) Ir 0.3% of Ir at I 0.5 Ir

Three phase settings 0.3% of I at I > 0.5 Ir

Phase angle (0.14.0) Ir 1.0 at 0.1 Ir < I 0.5 Ir

0.5 at 0.5 Ir < I 4.0 Ir

694
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Table 542: VMSQI technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Voltage positive sequence, U1 (10 to 300) V 0.3% of U at U 50 V
0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Voltage zero sequence, 3U0 (10 to 300) V 0.3% of U at U 50 V
0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Voltage negative sequence, U2 (10 to 300) V 0.3% of U at U 50 V
0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Phase angle (10 to 300) V 0.3 at U 50 V
0.2 at U > 50 V

Table 543: VNMMXU technical data

Function Range or value Accuracy
Voltage (5 to 175) V 0.5% of U at U 50 V
0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Phase angle (5 to 175) V 0.5 at U 50 V
0.2 at U > 50 V

16.2 Analog inputs

16.2.1 Introduction
Analog input channels must be configured and set properly in order to get correct
measurement results and correct protection operations. For power measuring and
all directional and differential functions the directions of the input currents must be
defined in order to reflect the way the current transformers are installed/connected
in the field ( primary and secondary connections ). Measuring and protection
algorithms in the IED use primary system quantities. Setting values are in primary
quantities as well and it is important to set the data about the connected current and
voltage transformers properly.

A reference PhaseAngleRef can be defined to facilitate service values reading. This

analog channels phase angle will always be fixed to zero degrees and all other
angle information will be shown in relation to this analog input. During testing and
commissioning of the IED the reference channel can be changed to facilitate testing
and service values reading.

The IED has the ability to receive analog values from primary
equipment, that are sampled by Merging units (MU) connected to a
process bus, via the IEC 61850-9-2 LE protocol.

The availability of VT inputs depends on the ordered transformer

input module (TRM) type.

695
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

16.2.2 Function block

The function blocks are not represented in the configuration tool.

The signals appear only in the SMT tool when a TRM is included in
the configuration with the function selector tool. In the SMT tool
they can be mapped to the desired virtual input (SMAI) of the IED
and used internally in the configuration.

16.2.3 Signals
Table 544: TRM_12I Output signals
Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6
CH7(I) STRING Analogue current input 7
CH8(I) STRING Analogue current input 8
CH9(I) STRING Analogue current input 9
CH10(I) STRING Analogue current input 10
CH11(I) STRING Analogue current input 11
CH12(I) STRING Analogue current input 12

Table 545: TRM_6I_6U Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6
CH7(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 7
CH8(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 8
CH9(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 9
Table continues on next page

696
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Name Type Description

CH10(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 10
CH11(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 11
CH12(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 12

Table 546: TRM_6I Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6

Table 547: TRM_7I_5U Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6
CH7(I) STRING Analogue current input 7
CH8(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 8
CH9(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 9
CH10(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 10
CH11(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 11
CH12(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 12

Table 548: TRM_9I_3U Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Analogue input module status
CH1(I) STRING Analogue current input 1
CH2(I) STRING Analogue current input 2
CH3(I) STRING Analogue current input 3
CH4(I) STRING Analogue current input 4
CH5(I) STRING Analogue current input 5
Table continues on next page

697
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Type Description

CH6(I) STRING Analogue current input 6
CH7(I) STRING Analogue current input 7
CH8(I) STRING Analogue current input 8
CH9(I) STRING Analogue current input 9
CH10(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 10
CH11(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 11
CH12(U) STRING Analogue voltage input 12

16.2.4 Settings
Dependent on ordered IED type.

698
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Table 549: AISVBAS Non group settings (basic)

699
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

PhaseAngleRef TRM40-Ch1 - - TRM40-Ch1 Reference channel for phase angle
TRM40-Ch2 presentation
TRM40-Ch3
TRM40-Ch4
TRM40-Ch5
TRM40-Ch6
TRM40-Ch7
TRM40-Ch8
TRM40-Ch9
TRM40-Ch10
TRM40-Ch11
TRM40-Ch12
TRM41-Ch1
TRM41-Ch2
TRM41-Ch3
TRM41-Ch4
TRM41-Ch5
TRM41-Ch6
TRM41-Ch7
TRM41-Ch8
TRM41-Ch9
TRM41-Ch10
TRM41-Ch11
TRM41-Ch12
MU1-L1I
MU1-L2I
MU1-L3I
MU1-L4I
MU1-L1U
MU1-L2U
MU1-L3U
MU1-L4U
MU2-L1I
MU2-L2I
MU2-L3I
MU2-L4I
MU2-L1U
MU2-L2U
MU2-L3U
MU2-L4U
MU3-L1I
MU3-L2I
MU3-L3I
MU3-L4I
MU3-L1U
MU3-L2U
MU3-L3U
MU3-L4U
MU4-L1I
MU4-L2I
MU4-L3I
MU4-L4I
MU4-L1U
MU4-L2U
MU4-L3U
MU4-L4U
MU5-L1I
MU5-L2I
MU5-L3I
MU5-L4I
MU5-L1U
MU5-L2U
MU5-L3U
MU5-L4U
MU6-L1I
MU6-L2I
MU6-L3I
MU6-L4I
700 MU6-L1U
MU6-L2U Technical Manual
MU6-L3U
MU6-L4U
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Table 550: TRM_12I Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint7 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec7 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim7 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint8 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec8 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim8 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint9 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec9 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim9 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint10 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec10 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim10 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint11 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec11 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
Table continues on next page

701
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CTprim11 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint12 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec12 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim12 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current

Table 551: TRM_6I_6U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec7 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim7 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec8 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim8 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec9 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim9 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec11 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
Table continues on next page

702
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

VTprim11 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec12 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim12 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage

Table 552: TRM_6I Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current

Table 553: TRM_7I_5U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
Table continues on next page

703
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint7 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec7 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim7 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec8 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim8 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec9 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim9 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec11 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim11 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec12 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim12 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage

Table 554: TRM_9I_3U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
Table continues on next page

704
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint7 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec7 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim7 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint8 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec8 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim8 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
CTStarPoint9 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTsec9 1 - 10 A 1 1 Rated CT secondary current
CTprim9 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Rated CT primary current
VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim10 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec11 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim11 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec12 0.001 - 999.999 V 0.001 110.000 Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim12 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Rated VT primary voltage

16.2.5 Monitored data

Table 555: AISVBAS Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
Status INTEGER 0=Ok - Service value status
1=Error
2=AngRefLow
3=Uncorrelated

705
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Table 556: TRM_12I Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module
1=Error status

Table 557: TRM_6I_6U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module
1=Error status

Table 558: TRM_6I Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module
1=Error status

Table 559: TRM_7I_5U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module
1=Error status

Table 560: TRM_9I_3U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Analogue input module
1=Error status

16.2.6 Operation principle

The direction of a current depends on the connection of the CT. The main CTs are
typically star connected and can be connected with the star point towards the object
or away from the object. This information must be set in the IED.

The convention of the directionality is defined as follows:

Positive value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction
into the object.
Negative value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction
out from the object.

For directional functions the directional conventions are defined as follows (see
figure 2)

Forward means the direction is into the object.

Reverse means the direction is out from the object.

706
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Definition of direction Definition of direction

for directional functions for directional functions
Reverse Forward Forward Reverse
Protected Object
Line, transformer, etc
e.g. P, Q, I e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is Measured quantity is
positive when flowing positive when flowing
towards the object towards the object

Set parameter Set parameter

CTStarPoint CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is Correct Setting is
"ToObject" "FromObject"

en05000456.vsd
IEC05000456 V1 EN

Figure 321: Internal convention of the directionality in the IED

If the settings of the primary CT is correct, that is CTStarPoint set as FromObject

or ToObject according to the plant condition, then a positive quantity always flows
towards the protected object, and a Forward direction always looks towards the
protected object.

The settings of the IED is performed in primary values. The ratios of the main CTs
and VTs are therefore basic data for the IED. The user has to set the rated
secondary and primary currents and voltages of the CTs and VTs to provide the
IED with their rated ratios.

The CT and VT ratio and the name on respective channel is done under Main
menu/Hardware/Analog modules in the Parameter Settings tool or on the HMI.

16.3 Gas medium supervision SSIMG

16.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Gas medium supervision SSIMG - 63

16.3.2 Functionality
Gas medium supervision SSIMG is used for monitoring the circuit breaker
condition. Binary information based on the gas pressure in the circuit breaker is
used as input signals to the function. In addition, the function generates alarms
based on received information.

707
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

16.3.3 Function block

SSIMG
BLOCK PRESSURE
BLK_ALM PRES_ALM
PRESSURE PRES_LO
TEMP TEMP
PRES_ALM TEMP_ALM
PRES_LO TEMP_LO
SET_P_LO
SET_T_LO
RESET_LO

IEC09000129-1-en.vsd
IEC09000129 V1 EN

Figure 322: SSIMG function block

16.3.4 Signals

Table 561: SSIMG Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms
PRESSURE REAL 0.0 Pressure input from CB
TEMP REAL 0.0 Temperature of the insulation medium from CB
PRES_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Pressure alarm signal
PRES_LO BOOLEAN 0 Pressure lockout signal
SET_P_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set pressure lockout
SET_T_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set temperature lockout
RESET_LO BOOLEAN 0 Reset pressure and temperature lockout

Table 562: SSIMG Output signals

Name Type Description
PRESSURE REAL Pressure service value
PRES_ALM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level
PRES_LO BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level
TEMP REAL Temperature of the insulation medium
TEMP_ALM BOOLEAN Temperature above alarm level
TEMP_LO BOOLEAN Temperature above lockout level

708
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

16.3.5 Settings
Table 563: SSIMG Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
PressAlmLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 5.00 Alarm setting for pressure
PressLOLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 3.00 Pressure lockout setting
TempAlarmLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature alarm level setting of the
medium
TempLOLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature lockout level of the medium
tPressureAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for pressure alarm
tPressureLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for pressure lockout indication
tTempAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperature alarm
tTempLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperture lockout
tResetPressAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for pressure alarm
tResetPressLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for pressure lockout
tResetTempLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture lockout
tResetTempAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture alarm

16.3.6 Operation principle

Gas medium supervision SSIMG is used to monitor the gas pressure in the circuit
breaker. Binary inputs of gas density PRES_ALM, PRES_LO, and gas pressure
signal PRESSURE, are taken into account to initiate the alarms PRES_ALM and
PRES_LO. When PRESSURE is less than PressAlmLimit or binary signal from CB
PRES_ALM is high then the gas pressure alarm, PRES_ALM will be initiated.
Similarly, if pressure input PRESSURE is less than PressLOLimit or binary signal
from CB PRES_LO is high or temperature input TEMP is above lockout level
TempLOLimit then the gas pressure lockout, PRES_LO will be initiated.

There may be sudden change in pressure of the gas for a very small time, for which
the function need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays
tPressureAlarm or tPressureLO have been included. If the pressure goes below the
settings for more than these time delays, then only the corresponding alarm
PRES_ALM or lockout PRES_LO will be initiated. The SET_P_LO binary input is
used for setting the gas pressure lockout. The PRES_LO output retains the last
value until it is reset by using the binary input RESET_LO. Hysteresis type
comparators have been used with the setting for relative and absolute hysteresis.
The binary input BLK_ALM can be used to block the alarms, and the BLOCK
input can block both alarms and the lockout indication.

Temperature of the medium is available from the input signal of temperature. The
signal is monitored to detect high temperature.

709
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

When temperature input TEMP is greater than TempAlarmLimit, then temperature

alarm TEMP_ALM will be initiated. Similarly, if temperature input TEMP is
greater than TempLOLimit, then TEMP_LO will be initiated.

There may be sudden change in temperature of the medium for a very small time,
for which the function need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays
tTempAlarm or tTempLockOut have been included. If the temperature goes above
the settings for more than these time delays, then only the corresponding alarm
TEMP_ALM or lockout TEMP_LO will be initiated. The SET_T_LO binary input
is used for setting the temperature lockout. The TEMP_LO output retains the last
value until it is reset by using the binary input RESET_LO. Hysteresis type
comparators have been used with the setting for relative and absolute hysteresis.
The binary input BLK_ALM can be used to block the alarms, and the BLOCK
input can block both alarms and the lockout indication.

16.3.7 Technical data

Table 564: SSIMG Technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Pressure alarm level 1.00-100.00 10.0% of set value
Pressure lockout level 1.00-100.00 10.0% of set value
Temperature alarm level -40.00-200.00 2.5% of set value
Temperature lockout level -40.00-200.00 2.5% of set value
Time delay for pressure alarm (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
greater
Reset time delay for pressure (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
alarm greater
Time delay for pressure lockout (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for temperature (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
alarm greater
Reset time delay for (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
temperature alarm greater
Time delay for temperature (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
lockout greater

16.4 Liquid medium supervision SSIML

16.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Liquid medium supervision SSIML - 71

710
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

16.4.2 Functionality
Liquid medium supervision SSIML is used for monitoring the circuit breaker
condition. Binary information based on the oil level in the circuit breaker is used as
input signals to the function. In addition, the function generates alarms based on
received information.

16.4.3 Function block

SSIML
BLOCK LEVEL
BLK_ALM LVL_ALM
LEVEL LVL_LO
TEMP TEMP
LVL_ALM TEMP_ALM
LEVEL_LO TEMP_LO
SET_L_LO
SET_T_LO
RESET_LO

IEC09000128-1-en.vsd
IEC09000128 V1 EN

Figure 323: SSIML function block

16.4.4 Signals

Table 565: SSIML Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
BLK_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms
LEVEL REAL 0.0 Level input from CB
TEMP REAL 0.0 Temperature of the insulation medium from CB
LVL_ALM BOOLEAN 0 Level alarm signal
LEVEL_LO BOOLEAN 0 Level lockout signal
SET_L_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set level lockout
SET_T_LO BOOLEAN 0 Set temperature lockout
RESET_LO BOOLEAN 0 Reset level and temperature lockout

Table 566: SSIML Output signals

Name Type Description
LEVEL REAL Level service value
LVL_ALM BOOLEAN Level below alarm level
LVL_LO BOOLEAN Level below lockout level
TEMP REAL Temperature of the insulation medium
TEMP_ALM BOOLEAN Temperature above alarm level
TEMP_LO BOOLEAN Temperature above lockout level

711
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

16.4.5 Settings
Table 567: SSIML Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
LevelAlmLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 5.00 Alarm setting for level
LevelLOLimit 1.00 - 100.00 - 0.01 3.00 Level lockout setting
TempAlarmLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature alarm level setting of the
medium
TempLOLimit -40.00 - 200.00 - 0.01 30.00 Temperature lockout level of the medium
tLevelAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for level alarm
tLevelLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for level lockout indication
tTempAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperature alarm
tTempLockOut 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Time delay for temperture lockout
tResetLevelAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for level alarm
tResetLevelLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for level lockout
tResetTempLO 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture lockout
tResetTempAlm 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.000 Reset time delay for temperture alarm

16.4.6 Operation principle

Liquid medium supervision SSIML is used to monitor the oil level in the circuit
breaker. Binary inputs of oil level LVL_ALM, LEVEL_LO and oil level signal
LEVEL are taken into account to initiate the alarms LVL_ALM and LVL_LO.
When LEVEL is less than LevelAlmLimit or binary signal from CB LVL_ALM is
high, then the oil level indication alarm, LVL_ALM will be initiated. Similarly, if
oil level input LEVEL is less than LevelLOLimit or binary signal from CB
LVL_LO is high or temperature input TEMP is above lockout level TempLOLimit,
then the oil level indication lockout, LVL_LO will be initiated.

There may be sudden change in oil level for a very small time, for which the
function need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays tLevelAlarm or
tLevelLockOut have been included. If the oil level goes below the settings for
more than these time delays, then only the corresponding alarm LVL_ALM or
lockout LVL_LO will be initiated. The SET_L_LO binary input is used for setting
the gas pressure lockout. The LVL_LO output retains the last value until it is reset
by using the binary input RESET_LO. Hysteresis type comparators have been used
with the setting for relative and absolute hysteresis. The binary input BLK_ALM
can be used for blocking the alarms, and the BLOCK input can block both alarms
and the lockout indication.

Temperature of the medium is available from the input signal of temperature. The
signal is monitored to detect high temperature.

712
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

When temperature input TEMP is greater than TempAlarmLimit, then temperature

alarm TEMP_ALM will be initiated. Similarly, if temperature input TEMP is
greater than TempLOLimit, then TEMP_LO will be initiated.

There may be sudden change in temperature of the medium for a very small time,
for which the function need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays
tTempAlarm or tTempLockOuthave been included. If the temperature goes above
the settings for more than these time delays, then only the corresponding alarm
TEMP_ALM or lockout TEMP_LO will be initiated. The SET_T_LO binary input
is used for setting the temperature lockout. The TEMP_LO output retains the last
value until it is reset by using the binary input RESET_LO. Hysteresis type
comparators have been used with the setting for relative and absolute hysteresis.
The binary input BLK_ALM can be used for blocking the alarms, and the BLOCK
input can block both alarms and the lockout indication.

16.4.7 Technical data

Table 568: SSIMLTechnical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Oil alarm level 1.00-100.00 10.0% of set value
Oil lockout level 1.00-100.00 10.0% of set value
Temperature alarm level -40.00-200.00 2.5% of set value
Temperature lockout level -40.00-200.00 2.5% of set value
Time delay for oil alarm (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
greater
Reset time delay for oil alarm (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for oil lockout (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
greater
Time delay for temperature (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
alarm greater
Reset time delay for (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
temperature alarm greater
Time delay for temperature (0.000-60.000) s 0.2% or 250ms whichever is
lockout greater

16.5 Breaker monitoring SSCBR

16.5.1 Identification

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Breaker monitoring SSCBR - -

713
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

16.5.2 Functionality
The breaker monitoring function SSCBR is used to monitor different parameters of
the breaker condition. The breaker requires maintenance when the number of
operations reaches a predefined value. For a proper functioning of the circuit
breaker, it is essential to monitor the circuit breaker operation, spring charge
indication or breaker wear, travel time, number of operation cycles and estimate the
accumulated energy during arcing periods.

16.5.3 Function block

SSCBR
I3P* OPENPOS
BLOCK CLOSEPOS
BLKALM INVDPOS
TRIND TRCMD
POSOPEN TRVTOPAL
POSCLOSE TRVTCLAL
PRESALM OPERALM
PRESLO OPERLO
SPRCHRST CBLIFEAL
SPRCHRD MONALM
RSTCBWR IPOWALPH
RSTTRVT IPOWLOPH
RSTIPOW SPCHALM
RSTSPCHT GPRESALM
GPRESLO

IEC13000231-2-en.vsd
IEC13000231 V2 EN

Figure 324: SSCBR function block

16.5.4 Signals
Table 569: SSCBR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
I3P GROUP - Group signal for current input
SIGNAL
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarm and lockout indication
BLKALM BOOLEAN 0 Block all the alarms
TRIND BOOLEAN 0 Trip command from trip circuit
POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
PRESALM BOOLEAN 0 Pressure alarm indication from CB
PRESLO BOOLEAN 0 Pressure lockout indication from CB
SPRCHRST BOOLEAN 0 CB spring charging started indication signal
SPRCHRD BOOLEAN 0 CB spring charged indication signal
RSTCBWR BOOLEAN 0 Reset of CB remaining life and operation counter
RSTTRVT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of CB closing and opening travel times
RSTIPOW BOOLEAN 0 Reset of accumulated I^CurrExponent
RSTSPCHT BOOLEAN 0 Reset of CB spring charging time

714
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Table 570: SSCBR Output signals

Name Type Description
OPENPOS BOOLEAN CB is in open position
CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN CB is in closed position
INVDPOS BOOLEAN CB is in Invalid Position
TRCMD BOOLEAN Open command issued to CB
TRVTOPAL BOOLEAN CB open travel time exceeded set value
TRVTCLAL BOOLEAN CB close travel time exceeded set value
OPERALM BOOLEAN Number of CB operations exceeds alarm limit
OPERLO BOOLEAN Number of CB operations exceeds lockout limit
CBLIFEAL BOOLEAN Remaining life of CB reduced to Life alarm level
MONALM BOOLEAN CB 'not operated for long time' alarm
IPOWALPH BOOLEAN Accum I^CurrExponent integr over CB open
travel time exceeds alarm limit
IPOWLOPH BOOLEAN Accum I^CurrExponent integr over CB open
travel time exceeds lockout limit
SPCHALM BOOLEAN Spring charging time has crossed the set value
GPRESALM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level
GPRESLO BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level

16.5.5 Settings
Table 571: SSCBR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
PhSel Phase L1 - - Phase L1 Phase selection
Phase L2
Phase L3
RatedOperCurr 100.00 - 5000.00 A 0.01 1000.00 Rated operating current of the breaker
OperNoRated 1 - 99999 - 1 10000 Number of operations possible at rated
current
RatedFltCurr 500.00 - 99999.99 A 0.01 5000.00 Rated fault current of the breaker
OperNoFault 1 - 10000 - 1 1000 Number of operations possible at rated
fault current
tTrOpenAlm 0.000 - 0.200 s 0.001 0.040 Alarm level for open travel time
tTrCloseAlm 0.000 - 0.200 s 0.001 0.040 Alarm level for close travel time
OperAlmLevel 0 - 9999 - 1 200 Alarm level for number of operations
OperLOLevel 0 - 9999 - 1 300 Lockout level for number of operations
AccSelCal Aux Contact - - Trip Signal Accumulated energy calculation selection
Trip Signal
Table continues on next page

715
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

CurrExponent 0.50 - 3.00 - 0.01 2.00 Current exponent value used for energy
calculation
AccStopCurr 5.00 - 100.00 %IB 0.01 10.00 RMS current level below which energy
accumulation stops
AlmAccCurrPwr 0.00 - 20000.00 - 0.01 2500.00 Alarm level for accumulated
I^CurrExponent integrated over CB open
travel time
LOAccCurrPwr 0.00 - 20000.00 - 0.01 2500.00 Lockout level for accumulated
I^CurrExponent integrated over CB open
travel time
SpChAlmTime 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 1.00 Alarm level for spring charging time
InitCBRemLife 1 - 99999 - 1 10000 Initial value for remaining life estimates
InactiveAlDays 0 - 9999 Day 1 2000 Alarm level for inactive days counter

Table 572: SSCBR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
OpenTimeCorr -0.100 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.010 Correction for open travel time
CloseTimeCorr -0.100 - 0.100 s 0.001 0.010 Correction for close travel time
DirCoef -3.00 - -0.50 - 0.01 -1.50 Directional coefficient for CB life
calculation
CBLifeAlmLevel 1 - 99999 - 1 5000 Alarm level for CB remaining life
ContTrCorr -0.010 - 0.010 s 0.001 0.005 Correction for time difference in auxiliary
and main contacts open time
OperTimeDelay 0.000 - 0.200 s 0.001 0.020 Time delay between change of status of
trip output and start of main contact
separation
tDGasPresAlm 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Time delay for gas pressure alarm
tDGasPresLO 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.10 Time delay for gas pressure lockout
InitCounterVal 0 - 9999 - 1 0 Initial value for number of operations
InitAccCurrPwr 0.00 - 9999.99 - 0.01 0.00 Initial value for accum I^CurrExponent
integr over CB open travel time value
InitInactDays 0 - 9999 Day 1 0 Initial value for inactive days
InactiveAlHrs 0 - 23 Hour 1 0 Alarm time for inactive days counter in
hours

716
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

16.5.6 Monitored data

Table 573: SSCBR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TTRVOP REAL - ms Travel time of the CB
during opening operation
TTRVCL REAL - ms Travel time of the CB
during closing operation
NOOPER INTEGER - - Number of CB operation
cycle
CBLIFEPH INTEGER - - CB Remaining life of
respective phase
INADAYS INTEGER - - The number of days CB
has been inactive
IPOWPH REAL - - Accumulated
I^CurrExponent
integrated over CB open
travel time
SPCHT REAL - s The charging time of the
CB spring
IRMSOUT REAL - - Service value output for
rms phase current input

16.5.7 Operation principle

The breaker monitoring function includes metering and monitoring subfunctions.
The subfunctions can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are On and Off.

The operation of the subfunctions is described by the module diagram as shown in

Figure 325. All the modules in the diagram are explained in subsequent sections.

717
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

I3P-ILRMSPH
POSCLOSE TTRVOP
POSOPEN CB Contact Travel TTRVCL
BLOCK Time TRVTOPAL
BLKALM TRVTCLAL
RSTTRVT

OPENPOS

CB Status CLOSEPOS
INVDPOS

CBLIFEAL
Remaining Life of CB
CBLIFEPH
RSTCBWR

TRCMD

Accumulated IPOWALPH
energy
I3P-IL IPOWLOPH
TRIND
IPOWPH
RSTIPOW

CB Operation OPERALM
Cycles NOOPER

CB Operation MONALM
Monitoring INADAYS

SPCHALM
SPRCHRST CB Spring Charge SPCHT
SPRCHRD Monitoring
RSTSPCHT

CB Gas Pressure GPRESALM

PRESALM Indication GPRESLO
PRESLO
IEC12000624-3-en.vsd
IEC12000624 V3 EN

Figure 325: Functional module diagram of breaker monitoring

718
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

16.5.7.1 Circuit breaker contact travel time

The circuit breaker contact travel time subfunction calculates the breaker contact
travel time for opening and closing operations. The operation of the breaker contact
travel time measurement is described in Figure 326.

POSCLOSE TTRVOP
Contact travel
POSOPEN time TTRVCL
calculation
RSTTRVT

TRVTOPAL
Alarm limit
BLOCK check TRVTCLAL
BLKALM
IEC12000615-2-en.vsd
IEC12000615 V2 EN

Figure 326: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker contact travel time

Contact travel time calculation

The contact travel time of the breaker is calculated from the time between the state
of change of auxiliary contacts. The opening travel time is measured between the
opening of the POSCLOSE and closing of the POSOPEN auxiliary contacts.
Similarly, the closing travel time is measured between the opening of the
POSOPEN and closing of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts. A compensation
factor has been added to consider the time difference between auxiliary contact
operation and the actual physical opening of the breaker main contact.

Main Contact

0
POSCLOSE

POSOPEN

t1 tOpen t2 t3 tClose t4

tTravelOpen = tOpen + t1 + t2 tTravelClose = tClose + t3 + t4

IEC12000616_1_en.vsd

IEC12000616 V1 EN

Figure 327: Travel time calculation

There is a time difference t1 between the start of the main contact opening and the
opening of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact. Similarly, there is a time difference t2
between the time when the POSOPEN auxiliary contact opens and the main contact
is completely open. Therefore, a correction factor needs to be added to get the
actual opening time. This factor is added with the OpenTimeCorr (t1+t2) setting.

719
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

The closing time is calculated by adding the value set with the CloseTimeCorr
(t3+t4) setting to the measured closing time.

The last measured opening travel time (TTRVOP) and the closing travel time
(TTRVCL) are given as service values.

The values can be reset using the Clear menu on the LHMI or by activation the
input RSTCBWR.

Alarm limit check

When the measured opening travel time is longer than the value set in the
tTrOpenAlm setting, the TRVTOPAL output is activated. Similarly, when the
measured closing travel time is longer than the value set in the tTrCloseAlm setting,
the TRVTCLAL output is activated.

It is also possible to block the TRVTCLAL and TRVTOPAL alarm signals by

activating the BLOCK input.

16.5.7.2 Circuit breaker status

The circuit breaker status subfunction monitors the position of the circuit breaker,
that is, whether the breaker is in the open, closed or error position. The operation is
described in Figure 328.

Phase current
I3P-ILRMSPH
check

OPENPOS
Contact
POSCLOSE position CLOSEPOS
indicator
POSOPEN INVDPOS

IEC12000613-3-en.vsd

IEC12000613 V3 EN

Figure 328: Functional module diagram for monitoring circuit breaker status

Phase current check

The module compares the phase current I3P-ILRMSPH to the AccStopCurr setting.
If the current in the selected phase exceeds the set level, it is reported to the contact
position indicator module as closed circuit breaker.

Contact position indicator

The circuit breaker status is open when the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is
low, the POSOPEN input is high and the phase current is less than the setting
AccStopCurr value. The circuit breaker is closed when the POSOPEN input is low
and the POSCLOSE input is high. The breaker is in the error state if both auxiliary

720
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

contacts have the same value or if the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is low
and the POSOPEN input is high but the current is above the setting AccStopCurr.

The status of the breaker is indicated with the binary outputs OPENPOS,
CLOSEPOS and INVDPOS for open, closed and error position respectively.

16.5.7.3 Remaining life of circuit breaker

The Remaining life of circuit breaker subfunction is used to give an indication on

the wear and tear of the circuit breaker. Every time the breaker operates, the life of
the circuit breaker reduces due to wear. The breaker wear depends on the
interrupted current. The remaining life of the breaker is estimated from the circuit
breaker trip curve provided by the manufacturer. The remaining life is decreased
by at least one when the circuit breaker is opened. The operation of the remaining
life of circuit breaker subfunction is described in Figure 329.

I3P-ILRMSPH
CB remaining CBLIFEPH
POSCLOSE life estimation

RSTCBWR

Alarm limit
BLOCK CBLIFEAL
Check
BLKALM

IEC12000620-3-en.vsd
IEC12000620 V3 EN

Figure 329: Functional module diagram for estimating the life of the circuit
breaker

Circuit breaker remaining life estimation

If the interrupted current is less than the rated operating current set using the
RatedOperCurr setting, the remaining operations of the breaker are reduced by one
operation. If the interrupted current is more than the rated fault current set using the
RatedFltCurr setting, the remaining operations of the circuit breaker are reduced
by the set OperNoRated by divided by the set OperNoFault value. If the tripping
current is between these two values, the remaining life of the circuit breaker is
calculated based on the maintenance curve equation given by the manufacturer.
The OperNoRated parameter sets the number of operations the breaker can perform
at the rated current. The OperNoFault parameter sets the number of operations the
breaker can perform at the rated fault current.

Alarm limit check

When the remaining life of a circuit breaker phase drops below the
CBLifeAlmLevel setting, the life alarm CBLIFEAL is activated.

It is possible to deactivate the CBLIFEAL alarm signal by activating the binary

input BLKALM.

721
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

The old circuit breaker operation counter value can be used by adding the value to
the InitCBRemLife parameter. The value can be reset using the Clear menu from
LHMI or by activating the input RSTCBWR.

16.5.7.4 Accumulated energy

The Accumulated energy subfunction calculates the accumulated energy (Iyt) based
on current samples, where the setting CurrExponent (y) ranges from 0.5 to 3.0. The
operation is described in Figure 330.

The TRCMD output is enabled when either of the trip indications from the trip coil
circuit TRIND is high or the breaker status is OPENPOS.

I3P-IL
TRCMD
I3P-ILRMSPH Accumulated
POSCLOSE energy
calculation IPOWPH
TRIND

LRSTIPOW

IPOWALPH
Alarm limit
BLOCK Check IPOWLOPH
BLKALM

IEC12000619-3-en.vsd
IEC12000619 V3 EN

Figure 330: Functional module diagram for estimating accumulated energy

Accumulated energy calculation

Accumulated energy can be calculated either with TRIND or POSCLOSE by
selecting the AccSelCal parameter value accordingly.

The calculation is initiated with the POSCLOSE or TRIND input events. It ends
when the RMS current is lower than the AccStopCurr setting.

722
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Main Contact Main Contact

close close

open open
POSCLOSE 1 POSCLOSE 1

0 0

Energy Energy
Accumulation Accumulation
starts starts

ContTrCorr ContTrCorr
(Negative) (Positive)
IEC12000618_1_en.vsd
IEC12000618 V1 EN

Figure 331: Significance of correction factor setting

The ContTrCorr setting is used to determine the accumulated energy in relation to

the time the main contact opens. If the setting is positive, the calculation of energy
starts after the auxiliary contact has opened and the delay equal to the value of the
ContTrCorr setting has passed. When the setting is negative, the calculation starts
in advance by the correction time in relation to when the auxiliary contact opened.

Accumulated energy can also be calculated by using the change of state of the trip
output. TRIND is used to get the instance of the trip output and the time delay
between the trip initiation and the opening of the main contact is introduced by the
setting OperTimeDelay.

The accumulated energy output IPOWPH is provided as a service value. The value
can be reset by enabling RSTIPOW through LHMI or by activating the input
RSTIPOW.

Alarm limit check

The IPOWALPH alarm is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the set
value AlmAccCurrPwr.

IPOWLOPH is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the limit of the
LOAccCurrPwr setting.

The IPOWALPH and IPOWLOPH outputs can be blocked by activating the binary
input BLOCK.

16.5.7.5 Circuit breaker operation cycles

The circuit breaker operation cycles subfunction counts the number of closing-
opening sequences of the breaker. The operation counter value is updated after
each closing-opening sequence. The operation is described in Figure 332.

723
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

POSCLOSE
Operation
POSOPEN NOOPER
counter
RSTCBWR

OPERALM
Alarm limit
BLOCK
Check
OPERLO
BLKALM
IEC12000617 V2 EN

Figure 332: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker operation cycles

Operation counter
The operation counter counts the number of operations based on the state of change
of the auxiliary contact inputs POSCLOSE and POSOPEN.

The number of operations NOOPER is given as a service value. The old circuit
breaker operation counter value can be used by adding the value to the
InitCounterVal parameter and can be reset by Clear CB wear in the Clear menu on
the LHMI or activating the input RSTCBWR.

Alarm limit check

OPERALM is generated when the number of operations exceeds the set value of the
OperAlmLevel threshold setting.

If the number of operations increases and exceeds the limit value set with the
OperLOLevel setting, the OPERLO output is activated.

The binary outputs OPERALM and OPERALO are deactivated when the BLOCK
input is activated.

16.5.7.6 Circuit breaker operation monitoring

The circuit breaker operation monitoring subfunction indicates the inactive days of
the circuit breaker and gives an alarm when the number of days exceed the set
level. The operation of the circuit breaker operation monitoring is shown in Figure
333.

POSCLOSE
Inactive timer INADAYS
POSOPEN

Alarm limit MONALM

BLOCK
Check
BLKALM
IEC12000614 V2 EN

Figure 333: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker operation monitoring

724
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Inactive timer
The Inactive timer module calculates the number of days the circuit breaker has
remained in the same open or closed state. The value is calculated by monitoring
the states of the POSOPEN and POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts.

The number of inactive days INADAYS is available as a service value. The initial
number of inactive days is set using the InitInactDays parameter.

Alarm limit check

MONALM is initiated when the number of inactive days and hours exceed the limit
value defined by the InactiveAlDays and InactivAlHrs setting. The alarm signal
MONALM can be blocked by activating the binary inputs BLOCK and BLKALM.

16.5.7.7 Circuit breaker spring charge monitoring

The circuit breaker spring charge monitoring subfunction calculates the spring
charging time. The operation is described in Figure 334.

SPRCHRST
Spring charging
SPRCHRD time SPCHT
measurement
RSTSPCHT

Alarm limit
BLOCK SPCHALM
Check
BLKALM

IEC12000621 V2 EN

Figure 334: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker spring charge
indication

Spring charging time measurement

The binary input SPRCHRST indicates the start of circuit breaker spring charging
time. SPRCHRD indicates that the circuit breaker spring is charged. The spring
charging time is calculated from the difference of these two signal timings. Spring
charging indication is described in Figure334.

The last measured spring charging time SPCHT is provided as a service value. The
spring charging time SPCHT can be reset on the LHMI or by activating the input
RSTSPCHT.

Alarm limit check

If the time taken by the spring to charge is more than the value set with the
SpChAlmTime setting, the subfunction generates the SPCHALM alarm.

It is possible to block the SPCHALM alarm signal by activating the BLKALM binary
input.

725
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

16.5.7.8 Circuit breaker gas pressure indication

The circuit breaker gas pressure indication subfunction monitors the gas pressure
inside the arc chamber. The operation is described in Figure 335.

PRESALM
tDGasPresAlm
BLOCK AND t GPRESALM

BLKALM

tDGasPresLO
PRESLO AND t GPRESLO
IEC12000622 V3 EN

Figure 335: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker gas pressure
indication

When the PRESALM binary input is activated, the GPRESALM output is activated
after a time delay set with the tDGasPresAlm setting. The GPRESALM alarm can
be blocked by activating the BLKALM input.

If the pressure drops further to a very low level, the PRESLO binary input goes
high, activating the lockout alarm GPRESLO after a time delay set with the
tDGasPresLO setting. The GPRESLO alarm can be blocked by activating the
BLOCK input.

The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The alarm signals
from the function can be blocked by activating the binary input BLKALM.

16.5.8 Technical data

Table 574: SSCBR Technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Alarm level for open and close (0 200) ms 2 ms
travel time
Alarm level for number of (0 9999) -
operations
Independent time delay for (0.00 60.00) s 0.2% or 30 ms whichever is
spring charging time alarm greater
Independent time delay for gas (0.00 60.00) s 0.2% or 30 ms whichever is
pressure alarm greater
Independent time delay for gas (0.00 60.00) s 0.2% or 30 ms whichever is
pressure lockout greater

16.6 Event function EVENT

726
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

16.6.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Event function EVENT -
S00946 V1 EN

16.6.2 Functionality
When using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA communication,
time-tagged events can be sent at change or cyclically from the IED to the station
level. These events are created from any available signal in the IED that is
connected to the Event function (EVENT). The event function block is used for
LON and SPA communication.

Analog and double indication values are also transferred through EVENT function.

16.6.3 Function block

EVENT
BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
^INPUT11
^INPUT12
^INPUT13
^INPUT14
^INPUT15
^INPUT16

IEC05000697-2-en.vsd
IEC05000697 V2 EN

Figure 336: EVENT function block

16.6.4 Signals
Table 575: EVENT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 GROUP 0 Input 1
SIGNAL
INPUT2 GROUP 0 Input 2
SIGNAL
INPUT3 GROUP 0 Input 3
SIGNAL
Table continues on next page

727
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Type Default Description

INPUT4 GROUP 0 Input 4
SIGNAL
INPUT5 GROUP 0 Input 5
SIGNAL
INPUT6 GROUP 0 Input 6
SIGNAL
INPUT7 GROUP 0 Input 7
SIGNAL
INPUT8 GROUP 0 Input 8
SIGNAL
INPUT9 GROUP 0 Input 9
SIGNAL
INPUT10 GROUP 0 Input 10
SIGNAL
INPUT11 GROUP 0 Input 11
SIGNAL
INPUT12 GROUP 0 Input 12
SIGNAL
INPUT13 GROUP 0 Input 13
SIGNAL
INPUT14 GROUP 0 Input 14
SIGNAL
INPUT15 GROUP 0 Input 15
SIGNAL
INPUT16 GROUP 0 Input 16
SIGNAL

16.6.5 Settings
Table 576: EVENT Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SPAChannelMask Off - - Off SPA channel mask
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
LONChannelMask Off - - Off LON channel mask
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
EventMask1 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 1
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask2 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 2
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
Table continues on next page

728
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

EventMask3 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 3
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask4 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 4
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask5 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 5
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask6 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 6
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask7 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 7
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask8 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 8
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask9 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 9
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask10 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 10
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask11 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 11
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask12 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 12
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask13 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 13
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
Table continues on next page

729
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

EventMask14 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 14
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask15 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 15
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask16 NoEvents - - AutoDetect Reporting criteria for input 16
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
MinRepIntVal1 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 1
MinRepIntVal2 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 2
MinRepIntVal3 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 3
MinRepIntVal4 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 4
MinRepIntVal5 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 5
MinRepIntVal6 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 6
MinRepIntVal7 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 7
MinRepIntVal8 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 8
MinRepIntVal9 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 9
MinRepIntVal10 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 10
MinRepIntVal11 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 11
MinRepIntVal12 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 12
MinRepIntVal13 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 13
MinRepIntVal14 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 14
MinRepIntVal15 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 15
MinRepIntVal16 0 - 3600 s 1 2 Minimum reporting interval input 16

16.6.6 Operation principle

The main purpose of the event function (EVENT) is to generate events when the
state or value of any of the connected input signals is in a state, or is undergoing a
state transition, for which event generation is enabled.

Each EVENT function has 16 inputs INPUT1 - INPUT16. Each input can be given
a name from the Application Configuration tool. The inputs are normally used to
create single events, but are also intended for double indication events.

EVENT function also has an input BLOCK to block the generation of events.

The events that are sent from the IED can originate from both internal logical
signals and binary input channels. The internal signals are time-tagged in the main
processing module, while the binary input channels are time-tagged directly on the

730
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

input module. The time-tagging of the events that are originated from internal
logical signals have a resolution corresponding to the execution cyclicity of
EVENT function. The time-tagging of the events that are originated from binary
input signals have a resolution of 1 ms.

The outputs from EVENT function are formed by the reading of status, events and
alarms by the station level on every single input. The user-defined name for each
input is intended to be used by the station level.

All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to
1000 events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the
oldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears.

The events are produced according to the set-event masks. The event masks are
treated commonly for both the LON and SPA communication. The EventMask can
be set individually for each input channel. These settings are available:

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

It is possible to define which part of EVENT function generates the events. This
can be performed individually for the SPAChannelMask and LONChannelMask
respectively. For each communication type these settings are available:

Off
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16

For LON communication the events normally are sent to station level at change. It
is possibly also to set a time for cyclic sending of the events individually for each
input channel.

To protect the SA system from signals with a high change rate that can easily
saturate the event system or the communication subsystems behind it, a quota
limiter is implemented. If an input creates events at a rate that completely consume
the granted quota then further events from the channel will be blocked. This block
will be removed when the input calms down and the accumulated quota reach 66%
of the maximum burst quota. The maximum burst quota per input channel is 45
events per second.

16.7 Disturbance report DRPRDRE

731
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

16.7.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Analog input signals A41RADR - -
Disturbance report DRPRDRE - -
Disturbance report A1RADR - -
Disturbance report A2RADR - -
Disturbance report A3RADR - -
Disturbance report A4RADR - -
Disturbance report B1RBDR - -
Disturbance report B2RBDR - -
Disturbance report B3RBDR - -
Disturbance report B4RBDR - -
Disturbance report B5RBDR - -
Disturbance report B6RBDR - -

16.7.2 Functionality
Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the
secondary system together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the
disturbance report functionality.

Disturbance report DRPRDRE, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data
of all selected analog input and binary signals connected to the function block with
a, maximum of 40 analog and 96 binary signals.

The Disturbance report functionality is a common name for several functions:

Event list
Indications
Event recorder
Trip value recorder
Disturbance recorder
Fault locator

The Disturbance report function is characterized by great flexibility regarding

configuration, starting conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity.

A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input to the AnRADR or BnRBDR

function blocks, which are set to trigger the disturbance recorder. All connected
signals from start of pre-fault time to the end of post-fault time will be included in
the recording.

Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the standard Comtrade
format as a reader file HDR, a configuration file CFG, and a data file DAT. The

732
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

same applies to all events, which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer. The local
HMI is used to get information about the recordings. The disturbance report files
may be uploaded to PCM600 for further analysis using the disturbance handling tool.

16.7.3 Function block

DRPRDRE
DRPOFF
RECSTART
RECMADE
CLEARED
MEMUSED

IEC05000406-3-en.vsd
IEC05000406 V3 EN

Figure 337: DRPRDRE function block

A1RADR
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10

IEC05000430-3-en.vsd
IEC05000430 V3 EN

Figure 338: A1RADR function block

A4RADR
^INPUT31
^INPUT32
^INPUT33
^INPUT34
^INPUT35
^INPUT36
^INPUT37
^INPUT38
^INPUT39
^INPUT40

IEC05000431-3-en.vsd
IEC05000431 V3 EN

Figure 339: A4RADR function block, derived analog inputs

733
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

B1RBDR
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
^INPUT11
^INPUT12
^INPUT13
^INPUT14
^INPUT15
^INPUT16

IEC05000432-3-en.vsd
IEC05000432 V3 EN

Figure 340: B1RBDR function block, binary inputs, example for B1RBDR -
B6RBDR

16.7.4 Signals
Table 577: DRPRDRE Output signals
Name Type Description
DRPOFF BOOLEAN Disturbance report function turned off
RECSTART BOOLEAN Disturbance recording started
RECMADE BOOLEAN Disturbance recording made
CLEARED BOOLEAN All disturbances in the disturbance report cleared
MEMUSED BOOLEAN More than 80% of memory used

Table 578: A1RADR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
GRPINPUT1 GROUP - Group signal for input 1
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT2 GROUP - Group signal for input 2
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT3 GROUP - Group signal for input 3
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT4 GROUP - Group signal for input 4
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT5 GROUP - Group signal for input 5
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT6 GROUP - Group signal for input 6
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT7 GROUP - Group signal for input 7
SIGNAL
Table continues on next page

734
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Name Type Default Description

GRPINPUT8 GROUP - Group signal for input 8
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT9 GROUP - Group signal for input 9
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT10 GROUP - Group signal for input 10
SIGNAL

Table 579: A2RADR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
GRPINPUT11 GROUP - Group signal for input 11
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT12 GROUP - Group signal for input 12
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT13 GROUP - Group signal for input 13
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT14 GROUP - Group signal for input 14
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT15 GROUP - Group signal for input 15
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT16 GROUP - Group signal for input 16
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT17 GROUP - Group signal for input 17
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT18 GROUP - Group signal for input 18
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT19 GROUP - Group signal for input 19
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT20 GROUP - Group signal for input 20
SIGNAL

Table 580: A3RADR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
GRPINPUT21 GROUP - Group signal for input 21
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT22 GROUP - Group signal for input 22
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT23 GROUP - Group signal for input 23
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT24 GROUP - Group signal for input 24
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT25 GROUP - Group signal for input 25
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT26 GROUP - Group signal for input 26
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT27 GROUP - Group signal for input 27
SIGNAL
Table continues on next page

735
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Type Default Description

GRPINPUT28 GROUP - Group signal for input 28
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT29 GROUP - Group signal for input 29
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT30 GROUP - Group signal for input 30
SIGNAL

Table 581: A4RADR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT31 REAL 0 Analog channel 31
INPUT32 REAL 0 Analog channel 32
INPUT33 REAL 0 Analog channel 33
INPUT34 REAL 0 Analog channel 34
INPUT35 REAL 0 Analog channel 35
INPUT36 REAL 0 Analog channel 36
INPUT37 REAL 0 Analog channel 37
INPUT38 REAL 0 Analog channel 38
INPUT39 REAL 0 Analog channel 39
INPUT40 REAL 0 Analog channel 40

Table 582: B1RBDR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 16

736
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Table 583: B2RBDR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT17 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 17
INPUT18 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 18
INPUT19 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 19
INPUT20 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 20
INPUT21 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 21
INPUT22 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 22
INPUT23 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 23
INPUT24 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 24
INPUT25 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 25
INPUT26 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 26
INPUT27 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 27
INPUT28 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 28
INPUT29 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 29
INPUT30 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 30
INPUT31 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 31
INPUT32 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 32

Table 584: B3RBDR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT33 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 33
INPUT34 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 34
INPUT35 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 35
INPUT36 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 36
INPUT37 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 37
INPUT38 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 38
INPUT39 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 39
INPUT40 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 40
INPUT41 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 41
INPUT42 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 42
INPUT43 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 43
INPUT44 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 44
INPUT45 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 45
INPUT46 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 46
INPUT47 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 47
INPUT48 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 48

737
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Table 585: B4RBDR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT49 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 49
INPUT50 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 50
INPUT51 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 51
INPUT52 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 52
INPUT53 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 53
INPUT54 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 54
INPUT55 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 55
INPUT56 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 56
INPUT57 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 57
INPUT58 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 58
INPUT59 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 59
INPUT60 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 60
INPUT61 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 61
INPUT62 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 62
INPUT63 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 63
INPUT64 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 64

Table 586: B5RBDR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT65 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 65
INPUT66 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 66
INPUT67 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 67
INPUT68 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 68
INPUT69 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 69
INPUT70 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 70
INPUT71 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 71
INPUT72 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 72
INPUT73 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 73
INPUT74 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 74
INPUT75 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 75
INPUT76 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 76
INPUT77 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 77
INPUT78 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 78
INPUT79 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 79
INPUT80 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 80

738
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Table 587: B6RBDR Input signals

Name Type Default Description
INPUT81 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 81
INPUT82 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 82
INPUT83 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 83
INPUT84 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 84
INPUT85 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 85
INPUT86 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 86
INPUT87 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 87
INPUT88 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 88
INPUT89 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 89
INPUT90 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 90
INPUT91 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 91
INPUT92 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 92
INPUT93 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 93
INPUT94 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 94
INPUT95 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 95
INPUT96 BOOLEAN 0 Binary channel 96

16.7.5 Settings
Table 588: DRPRDRE Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
PreFaultRecT 0.05 - 9.90 s 0.01 0.10 Pre-fault recording time
PostFaultRecT 0.1 - 10.0 s 0.1 0.5 Post-fault recording time
TimeLimit 0.5 - 10.0 s 0.1 1.0 Fault recording time limit
PostRetrig Off - - Off Post-fault retrig enabled (On) or not (Off)
On
MaxNoStoreRec 10 - 100 - 1 100 Maximum number of stored disturbances
ZeroAngleRef 1 - 30 Ch 1 1 Trip value recorder, phasor reference
channel
OpModeTest Off - - Off Operation mode during test mode
On

739
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Table 589: A1RADR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation01 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation02 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation03 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation04 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation05 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation06 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation07 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation08 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation09 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On
Operation10 Off - - Off Operation On/Off
On

Table 590: A1RADR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
NomValue01 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 1
UnderTrigOp01 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 1 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe01 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 1
in % of signal
OverTrigOp01 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 1 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe01 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 1 in
% of signal
NomValue02 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 2
UnderTrigOp02 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 2 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe02 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 2
in % of signal
OverTrigOp02 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 2 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe02 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 2 in
% of signal
NomValue03 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 3
UnderTrigOp03 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 3 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe03 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 3
in % of signal
Table continues on next page

740
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OverTrigOp03 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 3 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe03 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Overtrigger level for analog channel 3 in
% of signal
NomValue04 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 4
UnderTrigOp04 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 4 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe04 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 4
in % of signal
OverTrigOp04 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 4 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe04 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 4 in
% of signal
NomValue05 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 5
UnderTrigOp05 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 5 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe05 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 5
in % of signal
OverTrigOp05 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 5 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe05 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 5 in
% of signal
NomValue06 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 6
UnderTrigOp06 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 6 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe06 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 6
in % of signal
OverTrigOp06 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 6 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe06 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 6 in
% of signal
NomValue07 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 7
UnderTrigOp07 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 7 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe07 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 7
in % of signal
OverTrigOp07 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 7 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe07 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 7 in
% of signal
NomValue08 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 8
UnderTrigOp08 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 8 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe08 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 8
in % of signal
OverTrigOp08 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 8 (on) or not (off)
Table continues on next page

741
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OverTrigLe08 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 8 in
% of signal
NomValue09 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 9
UnderTrigOp09 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 9 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe09 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 9
in % of signal
OverTrigOp09 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 9 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe09 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 9 in
% of signal
NomValue10 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 10
UnderTrigOp10 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 10 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe10 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 10
in % of signal
OverTrigOp10 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 10 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe10 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 10
in % of signal

Table 591: A2RADR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation11 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation12 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation13 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation14 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation15 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation16 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation17 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation18 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation19 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation20 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On

742
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Table 592: A2RADR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
NomValue11 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 11
UnderTrigOp11 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 11 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe11 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 11
in % of signal
OverTrigOp11 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 11 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe11 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 11
in % of signal
NomValue12 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 12
UnderTrigOp12 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 12 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe12 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 12
in % of signal
OverTrigOp12 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 12 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe12 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 12
in % of signal
NomValue13 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 13
UnderTrigOp13 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 13 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe13 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 13
in % of signal
OverTrigOp13 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 13 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe13 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Overtrigger level for analog channel 13
in % of signal
NomValue14 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 14
UnderTrigOp14 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 14 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe14 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 14
in % of signal
OverTrigOp14 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 14 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe14 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 14
in % of signal
NomValue15 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 15
UnderTrigOp15 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 15 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe15 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 15
in % of signal
OverTrigOp15 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 15 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe15 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 15
in % of signal
NomValue16 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 16
Table continues on next page

743
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

UnderTrigOp16 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 16 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe16 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 16
in % of signal
OverTrigOp16 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 16 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe16 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 16
in % of signal
NomValue17 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 17
UnderTrigOp17 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 17 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe17 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 17
in % of signal
OverTrigOp17 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 17 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe17 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 17
in % of signal
NomValue18 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 18
UnderTrigOp18 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 18 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe18 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 18
in % of signal
OverTrigOp18 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 18 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe18 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 18
in % of signal
NomValue19 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 19
UnderTrigOp19 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 19 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe19 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 19
in % of signal
OverTrigOp19 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 19 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe19 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 19
in % of signal
NomValue20 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 20
UnderTrigOp20 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 20 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe20 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 20
in % of signal
OverTrigOp20 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 20 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe20 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 20
in % of signal

744
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Table 593: A3RADR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation21 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation22 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation23 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation24 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation25 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation26 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation27 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation28 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation29 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation30 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On

Table 594: A3RADR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
NomValue21 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 21
UnderTrigOp21 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 21 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe21 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 21
in % of signal
OverTrigOp21 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 21 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe21 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 21
in % of signal
NomValue22 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 22
UnderTrigOp22 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 22 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe22 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 22
in % of signal
OverTrigOp22 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 22 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe22 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 22
in % of signal
NomValue23 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 23
UnderTrigOp23 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 23 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe23 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 23
in % of signal
Table continues on next page

745
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OverTrigOp23 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 23 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe23 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Overtrigger level for analog channel 23
in % of signal
NomValue24 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 24
UnderTrigOp24 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 24 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe24 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 24
in % of signal
OverTrigOp24 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 24 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe24 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 24
in % of signal
NomValue25 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 25
UnderTrigOp25 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 25 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe25 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 25
in % of signal
OverTrigOp25 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 25 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe25 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 25
in % of signal
NomValue26 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 26
UnderTrigOp26 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 26 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe26 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 26
in % of signal
OverTrigOp26 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 26 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe26 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 26
in % of signal
NomValue27 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 27
UnderTrigOp27 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 27 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe27 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 27
in % of signal
OverTrigOp27 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 27 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe27 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 27
in % of signal
NomValue28 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 28
UnderTrigOp28 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 28 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe28 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 28
in % of signal
OverTrigOp28 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 28 (on) or not (off)
Table continues on next page

746
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

OverTrigLe28 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 28
in % of signal
NomValue29 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 29
UnderTrigOp29 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 29 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe29 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 29
in % of signal
OverTrigOp29 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 29 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe29 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 29
in % of signal
NomValue30 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 30
UnderTrigOp30 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 30 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe30 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 30
in % of signal
OverTrigOp30 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 30 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe30 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 30
in % of signal

Table 595: A4RADR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation31 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation32 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation33 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation34 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation35 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation36 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation37 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation38 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation39 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On
Operation40 Off - - Off Operation On/off
On

747
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Table 596: A4RADR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
NomValue31 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 31
UnderTrigOp31 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 31 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe31 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 31
in % of signal
OverTrigOp31 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 31 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe31 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 31
in % of signal
NomValue32 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 32
UnderTrigOp32 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 32 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe32 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 32
in % of signal
OverTrigOp32 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 32 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe32 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 32
in % of signal
NomValue33 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 33
UnderTrigOp33 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 33 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe33 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 33
in % of signal
OverTrigOp33 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 33 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe33 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Overtrigger level for analog channel 33
in % of signal
NomValue34 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 34
UnderTrigOp34 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 34 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe34 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 34
in % of signal
OverTrigOp34 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 34 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe34 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 34
in % of signal
NomValue35 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 35
UnderTrigOp35 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 35 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe35 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 35
in % of signal
OverTrigOp35 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 35 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe35 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 35
in % of signal
NomValue36 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 36
Table continues on next page

748
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

UnderTrigOp36 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 36 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe36 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 36
in % of signal
OverTrigOp36 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 36 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe36 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 36
in % of signal
NomValue37 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 37
UnderTrigOp37 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 37 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe37 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 37
in % of signal
OverTrigOp37 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 37 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe37 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 37
in % of signal
NomValue38 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 38
UnderTrigOp38 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 38 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe38 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 38
in % of signal
OverTrigOp38 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 38 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe38 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 38
in % of signal
NomValue39 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 39
UnderTrigOp39 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 39 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe39 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 39
in % of signal
OverTrigOp39 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 39 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe39 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 39
in % of signal
NomValue40 0.0 - 999999.9 - 0.1 0.0 Nominal value for analog channel 40
UnderTrigOp40 Off - - Off Use under level trigger for analog
On channel 40 (on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe40 0 - 200 % 1 50 Under trigger level for analog channel 40
in % of signal
OverTrigOp40 Off - - Off Use over level trigger for analog channel
On 40 (on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe40 0 - 5000 % 1 200 Over trigger level for analog channel 40
in % of signal

749
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Table 597: B1RBDR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigDR01 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED01 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 1
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR02 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED02 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 2
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR03 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED03 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 3
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR04 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED04 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 4
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR05 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED05 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 5
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR06 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED06 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 6
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR07 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED07 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 7
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR08 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED08 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 8
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR09 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
Table continues on next page

750
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

SetLED09 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 9
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR10 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED10 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 10
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR11 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED11 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 11
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR12 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED12 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 12
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR13 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED13 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 13
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR14 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED14 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 14
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR15 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED15 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 15
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR16 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED16 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 16
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
FunType1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 1 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo1 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 1
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType2 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 2 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

751
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

InfNo2 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 2
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType3 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 3 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo3 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 3
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType4 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 4 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo4 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 4
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType5 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 5 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo5 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 5
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType6 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 6 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo6 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 6
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType7 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 7 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo7 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 7
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType8 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 8 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo8 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 8
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType9 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 9 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo9 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel 9
(IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType10 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 10 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo10 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
10 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType11 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 11 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo11 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
11 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType12 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 12 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo12 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
12 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType13 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 13 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo13 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
13 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType14 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 14 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

752
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

InfNo14 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
14 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType15 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 15 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo15 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
15 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType16 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 16 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo16 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
16 (IEC -60870-5-103)

Table 598: B1RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigLevel01 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 1
IndicationMa01 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 1
Show
TrigLevel02 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 2
IndicationMa02 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 2
Show
TrigLevel03 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 3
IndicationMa03 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 3
Show
TrigLevel04 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 4
IndicationMa04 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 4
Show
TrigLevel05 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 5
IndicationMa05 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 5
Show
TrigLevel06 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 6
IndicationMa06 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 6
Show
TrigLevel07 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 7
IndicationMa07 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 7
Show
TrigLevel08 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 8
IndicationMa08 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 8
Show
TrigLevel09 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 9
Table continues on next page

753
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IndicationMa09 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 9
Show
TrigLevel10 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 10
IndicationMa10 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 10
Show
TrigLevel11 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 11
IndicationMa11 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 11
Show
TrigLevel12 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 12
IndicationMa12 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 12
Show
TrigLevel13 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 13
IndicationMa13 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 13
Show
TrigLevel14 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 14
IndicationMa14 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 14
Show
TrigLevel15 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 15
IndicationMa15 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 15
Show
TrigLevel16 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 16
IndicationMa16 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 16
Show

Table 599: B2RBDR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigDR17 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED17 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 17
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR18 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED18 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 18
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR19 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
Table continues on next page

754
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

SetLED19 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 19
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR20 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED20 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 20
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR21 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED21 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 21
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR22 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED22 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 22
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR23 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED23 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 23
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR24 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED24 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 24
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR25 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED25 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 25
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR26 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED26 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 26
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR27 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED27 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 27
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
Table continues on next page

755
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TrigDR28 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED28 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 28
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR29 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED29 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 29
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR30 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED30 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 30
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR31 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED31 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 31
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR32 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED32 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 32
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
FunType17 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 17 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo17 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
17 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType18 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 18 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo18 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
18 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType19 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 19 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo19 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
19 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType20 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 20 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo20 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
20 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType21 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 21 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo21 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
21 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType22 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 22 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

756
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

InfNo22 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
22 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType23 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 23 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo23 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
23 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType24 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 24 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo24 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
24 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType25 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 25 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo25 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
25 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType26 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 26 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo26 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
26 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType27 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 27 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo27 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
27 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType28 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 28 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo28 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
28 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType29 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 29 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo29 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
29 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType30 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 30 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo30 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
30 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType31 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 31 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo31 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
31 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType32 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 32 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo32 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
32 (IEC -60870-5-103)

757
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Table 600: B2RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigLevel17 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 17
IndicationMa17 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 17
Show
TrigLevel18 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 18
IndicationMa18 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 18
Show
TrigLevel19 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 19
IndicationMa19 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 19
Show
TrigLevel20 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 20
IndicationMa20 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 20
Show
TrigLevel21 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 21
IndicationMa21 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 21
Show
TrigLevel22 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 22
IndicationMa22 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 22
Show
TrigLevel23 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 23
IndicationMa23 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 23
Show
TrigLevel24 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 24
IndicationMa24 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 24
Show
TrigLevel25 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 25
IndicationMa25 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 25
Show
TrigLevel26 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 26
IndicationMa26 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 26
Show
TrigLevel27 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 27
IndicationMa27 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 27
Show
TrigLevel28 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 28
IndicationMa28 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 28
Show
Table continues on next page

758
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TrigLevel29 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 29
IndicationMa29 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 29
Show
TrigLevel30 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 30
IndicationMa30 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 30
Show
TrigLevel31 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 31
IndicationMa31 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 31
Show
TrigLevel32 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 32
IndicationMa32 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 32
Show

Table 601: B3RBDR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigDR33 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED33 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 33
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR34 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED34 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 34
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR35 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED35 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 35
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR36 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED36 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 36
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR37 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED37 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 37
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
Table continues on next page

759
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TrigDR38 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED38 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 38
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR39 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED39 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 39
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR40 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED40 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 40
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR41 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED41 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 41
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR42 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED42 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 42
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR43 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED43 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 43
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR44 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED44 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 44
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR45 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED45 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 45
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR46 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
Table continues on next page

760
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

SetLED46 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 46
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR47 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED47 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 47
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR48 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED48 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 48
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
FunType33 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 33 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo33 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
33 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType34 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 34 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo34 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
34 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType35 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 35 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo35 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
35 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType36 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 36 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo36 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
36 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType37 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 37 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo37 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
37 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType38 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 38 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo38 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
38 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType39 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 39 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo39 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
39 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType40 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 40 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo40 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
40 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType41 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 41 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

761
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

InfNo41 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
41 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType42 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 42 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo42 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
42 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType43 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 43 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo43 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
43 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType44 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 44 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo44 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
44 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType45 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 45 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo45 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
45 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType46 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 46 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo46 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
46 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType47 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 47 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo47 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
47 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType48 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 48 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo48 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
48 (IEC -60870-5-103)

Table 602: B3RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigLevel33 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 33
IndicationMa33 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 33
Show
TrigLevel34 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 34
IndicationMa34 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 34
Show
TrigLevel35 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 35
IndicationMa35 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 35
Show
TrigLevel36 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 36
Table continues on next page

762
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IndicationMa36 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 36
Show
TrigLevel37 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 37
IndicationMa37 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 37
Show
TrigLevel38 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 38
IndicationMa38 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 38
Show
TrigLevel39 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 39
IndicationMa39 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 39
Show
TrigLevel40 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 40
IndicationMa40 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 40
Show
TrigLevel41 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 41
IndicationMa41 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 41
Show
TrigLevel42 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 42
IndicationMa42 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 42
Show
TrigLevel43 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 43
IndicationMa43 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 43
Show
TrigLevel44 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 44
IndicationMa44 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 44
Show
TrigLevel45 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 45
IndicationMa45 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 45
Show
TrigLevel46 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 46
IndicationMa46 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 46
Show
TrigLevel47 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 47
Table continues on next page

763
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IndicationMa47 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 47
Show
TrigLevel48 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 48
IndicationMa48 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 48
Show

Table 603: B4RBDR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigDR49 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED49 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 49
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR50 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED50 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 50
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR51 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED51 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 51
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR52 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED52 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 52
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR53 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED53 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 53
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR54 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED54 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 54
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR55 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED55 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 55
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
Table continues on next page

764
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TrigDR56 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED56 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 56
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR57 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED57 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 57
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR58 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED58 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 58
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR59 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED59 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 59
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR60 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED60 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 60
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR61 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED61 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 61
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR62 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED62 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 62
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR63 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED63 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 63
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR64 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
Table continues on next page

765
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

SetLED64 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 64
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
FunType49 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 49 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo49 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
49 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType50 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 50 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo50 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
50 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType51 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 51 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo51 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
51 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType52 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 52 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo52 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
52 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType53 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 53 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo53 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
53 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType54 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 54 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo54 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
54 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType55 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 55 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo55 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
55 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType56 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 56 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo56 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
56 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType57 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 57 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo57 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
57 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType58 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 58 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo58 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
58 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType59 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 59 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo59 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
59 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType60 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 60 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

766
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

InfNo60 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
60 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType61 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 61 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo61 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
61 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType62 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 62 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo62 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
62 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType63 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 63 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo63 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
63 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType64 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 64 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo64 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
64 (IEC -60870-5-103)

Table 604: B4RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigLevel49 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 49
IndicationMa49 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 49
Show
TrigLevel50 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 50
IndicationMa50 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 50
Show
TrigLevel51 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 51
IndicationMa51 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 51
Show
TrigLevel52 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 52
IndicationMa52 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 52
Show
TrigLevel53 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 53
IndicationMa53 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 53
Show
TrigLevel54 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 54
IndicationMa54 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 54
Show
TrigLevel55 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 55
Table continues on next page

767
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IndicationMa55 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 55
Show
TrigLevel56 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 56
IndicationMa56 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 56
Show
TrigLevel57 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 57
IndicationMa57 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 57
Show
TrigLevel58 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 58
IndicationMa58 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 58
Show
TrigLevel59 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 59
IndicationMa59 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 59
Show
TrigLevel60 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 60
IndicationMa60 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 60
Show
TrigLevel61 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 61
IndicationMa61 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 61
Show
TrigLevel62 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 62
IndicationMa62 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 62
Show
TrigLevel63 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 63
IndicationMa63 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 63
Show
TrigLevel64 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 64
IndicationMa64 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 64
Show

768
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Table 605: B5RBDR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigDR65 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED65 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 65
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR66 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED66 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 66
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR67 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED67 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 67
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR68 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED68 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 68
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR69 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED69 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 69
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR70 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED70 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 70
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR71 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED71 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 71
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR72 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED72 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 72
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR73 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
Table continues on next page

769
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

SetLED73 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 73
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR74 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED74 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 74
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR75 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED75 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 75
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR76 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED76 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 76
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR77 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED77 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 77
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR78 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED78 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 78
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR79 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED79 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 79
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR80 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED80 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 80
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
FunType65 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 65 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo65 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
65 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType66 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 66 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

770
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

InfNo66 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
66 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType67 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 67 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo67 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
67 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType68 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 68 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo68 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
68 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType69 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 69 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo69 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
69 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType70 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 70 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo70 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
70 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType71 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 71 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo71 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
71 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType72 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 72 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo72 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
72 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType73 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 73 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo73 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
73 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType74 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 74 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo74 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
74 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType75 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 75 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo75 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
75 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType76 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 76 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo76 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
76 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType77 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 77 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo77 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
77 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType78 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 78 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

771
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

InfNo78 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
78 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType79 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 79 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo79 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
79 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType80 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 80 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo80 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
80 (IEC -60870-5-103)

Table 606: B5RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigLevel65 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 65
IndicationMa65 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 65
Show
TrigLevel66 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 66
IndicationMa66 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 66
Show
TrigLevel67 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 67
IndicationMa67 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 67
Show
TrigLevel68 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 68
IndicationMa68 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 68
Show
TrigLevel69 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 69
IndicationMa69 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 69
Show
TrigLevel70 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 70
IndicationMa70 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 70
Show
TrigLevel71 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 71
IndicationMa71 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 71
Show
TrigLevel72 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 72
IndicationMa72 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 72
Show
TrigLevel73 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 73
Table continues on next page

772
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

IndicationMa73 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 73
Show
TrigLevel74 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 74
IndicationMa74 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 74
Show
TrigLevel75 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 75
IndicationMa75 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 75
Show
TrigLevel76 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 76
IndicationMa76 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 76
Show
TrigLevel77 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 77
IndicationMa77 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 77
Show
TrigLevel78 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 78
IndicationMa78 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 78
Show
TrigLevel79 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 79
IndicationMa79 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 79
Show
TrigLevel80 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 80
IndicationMa80 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 80
Show

Table 607: B6RBDR Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigDR81 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED81 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 81
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR82 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED82 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 82
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR83 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
Table continues on next page

773
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

SetLED83 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 83
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR84 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED84 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 84
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR85 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED85 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 85
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR86 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED86 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 86
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR87 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED87 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 87
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR88 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED88 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 88
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR89 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED89 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 89
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR90 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED90 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 90
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR91 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED91 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 91
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
Table continues on next page

774
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TrigDR92 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED92 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 92
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR93 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED93 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 93
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR94 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED94 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 94
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR95 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED95 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 95
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
TrigDR96 Off - - Off Trigger operation On/Off
On
SetLED96 Off - - Off Set LED on HMI for binary channel 96
Start
Trip
Start and Trip
FunType81 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 81 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo81 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
81 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType82 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 82 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo82 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
82 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType83 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 83 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo83 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
83 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType84 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 84 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo84 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
84 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType85 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 85 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo85 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
85 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType86 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 86 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
Table continues on next page

775
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

InfNo86 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
86 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType87 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 87 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo87 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
87 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType88 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 88 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo88 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
88 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType89 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 89 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo89 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
89 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType90 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 90 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo90 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
90 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType91 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 91 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo91 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
91 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType92 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 92 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo92 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
92 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType93 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 93 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo93 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
93 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType94 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 94 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo94 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
94 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType95 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 95 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo95 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
95 (IEC -60870-5-103)
FunType96 0 - 255 - 1 0 Function type for binary channel 96 (IEC
-60870-5-103)
InfNo96 0 - 255 - 1 0 Information number for binary channel
96 (IEC -60870-5-103)

776
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Table 608: B6RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TrigLevel81 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 81
IndicationMa81 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 81
Show
TrigLevel82 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 82
IndicationMa82 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 82
Show
TrigLevel83 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 83
IndicationMa83 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 83
Show
TrigLevel84 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 84
IndicationMa84 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 84
Show
TrigLevel85 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 85
IndicationMa85 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 85
Show
TrigLevel86 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 86
IndicationMa86 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 86
Show
TrigLevel87 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 87
IndicationMa87 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 87
Show
TrigLevel88 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 88
IndicationMa88 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 88
Show
TrigLevel89 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 89
IndicationMa89 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 89
Show
TrigLevel90 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 90
IndicationMa90 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 90
Show
TrigLevel91 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 91
IndicationMa91 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 91
Show
TrigLevel92 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 92
IndicationMa92 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 92
Show
Table continues on next page

777
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

TrigLevel93 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 93
IndicationMa93 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 93
Show
TrigLevel94 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 94
IndicationMa94 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 94
Show
TrigLevel95 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 95
IndicationMa95 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 95
Show
TrigLevel96 Trig on 0 - - Trig on 1 Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0)
Trig on 1 slope for binary input 96
IndicationMa96 Hide - - Show Indication mask for binary channel 96
Show

16.7.6 Monitored data

Table 609: DRPRDRE Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MemoryUsed INTEGER - % Memory usage (0-100%)
UnTrigStatCh1 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 1
activated
OvTrigStatCh1 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 1 activated
UnTrigStatCh2 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 2
activated
OvTrigStatCh2 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 2 activated
UnTrigStatCh3 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 3
activated
OvTrigStatCh3 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 3 activated
UnTrigStatCh4 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 4
activated
OvTrigStatCh4 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 4 activated
UnTrigStatCh5 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 5
activated
OvTrigStatCh5 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 5 activated
Table continues on next page

778
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

UnTrigStatCh6 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 6
activated
OvTrigStatCh6 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 6 activated
UnTrigStatCh7 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 7
activated
OvTrigStatCh7 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 7 activated
UnTrigStatCh8 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 8
activated
OvTrigStatCh8 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 8 activated
UnTrigStatCh9 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 9
activated
OvTrigStatCh9 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 9 activated
UnTrigStatCh10 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 10
activated
OvTrigStatCh10 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 10 activated
UnTrigStatCh11 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 11
activated
OvTrigStatCh11 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 11 activated
UnTrigStatCh12 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 12
activated
OvTrigStatCh12 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 12 activated
UnTrigStatCh13 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 13
activated
OvTrigStatCh13 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 13 activated
UnTrigStatCh14 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 14
activated
OvTrigStatCh14 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 14 activated
UnTrigStatCh15 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 15
activated
OvTrigStatCh15 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 15 activated
Table continues on next page

779
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

UnTrigStatCh16 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 16
activated
OvTrigStatCh16 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 16 activated
UnTrigStatCh17 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 17
activated
OvTrigStatCh17 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 17 activated
UnTrigStatCh18 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 18
activated
OvTrigStatCh18 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 18 activated
UnTrigStatCh19 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 19
activated
OvTrigStatCh19 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 19 activated
UnTrigStatCh20 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 20
activated
OvTrigStatCh20 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 20 activated
UnTrigStatCh21 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 21
activated
OvTrigStatCh21 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 21 activated
UnTrigStatCh22 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 22
activated
OvTrigStatCh22 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 22 activated
UnTrigStatCh23 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 23
activated
OvTrigStatCh23 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 23 activated
UnTrigStatCh24 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 24
activated
OvTrigStatCh24 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 24 activated
UnTrigStatCh25 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 25
activated
OvTrigStatCh25 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 25 activated
Table continues on next page

780
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

UnTrigStatCh26 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 26
activated
OvTrigStatCh26 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 26 activated
UnTrigStatCh27 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 27
activated
OvTrigStatCh27 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 27 activated
UnTrigStatCh28 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 28
activated
OvTrigStatCh28 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 28 activated
UnTrigStatCh29 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 29
activated
OvTrigStatCh29 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 29 activated
UnTrigStatCh30 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 30
activated
OvTrigStatCh30 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 30 activated
UnTrigStatCh31 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 31
activated
OvTrigStatCh31 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 31 activated
UnTrigStatCh32 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 32
activated
OvTrigStatCh32 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 32 activated
UnTrigStatCh33 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 33
activated
OvTrigStatCh33 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 33 activated
UnTrigStatCh34 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 34
activated
OvTrigStatCh34 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 34 activated
UnTrigStatCh35 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 35
activated
OvTrigStatCh35 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 35 activated
Table continues on next page

781
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

UnTrigStatCh36 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 36
activated
OvTrigStatCh36 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 36 activated
UnTrigStatCh37 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 37
activated
OvTrigStatCh37 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 37 activated
UnTrigStatCh38 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 38
activated
OvTrigStatCh38 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 38 activated
UnTrigStatCh39 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 39
activated
OvTrigStatCh39 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 39 activated
UnTrigStatCh40 BOOLEAN - - Under level trig for
analog channel 40
activated
OvTrigStatCh40 BOOLEAN - - Over level trig for analog
channel 40 activated
FaultNumber INTEGER - - Disturbance fault number

16.7.7 Operation principle

Disturbance report DRPRDRE is a common name for several functions to supply
the operator, analysis engineer, and so on, with sufficient information about events
in the system.

The functions included in the disturbance report are:

Event list (EL)

Indications (IND)
Event recorder (ER)
Trip value recorder(TVR)
Disturbance recorder (DR)

Figure 341 shows the relations between Disturbance Report, included functions
and function blocks. Event list (EL), Event recorder (ER) and Indications (IND)
uses information from the binary input function blocks (BxRBDR). Trip value
recorder (TVR) uses analog information from the analog input function blocks
(AxRADR). Disturbance recorder DRPRDRE acquires information from both
AxRADR and BxRBDR.

782
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

A1-4RADR Disturbance Report

A4RADR DRPRDRE FL
Analog signals
Trip value rec Fault locator

B1-6RBDR Disturbance
recorder

Binary signals B6RBDR

Event list

Event recorder

Indications

IEC09000336-2-en.vsd
IEC09000336 V2 EN

Figure 341: Disturbance report functions and related function blocks

The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings,
each with the data coming from all the parts mentioned above. The event list
function is working continuously, independent of disturbance triggering, recording
time, and so on. All information in the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile
flash memories. This implies that no information is lost in case of loss of auxiliary
power. Each report will get an identification number in the interval from 0-999.

Disturbance report

Record no. N Record no. N+1 Record no. N+100

General dist. Trip Event Disturbance

Indications Fault locator Event list
information values recordings recording

en05000125.vsd
IEC05000125 V1 EN

Figure 342: Disturbance report structure

Up to 100 disturbance reports can be stored. If a new disturbance is to be recorded

when the memory is full, the oldest disturbance report is overwritten by the new
one. The total recording capacity for the disturbance recorder is depending of
sampling frequency, number of analog and binary channels and recording time.
Figure 343 shows the number of recordings versus the total recording time tested
for a typical configuration, that is, in a 50 Hz system it is possible to record 100
where the average recording time is 3.4 seconds. The memory limit does not affect

783
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

the rest of the disturbance report (Event list (EL), Event recorder (ER), Indications
(IND) and Trip value recorder (TVR)).

Number of recordings
100
3,4 s

80 3,4 s 20 analog
96 binary
40 analog
96 binary
60 6,3 s
6,3 s

6,3 s 50 Hz
40
60 Hz
Total recording time

250 300 350 400 s

en05000488.vsd
IEC05000488 V1 EN

Figure 343: Example of number of recordings versus the total recording time

The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings

total recording time. Long recording time will reduce the number of
recordings to less than 100.

The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This
might cause disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk
space.

Disturbance information
Date and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, fault location and the trip
values are available on the local HMI. To acquire a complete disturbance report the
user must use a PC and - either the PCM600 Disturbance handling tool - or a FTP
or MMS (over 61850) client. The PC can be connected to the IED front, rear or
remotely via the station bus (Ethernet ports).

Indications (IND)
Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the total recording time of
the disturbance (not time-tagged), see section "" for more detailed information.

784
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Event recorder (ER)

The event recorder may contain a list of up to 150 time-tagged events, which have
occurred during the disturbance. The information is available via the local HMI or
PCM600, see section "" for more detailed information.

Event list (EL)

The event list may contain a list of totally 1000 time-tagged events. The list
information is continuously updated when selected binary signals change state. The
oldest data is overwritten. The logged signals may be presented via local HMI or
PCM600, see section "" for more detailed information.

Trip value recorder (TVR)

The recorded trip values include phasors of selected analog signals before the fault
and during the fault, see section "" for more detailed information.

Disturbance recorder (DR)

Disturbance recorder records analog and binary signal data before, during and after
the fault, see section "" for more detailed information.

Fault locator (FL)

The fault location function calculates the distance to fault, see section "Fault
locator LMBRFLO" for more detailed information.

Time tagging
The IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all
time tagging within the disturbance report

Recording times
Disturbance report DRPRDRE records information about a disturbance during a
settable time frame. The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report.
Disturbance recorder (DR), event recorder (ER) and indication function register
disturbance data and events during tRecording, the total recording time.

The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:

tRecording = PreFaultrecT + tFault + PostFaultrecT or PreFaultrecT + TimeLimit, depending on

which criterion stops the current disturbance recording

785
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Trig point
TimeLimit

PreFaultRecT PostFaultRecT

1 2 3

en05000487.vsd
IEC05000487 V1 EN

Figure 344: The recording times definition

PreFaultRecT, 1 Pre-fault or pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the
operate time of the trigger. Use the setting PreFaultRecT to set this time.
tFault, 2 Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as
any valid trigger condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by TimeLimit
the limit time).
PostFaultRecT, 3 Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all
activated triggers are reset. Use the setting PostFaultRecT to set this time.
TimeLimit Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording
was triggered. The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger
that does not reset within a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum
recording time of a recording and prevents subsequent overwriting of already
stored disturbances. Use the setting TimeLimit to set this time.

Analog signals
Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance recorder
and triggering of the Disturbance report function. Out of these 40, 30 are reserved
for external analog signals from analog input modules (TRM) and line data
communication module (LDCM) via preprocessing function blocks (SMAI) and
summation block (3PHSUM). The last 10 channels may be connected to internally
calculated analog signals available as function block output signals (mA input
signals, phase differential currents, bias currents and so on).

786
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

SMAI A1RADR
Block AI3P A2RADR
^GRP2L1 AI1 INPUT1 A3RADR
External
analogue ^GRP2L2 AI2 INPUT2
signals ^GRP2L3 AI3 INPUT3
^GRP2N AI4 INPUT4
Type AIN INPUT5
INPUT6
...

A4RADR

INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
Internal analogue signals INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36

...

INPUT40

IEC10000029-1-en.vsd
IEC10000029 V1 EN

Figure 345: Analog input function blocks

The external input signals will be acquired, filtered and skewed and (after
configuration) available as an input signal on the AxRADR function block via the
SMAI function block. The information is saved at the Disturbance report base
sampling rate (1000 or 1200 Hz). Internally calculated signals are updated
according to the cycle time of the specific function. If a function is running at
lower speed than the base sampling rate, Disturbance recorder will use the latest
updated sample until a new updated sample is available.

If the IED is preconfigured the only tool needed for analog configuration of the
Disturbance report is the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT, external signal configuration).
In case of modification of a preconfigured IED or general internal configuration the
Application Configuration tool within PCM600 is used.

The preprocessor function block (SMAI) calculates the residual quantities in cases
where only the three phases are connected (AI4-input not used). SMAI makes the
information available as a group signal output, phase outputs and calculated
residual output (AIN-output). In situations where AI4-input is used as an input
signal the corresponding information is available on the non-calculated output
(AI4) on the SMAI function block. Connect the signals to the AxRADR accordingly.

For each of the analog signals, Operation = On means that it is recorded by the
disturbance recorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, and
triggers even if operation is set to Off. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be
used as trigger conditions. The same applies for the current signals.

787
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

If Operation = Off, no waveform (samples) will be recorded and reported in graph.

However, Trip value, pre-fault and fault value will be recorded and reported. The
input channel can still be used to trig the disturbance recorder.

If Operation = On, waveform (samples) will also be recorded and reported in graph.

The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect
the entire disturbance report when being used as triggers.

Binary signals
Up to 96 binary signals can be selected to be handled by disturbance report. The
signals can be selected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary
signal is selected to be recorded when:

the corresponding function block is included in the configuration

the signal is connected to the input of the function block

Each of the 96 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report

(Operation = Off). A binary signal can be selected to activate the red LED on the
local HMI (SetLED = On/Off).

The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, event list and the
disturbance recording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are
used as triggers. The indications are also selected from these 96 signals with local
HMI IndicationMask=Show/Hide.

Trigger signals
The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the event list,
which runs continuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a
complete disturbance report is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition
is fulfilled, there is no disturbance report, no indications, and so on. This implies
the importance of choosing the right signals as trigger conditions.

A trigger can be of type:

Manual trigger
Binary-signal trigger
Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)

Manual trigger
A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, PCM600 or
via station bus (IEC 61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger
signal is generated. This feature is especially useful for testing. Refer to the
operator's manual for procedure.

Binary-signal trigger
Any binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a
trigger (Triglevel = Trig on 0/Trig on 1). When a binary signal is selected to

788
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

generate a trigger from a logic zero, the selected signal will not be listed in the
indications list of the disturbance report.

Analog-signal trigger
All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recorded
in the disturbance recorder or not. The settings are OverTrigOp, UnderTrigOp,
OverTrigLe and UnderTrigLe.

The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is
found, the absolute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the
average value is above the threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger,
this trigger is indicated with a greater than (>) sign with the user-defined name.

If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or
undercurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name.
The procedure is separately performed for each channel.

This method of checking the analog start conditions gives a function which is
insensitive to DC offset in the signal. The operate time for this start is typically in
the range of one cycle, 20 ms for a 50 Hz network.

All under/over trig signal information is available on the local HMI and PCM600.

Post Retrigger
Disturbance report function does not automatically respond to any new trig
condition during a recording, after all signals set as trigger signals have been reset.
However, under certain circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the
post-fault recording, for instance by automatic reclosing to a still faulty power line.

In order to capture the new disturbance it is possible to allow retriggering

(PostRetrig = On) during the post-fault time. In this case a new, complete
recording will start and, during a period, run in parallel with the initial recording.

When the retrig parameter is disabled (PostRetrig = Off), a new recording will not
start until the post-fault (PostFaultrecT or TimeLimit) period is terminated. If a
new trig occurs during the post-fault period and lasts longer than the proceeding
recording a new complete recording will be started.

Disturbance report function can handle maximum 3 simultaneous disturbance

recordings.

16.7.8 Technical data

Table 610: DRPRDRE technical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Pre-fault time (0.059.90) s -
Post-fault time (0.110.0) s -
Limit time (0.510.0) s -
Table continues on next page

789
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Function Range or value Accuracy

Maximum number of recordings 100, first in - first out -
Time tagging resolution 1 ms See table 789
Maximum number of analog inputs 30 + 10 (external + internally -
derived)
Maximum number of binary inputs 96 -
Maximum number of phasors in the 30 -
Trip Value recorder per recording
Maximum number of indications in a 96 -
disturbance report
Maximum number of events in the 150 -
Event recording per recording
Maximum number of events in the 1000, first in - first out -
Event list
Maximum total recording time (3.4 s 340 seconds (100 recordings) -
recording time and maximum number at 50 Hz, 280 seconds (80
of channels, typical value) recordings) at 60 Hz
Sampling rate 1 kHz at 50 Hz -
1.2 kHz at 60 Hz
Recording bandwidth (5-300) Hz -

16.8 Logical signal status report BINSTATREP

16.8.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Logical signal status report BINSTATREP - -

16.8.2 Functionality
The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function makes it possible for a
SPA master to poll signals from various other functions.

790
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

16.8.3 Function block

BINSTATREP
BLOCK OUTPUT1
^INPUT1 OUTPUT2
^INPUT2 OUTPUT3
^INPUT3 OUTPUT4
^INPUT4 OUTPUT5
^INPUT5 OUTPUT6
^INPUT6 OUTPUT7
^INPUT7 OUTPUT8
^INPUT8 OUTPUT9
^INPUT9 OUTPUT10
^INPUT10 OUTPUT11
^INPUT11 OUTPUT12
^INPUT12 OUTPUT13
^INPUT13 OUTPUT14
^INPUT14 OUTPUT15
^INPUT15 OUTPUT16
^INPUT16

IEC09000730-1-en.vsd
IEC09000730 V1 EN

Figure 346: BINSTATREP function block

16.8.4 Signals
Table 611: BINSTATREP Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Single status report input 16

791
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Table 612: BINSTATREP Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 1
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 2
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 3
OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 4
OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 5
OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 6
OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 7
OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 8
OUTPUT9 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 9
OUTPUT10 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 10
OUTPUT11 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 11
OUTPUT12 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 12
OUTPUT13 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 13
OUTPUT14 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 14
OUTPUT15 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 15
OUTPUT16 BOOLEAN Logical status report output 16

16.8.5 Settings
Table 613: BINSTATREP Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
t 0.0 - 60.0 s 0.1 10.0 Time delay of function

16.8.6 Operation principle

The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function has 16 inputs and 16
outputs. The output status follows the inputs and can be read from the local HMI or
via SPA communication.

When an input is set, the respective output is set for a user defined time. If the
input signal remains set for a longer period, the output will remain set until the
input signal resets.

792
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

INPUTn

OUTPUTn
t t

IEC09000732-1-en.vsd
IEC09000732 V1 EN

Figure 347: BINSTATREP logical diagram

16.9 Measured value expander block RANGE_XP

16.9.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Measured value expander block RANGE_XP - -

16.9.2 Functionality
The current and voltage measurements functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU
and VNMMXU), current and voltage sequence measurement functions (CMSQI
and VMSQI) and IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGAPC) are
provided with measurement supervision functionality. All measured values can be
supervised with four settable limits: low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-
high limit. The measure value expander block (RANGE_XP) has been introduced
to enable translating the integer output signal from the measuring functions to 5
binary signals: below low-low limit, below low limit, normal, above high limit or
above high-high limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in the
configurable logic or for alarming purpose.

16.9.3 Function block

RANGE_XP
RANGE* HIGHHIGH
HIGH
NORMAL
LOW
LOWLOW

IEC05000346-2-en.vsd
IEC05000346 V2 EN

Figure 348: RANGE_XP function block

793
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

16.9.4 Signals
Table 614: RANGE_XP Input signals
Name Type Default Description
RANGE INTEGER 0 Measured value range

Table 615: RANGE_XP Output signals

Name Type Description
HIGHHIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is above high-high limit
HIGH BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and high-high limit
NORMAL BOOLEAN Measured value is between high and low limit
LOW BOOLEAN Measured value is between low and low-low limit
LOWLOW BOOLEAN Measured value is below low-low limit

16.9.5 Operation principle

The input signal must be connected to a range output of a measuring function block
(CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU, VNMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQ or MVGAPC).
The function block converts the input integer value to five binary output signals
according to table 616.

Table 616: Input integer value converted to binary output signals

Measured supervised below low-low between low between low between high- above high-
value is: limit low and low and high limit high and high high limit
Output: limit limit
LOWLOW High
LOW High
NORMAL High
HIGH High
HIGHHIGH High

16.10 Fault locator LMBRFLO

16.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Fault locator LMBRFLO - -

794
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

16.10.2 Functionality
The accurate fault locator is an essential component to minimize the outages after a
persistent fault and/or to pin-point a weak spot on the line.

The fault locator is an impedance measuring function giving the distance to the
fault in km, miles or % of line length. The main advantage is the high accuracy
achieved by compensating for load current and for the mutual zero-sequence effect
on double circuit lines.

The compensation includes setting of the remote and local sources and calculation
of the distribution of fault currents from each side. This distribution of fault
current, together with recorded load (pre-fault) currents, is used to exactly calculate
the fault position. The fault can be recalculated with new source data at the actual
fault to further increase the accuracy.

Especially on heavily loaded long lines, where the source voltage angles can be up
to 35-40 degrees apart, the accuracy can be still maintained with the advanced
compensation included in fault locator.

16.10.3 Function block

LMBRFLO
PHSELL1* FLTDISTX
PHSELL2* CALCMADE
PHSELL3* BCD_80
CALCDIST* BCD_40
BCD_20
BCD_10
BCD_8
BCD_4
BCD_2
BCD_1

IEC05000679-2-en.vsd
IEC05000679 V3 EN

Figure 349: FLO function block

16.10.4 Signals
Table 617: LMBRFLO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
PHSELL1 BOOLEAN 0 Phase selecton L1
PHSELL2 BOOLEAN 0 Phase selecton L2
PHSELL3 BOOLEAN 0 Phase selecton L3
CALCDIST BOOLEAN 0 Do calculate fault distance (release)

795
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Table 618: LMBRFLO Output signals

Name Type Description
CALCMADE BOOLEAN Fault calculation made
FLT_X REAL Reactive distance to fault
BCD_80 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 80%
BCD_40 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 40%
BCD_20 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 20%
BCD_10 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 10%
BCD_8 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 8%
BCD_4 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 4%
BCD_2 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 2%
BCD_1 BOOLEAN Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 1%

16.10.5 Settings
Table 619: LMBRFLO Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
R1A 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 2.000 Source resistance A (near end)
X1A 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 12.000 Source reactance A (near end)
R1B 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 2.000 Source resistance B (far end)
X1B 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 12.000 Source reactance B (far end)
R1L 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 2.000 Positive sequence line resistance
X1L 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 12.500 Positive sequence line reactance
R0L 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 8.750 Zero sequence line resistance
X0L 0.001 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 50.000 Zero sequence line reactance
R0M 0.000 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 0.000 Zero sequence mutual resistance
X0M 0.000 - 1500.000 Ohm/p 0.001 0.000 Zero sequence mutual reactance
LineLengthUnit kilometer - - kilometer Line length unit
miles
LineLength 0.0 - 10000.0 - 0.1 40.0 Length of line

Table 620: LMBRFLO Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
DrepChNoIL1 1 - 30 Ch 1 1 Recorder input number recording phase
current, IL1
DrepChNoIL2 1 - 30 Ch 1 2 Recorder input number recording phase
current, IL2
DrepChNoIL3 1 - 30 Ch 1 3 Recorder input number recording phase
current, IL3
DrepChNoIN 0 - 30 Ch 1 4 Recorder input number recording
residual current, IN
Table continues on next page

796
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

DrepChNoIP 0 - 30 Ch 1 0 Recorder input number recording 3I0 on
parallel line
DrepChNoUL1 1 - 30 Ch 1 5 Recorder input number recording phase
voltage, UL1
DrepChNoUL2 1 - 30 Ch 1 6 Recorder input number recording phase
voltage, UL2
DrepChNoUL3 1 - 30 Ch 1 7 Recorder input number recording phase
voltage, UL3

16.10.6 Monitored data

Table 621: LMBRFLO Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
FLT_REL REAL - - Distance to fault, relative
FLT_DIST REAL - - Distance to fault in line
length unit
FLT_X REAL - Ohm Reactive distance to fault
FLT_R REAL - Ohm Resistive distance to fault
FLT_LOOP INTEGER 1=L1-N - Fault loop
2=L2-N
3=L3-N
4=L1-L2
5=L2-L3
6=L3-L1
7=Others

16.10.7 Operation principle

The Fault locator (LMBRFLO) in the IED is an essential complement to other
monitoring functions, since it measures and indicates the distance to the fault with
high accuracy.

When calculating distance to fault, pre-fault and fault phasors of currents and
voltages are selected from the Trip value recorder data, thus the analog signals used
by the fault locator must be among those connected to the disturbance report
function. The analog configuration (channel selection) is performed using the
parameter setting tool within PCM600.

The calculation algorithm considers the effect of load currents, double-end infeed
and additional fault resistance.

797
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

R0L+jX0L
R1L+jX1L

R1A+jX1A R1B+jX1B
Z0m=Z0m+jX0m

R0L+jX0L
R1L+jX1L
DRPRDRE
LMBRFLO

IEC05000045_2_en.vsd
IEC05000045 V2 EN

Figure 350: Simplified network configuration with network data, required for
settings of the fault location-measuring function

If source impedance in the near and far end of the protected line have changed in a
significant manner relative to the set values at fault location calculation time (due
to exceptional switching state in the immediate network, power generation out of
order, and so on), new values can be entered via the local HMI and a recalculation
of the distance to the fault can be ordered using the algorithm described below. Its
also possible to change fault loop. In this way, a more accurate location of the fault
can be achieved.

The function indicates the distance to the fault as a percentage of the line length, in
kilometers or miles as selected on the local HMI. The fault location is stored as a
part of the disturbance report information (ER, DR, IND, TVR and FL) and
managed via the local HMI or PCM600.

16.10.7.1 Measuring Principle

For transmission lines with voltage sources at both line ends, the effect of double-
end infeed and additional fault resistance must be considered when calculating the
distance to the fault from the currents and voltages at one line end. If this is not
done, the accuracy of the calculated figure will vary with the load flow and the
amount of additional fault resistance.

The calculation algorithm used in the fault locator in compensates for the effect of
double-end infeed, additional fault resistance and load current.

16.10.7.2 Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault

Figure 351 shows a single-line diagram of a single transmission line, that is fed
from both ends with source impedances ZA and ZB. Assume that the fault occurs at
a distance F from IED A on a line with the length L and impedance ZL. The fault
resistance is defined as RF. A single-line model is used for better clarification of
the algorithm.

798
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

A B
ZA IA pZL IB (1-p).ZL ZB

IF

UA RF

xx01000171.vsd
IEC01000171 V1 EN

Figure 351: Fault on transmission line fed from both ends

From figure 351 it is evident that:

U A = I A p Z L + IF R F
EQUATION95 V1 EN (Equation 99)

Where:
IA is the line current after the fault, that is, pre-fault current plus current change due to the fault,

IF is the fault current and

p is a relative distance to the fault

The fault current is expressed in measurable quantities by:

IF A
IF = --------
DA
EQUATION96 V1 EN (Equation 100)

Where:
IFA is the change in current at the point of measurement, IED A and

DA is a fault current-distribution factor, that is, the ratio between the fault current at line end A
and the total fault current.

For a single line, the value is equal to:

( 1 p ) Z L + ZB
DA = -----------------------------------------
Z A + Z L + ZB
EQUATION97 V1 EN (Equation 101)

799
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

Thus, the general fault location equation for a single line is:

I FA
U A = I A p Z L + -------
- RF
DA
EQUATION98 V1 EN (Equation 102)

Table 622: Expressions for UA, IA and IFA for different types of faults

Fault type: UA IA IFA

L1-N UL1A IL1A + KN x INA 3
--- D ( I L1A I 0A )
2
EQUATION110 V1 EN

L2-N UL2A IL2A + KN x INA

3
--- D ( I L2A I 0A )
2
EQUATION111 V1 EN

L3-N UL3A IL3A + KN x INA 3

--- D ( I L3A I0A )
2
EQUATION112 V1 EN

L1-L2-L3, L1-L2,L1-L2- UL1A-UL2A IL1A - IL2A DIL 1 L 2 A

N
EQUATION113 V1 EN

L2-L3, L2-L3-N UL2A-UL3A IL2A - IL3A DIL2L3A

EQUATION114 V1 EN

L3-L1, L3-L1-N UL3A-UL1A IL3A - IL1A

DIL3L1A
EQUATION115 V1 EN

The KN complex quantity for zero-sequence compensation for the single line is
equal to:

Z0L Z 1L
K N = ------------------------
3 Z1L
EQUATION99 V1 EN (Equation 103)

DI is the change in current, that is the current after the fault minus the current
before the fault.

In the following, the positive sequence impedance for ZA, ZB and ZL is inserted
into the equations, because this is the value used in the algorithm.

For double lines, the fault equation is:

800
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

I FA
U A = I A p Z 1L + -------- RF + I 0P Z 0M
DA
EQUATION100 V1 EN (Equation 104)

Where:
I0P is a zero sequence current of the parallel line,

Z0M is a mutual zero sequence impedance and

DA is the distribution factor of the parallel line, which is:

( 1 p ) ( ZA + ZA L + ZB ) + Z B
DA = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
2 ZA + Z L + 2 Z B
EQUATION101 V1 EN

The KN compensation factor for the double line becomes:

Z0L Z 1L Z 0M I 0P
K N = ----------------------- - -------
- + ----------------
3 Z1L 3 Z1L I 0A
EQUATION102 V1 EN (Equation 105)

From these equations it can be seen, that, if Z0m = 0, then the general fault location
equation for a single line is obtained. Only the distribution factor differs in these
two cases.

Because the DA distribution factor according to equation 102 or 104 is a function

of p, the general equation 104 can be written in the form:
2
p p K1 + K2 K3 RF = 0
EQUATION103 V1 EN (Equation 106)

Where:

UA ZB
K 1 = ---------------
- + --------------------------
-+1
I A ZL Z L + ZA DD

EQUATION104 V1 EN (Equation 107)

UA ZB
K2 = --------------- --------------------------- + 1
IA Z L Z L + Z A DD

EQUATION105 V1 EN (Equation 108)

IF A ZA + ZB
- --------------------------- + 1
K 3 = ---------------
I A Z L Z 1 + ZA DD
EQUATION106 V1 EN (Equation 109)

and:

801
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

ZADD = ZA + ZB for parallel lines.

IA, IFA and UA are given in the above table.
KN is calculated automatically according to equation 105.
ZA, ZB, ZL, Z0L and Z0M are setting parameters.

For a single line, Z0M = 0 and ZADD = 0. Thus, equation 106 applies to both single
and parallel lines.

Equation 106 can be divided into real and imaginary parts:

2
p p Re ( K 1 ) + Re ( K 2 ) R F Re ( K 3 ) = 0
EQUATION107 V1 EN (Equation 110)

p Im ( K1 ) + Im ( K 2 ) R F Im ( K3 ) = 0
EQUATION108 V1 EN (Equation 111)

If the imaginary part of K3 is not zero, RF can be solved according to equation 111,
and then inserted to equation 110. According to equation 110, the relative distance
to the fault is solved as the root of a quadratic equation.

Equation 110 gives two different values for the relative distance to the fault as a
solution. A simplified load compensated algorithm, which gives an unequivocal
figure for the relative distance to the fault, is used to establish the value that should
be selected.

If the load compensated algorithms according to the above do not give a reliable
solution, a less accurate, non-compensated impedance model is used to calculate
the relative distance to the fault.

16.10.7.3 The non-compensated impedance model

In the non-compensated impedance model, IA line current is used instead of IFA

fault current:

U A = p Z 1 L IA + R F IA
EQUATION109 V1 EN (Equation 112)

Where:
IA is according to table 622.

The accuracy of the distance-to-fault calculation, using the non-compensated

impedance model, is influenced by the pre-fault load current. So, this method is
only used if the load compensated models do not function.

802
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

16.10.7.4 IEC 60870-5-103

The communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 may be used to poll fault location
information from the IED to a master (that is station HSI). There are two outputs
that must be connected to appropriate inputs on the function block I103StatFltDis,
FLTDISTX gives distance to fault (reactance, according the standard) and
CALCMADE gives a pulse (100 ms) when a result is obtainable on FLTDISTX
output.

16.10.8 Technical data

Table 623: LMBRFLO technical data
Function Value or range Accuracy
Reactive and resistive reach (0.001-1500.000) /phase 2.0% static accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir

Phase selection According to input signals -

Maximum number of fault 100 -
locations

16.11 Limit counter L4UFCNT

16.11.1 Identification

16.11.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Limit counter L4UFCNT -

16.11.2 Functionality
The 12 Up limit counter L4UFCNT provides a settable counter with four
independent limits where the number of positive and/or negative flanks on the
input signal are counted against the setting values for limits. The output for each
limit is activated when the counted value reaches that limit.

Overflow indication is included for each up-counter.

803
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

16.11.3 Operation principle

Limit counter (L4UFCNT) counts the number of positive and/or negative flanks on
the binary input signal depending on the function settings. L4UFCNT also checks
if the accumulated value is equal or greater than any of its four settable limits. The
four limit outputs will be activated relatively on reach of each limit and remain
activated until the reset of the function. Moreover, the content of L4UFCNT is
stored in flash memory and will not be lost at an auxiliary power interruption.

16.11.3.1 Design

Figure 352 illustrates the general logic diagram of the function.

BLOCK

INPUT
Operation
Counter
RESET
VALUE
Overflow
CountType Detection OVERFLOW

OnMaxValue

Limit LIMIT1 4
MaxValue Check

CounterLimit1...4

Error ERROR
Detection
InitialValue

IEC12000625_1_en.vsd
IEC12000625 V1 EN

Figure 352: Logic diagram

The counter can be initialized to count from a settable non-zero value after reset of
the function. The function has also a maximum counted value check. The three
possibilities after reaching the maximum counted value are:

Stops counting and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count
Rolls over to zero and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count
Rolls over to zero and activates a pulsed overflow indication for the next count

The pulsed overflow output lasts up to the first count after rolling over to zero, as
illustrated in figure 353.

804
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

Overflow indication

Actual value ... Max value -1 Max value Max value +1 Max value +2 Max value +3 ...

Counted value ... Max value -1 Max value 0 1 2 ...

IEC12000626_1_en.vsd
IEC12000626 V1 EN

Figure 353: Overflow indication when OnMaxValue is set to rollover pulsed

The Error output is activated as an indicator of setting the counter limits and/or
initial value setting(s) greater than the maximum value. The counter stops counting
the input and all the outputs except the error output remains at zero state. The error
condition remains until the correct settings for counter limits and/or initial value
setting(s) are applied.

The function can be blocked through a block input. During the block time, input is
not counted and outputs remain in their previous states. However, the counter can
be initialized after reset of the function. In this case the outputs remain in their
initial states until the release of the block input.

16.11.3.2 Reporting

The content of the counter can be read on the local HMI.

Reset of the counter can be performed from the local HMI or via a binary input.

Reading of content and resetting of the function can also be performed remotely,
for example from a IEC 61850 client. The value can also be presented as a
measurement on the local HMI graphical display.

16.11.4 Function block

L4UFCNT
BLOCK ERROR
INPUT OVERFLOW
RESET LIMIT1
LIMIT2
LIMIT3
LIMIT4
VALUE

IEC12000029-1-en.vsd
IEC12000029 V1 EN

Figure 354: L4UFCNT function block

805
Technical Manual
Section 16 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Monitoring

16.11.5 Signals
Table 624: L4UFCNT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT BOOLEAN 0 Input for counter
RESET BOOLEAN 0 Reset of function

Table 625: L4UFCNT Output signals

Name Type Description
ERROR BOOLEAN Error indication on counter limit and/or initial
value settings
OVERFLOW BOOLEAN Overflow indication on count of greater than
MaxValue
LIMIT1 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to
CounterLimit1
LIMIT2 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to
CounterLimit2
LIMIT3 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to
CounterLimit3
LIMIT4 BOOLEAN Counted value is larger than or equal to
CounterLimit4
VALUE INTEGER Counted value

16.11.6 Settings
Table 626: L4UFCNT Group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
CountType Positive edge - - Positive edge Select counting on positive and/or
Negative edge negative flanks
Both edges
CounterLimit1 1 - 65535 - 1 100 Value of the first limit
CounterLimit2 1 - 65535 - 1 200 Value of the second limit
CounterLimit3 1 - 65535 - 1 300 Value of the third limit
CounterLimit4 1 - 65535 - 1 400 Value of the fourth limit
MaxValue 1 - 65535 - 1 500 Maximum count value
OnMaxValue Stop - - Stop Select if counter stops or rolls over after
Rollover Steady reaching maxValue with steady or
Rollover Pulsed pulsed overflow flag
InitialValue 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Initial count value after reset of the
function

806
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 16
Monitoring

16.11.7 Monitored data

Table 627: L4UFCNT Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
VALUE INTEGER - - Counted value

16.11.8 Technical data

Table 628: L4UFCNTtechnical data
Function Range or value Accuracy
Counter value 0-65535 -
Max. count up speed 30 pulses/s (50% duty cycle) -

807
Technical Manual
808
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 17
Metering

Section 17 Metering

17.1 Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT

17.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT -

S00947 V1 EN

17.1.2 Functionality
Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function counts externally generated binary pulses,
for instance pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy
consumption values. The pulses are captured by the binary input module and then
read by the PCFCNT function. A scaled service value is available over the station
bus. The special Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities
must be ordered to achieve this functionality.

17.1.3 Function block

PCFCNT
BLOCK INVALID
READ_VAL RESTART
BI_PULSE* BLOCKED
RS_CNT NEW_VAL
SCAL_VAL

IEC14000043-1-en.vsd
IEC09000335 V3 EN

Figure 355: PCFCNT function block

809
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Metering

17.1.4 Signals
Table 629: PCFCNT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
READ_VAL BOOLEAN 0 Initiates an additional pulse counter reading
BI_PULSE BOOLEAN 0 Connect binary input channel for metering
RS_CNT BOOLEAN 0 Resets pulse counter value

Table 630: PCFCNT Output signals

Name Type Description
INVALID BOOLEAN The pulse counter value is invalid
RESTART BOOLEAN The reported value does not comprise a complete
integration cycle
BLOCKED BOOLEAN The pulse counter function is blocked
NEW_VAL BOOLEAN A new pulse counter value is generated
SCAL_VAL REAL Scaled value with time and status information

17.1.5 Settings
Table 631: PCFCNT Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
EventMask NoEvents - - NoEvents Report mask for analog events from
ReportEvents pulse counter
CountCriteria Off - - RisingEdge Pulse counter criteria
RisingEdge
Falling edge
OnChange
Scale 1.000 - 90000.000 - 0.001 1.000 Scaling value for SCAL_VAL output to
unit per counted value
Quantity Count - - Count Measured quantity for SCAL_VAL output
ActivePower
ApparentPower
ReactivePower
ActiveEnergy
ApparentEnergy
ReactiveEnergy
tReporting 0 - 3600 s 1 60 Cycle time for reporting of counter value

810
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 17
Metering

17.1.6 Monitored data

Table 632: PCFCNT Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
CNT_VAL INTEGER - - Actual pulse counter
value
SCAL_VAL REAL - - Scaled value with time
and status information

17.1.7 Operation principle

The registration of pulses is done for positive transitions (0->1) on one of the 16
binary input channels located on the Binary Input Module (BIM). Pulse counter
values are sent to the station HMI with predefined cyclicity without reset.

The reporting time period can be set in the range from 1 second to 60 minutes and
is synchronized with absolute system time. Interrogation of additional pulse
counter values can be done with a command (intermediate reading) for a single
counter. All active counters can also be read by the LON General Interrogation
command (GI) or IEC 61850.

Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function in the IED supports unidirectional

incremental counters. That means only positive values are possible. The counter
uses a 32 bit format, that is, the reported value is a 32-bit, signed integer with a
range 0...+2147483647. The counter is reset at initialization of the IED.

The reported value to station HMI over the station bus contains Identity, Scaled
Value (pulse count x scale), Time, and Pulse Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter
Quality consists of:

Invalid (board hardware error or configuration error)

Wrapped around
Blocked
Adjusted

The transmission of the counter value by SPA can be done as a service value, that
is, the value frozen in the last integration cycle is read by the station HMI from the
database. PCFCNT updates the value in the database when an integration cycle is
finished and activates the NEW_VAL signal in the function block. This signal can
be connected to an Event function block, be time tagged, and transmitted to the
station HMI. This time corresponds to the time when the value was frozen by the
function.

The pulse-counter logic function requires a binary input card,

BIMp, that is specially adapted to the pulse-counter logic function.

811
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Metering

Figure 356 shows the pulse-counter logic function block with connections of the
inputs and outputs.

SingleCmdFunc PulseCounter EVENT

OUTx BLOCK
INVALID INPUT1
SingleCmdFunc Pulse RESTART INPUT2
OUTx INPUT OUT READ_VAL
Pulse length >1s BLOCKED INPUT3
I/O-module NEW_VAL INPUT4
BI_PULSE
Reset counter RS_CNT
NAME
SCAL_VAL IEC EVENT

SMS settings Database

1.Operation = Off/On Pulse counter value:
2.tReporting = 0s...60min 0...2147483647
3.Event Mask = No Events/Report Events
4.Scale = 1-90000
en05000744.vsd
IEC05000744 V1 EN

Figure 356: Overview of the pulse-counter logic function

The BLOCK and READ_VAL inputs can be connected to Single Command logics,
which are intended to be controlled either from the station HMI or/and the local
HMI. As long as the BLOCK signal is set, the pulse counter is blocked. The signal
connected to READ_VAL performs one additional reading per positive flank. The
signal must be a pulse with a length >1 second.

The BI_PULSE input is connected to the used input of the function block for the
Binary Input Module (BIM).

The RS_CNT input is used for resetting the counter.

Each pulse-counter logic function block has four binary output signals that can be
connected to an Event function block for event recording: INVALID, RESTART,
BLOCKED and NEW_VAL. The SCAL_VAL signal can be connected to the IEC
Event function block.

The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is set if the Binary Input Module,
where the pulse counter input is located, fails or has wrong configuration.

The RESTART signal is a steady signal and is set when the reported value does not
comprise a complete integration cycle. That is, in the first message after IED start-
up, in the first message after deblocking, and after the counter has wrapped around
during last integration cycle.

The BLOCKED signal is a steady signal and is set when the counter is blocked.
There are two reasons why the counter is blocked:

The BLOCK input is set, or

The Binary Input Module, where the counter input is situated, is inoperative.

812
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 17
Metering

The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the counter value was
updated since last report.

Note, the pulse is short, one cycle.

The SCAL_VAL signal consists of scaled value (according to parameter Scale),

time and status information.

17.1.8 Technical data

Table 633: PCFCNT technical data
Function Setting range Accuracy
Input frequency See Binary Input Module (BIM) -
Cycle time for report of (13600) s -
counter value

17.2 Function for energy calculation and demand

handling ETPMMTR

17.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Function for energy calculation and ETPMMTR W_Varh -
demand handling

17.2.2 Functionality
Measurements function block (CVMMXN) can be used to measure active as well
as reactive power values. Function for energy calculation and demand handling
(ETPMMTR) uses measured active and reactive power as input and calculates the
accumulated active and reactive energy pulses, in forward and reverse direction.
Energy values can be read or generated as pulses. Maximum demand power values
are also calculated by the function. This function includes zero point clamping to
remove noise from the input signal. As output of this function: periodic energy
calculations, integration of energy values, calculation of energy pulses, alarm
signals for limit violation of energy values and maximum power demand, can be
found.

The values of active and reactive energies are calculated from the input power
values by integrating them over a selected time tEnergy. The integration of active

813
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Metering

and reactive energy values will happen in both forward and reverse directions.
These energy values are available as output signals and also as pulse outputs.
Integration of energy values can be controlled by inputs (STARTACC and
STOPACC) and EnaAcc setting and it can be reset to initial values with RSTACC
input.

The maximum demand for active and reactive powers are calculated for the set
time interval tEnergy and these values are updated every minute through output
channels. The active and reactive maximum power demand values are calculated
for both forward and reverse direction and these values can be reset with RSTDMD
input.

17.2.3 Function block

ETPMMTR
P* ACCINPRG
Q* EAFPULSE
STARTACC EARPULSE
STOPACC ERFPULSE
RSTACC ERRPULSE
RSTDMD EAFALM
EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM
EAFACC
EARACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
MAXPAFD
MAXPARD
MAXPRFD
MAXPRRD

IEC14000019-1-en.vsd
IEC14000019 V1 EN

Figure 357: ETPMMTR function block

17.2.4 Signals
Table 634: ETPMMTR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
P REAL 0 Measured active power
Q REAL 0 Measured reactive power
STARTACC BOOLEAN 0 Start to accumulate energy values
STOPACC BOOLEAN 0 Stop to accumulate energy values.
RSTACC BOOLEAN 0 Reset of accumulated enery reading
RSTDMD BOOLEAN 0 Reset of maximum demand reading

814
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 17
Metering

Table 635: ETPMMTR Output signals

Name Type Description
ACCINPRG BOOLEAN Accumulation of energy values in progress
EAFPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated forward active energy pulse
EARPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated reverse active energy pulse
ERFPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated forward reactive energy pulse
ERRPULSE BOOLEAN Accumulated reverse reactive energy pulse
EAFALM BOOLEAN Alarm for active forward energy exceed limit in
set interval
EARALM BOOLEAN Alarm for active reverse energy exceed limit in
set interval
ERFALM BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive forward energy exceed limit in
set interval
ERRALM BOOLEAN Alarm for reactive reverse energy exceed limit in
set interval
EAFACC REAL Accumulated forward active energy value in Ws
EARACC REAL Accumulated reverse active energy value in Ws
ERFACC REAL Accumulated forward reactive energy value in
VArS
ERRACC REAL Accumulated reverse reactive energy value in
VArS
MAXPAFD REAL Maximum forward active power demand value for
set interval
MAXPARD REAL Maximum reverse active power demand value for
set interval
MAXPRFD REAL Maximum forward reactive power demand value
for set interval
MAXPRRD REAL Maximum reactive power demand value in
reverse direction

17.2.5 Settings
Table 636: ETPMMTR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
EnaAcc Off - - Off Activate the accumulation of energy
On values
tEnergy 1 Minute - - 1 Minute Time interval for energy calculation
5 Minutes
10 Minutes
15 Minutes
30 Minutes
60 Minutes
180 Minutes
tEnergyOnPls 0.100 - 60.000 s 0.001 1.000 Energy accumulated pulse ON time in
secs
Table continues on next page

815
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Metering

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

tEnergyOffPls 0.100 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.500 Energy accumulated pulse OFF time in
secs
EAFAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MWh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for active forward
accumulated energy value
EARAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MWh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for active reverse
accumulated energy value
ERFAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MVArh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for reactive forward
accumulated energy value
ERRAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 MVArh 0.001 100.000 Pulse quantity for reactive reverse
accumulated energy value

Table 637: ETPMMTR Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
EALim 0.001 - MWh 0.001 1000000.000 Active energy limit
10000000000.000
ERLim 0.001 - MVArh 0.001 1000.000 Reactive energy limit
10000000000.000
EnZeroClamp Off - - On Enable of zero point clamping detection
On function
LevZeroClampP 0.001 - 10000.000 MW 0.001 10.000 Zero point clamping level at active Power
LevZeroClampQ 0.001 - 10000.000 MVAr 0.001 10.000 Zero point clamping level at reactive
Power
DirEnergyAct Forward - - Forward Direction of active energy flow Forward/
Reverse Reverse
DirEnergyReac Forward - - Forward Direction of reactive energy flow Forward/
Reverse Reverse
EAFPrestVal 0.000 - MWh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for forward active
100000000.000 energy
EARPrestVal 0.000 - MWh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for reverse active
100000000.000 energy
ERFPresetVal 0.000 - MVArh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for forward reactive
100000000.000 energy
ERRPresetVal 0.000 - MVArh 0.001 0.000 Preset Initial value for reverse reactive
100000000.000 energy

17.2.6 Monitored data

Table 638: ETPMMTR Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
EAFACC REAL - MWh Accumulated forward
active energy value in Ws
EARACC REAL - MWh Accumulated reverse
active energy value in Ws
ERFACC REAL - MVArh Accumulated forward
reactive energy value in
VArS
Table continues on next page

816
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 17
Metering

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

ERRACC REAL - MVArh Accumulated reverse
reactive energy value in
VArS
MAXPAFD REAL - MW Maximum forward active
power demand value for
set interval
MAXPARD REAL - MW Maximum reverse active
power demand value for
set interval
MAXPRFD REAL - MVAr Maximum forward
reactive power demand
value for set interval
MAXPRRD REAL - MVAr Maximum reactive power
demand value in reverse
direction

17.2.7 Operation principle

The instantaneous output values of active and reactive power from the
Measurements function CVMMXN are used and integrated over a selected time
tEnergy to measure the integrated energy. Figure 358 shows the overall
functionality of the energy calculation and demand handling function ETPMMTR.
MAXPAFD
RSTDMD
MAXPARD
MAXPRFD
P
MAXPRRD
Zero Clamping Maximum Power
EAFALM
Detection Demand Calculation
Q EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM

ACCINPRG
EAFPULSE
EARPULSE
ERFPULSE
Energy Accumulation ERRPULSE
STARTACC
Calculation EAFACC
EARACC
STOPACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
RSTACC

IEC13000185-2-en.vsd
IEC13000185 V2 EN

Figure 358: ETPMMTR Functional overview logical diagram

The integration of energy values is enabled by the setting EnaAcc and controlled
by the STARTACC and STOPACC inputs. If the integration is in progress, the
output ACCINPRG is high. Otherwise, it is low. Figure 359 shows the logic of the
ACCINPRG output. ACCINPRG is active when the STARTACC input is active and
the EnaAcc setting is enabled. When the RSTACC input is in the active state, the

817
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Metering

output ACCINPRG is low even if the integration of energy is enabled. ACCINPRG

is deactivated by activating the STOPACC input.

STOPACC

FALSE
STARTACC T
1
& F ACCINPRG
EnaAcc &

q-1

RSTACC

q-1 = unit delay IEC13000186-4-en.vsd

IEC13000186 V4 EN

Figure 359: ACCINPRG Logic diagram

The accumulated energy values (in MWh and MVArh) are available as service
values and also as pulsed output depending on the ExxAccPlsQty setting, which can
be connected to a pulse counter. Accumulated energy outputs are available for
forward as well as reverse direction. The accumulated energy values can be reset to
initial accumulated energy values (ExxPrestVal) from the local HMI reset menu or
with the input signal RSTACC. Figure 360 shows the logic for integration of energy
in active forward direction. Similarly, the integration of energy in active reverse,
reactive forward and reactive reverse is done.
RSTACC

EAFPrestVal

ACCINPRG

P* (ACTIVE FORWARD)
X
S T
T EAFACC
60.0
F
F

&

q-1

EALim T

q-1 0.0 F

a
a>b
b
-1
q = unit delay
IEC13000187-4-en.vsd
IEC13000187 V4 EN

Figure 360: Logic for integration of active forward energy

818
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 17
Metering

The energy pulses generated by using internally calculated accumulated energy

values and energy per pulse (ExxAccPlsQty) setting. The accumulated energy
values are divided by the energy-per-pulse value to get the number of pulses. The
number of pulses can be reset to zero by activating RSTACC input or by using the
local HMI reset menu. The pulse on and off time duration is set by the settings
tEnergyOnPls and tEnergyOffPls. Figure 361 shows the logic for pulse output
generation for the integrated energy in the active forward direction. Similarly, the
pulse generation for integrated energy in the active reverse, reactive forward and
reactive reverse is done.
tEnergyOffPls
EAFACC

a Counter q-1
a>b CU
EALim b CV
Rst
tOff
t
R I q-1

0
X
S R I T
EAFPULSE
a TP
a>b F
b
EAFAccPlsQty 0
Counter
CU
CV
RSTACC
Rst

q-1

tEnergyOnPls

q-1 = unit delay IEC13000188-4-en.vsd

IEC13000188 V4 EN

Figure 361: Logic for pulse generation of integrated active forward energy

The maximum demand values for active and reactive power are calculated for the
set time interval tEnergy. The maximum values are updated every minute and
stored in a register available over communication and from outputs MAXPAFD,
MAXPARD, MAXPRFD and MAXPRRD for the active and reactive power forward
and reverse direction. When the RSTDMD input is active from the local HMI reset
menu, these outputs are reset to zero. The energy alarm is activated once the
periodic energy value crosses the energy limit ExLim. Figure 362 shows the logic
of alarm for active forward energy exceeds limit and Maximum forward active
power demand value. Similarly, the maximum power calculation and energy alarm
outputs in the active reverse, reactive forward and reactive reverse is implemented.

819
Technical Manual
Section 17 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Metering

P (ACTIVE FORWARD)
Average Power
X a EAFALM
tEnergy Calculation a>b
b

EALim

RSTMAXD

0.0 T MAXPAFD
MAX F

q-1
q-1 = unit delay
IEC13000189-4-en.vsd
IEC13000189 V4 EN

Figure 362: Logic for maximum power demand calculation and energy alarm

17.2.8 Technical data

17.2.8.1 Technical data

Table 639:
Function Range or value Accuracy
Energy metering MWh Export/Import, MVarh Input from MMXU. No extra
Export/Import error at steady load

820
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

Section 18 Station communication

18.1 670 series protocols

Each IED is provided with a communication interface, enabling it to connect to one

or many substation level systems or equipment, either on the Substation
Automation (SA) bus or Substation Monitoring (SM) bus.

Following communication protocols are available:

IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol
LON communication protocol
SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
DNP3.0 communication protocol

Theoretically, several protocols can be combined in the same IED.

18.2 DNP3 protocol

DNP3 (Distributed Network Protocol) is a set of communications protocols used to

communicate data between components in process automation systems. For a
detailed description of the DNP3 protocol, see the DNP3 Communication protocol
manual.

18.3 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

18.3.1 Functionality
IEC 61850 Ed.1 or Ed.2 can be chosen by a setting in PCM600. The IED is
equipped with single or double optical Ethernet rear ports (order dependent) for
IEC 61850-8-1 station bus communication. The IEC 61850-8-1 communication is
also possible from the optical Ethernet front port. IEC 61850-8-1 protocol allows
intelligent electrical devices (IEDs) from different vendors to exchange
information and simplifies system engineering. IED-to-IED communication using
GOOSE and client-server communication over MMS are supported. Disturbance
recording file (COMTRADE) uploading can be done over MMS or FTP.

821
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

18.3.2 Communication interfaces and protocols

Table 640: Supported station communication interfaces and protocols
Protocol Ethernet Serial
Glass fibre (ST
100BASE-FX LC EIA-485
connector)
IEC 6185081 - -
DNP3
IEC 60870-5-103 -
= Supported

When double Ethernet ports are activated, make sure that the two
ports are connected to different subnets. For example: Port 1 has IP-
address 138.227.102.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0 and port 2
has IP-address 138.227.103.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0

18.3.3 Settings
Table 641: IEC61850-8-1 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On
PortSelGOOSE Front - - LANAB Port selection for GOOSE communication
LANAB
LANCD
PortSelMMS Front - - Any Port selection for MMS communication
LANAB
LANCD
Any
ProtocolEdition Ed 1 - - Ed 1 Protocol Edition
Ed 2
RemoteModControl Off - - Off Remote Mode Control
Maintenance
All levels
AllowGOOSESimulation No - - No Allow enabling of GOOSE Simulation
Yes
IEC61850BufTimEnable Disabled - - Enabled Enable BRC buf time behavior
Enabled

822
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

18.3.4 Technical data

Table 642: IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol
Function Value
Protocol IEC 61850-8-1
Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX
Protocol IEC 6085103
Communication speed for the IEDs 9600 or 19200 Bd
Protocol DNP3.0
Communication speed for the IEDs 30019200 Bd
Protocol TCP/IP, Ethernet
Communication speed for the IEDs 100 Mbit/s

18.3.5 Generic communication function for Single Point indication

SPGAPC, SP16GAPC

18.3.5.1 Functionality

Generic communication function for Single Point indication SPGAPC is used to

send one single logical signal to other systems or equipment in the substation.

18.3.5.2 Function block

SPGAPC
BLOCK
^IN

IEC14000021-1-en.vsd
IEC14000021 V1 EN

Figure 363: SPGAPC function block

SP16GAPC
BLOCK
^IN1
^IN2
^IN3
^IN4
^IN5
^IN6
^IN7
^IN8
^IN9
^IN10
^IN11
^IN12
^IN13
^IN14
^IN15
^IN16

IEC14000020-1-en.vsd
IEC14000020 V1 EN

Figure 364: SP16GAPC function block

823
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

18.3.5.3 Signals
Table 643: SPGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN BOOLEAN 0 Input status

Table 644: SP16GAPC Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 status
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 status
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 status
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 status
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 status
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 status
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 status
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 status
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 status
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 status
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 status
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 status
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 status
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 status
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 status
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 status

18.3.5.4 Settings

The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

18.3.5.5 Monitored data

Table 645: SPGAPC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUT GROUP - - Output status
SIGNAL

824
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

Table 646: SP16GAPC Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
OUT1 GROUP - - Output 1 status
SIGNAL
OUT2 GROUP - - Output 2 status
SIGNAL
OUT3 GROUP - - Output 3 status
SIGNAL
OUT4 GROUP - - Output 4 status
SIGNAL
OUT5 GROUP - - Output 5 status
SIGNAL
OUT6 GROUP - - Output 6 status
SIGNAL
OUT7 GROUP - - Output 7 status
SIGNAL
OUT8 GROUP - - Output 8 status
SIGNAL
OUT9 GROUP - - Output 9 status
SIGNAL
OUT10 GROUP - - Output 10 status
SIGNAL
OUT11 GROUP - - Output 11 status
SIGNAL
OUT12 GROUP - - Output 12 status
SIGNAL
OUT13 GROUP - - Output 13 status
SIGNAL
OUT14 GROUP - - Output 14 status
SIGNAL
OUT15 GROUP - - Output 15 status
SIGNAL
OUT16 GROUP - - Output 16 status
SIGNAL
OUTOR GROUP - - Output status logic OR
SIGNAL gate for input 1 to 16

18.3.5.6 Operation principle

Upon receiving a signal at its input, Generic communication function for Single
Point indication (SPGAPC) function sends the signal over IEC 61850-8-1 to the
equipment or system that requests this signal. To get the signal, PCM600 must be
used to define which function block in which equipment or system should receive
this information.

18.3.6 Generic communication function for Measured Value

MVGAPC

825
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

18.3.6.1 Functionality

Generic communication function for Measured Value MVGAPC function is used

to send the instantaneous value of an analog signal to other systems or equipment
in the substation. It can also be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE
aspect to an analog value and to permit measurement supervision on that value.

18.3.6.2 Function block

MVGAPC
BLOCK ^VALUE
^IN RANGE

IEC14000022-1-en.vsd
IEC14000022 V1 EN

Figure 365: MVGAPC function block

18.3.6.3 Signals
Table 647: MVGAPC Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
IN REAL 0 Analog input value

Table 648: MVGAPC Output signals

Name Type Description
VALUE REAL Magnitude of deadband value
RANGE INTEGER Range

18.3.6.4 Settings
Table 649: MVGAPC Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
BasePrefix micro - - unit Base prefix (multiplication factor)
milli
unit
kilo
Mega
Giga
Tera
MV db 1 - 300 Type 1 10 Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of
range, Int Db: In %s
MV zeroDb 0 - 100000 m% 1 500 Zero point clamping in 0,001% of range
MV hhLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 900.00 High High limit multiplied with the base
prefix (multiplication factor)
MV hLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 800.00 High limit multiplied with the base prefix
(multiplication factor)
Table continues on next page

826
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

MV lLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 -800.00 Low limit multiplied with the base prefix
(multiplication factor)
MV llLim -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 -900.00 Low Low limit multiplied with the base
prefix (multiplication factor)
MV min -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 -1000.00 Minimum value multiplied with the base
prefix (multiplication factor)
MV max -5000.00 - 5000.00 xBase 0.01 1000.00 Maximum value multiplied with the base
prefix (multiplication factor)
MV dbType Cyclic - - Dead band Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
MV limHys 0.000 - 100.000 % 0.001 5.000 Hysteresis value in % of range (common
for all limits)

18.3.6.5 Monitored data

Table 650: MVGAPC Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
INSTMAGN REAL - - Magnitude of
instantaneous value
VALUE REAL - - Magnitude of deadband
value
RANGE INTEGER 1=High - Range
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low
0=Normal

18.3.6.6 Operation principle

Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, Generic communication function for
Measured Value (MVGAPC) will give the instantaneous value of the signal and the
range, as output values. In the same time, it will send over IEC 61850-8-1 the
value, to other IEC 61850 clients in the substation.

18.3.7 IEC 61850-8-1 redundant station bus communication

Function description LHMI identification IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Parallel Redundancy PRPSTATUS RCHLCCH - -
Protocol Status
Duo driver PRP - - -
configuration

827
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

18.3.7.1 Functionality

Redundant station bus communication according to IEC 62439-3 Edition 1 and

IEC 62439-3 Edition 2 are available as options in 670 series IEDs. IEC 62439-3
parallel redundant protocol is an optional quantity and the selection is made at
ordering. Redundant station bus communication according to IEC 62439-3 uses
both port AB and port CD on the OEM module.

18.3.7.2 Function block

PRPSTATUS
LAN-A-Status
LAN-B-Status

IEC09000757-1-en.vsd
IEC09000757 V1 EN

Figure 366: PRPSTATUS function block

18.3.7.3 Signals
Table 651: PRPSTATUS Output signals
Name Type Description
PRP-A LINK BOOLEAN PRP-A Link Status
PRP-A VALID BOOLEAN PRP-A Link Valid
PRP-B LINK BOOLEAN PRP-B Link Status
PRP-B VALID BOOLEAN PRP-B Link Valid

18.3.7.4 Settings
Table 652: PRP Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off / On
On
PRPMode PRP-0 - - PRP-1 PRP Mode
PRP-1
IPAddress 0 - 18 IP 1 192.168.7.10 IP-Address
Address
IPMask 0 - 18 IP 1 255.255.255.0 IP-Mask
Address

828
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

18.3.7.5 Monitored data

Table 653: PRPSTATUS Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
AB Beh INTEGER 2=Blocked - AB Link Beh
3=Test
4=Test blocked
5=Off
1=On
CD Beh INTEGER 1=On - CD Link Beh
2=Blocked
3=Test
4=Test blocked
5=Off
PRP Beh INTEGER 2=Blocked - PRP Beh
3=Test
4=Test blocked
5=Off
1=On

18.3.7.6 Principle of operation

The redundant station bus communication (DUODRV) is configured using the

local HMI. The settings for DUODRV are also visible in PST in PCM600.

The communication is performed in parallel, that is the same data package is

transmitted on both channels simultaneously. The received package identity from
one channel is compared with data package identity from the other channel, if the
same, the last package is discarded.

PRPSTATUS function block supervise the redundant communication on the two

channels. If no data package has been received on one (or both) channels within the
last 10 s, the output LAN-A-STATUS and/or LAN-B-STATUS is set to 0 which
indicate error.

829
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

Station Control System

Redundancy
Supervision

Duo

Data Data

Switch A Switch B
1 2 1 2

Data
Data

AB CD IED
Configuration OEM

DUODRV PRPSTATUS

IEC09000758-2-en.vsd
IEC09000758 V2 EN

Figure 367: Redundant station bus

830
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

18.4 IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol

18.4.1 Introduction
The IEC 61850-9-2LE process bus communication protocol enables an IED to
communicate with devices providing measured values in digital format, commonly
known as Merging Units (MU). The physical interface in the IED that is used for
the communication is the OEM modules (the two port module version) "CD" port.

18.4.2 Function block

The function blocks are not represented in the configuration tool.

The signals appear only in the SMT tool when merging units (MU)
are included in the configuration with the function selector tool. In
the SMT tool they can be mapped to the desired virtual input
(SMAI) of the IED and used internally in the configuration.

18.4.3 Signals

18.4.3.1 Output signals

Table 654: MU1_4I_4U Output signals
Name Type Description
I1 STRING Analogue input I1
I2 STRING Analogue input I2
I3 STRING Analogue input I3
I4 STRING Analogue input I4
U1 STRING Analogue input U1
U2 STRING Analogue input U2
U3 STRING Analogue input U3
U4 STRING Analogue input U4
MUDATA BOOLEAN Fatal error, serious data loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN MU clock synchronized to same clock as IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN Sample lost
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN Synchronization lost in MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN MU in test mode

831
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

Table 655: MU2_4I_4U Output signals

Name Type Description
I1 STRING Analogue input I1
I2 STRING Analogue input I2
I3 STRING Analogue input I3
I4 STRING Analogue input I4
U1 STRING Analogue input U1
U2 STRING Analogue input U2
U3 STRING Analogue input U3
U4 STRING Analogue input U4
MUDATA BOOLEAN Fatal error, serious data loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN MU clock synchronized to same clock as IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN Sample lost
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN Synchronization lost in MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN MU in test mode

Table 656: MU3_4I_4U Output signals

Name Type Description
I1 STRING Analogue input I1
I2 STRING Analogue input I2
I3 STRING Analogue input I3
I4 STRING Analogue input I4
U1 STRING Analogue input U1
U2 STRING Analogue input U2
U3 STRING Analogue input U3
U4 STRING Analogue input U4
MUDATA BOOLEAN Fatal error, serious data loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN MU clock synchronized to same clock as IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN Sample lost
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN Synchronization lost in MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN MU in test mode

Table 657: MU4_4I_4U Output signals

Name Type Description
I1 STRING Analogue input I1
I2 STRING Analogue input I2
I3 STRING Analogue input I3
I4 STRING Analogue input I4
U1 STRING Analogue input U1
Table continues on next page

832
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

Name Type Description

U2 STRING Analogue input U2
U3 STRING Analogue input U3
U4 STRING Analogue input U4
MUDATA BOOLEAN Fatal error, serious data loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN MU clock synchronized to same clock as IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN Sample lost
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN Synchronization lost in MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN MU in test mode

Table 658: MU5_4I_4U Output signals

Name Type Description
I1 STRING Analogue input I1
I2 STRING Analogue input I2
I3 STRING Analogue input I3
I4 STRING Analogue input I4
U1 STRING Analogue input U1
U2 STRING Analogue input U2
U3 STRING Analogue input U3
U4 STRING Analogue input U4
MUDATA BOOLEAN Fatal error, serious data loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN MU clock synchronized to same clock as IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN Sample lost
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN Synchronization lost in MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN MU in test mode

Table 659: MU6_4I_4U Output signals

Name Type Description
I1 STRING Analogue input I1
I2 STRING Analogue input I2
I3 STRING Analogue input I3
I4 STRING Analogue input I4
U1 STRING Analogue input U1
U2 STRING Analogue input U2
U3 STRING Analogue input U3
U4 STRING Analogue input U4
MUDATA BOOLEAN Fatal error, serious data loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN MU clock synchronized to same clock as IED
Table continues on next page

833
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

Name Type Description

SMPLLOST BOOLEAN Sample lost
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN Synchronization lost in MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN MU in test mode

18.4.4 Settings
Table 660: MU1_4I_4U Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SVId 10 - 34 - 1 ABB_MU0101 MU identifier
SmplGrp 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Sampling group
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite

Table 661: MU1_4I_4U Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SynchMode NoSynch - - Operation Synchronization mode
Init
Operation

Table 662: MU2_4I_4U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SVId 10 - 34 - 1 ABB_MU0102 MU identifier
SmplGrp 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Sampling group
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite

Table 663: MU2_4I_4U Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SynchMode NoSynch - - Operation Synchronization mode
Init
Operation

834
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

Table 664: MU3_4I_4U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SVId 10 - 34 - 1 ABB_MU0103 MU identifier
SmplGrp 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Sampling group
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite

Table 665: MU3_4I_4U Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SynchMode NoSynch - - Operation Synchronization mode
Init
Operation

Table 666: MU4_4I_4U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SVId 10 - 34 - 1 ABB_MU0104 MU identifier
SmplGrp 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Sampling group
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite

Table 667: MU4_4I_4U Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SynchMode NoSynch - - Operation Synchronization mode
Init
Operation

835
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

Table 668: MU5_4I_4U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SVId 10 - 34 - 1 ABB_MU0105 MU identifier
SmplGrp 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Sampling group
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite

Table 669: MU5_4I_4U Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SynchMode NoSynch - - Operation Synchronization mode
Init
Operation

Table 670: MU6_4I_4U Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SVId 10 - 34 - 1 ABB_MU0106 MU identifier
SmplGrp 0 - 65535 - 1 0 Sampling group
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - - ToObject ToObject= towards protected object,
ToObject FromObject= the opposite

Table 671: MU6_4I_4U Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SynchMode NoSynch - - Operation Synchronization mode
Init
Operation

836
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

18.4.5 Monitored data

Table 672: MU1_4I_4U Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MUDATA BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Fatal error, serious data
1=Error loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - MU clock synchronized
1=Error to same clock as IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Sample lost
0=No
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Synchronization lost in
1=Error MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN 1=Yes - MU in test mode
0=No

Table 673: MU2_4I_4U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MUDATA BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Fatal error, serious data
1=Error loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - MU clock synchronized
1=Error to same clock as IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Sample lost
0=No
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Synchronization lost in
1=Error MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN 1=Yes - MU in test mode
0=No

Table 674: MU3_4I_4U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MUDATA BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Fatal error, serious data
1=Error loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - MU clock synchronized
1=Error to same clock as IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Sample lost
0=No
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Synchronization lost in
1=Error MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN 1=Yes - MU in test mode
0=No

837
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

Table 675: MU4_4I_4U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MUDATA BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Fatal error, serious data
1=Error loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - MU clock synchronized
1=Error to same clock as IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Sample lost
0=No
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Synchronization lost in
1=Error MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN 1=Yes - MU in test mode
0=No

Table 676: MU5_4I_4U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MUDATA BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Fatal error, serious data
1=Error loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - MU clock synchronized
1=Error to same clock as IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Sample lost
0=No
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Synchronization lost in
1=Error MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN 1=Yes - MU in test mode
0=No

Table 677: MU6_4I_4U Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
MUDATA BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Fatal error, serious data
1=Error loss
SYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - MU clock synchronized
1=Error to same clock as IED
SMPLLOST BOOLEAN 1=Yes - Sample lost
0=No
MUSYNCH BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Synchronization lost in
1=Error MU
TESTMODE BOOLEAN 1=Yes - MU in test mode
0=No

18.4.6 Operation principle

The ABB merging units (MUs) are situated close to primary equipment, like circuit
breakers, isolators, etc. The MUs have the capability to gather measured values
from measuring transformers, non-conventional transducers or both. The gathered
data are then transmitted to subscribers over the process bus, utilizing the IEC
61850-9-2LE protocol.

838
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

ABB "physical MU" contains up to 3 logical MUs, each capable of sampling 4

currents and 4 voltages.

The IED communicates with the MUs over the process bus via the OEM module
port "CD". For the user, the MU appears in the IED as a normal analogue input
module and is engineered in the very same way.

839
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

IED

Application

Station Wide
Preprocessing blocks Preprocessing blocks GPS Clock
SMAI SMAI

MU1 MU2
Splitter
Electrical-to-
Optical Converter

1PPS
TRM module OEM Module
CD
110 V 1A 1A

IEC61850-9-2LE

Ethernet Switch

IEC61850-9-2LE

IEC61850-9-2LE

ABB ABB
1PPS 1PPS
Merging Merging
Unit Unit

Combi Combi
CT CT
Sensor Sensor

Conventional VT
en08000072-2.vsd

IEC08000072 V2 EN

Figure 368: Example of signal path for sampled analogue values from MU and
conventional CT/VT

The function has the following alarm signals:

840
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

MUDATA: Indicates when sample sequence needs to be realigned. that is the

application soon needs to be restarted. The signal is raised to 2 s before the
application is restarted.
SYNCH: Indicates that the time quality of the hardware is out of the set value
from parameter synchAccLevel (1 s, 4 s or unspecified) and the parameter
AppSynch is set to Synch. In case of AppSynch is set to NoSynch the SYNCH
output will never go high.
SMPLLOST: Indicates that more than one sample has been lost/been marked
invalid/ overflow/ been marked failed, and the sample has thereafter been
substituted. When SMPLLOST is high, protection is blocked.
MUSYNCH: Indicates that the MU connected is not synchronized. Received
from quality flag in datastream. No IED setting affects this signal.
TESTMODE: Indicates that the MU connected is in TestMode. Received from
quality flag in datastream. No IED setting affects this signal.

Timeout

TSYNCERR Indicates that there is some timeout on any configured time source or
the time quality is worse than specified in SynchAccLevel. The timeout is
individually specified per time source (PPS, IRIG-B, SNTP etc.) See section
"Time synchronization"

Blocking condition

Blocking of protection functions is indicated by (SAMPLOST is high) or

(MUSYNCH is high and AppSynch is set to Synch) or (SYNCH is high)

Application synch is not required for differential protection based on ECHO mode.
A missing PPS however will lead to a drift between MU and IED. Therefore
protection functions in this case will be blocked.

18.4.7 Technical data

Table 678: IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol
Functions Value
Protocol IEC 61850-9-2LE
Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX

18.5 LON communication protocol

18.5.1 Functionality
An optical network can be used within the substation automation system. This
enables communication with the IED through the LON bus from the operators
workplace, from the control center and also from other terminals.

841
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

LON communication protocol is specified in LonTalkProtocol Specification

Version 3 from Echelon Corporation and is designed for communication in control
networks. These networks are characterized by high speed for data transfer, short
messages (few bytes), peer-to-peer communication, multiple communication
media, low maintenance, multivendor equipment, and low support costs. LonTalk
supports the needs of applications that cover a range of requirements. The protocol
follows the reference model for open system interconnection (OSI) designed by the
International Standardization Organization (ISO).

In this document the most common addresses for commands and events are
available. For other addresses, refer to section "".

It is assumed that the reader is familiar with LON communication protocol in general.

18.5.2 Settings
Table 679: HORZCOMM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation
On

Table 680: ADE Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation
On
TimerClass Slow - - Slow Timer class
Normal
Fast
TimeDomain Local without DST - - Local with DST Time domain
Local with DST

18.5.3 Operation principle

The speed of the network depends on the medium and transceiver design. With
protection and control devices, fibre optic media is used, which enables the use of
the maximum speed of 1.25 Mbits/s. The protocol is a peer-to-peer protocol where
all the devices connected to the network can communicate with each other. The
own subnet and node number are identifying the nodes (max. 255 subnets, 127
nodes per one subnet).

The LON bus links the different parts of the protection and control system. The
measured values, status information, and event information are spontaneously sent
to the higher-level devices. The higher-level devices can read and write memorized
values, setting values, and other parameter data when required. The LON bus also
enables the bay level devices to communicate with each other to deliver, for
example, interlocking information among the terminals without the need of a bus
master.

842
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

The LonTalk protocol supports two types of application layer objects: network
variables and explicit messages. Network variables are used to deliver short
messages, such as measuring values, status information, and interlocking/blocking
signals. Explicit messages are used to transfer longer pieces of information, such as
events and explicit read and write messages to access device data.

The benefits achieved from using the LON bus in protection and control systems
include direct communication among all terminals in the system and support for
multi-master implementations. The LON bus also has an open concept, so that the
terminals can communicate with external devices using the same standard of
network variables.

Introduction of LON protocol

For more information, refer to LON bus, LonWorks Network in Protection and
Control, Users manual and Technical description.

LON protocol

Configuration of LON
LON network tool (LNT) is a multi-purpose tool for LonWorks network
configuration. All the functions required for setting up and configuring a
LonWorks network, is easily accessible on a single tool program.

Activate LON Communication

Activate LON communication in the Parameter Setting tool under Main menu/
Communication/ SLM configuration/ Rear optical LON port/ Horizontal
communication, where Operation must be set to ON.

Add LON Device Types LNT

A new device is added to LON Network Tool from the Device menu or by
installing the device from the ABB LON Device Types package for LNT 505, with
the SLDT 670 series package version 1p2 r03.

LON net address

To establish a LON connection with the 670 series IEDs, the IED has to be given a
unique net address. The net address consists of a subnet and node number. This is
accomplished with the LON Network Tool by creating one device for each IED.

Vertical communication
Vertical communication describes communication between the monitoring devices
and protection and control IEDs. This communication includes sending of changed
process data to monitoring devices as events and transfer of commands, parameter
data and disturbance recorder files. This communication is implemented using
explicit messages.

Events and indications

Events sent to the monitoring devices are using explicit messages (message code
44H) with unacknowledged transport service of the LonTalk protocol. When a
signal is changed in the IED, one message with the value, quality and time is
transmitted from terminal.

843
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

Binary events
Binary events are generated in event function blocks EVENT:1 to EVENT:20 in
the 670 series IEDs. The event function blocks have predefined LON addresses.
Table 681 shows the LON addresses to the first input on the event function blocks.
The addresses to the other inputs on the event function block are consecutive after
the first input. For example, input 15 on event block EVENT:17 has the address
1280 + 14 (15-1) = 1294.

For double indications only the first eight inputs 18 must be used. Inputs 916 can
be used for other type of events at the same event block.

As basic, three event function blocks EVENT:1 to EVENT:3 running with a fast
loop time (3 ms) is available in the 670 series IEDs. The remaining event function
blocks EVENT:4 to EVENT:9 runs with a loop time on 8 ms and EVENT:10 to
EVENT:20 runs with a loop time on 100 ms. The event blocks are used to send
binary signals, integers, real time values like analogue data from measuring
functions and mA input modules as well as pulse counter signals.

16 pulse counter value function blocks PCFCNT:1 to PCFCNT:16 and 24 mA

input service values function blocks SMMI1_In1 to 6 SMMI4_In1 to 6 are
available in the 670 series IEDs.

The first LON address in every event function block is found in table 681

Table 681: LON adresses for Event functions

Function block First LON address in
function block
EVENT:1 1024
EVENT:2 1040
EVENT:3 1056
EVENT:4 1072
EVENT:5 1088
EVENT:6 1104
EVENT:7 1120
EVENT:8 1136
EVENT:9 1152
EVENT:10 1168
EVENT:11 1184
EVENT:12 1200
EVENT:13 1216
EVENT:14 1232
EVENT:15 1248
EVENT:16 1264
EVENT:17 1280
EVENT:18 1296
EVENT:19 1312
EVENT:20 1328

844
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

Event masks
The event mask for each input can be set individually from Parameter Setting Tool
(PST) under: Settings/ General Settings/ Monitoring / EventFunction as follows:

No events
OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria
for integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)

The following type of signals from application functions can be connected to the
event function block.

Single indication
Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is
always reported on change, no changed detection is done in the event function
block. Other Boolean signals, for example a start or a trip signal from a protection
function is event masked in the event function block.

Double indications
Double indications can only be reported via switch-control (SCSWI) functions, the
event reporting is based on information from switch-control, no change detection is
done in the event function block.

Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is not
possible to handle as double indication. Double indications can only be reported for
the first 8 inputs on an event function block.

00 generates an intermediate event with the read status 0

01 generates an open event with the read status 1
10 generates a close event with the read status 2
11 generates an undefined event with the read status 3

Analog value
All analog values are reported cyclic. The reporting interval is taken from the
connected function if there is a limit supervised signal, otherwise it is taken from
the event function block.

Command handling
Commands are transferred using transparent SPA-bus messages. The transparent
SPA-bus message is an explicit LON message, which contains an ASCII character
message following the coding rules of the SPA-bus protocol. The message is sent
using explicit messages with message code 41H and using acknowledged transport
service.

Both the SPA-bus command messages (R or W) and the reply messages (D, A or
N) are sent using the same message code. It is mandatory that one device sends out

845
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

only one SPA-bus message at a time to one node and waits for the reply before
sending the next message.

For commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control, That
is, the function blocks type SCSWI 1 to 32, SXCBR 1 to 18 and SXSWI 1 to 28;
the SPA addresses are according to table 682.

Horizontal communication
Network variables are used for communication between 500 series and 670 series
IEDs. The supported network variable type is SNVT_state (NV type 83).
SNVT_state is used to communicate the state of a set of 1 to 16 Boolean values.

Multiple command send function block (MULTICMDSND) is used to pack the

information to one value. This value is transmitted to the receiving node and
presented for the application by a multiple command receive function block
(MULTICMDRCV). At horizontal communication the input BOUND on the
multiple command send function block (MULTICMDSND) must be set to 1. There
are 10 MULTICMDSND and 60 MULTICMDRCV function blocks available. The
MULTICMDSND and MULTICMDRCV function blocks are connected using
LON network tool (LNT). This tool also defines the service and addressing on LON.

This is an overview for configuring the network variables for 670 series IEDs.

Configuration of LON network variables

Configure the Network variables according to the specific application using the
LON network tool (LNT). The following is an example of how to configure
network variables concerning, for example, interlocking between two IEDs.

LON

BAY E1 BAY E3 BAY E4

MULTICMDSND: 7 MULTICMDSND: 9 MULTICMDSND: 9

en05000718.vsd
IEC05000718 V2 EN

Figure 369: Examples connections between MULTICMDSND and

MULTICMDRCV function blocks in three IEDs

The network variable connections are done from the NV Connection window.
From LNT window select Connections/ NVConnections/ New.

846
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

en05000719.vsd
IEC05000719 V1 EN

Figure 370: The network variables window in LNT

There are two ways of downloading NV connections. Either the users can use the
drag-and-drop method where they can select all nodes in the device window, drag
them to the Download area in the bottom of the program window and drop them
there; or, they can perform it by selecting the traditional menu, Configuration/
Download.

847
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

en05000720.vsd
IEC05000720 V1 EN

Figure 371: The download configuration window in LNT

Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is a mezzanine module placed on the
Main Processing Module (NUM) and is used for LON, SPA, IEC60870-5-103 and
DNP communication.

There are two types of IO connectors: 1) snap-in for plastic fibre cables, and 2) ST/
bayonet for glass fibre cables. The SLM can be equipped with either type or a
combination of both, which is identified by a tag.

Connect the incoming optical fibre to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing
optical fibre to the TX transmitter output. Pay special attention to the instructions
concerning handling and connection of fibre cables.

Table 682: SPA addresses for commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus
control
Name Function SPA Description
block address
BL_CMD SCSWI01 1 I 5115 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI02 1 I 5139 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI02 1 I 5161 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI04 1 I 5186 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI05 1 I 5210 SPA parameters for block
command
Table continues on next page

848
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
BL_CMD SCSWI06 1 I 5234 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI07 1 I 5258 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI08 1 I 5283 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI09 1 I 5307 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI10 1 I 5331 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI11 1 I 5355 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI12 1 I 5379 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI13 1 I 5403 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI14 1 I 5427 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI15 1 I 5451 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI16 1 I 5475 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI17 1 I 5499 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI18 1 I 5523 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI19 1 I 5545 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI20 1 I 5571 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI21 1 I 5594 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI22 1 I 5619 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI23 1 I 5643 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI24 1 I 5667 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI25 1 I 5691 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI26 1 I 5715 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI27 1 I 5739 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI28 1 I 5763 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI29 1 I 5787 SPA parameters for block
command
Table continues on next page

849
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
BL_CMD SCSWI30 1 I 5811 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI31 1 I 5835 SPA parameters for block
command
BL_CMD SCSWI32 1 I 5859 SPA parameters for block
command
CANCEL SCSWI01 1 I 5107 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI02 1 I 5131 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI03 1 I 5153 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI04 1 I 5178 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI05 1 I 5202 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI06 1 I 5226 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI07 1 I 5250 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI08 1 I 5275 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI09 1 I 5299 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI10 1 I 5323 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI11 1 I 5347 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI12 1 I 5371 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI13 1 I 5395 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI14 1 I 5419 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI15 1 I 5443 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI16 1 I 5467 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI17 1 I 5491 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI18 1 I 5515 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI19 1 I 5537 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI20 1 I 5563 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI21 1 I 5586 SPA parameters for cancel
command
Table continues on next page

850
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
CANCEL SCSWI22 1 I 5611 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI23 1 I 5635 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI24 1 I 5659 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI25 1 I 5683 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI26 1 I 5707 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI27 1 I 5731 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI28 1 I 5755 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI29 1 I 5779 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI30 1 I 5803 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI31 1 I 5827 SPA parameters for cancel
command
CANCEL SCSWI32 1 I 5851 SPA parameters for cancel
command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI01 1 I 5105 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, Close) command
SELOpen+ILO=10, Note: Send select command
SELClose+ILO=11, before operate command
SELOpen+SCO=20,
SELClose+SCO=21,
SELOpen+ILO+SCO=30,
SELClose+ILO+SCO=31
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI02 1 I 5129 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI03 1 I 5151 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI04 1 I 5176 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI05 1 I 5200 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI06 1 I 5224 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI07 1 I 5248 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI08 1 I 5273 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI09 1 I 5297 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI10 1 I 5321 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI11 1 I 5345 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
Table continues on next page

851
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI12 1 I 5369 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI13 1 I 5393 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI14 1 I 5417 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI15 1 I 5441 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI16 1 I 5465 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI17 1 I 5489 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI18 1 I 5513 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI19 1 I 5535 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI20 1 I 5561 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI21 1 I 5584 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI22 1 I 5609 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI23 1 I 5633 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI24 1 I 5657 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI25 1 I 5681 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI26 1 I 5705 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI27 1 I 5729 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI28 1 I 5753 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI29 1 I 5777 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI30 1 I 5801 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI31 1 I 5825 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
SELECTOpen=00, SCSWI32 1 I 5849 SPA parameters for select (Open/
SELECTClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI01 1 I 5106 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, Close) command
ExcOpen+ILO=10, Note: Send select command
ExcClose+ILO=11, before operate command
ExcOpen+SCO=20,
ExcClose+SCO=21,
ExcOpen+ILO+SCO=30,
ExcClose+ILO+SCO=31
Table continues on next page

852
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI02 1 I 5130 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI02 1 I 5152 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI04 1 I 5177 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI05 1 I 5201 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI06 1 I 5225 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI07 1 I 5249 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI08 1 I 5274 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI09 1 I 5298 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI10 1 I 5322 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI11 1 I 5346 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI12 1 I 5370 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI13 1 I 5394 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI14 1 I 5418 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI15 1 I 5442 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI16 1 I 5466 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI17 1 I 5490 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI18 1 I 5514 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI19 1 I 5536 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI20 1 I 5562 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI21 1 I 5585 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI22 1 I 5610 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI23 1 I 5634 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI24 1 I 5658 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI25 1 I 5682 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
Table continues on next page

853
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI26 1 I 5706 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI27 1 I 5730 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI28 1 I 5754 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI29 1 I 5778 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI30 1 I 5802 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI31 1 I 5826 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
ExcOpen=00, SCSWI32 1 I 5850 SPA parameters for operate (Open/
ExcClose=01, so on. Close) command
Sub Value SXCBR01 2 I 7854 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Note: Send the value before Enable
Sub Value SXCBR02 2 I 7866 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR03 2 I 7884 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR04 2 I 7904 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR05 2 I 7923 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR06 2 I 7942 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR07 2 I 7961 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR08 2 I 7980 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR09 3I7 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR10 3 I 26 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR11 3 I 45 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR12 3 I 56 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR13 3 I 74 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR14 3 I 94 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR15 3 I 120 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR16 3 I 133 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXCBR17 3 I 158 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Table continues on next page

854
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Sub Value SXCBR18 3 I 179 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI01 3 I 196 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI02 3 I 216 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI03 3 I 235 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI04 3 I 254 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI05 3 I 272 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI06 3 I 292 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI07 3 I 310 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI08 3 I 330 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI09 3 I 348 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI10 3 I 359 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI11 3 I 378 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI12 3 I 397 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI13 3 I 416 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI14 3 I 435 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI15 3 I 454 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI16 3 I 473 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI17 3 I 492 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI18 3 I 511 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI19 3 I 530 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI20 3 I 549 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI21 3 I 568 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI22 3 I 587 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI23 3 I 606 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Table continues on next page

855
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Sub Value SXSWI24 3 I 625 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI25 3 I 644 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI26 3 I 663 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI27 3 I 682 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Value SXSWI28 3 I 701 SPA parameter for position to be
substituted
Sub Enable SXCBR01 2 I 7855 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Note: Send the Value before
Enable
Sub Enable SXCBR02 2 I 7865 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR03 2 I 7885 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR04 2 I 7903 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR05 2 I 7924 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR06 2 I 7941 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR07 2 I 7962 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR08 2 I 7979 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR09 3I8 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR10 3 I 25 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR11 3 I 46 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR12 3 I 55 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR13 3 I 75 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR14 3 I 93 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR15 3 I 121 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR16 3 I 132 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR17 3 I 159 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXCBR18 3 I 178 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Table continues on next page

856
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Sub Enable SXSWI01 3 I 197 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI02 3 I 215 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI03 3 I 234 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI04 3 I 252 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI05 3 I 271 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI06 3 I 290 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI07 3 I 309 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI08 3 I 328 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI09 3 I 347 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI10 3 I 360 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI11 3I 379 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI12 3 I 398 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI13 3 I 417 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI14 3 I 436 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI15 3 I 455 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI16 3 I 474 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI17 3 I 493 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI18 3 I 512 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI19 3 I 531 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI20 3 I 550 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI21 3 I 569 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI22 3 I 588 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI23 3 I 607 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI24 3 I 626 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Table continues on next page

857
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Sub Enable SXSWI25 3 I 645 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI26 3 I 664 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI27 3 I 683 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Sub Enable SXSWI28 3 I 702 SPA parameter for substitute
enable command
Update Block SXCBR01 2 I 7853 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR02 2 I 7864 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR03 2 I 7883 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR04 2 I 7905 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR05 2 I 7922 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR06 2 I 7943 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR07 2 I 7960 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR08 2 I 7981 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR09 3I6 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR10 3 I 27 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR11 3 I 44 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR12 3 I 57 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR13 3 I 73 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR14 3 I 92 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR15 3 I 122 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR16 3 I 131 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR17 3 I 160 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXCBR18 3 I 177 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI01 3 I 198 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI02 3 I 214 SPA parameter for update block
command
Table continues on next page

858
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Update Block SXSWI03 3 I 236 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI04 3 I 253 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI05 3 I 273 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI06 3 I 291 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI07 3 I 311 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI08 3 I 329 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI09 3 I 349 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI10 3 I 358 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI11 3 I 377 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI12 3 I 396 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI13 3 I 415 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI14 3 I 434 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI15 3 I 453 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI16 3 I 472 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI17 3 I 491 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI18 3 I 510 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI19 3 I 529 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI20 3 I 548 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI21 3 I 567 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI22 3 I 586 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI23 3 I 605 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI24 3 I 624 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI25 3 I 643 SPA parameter for update block
command
Table continues on next page

859
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

Name Function SPA Description

block address
Update Block SXSWI26 3 I 662 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI27 3 I 681 SPA parameter for update block
command
Update Block SXSWI28 3 I 700 SPA parameter for update block
command

18.5.4 Technical data

Table 683: LON communication protocol
Function Value
Protocol LON
Communication speed 1.25 Mbit/s

18.6 SPA communication protocol

18.6.1 Functionality
In this section the most common addresses for commands and events are available.
For other addresses, refer to section "".

It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the SPA communication protocol in
general.

18.6.2 Design
Using the rear SPA port for either local or remote communication with a PC
requires the following equipment:

Optical fibres
Opto/electrical converter for the PC
PC

The software needed in the PC, either local or remote, is PCM600. (Note! SPA
cannot be used with PCM600 2.6).

When communicating between the local HMI and a PC, the only hardware required
is a front-connection cable. Note! SPA cannot be used from LHMI front, except for
using "FSTACCS", that is, Field Service Tool Access.

860
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

18.6.3 Settings
Table 684: SPA Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SlaveAddress 1 - 899 - 1 30 Slave address
BaudRate 300 Bd - - 9600 Bd Baudrate on serial line
1200 Bd
2400 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
38400 Bd

Table 685: LONSPA Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation
On
SlaveAddress 1 - 899 - 1 30 Slave address

18.6.4 Operation principle

The SPA bus uses an asynchronous serial communications protocol (1 start bit, 7
data bits + even parity, 1 stop bit) with data transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. For
more information on recommended baud rate for each type of IED, refer to
Technical reference manual. Messages on the bus consist of ASCII characters.

Introduction of SPA protocol

The basic construction of the protocol assumes that the slave has no self-initiated
need to talk to the master but the master is aware of the data contained in the slaves
and, consequently, can request required data. In addition, the master can send data
to the slave. Requesting by the master can be performed either by sequenced
polling (for example, for event information) or only on demand.

The master requests slave information using request messages and sends
information to the slave in write messages. Furthermore, the master can send all
slaves in common a broadcast message containing time or other data. The inactive
state of bus transmit and receive lines is a logical "1".

SPA protocol
The tables below specify the SPA addresses for reading data from and writing data
to an IED with the SPA communication protocol implemented.

The SPA addresses for the mA input service values (MIM3 to MIM16) are found
in table 686.

861
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

Table 686: SPA addresses for the MIM function

Function block SPA address
MIM3-CH1 4-O-6508
MIM3-CH2 4-O-6511
MIM3-CH3 4-O-6512
MIM3-CH4 4-O-6515
MIM3-CH5 4-O-6516
MIM3-CH6 4-O-6519
MIM4-CH1 4-O-6527
MIM4-CH2 4-O-6530
MIM4-CH3 4-O-6531
MIM4-CH4 4-O-6534
MIM4-CH5 4-O-6535
MIM4-CH6 4-O-6538
MIM5-CH1 4-O-6546
MIM5-CH2 4-O-6549
MIM5-CH3 4-O-6550
MIM5-CH4 4-O-6553
MIM5-CH5 4-O-6554
MIM5-CH6 4-O-6557
MIM6-CH1 4-O-6565
MIM6-CH2 4-O-6568
MIM6-CH3 4-O-6569
MIM6-CH4 4-O-6572
MIM6-CH5 4-O-6573
MIM6-CH6 4-O-6576
MIM7-CH1 4-O-6584
MIM7-CH2 4-O-6587
MIM7-CH3 4-O-6588
MIM7-CH4 4-O-6591
MIM7-CH5 4-O-6592
MIM7-CH6 4-O-6595
MIM8-CH1 4-O-6603
MIM8-CH2 4-O-6606
MIM8-CH3 4-O-6607
MIM8-CH4 4-O-6610
MIM8-CH5 4-O-6611
MIM8-CH6 4-O-6614
MIM9-CH1 4-O-6622
MIM9-CH2 4-O-6625
Table continues on next page

862
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

Function block SPA address

MIM9-CH3 4-O-6626
MIM9-CH4 4-O-6629
MIM9-CH5 4-O-6630
MIM9-CH6 4-O-6633
MIM10-CH1 4-O-6641
MIM10-CH2 4-O-6644
MIM10-CH3 4-O-6645
MIM10-CH4 4-O-6648
MIM10-CH5 4-O-6649
MIM10-CH6 4-O-6652
MIM11-CH1 4-O-6660
MIM11-CH2 4-O-6663
MIM11-CH3 4-O-6664
MIM11-CH4 4-O-6667
MIM11-CH5 4-O-6668
MIM11-CH6 4-O-6671
MIM12-CH1 4-O-6679
MIM12-CH2 4-O-6682
MIM12-CH3 4-O-6683
MIM12-CH4 4-O-6686
MIM12-CH5 4-O-6687
MIM12-CH6 4-O-6690
MIM13-CH1 4-O-6698
MIM13-CH2 4-O-6701
MIM13-CH3 4-O-6702
MIM13-CH4 4-O-6705
MIM13-CH5 4-O-6706
MIM13-CH6 4-O-6709
MIM14-CH1 4-O-6717
MIM14-CH2 4-O-6720
MIM14-CH3 4-O-6721
MIM14-CH4 4-O-6724
MIM14-CH5 4-O-6725
MIM14-CH6 4-O-6728
MIM15-CH1 4-O-6736
MIM15-CH2 4-O-6739
MIM15-CH3 4-O-6740
MIM15-CH4 4-O-6743
MIM15-CH5 4-O-6744
Table continues on next page

863
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

Function block SPA address

MIM15-CH6 4-O-6747
MIM16-CH1 4-O-6755
MIM16-CH2 4-O-6758
MIM16-CH3 4-O-6759
MIM16-CH4 4-O-6762
MIM16-CH5 4-O-6763
MIM16-CH6 4-O-6766

The SPA addresses for the pulse counter values PCFCNT:1 to PCFCNT:16 are
found in table 687.

Table 687: SPA addresses for the PCFCNT function

Function block SPA address CNT_VAL SPA address NEW_VAL
PCFCNT:1 6-O-2788 6-O-2787
PCFCNT:2 6-O-2794 6-O-2793
PCFCNT:3 6-O-2800 6-O-2799
PCFCNT:4 6-O-2806 6-O-2805
PCFCNT:5 6-O-2812 6-O-2811
PCFCNT:6 6-O-2818 6-O-2817
PCFCNT:7 6-O-2824 6-O-2823
PCFCNT:8 6-O-2830 6-O-2829
PCFCNT:9 6-O-2836 6-O-2835
PCFCNT:10 6-O-2842 6-O-2841
PCFCNT:11 6-O-2848 6-O-2847
PCFCNT:12 6-O-2854 6-O-2853
PCFCNT:13 6-O-2860 6-O-2859
PCFCNT:14 6-O-2866 6-O-2865
PCFCNT:15 6-O-2872 6-O-2871
PCFCNT:16 6-O-2878 6-O-2877

I/O modules
To read binary inputs, the SPA-addresses for the outputs of the I/O-module
function block are used, that is, the addresses for BI1 BI16. For SPA addresses,
refer to section Related documents in Product Guide.

Single command, 16 signals

The IEDs can be provided with a function to receive signals either from a
substation automation system or from the local HMI. That receiving function block
has 16 outputs that can be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses in
switchyards. For local control functions, the local HMI can also be used.

864
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

Single command, 16 signals function consists of three function blocks;

SINGLECMD:1 to SINGLECMD:3 for 16 binary output signals each.

The signals can be individually controlled from the operator station, remote-control
gateway, or from the local HMI on the IED. For Single command, 16 signals
function block, SINGLECMD:1 to SINGLECMD:3, the address is for the first
output. The other outputs follow consecutively after the first one. For example,
output 7 on the SINGLECMD:2 function block has the 5O533 address.

The SPA addresses for Single command, 16 signals functions SINGLECMD:1 to

SINGLECMD:3 are found in table 688.

Table 688: SPA addresses for SINGLECMD function

Function block SPA address CMD Input SPA address CMD output
SINGLECMD1-Cmd1 4-S-4639 5-O-511
SINGLECMD1-Cmd2 4-S-4640 5-O-512
SINGLECMD1-Cmd3 4-S-4641 5-O-513
SINGLECMD1-Cmd4 4-S-4642 5-O-514
SINGLECMD1-Cmd5 4-S-4643 5-O-515
SINGLECMD1-Cmd6 4-S-4644 5-O-516
SINGLECMD1-Cmd7 4-S-4645 5-O-517
SINGLECMD1-Cmd8 4-S-4646 5-O-518
SINGLECMD1-Cmd9 4-S-4647 5-O-519
SINGLECMD1-Cmd10 4-S-4648 5-O-520
SINGLECMD1-Cmd11 4-S-4649 5-O-521
SINGLECMD1-Cmd12 4-S-4650 5-O-522
SINGLECMD1-Cmdt13 4-S-4651 5-O-523
SINGLECMD1-Cmd14 4-S-4652 5-O-524
SINGLECMD1-Cmd15 4-S-4653 5-O-525
SINGLECMD1-Cmd16 4-S-4654 5-O-526
SINGLECMD2-Cmd1 4-S-4672 5-O-527
SINGLECMD2-Cmd2 4-S-4673 5-O-528
SINGLECMD2-Cmdt3 4-S-4674 5-O-529
SINGLECMD2-Cmd4 4-S-4675 5-O-530
SINGLECMD2-Cmd5 4-S-4676 5-O-531
SINGLECMD2-Cmd6 4-S-4677 5-O-532
SINGLECMD2-Cmd7 4-S-4678 5-O-533
SINGLECMD2-Cmd8 4-S-4679 5-O-534
SINGLECMD2-Cmd9 4-S-4680 5-O-535
SINGLECMD2-Cmd10 4-S-4681 5-O-536
SINGLECMD2-Cmd11 4-S-4682 5-O-537
SINGLECMD2-Cmd12 4-S-4683 5-O-538
SINGLECMD2-Cmd13 4-S-4684 5-O-539
Table continues on next page

865
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

Function block SPA address CMD Input SPA address CMD output
SINGLECMD2-Cmd14 4-S-4685 5-O-540
SINGLECMD2-Cmd15 4-S-4686 5-O-541
SINGLECMD2-Cmd16 4-S-4687 5-O-542
SINGLECMD3-Cmd1 4-S-4705 5-O-543
SINGLECMD3-Cmd2 4-S-4706 5-O-544
SINGLECMD3-Cmd3 4-S-4707 5-O-545
SINGLECMD3-Cmd4 4-S-4708 5-O-546
SINGLECMD3-Cmd5 4-S-4709 5-O-547
SINGLECMD3-Cmd6 4-S-4710 5-O-548
SINGLECMD3-Cmd7 4-S-4711 5-O-549
SINGLECMD3-Cmd8 4-S-4712 5-O-550
SINGLECMD3-Cmd9 4-S-4713 5-O-551
SINGLECMD3-Cmd10 4-S-4714 5-O-552
SINGLECMD3-Cmd11 4-S-4715 5-O-553
SINGLECMD3-Cmd12 4-S-4716 5-O-554
SINGLECMD3-Cmd13 4-S-4717 5-O-555
SINGLECMD3-Cmd14 4-S-4718 5-O-556
SINGLECMD3-Cmd15 4-S-4719 5-O-557
SINGLECMD3-Cmd16 4-S-4720 5-O-558

Figure 372 shows an application example of how the user can, in a simplified way,
connect the command function via the configuration logic circuit in a protection
IED for control of a circuit breaker.

A pulse via the binary outputs of the IED normally performs this type of command
control. The SPA addresses to control the outputs OUT1 OUT16 in SINGLECMD:
1 are shown in table 688.

866
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

SINGLECMD PULSETIMER
BLOCK ^OUT1 INPUT OUT To output board, CLOSE
^OUT2 #1.000 T
^OUT3
^OUT4
^OUT5
^OUT6
^OUT7 AND PULSETIMER
^OUT8 INPUT1 OUT INPUT OUT To output board, OPEN
INPUT2 NOUT T
^OUT9 #1.000
INPUT3
^OUT10
INPUT4N
^OUT11
^OUT12
^OUT13
^OUT14
^OUT15
^OUT16

SYNCH OK

IEC05000717-2-en.vsd
IEC05000717 V2 EN

Figure 372: Application example showing a simplified logic diagram for control
of a circuit breaker

The MODE input defines if the output signals from SINGLECMD:1 is off, steady
or pulsed signals. This is set in Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under: Setting /
General Settings / Control / Commands / Single Command.

Event function
Event function is intended to send time-tagged events to the station level (for
example, operator workplace) over the station bus. The events are there presented
in an event list. The events can be created from both internal logical signals and
binary input channels. All the internal signals are time tagged in the main
processing module, while the binary input channels are time tagged directly on
each I/O module. The events are produced according to the set event masks. The
event masks are treated commonly for both the LON and SPA channels. All events
according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to 1000
events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the oldest
event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears.

Two special signals for event registration purposes are available in the IED,
Terminal Restarted (0E50) and Event buffer overflow (0E51).

The input parameters can be set individually from the Parameter Setting Tool
(PST) under: Setting / General Setting / Monitoring / Event Function as follows:

No events
OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria
for integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)

The Status and event codes for the Event functions are found in table 689.

867
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

Table 689: Status and event codes

Single indication1) Double indication

Event block Status Set event Reset Intermedi Closed 10 Open 01 Undefined
event ate 00 11
EVENT:1
Input 1 22O1 22E33 22E32 22E0 22E1 22E2 22E3
Input 2 22O2 22E35 22E34 22E4 22E5 22E6 22E7
Input 3 22O3 22E37 22E36 22E8 22E9 22E10 22E11
Input 4 22O4 22E39 22E38 22E12 22E13 22E14 22E15
Input 5 22O5 22E41 22E40 22E16 22E17 22E18 22E19
Input 6 22O6 22E43 22E42 22E20 22E21 22E22 22E23
Input 7 22O7 22E45 22E44 22E24 22E25 22E26 22E27
Input 8 22O8 22E47 22E46 22E28 22E29 22E30 22E31
Input 9 22O9 22E49 22E48 - - - -
Input 10 22O10 22E51 22E50 - - - -
Input 11 22O11 22E53 22E52 - - - -
Input 12 22O12 22E55 22E54 - - - -
Input 13 22O13 22E57 22E56 - - - -
Input 14 22O14 22E59 22E58 - - - -
Input 15 22O15 22E61 22E60 - - - -
Input 16 22O16 22E63 22E62 - - - -

EVENT:2 230.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E.. 23E..

EVENT:3 240.. 24E.. 24E.. 24E.. 23E.. 24E.. 24E..
- - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - -
EVENT:20 410.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E.. 41E..

These values are only applicable if the Event mask is masked OFF.

Connection of signals as events

Signals coming from different protection and control functions and must be sent as
events to the station level over the SPA-bus (or LON-bus) are connected to the
Event function block according to figure 373.
EVENT
Block BLOCK
ILRANG ^INPUT1
PSTO ^INPUT2
UL12RANG ^INPUT3
UL23RANG ^INPUT4
UL31RANG ^INPUT5
3I0RANG ^INPUT6
3U0RANG ^INPUT7
FALSE ^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
^INPUT11
^INPUT12
^INPUT13
^INPUT14
^INPUT15
^INPUT16

IEC07000065-2-en.vsd
IEC07000065 V2 EN

Figure 373: Connection of protection signals for event handling

868
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

18.6.4.1 Communication ports

The serial communication module (SLM) is a mezzanine module placed on the

analog/digital conversion module (ADM) and is used for LON, SPA,
IEC60870-5-103, or DNP communication.

There are two types of IO connectors: 1) snap-in for plastic fibre cables and 2) ST/
bayonet for glass fibre cables. The SLM can be equipped with either type or a
combination of both, which is identified by a tag.

Connect the incoming optical fibre to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing
optical fibre to the TX transmitter output. Pay special attention to the instructions
concerning handling and connection of fibre cables.

For setting the transfer rate (baud rate) and slave number, please refer to the
Application Manual and Commissioning Manual respectively.

18.6.5 Technical data

Table 690: SPA communication protocol
Function Value
Protocol SPA
Communication speed 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400
Bd
Slave number 1 to 899

18.7 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

18.7.1 Introduction
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection IED
communicates with a third party control or monitoring system. This system must
have software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.

18.7.2 Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS

18.7.2.1 Functionality

103MEAS is a function block that reports all valid measuring types depending on
connected signals.

The set of connected input will control which ASDUs (Application Service Data
Units) are generated.

869
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

9 Will be generated if at least IL1 is connected. IL2, IL3, UL1, UL2, UL3, P,
Q, F are optional but there can be no holes.
3.4 Will be generated if IN and UN are present.
3.3 Will be generated if IL2, Ul1L2, P and Q present.
3.2 Will be generated if IL2, UL1L2 and P or Q missing.
3.1 Will be generated if IL2 present and IL1 missing (otherwise IL2 in 9).

Description for I103MEAS function block:

9 = IL1
3.4 = IN AND UN
3.3 = IL2 AND UL1L2 AND P AND Q
3.2 = IL2 AND UL1L2 AND NOT 3.3
3.1 = IL2 AND NOT ( 3.2 OR 3.3 OR 9)

18.7.2.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS - -

18.7.2.3 Function block

I103MEAS
BLOCK
IL1
IL2
IL3
IN
UL1
UL2
UL3
UL1L2
UN
P
Q
F

IEC10000287-1-en.vsd
IEC10000287 V1 EN

Figure 374: I103MEAS function block

18.7.2.4 Signals
Table 691: I103MEAS Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of service value reporting
IL1 REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase L1
IL2 REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase L2
IL3 REAL 0.0 Service value for current phase L3
Table continues on next page

870
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

Name Type Default Description

IN REAL 0.0 Service value for residual current IN
UL1 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase L1
UL2 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase L2
UL3 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase L3
UL1L2 REAL 0.0 Service value for voltage phase-phase L1-L2
UN REAL 0.0 Service value for residual voltage UN
P REAL 0.0 Service value for active power
Q REAL 0.0 Service value for reactive power
F REAL 0.0 Service value for system frequency

18.7.2.5 Settings
Table 692: I103MEAS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
MaxIL1 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase L1
MaxIL2 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase L2
MaxIL3 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum current phase L3
MaxIN 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Maximum residual current IN
MaxUL1 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum voltage for phase L1
MaxUL2 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum voltage for phase L2
MaxUL3 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum voltage for phase L3
MaxUL1-UL2 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Maximum voltage for phase-phase L1-L2
MaxUN 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 230.00 Maximum residual voltage UN
MaxP 0.00 - 2000.00 MW 0.05 1200.00 Maximum value for active power
MaxQ 0.00 - 2000.00 MVAr 0.05 1200.00 Maximum value for reactive power
MaxF 45.0 - 66.0 Hz 1.0 51.0 Maximum system frequency

18.7.3 Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103

I103MEASUSR

18.7.3.1 Functionality

I103MEASUSR is a function block with user defined input measurands in monitor

direction. These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each
block in the private range, and the Information number parameter for each block.

871
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

18.7.3.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Measurands user defined signals for I103MEASUSR - -
IEC 60870-5-103

18.7.3.3 Function block

I103MEASUSR
BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9

IEC10000288-1-en.vsd
IEC10000288 V1 EN

Figure 375: I103MEASUSR function block

18.7.3.4 Signals
Table 693: I103MEASUSR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of service value reporting
INPUT1 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 1
INPUT2 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 2
INPUT3 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 3
INPUT4 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 4
INPUT5 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 5
INPUT6 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 6
INPUT7 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 7
INPUT8 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 8
INPUT9 REAL 0.0 Service value for measurement on input 9

872
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

18.7.3.5 Settings
Table 694: I103MEASUSR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 25 Function type (1-255)
InfNo 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for measurands
(1-255)
MaxMeasur1 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 1
MaxMeasur2 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 2
MaxMeasur3 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 3
MaxMeasur4 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 4
MaxMeasur5 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 5
MaxMeasur6 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 6
MaxMeasur7 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 7
MaxMeasur8 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 8
MaxMeasur9 0.05 - - 0.05 1000.00 Maximum value for measurement on
10000000000.00 input 9

18.7.4 Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 I103AR

18.7.4.1 Functionality

I103AR is a function block with defined functions for autorecloser indications in

monitor direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the
information number parameter is defined for each output signal.

18.7.4.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Function status auto-recloser for IEC I103AR - -
60870-5-103

873
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

18.7.4.3 Function block

I103AR
BLOCK
16_ARACT
128_CBON
130_BLKD

IEC10000289-2-en.vsd
IEC10000289 V2 EN

Figure 376: I103AR function block

18.7.4.4 Signals
Table 695: I103AR Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
16_ARACT BOOLEAN 0 Information number 16, auto-recloser active
128_CBON BOOLEAN 0 Information number 128, circuit breaker on by auto-
recloser
130_BLKD BOOLEAN 0 Information number 130, auto-recloser blocked

18.7.4.5 Settings
Table 696: I103AR Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

18.7.5 Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF

18.7.5.1 Functionality

I103EF is a function block with defined functions for earth fault indications in
monitor direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the
information number parameter is defined for each output signal.

18.7.5.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Function status earth-fault for IEC I103EF - -
60870-5-103

874
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

18.7.5.3 Function block

I103EF
BLOCK
51_EFFW
52_EFREV

IEC10000290-1-en.vsd
IEC10000290 V1 EN

Figure 377: I103EF function block

18.7.5.4 Signals
Table 697: I103EF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
51_EFFW BOOLEAN 0 Information number 51, earth-fault forward
52_EFREV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 52, earth-fault reverse

18.7.5.5 Settings
Table 698: I103EF Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 160 Function type (1-255)

18.7.6 Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103

I103FLTPROT

18.7.6.1 Functionality

I103FLTPROT is used for fault indications in monitor direction. Each input on the
function block is specific for a certain fault type and therefore must be connected to
a correspondent signal present in the configuration. For example: 68_TRGEN
represents the General Trip of the device, and therefore must be connected to the
general trip signal SMPPTRC_TRIP or equivalent.

The delay observed in the protocol is the time difference in between the signal that
is triggering the Disturbance Recorder and the respective configured signal to the
IEC 60870-5-103 I103FLTPROT.

18.7.6.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Function status fault protection for IEC I103FLTPROT - -
60870-5-103

875
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

18.7.6.3 Function block

I103FLTPROT
BLOCK
64_STL1
65_STL2
66_STL3
67_STIN
68_TRGEN
69_TRL1
70_TRL2
71_TRL3
72_TRBKUP
73_SCL
74_FW
75_REV
76_TRANS
77_RECEV
78_ZONE1
79_ZONE2
80_ZONE3
81_ZONE4
82_ZONE5
84_STGEN
85_BFP
86_MTRL1
87_MTRL2
88_MTRL3
89_MTRN
90_IOC
91_IOC
92_IEF
93_IEF
ARINPROG
FLTLOC

IEC10000291-1-en.vsd
IEC10000291 V1 EN

Figure 378: I103FLTPROT function block

18.7.6.4 Signals
Table 699: I103FLTPROT Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting.
64_STL1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 64, start phase L1
65_STL2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 65, start phase L2
66_STL3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 66, start phase L3
67_STIN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 67, start residual current IN
68_TRGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 68, trip general
69_TRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 69, trip phase L1
70_TRL2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 70, trip phase L2
71_TRL3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 71, trip phase L3
72_TRBKUP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 72, back up trip I>>
73_SCL REAL 0 Information number 73, fault location in ohm
74_FW BOOLEAN 0 Information number 74, forward/line
75_REV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 75, reverse/busbar
Table continues on next page

876
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

Name Type Default Description

76_TRANS BOOLEAN 0 Information number 76, signal transmitted
77_RECEV BOOLEAN 0 Information number 77, signal received
78_ZONE1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 78, zone 1
79_ZONE2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 79, zone 2
80_ZONE3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 80, zone 3
81_ZONE4 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 81, zone 4
82_ZONE5 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 82, zone 5
84_STGEN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 84, start general
85_BFP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 85, breaker failure
86_MTRL1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 86, trip measuring system
phase L1
87_MTRL2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 87, trip measuring system
phase L2
88_MTRL3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 88, trip measuring system
phase L3
89_MTRN BOOLEAN 0 Information number 89, trip measuring system
neutral N
90_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 90, over current trip, stage low
91_IOC BOOLEAN 0 Information number 91, over current trip, stage high
92_IEF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 92, earth-fault trip, stage low
93_IEF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 93, earth-fault trip, stage high
ARINPROG BOOLEAN 0 Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)
FLTLOC BOOLEAN 0 Faultlocator faultlocation valid (LMBRFLO-
CALCMADE)

18.7.6.5 Settings
Table 700: I103FLTPROT Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 128 Function type (1-255)

18.7.7 IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED

18.7.7.1 Functionality

I103IED is a function block with defined IED functions in monitor direction. This
block uses parameter as FunctionType, and information number parameter is
defined for each input signal.

877
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

18.7.7.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED - -

18.7.7.3 Function block

I103IED
BLOCK
19_LEDRS
21_TESTM
22_SETCH
23_GRP1
24_GRP2
25_GRP3
26_GRP4

IEC10000292-2-en.vsd
IEC10000292 V2 EN

Figure 379: I103IED function block

18.7.7.4 Signals
Table 701: I103IED Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
19_LEDRS BOOLEAN 0 Information number 19, reset LEDs
21_TESTM BOOLEAN 0 Information number 21, test mode is active
22_SETCH BOOLEAN 0 Information number 22, setting changed
23_GRP1 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 23, setting group 1 is active
24_GRP2 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 24, setting group 2 is active
25_GRP3 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 25, setting group 3 is active
26_GRP4 BOOLEAN 0 Information number 26, setting group 4 is active

18.7.7.5 Settings
Table 702: I103IED Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

878
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

18.7.8 Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV

18.7.8.1 Functionality

I103SUPERV is a function block with defined functions for supervision indications

in monitor direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the
information number parameter is defined for each output signal.

18.7.8.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV - -

18.7.8.3 Function block

I103SUPERV
BLOCK
32_MEASI
33_MEASU
37_IBKUP
38_VTFF
46_GRWA
47_GRAL

IEC10000293-1-en.vsd
IEC10000293 V1 EN

Figure 380: I103SUPERV function block

18.7.8.4 Signals
Table 703: I103SUPERV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
32_MEASI BOOLEAN 0 Information number 32, measurand supervision of
I
33_MEASU BOOLEAN 0 Information number 33, measurand supervision of
U
37_IBKUP BOOLEAN 0 Information number 37, I high-high back-up
protection
38_VTFF BOOLEAN 0 Information number 38, fuse failure VT
46_GRWA BOOLEAN 0 Information number 46, group warning
47_GRAL BOOLEAN 0 Information number 47, group alarm

879
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

18.7.8.5 Settings
Table 704: I103SUPERV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

18.7.9 Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103

I103USRDEF

18.7.9.1 Functionality

I103USRDEF is a function blocks with user defined input signals in monitor

direction. These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each
block in the private range, and the information number parameter for each input
signal.

GUID-391D4145-B7E6-4174-B3F7-753ADDA4D06F V1 EN

Figure 381:

18.7.9.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Status for user defiend signals for IEC I103USRDEF - -
60870-5-103

880
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

18.7.9.3 Function block

I103USRDEF
BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8

IEC10000294-1-en.vsd
IEC10000294 V1 EN

Figure 382: I103USRDEF function block

18.7.9.4 Signals
Table 705: I103USRDEF Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of status reporting
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal Input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary signal input 8

18.7.9.5 Settings
Table 706: I103USRDEF Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 5 Function type (1-255)
InfNo_1 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for binary input 1
(1-255)
InfNo_2 1 - 255 - 1 2 Information number for binary input 2
(1-255)
InfNo_3 1 - 255 - 1 3 Information number for binary input 3
(1-255)
InfNo_4 1 - 255 - 1 4 Information number for binary input 4
(1-255)
InfNo_5 1 - 255 - 1 5 Information number for binary input 5
(1-255)
Table continues on next page

881
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

InfNo_6 1 - 255 - 1 6 Information number for binary input 6
(1-255)
InfNo_7 1 - 255 - 1 7 Information number for binary input 7
(1-255)
InfNo_8 1 - 255 - 1 8 Information number for binary input 8
(1-255)

18.7.10 Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD

18.7.10.1 Functionality

I103CMD is a command function block in control direction with pre-defined

output signals. The signals are in steady state, not pulsed, and stored in the IED in
case of restart.

18.7.10.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Function commands for IEC I103CMD - -
60870-5-103

18.7.10.3 Function block

I103CMD
BLOCK 16-AR
17-DIFF
18-PROT

IEC10000282-1-en.vsd
IEC10000282 V1 EN

Figure 383: I103CMD function block

18.7.10.4 Signals
Table 707: I103CMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands

Table 708: I103CMD Output signals

Name Type Description
16-AR BOOLEAN Information number 16, off/on of autorecloser
17-DIFF BOOLEAN Information number 17, block of differential
protection
18-PROT BOOLEAN Information number 18, block of protection

882
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

18.7.10.5 Settings
Table 709: I103CMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)

18.7.11 IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD

18.7.11.1 Functionality

I103IEDCMD is a command block in control direction with defined IED functions.

All outputs are pulsed and they are NOT stored. Pulse-time is a hidden parameter.

18.7.11.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD - -

18.7.11.3 Function block

I103IEDCMD
BLOCK 19-LEDRS
23-GRP1
24-GRP2
25-GRP3
26-GRP4

IEC10000283-1-en.vsd
IEC10000283 V1 EN

Figure 384: I103IEDCMD function block

18.7.11.4 Signals
Table 710: I103IEDCMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands

Table 711: I103IEDCMD Output signals

Name Type Description
19-LEDRS BOOLEAN Information number 19, reset LEDs
23-GRP1 BOOLEAN Information number 23, activate setting group 1
24-GRP2 BOOLEAN Information number 24, activate setting group 2
25-GRP3 BOOLEAN Information number 25, activate setting group 3
26-GRP4 BOOLEAN Information number 26, activate setting group 4

883
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

18.7.11.5 Settings
Table 712: I103IEDCMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 255 Function type (1-255)

18.7.12 Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103

I103USRCMD

18.7.12.1 Functionality

I103USRCMD is a command block in control direction with user defined output

signals. These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block
in the private range, and the Information number parameter for each output signal.

18.7.12.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Function commands user defined for I103USRCMD - -
IEC 60870-5-103

18.7.12.3 Function block

I103USRCMD
BLOCK ^OUTPUT1
^OUTPUT2
^OUTPUT3
^OUTPUT4
^OUTPUT5
^OUTPUT6
^OUTPUT7
^OUTPUT8

IEC10000284-1-en.vsd
IEC10000284 V1 EN

Figure 385: I103USRCMD function block

18.7.12.4 Signals
Table 713: I103USRCMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of commands

884
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

Table 714: I103USRCMD Output signals

Name Type Description
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Command output 1
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Command output 2
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Command output 3
OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Command output 4
OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Command output 5
OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Command output 6
OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Command output 7
OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Command output 8

18.7.12.5 Settings
Table 715: I103USRCMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
PulseMode Steady - - Pulsed Pulse mode
Pulsed
PulseLength 0.200 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Pulse length
InfNo_1 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for output 1 (1-255)
InfNo_2 1 - 255 - 1 2 Information number for output 2 (1-255)
InfNo_3 1 - 255 - 1 3 Information number for output 3 (1-255)
InfNo_4 1 - 255 - 1 4 Information number for output 4 (1-255)
InfNo_5 1 - 255 - 1 5 Information number for output 5 (1-255)
InfNo_6 1 - 255 - 1 6 Information number for output 6 (1-255)
InfNo_7 1 - 255 - 1 7 Information number for output 7 (1-255)
InfNo_8 1 - 255 - 1 8 Information number for output 8 (1-255)

18.7.13 Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103

I103GENCMD

18.7.13.1 Functionality

I103GENCMD is used for transmitting generic commands over IEC 60870-5-103.

The function has two outputs signals CMD_OFF and CMD_ON that can be used to
implement double-point command schemes.

The I103GENCMD component can be configured as either 2 pulsed ON/OFF or 2

steady ON/OFF outputs. The ON output is pulsed with a command with value 2,
while the OFF output is pulsed with a command value 1. If in steady mode is ON
asserted and OFF deasserted with command 2 and vice versa with command 1.

885
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

Steady mode is selected by setting PulseLength=0. The I103GENCMD is retained,

and a command in steady mode will be reissued on restart.

18.7.13.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
Function commands generic for IEC I103GENCMD - -
60870-5-103

18.7.13.3 Function block

I103GENCMD
BLOCK ^CMD_OFF
^CMD_ON

IEC10000285-1-en.vsd
IEC10000285 V1 EN

Figure 386: I103GENCMD function block

18.7.13.4 Signals
Table 716: I103GENCMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of command

Table 717: I103GENCMD Output signals

Name Type Description
CMD_OFF BOOLEAN Command output OFF
CMD_ON BOOLEAN Command output ON

18.7.13.5 Settings
Table 718: I103GENCMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Function type (1-255)
PulseLength 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.400 Pulse length
InfNo 1 - 255 - 1 1 Information number for command output
(1-255)

886
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

18.7.14 IED commands with position and select for IEC

60870-5-103 I103POSCMD

18.7.14.1 Functionality

I103POSCMD has double-point position indicators that are getting the position
value as an integer (for example from the POSITION output of the SCSWI
function block) and sending it over IEC 60870-5-103 (1=OPEN; 2=CLOSE). The
standard does not define the use of values 0 and 3. However, when connected to a
switching device, these values are transmitted.

The BLOCK input will block only the signals in monitoring direction (the position
information), not the commands via IEC 60870-5-103. The SELECT input is used
to indicate that the monitored apparatus has been selected (in a select-before-
operate type of control)

18.7.14.2 Identification
Function description Function block IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
name identification device number
IED commands with position and select I103POSCMD - -
for IEC 60870-5-103

18.7.14.3 Function block

I103POSCMD
BLOCK
POSITION
SELECT

IEC10000286-1-en.vsd
IEC10000286 V1 EN

Figure 387: I103POSCMD function block

18.7.14.4 Signals
Table 719: I103POSCMD Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of command
POSITION INTEGER 0 Position of controllable object
SELECT BOOLEAN 0 Select of controllable object

887
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

18.7.14.5 Settings
Table 720: I103POSCMD Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FunctionType 1 - 255 - 1 1 Fucntion type (1-255)
InfNo 160 - 196 - 4 160 Information number for command output
(1-255)

18.7.15 Operation principle

18.7.15.1 General

IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial

communication exchanging information with a control system, and with a data
transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. In IEC terminology, a primary station is a master
and a secondary station is a slave. The communication is based on a point-to-point
principle. The master must have software that can interpret IEC 60870-5-103
communication messages.

Introduction to IEC 608705103 protocol

IEC 60870-5-103 protocol functionality consists of the following functions:

Event handling
Report of analog service values (measurements)
Fault location
Command handling
Autorecloser ON/OFF
Teleprotection ON/OFF
Protection ON/OFF
LED reset
Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups)
File transfer (disturbance files)
Time synchronization

For detailed information about IEC 60870-5-103, refer to the IEC 60870 standard
part 5: Transmission protocols, and to the section 103: Companion standard for the
informative interface of protection equipment.

IEC 60870-5-103 vendor specific implementation

The signal and setting tables specify the information types supported by the IEDs
with the communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 implemented.

The information types are supported when corresponding functions are included in
the protection and control IED.

888
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

Be aware of that different cycle times for function blocks must be

considered to ensure correct time stamping.

Commands in control direction

Commands in control direction, I103IEDCMD
Command block in control direction with defined output signals.

Number of instances: 1

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.

Information number is defined for each output signals.

Table 721: I103IEDCMD supported indications

INF Description
19 LED Reset
23 Activate setting group 1
24 Activate setting group 2
25 Activate setting group 3
26 Activate setting group 4

Function commands in control direction, pre-defined I103CMD

Function command block in control direction with defined output signals.

Number of instances: 1

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.

Information number is defined for each output signals.

Table 722: Pre-defined I103CMD supported indications

INF Description
16 Auto-recloser on/off
17 Teleprotection on/off
18 Protection on/off

Function commands in control direction, user-defined, I103UserCMD

Function command blocks in control direction with user-defined output signals.

Number of instances: 4

Function type for each function block instance in private range is selected with
parameter FunctionType.

Information number must be selected for each output signal. Default values are 1 - 8.

889
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

Table 723: I103UserCMD supported indications

INF Description
11) Output signal 01

2* Output signal 02
3* Output signal 03
4* Output signal 04
5* Output signal 05
6* Output signal 06
7* Output signal 07
8* Output signal 08

1) * User defined information number

Status
Terminal status indications in monitor direction, I103IED
Indication block for status in monitor direction with defined IED functions.

Number of instances: 1

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.

Information number is defined for each input signals.

Table 724: I103IED supported functions

INF Description
19 LED reset
21 TestMode
22 Local Parameter setting
23 Setting group 1 active
24 Setting group 2 active
25 Setting group 3 active
26 Setting group 4 active

Function status indications in monitor direction, user-defined, I103UserDef

Function indication blocks in monitor direction with user-defined input signals.

Number of instances: 20

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType for each function block
instance in private range.

Information number is required for each input signal. Default values are defined in
range 1 - 8.

890
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

Table 725: I103UserDef supported indications

INF Description
11) Input signal 01

2* Input signal 02
3* Input signal 03
4* Input signal 04
5* Input signal 05
6* Input signal 06
7* Input signal 07
8* Input signal 08

1) * User defined information number

Supervision indications in monitor direction, I103SUPERV

Indication block for supervision in monitor direction with defined functions.

Number of instances: 1

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.

Information number is defined for output signals.

Table 726: I103SUPERV supported functions

INF Description TYP GI COT
32 Measurand supervision I 1 Y 1,7,9
33 Measurand supervision U 1 Y 1,7,9
37 I>>back-up operation 1 Y 1,7,9
38 VT fuse failure 1 Y 1,7,9
46 Group warning 1 Y 1,7,9
47 Group alarm 1 Y 1,7,9

Earth fault indications in monitor direction, I103EF

Indication block for earth fault in monitor direction with defined functions.

Number of instances: 1

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.

Information number is defined for each output signal.

Table 727: I103EF supported indications

INF Description
51 Earth fault forward
52 Earth fault reverse

891
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

Fault indications in monitor direction, type 1, I103FltDis

Fault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions.

The instance type is suitable for distance protection function.

FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block.

INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal.

Number of instances: 1
Info. no. Message Supported
64 Start L1 Yes
65 Start L2 Yes
66 Start L3 Yes
67 Start IN Yes
84 General start Yes
69 Trip L1 Yes
70 Trip L2 Yes
71 Trip L3 Yes
68 General trip Yes
74 Fault forward/line Yes
75 Fault reverse/busbar Yes
78 Zone 1 Yes
79 Zone 2 Yes
80 Zone 3 Yes
81 Zone 4 Yes
82 Zone 5 Yes
76 Signal transmitted Yes
77 Signal received Yes
73 SCL, Fault location in ohm Yes

Fault indications in monitor direction, type 2, I103FltStd

Fault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions.

The instance type is suitable for line differential, transformer differential,

overcurrent and earth fault protection functions.

FUNCTION TYPE setting for each block.

INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal.

Number of instances: 1

892
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

Info. no. Message Supported

64 Start L1 Yes
65 Start L2 Yes
66 Start L3 Yes
67 Start IN Yes
84 General start Yes
69 Trip L1 Yes
70 Trip L2 Yes
71 Trip L3 Yes
68 General trip Yes
74 Fault forward/line Yes
75 Fault reverse/busbar Yes
85 Breaker failure Yes
86 Trip measuring system L1 Yes
87 Trip measuring system L2 Yes
88 Trip measuring system L3 Yes
89 Trip measuring system N Yes
90 Over current trip I> Yes
91 Over current trip I>> Yes
92 Earth fault trip IN> Yes
93 Earth fault trip IN>> Yes

Autorecloser indications in monitor direction, I103AR

Indication block for autorecloser in monitor direction with defined functions.

Number of instances: 1

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.

Information number is defined for each output signal.

Table 728: I103AR supported indications

INF Description
16 Autorecloser active
128 CB on by Autorecloser
130 Autorecloser blocked

Measurands
Function blocks in monitor direction for input measurands. Typically connected to
monitoring function, for example to power measurement CVMMXN.

Measurands in public range, I103MEAS

Number of instances: 1

893
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

The IED reports all valid measuring types depending on connected signals.

Upper limit for measured currents, active/reactive-power is 2.4 times rated value.

Upper limit for measured voltages and frequency is 1.2 times rated value.

The upper limit is the maximum value that can be encoded into the ASDU
(Application Service Data Unit). Any value higher than this value will be tagged as
OVERFLOW. The factors 1.2 and 2.4 are taken from the 103 standard and require
that a rated value to use as base exists, and then use 1.2 or 2.4 times <rated> as
maxVal. You can use 2.4 times rated as maxVal, but as there is no way to propagate
value to client, the use of a scale factor on <rated> does not make much difference.

You can configure client:client-scaled-max ::= 1.2 * <rated> or

client-scaled-max ::= 1.0 * <maxVal>

If the client has a hard-coded gain of 1.2 * <rated> then client-scaled-

max ::= 1.2 times <maxVal>/1.2

Resolution is <maxVal> / 4095 and hence the lowest possible maxVal yields the
best accuracy.

Table 729: I103MEAS supported indications

INF Description
148 IL1
144, 145, IL2
146, 148
148 IL3
147 IN, Neutral current
148 UL1
148 UL2
148 UL3
145, 146 UL1-UL2
147 UN, Neutral voltage
146, 148 P, active power
146, 148 Q, reactive power
148 f, frequency

Measurands in private range, I103MeasUsr

Number of instances: 3

Function type parameter for each block in private range.

Information number must be selected for measurands.

894
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

Table 730: I103MeasUsr supported indications

INF FUN GI TYP COT Description
*1) *2) No, polled *3) 2,7 Meas1
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas2
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas3
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas4
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas5
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas6
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas7
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas8
with CL2
* * No, polled * 2,7 Meas9
with CL2

1) * User defined information value (PARAM.3)

2) * User defined information value (PARAM.2)
3) 9 = Measurands II, Format = Measurand II (7.3.1.8 in IEC 60870-5-103:1997), semantics per IE is
defined by semantics of connected source.

<Number of information elements> is defined by index of first input not connected.

Example: Input1, Input2, and Input4 are connected, Input3 is not connected.

<Number of information elements> will be 3 (Input3 NOT connected) -1 = 2, that

is, only Input1 and Input2 will be transmitted.

Disturbance recordings
The following elements are used in the ASDUs (Application Service Data Units)
defined in the standard.

Analog signals, 40-channels: the channel number for each channel has to be
specified. Channels used in the public range are 1 to 8 and with:

IL1 connected to channel 1 on disturbance function block A1RADR

IL2 connected to channel 2 on disturbance function block A1RADR
IL3 connected to channel 3 on disturbance function block A1RADR
IN connected to channel 4 on disturbance function block A1RADR
UL1E connected to channel 5 on disturbance function block A1RADR
UL2E connected to channel 6 on disturbance function block A1RADR
UL3E connected to channel 7 on disturbance function block A1RADR
UEN connected to channel 8 on disturbance function block A1RADR

895
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

Channel number used for the remaining 32 analog signals are numbers in the
private range 64 to 95.

Binary signals, 96-channels: for each channel the user can specify a FUNCTION
TYPE and an INFORMATION NUMBER.

Disturbance upload

All analog and binary signals that are recorded with disturbance recorder can be
reported to the master. The last eight disturbances that are recorded are available
for transfer to the master. A successfully transferred disturbance (acknowledged by
the master) will not be reported to the master again.

When a new disturbance is recorded by the IED a list of available recorded

disturbances will be sent to the master, an updated list of available disturbances can
be sent whenever something has happened to disturbances in this list. For example,
when a disturbance is deleted (by other client, for example, SPA) or when a new
disturbance has been recorded or when the master has uploaded a disturbance.

Deviations from the standard

Information sent in the disturbance upload is specified by the standard; however,

some of the information are adapted to information available in disturbance
recorder in 670 series.

This section describes all data that is not exactly as specified in the standard.

ASDU23

In list of recorded disturbances (ASDU23) an information element named SOF

(status of fault) exists. This information element consists of 4 bits and indicates
whether:

Bit TP: the protection equipment has tripped during the fault
Bit TM: the disturbance data are currently being transmitted
Bit TEST: the disturbance data have been recorded during normal operation or
test mode.
Bit OTEV: the disturbance data recording has been initiated by another event
than start

The only information that is easily available is test-mode status. The other
information is always set (hard coded) to:

TP Recorded fault with trip. [1]

TM Disturbance data waiting for transmission [0]
OTEV Disturbance data initiated by other events [1]

Another information element in ASDU23 is the FAN (fault number). According to

the standard this is a number that is incremented when a protection function takes

896
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

action. In 670 series FAN is equal to disturbance number, which is incremented for
each disturbance.

ASDU26 / ASDU31

When a disturbance has been selected by the master by sending ASDU24, the
protection equipment answers by sending ASDU26, which contains an information
element named NOF (number of grid faults). This number must indicate fault
number in the power system,that is, a fault in the power system with several trip
and auto-reclosing has the same NOF (while the FAN must be incremented). NOF
is in 670 series, just as FAN, equal to disturbance number.

Interoperability, physical layer

Supported
Electrical Interface
EIA RS-485 No
number of loads No
Optical interface
glass fibre Yes
plastic fibre
Transmission speed
9600 bit/s Yes
19200 bit/s Yes
Link Layer
DFC-bit used Yes
Connectors
connector F-SMA No
connector BFOC/2.5 Yes

Interoperability, application layer

Supported
Selection of standard ASDUs in monitoring direction
ASDU Yes
1 Time-tagged message Yes
2 Time-tagged message with rel. time Yes
3 Measurands I Yes
4 Time-tagged message with rel. time Yes
5 Identification Yes
6 Time synchronization Yes
8 End of general interrogation Yes
9 Measurands II Yes
10 Generic data No
Table continues on next page

897
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

Supported
11 Generic identification No
23 List of recorded disturbances Yes
26 Ready for transm. of disturbance data Yes
27 Ready for transm. of a channel Yes
28 Ready for transm of tags Yes
29 Transmission of tags Yes
30 Transmission fo disturbance data Yes
31 End of transmission Yes
Selection of standard ASDUs in control direction
ASDU Yes
6 Time synchronization Yes
7 General interrogation Yes
10 Generic data No
20 General command Yes
21 Generic command No
24 Order for disturbance data transmission Yes
25 Acknowledgement for distance data transmission Yes
Selection of basic application functions
Test mode No
Blocking of monitoring direction Yes
Disturbance data Yes
Private data Yes
Generic services No

18.7.15.2 Communication ports

The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP

and LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed
on the Analog/Digital conversion module (ADM). The serial communication
module can have connectors for two plastic fibre cables (snap-in) or two glass fibre
cables (ST, bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fibre. Three different
types are available depending on type of fibre.

The incoming optical fibre is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing
optical fibre to the TX transmitter output. When the fibre optic cables are laid out,
pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling and connection of
the optical fibres. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.

898
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

18.7.16 Technical data

Table 731: IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
Function Value
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103
Communication speed 9600, 19200 Bd

18.8 Horizontal communication via GOOSE for

interlocking GOOSEINTLKRCV

18.8.1 Functionality
GOOSE communication can be used for exchanging information between IEDs via
the IEC 61850-8-1 station communication bus. This is typically used for sending
apparatus position indications for interlocking or reservation signals for 1-of-n
control. GOOSE can also be used to exchange any boolean, integer, double point
and analog measured values between IEDs.

899
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

18.8.2 Function block

GOOSEINTLKRCV
BLOCK ^RESREQ
^RESGRANT
^APP1_OP
^APP1_CL
APP1VAL
^APP2_OP
^APP2_CL
APP2VAL
^APP3_OP
^APP3_CL
APP3VAL
^APP4_OP
^APP4_CL
APP4VAL
^APP5_OP
^APP5_CL
APP5VAL
^APP6_OP
^APP6_CL
APP6VAL
^APP7_OP
^APP7_CL
APP7VAL
^APP8_OP
^APP8_CL
APP8VAL
^APP9_OP
^APP9_CL
APP9VAL
^APP10_OP
^APP10_CL
APP10VAL
^APP11_OP
^APP11_CL
APP11VAL
^APP12_OP
^APP12_CL
APP12VAL
^APP13_OP
^APP13_CL
APP13VAL
^APP14_OP
^APP14_CL
APP14VAL
^APP15_OP
^APP15_CL
APP15VAL
COM_VAL

IEC07000048-2-en.vsd
IEC07000048 V2 EN

Figure 388: GOOSEINTLKRCV function block

18.8.3 Signals
Table 732: GOOSEINTLKRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals

900
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

Table 733: GOOSEINTLKRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
RESREQ BOOLEAN Reservation request
RESGRANT BOOLEAN Reservation granted
APP1_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is open
APP1_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is closed
APP1VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 1 position is valid
APP2_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 2 position is open
APP2_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 2 position is closed
APP2VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 2 position is valid
APP3_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 3 position is open
APP3_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 3 position is closed
APP3VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 3 position is valid
APP4_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 4 position is open
APP4_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 4 position is closed
APP4VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 4 position is valid
APP5_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 5 position is open
APP5_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 5 position is closed
APP5VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 5 position is valid
APP6_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is open
APP6_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is closed
APP6VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 6 position is valid
APP7_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is open
APP7_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is closed
APP7VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 7 position is valid
APP8_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is open
APP8_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is closed
APP8VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 8 position is valid
APP9_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is open
APP9_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is closed
APP9VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 9 position is valid
APP10_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is open
APP10_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is closed
APP10VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 10 position is valid
APP11_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is open
APP11_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is closed
APP11VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 11 position is valid
APP12_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 12 position is open
APP12_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 12 position is closed
APP12VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 12 position is valid
Table continues on next page

901
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

Name Type Description

APP13_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 13 position is open
APP13_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 13 position is closed
APP13VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 13 position is valid
APP14_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 14 position is open
APP14_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 14 position is closed
APP14VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 14 position is valid
APP15_OP BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is open
APP15_CL BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is closed
APP15VAL BOOLEAN Apparatus 15 position is valid
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication Valid
TEST BOOLEAN Test Output

18.8.4 Settings
Table 734: GOOSEINTLKRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

902
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

18.9 Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV

18.9.1 Function block

GOOSEBINRCV
BLOCK ^OUT1
OUT1VAL
^OUT2
OUT2VAL
^OUT3
OUT3VAL
^OUT4
OUT4VAL
^OUT5
OUT5VAL
^OUT6
OUT6VAL
^OUT7
OUT7VAL
^OUT8
OUT8VAL
^OUT9
OUT9VAL
^OUT10
OUT10VAL
^OUT11
OUT11VAL
^OUT12
OUT12VAL
^OUT13
OUT13VAL
^OUT14
OUT14VAL
^OUT15
OUT15VAL
^OUT16
OUT16VAL

IEC07000047-2-en.vsd
IEC07000047 V2 EN

Figure 389: GOOSEBINRCV function block

18.9.2 Signals
Table 735: GOOSEBINRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of output signals

Table 736: GOOSEBINRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
OUT1 BOOLEAN Binary output 1
DVALID1 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 1
OUT2 BOOLEAN Binary output 2
DVALID2 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 2
OUT3 BOOLEAN Binary output 3
DVALID3 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 3
Table continues on next page

903
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

Name Type Description

OUT4 BOOLEAN Binary output 4
DVALID4 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 4
OUT5 BOOLEAN Binary output 5
DVALID5 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 5
OUT6 BOOLEAN Binary output 6
DVALID6 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 6
OUT7 BOOLEAN Binary output 7
DVALID7 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 7
OUT8 BOOLEAN Binary output 8
DVALID8 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 8
OUT9 BOOLEAN Binary output 9
DVALID9 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 9
OUT10 BOOLEAN Binary output 10
DVALID10 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 10
OUT11 BOOLEAN Binary output 11
DVALID11 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 11
OUT12 BOOLEAN Binary output 12
DVALID12 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 12
OUT13 BOOLEAN Binary output 13
DVALID13 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 13
OUT14 BOOLEAN Binary output 14
DVALID14 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 14
OUT15 BOOLEAN Binary output 15
DVALID15 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 15
OUT16 BOOLEAN Binary output 16
DVALID16 BOOLEAN Valid data on binary output 16
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication Valid
TEST BOOLEAN Test Output

18.9.3 Settings
Table 737: GOOSEBINRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

904
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

18.10 GOOSE function block to receive a double point

value GOOSEDPRCV

18.10.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSEDPRCV - -
double point value

18.10.2 Functionality
GOOSEDPRCV is used to receive a double point value using IEC61850 protocol
via GOOSE.

18.10.3 Function block

GOOSEDPRCV
BLOCK ^DPOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000249-1-en.vsd
IEC10000249 V1 EN

Figure 390: GOOSEDPRCV function block

18.10.4 Signals
Table 738: GOOSEDPRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 739: GOOSEDPRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
DPOUT INTEGER Double point output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for double point output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for double point output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

905
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

18.10.5 Settings
Table 740: GOOSEDPRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

18.10.6 Operation principle

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means

of a cross to receive the double point values.

The implementation for IEC61850 quality data handling is

restricted to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then
the DATAVALID output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is
INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD
DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.

18.11 GOOSE function block to receive an integer value

GOOSEINTRCV

18.11.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive an GOOSEINTRCV - -
integer value

18.11.2 Functionality
GOOSEINTRCV is used to receive an integer value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.

906
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

18.11.3 Function block

GOOSEINTRCV
BLOCK ^INTOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000250-1-en.vsd
IEC10000250 V1 EN

Figure 391: GOOSEINTRCV function block

18.11.4 Signals
Table 741: GOOSEINTRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 742: GOOSEINTRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
INTOUT INTEGER Integer output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for integer output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for integer output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

18.11.5 Settings
Table 743: GOOSEINTRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

18.11.6 Operation principle

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means

of a cross to receive the integer values.

907
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

The implementation for IEC61850 quality data handling is

restricted to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then
the DATAVALID output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is
INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD
DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.

18.12 GOOSE function block to receive a measurand

value GOOSEMVRCV

18.12.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSEMVRCV - -
measurand value

18.12.2 Functionality
GOOSEMVRCV is used to receive measured value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.

18.12.3 Function block

GOOSEMVRCV
BLOCK ^MVOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000251-1-en.vsd
IEC10000251 V1 EN

Figure 392: GOOSEMVRCV function block

18.12.4 Signals
Table 744: GOOSEMVRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

908
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

Table 745: GOOSEMVRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
MVOUT REAL Measurand value output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for measurand value output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for measurand value output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

18.12.5 Settings
Table 746: GOOSEMVRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

18.12.6 Operation principle

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means

of a cross to receive the float values.

The implementation for IEC61850 quality data handling is

restricted to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then
the DATAVALID output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is
INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD
DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.

18.13 GOOSE function block to receive a single point

value GOOSESPRCV

18.13.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE function block to receive a GOOSESPRCV - -
single point value

909
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

18.13.2 Functionality
GOOSESPRCV is used to receive a single point value using IEC61850 protocol
via GOOSE.

18.13.3 Function block

GOOSESPRCV
BLOCK ^SPOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000248-1-en.vsd
IEC10000248 V1 EN

Figure 393: GOOSESPRCV function block

18.13.4 Signals
Table 747: GOOSESPRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

Table 748: GOOSESPRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
SPOUT BOOLEAN Single point output
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for single point output
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for single point output
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

18.13.5 Settings
Table 749: GOOSESPRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - Off Operation Off/On
On

18.13.6 Operation principle

The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.

The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.

The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.

910
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means

of a cross to receive the binary single point values.

The implementation for IEC61850 quality data handling is

restricted to a simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then
the DATAVALID output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is
INVALID, QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD
DATA then the DATAVALID output will be LOW.

18.14 GOOSE VCTR configuration for send and receive

GOOSEVCTRCONF

18.14.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE VCTR configuration for send GOOSEVCTRC - -
and receive ONF

18.14.2 Functionality
GOOSEVCTRCONF function is used to control the rate (in seconds) at which
voltage control information from TR8ATCC is transmitted/received to/from other
IEDs via GOOSE communication. GOOSEVCTRCONF function is visible in PST.

The following voltage control information can be sent from TR8ATCC via
GOOSE communication:
BusV
LoadAIm
LoadARe
PosRel
SetV
VCTRStatus
X2

911
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

18.14.3 Settings
Table 750: GOOSEVCTRCONF Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SendOperation Off - - On Send operation
On
SendInterval 0.1 - 5.0 s 0.1 0.3 Send interval
ReceiveOperation Off - - On Receive operation
On
ReceiveInterval 0.1 - 10.0 s 0.1 0.8 Receive interval

18.15 GOOSE voltage control receiving block

GOOSEVCTRRCV

18.15.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
GOOSE voltage control receiving block GOOSEVCTRR - -
CV

18.15.2 Functionality
GOOSEVCTRRCV component receives the voltage control data from GOOSE
network at the user defined rate.

This component also checks the received data validity, communication validity and
test mode. Communication validity will be checked upon the rate of data reception.
Data validity also depends upon the communication. If communication is invalid
then data validity will also be invalid. IEC 61850 also checks for data validity
using internal parameters which will also be passed to the DATAVALID output.

18.15.3 Function block

GOOSEVCTRRCV
BLOCK VCTR_RCV
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST

IEC10000252-1-en.vsd
IEC10000252 V1 EN

Figure 394: GOOSEVCTRRCV function block

912
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

18.15.4 Signals
Table 751: GOOSEVCTRRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block function

Table 752: GOOSEVCTRRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
VCTR_RCV GROUP SIGNAL Output group connection to voltage control
DATAVALID BOOLEAN Data valid for output signals
COMMVALID BOOLEAN Communication valid for output signals
TEST BOOLEAN Test output

18.16 MULTICMDRCV and MULTICMDSND

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Multiple command and receive MULTICMDRCV - -
Multiple command and send MULTICMDSND - -

18.16.1 Functionality
The IED provides two function blocks enabling several IEDs to send and receive
signals via the interbay bus. The sending function block, MULTICMDSND, takes
16 binary inputs. LON enables these to be transmitted to the equivalent receiving
function block, MULTICMDRCV, which has 16 binary outputs.

18.16.2 Design

18.16.2.1 General

The common behavior for all 16 outputs of the MULTICMDRCV is set to either of
two modes: Steady or Pulse.

1 = Steady: This mode simply forwards the received signals to the binary outputs.
2 = Pulse: When a received signal transitions from 0 (zero) to 1 (one), a pulse
with a duration of exactly one execution cycle is triggered on the
corresponding binary output. This means that no connected function block
may have a cycle time that is higher than the execution cycle time of the
particular MULTICMDRCV instance.

913
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

18.16.3 Function block

MULTICMDRCV
BLOCK ERROR
NEWDATA
OUTPUT1
OUTPUT2
OUTPUT3
OUTPUT4
OUTPUT5
OUTPUT6
OUTPUT7
OUTPUT8
OUTPUT9
OUTPUT10
OUTPUT11
OUTPUT12
OUTPUT13
OUTPUT14
OUTPUT15
OUTPUT16
VALID

IEC06000007-2-en.vsd
IEC06000007 V2 EN

Figure 395: MULTICMDRCV function block

MULTICMDSND
BLOCK ERROR
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16

IEC06000008-2-en.vsd
IEC06000008 V2 EN

Figure 396: MULTICMDSND function block

18.16.4 Signals
Table 753: MULTICMDRCV Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function

914
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

Table 754: MULTICMDSND Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block of function
INPUT1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1
INPUT2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2
INPUT3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3
INPUT4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4
INPUT5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5
INPUT6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6
INPUT7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7
INPUT8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8
INPUT9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9
INPUT10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10
INPUT11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11
INPUT12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12
INPUT13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13
INPUT14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14
INPUT15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15
INPUT16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16

Table 755: MULTICMDRCV Output signals

Name Type Description
ERROR BOOLEAN MultiReceive error
NEWDATA BOOLEAN New data is received
OUTPUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1
OUTPUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2
OUTPUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3
OUTPUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4
OUTPUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5
OUTPUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6
OUTPUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7
OUTPUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8
OUTPUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9
OUTPUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10
OUTPUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11
OUTPUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12
OUTPUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13
OUTPUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14
OUTPUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15
OUTPUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16
VALID BOOLEAN Output data is valid

915
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

Table 756: MULTICMDSND Output signals

Name Type Description
ERROR BOOLEAN MultiSend error

18.16.5 Settings
Table 757: MULTICMDRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tMaxCycleTime 0.050 - 200.000 s 0.001 11.000 Maximum cycle time between receptions
of input data
tMinCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum cycle time between receptions
of input data
Mode Steady - - Steady Mode for output signals
Pulsed
tPulseTime 0.000 - 60.000 s 0.001 0.200 Pulse length for multi command outputs

Table 758: MULTICMDSND Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
tMaxCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 s 0.001 5.000 Maximum time interval between
transmission of output data
tMinCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 s 0.001 0.000 Minimum time interval between
transmission of output data

18.16.6 Operation principle

There are 10 instances of the MULTICMDSND function block. The first two are
fast (8 ms cycle time) while the others are slow (100 ms cycle time). Each instance
has 16 binary inputs, to which 16 independent signals can be connected. Connected
signals are sent through MULTICMDSND to the receiving equivalent,
MULTICMDRCV, located on a different IED.

The MULTICMDRCV function block has 16 binary outputs, all controlled through
the command block of one or many MULTICMDSND function blocks. There are
60 instances of the MULTICMDRCV where the first 12 are fast (8 ms), and the
others are slow (100 ms). Additionally, the MULTICMDRCV has a supervision
function, which sets the output connector "VALID" to 0 (zero) if its block does not
receive any data within the time defined by tMaxCycleTime.

LON connections are established using LON network tool (LNT).

916
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 18
Station communication

18.17 Security events on protocols SECALARM

18.17.1 Security alarm SECALARM

18.17.1.1 Signals
Table 759: SECALARM Output signals
Name Type Description
EVENTID INTEGER EventId of the generated security event
SEQNUMBER INTEGER Sequence number of the generated security event

18.17.1.2 Settings
Table 760: SECALARM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation On/Off
On

18.18 Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG

18.18.1 Activity logging ACTIVLOG

ACTIVLOG contains all settings for activity logging.

There can be 6 external log servers to send syslog events to. Each server can be
configured with IP address; IP port number and protocol format. The format can be
either syslog (RFC 5424) or Common Event Format (CEF) from ArcSight.

18.18.2 Settings
Table 761: ACTIVLOG Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ExtLogSrv1Type Off - - Off External log server 1 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv1Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 1 port number
ExtLogSrv1IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 1 IP-address
Address
ExtLogSrv2Type Off - - Off External log server 2 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Table continues on next page

917
Technical Manual
Section 18 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Station communication

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ExtLogSrv2Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 2 port number
ExtLogSrv2IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 2 IP-address
Address
ExtLogSrv3Type Off - - Off External log server 3 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv3Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 3 port number
ExtLogSrv3IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 3 IP-address
Address
ExtLogSrv4Type Off - - Off External log server 4 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv4Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 4 port number
ExtLogSrv4IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 4 IP-address
Address
ExtLogSrv5Type Off - - Off External log server 5 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv5Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 5 port number
ExtLogSrv5IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 5 IP-address
Address
ExtLogSrv6Type Off - - Off External log server 6 type
SYSLOG UDP/IP
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
ExtLogSrv6Port 1 - 65535 - 1 514 External log server 6 port number
ExtLogSrv6IP 0 - 18 IP 1 127.0.0.1 External log server 6 IP-address
Address

918
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 19
Remote communication

Section 19 Remote communication

19.1 Binary signal transfer

19.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Binary signal transfer BinSignReceive - -
Binary signal transfer BinSignTransm - -

19.1.2 Functionality
The remote end data communication is used either for the transmission of current
values together with maximum 8 binary signals in the line differential protection,
or for transmission of only binary signals, up to 192 signals, in the other 670 series
IEDs. The binary signals are freely configurable and can, thus, be used for any
purpose, for example, communication scheme related signals, transfer trip and/or
other binary signals between IEDs.

Communication between two IEDs requires that each IED is equipped with an
LDCM (Line Data Communication Module). The LDCMs are then interfaces to a
64 kbit/s communication channel for duplex communication between the IEDs.

The IED can be equipped with up to two short range or medium range LDCM.

919
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Remote communication

19.1.3 Function block

LDCMRecBinStat1
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
REMCOMF
LOWLEVEL

IEC07000043-2-en.vsd

IEC07000043 V2 EN

LDCMRecBinStat2
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
TRDELERR
SYNCERR
REMCOMF
REMGPSER
SUBSTITU
LOWLEVEL

IEC07000044-2-en.vsd
IEC07000044 V2 EN

Figure 397: LDCMRecBinStat function blocks

LDCMRecBinStat3
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
TRDELERR
SYNCERR
REMCOMF
REMGPSER
SUBSTITU
LOWLEVEL

IEC05000451-2-en.vsd
IEC05000451 V2 EN

Figure 398: LDCMRecBinStat function block

19.1.4 Signals
Table 762: LDCMRecBinStat1 Output signals
Name Type Description
COMFAIL BOOLEAN Detected error in the differential communication
YBIT BOOLEAN Detected error in remote end with incoming
message
NOCARR BOOLEAN No carrier is detected in the incoming message
Table continues on next page

920
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 19
Remote communication

Name Type Description

NOMESS BOOLEAN No start and stop flags identified for the incoming
message
ADDRERR BOOLEAN Incoming message from non-valid address
LNGTHERR BOOLEAN Wrong length of the incoming message
CRCERROR BOOLEAN Identified error by CRC check in incoming message
REMCOMF BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates problem with received
message
LOWLEVEL BOOLEAN Low signal level on the receive link

Table 763: LDCMRecBinStat2 Output signals

Name Type Description
CH1 STRING Remote communication channel 1
CH2 STRING Remote communication channel 2
CH3 STRING Remote communication channel 3
CH4 STRING Remote communication channel 4
COMFAIL BOOLEAN Detected error in the differential communication
YBIT BOOLEAN Detected error in remote end with incoming
message
NOCARR BOOLEAN No carrier is detected in the incoming message
NOMESS BOOLEAN No start and stop flags identified for the incoming
message
ADDRERR BOOLEAN Incoming message from non-valid address
LNGTHERR BOOLEAN Wrong length of the incoming message
CRCERROR BOOLEAN Identified error by CRC check in incoming message
TRDELERR BOOLEAN Transmission time is longer than permitted
SYNCERR BOOLEAN Error in echo synchronization
REMCOMF BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates problem with received
message
REMGPSER BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS
synchronization
SUBSTITU BOOLEAN Link error, values are substituted
LOWLEVEL BOOLEAN Low signal level on the receive link

Table 764: LDCMRecBinStat3 Output signals

Name Type Description
CH1 STRING Remote communication channel 1
CH2 STRING Remote communication channel 2
CH3 STRING Remote communication channel 3
CH4 STRING Remote communication channel 4
COMFAIL BOOLEAN Detected error in the differential communication
Table continues on next page

921
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Remote communication

Name Type Description

YBIT BOOLEAN Detected error in remote end with incoming
message
NOCARR BOOLEAN No carrier is detected in the incoming message
NOMESS BOOLEAN No start and stop flags identified for the incoming
message
ADDRERR BOOLEAN Incoming message from non-valid address
LNGTHERR BOOLEAN Wrong length of the incoming message
CRCERROR BOOLEAN Identified error by CRC check in incoming message
TRDELERR BOOLEAN Transmission time is longer than permitted
SYNCERR BOOLEAN Error in echo synchronization
REMCOMF BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates problem with received
message
REMGPSER BOOLEAN Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS
synchronization
SUBSTITU BOOLEAN Link error, values are substituted
LOWLEVEL BOOLEAN Low signal level on the receive link

19.1.5 Settings
Table 765: LDCMRecBinStat1 Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ChannelMode Blocked - - Normal Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON,
Normal 2=OutOfService
OutOfService
TerminalNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number used for line differential
communication
RemoteTermNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number on remote terminal
CommSync Slave - - Slave Com Synchronization mode of LDCM,
Master 0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower LowPower - - LowPower Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low,
HighPower 1=High
ComFailAlrmDel 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before communication error
signal is activated
ComFailResDel 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Reset delay before communication error
signal is reset
InvertPolX21 Off - - Off Invert polarization for X21 communication
On

922
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 19
Remote communication

Table 766: LDCMRecBinStat2 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ChannelMode Blocked - - Normal Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON,
Normal 2=OutOfService
OutOfService
TerminalNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number used for line differential
communication
RemoteTermNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number on remote terminal
DiffSync Echo - - Echo Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM,
GPS 0=ECHO, 1=GPS
GPSSyncErr Block - - Block Operation mode when GPS
Echo synchroniation signal is lost
CommSync Slave - - Slave Com Synchronization mode of LDCM,
Master 0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower LowPower - - LowPower Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low,
HighPower 1=High
TransmCurr CT-GRP1 - - CT-GRP1 Summation mode for transmitted current
CT-GRP2 values
CT-SUM
CT-DIFF1
CT-DIFF2
ComFailAlrmDel 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before communication error
signal is activated
ComFailResDel 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Reset delay before communication error
signal is reset
RedChSwTime 5 - 500 ms 5 5 Time delay before switching in
redundant channel
RedChRturnTime 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before switching back from
redundant channel
AsymDelay -20.00 - 20.00 ms 0.01 0.00 Asymmetric delay when communication
use echo synch.
AnalogLatency 2 - 20 - 1 2 Latency between local analogue data
and transmitted
remAinLatency 2 - 20 - 1 2 Analog latency of remote terminal
MaxTransmDelay 0 - 40 ms 1 20 Max allowed transmission delay
CompRange 0-10kA - - 0-25kA Compression range
0-25kA
0-50kA
0-150kA
MaxtDiffLevel 200 - 2000 us 1 600 Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up
DeadbandtDiff 200 - 1000 us 1 300 Deadband for t Diff
InvertPolX21 Off - - Off Invert polarization for X21 communication
On

923
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Remote communication

Table 767: LDCMRecBinStat3 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ChannelMode Blocked - - Normal Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON,
Normal 2=OutOfService
OutOfService
TerminalNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number used for line differential
communication
RemoteTermNo 0 - 255 - 1 0 Terminal number on remote terminal
DiffSync Echo - - Echo Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM,
GPS 0=ECHO, 1=GPS
GPSSyncErr Block - - Block Operation mode when GPS
Echo synchroniation signal is lost
CommSync Slave - - Slave Com Synchronization mode of LDCM,
Master 0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower LowPower - - LowPower Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low,
HighPower 1=High
TransmCurr CT-GRP1 - - CT-GRP1 Summation mode for transmitted current
CT-GRP2 values
CT-SUM
CT-DIFF1
CT-DIFF2
RedundantChannel
ComFailAlrmDel 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before communication error
signal is activated
ComFailResDel 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Reset delay before communication error
signal is reset
RedChSwTime 5 - 500 ms 5 5 Time delay before switching in
redundant channel
RedChRturnTime 5 - 500 ms 5 100 Time delay before switching back from
redundant channel
AsymDelay -20.00 - 20.00 ms 0.01 0.00 Asymmetric delay when communication
use echo synch.
AnalogLatency 2 - 20 - 1 2 Latency between local analogue data
and transmitted
remAinLatency 2 - 20 - 1 2 Analog latency of remote terminal
MaxTransmDelay 0 - 40 ms 1 20 Max allowed transmission delay
CompRange 0-10kA - - 0-25kA Compression range
0-25kA
0-50kA
0-150kA
MaxtDiffLevel 200 - 2000 us 1 600 Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up
DeadbandtDiff 200 - 1000 us 1 300 Deadband for t Diff
InvertPolX21 Off - - Off Invert polarization for X21 communication
On

924
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 19
Remote communication

19.1.6 Monitored data

Table 768: LDCMRecBinStat1 Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
NoOfShInterr BOOLEAN - - Number of short
communication
interruptions
NoOfMedInterr BOOLEAN - - Number of medium
communication
interruptions
NoOfLongInterr BOOLEAN - - Number of long
communication
interruptions
CommStatus BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Status of communication
1=SyncErr link
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err
NoOfTXD BOOLEAN - - Percentage of
theroretical possible
transmitted message
NoOfRXD BOOLEAN - - Percentage of
theroretical possible
received message
RxAddress INTEGER - - Address of received
packets
ConfAddress INTEGER - - Configured receive
address

Table 769: LDCMRecBinStat2 Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TransmDelay REAL - - Transmission delay, for
echo half loop time, GPS
actual
NoOfShInterr BOOLEAN - - Number of short
communication
interruptions
NoOfMedInterr BOOLEAN - - Number of medium
communication
interruptions
NoOfLongInterr BOOLEAN - - Number of long
communication
interruptions
Table continues on next page

925
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Remote communication

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

CommStatus BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Status of communication
1=SyncErr link
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err
NoOfTXD BOOLEAN - - Percentage of
theroretical possible
transmitted message
NoOfRXD BOOLEAN - - Percentage of
theroretical possible
received message
AsymDelay REAL - - Different transmission
delays between the two
directions
RxAddress INTEGER - - Address of received
packets
ConfAddress INTEGER - - Configured receive
address

Table 770: LDCMRecBinStat3 Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TransmDelay REAL - - Transmission delay, for
echo half loop time, GPS
actual
NoOfShInterr BOOLEAN - - Number of short
communication
interruptions
NoOfMedInterr BOOLEAN - - Number of medium
communication
interruptions
NoOfLongInterr BOOLEAN - - Number of long
communication
interruptions
Table continues on next page

926
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 19
Remote communication

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

CommStatus BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Status of communication
1=SyncErr link
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err
NoOfTXD BOOLEAN - - Percentage of
theroretical possible
transmitted message
NoOfRXD BOOLEAN - - Percentage of
theroretical possible
received message
AsymDelay REAL - - Different transmission
delays between the two
directions
RxAddress INTEGER - - Address of received
packets
ConfAddress INTEGER - - Configured receive
address

19.1.7 Operation principle

The communication is made on standard ITU (CCITT) PCM digital 64 kbit/s
channels. It is a two-way communication where telegrams are sent every 5 ms
(same in 50 Hz and 60 Hz), exchanging information between two IEDs. The format
used is C37.94 and one telegram consists of start and stop flags, address, data to be
transmitted, Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) and Yellow bit (which is associated
with C37.94).

Start Stop
Information CRC
flag flag

8 bits n x 16 bits 16 bits 8 bits

en01000134.vsd

IEC01000134 V1 EN

Figure 399: Data message structure

The start and stop flags are the 0111 1110 sequence (7E hexadecimal), defined in
the HDLC standard. The CRC is designed according to the standard CRC16
definition. The optional address field in the HDLC frame is not used instead a
separate addressing is included in the data field.

927
Technical Manual
Section 19 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Remote communication

The address field is used for checking that the received message originates from
the correct equipment. There is always a risk that multiplexers occasionally mix the
messages up. Each terminal in the system is given a number. The terminal is then
programmed to accept messages from a specific terminal number. If the CRC
function detects a faulty message, the message is thrown away and not used in the
evaluation.

When the communication is used for line differential purpose, the transmitted data
consists of three currents, clock information, trip-, block- and alarm-signals and
eight binary signals which can be used for any purpose. The three currents are
represented as sampled values.

When the communication is used exclusively for binary signals, the full data
capacity of the communication channel is used for the binary signal purpose which
gives the capacity of 192 signals.

19.2 Transmission of analog data from LDCM

LDCMTransmit

19.2.1 Function block

LDCMTRN
^CT1L1
^CT1L2
^CT1L3
^CT1N
^CT2L1
^CT2L2
^CT2L3
^CT2N

IEC10000017-1-en.vsd
IEC10000017 V1 EN

Figure 400: LDCMTransmit function block

The function blocks are not represented in the Application

Configuration tool except for the LDCMTRN function block that is
visible in ACT. The signals appear only in the Signal Matrix tool
when a LDCM is included in the configuration with the function
selector tool.

928
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 19
Remote communication

19.2.2 Signals
Table 771: LDCMTRN Input signals
Name Type Default Description
CT1L1 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 line L1 to
remote end
CT1L2 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 line L2 to
remote end
CT1L3 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 line L3 to
remote end
CT1N STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 neutral N
to remote end
CT2L1 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 line L1 to
remote end
CT2L2 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 line L2 to
remote end
CT2L3 STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 line L3 to
remote end
CT2N STRING 0 Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 neutral N
to remote end

929
Technical Manual
930
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions

Section 20 Basic IED functions

20.1 Authority check ATHCHCK

20.1.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Authority check ATHCHCK - -

20.1.2 Functionality
To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools that are
accessing the IED are protected, by means of authorization handling. The
authorization handling of the IED and the PCM600 is implemented at both access
points to the IED:

local, through the local HMI

remote, through the communication ports

The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with PCM600 IED user
management tool.

931
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions

IEC12000202-2-en.vsd
IEC12000202 V2 EN

Figure 401: PCM600 user management tool

20.1.3 Settings

20.1.4 Operation principle

There are different levels (or types) of users that can access or operate different
areas of the IED and tools functionality. The pre-defined user types are given in
Table 772.

Ensure that the user logged on to the IED has the access required
when writing particular data to the IED from PCM600.

The meaning of the legends used in the table:

R= Read
W= Write
- = No access rights

932
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions

Table 772: Pre-defined user types

Access rights System Protection Design User
Guest Super User SPA Guest
Operator Engineer Engineer Administrator
Basic setting possibilities (change R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R
setting group, control settings,
limit supervision)
Advanced setting possibilities (for R R/W R R R/W R/W R
example protection settings)
Basic control possibilities (process R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R
control, no bypass)
Advanced control possibilities R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R
(process control including interlock
trigg)
Basic command handling (for R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R
example clear LEDs, manual trigg)
Advanced command handling (for R R/W R R R/W R/W R/W
example clear disturbance record)
Basic configuration possibilities (I/ R R/W R R R R/W R/W
O-configuration in SMT)
Advanced configuration R R/W R R R R/W R/W
possibilities (application
configuration including SMT, GDE
and CMT)
File loading (database loading - R/W - - - R/W R/W
from XML-file)
File dumping (database dumping - R/W - - - R/W R/W
to XML-file)
File transfer (FTP file transfer) - R/W - R/W R/W R/W R/W
File transfer (limited) (FTP file R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W
transfer)
File Transfer (SPA File Transfer) - R/W - - - R/W -
Database access for normal user R R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W
User administration (user R R/W R R R R R/W
management FTP File Transfer)
User administration (user - R/W - - - - -
management SPA File Transfer)

The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with the IED User
Management within PCM600. The user can only LogOn or LogOff on the local
HMI on the IED, there are no users, groups or functions that can be defined on
local HMI.

Only characters A - Z, a - z and 0 - 9 should be used in user names

and passwords.
The maximum of characters in a password is 18.

933
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions

At least one user must be included in the UserAdministrator group

to be able to write users, created in PCM600, to IED.

20.1.4.1 Authorization handling in the IED

At delivery the default user is the SuperUser. No Log on is required to operate the
IED until a user has been created with the IED User Management..

Once a user is created and downloaded to the IED, that user can perform a Log on,
introducing the password assigned in the tool.

If there is no user created, an attempt to log on will display a message box: No

user defined!

If one user leaves the IED without logging off, then after the timeout (set in Main
menu/Settings/General Settings/HMI/Screen/Display Timeout) elapses, the IED
returns to Guest state, when only reading is possible. The display time out is set to
60 minutes at delivery.

If there are one or more users created with the IED User Management and
downloaded into the IED, then, when a user intentionally attempts a Log on or
when the user attempts to perform an operation that is password protected, the Log
on window will appear.

The cursor is focused on the User identity field, so upon pressing the E key, the
user can change the user name, by browsing the list of users, with the up and
down arrows. After choosing the right user name, the user must press the E
key again. When it comes to password, upon pressing the E key, the following
character will show up: $. The user must scroll for every letter in the password.
After all the letters are introduced (passwords are case sensitive) choose OK and
press the E key again.

If everything is alright at a voluntary Log on, the local HMI returns to the
Authorization screen. If the Log on is OK, when required to change for example a
password protected setting, the local HMI returns to the actual setting folder. If the
Log on has failed, then the Log on window opens again, until either the user makes
it right or presses Cancel.

20.2 Authority management AUTHMAN

20.2.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Authority management AUTHMAN - -

934
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions

20.2.2 AUTHMAN
This function enables/disables the maintenance menu. It also controls the
maintenance menu log on time out.

20.2.3 Settings
Table 773: AUTHMAN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MaintMenuDisAuth Disable - - Enable In maintenance menu, disable authority
Enable selection is shown
AuthTimeout 600 - 3600 s 600 600 Authority blocking timeout

20.3 FTP access with password FTPACCS

20.3.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
FTP access with SSL FTPACCS - -

20.3.2 FTP access with SSL, FTPACCS

The FTP Client defaults to the best possible security mode when trying to negotiate
with SSL.

The automatic negotiation mode acts on port number and server features, it tries to
negotiate with explicit SSL via AUTH SSL/TLS. If the specified port is any other,
it tries to negotiate with explicit SSL via AUTH SSL/TLS.

Using FTP without SSL encryption gives the FTP client reduced capabilities. This
mode is only for accessing disturbance recorder data from the IED.

If normal FTP is required to read out disturbance recordings, create

a specific account for this purpose with rights only to do File
transfer. The password of this user will be exposed in clear text on
the wire.

935
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions

20.3.3 Settings
Table 774: FTPACCS Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
PortSelection None - - Any Port selection for communication
Front
LANAB
LANCD
Any
SSLMode FTP+FTPS - - FTPS Support for AUTH TLS/SSL
FTPS
TCPPortFTP 1 - 65535 - 1 21 TCP port for FTP and FTP with Explicit
SSL

20.4 Authority status ATHSTAT

20.4.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Authority status ATHSTAT - -

20.4.2 Functionality
Authority status ATHSTAT function is an indication function block for user log-on
activity.

User denied attempt to log-on and user successful log-on are reported.

20.4.3 Function block

ATHSTAT
USRBLKED
LOGGEDON

IEC06000503-2-en.vsd
IEC06000503 V2 EN

Figure 402: ATHSTAT function block

20.4.4 Signals
Table 775: ATHSTAT Output signals
Name Type Description
USRBLKED BOOLEAN At least one user is blocked by invalid password
LOGGEDON BOOLEAN At least one user is logged on

936
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions

20.4.5 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection
and Control IED Manager (PCM600)

20.4.6 Operation principle

Authority status (ATHSTAT) function informs about two events related to the IED
and the user authorization:
the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it
was blocked (the output USRBLKED)
the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)

Whenever one of the two events occurs, the corresponding output (USRBLKED or
LOGGEDON) is activated. The output can for example, be connected on Event
(EVENT) function block for LON/SPA.The signals are also available on IEC
61850 station bus.

20.5 Self supervision with internal event list

20.5.1 Functionality
Self supervision with internal event list function listens and reacts to internal
system events, generated by the different built-in self-supervision elements. The
internal events are saved in an internal event list presented on the LHMI and in
PCM600 event viewer tool.

20.5.2 Function block

IEC09000787 V1 EN

Figure 403: INTERRSIG function block

937
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions

20.5.3 Signals
Table 776: INTERRSIG Output signals
Name Type Description
FAIL BOOLEAN Internal fail
WARNING BOOLEAN Internal warning
TSYNCERR BOOLEAN Time synchronization error
RTCERR BOOLEAN Real time clock error
STUPBLK BOOLEAN Application startup block

20.5.4 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

20.5.5 Operation principle

The self-supervision operates continuously and includes:

Normal micro-processor watchdog function.

Checking of digitized measuring signals.
Other alarms, for example hardware and time synchronization.

The self-supervision function status can be monitored from the local HMI, from the
Event Viewer in PCM600 or from a SMS/SCS system.

Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI the present information from the self-
supervision function can be reviewed. The information can be found under Main
menu/Diagnostics/Internal events or Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/
General. The information from the self-supervision function is also available in the
Event Viewer in PCM600.

The self supervision records internal signal changes in an internal event list. A
maximum of 40 internal events are stored in a first-in, first-out manner.

GUID-B481701F-05B4-4B29-83D4-18F13886FEBE V1 EN

938
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions

A self-supervision summary can be obtained by means of the potential free alarm

contact (INTERNAL FAIL) located on the power supply module. The function of
this output relay is an OR-function between the INT-FAIL signal see figure 405
and a couple of more severe faults that can occur in the IED, see figure 404

IEC04000520 V1 EN

Figure 404: Hardware self-supervision, potential-free alarm contact

IO fail
OR Set e.g. BIM 1 Error
IO stopped
Reset
IO started
e.g. IOM2 Error OR
e.g. IO (n) Error Internal
OR FAIL
LON ERROR

FTF fatal error

OR
Watchdog NUMFAIL
RTE fatal error
Internal
Set WARN
RTE Appl-fail
OR
RTE OK Reset

IEC61850 not ready NUMWARNING

OR
RTCERROR Set RTCERROR
RTC OK Reset

TIMESYNCHERROR
OR TIMESYNCHERROR
Time reset Set

SYNCH OK Reset
SETCHGD
Settings changed
1 second pulse

en04000519-1.vsd
IEC04000519 V2 EN

Figure 405: Software self-supervision, IES (IntErrorSign) function block

939
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions

Some signals are available from the INTERRSIG function block. The signals from
this function block are sent as events to the station level of the control system. The
signals from the INTERRSIG function block can also be connected to binary
outputs for signalization via output relays or they can be used as conditions for
other functions if required/desired.

Individual error signals from I/O modules can be obtained from respective module
in the Signal Matrix tool. Error signals from time synchronization can be obtained
from the time synchronization block TIME.

20.5.5.1 Internal signals

Self supervision provides several status signals, that tells about the condition of the
IED. As they provide information about the internal status of the IED, they are also
called internal signals. The internal signals can be divided into two groups.

Standard signals are always presented in the IED, see Table 777.
Hardware dependent internal signals are collected depending on the hardware
configuration, see Table 778.

Explanations of internal signals are listed in Table 779.

Table 777: Self-supervision's standard internal signals

Name of signal Description
FAIL Internal Fail status
WARNING Internal Warning status
RTCERROR Real Time Clock status
TIMESYNCHERROR Time Synchronization status
RTEERROR Runtime Execution Error status
IEC61850ERROR IEC 61850 Error status
WATCHDOG SW Watchdog Error status
LMDERROR LON/Mip Device Error status
APPERROR Runtime Application Error status
SETCHGD Settings changed
SETGRPCHGD Setting groups changed

Table 778: Self-supervision's hardware dependent internal signals

Card Name of signal Description
PSM PSM-Error Power Supply Module Error status
ADOne ADOne-Error Analog In Module Error status
BIM BIM-Error Binary In Module Error status
BOM BOM-Error Binary Out Module Error status
Table continues on next page

940
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions

Card Name of signal Description

IOM IOM-Error In/Out Module Error status
MIM MIM-Error Millampere Input Module Error status
LDCM LDCM-Error Line Differential Communication Error status

Table 779: Explanations of internal signals

Name of signal Reasons for activation
FAIL This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal
signals are active; LMDERROR, WATCHDOG, APPERROR,
RTEERROR, or any of the HW dependent signals
WARNING This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal
signals are active; RTCERROR, IEC61850ERROR,
TIMESYNCHERROR
RTCERROR This signal will be active when there is a hardware error with the
real time clock.
TIMESYNCHERROR This signal will be active when the source of the time
synchronization is lost, or when the time system has to make a
time reset.
RTEERROR This signal will be active if the Runtime Engine failed to do some
actions with the application threads. The actions can be loading
of settings or parameters for components, changing of setting
groups, loading or unloading of application threads.
IEC61850ERROR This signal will be active if the IEC 61850 stack did not succeed
in some actions like reading IEC 61850 configuration, startup,
for example
WATCHDOG This signal will be activated when the terminal has been under
too heavy load for at least 5 minutes. The operating systems
background task is used for the measurements.
LMDERROR LON network interface, MIP/DPS, is in an unrecoverable error
state.
APPERROR This signal will be active if one or more of the application threads
are not in the state that Runtime Engine expects. The states can
be CREATED, INITIALIZED, RUNNING, for example
SETCHGD This signal will generate an Internal Event to the Internal Event
list if any settings are changed.
SETGRPCHGD This signal will generate an Internal Event to the Internal Event
list if any setting groups are changed.

20.5.5.2 Supervision of analog inputs

The analog signals to the A/D converter is internally distributed into two different
converters, one with low amplification and one with high amplification, see Figure
406.

941
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions

ADx
ADx_Low
x1

u1

x2

ADx
ADx_High Controller
x1

u1

x2

IEC05000296-3-en.vsd
IEC05000296 V3 EN

Figure 406: Simplified drawing of A/D converter for the IED.

When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels, a direct comparison
of the two A/D converter channels can be performed. If the validation fails, the
CPU will be informed and an alarm will be given for A/D converter failure.

The ADx_Controller also supervise other parts of the A/D converter.

20.5.6 Technical data

Table 780: Self supervision with internal event list
Data Value
Recording manner Continuous, event controlled
List size 40 events, first in-first out

20.6 Time synchronization

20.6.1 Functionality
The time synchronization source selector is used to select a common source of
absolute time for the IED when it is a part of a control and a protection system.
This makes it possible to compare event and disturbance data between all IEDs in a
station automation system. A common source shall be used for IED and merging
unit when IEC 61850-9-2LE process bus communication is used.

Micro SCADA OPC server should not be used as a time

synchronization source.

942
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions

20.6.2 Function block

TIMEERR
TSYNCERR
RTCERR

IEC05000425-2-en.vsd
IEC05000425 V2 EN

Figure 407: TIMEERR function block

20.6.3 Signals
Table 781: TIMEERR Output signals
Name Type Description
TSYNCERR BOOLEAN Time synchronization error
RTCERR BOOLEAN Real time clock error

20.6.4 Settings
Path in the local HMI is located under Main menu/Setting/Time

Path in PCM600 is located under Main menu/Settings/Time/Synchronization

Table 782: TIMESYNCHGEN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
CoarseSyncSrc Off - - Off Coarse time synchronization source
SPA
LON
SNTP
DNP
IEC103
FineSyncSource Off - - Off Fine time synchronization source
SPA
LON
BIN
GPS
GPS+SPA
GPS+LON
GPS+BIN
SNTP
GPS+SNTP
IRIG-B
GPS+IRIG-B
PPS
SyncMaster Off - - Off Activate IEDas synchronization master
SNTP-Server
TimeAdjustRate Slow - - Fast Adjust rate for time synchronization
Fast
Table continues on next page

943
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

HWSyncSrc Off - - Off Hardware time synchronization source
GPS
IRIG-B
PPS
AppSynch NoSynch - - NoSynch Time synchronization mode for
Synch application
SyncAccLevel Class T5 (1us) - - Unspecified Wanted time synchronization accuracy
Class T4 (4us)
Unspecified

Table 783: BININPUT Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ModulePosition 3 - 16 - 1 3 Hardware position of IO module for time
synchronization
BinaryInput 1 - 16 - 1 1 Binary input number for time
synchronization
BinDetection PositiveEdge - - PositiveEdge Positive or negative edge detection
NegativeEdge

Table 784: SNTP Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ServerIP-Add 0 - 255 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Server IP-address
Address
RedServIP-Add 0 - 255 IP 1 0.0.0.0 Redundant server IP-address
Address

944
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions

Table 785: DSTBEGIN Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MonthInYear January - - March Month in year when daylight time starts
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
DayInWeek Sunday - - Sunday Day in week when daylight time starts
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
WeekInMonth Last - - Last Week in month when daylight time starts
First
Second
Third
Fourth
UTCTimeOfDay -24:00 - - 1:00 UTC Time of day in hours when daylight
-23:30 time starts
-23:00
-22:30
48:00

945
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions

Table 786: DSTEND Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
MonthInYear January - - October Month in year when daylight time ends
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
DayInWeek Sunday - - Sunday Day in week when daylight time ends
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
WeekInMonth Last - - Last Week in month when daylight time ends
First
Second
Third
Fourth
UTCTimeOfDay -24:00 - - 1:00 UTC Time of day in hours when daylight
-23:30 time ends
-23:00
-22:30
48:00

946
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions

Table 787: TIMEZONE Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
TimeZone -12:00 - - 1:00 Local time from UTC
-11:00
-10:00
-9:30
-9:00
-8:00
-7:00
-6:00
-5:00
-4:30
-4:00
-3:30
-3:00
-2:00
-1:00
0:00
1:00
2:00
3:00
3:30
4:00
4:30
5:00
5:30
5:45
6:00
6:30
7:00
8:00
8:45
9:00
9:30
10:00
10:30
11:00
11:30
12:00
12:45
13:00
14:00

Table 788: IRIG-B Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SynchType BNC - - Opto Type of synchronization
Opto
TimeDomain LocalTime - - LocalTime Time domain
UTC
Encoding IRIG-B - - IRIG-B Type of encoding
1344
1344TZ
TimeZoneAs1344 MinusTZ - - PlusTZ Time zone as in 1344 standard
PlusTZ

947
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions

20.6.5 Operation principle

20.6.5.1 General concepts

Time definitions
The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and the
time the clock is intended to have. Clock accuracy indicates the increase in error,
that is, the time gained or lost by the clock. A disciplined clock knows its own
faults and tries to compensate for them.

Design of the time system (clock synchronization)

The time system is based on a software clock, which can be adjusted from external
time sources and a hardware clock. The protection and control modules will be
timed from a hardware clock, which runs independently from the software clock.
See figure 408

External
Synchronization
sources Time tagging and general synchronisation

Off
Comm- Protection
LON Events
Time- unication and control
SPA Regulator functions
Min. pulse
(Setting,
GPS see
SW-time
technical
SNTP
reference
DNP manual) Connected when GPS-time is
IRIG-B used for differential protection

PPS

Synchronization for differential protection

(ECHO-mode or GPS)
Off Time-
GPS Regulator HW-time
(fast or slow)
IRIG-B
PPS Diff.-
A/D Trans-
converter comm- ducers*
unication

*IEC 61850-9-2

IEC08000287-2-en.vsd
IEC08000287 V2 EN

Figure 408: Design of time system (clock synchronization)

All time tagging is performed by the software clock. When for example a status
signal is changed in the protection system with the function based on free running
hardware clock, the event is time tagged by the software clock when it reaches the
event recorder. Thus the hardware clock can run independently.

948
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions

The echo mode for the differential protection is based on the hardware clock. Thus,
there is no need to synchronize the hardware clock and the software clock.

The synchronization of the hardware clock to the software clock is necessary only
when GPS or IRIG B 00X with optical fibre, IEEE 1344 is used for differential
protection. The two clock systems are synchronized by a special clock
synchronization unit with two modes, fast and slow. A special feature, an
automatic fast clock time regulator is used. The automatic fast mode makes the
synchronization time as short as possible during start up or at interruptions/
disturbances in the GPS timing. The setting fast or slow is also available on the
local HMI.

If a GPS clock is used for 670 series IEDs other than line differential RED670, the
hardware and software clocks are not synchronized

Fast clock synchronization mode

At startup and after interruptions in the GPS or IRIG B time signal, the clock
deviation between the GPS time and the internal differential time system can be
substantial. A new startup is also required after for example maintenance of the
auxiliary voltage system.

When the time difference is >16s, the differential function is blocked and the time
regulator for the hardware clock automatically uses a fast mode to synchronize the
clock systems. The time adjustment is made with an exponential function, that is,
big time adjustment steps in the beginning, then smaller steps until a time deviation
between the GPS time and the differential time system of >16s has been reached.
Then the differential function is enabled and the synchronization remains in fast
mode or switches to slow mode, depending on the setting.

Slow clock synchronization mode

During normal service, a setting with slow synchronization mode is normally used,
which prevents the hardware clock to make too big time steps, >16s, emanating
from the differential protection requirement of correct timing.

Synchronization principle
From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical
structure. A function is synchronized from a higher level and provides
synchronization to lower levels.

949
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions

Synchronization from
a higher level

Function

Optional synchronization of
modules at a lower level

IEC09000342-1-en.vsd
IEC09000342 V1 EN

Figure 409: Synchronization principle

A function is said to be synchronized when it periodically receives synchronization

messages from a higher level. As the level decreases, the accuracy of the
synchronization decreases as well. A function can have several potential sources of
synchronization, with different maximum errors. This gives the function the
possibility to choose the source with the best quality, and to adjust its internal clock
after this source. The maximum error of a clock can be defined as:

The maximum error of the last used synchronization message

The time since the last used synchronization message
The rate accuracy of the internal clock in the function.

20.6.5.2 Real-time clock (RTC) operation

The IED has a built-in real-time clock (RTC) with a resolution of one second. The
clock has a built-in calendar that handles leap years through 2038.

Real-time clock at power off

During power off, the system time in the IED is kept by a capacitor-backed real-
time clock that will provide 35 ppm accuracy for 5 days. This means that if the
power is off, the time in the IED may drift with 3 seconds per day, during 5 days,
and after this time the time will be lost completely.

Real-time clock at startup

At IED startup, the internal time is free running. If the RTC is still alive since the
last up time, the time in the IED will be accurate (may drift 35 ppm), but if the
RTC power has been lost during power off (will happen after 5 days), the IED time
will start at 1970-01-01. For more information, please refer to section "Time
synchronization startup procedure" and section "Binary synchronization example".

950
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions

Time synchronization startup procedure

The first message that contains the full time (as for instance LON, SNTP and GPS)
gives an accurate time to the IED. After the initial setting of the clock, one of three
things happens with each of the coming synchronization messages configured as
fine:

If the synchronization message, which is similar to the other messages, has an

offset compared to the internal time in the IED, the message is used directly
for synchronization, that is, for adjusting the internal clock to obtain zero
offset at the next coming time message.
If the synchronization message has an offset that is large compared to the other
messages, a spike-filter in the IED removes this time-message.
If the synchronization message has an offset that is large, and the following
message also has a large offset, the spike filter does not act and the offset in
the synchronization message is compared to a threshold that defaults to 500
milliseconds.If the offset is more than the threshold, the clock jumps a whole
number of seconds so the remaining offset is less than 500ms. The remaining
offset is then slowly adjusted with 10000 ppm until the offset is removed.
With an adjustment of 10000ppm it takes 50 seconds to remove an offset of
500 milliseconds.

Synchronization messages configured as coarse are only used for initial setting of
the time. After this has been done, the messages are checked against the internal
time and only an offset of more than 10 seconds resets the time.

Rate accuracy
In the IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is 100 ppm but if the IED is synchronized
for a while, the rate accuracy is approximately 1 ppm if the surrounding
temperature is constant. Normally, it takes an hour to reach full accuracy.

Time-out on synchronization sources

All synchronization interfaces has a time-out and a configured interface must
receive time-messages regularly in order not to give an error signal (TSYNCERR).
Normally, the time-out is set so that one message can be lost without getting a
TSYNCERR, but if more than one message is lost, a TSYNCERR is given.

20.6.5.3 Synchronization alternatives

Four main alternatives of external time synchronization are available. The

synchronization message is applied:
via any of the communication ports of the IED as a telegram message
including date and time
as a minute pulse connected to a binary input
via GPS
via IRIG-B or PPS

The minute pulse is used to fine tune already existing time in the IEDs.

951
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions

Synchronization via SNTP

SNTP provides a ping-pong method of synchronization. A message is sent from an
IED to an SNTP server, and the SNTP server returns the message after filling in a
reception time and a transmission time. SNTP operates via the normal Ethernet
network that connects IEDs together in an IEC 61850 network. For SNTP to
operate properly, there must be an SNTP server present, preferably in the same
station. The SNTP synchronization provides an accuracy that gives +/- 1 ms
accuracy for binary inputs. The IED itself can be set as an SNTP-time server.

SNTP provides complete time-information and can be used as both fine and coarse
time synch source. However SNTP shall normally be used as fine synch only. The
only reason to use SNTP as coarse synch is in combination with PPS as fine
source. The combination SNTP as both fine and coarse source shall not be used.

SNTP server requirements

The SNTP server to be used is connected to the local network, that is not more than
4-5 switches or routers away from the IED. The SNTP server is dedicated for its
task, or at least equipped with a real-time operating system, that is not a PC with
SNTP server software. The SNTP server should be stable, that is, either
synchronized from a stable source like GPS, or local without synchronization.
Using a local SNTP server without synchronization as primary or secondary server
in a redundant configuration is not recommended.

Synchronization via Serial Communication Module (SLM)

On the serial buses (both LON and SPA) two types of synchronization messages
are sent.

Coarse message is sent every minute and comprises complete date and time,
that is, year, month, day, hours, minutes, seconds and milliseconds.
Fine message is sent every second and comprises only seconds and milliseconds.

The SLM module is located on the AD conversion Module (ADM).

Synchronization via Built-in-GPS

The built in GPS clock modules receives and decodes time information from the
global positioning system. The modules are located on the GPS time
synchronization Module (GTM).

Synchronization via binary input

The IED accepts minute pulses to a binary input. These minute pulses can be
generated from, for example station master clock. If the station master clock is not
synchronized from a world wide source, time will be a relative time valid for the
substation. Both positive and negative edge on the signal can be accepted. This
signal is also considered as a fine time synchronization signal.

The minute pulse is connected to any channel on any Binary Input Module in the
IED. The electrical characteristic is thereby the same as for any other binary input.

952
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions

If the objective of synchronization is to achieve a relative time within the

substation and if no station master clock with minute pulse output is available, a
simple minute pulse generator can be designed and used for synchronization of the
IEDs. The minute pulse generator can be created using the logical elements and
timers available in the IED.

The definition of a minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the last pulse. As
only the flanks are detected, the flank of the minute pulse shall occur one minute
after the last flank.

Binary minute pulses are checked with reference to frequency.

Pulse data:

Period time (a) should be 60 seconds.

Pulse length (b):
Minimum pulse length should be >50 ms.
Maximum pulse length is optional.
Amplitude (c) - please refer to section "Binary input module (BIM)".

Deviations in the period time larger than 50 ms will cause TSYNCERR.

en05000251.vsd
IEC05000251 V1 EN

Figure 410: Binary minute pulses

The default time-out-time for a minute pulse is two minutes, and if no valid minute
pulse is received within two minutes a SYNCERR will be given.

If contact bounce occurs, only the first pulse will be detected as a minute pulse.
The next minute pulse will be registered first 60 s - 50 ms after the last contact bounce.

If the minute pulses are perfect, for example, it is exactly 60 seconds between the
pulses, contact bounces might occur 49 ms after the actual minute pulse without
effecting the system. If contact bounce occurs more than 50 ms, for example, it is
less than 59950 ms between the two most adjacent positive (or negative) flanks, the
minute pulse will not be accepted.

953
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions

Binary synchronization example

An IED is configured to use only binary input, and a valid binary input is applied
to a binary input card. The HMI is used to tell the IED the approximate time and
the minute pulse is used to synchronize the IED thereafter. The definition of a
minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the previous minute pulse, so the
first minute pulse is not used at all. The second minute pulse will probably be
rejected due to the spike filter. The third pulse will give the IED a good time and
will reset the time so that the fourth minute pulse will occur on a minute border.
After the first three minutes, the time in the IED will be good if the coarse time is
set properly via the HMI or the RTC backup still keeps the time since last up-time.
If the minute pulse is removed for instance for an hour, the internal time will drift
by maximum the error rate in the internal clock. If the minute pulse is returned, the
first pulse automatically is rejected. The second pulse will possibly be rejected due
to the spike filter. The third pulse will either set the time, if the time offset is more
than 500 ms, or adjust the time, if the time offset is small enough. If the time is set,
the application will be brought to a safe state before the time is set. If the time is
adjusted, the time will reach its destination within one minute.

Synchronization via IRIG-B

The IRIG-B interface to the IED supplies two possible synchronization methods,
IRIG-B and PPS.

IRIG-B is a protocol used only for time synchronization. A clock can provide local
time of the year in this format. The B in IRIG-B states that 100 bits per second
are transmitted, and the message is sent every second. After IRIG-B there are
numbers stating if and how the signal is modulated and the information transmitted.

To receive IRIG-B there are two connectors in the IRIG-B module, one galvanic
BNC connector and one optical ST connector. IRIG-B 12x messages can be
supplied via the galvanic interface, and IRIG-B 00x messages can be supplied via
either the galvanic interface or the optical interface, where x (in 00x or 12x) means
a number in the range of 1-7.

00 means that a base band is used, and the information can be fed into the IRIG-
B module via the BNC contact or an optical fiber. 12 means that a 1 kHz
modulation is used. In this case the information must go into the module via the
BNC connector.

If the x in 00x or 12x is 4, 5, 6 or 7, the time message from IRIG-B contains

information of the year. If x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, the information contains only the time
within the year, and year information has to come from PCM600 or local HMI.

The IRIG-B module also takes care of IEEE1344 messages that are sent by IRIG-B
clocks, as IRIG-B previously did not have any year information. IEEE1344 is
compatible with IRIG-B and contains year information and information of the time-
zone.

It is recommended to use IEEE 1344 for supplying time information to the IRIG-B
module. In this case, send also the local time in the messages, as this local time
plus the TZ Offset supplied in the message equals UTC at all times.

954
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions

PPS

An optical PPS signal can be supplied to the optical interface of the IRIG-B module.

The PPS signal is a transition from dark to light, that occurs 1 second +/- 2 s after
another PPS signal. The allowed jitter is <2 s. If jitter is >2 s a TSYNCERR
signal will be generated.

20.6.5.4 Process bus IEC 61850-9-2LE synchronization

For the time synchronization of the process bus communication (IEC 61850-9-2LE
protocol) an optical PPS or IRIG-B signal can be used. This signal should emanate
from either an external GPS clock, or from the merging unit.

An optical PPS signal can be supplied to the optical interface of the IRIG-B module.

20.6.6 Technical data

Table 789: Time synchronization, time tagging
Function Value
Time tagging resolution, events and sampled measurement values 1 ms
Time tagging error with synchronization once/min (minute pulse 1.0 ms typically
synchronization), events and sampled measurement values
Time tagging error with SNTP synchronization, sampled 1.0 ms typically
measurement values

20.7 Parameter setting groups

20.7.1 Functionality
Use the six different groups of settings to optimize the IED operation for different
power system conditions. Creating and switching between fine-tuned setting sets,
either from the local HMI or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly
adaptable IED that can be applied to a variety of power system scenarios.

955
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions

20.7.2 Function block

ActiveGroup
ACTGRP1 GRP1
ACTGRP2 GRP2
ACTGRP3 GRP3
ACTGRP4 GRP4
ACTGRP5 GRP5
ACTGRP6 GRP6
SETCHGD

IEC05000433_2_en.vsd
IEC05000433 V2 EN

Figure 411: ActiveGroup function block

SETGRPS
MAXSETGR

IEC05000716_2_en.vsd
IEC05000716 V2 EN

Figure 412: SETGRPS function block

20.7.3 Signals
Table 790: ACTVGRP Input signals
Name Type Default Description
ACTGRP1 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 1 as active
ACTGRP2 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 2 as active
ACTGRP3 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 3 as active
ACTGRP4 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 4 as active
ACTGRP5 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 5 as active
ACTGRP6 BOOLEAN 0 Selects setting group 6 as active

Table 791: ACTVGRP Output signals

Name Type Description
GRP1 BOOLEAN Setting group 1 is active
GRP2 BOOLEAN Setting group 2 is active
GRP3 BOOLEAN Setting group 3 is active
GRP4 BOOLEAN Setting group 4 is active
GRP5 BOOLEAN Setting group 5 is active
GRP6 BOOLEAN Setting group 6 is active
SETCHGD BOOLEAN Pulse when setting changed

956
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions

20.7.4 Settings
Table 792: ACTVGRP Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
t 0.0 - 10.0 s 0.1 1.0 Pulse length of pulse when setting
changed

Table 793: SETGRPS Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
ActiveSetGrp SettingGroup1 - - SettingGroup1 Active setting group
SettingGroup2
SettingGroup3
SettingGroup4
SettingGroup5
SettingGroup6
MaxNoSetGrp 1-6 - 1 1 Max number of setting groups 1-6

20.7.5 Operation principle

Parameter setting groups ActiveGroup function has six functional inputs, each
corresponding to one of the setting groups stored in the IED. Activation of any of
these inputs changes the active setting group. Seven functional output signals are
available for configuration purposes, so that information on the active setting group
is always available.

A setting group is selected by using the local HMI, from a front connected personal
computer, remotely from the station control or station monitoring system or by
activating the corresponding input to the ActiveGroup function block.

Each input of the function block can be configured to connect to any of the binary
inputs in the IED. To do this PCM600 must be used.

The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group when
adaptive functionality is necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groups
must be either permanent or a pulse exceeding 400 ms.

More than one input may be activated at the same time. In such cases the lower
order setting group has priority. This means that if for example both group four and
group two are set to be activated, group two will be the one activated.

Every time the active group is changed, the output signal SETCHGD is sending a
pulse.

The parameter MAXSETGR defines the maximum number of setting groups in use
to switch between.

957
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions

ACTIVATE GROUP 6
ACTIVATE GROUP 5
ACTIVATE GROUP 4
ACTIVATE GROUP 3
ACTIVATE GROUP 2
+RL2 ACTIVATE GROUP 1

IOx-Bly1 ActiveGroup
ACTGRP1 GRP1
IOx-Bly2
ACTGRP2 GRP2
IOx-Bly3
ACTGRP3 GRP3
IOx-Bly4
ACTGRP4 GRP4
IOx-Bly5
ACTGRP5 GRP5
IOx-Bly6 ACTGRP6
GRP6
SETCHGD

en05000119.vsd
IEC05000119 V2 EN

Figure 413: Connection of the function to external circuits

The above example also includes seven output signals, for confirmation of which
group that is active.

SETGRPS function block has an input where the number of setting groups used is
defined. Switching can only be done within that number of groups. The number of
setting groups selected to be used will be filtered so only the setting groups used
will be shown on the Parameter Setting Tool.

20.8 ChangeLock function CHNGLCK

20.8.1 Functionality
Change lock function CHNGLCK is used to block further changes to the IED
configuration and settings once the commissioning is complete. The purpose is to
block inadvertent IED configuration changes beyond a certain point in time.

The change lock function activation is normally connected to a binary input.

958
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions

20.8.2 Function block

CHNGLCK
LOCK

IEC09000946-1-en.vsd
IEC09000946 V1 EN

Figure 414: CHNGLCK function block

20.8.3 Signals
Table 794: CHNGLCK Input signals
Name Type Default Description
LOCK BOOLEAN 0 Activate change lock

Table 795: CHNGLCK Output signals

Name Type Description
ACTIVE BOOLEAN Change lock active
OVERRIDE BOOLEAN Change lock override

20.8.4 Settings
Table 796: CHNGLCK Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation LockHMI and Com - - LockHMI and Com Operation mode of change lock
LockHMI,
EnableCom
EnableHMI,
LockCom

20.8.5 Operation principle

The Change lock function (CHNGLCK) is configured using ACT.

The function, when activated, will still allow the following changes of the IED
state that does not involve reconfiguring of the IED:
Monitoring
Reading events
Resetting events
Reading disturbance data
Clear disturbances
Reset LEDs
Reset counters and other runtime component states
Control operations

959
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions

Set system time

Enter and exit from test mode
Change of active setting group

The binary input signal LOCK controlling the function is defined in ACT or SMT:
Binary input Function
1 Activated
0 Deactivated

20.9 Test mode functionality TEST

20.9.1 Functionality
When the Test mode functionality TESTMODE is activated, all the functions in the
IED are automatically blocked. Activated TESTMODE is indicating by a flashing
yellow LED on the local HMI. It is then possible to unblock every function(s)
individually from the local HMI to perform required tests.

When leaving TESTMODE, all blockings are removed and the IED resumes
normal operation. However, if during TESTMODE operation, power is removed
and later restored, the IED will remain in TESTMODE with the same protection
functions blocked or unblocked as before the power was removed. All testing will
be done with actually set and configured values within the IED. No settings will be
changed, thus mistakes are avoided.

20.9.2 Function block

TESTMODE
IED_TEST TEST
IED_TEST
BLOCK
NOEVENT
INPUT
SETTING
IEC61850

IEC14000072-1-en.vsd
IEC09000219 V2 EN

Figure 415: TESTMODE function block

20.9.3 Signals
Table 797: TESTMODE Input signals
Name Type Default Description
IED_TEST BOOLEAN 0 Activate IED test mode

960
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions

Table 798: TESTMODE Output signals

Name Type Description
TEST BOOLEAN In test via IED TEST or via LD0 Mode
IED_TEST BOOLEAN IED test mode is active
BLOCK BOOLEAN Active when LD0 is blocked or test blocked
NOEVENT BOOLEAN Event disabled during test mode
INPUT BOOLEAN IED TEST input is active
SETTING BOOLEAN IED test mode setting is On
IEC61850 BOOLEAN Active when LD0 Mode is in Blocked, Test or Test
blocked

20.9.4 Settings
Table 799: TESTMODE Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
IEDTestMode Off - - Off Activate IED Test mode
On
EventDisable Off - - Off Event disable during test mode
On
CmdTestEd1 Off - - Off Require test bit in command at test
On mode (only for IEC61850 Ed1)

20.9.5 Operation principle

Put the IED into test mode to test functions in the IED. Set the IED in test mode by

configuration, activating the input SIGNAL on the function block TESTMODE.

setting TestMode to On in the local HMI, under Main menu/TEST/IED test
mode.

While the IED is in test mode, the output ACTIVE of the function block
TESTMODE is activated. The outputs of the function block TESTMODE shows
the cause of the Test mode: being in On state. If the input from the configuration
(OUTPUT signal is activated) or setting from local HMI (SETTING signal is
activated).

While the IED is in test mode, the yellow START LED will flash and all functions
are blocked. Any function can be unblocked individually regarding functionality
and event signalling.

Most of the functions in the IED can individually be blocked by means of settings
from the local HMI. To enable these blockings the IED must be set in test mode
(output ACTIVE is activated), see example in figure 416. When leaving the test
mode, that is entering normal mode, these blockings are disabled and everything is
set to normal operation. All testing will be done with actually set and configured

961
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions

parameter values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus no mistakes are
possible.

The blocked functions will still be blocked next time entering the test mode, if the
blockings were not reset. The released function will return to blocked state if test
mode is set to off.

The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so
no outputs will be activated.

When a binary input is used to set the IED in test mode and a
parameter, that requires restart of the application, is changed, the
IED will re-enter test mode and all functions will be blocked, also
functions that were unblocked before the change. During the re-
entering to test mode, all functions will be temporarily unblocked
for a short time, which might lead to unwanted operations. This is
only valid if the IED is set in TEST mode by a binary input, not by
local HMI.

The TESTMODE function block might be used to automatically block functions

when a test handle is inserted in a test switch. A contact in the test switch (RTXP24
contact 29-30) can supply a binary input which in turn is configured to the
TESTMODE function block.

Each of the functions includes the blocking from the TESTMODE function block.
A typical example from the undervoltage function is shown in figure 416.

The functions can also be blocked from sending events over IEC 61850 station bus
to prevent filling station and SCADA databases with test events, for example
during a commissioning or maintenance test.

962
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions

U Disconnection

Normal voltage

U1<

U2<

tBlkUV1 <
t1,t1Min
IntBlkStVal1
tBlkUV2 <
t2,t2Min
IntBlkStVal2

Time

Block step 1

Block step 2
en05000466.vsd
IEC05000466 V1 EN

Figure 416: Example of blocking the time delayed undervoltage protection

function.

20.10 IED identifiers

20.10.1 Functionality
IED identifiers (TERMINALID) function allows the user to identify the individual
IED in the system, not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.

Use only characters A-Z, a-z and 0-9 in station, object and unit names.

963
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions

20.10.2 Settings
Table 800: TERMINALID Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
StationName 0 - 18 - 1 Station name Station name
StationNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Station number
ObjectName 0 - 18 - 1 Object name Object name
ObjectNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Object number
UnitName 0 - 18 - 1 Unit name Unit name
UnitNumber 0 - 99999 - 1 0 Unit number
IEDMainFunType 0 - 255 - 1 0 IED main function type for
IEC60870-5-103
TechnicalKey 0 - 16 - 1 AA0B0Q0A0 Technical key (part 1)
0 - 16 - 1 Technical key (part 2)
0 - 16 - 1 Technical key (part 3)
0 - 16 - 1 Technical key (part 4)

20.11 Product information

20.11.1 Functionality
The Product identifiers function contains constant data (i.e. not possible to change)
that uniquely identifies the IED:

ProductVer
ProductDef
SerialNo
OrderingNo
ProductionDate
IEDProdType

The settings are visible on the local HMI , under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED
status/Product identifiersand underMain menu/Diagnostics/IED Status/IED
identifiers

This information is very helpful when interacting with ABB product support (e.g.
during repair and maintenance).

20.11.2 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

964
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions

20.11.3 Factory defined settings

The factory defined settings are very useful for identifying a specific version and
very helpful in the case of maintenance, repair, interchanging IEDs between
different Substation Automation Systems and upgrading. The factory made settings
can not be changed by the customer. They can only be viewed. The settings are
found in the local HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/Product
identifiers

The following identifiers are available:

IEDProdType
Describes the type of the IED (like REL, REC or RET). Example: REL670
ProductDef
Describes the release number, from the production. Example: 1.2.2.0
ProductVer
Describes the product version. Example: 1.2.3

1 is the Major version of the manufactured product this means, new platform of the
product
2 is the Minor version of the manufactured product this means, new functions or new
hardware added to the product
3 is the Major revision of the manufactured product this means, functions or hardware
is either changed or enhanced in the product

IEDMainFunType
Main function type code according to IEC 60870-5-103. Example: 128
(meaning line protection).
SerialNo
OrderingNo
ProductionDate

20.12 Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI

20.12.1 Functionality
The Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI) function is used within the Application
Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT),
see the application manual to get information about how binary inputs are brought
in for one IED configuration.

965
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions

20.12.2 Function block

SMBI
^VIN1 ^BI1
^VIN2 ^BI2
^VIN3 ^BI3
^VIN4 ^BI4
^VIN5 ^BI5
^VIN6 ^BI6
^VIN7 ^BI7
^VIN8 ^BI8
^VIN9 ^BI9
^VIN10 ^BI10

IEC05000434-2-en.vsd
IEC05000434 V2 EN

Figure 417: SMBI function block

20.12.3 Signals
Table 801: SMBI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BI1 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI2 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI3 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI4 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI5 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI6 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI7 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI8 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI9 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input
BI10 BOOLEAN 0 SMT Connect input

Table 802: SMBI Output signals

Name Type Description
BI1 BOOLEAN Binary input 1
BI2 BOOLEAN Binary input 2
BI3 BOOLEAN Binary input 3
BI4 BOOLEAN Binary input 4
BI5 BOOLEAN Binary input 5
BI6 BOOLEAN Binary input 6
BI7 BOOLEAN Binary input 7
BI8 BOOLEAN Binary input 8
BI9 BOOLEAN Binary input 9
BI10 BOOLEAN Binary input 10

966
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions

20.12.4 Operation principle

The Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI) function , see figure 417, receives its
inputs from the real (hardware) binary inputs via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT),
and makes them available to the rest of the configuration via its outputs, BI1 to
BI10. The inputs and outputs, as well as the whole block, can be given a user
defined name. These names will be represented in SMT as information which
signals shall be connected between physical IO and SMBI function. The input/
output user defined name will also appear on the respective output/input signal.

20.13 Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO

20.13.1 Functionality
The Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO) function is used within the
Application Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix
Tool (SMT), see the application manual to get information about how binary inputs
are sent from one IED configuration.

20.13.2 Function block

SMBO
BO1 ^BO1
BO2 ^BO2
BO3 ^BO3
BO4 ^BO4
BO5 ^BO5
BO6 ^BO6
BO7 ^BO7
BO8 ^BO8
BO9 ^BO9
BO10 ^BO10

IEC05000439-2-en.vsd
IEC05000439 V2 EN

Figure 418: SMBO function block

20.13.3 Signals
Table 803: SMBO Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO1 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO2 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO3 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO4 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO4 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO5 in Signal Matrix Tool
Table continues on next page

967
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions

Name Type Default Description

BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO6 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO7 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO7 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO8 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO8 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO9 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO9 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO10 BOOLEAN 0 Signal name for BO10 in Signal Matrix Tool

20.13.4 Operation principle

The Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO) function , see figure 418, receives
logical signal from the IED configuration, which is transferring to the real
(hardware) outputs, via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT). The inputs in SMBO are
BO1 to BO10 and they, as well as the whole function block, can be tag-named. The
name tags will appear in SMT as information which signals shall be connected
between physical IO and the SMBO.

It is important that SMBO inputs are connected when SMBOs

are connected to physical outputs through the Signal Matrix
Tool. If SMBOs are connected (in SMT) but their inputs not, all
the physical outputs will be set by default. This might cause
malfunction of primary equipment and/or injury to personnel.

20.14 Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI

20.14.1 Functionality
The Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI) function is used within the Application
Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT),
see the application manual to get information about how milliamp (mA) inputs are
brought in for one IED configuration.

20.14.2 Function block

SMMI
^VIN1 AI1
^VIN2 AI2
^VIN3 AI3
^VIN4 AI4
^VIN5 AI5
^VIN6 AI6

IEC05000440-2-en.vsd
IEC05000440 V2 EN

Figure 419: SMMI function block

968
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions

20.14.3 Signals
Table 804: SMMI Input signals
Name Type Default Description
AI1 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input
AI2 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input
AI3 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input
AI4 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input
AI5 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input
AI6 REAL 0 SMT connected milliampere input

Table 805: SMMI Output signals

Name Type Description
AI1 REAL Analog milliampere input 1
AI2 REAL Analog milliampere input 2
AI3 REAL Analog milliampere input 3
AI4 REAL Analog milliampere input 4
AI5 REAL Analog milliampere input 5
AI6 REAL Analog milliampere input 6

20.14.4 Operation principle

The Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI) function, see figure 419, receives its
inputs from the real (hardware) mA inputs via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), and
makes them available to the rest of the configuration via its analog outputs, named
AI1 to AI6. The inputs, as well as the whole block, can be tag-named. These tags
will be represented in SMT.

The outputs on SMMI are normally connected to the IEC61850 generic

communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) function for further use of the mA signals.

20.15 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI

20.15.1 Functionality
Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI), also known as the preprocessor function
block, analyses the connected four analog signals (three phases and neutral) and
calculates all relevant information from them like the phasor magnitude, phase
angle, frequency, true RMS value, harmonics, sequence components and so on.

969
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions

This information is then used by the respective functions connected to this SMAI
block in ACT (for example protection, measurement or monitoring functions).

20.15.2 Frequency values

The frequency functions includes a functionality based on level of positive
sequence voltage, IntBlockLevel, to validate if the frequency measurement is valid
or not. If positive sequence voltage is lower than IntBlockLevel the function is
blocked. IntBlockLevel, is set in % of UBase/3

If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-Ph at least two of the inputs GRPxL1,

GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 must be connected in order to calculate positive sequence
voltage. Note that phase to phase inputs shall always be connected as follows: L1-
L2 to GRPxL1, L2-L3 to GRPxL2, L3-L1 to GRPxL3. If SMAI setting
ConnectionType is Ph-N, all three inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 must be
connected in order to calculate positive sequence voltage.

If only one phase-phase voltage is available and SMAI setting ConnectionType is

Ph-Ph the user is advised to connect two (not three) of the inputs GRPxL1,
GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 to the same voltage input as shown in figure 420 to make
SMAI calculating a positive sequence voltage.

IEC10000060-1-en.vsd
IEC10000060 V1 EN

Figure 420: Connection example

The above described scenario does not work if SMAI setting

ConnectionType is Ph-N. If only one phase-earth voltage is
available, the same type of connection can be used but the SMAI
ConnectionType setting must still be Ph-Ph and this has to be
accounted for when setting IntBlockLevel. If SMAI setting
ConnectionType is Ph-N and the same voltage is connected to all
three SMAI inputs, the positive sequence voltage will be zero and
the frequency functions will not work properly.

The outputs from the above configured SMAI block shall only be
used for Overfrequency protection (SAPTOF), Underfrequency
protection (SAPTUF) and Rate-of-change frequency protection

970
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions

(SAPFRC) due to that all other information except frequency and

positive sequence voltage might be wrongly calculated.

20.15.3 Function block

SMAI1
BLOCK SPFCOUT
DFTSPFC G1AI3P
REVROT G1AI1
^GRP1L1 G1AI2
^GRP1L2 G1AI3
^GRP1L3 G1AI4
^GRP1N G1N

IEC14000027-1-en.vsd
IEC14000027 V1 EN

Figure 421: SMAI1 function block

SMAI2
BLOCK G2AI3P
REVROT G2AI1
^GRP2L1 G2AI2
^GRP2L2 G2AI3
^GRP2L3 G2AI4
^GRP2N G2N

IEC14000028-1-en.vsd
IEC14000028 V1 EN

Figure 422: SMAI2 function block

20.15.4 Signals
Table 806: SMAI1 Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 1
DFTSPFC REAL 20.0 Number of samples per fundamental cycle used
for DFT calculation
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 1
GRP1L1 STRING - First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2
quantity
GRP1L2 STRING - Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2-L3
quantity
GRP1L3 STRING - Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3-L1
quantity
GRP1N STRING - Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral
quantity

971
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions

Table 807: SMAI1 Output signals

Name Type Description
SPFCOUT REAL Number of samples per fundamental cycle from
internal DFT reference function
G1AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 3-phase group
G1AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 1
G1AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 2
G1AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 3
G1AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Group 1 analog input 4
G1N GROUP SIGNAL Group parameter for residual sample

Table 808: SMAI2 Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block group 2
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation group 2
GRP2L1 STRING - First analog input used for phase L1 or L1-L2
quantity
GRP2L2 STRING - Second analog input used for phase L2 or L2-L3
quantity
GRP2L3 STRING - Third analog input used for phase L3 or L3-L1
quantity
GRP2N STRING - Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral
quantity

Table 809: SMAI2 Output signals

Name Type Description
G2AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 3-phase group
G2AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 1
G2AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 2
G2AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 3
G2AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Group 2 analog input 4
G2N GROUP SIGNAL Group parameter for residual sample

20.15.5 Settings

Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default

value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available. Internal
nominal frequency DFT reference is then the reference.

972
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions

Table 810: SMAI1 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
DFTRefExtOut InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference for external output
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
ConnectionType Ph-N - - Ph-N Input connection type
Ph-Ph
AnalogInputType Voltage - - Voltage Analog input signal type
Current

Table 811: SMAI1 Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Negation Off - - Off Negation
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 % 1 10 Limit for frequency calculation in % of
UBase

973
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions

Table 812: SMAI2 Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
ConnectionType Ph-N - - Ph-N Input connection type
Ph-Ph
AnalogInputType Voltage - - Voltage Analog input signal type
Current

Table 813: SMAI2 Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Negation Off - - Off Negation
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 % 1 10 Limit for frequency calculation in % of
UBase

20.15.6 Operation principle

Every Signal matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI) can receive four analog
signals (three phases and one neutral or residual value), either voltage or current,
see figure 421 and figure 422. SMAI outputs give information about every aspect
of the 3ph analog signals acquired (phase angle, RMS value, frequency and
frequency derivates etc. 244 values in total). The BLOCK input will force all
outputs to value zero.

The output signal AI1 to AI4 are single phase outputs which directly represent the
four inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2, GRPxL3 and GRPxN, x=1-12. AIN is always
calculated residual sum from the first three inputs. A3P is grouped, three-phase
information containing all relevant information about four connected inputs. Note
that all other functions, with a few exceptions, use this output in configuration.
Note that function block will always calculate the residual sum of current/voltage if
the input is not connected in SMT. Applications with a few exceptions shall always
be connected to AI3P.

974
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions

20.16 Global base values GBASVAL

20.16.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Global base values GBASVAL - -

20.16.2 Functionality
Global base values function (GBASVAL) is used to provide global values,
common for all applicable functions within the IED. One set of global values
consists of values for current, voltage and apparent power and it is possible to have
six different sets.

This is an advantage since all applicable functions in the IED use a single source of
base values. This facilitates consistency throughout the IED and also facilitates a
single point for updating values when necessary.

Each applicable function in the IED has a parameter, GlobalBaseSel, defining one
out of the six sets of GBASVAL functions.

20.16.3 Settings

Table 814: GBASVAL Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 kV 0.05 400.00 Global base voltage
IBase 1 - 99999 A 1 3000 Global base current
SBase 1.00 - 200000.00 MVA 0.05 2000.00 Global base apparent power

20.17 Primary system values PRIMVAL

20.17.1 Identification
Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2
identification identification device number
Primary system values PRIMVAL - -

975
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions

20.17.2 Functionality
The rated system frequency is set under Main menu/General settings/ Power
system/ Primary Values in the local HMI and PCM600 parameter setting tree.

20.17.3 Settings
Table 815: PRIMVAL Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Frequency 50.0 - 60.0 Hz 10.0 50.0 Rated system frequency
PhaseRotation Normal=L1L2L3 - - Normal=L1L2L3 System phase rotation
Inverse=L3L2L1

20.18 Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM

20.18.1 Functionality
Summation block 3 phase function 3PHSUM is used to get the sum of two sets of
three-phase analog signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that might
need it.

20.18.2 Function block

3PHSUM
BLOCK AI3P
DFTSPFC AI1
G1AI3P* AI2
G2AI3P* AI3
AI4

IEC05000441-2-en.vsd
IEC05000441 V2 EN

Figure 423: 3PHSUM function block

20.18.3 Signals
Table 816: 3PHSUM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block
REVROT BOOLEAN 0 Reverse rotation
G1AI3P GROUP - Group 1 three phase analog input from first SMAI
SIGNAL
G2AI3P GROUP - Group 2 three phase analog input from second
SIGNAL SMAI

976
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions

Table 817: 3PHSUM Output signals

Name Type Description
AI3P GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of two connected three phase
inputs
AI1 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 1 signals from both
SMAI blocks
AI2 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 2 signals from both
SMAI blocks
AI3 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 3 signals from both
SMAI blocks
AI4 GROUP SIGNAL Linear combination of input 4 signals from both
SMAI blocks

20.18.4 Settings

Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default

value InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.

Table 818: 3PHSUM Non group settings (basic)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
GlobalBaseSel 1 - 12 - 1 1 Selection of one of the Global Base
Value groups
SummationType Group1+Group2 - - Group1+Group2 Summation type
Group1-Group2
Group2-Group1
-(Group1+Group2)
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - - InternalDFTRef DFT reference
DFTRefGrp1
External DFT ref

Table 819: 3PHSUM Non group settings (advanced)

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
FreqMeasMinVal 5 - 200 % 1 10 Amplitude limit for frequency calculation
in % of UBase

20.18.5 Operation principle

Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM receives the three-phase signals from Signal
matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI). In the same way, the BLOCK input will
reset all the outputs of the function to 0.

977
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions

20.19 Denial of service DOS

20.19.1 Functionality
The Denial of service functions (DOSFRNT, DOSLANAB and DOSLANCD) are
designed to limit overload on the IED produced by heavy Ethernet network traffic.
The communication facilities must not be allowed to compromise the primary
functionality of the device. All inbound network traffic will be quota controlled so
that too heavy network loads can be controlled. Heavy network load might for
instance be the result of malfunctioning equipment connected to the network.

20.19.2 Function blocks

DOSFRNT
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM

IEC09000749-1-en.vsd
IEC09000749 V1 EN

Figure 424: DOSFRNT function block

DOSLANAB
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM

IEC13000308-1-en.vsd
IEC13000308 V1 EN

Figure 425: DOSLANAB function block

Figure 426: DOSLANCD function block

DOSLANCD
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM

IEC13000309-1-en.vsd

20.19.3 Signals
Table 820: DOSFRNT Output signals
Name Type Description
LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status
WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state
ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state

978
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions

Table 821: DOSLANAB Output signals

Name Type Description
LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status
WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state
ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state

Table 822: DOSLANCD Output signals

Name Type Description
LINKUP BOOLEAN Ethernet link status
WARNING BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than normal state
ALARM BOOLEAN Frame rate is higher than throttle state

20.19.4 Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

20.19.5 Monitored data

Table 823: DOSFRNT Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
State INTEGER 0=Off - Frame rate control state
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
Quota INTEGER - % Quota level in percent
0-100
IPPackRecNorm INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
received in normal mode
IPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
received in polled mode
IPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
discarded
NonIPPackRecNorm INTEGER - - Number of non IP
packets received in
normal mode
NonIPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of non IP
packets received in
polled mode
NonIPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of non IP
packets discarded

979
Technical Manual
Section 20 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Basic IED functions

Table 824: DOSLANAB Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
DoSStatus INTEGER 0=Off - Frame rate control state
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
Quota INTEGER - % Quota level in percent
0-100
IPPackRecNorm INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
received in normal mode
IPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
received in polled mode
IPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
discarded
NonIPPackRecNorm INTEGER - - Number of non IP
packets received in
normal mode
NonIPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of non IP
packets received in
polled mode
NonIPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of non IP
packets discarded

Table 825: DOSLANCD Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
DoSStatus INTEGER 0=Off - Frame rate control state
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
Quota INTEGER - % Quota level in percent
0-100
IPPackRecNorm INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
received in normal mode
IPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
received in polled mode
IPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of IP packets
discarded
NonIPPackRecNorm INTEGER - - Number of non IP
packets received in
normal mode
NonIPPackRecPoll INTEGER - - Number of non IP
packets received in
polled mode
NonIPPackDisc INTEGER - - Number of non IP
packets discarded

980
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 20
Basic IED functions

20.19.6 Operation principle

The Denial of service functions (DOSFRNT, DOSLANAB and DOSLANCD)
measures the IED load from communication and, if necessary, limit it for not
jeopardizing the IEDs control and protection functionality due to high CPU load.
The function has the following outputs:
LINKUP indicates the Ethernet link status
WARNING indicates that communication (frame rate) is higher than normal
ALARM indicates that the IED limits communication

981
Technical Manual
982
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

Section 21 IED hardware

21.1 Overview

21.1.1 Variants of case size with local HMI display

IEC04000458-2-en.psd
IEC04000458 V2 EN

Figure 427: 1/2 19 case with local HMI display.

983
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

IEC05000762-2-en.psd
IEC05000762 V2 EN

Figure 428: 3/4 19 case with local HMI display.

IEC04000460-2-en.psd
IEC04000460 V2 EN

Figure 429: 1/1 19 case with local HMI display.

984
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

21.1.2 Case from the rear side

Table 826: Designations for 1/2 x 19 casing with 1 TRM slot

Module Rear Positions

PSM X11
BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or X31 and X32 etc. to X51
MIM and X52
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or RS485 X302
LDCM or RS485 X303
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM, RS485 or GTM X312, 313
TRM X401

1MRK002801-AC-2-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-2-670-1.2-PG V3 EN

985
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

Table 827: Designations for 3/4 x 19 casing with 1 TRM slot

Module Rear Positions

PSM X11
BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or X31 and X32 etc. to
MIM X101 and X102
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or RS485 X302
LDCM or RS485 X303
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM, RS485 or GTM X312, X313
TRM X401

1MRK002801-AC-3-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-3-670-1.2-PG V3 EN

986
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

Table 828: Designations for 3/4 x 19 casing with 2 TRM slot

Module Rear Positions

PSM X11
BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or X31 and X32 etc. to X71 and
MIM X72
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or RS485 X302
LDCM or RS485 X303
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM, RS485 or GTM X312, X313, X322, X323
TRM 1 X401
TRM 2 X411

1MRK002801-AC-4-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-4-670-1.2-PG V3 EN

987
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

Table 829: Designations for 1/1 x 19 casing with 1 TRM slot

Module Rear Positions

PSM X11
BIM, BOM, X31 and X32 etc. to X161
SOM, IOM or and X162
MIM
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or X302
RS485
LDCM or RS485 X303
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM,RS485 or X312, X313
GTM
TRM X401

1MRK002801-AC-5-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-5-670-1.2-PG V3 EN

988
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

Table 830: Designations for 1/1 x 19 casing with 2 TRM slots

Module Rear Positions

PSM X11
BIM, BOM, X31 and X32 etc. to X131
SOM, IOM or and X132
MIM
SLM X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or X302
RS485
LDCM or RS485 X303
OEM X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM, RS485 or X312, X313, X322, X323
GTM
TRM 1 X401
TRM 2 X411

1MRK002801-AC-6-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-6-670-1.2-PG V3 EN

989
Technical Manual
Section 21
IED hardware
21.2 Hardware modules
21.2.1 Overview
Table 831: Basic modules
Module
Power supply module (PSM)
Numerical module (NUM)
Local Human machine interface (LHMI)
Transformer input module (TRM)
Analog digital conversion module (ADM)
Table 832: Application specific modules
Module
Binary input module (BIM)
Binary output module (BOM)
Binary I/O module (IOM)
Line data communication modules (LDCM),
short range, medium range, long range, X21
Serial SPA/LON/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3
communication modules (SLM)
Optical ethernet module (OEM)
mA input module (MIM)
GPS time synchronization module (GTM)
Static output module (SOM)
IRIG-B Time synchronization module (IRIG-B)
990
1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Description
Including a regulated DC/DC converter that
supplies auxiliary voltage to all static circuits.
An internal fail alarm output is available.
Module for overall application control. All
information is processed or passed through this
module, such as configuration, settings and
communication.
The module consists of LED:s, an LCD, a push
button keyboard and an ethernet connector used
to connect a PC to the IED.
Transformer module that galvanically separates
the internal circuits from the VT and CT circuits. It
has 12 analog inputs.
Slot mounted PCB with A/D conversion.
Description
Module with 16 optically isolated binary inputs
Module with 24 single outputs or 12 double-pole
command outputs including supervision function
Module with 8 optically isolated binary inputs, 10
outputs and 2 fast signalling outputs.
Modules used for digital communication to remote
terminal.
Used for SPA/LON/IEC 608705103/DNP3
communication
PMC board for IEC 61850 based communication.
Analog input module with 6 independent,
galvanically separated channels.
Used to provide the IED with GPS time
synchronization.
Module with 6 fast static outputs and 6 change
over output relays.
Module with 2 inputs. One is used for handling
both pulse-width modulated signals and
amplitude modulated signals and one is used for
optical input type ST for PPS time synchronization.
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

21.2.2 Numeric processing module (NUM)

21.2.2.1 Introduction

The Numeric processing module (NUM), is a CPU-module that handles all

protection functions and logic.

For communication with high speed modules, e.g. analog input modules and high
speed serial interfaces, the NUM is equipped with a Compact PCI bus. The NUM
is the compact PCI system card i.e. it controls bus mastering, clock distribution and
receives interrupts.

21.2.2.2 Functionality

The NUM, Numeric processing module is a high performance, compact-PCI CPU

module. It is 6U high and occupies one slot. Contact with the backplane is via two
compact PCI connectors and an euro connector.

The NUM has one PMC slot (32-bit IEEE P1386.1 compliant) and two PC-MIP
slots onto which mezzanine cards such as SLM or LDCM can be mounted.

To reduce bus loading of the compact PCI bus in the backplane the NUM has one
internal PCI bus for internal resources and the PMC/PC-MIP slots and external PCI
accesses through the backplane are buffered in a PCI/PCI bridge.

The application code and configuration data are stored in flash memory using a
flash file system.

The NUM is equipped with a real time clock. It uses a capacitor for power backup
of the real time clock.

No forced cooling is used on this standard module because of the low power
dissipation.

991
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

21.2.2.3 Block diagram

Compact
Flash Logic

PMC
connector
PC-MIP

connector
UBM
Memory Ethernet

North
bridge

Backplane
PCI-PCI-

connector
bridge

CPU

en04000473.vsd
IEC04000473 V1 EN

Figure 430: Numeric processing module block diagram

21.2.3 Power supply module (PSM)

21.2.3.1 Introduction

The power supply module is used to provide the correct internal voltages and full
isolation between the IED and the battery system. An internal fail alarm output is
available.

21.2.3.2 Design

There are two types of the power supply module. They are designed for different
DC input voltage ranges see table 833. The power supply module contains a built-

992
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

in, self-regulated DC/DC converter that provides full isolation between the
terminal and the external battery system.

Connection diagram

IEC08000476 V2 EN

Figure 431: PSM Connection diagram.

21.2.3.3 Technical data

Table 833: PSM - Power supply module
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Auxiliary dc voltage, EL (input) EL = (24 - 60) V EL 20%
EL = (90 - 250) V EL 20%
Power consumption 50 W typically -
Auxiliary DC power in-rush < 10 A during 0.1 s -

21.2.4 Local human-machine interface (Local HMI)

Refer to section "" for information.

21.2.5 Transformer input module (TRM)

21.2.5.1 Introduction

The transformer input module is used to galvanically separate and adapt the
secondary currents and voltages generated by the measuring transformers. The
module has twelve inputs in different combinations of currents and voltage inputs.

Alternative connectors of Ring lug or Compression type can be ordered.

21.2.5.2 Design

The transformer module has 12 input transformers. There are several versions of
the module, each with a different combination of voltage and current input
transformers.

993
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

Basic versions:

6 current channels and 6 voltage channels

7 current channels and 5 voltage channels
9 current channels and 3 voltage channels
12 current channels
6 current channels

The rated values and channel type, measurement or protection, of the current inputs
are selected at order.

Transformer input module for measuring should not be used with

current transformers intended for protection purposes, due to
limitations in overload characteristics.

The TRM is connected to the ADM and NUM.

For configuration of the input and output signals, refer to section "Signal matrix
for analog inputs SMAI".

IEC08000479 V2 EN

Figure 432: TRM connection diagram

994
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

21.2.5.3 Technical data

Table 834: TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for protection transformer
modules
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Current Ir = 1 or 5 A (0.2-40) Ir

Operative range (0-100) x Ir

Permissive overload 4 Ir cont.

100 Ir for 1 s *)

Burden < 150 mVA at Ir = 5 A

< 20 mVA at Ir = 1 A

Ac voltage Ur = 110 V 0.5288 V

Operative range (0340) V

Permissive overload 420 V cont.
450 V 10 s
Burden < 20 mVA at 110 V
Frequency fr = 50/60 Hz 5%
*) max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.

Table 835: TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for measuring transformer
modules
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Current Ir = 1 or 5 A (0-1.8) Irat Ir = 1 A
(0-1.6) Irat Ir = 5 A

Permissive overload 1.1 Ir cont.

1.8 Ir for 30 min at Ir = 1 A
1.6 Ir for 30 min at Ir = 5 A

Burden < 350 mVA at Ir = 5 A

< 200 mVA at Ir = 1 A

Ac voltage Ur = 110 V 0.5288 V

Operative range (0340) V

Permissive overload 420 V cont.
450 V 10 s
Burden < 20 mVA at 110 V
Frequency fr = 50/60 Hz 5%

995
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

21.2.6 Analog digital conversion module, with time

synchronization (ADM)

21.2.6.1 Introduction

The Analog/Digital module has twelve analog inputs, 2 PC-MIP slots and 1 PMC
slot. The PC-MIP slot is used for PC-MIP cards and the PMC slot for PMC cards
according to table 836. The OEM card should always be mounted on the ADM board.

Table 836: PC-MIP cards and PMC cards

PC-MIP cards PMC cards
LDCM SLM
LR-LDCM OEM 1 ch
MR-LDCM OEM 2 ch
X21-LDCM
IRIG-B
RS485

21.2.6.2 Design

The Analog digital conversion module input signals are voltage and current from
the transformer module. Shunts are used to adapt the current signals to the
electronic voltage level. To gain dynamic range for the current inputs, two shunts
with separate A\D channels are used for each input current. In this way a 20 bit
dynamic range is obtained with a 16 bit A\D converter.

Input signals are sampled with a sampling freqency of 5 kHz at 50 Hz system

frequency and 6 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.

The A\D converted signals goes through a filter with a cut off frequency of 500 Hz
and are reported to the numerical module (NUM) with 1 kHz at 50 Hz system
frequency and 1,2 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.

996
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

Channel 1
AD1 Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
AD2
Channel 5
1.2v Channel 6
AD3 Channel 7
Channel 8
Channel 9
AD4 Channel 10
Channel 11
Channel 12

PMC

level shift

PC-MIP
2.5v

PCI to PCI

PC-MIP

en05000474.vsd
IEC05000474 V1 EN

Figure 433: The ADM layout

997
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

21.2.7 Binary input module (BIM)

21.2.7.1 Introduction

The binary input module has 16 optically isolated inputs and is available in two
versions, one standard and one with enhanced pulse counting capabilities on the
inputs to be used with the pulse counter function. The binary inputs are freely
programmable and can be used for the input of logical signals to any of the
functions. They can also be included in the disturbance recording and event-
recording functions. This enables extensive monitoring and evaluation of operation
of the IED and for all associated electrical circuits.

21.2.7.2 Design

The Binary input module contains 16 optical isolated binary inputs. The voltage
level of the binary input is selected at order.

For configuration of the input signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for binary
inputs SMBI".

A signal discriminator detects and blocks oscillating signals. When blocked, a

hysteresis function may be set to release the input at a chosen frequency, making it
possible to use the input for pulse counting. The blocking frequency may also be set.

Well defined input high and input low voltages ensure normal operation at battery
supply earth faults, see figure 434 The figure shows the typical operating
characteristics of the binary inputs of the four voltage levels.

The standard version of binary inputs gives an improved capability to withstand

disturbances and should generally be used when pulse counting is not required.
Inputs are debounced by software.

I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance
and stored by the event recorder if present.

998
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

[V]

300

176
144
88
72
38
32
19
17

24/30V 48/60V 110/125V 220/250V

xx06000391-2-en.vsd
IEC06000391 V2 EN

Figure 434: Voltage dependence for the binary inputs

Operation

Operation uncertain

No operation
IEC99000517-ABC V1 EN

This binary input module communicates with the Numerical module (NUM).

The design of all binary inputs enables the burn off of the oxide of the relay contact
connected to the input, despite the low, steady-state power consumption, which is
shown in figure 435 and 436.

999
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

[mA]
50

55 [ms]

en07000104-3.vsd
IEC07000104 V3 EN

Figure 435: Approximate binary input inrush current for the standard version of
BIM.

[mA]
50

5.5 [ms]

en07000105-1.vsd
IEC07000105 V2 EN

Figure 436: Approximate binary input inrush current for the BIM version with
enhanced pulse counting capabilities.

1000
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

IEC99000503 V3 EN

Figure 437: Connection diagram

21.2.7.3 Signals
Table 837: BIM Output signals
Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Binary input module status
BI1 BOOLEAN Binary input 1
BI2 BOOLEAN Binary input 2
BI3 BOOLEAN Binary input 3
BI4 BOOLEAN Binary input 4
BI5 BOOLEAN Binary input 5
BI6 BOOLEAN Binary input 6
BI7 BOOLEAN Binary input 7
Table continues on next page

1001
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

Name Type Description

BI8 BOOLEAN Binary input 8
BI9 BOOLEAN Binary input 9
BI10 BOOLEAN Binary input 10
BI11 BOOLEAN Binary input 11
BI12 BOOLEAN Binary input 12
BI13 BOOLEAN Binary input 13
BI14 BOOLEAN Binary input 14
BI15 BOOLEAN Binary input 15
BI16 BOOLEAN Binary input 16

21.2.7.4 Settings
Table 838: BIM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
DebounceTime 0.001 - 0.020 s 0.001 0.001 Debounce time for binary inputs
OscBlock 1 - 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit
OscRelease 1 - 30 Hz 1 30 Oscillation release limit

21.2.7.5 Monitored data

Table 839: BIM Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Binary input module
1=Error status

21.2.7.6 Technical data

Table 840: BIM - Binary input module
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Binary inputs 16 -
DC voltage, RL 24/30 V RL 20%
48/60 V RL 20%
110/125 V RL 20%
220/250 V RL 20%
Power consumption
24/30 V max. 0.05 W/input -
48/60 V max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V max. 0.4 W/input
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max -
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 140 Hz
Release settable 130 Hz

1002
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

Table 841: BIM - Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Binary inputs 16 -
DC voltage, RL 24/30 V RL 20%
48/60 V RL 20%
110/125 V RL 20%
220/250 V RL 20%
Power consumption
24/30 V max. 0.05 W/input -
48/60 V max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V max. 0.4 W/input
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max -
Balanced counter input frequency 40 pulses/s max -
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 140 Hz
Release settable 130 Hz

21.2.8 Binary output modules (BOM)

21.2.8.1 Introduction

The binary output module has 24 independent output relays and is used for trip
output or any signaling purpose.

21.2.8.2 Design

The binary output module (BOM) has 24 software supervised output relays. Each
pair of relays have a common power source input to the contacts, see figure 438.
This should be considered when connecting the wiring to the connection terminal
on the back of the IED.

The high closing and carrying current capability allows connection directly to
breaker trip and closing coils. If breaking capability is required to manage fail of
the breaker auxiliary contacts normally breaking the trip coil current, a parallel
reinforcement is required.

For configuration of the output signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for binary
outputs SMBO".

1003
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

Output module

xx00000299.vsd

IEC00000299 V1 EN

Figure 438: Relay pair example

1 Output connection from relay 1

2 Output signal power source connection
3 Output connection from relay 2

IEC99000505 V3 EN

Figure 439: Connection diagram

1004
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

21.2.8.3 Signals
Table 842: BOM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block binary outputs
BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 1
BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 2
BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 3
BO4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 4
BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 5
BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 6
BO7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 7
BO8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 8
BO9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 9
BO10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 10
BO11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 11
BO12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 12
BO13 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 13
BO14 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 14
BO15 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 15
BO16 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 16
BO17 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 17
BO18 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 18
BO19 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 19
BO20 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 20
BO21 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 21
BO22 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 22
BO23 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 23
BO24 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 24

Table 843: BOM Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Binary output part of IOM module status

21.2.8.4 Settings
Table 844: BOM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On

1005
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

21.2.8.5 Monitored data

Table 845: BOM Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Binary output part of
1=Error IOM module status
BO1VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 1 value
0=0
BO1FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 1 force
1=Forced
BO1 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 1 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO2VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 2 value
0=0
BO2FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 2 force
1=Forced
BO2 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 2 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO3VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 3 value
0=0
BO3FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 3 force
1=Forced
BO3 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 3 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO4VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 4 value
0=0
BO4FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 4 force
1=Forced
BO4 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 4 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO5VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 5 value
0=0
BO5FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 5 force
1=Forced
BO5 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 5 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO6VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 6 value
0=0
BO6FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 6 force
1=Forced
BO6 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 6 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO7VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 7 value
0=0
Table continues on next page

1006
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

BO7FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 7 force
1=Forced
BO7 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 7 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO8VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 8 value
0=0
BO8FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 8 force
1=Forced
BO8 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 8 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO9VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 9 value
0=0
BO9FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 9 force
1=Forced
BO9 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 9 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO10VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 10 value
0=0
BO10FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 10 force
1=Forced
BO10 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 10 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO11VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - nary output 11 value
0=0
BO11FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 11 force
1=Forced
BO11 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 11 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO12VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 12 value
0=0
BO12FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 12 force
1=Forced
BO12 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 12 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO13VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 13 value
0=0
BO13FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 13 force
1=Forced
BO13 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 13 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO14VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 14 value
0=0
BO14FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 14 force
1=Forced
Table continues on next page

1007
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

BO14 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 14 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO15VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 15 value
0=0
BO15FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 15 force
1=Forced
BO15 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 15 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO16VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 16 value
0=0
BO16FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 16 force
1=Forced
BO16 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 16 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO17VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 17 value
0=0
B017FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 17 force
1=Forced
BO17 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 17 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO18VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 18 value
0=0
BO18FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 18 force
1=Forced
BO18 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 18 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO19VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 19 value
0=0
BO19FORCE BOOLEAN 1=Forced - Binary output 19 force
0=Normal
BO19 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 19 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO20VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 20 value
0=0
BO20FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 20 force
1=Forced
BO20 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 20 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO21VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 21 value
0=0
BO21FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 21 force
1=Forced
Table continues on next page

1008
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

BO21 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 21 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO22VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 22 value
0=0
BO22FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 22 force
1=Forced
BO22 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 22 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO23VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 23 value
0=0
BO23FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 23 force
1=Forced
BO23 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 23 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO24VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 24 value
0=0
BO24FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - nary output 24 force
1=Forced
BO24 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 24 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked

21.2.8.6 Technical data

Table 846: BOM - Binary output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays
Binary outputs 24
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms
Current carrying capacity
Per relay, continuous 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A
Per process connector pin, continuous 12 A
Making capacity at inductive load with L/R>10 ms
0.2 s 30 A
1.0 s 10 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos j>0.4 250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms 48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A

Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously. After 6 ms

an additional 24 outputs may be activated. The activation time for
the 96 outputs must not exceed 200 ms. 48 outputs can be activated

1009
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

during 1 s. Continued activation is possible with respect to current

consumption but after 5 minutes the temperature rise will adversely
affect the hardware life. Maximum two relays per BOM/IOM
should be activated continuously due to power dissipation.

21.2.9 Static binary output module (SOM)

21.2.9.1 Introduction

The static binary output module has six fast static outputs and six change over
output relays for use in applications with high speed requirements.

21.2.9.2 Design

The Static output module (SOM) have 6 normally open (NO) static outputs and 6
electromechanical relay outputs with change over contacts.

The SOM consists mainly of:

An MCU
A CAN-driver
6 static relays outputs
6 electromechanical relay outputs
A DC/DC converter
Connectors interfacing
CAN-bus to backplane CBM
IO-connectors to binary outputs (2 pcs.)

The following parts are supervised:

Interruption in relay coil

Short circuit of relay coil
Driver failure

1010
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

IEC09000974-1-en.vsd

IEC09000974 V1 EN

Figure 440: SOM Static output principle

IEC09000975 V1 EN

Figure 441: Connection diagram of the static output module

21.2.9.3 Signals
Table 847: SOM Input signals
Name Type Default Description
BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 Block binary outputs
BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 1
BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 2
BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 3
BO4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 4
Table continues on next page

1011
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

Name Type Default Description

BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 5
BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 6
BO7 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 7
BO8 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 8
BO9 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 9
BO10 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 10
BO11 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 11
BO12 BOOLEAN 0 Static binary output 12

Table 848: SOM Output signals

Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Static binary output module status

21.2.9.4 Settings
Table 849: SOM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On

21.2.9.5 Monitored data

Table 850: SOM Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Static binary output
1=Error module status
BO1VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 1 value
0=0
BO1FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 1 force
1=Forced
BO1 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 1 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO2VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 2 value
0=0
BO2FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 2 force
1=Forced
BO2 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 2 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO3VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 3 value
0=0
Table continues on next page

1012
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

BO3FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 3 force
1=Forced
BO3 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 3 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO4VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 4 value
0=0
BO4FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 4 force
1=Forced
BO4 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 4 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO5VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 5 value
0=0
BO5FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 5 force
1=Forced
BO5 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 5 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO6VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 6 value
0=0
BO6FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 6 force
1=Forced
BO6 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 6 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO7VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 7 value
0=0
BO7FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 7 force
1=Forced
BO7 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 7 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO8VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 8 value
0=0
BO8FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 8 force
1=Forced
BO8 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 8 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO9VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 9 value
0=0
BO9FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 9 force
1=Forced
BO9 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 9 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO10VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 10 value
0=0
BO10FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 10 force
1=Forced
Table continues on next page

1013
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

BO10 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 10 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO11VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 11 value
0=0
BO11FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 11 force
1=Forced
BO11 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 11 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO12VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 12 value
0=0
BO12FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 12 force
1=Forced
BO12 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 12 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked

21.2.9.6 Technical data

Table 851: SOM - Static Output Module (reference standard: IEC 61810-2): Static binary outputs
Function of quantity Static binary output trip
Rated voltage 48 - 60 VDC 110 - 250 VDC
Number of outputs 6 6
Impedance open state ~300 k ~810 k
Test voltage across open contact, No galvanic separation No galvanic separation
1 min
Current carrying capacity:
Continuous 5A 5A
1.0s 10A 10A
Making capacity at capacitive load
with the maximum capacitance of
0.2 F :
0.2s 30A 30A
1.0s 10A 10A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R 48V / 1A 110V / 0.4A
40ms
60V / 0.75A 125V / 0.35A
220V / 0.2A
250V / 0.15A
Operating time <1ms <1ms

1014
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

Table 852: SOM - Static Output module data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2):
Electromechanical relay outputs
Function of quantity Trip and signal relays
Max system voltage 250V AC/DC
Number of outputs 6
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000V rms
Current carrying capacity:
Continuous 8A
1.0s 10A
Making capacity at capacitive load with the
maximum capacitance of 0.2 F:
0.2s 30A
1.0s 10A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R 40ms 48V / 1A
110V / 0.4A
125V / 0.35A
220V / 0.2A
250V / 0.15A

21.2.10 Binary input/output module (IOM)

21.2.10.1 Introduction

The binary input/output module is used when only a few input and output channels
are needed. The ten standard output channels are used for trip output or any
signaling purpose. The two high speed signal output channels are used for
applications where short operating time is essential. Eight optically isolated binary
inputs cater for required binary input information.

21.2.10.2 Design

The binary input/output module is available in two basic versions, one with
unprotected contacts and one with MOV (Metal Oxide Varistor) protected contacts.

Inputs are designed to allow oxide burn-off from connected contacts, and increase
the disturbance immunity during normal protection operate times. This is achieved
with a high peak inrush current while having a low steady-state current, see figure
435. Inputs are debounced by software.

Well defined input high and input low voltages ensures normal operation at battery
supply earth faults, see figure 434.

The voltage level of the inputs is selected when ordering.

1015
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance
and stored by the event recorder if present.

The binary I/O module, IOM, has eight optically isolated inputs and ten output
relays. One of the outputs has a change-over contact. The nine remaining output
contacts are connected in two groups. One group has five contacts with a common
and the other group has four contacts with a common, to be used as single-output
channels, see figure 442.

The binary I/O module also has two high speed output channels where a reed relay
is connected in parallel to the standard output relay.

For configuration of the input and output signals, refer to sections "Signal matrix
for binary inputs SMBI" and "Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO".

The making capacity of the reed relays are limited.

1016
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

IEC1MRK002801-AA11-UTAN-RAM V2 EN

Figure 442: Binary in/out module (IOM), input contacts named XA corresponds
to rear position X31, X41, and so on, and output contacts named
XB to rear position X32, X42, and so on

The binary input/output module version with MOV protected contacts can for
example be used in applications where breaking high inductive load would cause
excessive wear of the contacts.

The test voltage across open contact is lower for this version of the
binary input/output module.

1017
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

xx04000069.vsd

IEC04000069 V1 EN

Figure 443: IOM with MOV protection, relay example

21.2.10.3 Signals
Table 853: IOMIN Output signals
Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Binary input part of IOM module status
BI1 BOOLEAN Binary input 1
BI2 BOOLEAN Binary input 2
BI3 BOOLEAN Binary input 3
BI4 BOOLEAN Binary input 4
BI5 BOOLEAN Binary input 5
BI6 BOOLEAN Binary input 6
BI7 BOOLEAN Binary input 7
BI8 BOOLEAN Binary input 8

Table 854: IOMOUT Input signals

Name Type Default Description
BLKOUT BOOLEAN 0 Block binary outputs
BO1 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 1
BO2 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 2
BO3 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 3
BO4 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 4
BO5 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 5
BO6 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 6
BO7 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 7
BO8 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 8
BO9 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 9
BO10 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 10
BO11 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 11
BO12 BOOLEAN 0 Binary output 12

1018
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

21.2.10.4 Settings
Table 855: IOMIN Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Binary input/output module in operation
On (On) or not (Off)
DebounceTime 0.001 - 0.020 s 0.001 0.001 Debounce time for binary inputs
OscBlock 1 - 40 Hz 1 40 Oscillation block limit
OscRelease 1 - 30 Hz 1 30 Oscillation release limit

21.2.10.5 Monitored data

Table 856: IOMIN Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Binary input part of IOM
1=Error module status

Table 857: IOMOUT Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
BO1VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 1 value
0=0
BO1FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 1 force
1=Forced
BO1 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 1 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO2VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 2 value
0=0
BO2FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 2 force
1=Forced
BO2 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 2 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO3VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 3 value
0=0
BO3FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 3 force
1=Forced
BO3 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 3 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO4VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 4 value
0=0
BO4FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 4 force
1=Forced
BO4 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 4 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
Table continues on next page

1019
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

BO5VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 5 value
0=0
BO5FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 5 force
1=Forced
BO5 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 5 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO6VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 6 value
0=0
BO6FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 6 force
1=Forced
BO6 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 6 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO7VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 7 value
0=0
BO7FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 7 force
1=Forced
BO7 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 7 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO8VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 8 value
0=0
BO8FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 8 force
1=Forced
BO8 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 8 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO9VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 9 value
0=0
BO9FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 9 force
1=Forced
BO9 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 9 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO10VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 10 value
0=0
BO10FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 10 force
1=Forced
BO10 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 10 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO11VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 11 value
0=0
BO11FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 11 force
1=Forced
BO11 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 11 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked
Table continues on next page

1020
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

BO12VALUE BOOLEAN 1=1 - Binary output 12 value
0=0
BO12FORCE BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 12 force
1=Forced
BO12 BOOLEAN 0=Normal - Binary output 12 status
1=Forced
2=Blocked

21.2.10.6 Technical data

Table 858: IOM - Binary input/output module
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Binary inputs 8 -
DC voltage, RL 24/30 V RL 20%
48/60 V RL 20%
110/125 V RL 20%
220/250 V RL 20%
Power consumption -
24/30 V max. 0.05 W/input
48/60 V max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V max. 0.4 W/input

Table 859: IOM - Binary input/output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reed
relay)
Binary outputs 10 2
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC 250 V DC
Test voltage across open contact, 1000 V rms 800 V DC
1 min
Current carrying capacity
Per relay, continuous 8A 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A 10 A
Per process connector pin, 12 A 12 A
continuous
Making capacity at inductive load
with L/R>10 ms

0.2 s 30 A 0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 0.4 A
Making capacity at resistive load
220250 V/0.4 A
0.2 s 30 A 110125 V/0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 4860 V/0.2 A
2430 V/0.1 A
Table continues on next page

1021
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

Function or quantity Trip and signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reed
relay)
Breaking capacity for AC, cos > 250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A
0.4
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R 48 V/1 A 48 V/1 A
< 40 ms 110 V/0.4 A 110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A 125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A 220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A 250 V/0.15 A
Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF

Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously. After 6 ms

an additional 24 outputs may be activated. The activation time for
the 96 outputs must not exceed 200 ms. 48 outputs can be activated
during 1 s. Continued activation is possible with respect to current
consumption but after 5 minutes the temperature rise will adversely
affect the hardware life.Maximum two relays per BOM/IOM
should be activated continuously due to power dissipation.

Table 860: IOM with MOV - contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)

Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel
reed relay)
Binary outputs IOM: 10 IOM: 2
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC 250 V DC
Test voltage across open 250 V rms 250 V rms
contact, 1 min
Current carrying capacity
Per relay, continuous 8A 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A 10 A
Per process connector pin, 12 A 12 A
continuous
Making capacity at inductive
loadwith L/R>10 ms
0.2 s 30 A 0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 0.4 A
Making capacity at resistive load
220250 V/0.4 A
0.2 s 30 A 110125 V/0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 4860 V/0.2 A
2430 V/0.1 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos 250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A
j>0.4
Breaking capacity for DC with L/ 48 V/1 A 48 V/1 A
R < 40 ms 110 V/0.4 A 110 V/0.4 A
220 V/0.2 A 220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A 250 V/0.15 A
Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF

1022
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously. After 6 ms

an additional 24 outputs may be activated. The activation time for
the 96 outputs must not exceed 200 ms. 48 outputs can be activated
during 1 s. Continued activation is possible with respect to current
consumption but after 5 minutes the temperature rise will adversely
affect the hardware life. Maximum two relays per BOM/IOM
should be activated continuously due to power dissipation.

21.2.11 mA input module (MIM)

21.2.11.1 Introduction

The milli-ampere input module is used to interface transducer signals in the 20 to

+20 mA range from for example OLTC position, temperature or pressure
transducers. The module has six independent, galvanically separated channels.

21.2.11.2 Design

The Milliampere Input Module has six independent analog channels with separated
protection, filtering, reference, A/D-conversion and optical isolation for each input
making them galvanically isolated from each other and from the rest of the module.

For configuration of the input signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for mA
inputs SMMI".

The analog inputs measure DC current in the range of +/- 20 mA. The A/D
converter has a digital filter with selectable filter frequency. All inputs are
calibrated separately The filter parameters and the calibration factors are stored in a
non-volatile memory on the module.

The calibration circuitry monitors the module temperature and starts an automatical
calibration procedure if the temperature drift is outside the allowed range.

1023
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

IEC99000504 V2 EN

Figure 444: MIM connection diagram

21.2.11.3 Signals
Table 861: MIM Output signals
Name Type Description
STATUS BOOLEAN Milliampere input module status
CH1 REAL Analog input 1
CH2 REAL Analog input 2
CH3 REAL Analog input 3
Table continues on next page

1024
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

Name Type Description

CH4 REAL Analog input 4
CH5 REAL Analog input 5
CH6 REAL Analog input 6

21.2.11.4 Settings
Table 862: MIM Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
Operation Off - - On Operation Off/On
On
MaxReportT 0 - 3600 s 1 1 Maximum time between reports
EnDeadBandCh1 Off - - Off Enable amplitude deadband reporting for
On channel 1
DeadBandCh1 0.00 - 20.00 mA 0.01 1.00 Deadband amplitude for channel 1
IMinCh1 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 4.00 Min current of transducer for Channel 1
IMaxCh1 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 20.00 Max current of transducer for Channel 1
ValueMinCh1 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 4.000 Min primary value corr. to IMinCh1
- 10000000000.000
ValueMaxCh1 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 20.000 Max primary value corr. to IMaxCh1
- 10000000000.000
EnDeadBandCh2 Off - - Off Enable amplitude deadband reporting for
On channel 2
DeadBandCh2 0.00 - 20.00 mA 0.01 1.00 Deadband amplitude for channel 2
IMinCh2 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 4.00 Min current of transducer for Channel 2
IMaxCh2 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 20.00 Max current of transducer for Channel 2
ValueMinCh2 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 4.000 Min primary value corr. to IMinCh2
- 10000000000.000
ValueMaxCh2 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 20.000 Max primary value corr. to IMaxCh2
- 10000000000.000
EnDeadBandCh3 Off - - Off Enable amplitude deadband reporting for
On channel 3
DeadBandCh3 0.00 - 20.00 mA 0.01 1.00 Deadband amplitude for channel 3
IMinCh3 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 4.00 Min current of transducer for Channel 3
IMaxCh3 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 20.00 Max current of transducer for Channel 3
ValueMinCh3 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 4.000 Min primary value corr. to IMinCh3
- 10000000000.000
ValueMaxCh3 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 20.000 Max primary value corr. to IMaxCh3
- 10000000000.000
EnDeadBandCh4 Off - - Off Enable amplitude deadband reporting for
On channel 4
DeadBandCh4 0.00 - 20.00 mA 0.01 1.00 Deadband amplitude for channel 4
IMinCh4 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 4.00 Min current of transducer for Channel 4
IMaxCh4 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 20.00 Max current of transducer for Channel 4
Table continues on next page

1025
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

ValueMinCh4 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 4.000 Min primary value corr. to IMinCh4
- 10000000000.000
ValueMaxCh4 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 20.000 Max primary value corr. to IMaxCh4
- 10000000000.000
EnDeadBandCh5 Off - - Off Enable amplitude deadband reporting for
On channel 5
DeadBandCh5 0.00 - 20.00 mA 0.01 1.00 Deadband amplitude for channel 5
IMinCh5 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 4.00 Min current of transducer for Channel 5
IMaxCh5 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 20.00 Max current of transducer for Channel 5
ValueMinCh5 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 4.000 Min primary value corr. to IMinCh5
- 10000000000.000
ValueMaxCh5 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 20.000 Max primary value corr. to IMaxCh5
- 10000000000.000
EnDeadBandCh6 Off - - Off Enable amplitude deadband reporting for
On channel 6
DeadBandCh6 0.00 - 20.00 mA 0.01 1.00 Deadband amplitude for channel 6
IMinCh6 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 4.00 Min current of transducer for Channel 6
IMaxCh6 -25.00 - 25.00 mA 0.01 20.00 Max current of transducer for Channel 6
ValueMinCh6 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 4.000 Min primary value corr. to IMinCh6
- 10000000000.000
ValueMaxCh6 -10000000000.000 - 0.001 20.000 Max primary value corr. to IMaxCh6
- 10000000000.000

21.2.11.5 Monitored data

Table 863: MIM Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
STATUS BOOLEAN 0=Ok - Milliampere input module
1=Error status
CH1 REAL - - Analog input 1
CH2 REAL - - Analog input 2
CH3 REAL - - Analog input 3
CH4 REAL - - Analog input 4
CH5 REAL - - Analog input 5
CH6 REAL - - Analog input 6
CH1 REAL - A Service value analog
input 1
CH2 REAL - A Service value analog
input 2
CH3 REAL - A Service value analog
input 3
Table continues on next page

1026
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description

CH4 REAL - A Service value analog
input 4
CH5 REAL - A Service value analog
input 5
CH6 REAL - A Service value analog
input 6

21.2.11.6 Technical data

Table 864: MIM - mA input module
Quantity: Rated value: Nominal range:
Input resistance Rin = 194 Ohm -

Input range 5, 10, 20mA -

0-5, 0-10, 0-20, 4-20mA
Power consumption -
each mA-board 2W
each mA input 0.1 W

21.2.12 Serial and LON communication module (SLM)

21.2.12.1 Introduction

The serial and LON communication module (SLM) is used for SPA, IEC
60870-5-103, DNP3 and LON communication. The module has two optical
communication ports for plastic/plastic, plastic/glass or glass/glass. One port is
used for serial communication (SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3 port) and one
port is dedicated for LON communication.

21.2.12.2 Design

The SLM is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the
NUM module. Three variants of the SLM are available with different combinations
of optical fiber connectors, see figure 445. The plastic fiber connectors are of snap-
in type and the glass fiber connectors are of ST type.

1027
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

I
EC0500760=1=en=Or
igi
nal
.psd
IEC05000760 V2 EN

Figure 445: The SLM variants, component side view

1 Receiver, LON
2 Transmitter, LON
3 Receiver, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3
4 Transmitter, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3
A Snap in connector for plastic fiber
B ST connector for glass fiber

Observe that when the SLM connectors are viewed from the rear
side of the IED, contact 4 above is in the uppermost position and
contact 1 in the lowest position.

21.2.12.3 Technical data

Table 865: SLM LON port
Quantity Range or value
Optical connector Glass fibre: type ST
Plastic fibre: type HFBR snap-in
Fibre, optical budget Glass fibre: 11 dB (1000 m typically *)
Plastic fibre: 7 dB (10 m typically *)
Fibre diameter Glass fibre: 62.5/125 mm
Plastic fibre: 1 mm
*) depending on optical budget calculation

1028
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

Table 866: SLM SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3 port

Quantity Range or value
Optical connector Glass fibre: type ST
Plastic fibre: type HFBR snap-in
Fibre, optical budget Glass fibre: 11 dB (3000ft/1000 m typically *)
Plastic fibre: 7 dB (80ft/25 m typically *)
Fibre diameter Glass fibre: 62.5/125 mm
Plastic fibre: 1 mm
*) depending on optical budget calculation

21.2.13 Galvanic RS485 communication module

21.2.13.1 Introduction

The Galvanic RS485 communication module (RS485) is used for DNP3.0 and IEC
60870-5-103 communication. The module has one RS485 communication port.
The RS485 is a balanced serial communication that can be used either in 2-wire or
4-wire connections. A 2-wire connection uses the same signal for RX and TX and
is a multidrop communication with no dedicated Master or slave. This variant
requires however a control of the output. The 4-wire connection has separated
signals for RX and TX multidrop communication with a dedicated Master and the
rest are slaves. No special control signal is needed in this case.

21.2.13.2 Design

The RS485 is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the
NUM module.

RS485 connector pinouts

The arrangement for the pins in the RS485 connector (figure 446) are presented in
table 867:

Table 867: The arrangement for the pins

Pin Name 2-wire Name 4-wire Description

1 RS485+ TX+ Receive/transmit high or transmit high
2 RS485 TX Receive/transmit
3 Term T-Term Termination resistor for transmitter (and receiver
in 2wir case) (connect to TX+)
4 N.A. R-Term Termination resistor for receiver (connect to RX
+)
5 N.A. RX Receive low
6 N.A. RX+ Receive high

1029
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

Angle
bracket

Screw
1
terminal
X3 2
1
2 RS485
3 PWB
Screw
4
terminal
5
X1
6

Backplane

IEC06000517 V1 EN

Figure 446: RS485 connector

2-wire: Connect pin 1 to pin 6 and pin 2 to pin 5

Termination (2-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3

Termination (4-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3 and pin 4 to pin 6

Soft ground connector pinouts

A second 2-pole screw connector is used for the connection of IO-ground. It can be
used in two combinations like:

Unconnected: No ground of the IO-part .

Soft grounded: The IO is connected to the GND with an RC net parallel with a
MOV

21.2.13.3 Technical data

Table 868: Galvanic RS485 communication module
Quantity Range or value
Communication speed 240019200 bauds
External connectors RS-485 6-pole connector
Soft ground 2-pole connector

1030
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

21.2.14 Optical ethernet module (OEM)

21.2.14.1 Introduction

The optical fast-ethernet module is used to connect an IED to the communication

buses (like the station bus) that use the IEC 61850-8-1 protocol (OEM rear port A,
B). The process bus use the IEC 61850-9-2LE protocol (OEM rear port C, D). The
module has one or two optical ports with ST connectors.

21.2.14.2 Functionality

The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is used when communication systems

according to IEC6185081 have been implemented.

21.2.14.3 Design

The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is a PMC card and mounted as a mezzanine
card on the ADM. The OEM is a 100BASE-FXmodule and available as a single
channel or double channel unit.

IEC05000472=1=en=Original.vsd
IEC05000472 V3 EN

Figure 447: OEM layout, standard PMC format 2 channels

1: Transmitter
2: Receiver

1031
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

21.2.14.4 Technical data

Table 869: OEM - Optical ethernet module
Quantity Rated value
Number of channels 1 or 2 (port A, B for IEC 61850-8-1 and port C, D
for IEC 61850-9-2LE)
Standard IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-FX
Type of fiber 62.5/125 mm multimode fibre
Wave length 1300 nm
Optical connector Type ST
Communication speed Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit/s

21.2.15 Line data communication module (LDCM)

21.2.15.1 Introduction

The line data communication module (LDCM) is used for communication between
the IEDs situated at distances <110 km or from the IED to optical to electrical
converter with G.703 interface located on a distances <3 km away. The LDCM
module sends and rereceives data, to and from another LDCM module. The IEEE/
ANSI standard format is used.

The line data communication module is used for binary signal transfer. The module
has one optical port with ST connectors see figure 448.

Line data communication module LDCM

Each module has one optical port, one for each remote end to which the IED
communicates.

Alternative cards for Long range (1550 nm single mode), Medium range (1310 nm
single mode) and Short range (850 nm multi mode) are available.

Class 1 laser product. Take adequate measures to protect the eyes.

Never look into the laser beam.

21.2.15.2 Design

The LDCM is a PCMIP type II single width format module. The LDCM can be
mounted on:

the ADM
the NUM

1032
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

ST

IO-connector
ST

IEC07000087=1=en=Original.vsd

IEC07000087 V2 EN

Figure 448: The SR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width format with two
PCI connectors and one I/O ST type connector

C
IEC06000393=1=en=Original.vsd

IEC06000393 V2 EN

Figure 449: The MR-LDCM and LR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width
format with two PCI connectors and one I/O FC/PC type connector

21.2.15.3 Technical data

1033
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

Table 870: Line data communication module

Characteristic Range or value
Type of LDCM Short range (SR) Medium range (MR) Long range (LR)
Type of fibre Graded-index Singlemode 9/125 Singlemode 9/125 m
multimode m
62.5/125 m
Peak Emission
Wave length 820 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm
Nominal 865 nm 1330 nm 1580 nm
Maximum 792 nm 1290 nm 1520 nm
Minimum
Optical budget 13 dB (typical 22 dB (typical 26 dB (typical distance 110 km *)
Graded-index distance about 3 distance 80 km *)
multimode 62.5/125 km *)
mm, 9 dB (typical
distance about 2
km *)
Graded-index
multimode 50/125
mm

Optical connector Type ST Type FC/PC Type FC/PC

Protocol C37.94 C37.94 C37.94 implementation **)
implementation **)
Data transmission Synchronous Synchronous Synchronous
Transmission rate / 2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s 2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s 2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s
Data rate
Clock source Internal or Internal or derived Internal or derived from received
derived from from received signal signal
received signal
*) depending on optical budget calculation
**) C37.94 originally defined just for multimode; using same header, configuration and data format as
C37.94

21.2.16 Galvanic X.21 line data communication (X.21-LDCM)

21.2.16.1 Introduction

The galvanic X.21 line data communication module is used for connection to
telecommunication equipment, for example leased telephone lines. The module
supports 64 kbit/s data communication between IEDs.

Examples of applications:

Line differential protection

Binary signal transfer

1034
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

21.2.16.2 Design

The galvanic X.21 line data communication module uses a ABB specific PC*MIP
Type II format.

C
en07000196.vsd
IEC07000196 V1 EN

Figure 450: Overview of the X.21 LDCM module

1 4

1 8

9 15

3 2
en07000239.wmf
IEC07000239 V1 EN

Figure 451: The X.21 LDCM module external connectors

1. Ground selection connector for IO, screw terminals, 2-pole

2. Ground pin
3. Soft ground pin, see figure 452
4. X.21 Micro D-sub 15 pole male connector according to the V11 (X:27)
balanced version

1035
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

I/O

100kW 100nF

Soft ground

en07000242.vsd
IEC07000242 V1 EN

Figure 452: Schematic view of soft ground

Grounding

At special problems with ground loops, the soft ground connection for the IO-
ground can be tested.

Three different kinds of grounding principles can be set (used for fault tracing):
1. Direct ground - The normal grounding is direct ground, connect terminal 2
direct to the chassi.
2. No ground - Leave the connector without any connection.
3. Soft ground - Connect soft ground pin (3), see figure 451

X.21 connector

Table 871: Pinout for the X.21 communication connector

Pin number Signal

1 Shield (ground)
2 TXD A
3 Control A
4 RXD A
6 Signal timing A
8 Ground
9 TXD B
10 Control B
11 RXD B
13 Signal timing B
5,7,12,14,15 Not used

1036
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

21.2.16.3 Functionality

The data format is HDLC. The speed for the transmission of the messages used is
64 kbit/s.

A maximum of 100 meter of cable is allowed to ensure the quality of the data
(deviation from X.21 standard cable length).

Synchronization

The X.21 LDCM works like a DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) and is normally
expecting synchronization from the DCE (Data Circuit Equipment). The
transmission is normally synchronized to the Signal Element Timing signal when a
device is a DTE. When the signal is high it will read the data at the receiver and
when the signal is low it will write data to the transmitter. This behaviour can be
inverted in the control register.

Normally an external multiplexer is used and it should act like the master.

When two X.21 LDCM is directly communicating with each other one must be set
as a master generating the synchronization for the other (the slave). The DTE
Signal Element Timing is created from the internal 64 kHz clock.

The Byte Timing signal is not used in ABB devices.

21.2.16.4 Technical data

Table 872: Galvanic X.21 line data communication module (X.21-LDCM)
Quantity Range or value
Connector, X.21 Micro D-sub, 15-pole male, 1.27 mm (0.050") pitch
Connector, ground selection 2 pole screw terminal
Standard CCITT X21
Communication speed 64 kbit/s
Insulation 1 kV
Maximum cable length 100 m

21.2.17 GPS time synchronization module (GTM)

21.2.17.1 Introduction

This module includes a GPS receiver used for time synchronization. The GPS has
one SMA contact for connection to an antenna. It also includes an optical PPS ST-
connector output.

1037
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

21.2.17.2 Design

The GTM is a PCMIP-format card and is placed only on one of the ADM slots.
The antenna input connector is shielded and directly attached to a grounded plate to
eliminate the risk of electromagnetic interference.

All communication between the GCM and the NUM is via the PCI-bus. PPS time
data is sent from the GCM to the rest of the time system to provide 1s accuracy at
sampling level. An optical transmitter for PPS output is available for time
synchronization of another relay with an optical PPS input. The PPS output
connector is of ST-type for multimode fibre and could be used up to 1 km.

21.2.17.3 Monitored data

Table 873: SYNCHGPS Monitored data
Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
NoOfSatellites INTEGER - - Number of GPS signals
from satellites

21.2.17.4 Technical data

Table 874: GPS time synchronization module (GTM)
Function Range or value Accuracy
Receiver 1s relative UTC
Time to reliable time reference with antenna in new <30 minutes
position or after power loss longer than 1 month
Time to reliable time reference after a power loss <15 minutes
longer than 48 hours
Time to reliable time reference after a power loss <5 minutes
shorter than 48 hours

21.2.18 GPS antenna

21.2.18.1 Introduction

In order to receive GPS signals from the satellites orbiting the earth a GPS antenna
with applicable cable must be used.

21.2.18.2 Design

The antenna with a console for mounting on a horizontal or vertical flat surface or
on an antenna mast. See figure 453

1038
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

1 6

4 7

xx04000155.vsd
IEC04000155 V2 EN

Figure 453: Antenna with console

where:
1 GPS antenna
2 TNC connector
3 Console, 78x150 mm
4 Mounting holes 5.5 mm
5 Tab for securing of antenna cable
6 Vertical mounting position
7 Horizontal mounting position

Antenna cable
Use a 50 ohm coaxial cable with a male TNC connector in the antenna end and a
male SMA connector in the receiver end to connect the antenna to GTM. Choose
cable type and length so that the total attenuation is max. 26 dB at 1.6 GHz.

Make sure that the antenna cable is not charged when connected to
the antenna or to the receiver. Short-circuit the end of the antenna
cable with some metal device, when first connected to the antenna.
When the antenna is connected to the cable, connect the cable to the
receiver. REx670 must be switched off when the antenna cable is
connected.

1039
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

21.2.18.3 Technical data

Table 875: GPS Antenna and cable
Function Value
Max antenna cable attenuation 26 db @ 1.6 GHz
Antenna cable impedance 50 ohm
Lightning protection Must be provided externally
Antenna cable connector SMA in receiver end
TNC in antenna end
Accuracy +/-1s

21.2.19 IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B

21.2.19.1 Introduction

The IRIG-B time synchronizing module is used for accurate time synchronizing of
the IED from a station clock.

The Pulse Per Second (PPS) input shall be used for synchronizing when IEC
61850-9-2LE is used.

Electrical (BNC) and optical connection (ST) for 0XX and 12X IRIG-B support.

21.2.19.2 Design

The IRIG-B module have two inputs. One input is for the IRIG-B that can handle
both a pulse-width modulated signal (also called unmodulated) and an amplitude
modulated signal (also called sine wave modulated). The other is an optical input
type ST for PPS to synchronize the time between several protections.

1040
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

ST

Y2

A1
T

IEC06000304=1=en=Original.ai
IEC06000304 V2 EN

Figure 454: IRIG-B PC-MIP board with top left ST connector for PPS 820 nm
multimode fibre optic signal input and lower left BNC connector for
IRIG-B signal input

21.2.19.3 Settings
Table 876: IRIG-B Non group settings (basic)
Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description
SynchType BNC - - Opto Type of synchronization
Opto
TimeDomain LocalTime - - LocalTime Time domain
UTC
Encoding IRIG-B - - IRIG-B Type of encoding
1344
1344TZ
TimeZoneAs1344 MinusTZ - - PlusTZ Time zone as in 1344 standard
PlusTZ

21.2.19.4 Technical data

Table 877: IRIG-B
Quantity Rated value
Number of channels IRIG-B 1
Number of channels PPS 1
Electrical connector:
Electrical connector IRIG-B BNC
Pulse-width modulated 5 Vpp
Amplitude modulated
low level 1-3 Vpp
high level 3 x low level, max 9 Vpp
Table continues on next page

1041
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

Quantity Rated value

Supported formats IRIG-B 00x, IRIG-B 12x
Accuracy +/-10s for IRIG-B 00x and +/-100s for IRIG-B 12x
Input impedance 100 k ohm
Optical connector:
Optical connector PPS and IRIG-B Type ST
Type of fibre 62.5/125 m multimode fibre
Supported formats IRIG-B 00x, PPS
Accuracy +/- 1s

21.3 Dimensions

21.3.1 Case without rear cover

A
D

B C

IEC08000164-2-en.vsd
IEC08000164 V2 EN

Figure 455: Case without rear cover

1042
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

K
F

G
H J

xx08000166.vsd

IEC08000166 V1 EN

Figure 456: Case without rear cover with 19 rack mounting kit

Case size (mm) A B C D E F G H J K

6U, 1/2 x 19 265.9 223.7 201.1 252.9 205.7 190.5 203.7 - 187.6 -
6U, 3/4 x 19 265.9 336.0 201.1 252.9 318.0 190.5 316.0 - 187.6 -
6U, 1/1 x 19 265.9 448.3 201.1 252.9 430.3 190.5 428.3 465.1 187.6 482.6
The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit

1043
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

21.3.2 Case with rear cover

A
D

B
C

IEC08000163-2-en.vsd
IEC08000163 V2 EN

Figure 457: Case with rear cover

1044
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

K
F

G
J
H
xx08000165.vsd

IEC08000165 V1 EN

Figure 458: Case with rear cover and 19 rack mounting kit

IEC05000503-2-en.vsd
IEC05000503 V2 EN

Figure 459: Rear cover case with details

Case size (mm) A B C D E F G H J K

6U, 1/2 x 19 265.9 223.7 242.1 255.8 205.7 190.5 203.7 - 228.6 -
6U, 3/4 x 19 265.9 336.0 242.1 255.8 318.0 190.5 316.0 - 228.6 -
6U, 1/1 x 19 265.9 448.3 242.1 255.8 430.3 190.5 428.3 465.1 228.6 482.6
The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit.

1045
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

21.3.3 Flush mounting dimensions

A C
B

E
D

IEC08000162-2-en.vsd
IEC08000162 V2 EN

Figure 460: Flush mounting

Cut-out dimensions (mm)

Case size
Tolerance A B C D
+/-1 +/-1
6U, 1/2 x 19" 210.1 254.3 4.0-10.0 12.5
6U, 3/4 x 19" 322.4 254.3 4.0-10.0 12.5
6U, 1/1 x 19" 434.7 254.3 4.0-10.0 12.5
E = 188.6 mm without rear protection cover, 229.6 mm with rear protection cover

1046
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

21.3.4 Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions

IEC06000182-2-en.vsd
IEC06000182 V2 EN

Figure 461: A 1/2 x 19 size 670 series IED side-by-side with RHGS6.

G
D
B
E

F
C
xx05000505.vsd

IEC05000505 V1 EN

Figure 462: Panel-cut out dimensions for side-by-side flush mounting

Case size (mm) A B C D E F G

Tolerance 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
6U, 1/2 x 19 214.0 259.3 240.4 190.5 34.4 13.2 6.4 diam
6U, 3/4 x 19 326.4 259.3 352.8 190.5 34.4 13.2 6.4 diam
6U, 1/1 x 19 438.7 259.3 465.1 190.5 34.4 13.2 6.4 diam

1047
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

21.3.5 Wall mounting dimensions

IEC04000471-2-en.vsd
IEC04000471 V2 EN

Figure 463: Wall mounting

Case size (mm) A B C D E

6U, 1/2 x 19 292.0 267.1 272.8 390.0 243.0
6U, 3/4 x 19 404.3 379.4 272.8 390.0 243.0
6U, 1/1 x 19 516.0 491.1 272.8 390.0 243.0

21.3.6 External resistor unit for high impedance differential

protection

WARNING! - USE EXTREME CAUTION!Dangerously high

voltages might be present on this equipment, especially on the plate
with resistors. Do any maintenance ONLY if the primary object
protected with this equipment is de-energized. If required by
national law/standard enclose the plate with resistors with a
protective cover or in a separate box!

1048
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

[1.48]
[6.97]

[4.02]
[0.33] [18.31] [0.79] [7.68]
[18.98]

Dimension
mm [inches] xx06000232.eps

IEC06000232 V2 EN

Figure 464: Dimension drawing of a one phase impedance resistor unit

[1.50]
[10.47]

[7.50]

[0.33] [18.31] [0.79] [7.68]

[18.98]

en06000234.eps
[inches]

IEC06000234 V2 EN

Figure 465: Dimension drawing of a three phase high impedance resistor unit

1049
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

21.4 Mounting alternatives

21.4.1 Flush mounting

21.4.1.1 Overview

The flush mounting kit are utilized for case sizes:

1/2 x 19
3/4 x 19
1/1 x 19
1/4 x 19 (RHGS6 6U)

Only a single case can be mounted in each cut-out on the cubicle panel, for class
IP54 protection.

Flush mounting cannot be used for side-by-side mounted IEDs

when IP54 class must be fulfilled. Only IP20 class can be obtained
when mounting two cases side-by-side in one (1) cut-out.

To obtain IP54 class protection, an additional factory mounted

sealing must be ordered when ordering the IED.

1050
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

21.4.1.2 Mounting procedure for flush mounting

IEC08000161-2-en.vsd
IEC08000161 V2 EN

Figure 466: Flush mounting details.

PosNo Description Quantity Type

1 Sealing strip, used to obtain IP54 class. The sealing strip is factory - -
mounted between the case and front plate.
2 Fastener 4 -
3 Groove - -
4 Screw, self tapping 4 2.9x9.5 mm
5 Joining point of sealing strip - -
6 Panel - -

1051
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

21.4.2 19 panel rack mounting

21.4.2.1 Overview

All IED sizes can be mounted in a standard 19 cubicle rack by using the for each
size suited mounting kit which consists of two mounting angles and fastening
screws for the angles.

The mounting angles are reversible which enables mounting of IED size 1/2 x 19
or 3/4 x 19 either to the left or right side of the cubicle.

Please note that the separately ordered rack mounting kit for side-by-
side mounted IEDs, or IEDs together with RHGS cases, is to be
selected so that the total size equals 19.

When mounting the mounting angles, be sure to use screws that

follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other
dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.

1052
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

21.4.2.2 Mounting procedure for 19 panel rack mounting

1a

1b

IEC08000160-2-en.vsd
IEC08000160 V2 EN

Figure 467: 19 panel rack mounting details

Pos Description Quantity Type

1a, 1b Mounting angles, which can be mounted, either to 2 -
the left or right side of the case.
2 Screw 8 M4x6

21.4.3 Wall mounting

21.4.3.1 Overview

All case sizes, 1/2 x 19, 3/4 x 19,1/1 x 19, can be wall mounted. It is also
possible to mount the IED on a panel or in a cubicle.

1053
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

When mounting the side plates, be sure to use screws that follows
the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions
than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.

If fiber cables are bent too much, the signal can be weakened. Wall
mounting is therefore not recommended for any communication
modules with fiber connection.

21.4.3.2 Mounting procedure for wall mounting

IEC13000266-1-en.vsd
DOCUMENT127716-IMG2265 V3 EN

Figure 468: Wall mounting details.

PosNo Description Quantity Type

1 Bushing 4 -
2 Screw 8 M4x10
3 Screw 4 M6x12 or
corresponding
Table continues on next page

1054
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

4 Mounting bar 2 -

5 Screw 6 M5x8
6 Side plate 2 -

21.4.3.3 How to reach the rear side of the IED

The IED can be equipped with a rear protection cover, which is recommended to
use with this type of mounting. See figure 469.

To reach the rear side of the IED, a free space of 80 mmis required on the unhinged
side.

3
1

80 mm 2

IEC06000135-2-en.vsd
IEC06000135 V3 EN

Figure 469: How to reach the connectors on the rear side of the IED.

PosNo Description Type

1 Screw M4x10
2 Screw M5x8
3 Rear protection cover (Ordered separately)

21.4.4 Side-by-side 19 rack mounting

21.4.4.1 Overview

IED case sizes, 1/2 x 19 or 3/4 x 19 and RHGS cases, can be mounted side-by-
side up to a maximum size of 19. For side-by-side rack mounting, the side-by-side
mounting kit together with the 19 rack panel mounting kit must be used. The
mounting kit has to be ordered separately.

1055
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to use
screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws
with other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs
inside the IED.

21.4.4.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting

2
1

IEC04000456-2-en.vsd
IEC04000456 V2 EN

Figure 470: Side-by-side rack mounting details.

PosNo Description Quantity Type

1 Mounting plate 2 -
2, 3 Screw 16 M4x6
4 Mounting angle 2 -

21.4.4.3 IED in the 670 series mounted with a RHGS6 case

An 1/2 x 19 or 3/4 x 19 size IED can be mounted with a RHGS (6 or 12

depending on IED size) case. The RHGS case can be used for mounting a test
switch of type RTXP 24. It also has enough space for a terminal base of RX 2 type
for mounting of, for example, a DC-switch or two trip IEDs.

1056
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

1 2 1 2

1 1 1 1

2 2 2 2

3 3 3 3

4 4 4 4

5 5 5 5

6 6 6 6

7 7 7 7

8 8 8 8

IEC06000180-2-en.vsd
IEC06000180 V2 EN

Figure 471: IED in the 670 series (1/2 x 19) mounted with a RHGS6 case
containing a test switch module equipped with only a test switch
and a RX2 terminal base

21.4.5 Side-by-side flush mounting

21.4.5.1 Overview

It is not recommended to flush mount side by side mounted cases if IP54 is

required. If your application demands side-by-side flush mounting, the side-by-side
mounting details kit and the 19 panel rack mounting kit must be used. The
mounting kit has to be ordered separately. The maximum size of the panel cut out
is 19.

With side-by-side flush mounting installation, only IP class 20 is

obtained. To reach IP class 54, it is recommended to mount the
IEDs separately. For cut out dimensions of separately mounted
IEDs, see section "Flush mounting".

When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to use
screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws
with other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs
inside the IED.

1057
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

Please contact factory for special add on plates for mounting FT

switches on the side (for 1/2 19" case) or bottom of the relay.

21.4.5.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting

1 2

IEC06000181-2-en.vsd
IEC06000181 V2 EN

Figure 472: Side-by-side flush mounting details (RHGS6 side-by-side with 1/2 x
19 IED).

PosNo Description Quantity Type

1 Mounting plate 2 -
2, 3 Screw 16 M4x6
4 Mounting angle 2 -

21.5 Technical data

21.5.1 Enclosure
Table 878: Case
Material Steel sheet
Front plate Steel sheet profile with cut-out for HMI
Surface treatment Aluzink preplated steel
Finish Light grey (RAL 7035)

1058
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

Table 879: Water and dust protection level according to IEC 60529

Front IP40 (IP54 with sealing strip)

Sides, top and bottom IP20
Rear side IP20 with screw compression type
IP10 with ring lug terminals

Table 880: Weight

Case size Weight
6U, 1/2 x 19 10 kg
6U, 3/4 x 19 15 kg
6U, 1/1 x 19 18 kg

21.5.2 Connection system

Table 881: CT and VT circuit connectors
Connector type Rated voltage and current Maximum conductor area
Screw compression type 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)
2 x 2.5 mm2 (2 x AWG14)
Terminal blocks suitable for 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)
ring lug terminals

Table 882: Binary I/O connection system

Connector type Rated voltage Maximum conductor area
Screw compression type 250 V AC 2.5 mm2 (AWG14)
2 1 mm2 (2 x AWG18)
Terminal blocks suitable for 300 V AC 3 mm2 (AWG14)
ring lug terminals

Because of limitations of space, when ring lug terminal is ordered

for Binary I/O connections, one blank slot is necessary between two
adjacent IO cards. Please refer to the ordering particulars for details.

21.5.3 Influencing factors

Table 883: Temperature and humidity influence
Parameter Reference value Nominal range Influence
Ambient temperature, +20 C -10 C to +55 C 0.02% /C
operate value
Relative humidity 10%-90% 10%-90% -
Operative range 0%-95%
Storage temperature -40 C to +85 C - -

1059
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

Table 884: Auxiliary DC supply voltage influence on functionality during operation

Dependence on Reference value Within nominal range Influence
Ripple, in DC auxiliary voltage max. 2% 15% of EL 0.01% /%
Operative range Full wave rectified
Auxiliary voltage dependence, operate 20% of EL 0.01% /%
value
Interrupted auxiliary DC voltage 24-60 V DC 20%

90-250 V DC 20%
Interruption
interval
050 ms No restart
0 s Correct
behaviour at
power down
Restart time <300 s

Table 885: Frequency influence (reference standard: IEC 602551)

Dependence on Within nominal range Influence
Frequency dependence, fr 2.5 Hz for 50 Hz 1.0% / Hz
operate value fr 3.0 Hz for 60 Hz

Harmonic frequency 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr 2.0%

dependence (20%
content)
Harmonic frequency 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr 5.0%
dependence for high
impedance differential
protection (10% content)

21.5.4 Type tests according to standard

Table 886: Electromagnetic compatibility
Test
1 MHz burst disturbance
100 kHz slow damped
oscillatory wave immunity
test
Ring wave immunity test,
100 kHz
Surge withstand capability
test
Electrostatic discharge
Direct application
Indirect application
Electrostatic discharge
Direct application
Indirect application
Fast transient disturbance
Table continues on next page
Type test values
2.5 kV
2.5 kV
2-4 kV
2.5 kV, oscillatory
4.0 kV, fast transient
15 kV air discharge
8 kV contact discharge
8 kV contact discharge
15 kV air discharge
8 kV contact discharge
8 kV contact discharge
4 kV
Reference standards
IEC 60255-26
IEC 61000-4-18, Class III
IEC 61000-4-12, Class IV
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
IEC 60255-26
IEC 61000-4-2, Class IV
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
IEC 60255-26, Zone A

1060
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 21
IED hardware

Test Type test values Reference standards

Surge immunity test 2-4 kV, 1.2/50 ms IEC 60255-26, Zone A
high energy
Power frequency immunity 150-300 V, 50 Hz IEC 60255-26, Zone A
test
Conducted common mode 15 Hz-150 kHz IEC 61000-4-16, Class IV
immunity test
Power frequency magnetic 1000 A/m, 3 s IEC 61000-4-8, Class V
field test 100 A/m, cont.
Pulse magnetic field 1000 A/m IEC 6100049, Class V
immunity test
Damped oscillatory magnetic 100 A/m IEC 61000-4-10, Class V
field test
Radiated electromagnetic 20 V/m, 80-1000 MHz IEC 60255-26
field disturbance
1.4-2.7 GHz
Radiated electromagnetic 20 V/m IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2
field disturbance 80-1000 MHz
Conducted electromagnetic 10 V, 0.15-80 MHz IEC 60255-26
field disturbance
Radiated emission 30-5000 MHz IEC 60255-26
Radiated emission 30-5000 MHz IEEE/ANSI C63.4, FCC
Conducted emission 0.15-30 MHz IEC 60255-26

Table 887: Insulation

Test Type test values Reference standard
Dielectric test 2.0 kV AC, 1 min. IEC 60255-27
Impulse voltage test 5 kV, 1.2/50 ms, 0.5 J
Insulation resistance >100 MW at 500 VDC

Table 888: Environmental tests

Test Type test value Reference standard
Cold operation test Test Ad for 16 h at -25C IEC 60068-2-1
Cold storage test Test Ad for 16 h at -40C IEC 60068-2-1
Dry heat operation test Test Bd for 16 h at +70C IEC 60068-2-2
Dry heat storage test Test Bd for 16 h at +85C IEC 60068-2-2
Change of temperature test Test Nb for 5 cycles at -25C IEC 60068-2-14
to +85C
Damp heat test, steady state Test Ca for 10 days at +40 IEC 60068-2-78
C and humidity 93%
Damp heat test, cyclic Test Db for 6 cycles at +25 IEC 60068-2-30
to +55 C and humidity 93 to
95% (1 cycle = 24 hours)

1061
Technical Manual
Section 21 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED hardware

Table 889: CE compliance

Test According to
Immunity EN 6025526
Emissivity EN 6025526
Low voltage directive EN 6025527

Table 890: Mechanical tests

Test Type test values Reference standards
Vibration response test Class II IEC 60255-21-1
Vibration endurance test Class I IEC 60255-21-1
Shock response test Class I IEC 60255-21-2
Shock withstand test Class I IEC 60255-21-2
Bump test Class I IEC 60255-21-2
Seismic test Class II IEC 60255-21-3

1062
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 22
Labels

Section 22 Labels

22.1 Labels on IED

Front view of IED

2
3

6
6 5
7
xx06000574.ep
IEC06000574 V1 EN

1063
Technical Manual
Section 22 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Labels

1 Product type, description and serial number

2 Order number, dc supply voltage and rated
frequency
3 Optional, customer specific information
4 Manufacturer
5 Transformer input module, rated currents
and voltages
6 Transformer designations

IEC06000577-CUSTOMER-SPECIFIC V1 EN

7 Ordering and serial number

IEC06000576-POS-NO V1 EN

1064
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 22
Labels

Rear view of IED

4
en06000573.ep
IEC06000573 V1 EN

1 Warning label
2 Caution label
3 Class 1 laser product label

IEC06000575 V1 EN

4 Warning label

1065
Technical Manual
1066
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 23
Connection diagrams

Section 23 Connection diagrams

The connection diagrams are delivered on the IED Connectivity package DVD as
part of the product delivery.

The latest versions of the connection diagrams can be downloaded from

http://www.abb.com/substationautomation.

Connection diagrams for Customized products

Connection diagram, 670 series 2.0 1MRK002801-AE

Connection diagrams for Configured products

Connection diagram, REC670 2.0, A30 1MRK002803-CA

Connection diagram, REC670 2.0, A31 1MRK002803-CD

Connection diagram, REC670 2.0, B30 1MRK002803-CB

Connection diagram, REC670 2.0, C30 1MRK002803-CC

1067
Technical Manual
1068
1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Section 24 IED and functionality tests
Table 891: Electromagnetic compatibility
Test
1 MHz burst disturbance
100 kHz slow damped
oscillatory wave immunity
test
Ring wave immunity test,
100 kHz
Surge withstand capability
test
Electrostatic discharge
Direct application
Indirect application
Electrostatic discharge
Direct application
Indirect application
Fast transient disturbance
Surge immunity test
Power frequency immunity
test
Conducted common mode
immunity test
Power frequency magnetic
field test
Pulse magnetic field
immunity test
Damped oscillatory magnetic
field test
Radiated electromagnetic
field disturbance
Radiated electromagnetic
field disturbance
Conducted electromagnetic
field disturbance
Radiated emission
Radiated emission
Conducted emission
Technical Manual
Section 24
IED and functionality tests
Type test values Reference standards
2.5 kV IEC 60255-26
2.5 kV IEC 61000-4-18, Class III
2-4 kV IEC 61000-4-12, Class IV
2.5 kV, oscillatory IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
4.0 kV, fast transient
15 kV air discharge IEC 60255-26
8 kV contact discharge
8 kV contact discharge IEC 61000-4-2, Class IV
15 kV air discharge IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
8 kV contact discharge
8 kV contact discharge
4 kV IEC 60255-26, Zone A
2-4 kV, 1.2/50 ms IEC 60255-26, Zone A
high energy
150-300 V, 50 Hz IEC 60255-26, Zone A
15 Hz-150 kHz IEC 61000-4-16, Class IV
1000 A/m, 3 s IEC 61000-4-8, Class V
100 A/m, cont.
1000 A/m IEC 6100049, Class V
100 A/m IEC 61000-4-10, Class V
20 V/m, 80-1000 MHz IEC 60255-26
1.4-2.7 GHz
20 V/m IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2
80-1000 MHz
10 V, 0.15-80 MHz IEC 60255-26
30-5000 MHz IEC 60255-26
30-5000 MHz IEEE/ANSI C63.4, FCC
0.15-30 MHz IEC 60255-26
1069
Section 24 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
IED and functionality tests

Table 892: Insulation

Test Type test values Reference standard
Dielectric test 2.0 kV AC, 1 min. IEC 60255-27
Impulse voltage test 5 kV, 1.2/50 ms, 0.5 J
Insulation resistance >100 MW at 500 VDC

Table 893: Environmental tests

Test Type test value Reference standard
Cold operation test Test Ad for 16 h at -25C IEC 60068-2-1
Cold storage test Test Ad for 16 h at -40C IEC 60068-2-1
Dry heat operation test Test Bd for 16 h at +70C IEC 60068-2-2
Dry heat storage test Test Bd for 16 h at +85C IEC 60068-2-2
Change of temperature test Test Nb for 5 cycles at -25C IEC 60068-2-14
to +85C
Damp heat test, steady state Test Ca for 10 days at +40 IEC 60068-2-78
C and humidity 93%
Damp heat test, cyclic Test Db for 6 cycles at +25 IEC 60068-2-30
to +55 C and humidity 93 to
95% (1 cycle = 24 hours)

Table 894: CE compliance

Test According to
Immunity EN 6025526
Emissivity EN 6025526
Low voltage directive EN 6025527

Table 895: Mechanical tests

Test Type test values Reference standards
Vibration response test Class II IEC 60255-21-1
Vibration endurance test Class I IEC 60255-21-1
Shock response test Class I IEC 60255-21-2
Shock withstand test Class I IEC 60255-21-2
Bump test Class I IEC 60255-21-2
Seismic test Class II IEC 60255-21-3

1070
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

Section 25 Inverse time characteristics

25.1 Application

In order to assure time selectivity between different overcurrent protections at

different points in the network different time delays for the different protections are
normally used. The simplest way to do this is to use definite time-lag. In more
sophisticated applications current dependent time characteristics are used. Both
alternatives are shown in a simple application with three overcurrent protections
operating in series.

I> I> I>

xx05000129.vsd
IEC05000129 V1 EN

Figure 473: Three overcurrent protections operating in series

Stage 3

Time
Stage 2 Stage 2

Stage 1 Stage 1 Stage 1

Fault point
position

en05000130.vsd

IEC05000130 V1 EN

Figure 474: Definite time overcurrent characteristics

1071
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

Time

Fault point
position

en05000131.vsd

IEC05000131 V1 EN

Figure 475: Inverse time overcurrent characteristics with inst. function

The inverse time characteristic makes it possible to minimize the fault clearance
time and still assure the selectivity between protections.

To assure selectivity between protections there must be a time margin between the
operation time of the protections. This required time margin is dependent of
following factors, in a simple case with two protections in series:

Difference between pickup time of the protections to be co-ordinated

Opening time of the breaker closest to the studied fault
Reset times of the protections
Margin dependent of the time delay inaccuracy of the protections

Assume we have the following network case.

1072
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

A1 B1
Feeder

I> I>

Time axis

t=0 t=t1 t=t2 t=t3

en05000132.vsd

IEC05000132 V1 EN

Figure 476: Selectivity steps for a fault on feeder B1

where:
t=0 is The fault occurs
t=t1 is Protection B1 trips

t=t2 is Breaker at B1 opens

t=t3 is Protection A1 resets

In the case protection B1 shall operate without any intentional delay

(instantaneous). When the fault occurs the protections start to detect the fault
current. After the time t1 the protection B1 send a trip signal to the circuit breaker.
The protection A1 starts its delay timer at the same time, with some deviation in
time due to differences between the two protections. There is a possibility that A1
will start before the trip is sent to the B1 circuit breaker. At the time t2 the circuit
breaker B1 has opened its primary contacts and thus the fault current is interrupted.
The breaker time (t2 - t1) can differ between different faults. The maximum
opening time can be given from manuals and test protocols. Still at t2 the timer of
protection A1 is active. At time t3 the protection A1 is reset, that is the timer is stopped.

In most applications it is required that the times shall reset as fast as possible when
the current fed to the protection drops below the set current level, the reset time
shall be minimized. In some applications it is however beneficial to have some type
of delayed reset time of the overcurrent function. This can be the case in the
following applications:

1073
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

If there is a risk of intermittent faults. If the current IED, close to the faults,
starts and resets there is a risk of unselective trip from other protections in the
system.
Delayed resetting could give accelerated fault clearance in case of automatic
reclosing to a permanent fault.
Overcurrent protection functions are sometimes used as release criterion for
other protection functions. It can often be valuable to have a reset delay to
assure the release function.

25.2 Principle of operation

25.2.1 Mode of operation

The function can operate in a definite time-lag mode or in a current definite inverse
time mode. For the inverse time characteristic both ANSI and IEC based standard
curves are available. Also programmable curve types are supported via the
component inputs: p, A, B, C pr, tr, and cr.

Different characteristics for reset delay can also be chosen.

If current in any phase exceeds the set start current value (here internal signal
startValue), a timer, according to the selected operating mode, is started. The
component always uses the maximum of the three phase current values as the
current level used in timing calculations.

In case of definite time-lag mode the timer will run constantly until the time is
reached or until the current drops below the reset value (start value minus the
hysteresis) and the reset time has elapsed.

For definite time delay curve ANSI/IEEE Definite time or IEC Definite time are
chosen.

The general expression for inverse time curves is according to equation 113.

A

t[ s ] = + B k
i p
-C
in >
EQUATION1189 V1 EN (Equation 113)

where:
p, A, B, C are constants defined for each curve type,
in> is the set start current for step n,
k is set time multiplier for step n and
i is the measured current.

1074
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

For inverse time characteristics a time will be initiated when the current reaches the
set start level. From the general expression of the characteristic the following can
be seen:

i p
(top - B k ) - C = Ak
in >
EQUATION1190 V1 EN (Equation 114)

where:
top is the operating time of the protection

The time elapsed to the moment of trip is reached when the integral fulfils
according to equation 115, in addition to the constant time delay:

t
i p
in > - C dt A k
0
EQUATION1191 V1 EN (Equation 115)

For the numerical protection the sum below must fulfil the equation for trip.

n i( j ) p
Dt - C A k
j =1 in >
EQUATION1192 V1 EN (Equation 116)

where:
j=1 is the first protection execution cycle when a fault has been
detected, that is, when

i
>1
in >
EQUATION1193 V1 EN

Dt is the time interval between two consecutive executions of the

protection algorithm,
n is the number of the execution of the algorithm when the trip
time equation is fulfilled, that is, when a trip is given and
i (j) is the fault current at time j

For inverse time operation, the inverse time characteristic is selectable. Both the
IEC and ANSI/IEEE standardized inverse time characteristics are supported.

For the IEC curves there is also a setting of the minimum time-lag of operation, see
figure 477.

1075
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

Operate
time

tMin

Current
IMin
IEC05000133-3-en.vsd
IEC05000133 V2 EN

Figure 477: Minimum time-lag operation for the IEC curves

In order to fully comply with IEC curves definition setting parameter tMin shall be
set to the value which is equal to the operating time of the selected IEC inverse
time curve for measured current of twenty times the set current start value. Note
that the operating time value is dependent on the selected setting value for time
multiplier k.

In addition to the ANSI and IEC standardized characteristics, there are also two
additional inverse curves available; the RI curve and the RD curve.

The RI inverse time curve emulates the characteristic of the electromechanical

ASEA relay RI. The curve is described by equation 118:

k
t[ s ] =
in >
0.339 - 0.235
i
EQUATION1194 V1 EN (Equation 118)

where:
in> is the set start current for step n
k is set time multiplier for step n
i is the measured current

1076
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

The RD inverse curve gives a logarithmic delay, as used in the Combiflex

protection RXIDG. The curve enables a high degree of selectivity required for
sensitive residual earth-fault current protection, with ability to detect high-resistive
earth faults. The curve is described by equation 119:

i
t[ s ] = 5.8 - 1.35 ln
k in >
EQUATION1195 V1 EN (Equation 119)

where:
in> is the set start current for step n,
k is set time multiplier for step n and
i is the measured current

If the curve type programmable is chosen, the user can make a tailor made inverse
time curve according to the general equation 120.

A

t[ s ] = + Bk
i p
-C
in >
EQUATION1196 V1 EN (Equation 120)

Also the reset time of the delayed function can be controlled. There is the
possibility to choose between three different reset time-lags.
Instantaneous Reset
IEC Reset
ANSI Reset.

If instantaneous reset is chosen the timer will be reset directly when the current
drops below the set start current level minus the hysteresis.

If IEC reset is chosen the timer will be reset after a set constant time when the
current drops below the set start current level minus the hysteresis.

If ANSI reset time is chosen the reset time will be dependent of the current after
fault clearance (when the current drops below the start current level minus the
hysteresis). The timer will reset according to equation 121.

1077
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

tr
t [s] = k
i
2

-1
in >
EQUATION1197 V2 EN (Equation 121)

where:
The set value tr is the reset time in case of zero current after fault clearance.

The possibility of choice of reset characteristics is to some extent dependent of the

choice of time delay characteristic.

For the definite time delay characteristics the possible reset time settings are
instantaneous and IEC constant time reset.

For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time
characteristics are available; instantaneous, IEC constant time reset and ANSI
current dependent reset time.

For IEC inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are
instantaneous and IEC set constant time reset).

For the programmable inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset
time characteristics are available; instantaneous, IEC constant time reset and ANSI
current dependent reset time. If the current dependent type is used settings pr, tr
and cr must be given, see equation 122:

tr
t [s] = k
i
pr

- cr
in >
EQUATION1198 V2 EN (Equation 122)

For RI and RD inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings
are instantaneous and IEC constant time reset.

When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the

operate time of the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay
and the set definite time delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay
is required, it is of utmost importance to set the definite time delay
for that stage to zero.

1078
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

25.3 Inverse characteristics

Table 896: ANSI Inverse time characteristics

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
2.0% or 40 ms

A
whichever is greater
t= + B k + tDef
(
I P - 1
)

EQUATION1249-SMALL V2 EN

Reset characteristic:

tr
t = k
(I 2
-1 )
EQUATION1250-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 ,

tr=29.1
ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 ,
tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02,
tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02,
tr=4.85
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0,
tr=30
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0,
tr=13.46
ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02,
tr=4.6

1079
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

Table 897: IEC Inverse time characteristics

Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151, 2.0%
or 40 ms whichever is
A greater
t = P k
( I - 1)

EQUATION1251-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0
Programmable characteristic k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01
Operate characteristic: A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of
0.001
A B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
t = P + B k C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
(I - C ) P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of

0.001
EQUATION1370-SMALL V1 EN
TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps
Reset characteristic: of 0.001
CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
TR PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of
t = k 0.001
(I PR
- CR )
EQUATION1253-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

Table 898: RI and RD type inverse time characteristics

Function Range or value Accuracy
RI type inverse characteristic k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151, 2.0%
or 40 ms whichever is
1 greater
t = k
0.236
0.339 -
I
EQUATION1137-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

RD type logarithmic inverse characteristic k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

I
t = 5.8 - 1.35 In
k
EQUATION1138-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

1080
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

Table 899: ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Line Differential Protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
5.0% or 40 ms

A
whichever is greater
t= + B k + tDef
(
I P - 1
)

EQUATION1249-SMALL V2 EN

Reset characteristic:

tr
t = k
(I 2
-1 )
EQUATION1250-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 ,

tr=29.1
ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 ,
tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02,
tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02,
tr=4.85
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0,
tr=30
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0,
tr=13.46
ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02,
tr=4.6

1081
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

Table 900: IEC Inverse time characteristics for Line Differential protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151, 5.0%
or 40 ms whichever is
A greater
t = P k
( I - 1)

EQUATION1251-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0
Programmable characteristic k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01
Operate characteristic: A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of
0.001
A B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
t = P + B k C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
(I - C ) P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of

0.001
EQUATION1370-SMALL V1 EN
TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps
Reset characteristic: of 0.001
CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
TR PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of
t = k 0.001
(I PR
- CR )
EQUATION1253-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

The parameter setting Characterist1 and 4/Reserved shall not be

used, since this parameter setting is for future use and not
implemented yet.

1082
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

Table 901: RI and RD type inverse time characteristics for Line Differential protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
RI type inverse characteristic k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151, 5.0%
or 40 ms whichever is
1 greater
t = k
0.236
0.339 -
I
EQUATION1137-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

RD type logarithmic inverse characteristic k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

I
t = 5.8 - 1.35 In
k
EQUATION1138-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

Table 902: ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and
power protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: k = (0.10-2.00) in steps of 0.01 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
10.0% or 180 ms

A
whichever is greater
t= + B k + tDef
(
I P - 1 )

EQUATION1249-SMALL V2 EN

Reset characteristic:

tr
t = k
(I 2
-1 )
EQUATION1250-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 ,

tr=29.1
ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 ,
tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02,
tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02,
tr=4.85
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0,
tr=30
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0,
tr=13.46
ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02,
tr=4.6

1083
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

Table 903: IEC Inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and
power protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: k = (0.10-2.00) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151,
10.0% or 180 ms
A whichever is greater
t = P k
( I - 1)

EQUATION1251-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0
Programmable characteristic k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01
Operate characteristic: A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of
0.001
A B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
t = P + B k C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
(I - C ) P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of

0.001
EQUATION1370-SMALL V1 EN
TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps
Reset characteristic: of 0.001
CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
TR PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of
t = k 0.001
(I PR
- CR )
EQUATION1253-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

The parameter setting Characterist1 and 4/Reserved shall not be

used, since this parameter setting is for future use and not
implemented yet.

1084
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

Table 904: RI and RD type inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual
overcurrent and power protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
RI type inverse characteristic k = (0.10-2.00) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151,
10.0% or 180 ms
1 whichever is greater
t = k
0.236
0.339 -
I
EQUATION1137-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

RD type logarithmic inverse characteristic k = (0.1-999) in steps of 0.01

I
t = 5.8 - 1.35 In
k
EQUATION1138-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

Table 905: ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: 0.10 k 3.00 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
5.0% or 40 ms

A
whichever is greater
t= + B k + tDef
(
I P - 1 )

EQUATION1249-SMALL V2 EN

Reset characteristic:

tr
t = k
(I 2
-1 )
EQUATION1250-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 ,

tr=29.1
ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 ,
tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02,
tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02,
tr=4.85
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0,
tr=30
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0,
tr=13.46
ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02,
tr=4.6

1085
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

Table 906: IEC Inverse time characteristics for Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic: 0.10 k 3.00 IEC 60255-151, 5.0%
or 40 ms whichever is
A greater
t = P k
( I - 1)

EQUATION1251-SMALL V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0

Table 907: Inverse time characteristics for overvoltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy
Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in 5.0% or 45 ms
steps of 0.01 whichever is greater
k
t =
U -U >

U >
EQUATION1436-SMALL V1 EN

U> = Uset
U = Umeasured

Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in

steps of 0.01
k 480
t =
2.0
32 U - U > - 0.5
- 0.035
U >
EQUATION1437-SMALL V1 EN

Type C curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in

steps of 0.01
k 480
t =
3.0
32 U - U > - 0.5
- 0.035
U >
EQUATION1438-SMALL V1 EN

Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in

steps of 0.01
kA A = (0.005-200.000)
t = +D in steps of 0.001
P
B U - U > B = (0.50-100.00) in
-C
steps of 0.01
U >
EQUATION1439-SMALL V1 EN
C = (0.0-1.0) in steps
of 0.1
D = (0.000-60.000) in
steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in
steps of 0.001

1086
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

Table 908: Inverse time characteristics for undervoltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy
Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in 5.0% or 45 ms
steps of 0.01 whichever is greater
k
t =
U < -U


U<
EQUATION1431-SMALL V1 EN

U< = Uset
U = Umeasured

Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in

steps of 0.01
k 480
t = + 0.055
2.0
32 U < -U - 0.5

U <
EQUATION1432-SMALL V1 EN

U< = Uset
U = Umeasured

Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in

steps of 0.01
A = (0.005-200.000)
in steps of 0.001
kA B = (0.50-100.00) in
t = +D
U < -U P
steps of 0.01

B -C C = (0.0-1.0) in
U < steps of 0.1
EQUATION1433-SMALL V1 EN
D = (0.000-60.000)
U< = Uset in steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in
U = Umeasured
steps of 0.001

1087
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

Table 909: Inverse time characteristics for residual overvoltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy
Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 5.0% or 45 ms
0.01 whichever is
k greater
t =
U -U >

U>
EQUATION1436-SMALL V1 EN

U> = Uset
U = Umeasured

Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of

0.01
k 480
t =
2.0
32 U - U > - 0.5
- 0.035
U >
EQUATION1437-SMALL V1 EN

Type C curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of

0.01
k 480
t =
3.0
32 U - U > - 0.5
- 0.035
U >
EQUATION1438-SMALL V1 EN

Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of

0.01
kA A = (0.005-200.000) in
t = +D steps of 0.001
P
B U - U > B = (0.50-100.00) in
-C
steps of 0.01
U >
EQUATION1439-SMALL V1 EN
C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of
0.1
D = (0.000-60.000) in
steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in
steps of 0.001

1088
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

A070750 V2 EN

Figure 478: ANSI Extremely inverse time characteristics

1089
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

A070751 V2 EN

Figure 479: ANSI Very inverse time characteristics

1090
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

A070752 V2 EN

Figure 480: ANSI Normal inverse time characteristics

1091
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

A070753 V2 EN

Figure 481: ANSI Moderately inverse time characteristics

1092
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

A070817 V2 EN

Figure 482: ANSI Long time extremely inverse time characteristics

1093
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

A070818 V2 EN

Figure 483: ANSI Long time very inverse time characteristics

1094
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

A070819 V2 EN

Figure 484: ANSI Long time inverse time characteristics

1095
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

A070820 V2 EN

Figure 485: IEC Normal inverse time characteristics

1096
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

A070821 V2 EN

Figure 486: IEC Very inverse time characteristics

1097
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

A070822 V2 EN

Figure 487: IEC Inverse time characteristics

1098
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

A070823 V2 EN

Figure 488: IEC Extremely inverse time characteristics

1099
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

A070824 V2 EN

Figure 489: IEC Short time inverse time characteristics

1100
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

A070825 V2 EN

Figure 490: IEC Long time inverse time characteristics

1101
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

A070826 V2 EN

Figure 491: RI-type inverse time characteristics

1102
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

A070827 V2 EN

Figure 492: RD-type inverse time characteristics

1103
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

GUID-ACF4044C-052E-4CBD-8247-C6ABE3796FA6 V1 EN

Figure 493: Inverse curve A characteristic of overvoltage protection

1104
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

GUID-F5E0E1C2-48C8-4DC7-A84B-174544C09142 V1 EN

Figure 494: Inverse curve B characteristic of overvoltage protection

1105
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

GUID-A9898DB7-90A3-47F2-AEF9-45FF148CB679 V1 EN

Figure 495: Inverse curve C characteristic of overvoltage protection

1106
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 25
Inverse time characteristics

GUID-35F40C3B-B483-40E6-9767-69C1536E3CBC V1 EN

Figure 496: Inverse curve A characteristic of undervoltage protection

1107
Technical Manual
Section 25 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Inverse time characteristics

GUID-B55D0F5F-9265-4D9A-A7C0-E274AA3A6BB1 V1 EN

Figure 497: Inverse curve B characteristic of undervoltage protection

1108
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 26
Glossary

Section 26 Glossary

26.1 Glossary

AC Alternating current
ACC Actual channel
ACT Application configuration tool within PCM600
A/D converter Analog-to-digital converter
ADBS Amplitude deadband supervision
ADM Analog digital conversion module, with time
synchronization
AI Analog input
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AR Autoreclosing
ASCT Auxiliary summation current transformer
ASD Adaptive signal detection
ASDU Application service data unit
AWG American Wire Gauge standard
BBP Busbar protection
BFOC/2,5 Bayonet fibre optic connector
BFP Breaker failure protection
BI Binary input
BIM Binary input module
BOM Binary output module
BOS Binary outputs status
BR External bistable relay
BS British Standards
BSR Binary signal transfer function, receiver blocks
BST Binary signal transfer function, transmit blocks
C37.94 IEEE/ANSI protocol used when sending binary signals
between IEDs
CAN Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for
serial communication

1109
Technical Manual
Section 26 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Glossary

CB Circuit breaker
CBM Combined backplane module
CCITT Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and
Telephony. A United Nations-sponsored standards body
within the International Telecommunications Union.
CCM CAN carrier module
CCVT Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer
Class C Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI
CMPPS Combined megapulses per second
CMT Communication Management tool in PCM600
CO cycle Close-open cycle
Codirectional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves
two twisted pairs making it possible to transmit
information in both directions
COM Command
COMTRADE Standard Common Format for Transient Data Exchange
format for Disturbance recorder according to IEEE/ANSI
C37.111, 1999 / IEC60255-24
Contra-directional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves
four twisted pairs, two of which are used for transmitting
data in both directions and two for transmitting clock signals
COT Cause of transmission
CPU Central processing unit
CR Carrier receive
CRC Cyclic redundancy check
CROB Control relay output block
CS Carrier send
CT Current transformer
CU Communication unit
CVT or CCVT Capacitive voltage transformer
DAR Delayed autoreclosing
DARPA Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US
developer of the TCP/IP protocol etc.)
DBDL Dead bus dead line
DBLL Dead bus live line
DC Direct current
DFC Data flow control

1110
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 26
Glossary

DFT Discrete Fourier transform

DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DIP-switch Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board
DI Digital input
DLLB Dead line live bus
DNP Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE Std 1815-2012
DR Disturbance recorder
DRAM Dynamic random access memory
DRH Disturbance report handler
DSP Digital signal processor
DTT Direct transfer trip scheme
EHV network Extra high voltage network
EIA Electronic Industries Association
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EMF Electromotive force
EMI Electromagnetic interference
EnFP End fault protection
EPA Enhanced performance architecture
ESD Electrostatic discharge
F-SMA Type of optical fibre connector
FAN Fault number
FCB Flow control bit; Frame count bit
FOX 20 Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech,
data and protection signals
FOX 512/515 Access multiplexer
FOX 6Plus Compact time-division multiplexer for the transmission of
up to seven duplex channels of digital data over optical fibers
FUN Function type
G.703 Electrical and functional description for digital lines used
by local telephone companies. Can be transported over
balanced and unbalanced lines
GCM Communication interface module with carrier of GPS
receiver module
GDE Graphical display editor within PCM600
GI General interrogation command
GIS Gas-insulated switchgear

1111
Technical Manual
Section 26 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Glossary

GOOSE Generic object-oriented substation event

GPS Global positioning system
GSAL Generic security application
GTM GPS Time Module
HDLC protocol High-level data link control, protocol based on the HDLC
standard
HFBR connector Plastic fiber connector
type
HMI Human-machine interface
HSAR High speed autoreclosing
HV High-voltage
HVDC High-voltage direct current
IDBS Integrating deadband supervision
IEC International Electrical Committee
IEC 60044-6 IEC Standard, Instrument transformers Part 6:
Requirements for protective current transformers for
transient performance
IEC 60870-5-103 Communication standard for protection equipment. A
serial master/slave protocol for point-to-point
communication
IEC 61850 Substation automation communication standard
IEC 6185081 Communication protocol standard
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IEEE 802.12 A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s
on twisted-pair or optical fiber cable
IEEE P1386.1 PCI Mezzanine Card (PMC) standard for local bus
modules. References the CMC (IEEE P1386, also known
as Common Mezzanine Card) standard for the mechanics
and the PCI specifications from the PCI SIG (Special
Interest Group) for the electrical EMF (Electromotive force).
IEEE 1686 Standard for Substation Intelligent Electronic Devices
(IEDs) Cyber Security Capabilities
IED Intelligent electronic device
I-GIS Intelligent gas-insulated switchgear
IOM Binary input/output module
Instance When several occurrences of the same function are
available in the IED, they are referred to as instances of
that function. One instance of a function is identical to
another of the same kind but has a different number in the

1112
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 26
Glossary

IED user interfaces. The word "instance" is sometimes

defined as an item of information that is representative of a
type. In the same way an instance of a function in the IED
is representative of a type of function.
IP 1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP
protocol suite widely used on Ethernet networks. IP is a
connectionless, best-effort packet-switching protocol. It
provides packet routing, fragmentation and reassembly
through the data link layer.
2. Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529
IP 20 Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level 20
IP 40 Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level 40
IP 54 Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level 54
IRF Internal failure signal
IRIG-B: InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B,
standard 200
ITU International Telecommunications Union
LAN Local area network
LIB 520 High-voltage software module
LCD Liquid crystal display
LDCM Line differential communication module
LDD Local detection device
LED Light-emitting diode
LNT LON network tool
LON Local operating network
MCB Miniature circuit breaker
MCM Mezzanine carrier module
MIM Milli-ampere module
MPM Main processing module
MVAL Value of measurement
MVB Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus
originally developed for use in trains.
NCC National Control Centre
NOF Number of grid faults
NUM Numerical module
OCO cycle Open-close-open cycle
OCP Overcurrent protection

1113
Technical Manual
Section 26 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Glossary

OEM Optical Ethernet module

OLTC On-load tap changer
OTEV Disturbance data recording initiated by other event than start/
pick-up
OV Overvoltage
Overreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a
fault condition. For example, a distance relay is
overreaching when the impedance presented to it is smaller
than the apparent impedance to the fault applied to the
balance point, that is, the set reach. The relay sees the
fault but perhaps it should not have seen it.
PCI Peripheral component interconnect, a local data bus
PCM Pulse code modulation
PCM600 Protection and control IED manager
PC-MIP Mezzanine card standard
PMC PCI Mezzanine card
POR Permissive overreach
POTT Permissive overreach transfer trip
Process bus Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near
proximity to the measured and/or controlled components
PSM Power supply module
PST Parameter setting tool within PCM600
PT ratio Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio
PUTT Permissive underreach transfer trip
RASC Synchrocheck relay, COMBIFLEX
RCA Relay characteristic angle
RISC Reduced instruction set computer
RMS value Root mean square value
RS422 A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital
data in point-to-point connections
RS485 Serial link according to EIA standard RS485
RTC Real-time clock
RTU Remote terminal unit
SA Substation Automation
SBO Select-before-operate
SC Switch or push button to close
SCL Short circuit location

1114
Technical Manual
1MRK 511 311-UEN - Section 26
Glossary

SCS Station control system

SCADA Supervision, control and data acquisition
SCT System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850
SDU Service data unit
SLM Serial communication module.
SMA connector Subminiature version A, A threaded connector with
constant impedance.
SMT Signal matrix tool within PCM600
SMS Station monitoring system
SNTP Simple network time protocol is used to synchronize
computer clocks on local area networks. This reduces the
requirement to have accurate hardware clocks in every
embedded system in a network. Each embedded node can
instead synchronize with a remote clock, providing the
required accuracy.
SOF Status of fault
SPA Strmberg Protection Acquisition (SPA), a serial master/
slave protocol for point-to-point communication
SRY Switch for CB ready condition
ST Switch or push button to trip
Starpoint Neutral point of transformer or generator
SVC Static VAr compensation
TC Trip coil
TCS Trip circuit supervision
TCP Transmission control protocol. The most common
transport layer protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet.
TCP/IP Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The
de facto standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into
4.2BSD Unix. TCP/IP was developed by DARPA for
Internet working and encompasses both network layer and
transport layer protocols. While TCP and IP specify two
protocols at specific protocol layers, TCP/IP is often used
to refer to the entire US Department of Defense protocol
suite based upon these, including Telnet, FTP, UDP and
RDP.
TEF Time delayed earth-fault protection function
TM Transmit (disturbance data)
TNC connector Threaded Neill-Concelman, a threaded constant impedance
version of a BNC connector

1115
Technical Manual
Section 26 1MRK 511 311-UEN -
Glossary

TP Trip (recorded fault)

TPZ, TPY, TPX, Current transformer class according to IEC
TPS
TRM Transformer Module. This module transforms currents and
voltages taken from the process into levels suitable for
further signal processing.
TYP Type identification
UMT User management tool
Underreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a
fault condition. For example, a distance relay is
underreaching when the impedance presented to it is
greater than the apparent impedance to the fault applied to
the balance point, that is, the set reach. The relay does not
see the fault but perhaps it should have seen it. See also
Overreach.
UTC Coordinated Universal Time. A coordinated time scale,
maintained by the Bureau International des Poids et
Mesures (BIPM), which forms the basis of a coordinated
dissemination of standard frequencies and time signals.
UTC is derived from International Atomic Time (TAI) by
the addition of a whole number of "leap seconds" to
synchronize it with Universal Time 1 (UT1), thus allowing
for the eccentricity of the Earth's orbit, the rotational axis
tilt (23.5 degrees), but still showing the Earth's irregular
rotation, on which UT1 is based. The Coordinated
Universal Time is expressed using a 24-hour clock, and
uses the Gregorian calendar. It is used for aeroplane and
ship navigation, where it is also sometimes known by the
military name, "Zulu time." "Zulu" in the phonetic
alphabet stands for "Z", which stands for longitude zero.
UV Undervoltage
WEI Weak end infeed logic
VT Voltage transformer
X.21 A digital signalling interface primarily used for telecom
equipment
3IO Three times zero-sequence current.Often referred to as the
residual or the earth-fault current
3UO Three times the zero sequence voltage. Often referred to as
the residual voltage or the neutral point voltage

1116
Technical Manual
1117
Contact us

1MRK 511 311-UEN - Copyright 2014 ABB. All rights reserved.

ABB AB
Substation Automation Products
SE-721 59 Vsters, Sweden
Phone +46 (0) 21 32 50 00
Fax +46 (0) 21 14 69 18

www.abb.com/substationautomation